Historical Texts Archive
Each link below refers to a scholarly work that discusses the definition, characteristics, and/or implications of empire in a specific region of the world or globally. Researchers with specializations in many historical sub-fields have written these annotated bibliographies, and fellow project investigators have vetted and edited each in a peer-reviewing process. Each of these 300 to 800 word-long bibliographies contains both a summary of the work and an analysis of the books’ scope and argument. These easily accessible reviews are a research tool for students and scholars of the history of empire, who wish to expand their understanding of the concept of ‘empire’ beyond the way in which empire is studied by scholars in their respective historical field defined by periodization or regional focus. As such, this project will encourage the writing of a new history of empire across the globe and in Asia specifically.
Ottomans
Letter from Selim to Ismail, 1514
Sultan Selim I; Shah Ismail I
“It is from Solomon: ‘In the Name of God, the Compassionate, the Merciful. Do not exalt yourselves above me, but come to me in all submission.’” (Qur’an 27: 30-31)
God’s blessings upon the best of his creatures, Muhammad, his family, and his companions all.
And now We have revealed this Scripture truly blessed. Observe it and keep from evil, so that you may find mercy. (Qur’an 6: 156)
This missive, which is stamped with the seal of victory and which—like inspiration descending from the heavens — is witness to the verse “We do not punish a nation until We have sent forth a messenger to forewarn them.” (Qur’an 17: 15) has been graciously issued by our most glorious majesty — we who are the Caliph of God Most High in this world, far and wide; the proof of the verse “that which profits men remains on the earth” (Qur’an 13: 17) the Solomon of Splendor, the Alexander of eminence; haloed in victory, Faridun triumphant; slayer of the wicked and the infidel, guardian of the noble and the pious; the warrior in the Path, the defender of the Faith; the champion, the conqueror; the lion, son and grandson of the lion; standard-bearer of justice and righteousness, Sultan Selim Shah son of Sultan Bâyezid, son of Sultan Mehmet Khan — and is addressed to the ruler of the kingdom of the Persians, the possessor of the land of tyranny and perversion, the captain of the vicious, the chief of the malicious, the usurping Darius of the time, the malevolent Zahhak of the age, the peer of Cain, Prince Isma‘il.
As the Pen of Destiny has drawn up the rescript “You bestow sovereignty on whom You will” (Qur’an 3: 26) in our sublime name and has signed it with the verse “The blessings God bestows on men none can withhold” (Qur’an 35: 2), it is manifest in the Court of Glory and the Presence of Deity that we, the instrument of Divine Will, shall hold in force upon the earth both the commandments and prohibitions of Divine Law as well as the provisions of royal proclamations. “Such is the grace of God: He bestows it on whom He will.” (Qur’an 57: 21).
It has been heard repeatedly that you have subjected the upright community of Muhammad (Prayers and salutations upon its founder!) to your devious will, that you have undermined the firm foundation of the Faith, that you have unfurled the banner of oppression in the cause of aggression, that you no longer uphold the commandments and prohibitions of the Divine Law, that you have incited your abominable Shi‘i faction to unsanctified sexual union and to the shedding of innocent blood, that — like they “Who listen to falsehood and practice what is unlawful” (Qur’an 5: 42) — you have given ear to idle deceitful words and have partaken of that which is forbidden:
He has laid waste to mosques, as it is said,
Constructing idol temples in their stead,
that you have rent the noble fabric of Islam with the hand of tyranny, and that you have called the Glorious Qur’an the myths of the Ancients. The rumor of these abominations has caused your name to become like that of Harith deceived by Satan.
Indeed, as both the legal rulings of distinguished religious scholars who base their opinion on reason and tradition alike and the consensus of the Sunni community agree that the ancient obligation of extirpation, extermination, and expulsion of evil innovation must be the aim of our exalted aspiration, for “Religious zeal is a victory for the Faith of God the Beneficent:” then, in accordance with the words of the Prophet (Peace upon him!) “Whosoever introduces evil innovation into our order must be expelled” and “Whosoever does anything against our order must be expelled,” action has become necessary and exigent. Thus, when the Divine Decree of Eternal Destiny commended the eradication of the infamously wicked infidels into our capable hands, we set out for their lands like ineluctable fate itself to enforce the order “Do no leave a single unbeliever on the earth.” Qur’an 71: 26) If God Almighty wills, the lightning of our conquering sword shall uproot the untamed bramble grown to great heights in the path of the refulgent Divine Law and shall cast them down upon the dust of abjectness to be trampled under the hooves of our legions, for “They abase the mightiest of its inhabitants and these will do the same” (Qur’an 27: 34); the thunder of our avenging mace shall dash out the muddled brains of the enemies of the Faith as rations for the lionhearted ghazis. “The wrongdoers will realize what a reversal they shall have.” (Qur’an 26: 227)
When I draw my keen-edged weapon from its sheath,
Then shall I raise up doomsday on the earth;
Then shall I roast the hearts of lion-hearted men,
And toast the morning with a goblet of their blood.
My crow-fletched shaft will fix the eagle in his flight;
And my bare blade will shake the orb of day.
Ask of the sun about the dazzle of my rein;
Inquire of Mars about the brilliance of my arms.
Although you wear a Sufi crown , I bear a trenchant sword,
And he who holds the sword will soon possess the crown.
O Mighty Fortune, pray grant this my single wish:
Please let me take both crown and power from the foe.
But “Religion is Counsel.” Therefore, should you turn the face of submission toward our angelic threshold — the refuge of the noble, the qibla of felicity, and the Ka‘ba of certainty — and lift the hand of oppression from the heads of your subjects bowed by oppression and sedition, take up a course of repentance and become like one blameless, return to the sublime straight path of the Sunna of Muhammad (Prayers and salutations upon him and God’s satisfaction upon his immaculate family and his rightly-guided companions all!) — for “My companions are like the stars: whomever you choose to follow, you will be guided aright.” — and consider your lands and their people a part of the well-protected Ottoman state, then shall you be granted our royal favor and our imperial condescension.
He whose face touches the dust of my threshold in submission
Will be enveloped in the shadow of my favor and my justice.
How great the happiness of him who complies with this!
On the other hand, if your evil and seditious habits have become ingrained in your nature, then that which has become essential can never again be accidental.
Of what avail are sermons to the black-hearted?
Then, with the support and assistance of God, I will crown the head of every gallows tree with the head of a crown-wearing Sufi and clear that faction from the face of the earth—“God’s followers are sure to triumph” (Qur’an 5: 56); I will break the oppressors’ grip with the power of the miraculous white hand of Moses, for “The Hand of God is above their hands.” (Qur’an 48: 10) Let them remove the cotton of negligence from the ears of their intelligence and, with their shrouds on their shoulders, prepare themselves for “That which you are threatened with is sure to come.” Qur’an 6: 134) The triumphant troops “As firm as a mighty edifice” (Qur’an 61: 4) crying out like fate evoked “When their hour is come, not for one moment shall they hold it back, nor can they go before it” (Qur’an 7: 34) and maneuvering in accordance with “Put them to death wherever you find them” (Qur’an 4: 89), will wreak ruin upon you and drive you from that land. “Such being the will of God before and after, and on that day the believers will rejoice in God’s help.” (Qur’an 30: 4) “Thus were the evil-doers annihilated. Praise be to God, Lord of the Universe.” (Qur’an 6: 45)
Response from Ismail to Selim, 1514
May his godly majesty, the refuge of Islam, the might of the kingdom, he upon whom God looks with favor, the champion of the sultanate and of the state, the hero of the faith and of the earth, Sultan Selim Shah (God grant him immortal state and eternal happiness!) accept this affectionate greeting and this friendly letter, considering it a token of our good will.
Now to begin: Your honored letters have arrived one after another, for “No sooner has a thing doubled than it has tripled.” Their contents, although indicative of hostility, are stated with boldness and vigor. The latter gives us much enjoyment and pleasure, but we are ignorant of the reason for the former. In the time of your late blessed father (May God enlighten his proof!) when our royal troops passed through the lands of Rum to chastise the impudence of ‘Ala’ al-Dawla Dhu’l-Qadr, concord and friendship was shown on both sides. Moreover, when your majesty was governor at Trebizond there existed perfect mutual understanding. Thus, now, the cause of your resentment and displeasure yet remains unknown. If political necessity has compelled you on this course, then may your problems be soon resolved.
Dispute may fire words to such a heat
That ancient houses be consumed in flames.
The intention of our inaction in this regard is twofold:
(1) Most of the inhabitants of the land of Rum are followers of our forefathers (May God the All-Forgiving King have mercy upon them!).
(2) We have always loved the ghazi-titled Ottoman house and we do not wish the outbreak of sedition and turmoil once again as in the time of Timur.
Why should we then take umbrage at these provocations? We shall not.
The mutual hostility of kings is verily an ancient rite.
Should one embrace the bride of worldly rule too close,
His lips will kiss those of the radiant sword.
Nevertheless, there is no cause for improper words: indeed, those vain, heretical imputations are the mere fabrications of the opium-clouded minds of certain secretaries and scribes. We therefore think that our delayed reply was not completely without cause for we have now dispatched our honored personal companion and servant Shah Quli Aqa (May he be sustained!) with a golden casket stamped with the royal seal and filled with a special concoction for their use should they deem it necessary. May he soon arrive, so that with assistance from Above, the mysteries concealed behind the veil of fate might be disclosed. Keeping in view that regrets are of no avail in the end, one should always exercise free judgment and not be bound solely by the words of others.
At this writing we were engaged upon the hunt near Isfahan. We now prepare provisions and our troops for the coming campaign and in all friendship we say, “Do what you will.”
Bitter experience has taught that in this world of trial
He who falls upon the house of ‘Ali always falls.
Kindly give our ambassador leave to travel unmolested for “No soul shall bear another’s burden.” (Qur’an 6: 164; 53: 38) When war becomes inevitable, hesitation and delay must be set aside, and one must think on that which is to come. Farewell.
Woods, John E. (trans.) Asnad va namaha-yi tarikhi va ijtima‘i-yi dawrayi safaviya edited by Z. Sabitiyan Tehran: Ibn Sina, 1964, pp. 112- 117.
Treaty of Peace and Frontiers (Zuhab/Kasr-ı Şirin), 1639
Kemankeş Kara Mustafa Pasha
Praise to God, the Holy, the Gracious, the bestower of Victory; who has opened the door of peace and concord with the key of the words: "Verily I wish nothing so much as reconciliation," and dispelled the darkness of war and fighting with the light of quiet and happiness. Blessings and benedictions, so long as flowers spread their perfume and daylight shines, upon his Prophet who has fully and clearly manifested the faith, and with whose auspicious advent Islamism was greatly rejoiced; and upon his family, children and companions who have been active in propagating that faith.
Now, whereas, by the will and good pleasure of Him who raised the skies without pillars, and by an effect of the wisdom and omnipotency of Him who composed all things from various elements, and who has no equal, good order in society, and the conservation of the world depend upon the justice and equity of the Sovereigns, and upon their good understanding and union, no less than upon their submission to the positive and to the negative divine Commands, the August Sultans have, in conformity to this sacred precept: “Fear God and reconcile yourselves,” resorted to reconciliation, which is a source of happiness, and renounced to hostilities and war, the sword of mutual contrariety was put into the scabbard; and nations which were making war with each other, cordially reconciled themselves. "That is a favour of God. He grants it to whom He pleases: and God is most gracious.
I, therefore, the most humble of all the servants of God, being charged and authorized to do or undo whatever concerns the Empire and the nation, and to make, just as I choose, war or peace, an authority which I hold from the most glorious Padishah who is the Defender of the faith, whose Majesty is as great as that of Solomon, who is the substitute of God in the world, and who has justified the maxim that “An equitable Sultan is the shadow of God on earth”; the asylum of the greatest Musulman Princes, the shelter of the most illustrious Turkish Sovereigns, the supporter of Islamism and of Musulmans, the exterminator of heresies and of the polytheists, the Sovereign of the two lands and of the two seas, the Sovereign of the two Orients and of the two Occidents, the servant of the two Holy Cities, the treasure of Mankind and apple of the age, who is protected by the Supreme Being whose divine assistance men implore, and favoured by the most High and propitious God; May His Imperial Majesty's Dynasty last till the end of the world, and their reign be prolonged till the consummation of ages! have, in virtue of my full powers and my real character of the Sultan's substitute, ordered the Turkish victorious troops to march from beneath Baghdad, and began to go forward with an intention of entering the Persian territory. On our arrival at a station called Haronia, the most distinguished among the Grandees Chems Uddin Mehmed Culy Bey, Great Equerry, arrived there in the capacity of Ambassador with a Letter from Him who is the ornament of the Persian Throne, the splendour of the Kingdom of Djem, and whose magnificence is equal to that of Darius, the great Prince and illustrious Lord, the Precious Pearl of the Sea of Royalty, the sun of the sky of Sovereignty, the noble Eagle of the high region of the Dignity of Shah, the most Illustrious and Majestic Prince whose troops are as numerous as the stars; may the most High God raise the banners of his strength from earth to Heaven, and exalt the edifice of his glory to the height of the vaulted sky! to our great and august Padishah, and also a flattering Letter to me. The Ambassador having asked that the fire of war should be extinguished and the dust of fighting dispersed, stating that His Majesty the Shah's will is that reconciliation and peace between the two Parties should take place, I, on my part too, wishing to act in conformity to the sacred text, to wit: “If they incline to peace, do ye also incline to it,” have readily consented, for the sake of the safety and tranquillity of mankind to make Peace; and a letter was sent to the Shah to the end that His Majesty might send a Person of confidence with power to settle the conditions of the Peace, in a manner suitable to the honour and dignity of the two Governments. Consequently the Shah has appointed according to the established laws and rules, to negotiate and conclude this treaty of Peace, and establish and fix the state of the frontiers, the most excellent and faithful Saroukhan, may he always be fortunate in transacting affairs on which quiet and security depend! Saroukhan, on his arrival in the Imperial Camp at Zahab, was received with marks of hospitality; and on the 14th day of Muharem, in the year 1049 of the Hegira of the Prophet, upon whom be the best benedictions, a Divan was held in the Imperial Camp, in which were present the illustrious Vizirs, the Miri Miran, the Commanders and Agas, the Aga of the Janissaries, six Agas of six Companies, and other officers of the army. Saroukhan, the Plenipotentiary who was duly accredited, and the Ambassador Mehmed Culy Bey, were introduced in the Divan, and the preliminaries were discussed with them so as to put on a good footing the position of the Rayas and of the poor who are a trust imposed by the Author of all beings, and the result of the discussions on both Parties has been written down and is as follows: Tzanan, Bedrie, Mendelgeen, Derteuk , and Dernai, in the Pashalik of Baghdad, will remain under the authority of our august Padishah, who will also take possession of the Plains between Mendelgeen and Derteuk, and the Mountain will remain under the authority of the Shah. Serminil is fixed as frontier between Derteuk and Dernai. That part of the country of Haronia, occupied by the Tribes of Djaf and Zilja Uddin, will belong to the Sultan. Pezai and Zerdony remain to the Shah. The fortress of Zindjir, which lies on the top of the Mountain, shall be demolished; the Sultan will take possession of the Villages lying westward of it, and the Shah will take possession of those lying eastward. The Villages on the Mountain above Salim Calè, near Chehrezor, will be in the possession of the Sultan, and the Villages lying on the East, will be in the possession of the Shah, who will also keep the Castle of Orman, with the Villages which are dependent on it. The defile leading on Chehrezor has been established as a frontier. The fortress of Kizilidji with its dependencies shall remain in the possession of the Sultan; and Mihreban with the dependencies thereof, in that of the Shah. The fortresses of Cotour (Kotur) and Makoo on the frontier of Van, and the fortress of Magazberd towards Kars and Van, will be demolished by the two Parties, and so long as the Shah will not have molested the fortresses of Akiskha, Kars, Van, Chehrezor, Baghdad, Bassora, and other Places within the limits, such as fortresses, forts, Districts, lands, hills and mountains, and no such horrible act as provoking to rebellion shall have been committed by Him, on their part also His Majesty our Great Padishah will respect this Peace, and no molestation shall, contrary to Treaty, be done to the places which remain within the limits of the other side.
In order, therefore, that Merchants and travellers belonging to either Party may come and go and meet with a friendly reception, I have, in virtue of my full power and positive authority written down this egregious Treaty, the contents of which are true, and sent it to His Majesty the Shah, and to our most August Padishah. So long as the Shah shall, according to the Sacred text: “Do not violate an agreement after ye have done it" observe this treaty as it ought to be observed, His Imperial Majesty, our most Magnificent Padishah also, will act in obedience to the Holy Command: “Fulfil your agreement, for an agreement is obligatory.
This Happy Peace will last and be maintained, with the permission of God, till the day of resurrection: “And he who shall alter it after having heard it, verily this sin shall be upon those who shall have altered it.”
Praise to God; He is the sole God, and blessings upon him after whom there will be no Prophet. In the beginning; and in the end; and externally; and internally…
The most humble of the servants of God.
Mustafa, Grand Vizier.
***
Blech, Edward C. and Sherwood, Harry I. (eds.). British & Foreign State Papers, vol. 105 (1912). London: H.M. Stationery Office, 1915. pp. 763-66.
Treaty of Karlowitz, 1699
Rami Mehmed Pasha; Alex. Mavrocordatos; Counts Kinsky, Oettingen, and de Schlik; Carlo Ruzzi; Stanisław Małachowski; Prokopiy Wosnitzin
In the Name of the most Holy and Undivided Trinity,
IN perpetual Memory of the Thing, Be it known to all to whom it doth appertain, That after sixteen Years cruel and destructive War, between the most Serene and most Potent Prince and Lord Leopold (with his full Titles) on the one part, and the most Serene and most Potent Prince and Lord, Sultan Mustapha Han, Emperor of the Turks, and of Asia and Greece, and his glorious Predecessors on the other part ; the said most Potent Emperors considering how much Blood has been spilt, and how many Provinces have been laid waste, taking Companion at the afflicted Condition of their Subjects, and being seriously inclin'd to put an end to such great Calamitys increasing every Day to the Danger of Mankind, God thro' his Mercy has permitted, that by the Mediation of the most Serene and most Potent Prince and Lord William III. King of Great Britain, France and Ireland and the High and Mighty Lords the States General of the United Provinces of the Netherlands, solemn Treatys shou’d for this Cause be set on foot, and concluded at Carlowitz in Sirmium, near the Confines of both Empires ; where the Persons lawfully constituted Ambassadors Plenipotentiary, appearing together, viz. in the Name of his Sacred Imperial Majesty of the Romans, the most Illustrious and most excellent Lords, the Lord Wolfgang, Count of the Holy Roman Empire, by the Title of Count of Ottingen Lord of the Bedchamber to his Sacred Imperial Majesty, Privy Counsellor and President of the Imperial Aulic Council ; and the Lord Leopold Schlick, Count of the Holy Roman Empire, with the Title of Count of Passaw and Weiskirchen, a Lord of the Bedchamber also to his said Sacred Imperial Majesty, and Colonel of a Regiment of Dragoons, both deputed Ambassadors Extraordinary, and Plenipotentiarys for a Treaty of Peace with the Ottoman Porte : And in the Name of his Imperial Ottoman Majesty, the most illustrious and excellent Lords, the Lord Mehemet Effendi, High Chancellor of the Ottoman Empire, and the Lord Alexander Mauro Cordato, of the Noble House of the Scarlati, Privy Counsellor and Secretary of the said Empire, with the Intervention and good Officces of the most illustrious and excellent Lords, the Lord William Paget, Baron of Beaudefort, for the most Serene King of Great Britain, and Heer James Colyer for the High and Mighty States General of the United Netherlands, both Ambassadors at the Sublime Ottoman Porte, and Plenipotentiarys for re-establishing a universal Peace; who discharg'd the Mediators Office with Integrity, Diligence and Wisdom, and after invoking the Help of the everlasting God, and duly exchanging their Credentials, have to the Glory of the Divine Being, and to the Welfare of both Empires, agreed on the twenty following Articles of mutual Peace and Concord.
I. The Country of Transilvania shall remain entire as it is now in the Possession and Dominion of his Imperial Majesty, and shall be circumscribed from the Confines of Podolia to the extreme Frontier of Wallachia, with its Mountains, which before the present War, were the antient Boundarys between Transilvania on one part, and Wallachia and Moldavia on the other ; and from the Confines of Wallachia, to the River Marosche, with its Mountains also, which were the antient Boundarys : so that by observing the antient Boundarys on both sides, the same shall not be extended on either side.
II. The Province subject to the Castle of Temeswaer, with all its Districts and Rivers, shall remain in the Possession and Power of the sublime Ottoman Porte. And the antient Limits of Transilvania, establish'd in the foregoing Article, from the extreme Frontier of Wallachia to the River Marosche, shall be its Limits on the side of Transilvania. Thence its Boundarys shall be carry'd on from the hither Banks of the Marosche to the River Teysse, and from the hither Bank of the Teysse to the Danube : But the Places within the Limits, viz. Caransebes, Lugas, Lippa, Csanad, Kiscanisia, Betscke, Betskerck, and the hither Sablia, and between the antient Limits of Transilvania, as they were settled before the War, and what other Place soever be found according to the Rule abovemention'd, between the Banks of the Marosche and the Teysse, in the Territorys of Temeswaer, shall be demolish'd by the Imperialists, on this Condition that they shall never be rebuilt by virtue of any other Treaty. And the said Country of Temeswaer shall be left altogether free ; and no other Places, either greater or less, which have the appearance of a Fortification, shall hereafter be built, either in the said Places, or near the Banks of the Marosche and the Teysse.
The Use of the Rivers Marosche and Teysse, between the Province of Temeswaer and the Provinces subject to the Emperor's Power and Possession, shall be common to the Subjects of both Empires, whether for watering of Cattle of all forts, or for Fishing, or other Conveniences necessary for the Subjects.
And whereas Ships of Burden bound from the Parts abovemention'd, subject to the Imperial Dominion, either in passing or repassing thro' the River Marosche to the River Teysse, or thro' the Teysse to the Danube, ought not to meet with any Obstruction ; the Navigation of the German Ships, or of any others - which are subject to the Emperor, shall by no means be disturb'd in their Passage to and fro, but the same shall be freely and commodiously carry'd on every where in both the said Rivers : and for the preservation of a reciprocal Friendship and Good-will, the Subjects of the Ottoman Porte shall share the Conveniences of the said Rivers, without any Hindrance to the Fisher-Boats, and Mills shall be plac'd by the Participation and Consent of the Governours of both Dominions, only in such places where they may not be a Hindrance to the Navigation of either Empire. But left the Passage of the Imperial Ships shou'd suffer any Detriment, by turning off the Water of the Marosche, it shall not be lawful to divert or turn off the Water of the said Rivers, for the fake of Mills, or on any other account.
All the Islands whatsoever in the said Rivers, which are actually in the Emperor's Power, shall remain as they are in his Possession ; and the Subjects of both Dominions shall live peaceably and quietly, and be restrain'd by the severest Edicts from Insults, and from Breach of the Articles.
III. Whereas the Country between the Rivers Teysse and Danube, commonly call'd Batska, is in the sole Possession and Power of his Imperial Majesty, so it shall remain hereafter in the said Imperial Power and Dominion, and Titul shall never be more fortify'd than it is.
IV. A Line mall be drawn from the extremity of the Strand on this side the Teysse over against Titul, and from the Angle of Land which is there form'd by the Conjunction of the Teysse and the Danube, quite to the Bank of the Danube ; and another Line from the hither side of the Teysse to the River Bossut, and to the hither Bank of Moravitz, and from thence to the Place where the biggest Branch of the Bossut falls into the Save : and there shall be no Fortification upon the Moravitz, but only open Villages built on both sides of it, so that the said Line shall be confirm'd and distinguish'd either by Ditches, or Stones, or Posts, or some other way to serve as the Limits of both Empires in the manner following.
The Country towards Belgrade, within the aforesaid Limits, shall remain solely in the Possession and Dominion of the most Potent Emperor of the Turks.
But the Country situate on the other side of the said Line, shall remain in the sole Possession and Power of the most Potent Emperor of the Romans ; and according to those Limits shall be the Possession of the Rivers which are in the Territorys remaining in the possession of both Partys.
V. That Part of the Save which waters those Countrys belonging to the Emperor of the Romans, shall be possess'd by his said Majesty, and the other Part shall be possess'd by the Ottoman Emperor.
That Part of the Save which runs betwixt both Empires, together with the Islands therein, shall be common to the Subjects or both for Navigation to and fro, and for any other Conveniences ; and both shall religiously observe the Commerce peaceably, and without Molestation.
The Country belonging to the Dominion of his Imperial Ottoman Majesty, as far as the River Unna towards Bosnia, shall be limited and bounded by the hither Shore of the River Unna: and ail the Imperial Garrisons that are in Novi, Dubizza, Sessenovizza, Doboy and Bred on the part of Bosnia, and any other such place in this Tract, shall be drawn out from thence, and the same shall be left entirely free.
But whereas Castanoviz, and the Islands below the Country of Novi, towards the Save, together with the farthermost Bank of the said River Unna, are and remain in the Power of the Emperor of the Romans, they shall be distinguish'd henceforth by the aforesaid Limits.
Finally, the Places beyond the Unna, far remote from the Save, which are garison'd and possess'd by both Partys, together with the Lands belonging to the same before the present War, shall also remain in the Power of either Party who possesses them, on condition that Commissioners who shall be deputed on both sides, do separate and divide the Districts and Territorys that are to remain in the possession of both, in the Parts of Croatia, by particular Lines distinguishable by Ditches, Stones, Stakes, or any other Marks for avoiding Confusion.
And whoever on either side shall presume to alter, change, pull up, take away, or in any respect: to violate any of those Marks, the strictest Inquiry shall be made after him ; and if he be apprehended, he shall be most severely punisih'd for an Example to others.
The Commissioners shall be deputed as soon as possible, to distinguish and fix the Bounds in Croatia ; and they shall be enjoin'd to give diligent Attention to the Tranquillity and Security of both Dominions, and that they faithfully and clearly separate and distinguish the Territory's without any Prejudice or Affection.
Whereas the Fortifications of the Castle of Bred, situate on the other side of the Save (towards the Ottoman Empire) which were lately made by the Imperialists, ought to be demolish'd at the time of withdrawing the Imperial Garrison, and the said Place lies very commodiously for Traffick, a City may be built there with a handsome convenient Precinct ; provided nevertheless that it be not turn'd into the Form of a Castle or Fort.
VI. The Limits prescrib'd by these Articles, and those which shall hereafter be settled, if need be, by the Commissioners, shall be sacredly and religiously observ'd on both sides, in such manner that they shall on no account or pretext be extended, transferr'd or chang'd. Nor shall it be lawful for either of the contracting Partys, to claim or exercise any Right or Power to any Territory of the other Party, beyond the Bounds or Lines when settled ; or to compel the Subjects of the other Party to pay any Tribute whatsoever past or to come, or to subject him to any kind of Exaction or Vexation that the Wit of Man can invent : but all wrangling shall be fairly remov'd.
VII. It shall be lawful and free for both Partys, for the Security of their Frontiers, to repair, Strengthen and fortify the Castles, Forts and Places, of which by the present Articles they are to have quiet Possession, in such manner as they shall judge most convenient, except those that are above excepted by Name. And for the Convenience of the Inhabitants, it shall be lawful for both Partys, without molestation, and without exception, to build Habitations, and have open Villages ; provided that no new Forts are erected under this Pretence.
VIII. All hostile Incursions, Usurpations and Invasions made clandestinely, or by surprize, and all Devaluations and Depopulations of the Territorys of either Dominions, shall be deem'd unlawful, and shall be prohibited by the severed Mandates And the Transgressors of this Article, wherever they are apprehended, shall immediately be committed to Prison, and receive condign Punishment without Mercy from the Jurisdiction of the Place where they shall be committed : and whatever they have taken shall be most diligently inquir'd after, and when found, faithfully restor'd to the Owners. Also the Captains, Commanders and Governours of both Partys shall be oblig'd to administer Justice diligently and uprightly, on pain, not only of the Loss of Office, bat of Life and Honour.
IX. It shall also be unlawful to give any Sanctuary or Support to wicked Men, Rebels, or Malecontents, but both Partys shall be oblig'd to bring such sort of Men, and all Thieves, Robbers, &c. whom they shall apprehend in their Dominions, to condign Punishment, altho they happen to be the Subjects of the other Party ; and if they cannot be apprehended, they shall be describ'd to their Captains or Governours ; and if they happen to lurk in their Jurisdictions, they shall be impower'd to apprehend and punish them : and if these don't discharge their Duty by punishing such Criminals, they shall incur the Indignation of their Emperor, and be turn'd out of Office, or punish'd in the place of the Delinquents. And to guard also against the Insolence of Men yet more wicked, it shall be lawful for neither of the Partys to entertain and maintain Man-stealers, call'd Pribeck, and such sort of wicked People who are in the Pay of neither Prince, but live by Robbery ; and both they and those who support them shall be duly punish'd: and whatever Pretences such wicked Men make of Amendment of their former Lives, they mail not be trusted nor tolerated near the Frontiers, but transported to other Places at a greater distance.
X. Whereas during this War many Hungarians and Transilvanians withdrew from their Subjection to his Imperial Majesty to the Frontiers of the Sublime Ottoman Porte, and are to be taken care of in a due manner by the Treaty now concluded between both Empires, 'tis stipulated that they shall live in Freedom and Security in the Dominions of the said Empire.
But left the Tranquillity of the Frontiers, and the Peace of the Subjects shou'd be in any manner disturb'd, the Places where they mall be fix'd, shall be far enough from such Frontiers ; and the Wives shall have leave to follow their Husbands, and to cohabit with them in the Imperial District assign'd for their Settlement.
And whereas hereafter they are to be reckon'd among the other Subjects of the most Potent Emperor of the Turks, it fnall not be lawful for them ever to withdraw from his Subjection any more ; and if they offer to return to their own Country, they shall be deem’d Malecontents, and shall have no Shelter, nor Support from the Germans, but when apprehended, shall be deliver'd to the Turkish Governors of the Frontiers, for the greater Security of the Peace on both sides.
XI. In order wholly to prevent all Controversys, Disputes or Differences hereafter on the Frontiers concerning any of the Articles of this Armistice, an equal number of Commissioners shall be chose on both sides, Men no ways covetous, but grave, honest, wise, experienc'd and peaceable ; who, when there is need of a speedy Remedy, shall repair to the Frontiers, where meeting at a proper place without an Army, with an equal Number of Gentlemen of peaceable Dispositions, they shall hear, take cognizance of, decide and amicably compose all and singular such, emergent Controversys, and settle such an Order and Method, that both Partys may compel their Men and Subjects by the severest Punishments, to the sincere and firm Observation of the Peace, without any Prevarication or Pretext. But if Disputes happen of such moment that they cannot be adjusted and dispatch'd by the Commissioners of both Partys, then they shall be referred to both the mod Potent Emperors, that they themselves may find out, and make use of ways and means for clearing and extinguishing them, in a manner that such Controversys may be accommodated in as little time as possible, without any Neglect or Delay.
And moreover, whereas in the former Sacred Capitulations, all Duels and Challenges were prohibited, they shall hereafter be unlawful ; and if any shall presume to enter into single Combat, they shall be severely dealt with as Transgressors.
XII. Prisoners taken on both sides during the War, who are yet living in Confinement, and have reason to hope for Deliverance one time or other by means of this Peace, and cannot be left in the same miserable and calamitous state of Captivity, without Offence to that Piety and Good Nature for which the Emperors are admir'd, shall be set at Liberty by way of Exchange, after the usual or more honourable Methods ; and if there be more Prisoners in number or of greater Rank on one fide than the other, the Clemency of both their Imperial Majestys who are so well inclin'd to this happy Peace, shall not be deny'd to the rest, when the Embassadors make solemn Instances for their Release.
As for those who are in the Power of private Persons, or even with the Tartars, it shall be lawful for them to procure their Liberty, by as moderate a Ransom as they can ; and if such Captives cannot bring their Master to a fair Accommodation, the Judges of the Place shall end every Dispute by a Composition. But if this cannot be effected by the ways and means aforesaid, the Captives shall be set at Liberty, if it appears by Oath, or other Evidence, that they have paid their Ransom. Nor shall their Owners for the fake of more Lucre oppose their Ransom : and when Men are not sent from the Sublime Ottoman Torte, to assist in setting such Prisoners at Liberty, it will be expected from the Probity of the Imperial Governours, that they oblige the Owners to let go such Prisoners, on paying down the full Price for which they were bought, that so this good Work may be promoted on both sides with equal Piety.
Finally, till the Captives on both sides are releas'd by the means aforesaid, the Embassadors Plenipotentiary shall use their Offices on both sides, that the poor Prisoners may be civilly treated in the mean time.
XIII. In respect to the Monks, and the Exercise of the Christian Religion, according to the Rites of the Roman Catholick Church, whatever Favours were granted them by any former Ottoman Emperors of most Glorious Memory in their Reigns, either by Sacred Capitulations, or by Imperial Signs Manual, or by particular Edicts and Mandates ; the most Serene Emperor of the Ottomans will hereafter confirm them in such manner, that they may repair their Churches, and perform their Functions as usual heretofore. And it shall nor be lawful for any one to molest or extort Money from the said Monks, of what Order or Condition soever they be, contrary to the sacred Capitulations and the divine Laws, but they shall enjoy the Clemency of the Emperor as usual.
Moreover, it shall be lawful for the Embassador of the most Serene and most Potent Emperor of the Romans at the resplendent Porte, to produce his Commission concerning Religion, and the Places of Christian Visitation in the holy City of Jerusalem, and to prevent his Instances to the Imperial Throne.
XIV. Trade shall be free for the Subjects of both Partys, in all the Kingdoms and Dominions of both Empires, according to the antient sacred Capitulations. And that it may be carry'd on by both Partys with Profit, and without Fraud and Deceit, the same shall be settled by Stipulations between Commissarys deputed on both sides, well vers'd in Merchandize, at the time of solemn Embassys on both sides: and as has been observ'd with other Nations in Friendship with the Sublime Empire, so his Imperial Majefty's Subjects of what Nation soever, shall enjoy the Security and Advantage of Trade in the Kingdoms of the Sublime Empire, as well as the usual Privileges in a fitting manner.
XV. All Conditions whatsoever express'd in the antient sacred Capitulations, provided they be not contrary or prejudicial to the foregoing Articles of this Treaty, or to the free Dominion and Enjoyment of the Possessors, shall hereafter be religiously observ'd and perform'd ; but those which are in any fort repugnant to the aforesaid, shall be made null and void.
XVI. And that this Armistice and a good Friendship may be confirm'd and flourish between both the most Potent Emperors, solemn Embassadors shall be sent on both sides, who shall be receiv'd, honour'd and treated equally alike, with the usual Ceremonys, from the time of their first Entrance to their Return to the Place where they are to make the second Exchange, provided nevertheless that they bring a convenient free Gift in token of their Friendship, which is correspondent with the Dignity of both Emperors : And according to the Custom which has a long while been observ'd between both Empires, after previously settling a mutual Correspondence, they shall be exchange'd on the Confines of Szerem, and set out on their Journeys at one and the same time.
Moreover, the said solemn Embassadors may lawfully demand what they think fit at either of the Imperial Courts.
XVII. The same Rule and Order, observ'd heretofore for receiving, honouring and entertaining Embassadors passing to and fro, and residing, shall henceforwards be observ'd on both sides with equal Decorum, according to the particular Character of those who are sent.
It shall be lawful for the Imperial Embassadors and Residents, and all their Servants, to wear what Liverys they please without any Molestation.
Moreover, the Imperial Ministers, whether they discharge the Office of Embassador, Envoy, Resident or Agent, shall enjoy the same Libertys, Immunitys and Privileges, even to the distinguishing the Prerogative of the Imperial Dignity, as the Embassadors and Agents of other Princes in Amity with the Resplendent Porte, and shall have free Leave to hire Interpreters.
The Couriers also, and their other Servants going to and fro between Vienna and the Resplendent Porte, shall have a secure passage, and have all manner of Favour shewn them, that they may perform their Journey commodiously.
XVIII. This Peace, tho concluded according to the foregoing Articles, shall not have its full Force, nor engage the Partys concern'd to observe the Laws of it, till every thing stipulated on both sides, as well with regard to the Limits as to Evacuations and Demolitions of Places, be entirely perform'd ; for the speedy Accomplishment whereof, Commissioners on both sides shall be appointed to fix and distinguish the Limits and Boundarys, who at the ensuing Equinox, viz. the 22d of March or the 12th O. S. 1699, shall meet with a moderate and peaceable Retinue, at Places to be agreed upon among the Commissioners, by the Consent of the Governours of both the Frontiers, and shall within two Months, or sooner if possible, distinguish, separate and determine the Confines with clear and evident Boundarys, as they are constituted by the former Articles ; and they shall accurately and speedily execute the Statutes between the Embassadors Plenipotentiarys of both Empires.
XIX. The Embassadors Plenipotentiarys of both Empires reciprocally engage themselves, and promise that they will infallibly procure these Conditions and Articles to be ratify'd by both their Imperial Majestys, and that the solemn Ratifications shall be exchang'd reciprocally and duly on the Confines, within 50 days from the Day of signing or sooner, by the most illustrious and most excellent the Embassadors Plenipotentiary Mediators.
XX. This Armistice shall continue, and be extended by God's Blessing for 25 Years, to count from the Day of Signing ; and at the end of that Term, or in the meanwhile, both Partys shall be at liberty, if they please, to prolong it for several Years more.
Therefore whatever Conditions are establish'd, by mutual and free Consent, between the most Serene and most Potent Emperor of the Romans, and the most Serene and most Potent Emperor of the Turks, and their Heirs, Empires and Kingdoms, Country's, Citys, Towns, Subjects and Vassals, whether by Land or Sea, shall be religiously and inviolably observ'd.
And it shall be strictly requir'd of all the Governours, Generals, Militia, and all under their Vassalage, Obedience and Subjection, that they conforming themselves also in an adequate manner to the foremention'd Conditions, Clauses, Covenants and Articles, take all possible Care not to contravene or infringe this Peace and Friendship, upon any Account or Pretence whatsoever; but that abstaining from Enmity of all sorts, they cultivate a good Neighbourhood , knowing for certain that if they do not behave as they are hereby admonish'd, they will be most severely punish'd.
The Chan himself also of the Crim, and all the Nations of the Tartars, by whatsoever name call'd, are bound to the due Observation of the Laws of this Peace and good Neighbourhood and Reconciliation ; nor shall they by contravening them exercise any Hostilitys towards any of the Imperial Provinces and their Subjects or Vassals. Moreover, if any, either of the Armys or of the Tartar Nations, shall dare to do any thing contrary to these Sacred Imperial Capitulations, and contrary to their Covenants and Articles, he shall be most feverely punish'd.
The said Peace, Quiet and Security of the Subjects of both Empires shall begin upon the aforesaid Day of Subscription, from which time all Enmity on both sides shall cease and be laid aside, and the Subjects of both Partys shall enjoy Safety and Tranquillity. And to the end that Hostilitys may with the greatest Care and Diligence be suppress'd, Mandates and Edicts shall be transmitted with all speed to publish the Peace to all the Governours of the Frontiers : And whereas some Time is requisite for the Officers, especially on the more remote Frontiers, to obtain Notice of the Peace being concluded, twenty days are appointed for that purpose ; after which, if any one shall presume to commit any Hostility on either side, he shall be subject to the Penaltys abovementioned without Mercy.
Finally, That the Conditions of the Peace concluded in these 20 Articles may be accepted on both sides, and inviolably observ'd with all due Respect, the Ottoman Plenipotentiarys by virtue of the Emperor's full Power to them granted, have exhibited to us the Instrument writ in the Turkish Language, and legally and validly sign'd. We also, by virtue of our Instructions and full Powers, have in like manner deliver'd a legal and valid Instrument in the Latin Tongue, containing those Articles sign'd with our Hands and seal'd with our Seals. Done at the Congress which was held at Carlowitz in Szerem, under Tents, the 26th of January 1699.
(L. S.) Wolfgang Count ab Ottingen.
(L. S.) Leopold Count Schlik.
In the Name of the most Holy and Undivided Trinity,
IN perpetual memory of the thing ; be it known to all whom it doth concern. The most Serene and most Potent Prince, William III. King of Great Britain, France, and Ireland, and the High and Mighty Lords the States General of the United Netherlands, out of a desire to stop the Effusion of human Blood, and to restore the Tranquillity on both sides, which has been so long disturb'd by a difference between the Kingdom of Poland and the Sublime Empire, having interpos'd their Mediation to procure this Treaty of Peace ; and the most excellent Lords, William Lord Paget, Baron of Beaudesert in the County of Stafford, and the King's Lord Lieutenant thereof, Ambassador Plenipotentiary on the part of his Britannick Majesty at the Resplendent Porte, and the Heer James Colyer, Ambassador Plenipotentiary also at the same Porte on the part of the High and Mighty Lords the States General of the United Netherlands, having diligently and zealously perform'd the Offices and Conditions of the said Mediation, with a reciprocal Inclination and Propension to accommodate and suppress the said Quarrel ; and a Congress of the Ambassadors Plenipotentiary being appointed by the Mediators at Carlowitz on the Confines of Szerem, where a Treaty of Peace was set on foot with the most illustrious and most excellent Lord, Mehemet Effendi, great Chancellor of the Sublime Empire, and the most illustrious and most excellent Lord, Alexander Mauro Cordato, of the noble Family of Scarlati, a Privy Counsellor of the said Sublime Empire ; at length by God's Blessing after some Sessions, a Peace was happily concluded on Terms of mutual Obligation. Therefore a Friendship and Peace is again perfected, concluded, restored and renewed between the most Serene and most Potent Sultan Mustapha, Emperor of the Mussulmen, Son of Sultan Mahomet, and the most Serene and most Potent King Augustus II. my most gracious Lord, and the Republick of Poland, on the eleven following Articles, which are by mutual Consent to be religiously observ'd for ever between both Dominions ; which Articles are hereafter set down one by one.
I. The antient Friendship being again renew'd by the Providence of the most High God, together with a hearty Reconciliation and good Neighbourhood, all Hostilitys shall cease for ever on both sides, and the Subjects shall enjoy and be establish'd in their former Security and Tranquillity ; and the Frontiers of the Provinces subject to Poland, shall be separated and distinguished by their antient Boundarys from the Imperial Frontiers, as well of Moldavia, as of other Districts subject to the Sublime Empire ; nor shall there be any Extension or Restriction of the same hereafter, but the antient Limits shall be religiously observ'd and kept as sacred, without any Alteration and Disturbance.
II. All the Fortresses or Places, whether greater or lesser, comprehended within the antient Limits of Moldavia before the last War but one, and which have hitherto been detain'd by the Poles, shall be evacuated by their Soldiers ; and the Province of Moldavia shall remain intirely free, in the pacifick State it was in before the last War.
III. The Fortress of Caminiec, which is also situate within the antient Limits of Poland as they stood before the two last Wars, shall be entirely evacuated by the Mussulmen ; and hereafter no Demand shall be made by the Sublime Empire to the Provinces of Podolia and the Ukrain. And whereas the antient Limits of Poland and Moldavia are manifest, if there be a convenient time the Evacuation shall commence at the beginning of March next, and, if possible, sooner ; and as soon as the Fortresses and Places of Moldavia are evacuated, by the withdrawing of the Polish Militia, and Moldavia thereby remains free, the Evacuation of the Fortress of Caminiec shall also commence at the beginning of March ; and after the Affair of the Evacuations is perfected, it shall be put in execution without Hesitation, Delay and Neglect; and the Evacuation of Fort Caminiec shall be finish'd by the 15th of May next at farthest. And to the intent that the same may be evacuated with ease and speed, the Poles shall give all the Assistance possible with Waggons and Horses for the Transportation ; and the Affair of the Evacuation shall be carry'd on every where with security : so that if in the Evacuation of the Forts and other Places howsoever fortify 'd, any of the Subjects have a mind to go out, they may safely depart with their Houshold Goods, and other Effects and whoever has a mind to stay, shall have the same Protection without Impediment. And since the Evacuation of the Forts and Places on both sides, is to commence in the beginning of March next, the Polish Embassador, who is speedily to be dispatch'd to the resplendent Porte, shall make Representation to the Imperial Throne of the Guns left at Caminiec, whether their own, or such as were found there.
IV. None of the Subjects of the Sublime Empire, of what Condition soever, especially the Tartars of any Nation soever, shall on the score of any Pretence or Controversy whatsoever exercise Hostilitys against the Subjects of the King and Republick of Poland, and against their Frontiers, nor commit Excursions, carry or Persons to Captivity, drive away Cattle, nor do them any Damage or Injury ; and the Viziers, Beglerbeys, and the Ham of Crim Tartary, with the other Sultans, and the Weywod of Moldavia, shall be expressly commanded by Royal Edicts, to be very diligent in observing and keeping Peace and Tranquillity on the Frontiers, and that they do not injure the Subjects of Poland, by carrying off their People, driving away their Cattle, or by hurting or molesting them in any other way ; and that they inquire most strictly after the Disturbers and Transgressors of the Articles of Peace ; and that when they discover them, they punish them for Examples to others ; and that Restitution be made of Plunder to the proper Owners, and that if any a6t herein negligently or carelessly, they shall be justly punish'd, either by the Loss of their Offices, or of Life, as shall be consistent with the Divine Laws : And in like manner the Poles shall diligently, and in all respects observe and cultivate this Peace, and none shall dare to contravene it.
V. Whereas the Kingdom of Poland has been free time out of mind, it shall not be disturb'd by any Hostility on the part of the Sublime Empire, or the Nations thereunto subject:, under colour of any Pretension whatsoever; nor shall be bound to comply with such Pretensions by virtue of the Articles of this Peace.
VI. The Tartars of Budziac, and other Tartars, having during this War made Excursions from their own Territorys into those of Moldavia, where they committed several Acts of Rapine and Violence against the Moldavians and their Country, which is contrary to the sacred Capitulations made heretofore with the Kings of Poland, and therefore ought to be prevented and suppress'd, the Tartars shall be remov'd from all the Places, Farms, and other Estates, which they are now possessed of, or have newly built in Moldavia, and shall live peaceably in their own native Country, without committing any Offences hereafter.
VII. The Roman Catholick Monks shall have their Churches, and the Exercise of their accustomed Functions thro'out the Empire, without Molestation or Disturbance, according to the Edicts formerly granted them by the Sublime Empire ; and it shall be lawful for the Embassador Extraordinary of Poland at the Resplendent Porte, to make any further Remonstrances on the head of Religion to the Imperial Throne.
VIII. Whereas Peace gives Life and Soul to Commerce, which, when regulated, reduces Provinces to a better State, the Merchants of both Dominions, who hereafter come and go, not thro' clandestine Places but by Places of publick Access, after they have paid the antient Duties for Goods imported and exported, shall not be molested with new Exactions and Demands, nor shall the Dutys be demanded for ready Money. And all the Natives of Poland and Lithuania, and other Nations to them subject, who come for Traffick, and do no Damage, but carry on Trade, and Buying and Selling, as is also declar'd in former sacred Capitulations, shall not be molested by the Demand of the Tax call'd Haracz, and other inordinate Exactions ; but if any leaving their own Countrys settle in the Kingdoms of the Empire, and if other Foreigners mingle with the Poles, left such should prove to the Detriment of the Republick, nothing shall be demanded for the Arms, Horses and Captives of the Polish Merchants, who having a legal Discharge, are willing to return to their own Country ; nor shall any Person hinder the Captives so going away : but it shall not be lawful for any Person under that Pretence to take prohibited Goods along with them without Leave. Moreover, in case of the Death of any Merchants of both Dominions in other Countrys, their Goods and Effects shall not be seiz'd or divided by the Officers of either Party, but shall be deliver'd to a Merchant of Credit, that he may deliver the same to the Heirs, according to the Inventory taken upon Oath; but if any Dispute happen between the Merchants, the same shall be decided by the Provost, who shall do Justice to whom 'tis due. No body shall be compell'd, contrary to the divine Laws, to pay a Debt which is not confirm'd by Writing, or some judicial Instrument ; nor shall Disputes about Debts and Suretyships be pleaded or heard only upon hired Evidence, but the Causes shall be juftly and duly decided by legal written Instruments : and in such Causes the Grants contain'd and stipulated to other Confederate Nations, in the sacred Capitulations, shall also be extended to the Polish Merchants. And further, the Sense and Meaning of the sacred Edicts granted heretofore to the Poles in particular, and kept in their Custody, shall be regarded and obferv'd.
IX. The Prisoners and Captives taken by either side during the War shall be set at Liberty, paying their Ransom, which shall be settled according to the Laws, or according to the Oath that shall be made of it, pursuant to the Declaration of former Capitulations in this point. But if a Captive hath serv'd a long time, when 'tis but just that his Ransom should be cheaper, if the Owner of the Captive will not agree to take a fair and moderate Price, such Differences shall be decided by the Judges of the Places, proceeding according to Law. If upon any account Prisoners are taken out of the Polish Countrys, after the Conclusion of the Peace, they shall be discharg'd gratis ; and the Persons who go to and fro in the Kingdoms of the Sublime Empire, and even among the Tartars to release the Polish Captives, shall on no account be molested as long as they behave peaceably, but those who offend and injure them shall be punish'd. The Captives detain'd in publick Prisons shall be exchang'd on both sides, and set at Liberty ; and it shall be free for the chief Embassador of the Poles, to make Representations concerning his Captives to the Imperial Throne.
X. Whatsoever the most Serene King of Poland has obtain'd by the Peace stipulated with the Sublime Empire, shall remain in full Force ; Moldavia and Wallachia shall remain in Amity as formerly with the King of Poland, and if any Fugitives from those Countrys come into Poland they shall not be receiv'd. If any steal clandestinely into the Kingdom of Poland, and afterwards are found disturbing and corrupting the Country, such Men, when apprehended, shall be given up; and the same Condition which is so clearly and manifestly declar'd in the former Capitulations, shall be observ'd. In like manner, the Polish Subjects, be they Poles, Cossacks, or of what Nation soever, when they make any Disturbance, shall neither be receiv'd nor protected here, but sent back to their own Countrys ; and all Persons whatsoever that shall go about to disturb the Peace and Friendship now concluded on both sides, shall receive condign Punishment.
XI. All Conditions and Clauses whatsoever declar'd and agreed to in the former Capitulations, which are in no sort contradictory to the Articles of this present Treaty, nor contrary to the free and perpetual Rights of both Dominions, shall henceforwards be carefully observ'd, and those which are contrary, shall, God willing, be made null and void. The Peace and Reconciliation concluded by Articles ingross'd on both sides, in the most perfect and exact manner, between their Majestys, the most August and most Potent Emperor of the Mussulmen and his Heirs, and the most Serene and most Potent King of Poland and his Successors, and the Republick of Poland, shall, by God's Mercy, remain perpetual, stable, firm and inviolable, and be preserv'd and guarded from all Disturbance, Change, Violation and Confusion, and persevere and be continued firmly and constantly in one and the same Tenor. And that all Hostilitys may be entirely laid aside and suppress'd, notice shall be given with all Speed to the Presidents, Prefects and Governours on the Frontiers, that they take heed that Transgressions be not committed hereafter, and that neither Party damage the other, and that all on both sides carry it sincerely and amicably to one another. And to the end that the Conclusion of this happy Peace may be made known to all Persons, 30 Days are allow'd, after which time no Pretence or Excuse shall be admitted, but they who oppose the Edicts which require a strict Obedience, shall be very severely punish'd. And after the signing of the Instruments on both sides, an Envoy shall first come from Poland to the Resplendent Porte, and according to antient Custom bring the King's Letters Patent, containing the Ratification of the Articles declar'd in the Instruments, and shall also receive and take with him the Emperor's Ratifications. And afterwards the Embassador in ordinary, as soon as it can be done with Conveniency, shall proceed according to the antient laudable Method, to the solemn Confirmation of the Articles of the Peace, and to the Perfection of reciprocal Sincerity, and the absolute Determination of mutual Friendship, and to the Disposition of the other things remaining. And therefore the happy Peace concluded in n Articles, according to those Terms, shall be accepted and cultivated on both sides, when the abovemention'd Plenipotentiarys and Commissioners, the Embassadors of the most August Emperor of the Turks, have, by virtue of their Power and Authority, deliver'd a legal and valid Instrument, drawn up in the Turkish Language, as I have, by virtue of my Power and Deputation, deliver'd the Articles sign'd with my own Hand, and seal'd with my Seal, as a lawful and valid Instrument. Done at the Congrefs held under Tents in Carlowitz in Szerem, the 26th Day of January 1699.
(L. S.) Stanislaus Palatine of Posnania, Plenipotentiary, and Embassador Extraordinary from the King of Poland.
In the Name of the Lord whose Mercy is Everlasting, and of the Almighty who bringeth all Things to Light.
Whereas by reason of the Enmity and Ill-will which have subsisted for some Years, between the Sublime Empire and the Republick of Venice, the Subjects were willing that Friendship, Benevolence and the Laws of Good Neighbourhood may be restored, by the Mediation, Insinuation and Recommendation of the most Glorious, among the Great Princes and Republicks of Christendom, William III. King of England, Scotland and Ireland, and the States General of the Netherlands ; and a Congress being held for that purpose at Carlowitz in Szerem, near the Confines, between the Plenipotentiarys of both Partys, when the most illustrious, and most excellent among the Christian Nobility, William Lord Paget, Baron of Beaudesert, his Britannick Majesty's Embassador Extraordinary, and the Heer James Colyer, Embassador of the Lords the States General of the Netherlands, performed the kind Offices of Mediators ; after the Exchange and Perusal of their respective full Powers according to antient Custom, and after Negotiations and Conferences for a Peace were set on foot, pursuant to the Imperial Mandate, and by virtue of our Authority and Deputation, the most illustrious among the Christian Nobility, Charles Ruzzini, Knight, notwithstanding he had time enough allow'd him to confider of the Articles of the Peace, delayed to sign them, on account of some Difficultys ; and for that Reason the most illustrious and most excellent the Embassadors Plenipotentiary of the Emperor of the Romans, and of the King and Republick of Poland, out of respect to the Preliminarys, settled by the Endeavour of the aforesaid Embassadors Mediators, and by the Consent and Approbation of all the rest, and particularly to the 3d Article for allowing a Fortnight longer for the Signing and Exchanging of the Instruments by the mutual consent of both Partys ; and to the Intent that the Republick of Venice might also be included and comprehended in the Peace concluded by the Divine Favour, they have at length reciprocally agreed with us, by the repeated Offices and Endeavours of the said Embassadors Mediators, between the Sublime Empire and the said Republick, the following 16 Articles, as they are hereafter inserted verbatim.
I. The Morea with all its Citys, Fortresses, Castles, Lands, Villages, Mountains, Rivers, Lakes, Woods, Ports, and in general, all things else whatsoever which shall be found to be comprehended within the whole Extent of the same Province, and which are now possess'd by the Republick of Venice, shall remain in the Possession and under the Dominion of the said Republick, including the full Circumference of the Country inclosed between the Sea and the Isthmus, in that part where some of the Remains of the antient Wall are still to be seen ; so that there shall be no Extension made of the Continent of the Morea into the Terra Firma, beyond the Confines of the said Province.
II. In regard that the Terra Firma is under the Dominion of the Sublime Empire, it shall remain intirely in the Possession of the said Empire, in the same Condition it was in as the beginning of the last War. The Fortress of Lepanto shall be evacuated by the Republick of Venice, and the Castle call'd Romelia shall be demolish'd on that side next Lepanto-j the Fortress ofPrevesa shall be demolish'd in like manner, and the main Land shall be left on that side in its former and entire State.
III. The Island of Sancta Maura with its Fortress, the Head of the Bridge call'd Peraccia, not extending any farther into the main Land ; and the Island of Leucate, annex'd to Sancta Maura, mall remain in the Possession and Lordship of the Republick of Venice.
IV. The Evacuation of Lepanto, and the Demolition of the Castles of Romelia and Trevesa, shall be performed immediately after the Limits of Dalmatia are settled; and in the mean time, to prevent all manner of Hostilitys, and even to cut off all Occasions for such, the Garrisons of those three Places shall not stir out, but keep within the Fortifications thereof, and shall not make any Excursions into the main Land, nor offer at it upon any pretence whatsoever. The Inhabitants thereof shall also be permitted to remain there, or depart from thence as they shall think proper, nor shall the least Violence be offer'd to them.
V. The Use of the Gulphs that lie between the main Land and the Morea, shall be in common to both Powers and both the one and the other of the two Partys oblige themselves to keep them free, and to clear them of all manner of Pirates and mischievous Persons.
VI. The Islands of the Archipelago and of those Seas, shall remain under the Dominion of the Sublime Empire, in the Condition they were in before the Beginning of the last War. No Tributes call'd Caraches shall be exacted from the Subjects of the Republick, nor any Contributions, or other Imports, levy'd, which were introduc'd there during the present War.
VII. The Sublime Empire shall not for the future exact any Pension for the time past or to come, from the Republick of Venice or its Inhabitants, for the Isle of Zante. The Island of Egina with its Fortress, lying near and adjoining to the Morea, and now posses'd by the said Republick, shall remain in the possession of the said Republick, in the Condition it is in at present.
VIII. The Fortresses of Chnin, Sing, Ciclut and Gabetla, situate in Dalmatia, being at present posses'd by the Republick of Venice, shall remain for the future under the Dominion of the said Republick, peaceably to enjoy them. But forasmuch as the Limits of that Province are to be fix'd so exactly and so clearly, that there may be no Dispute about them for the future ; for the Preservation of the Repose and Tranquillity of the Subjects of both Partys, and to prevent all imaginable Differences that may in any manner whatsoever disturb the Peace of the Frontiers, 'tis agreed, that from the Fortress of Chnin to that of Verlica, from Verlica to Sing, from Sing to Duara, otherwise call'd Zaduaria, from thence to Vergoraz, and from thence likewise to the Fortress of Ciclut and Gahella, strait Lines shall be drawn to make the Separation of the Confines ; so that between the said Lines drawing towards the Venetian Dominions and the Sea-Coast, all the Lands and Cantons, with the Castles, Forts, Towers and inclosed Places, shall be only possess'd by the Republick aforesaid : And as for the Lands and Cantors that shall be without the said Line, they shall remain in the Possession, and under the Dominion of the Sublime Empire, with all the Castles, Forts, Towers, and inclosed Places comprehended therein ; nor shall it be lawful to extend or lessen the Frontiers on either side. The said Lines shall be mark'd out clearly and distinctly, according to the Situation of the Places, by means of the Hills and Woods, or of the Rivers and Currents; and where the Place shall not evidently distinguish the said Limits, they shall be mark'd out by Ditches, Stakes and Pillars, as the Commissioners appointed by both Partys to regulate the Limits aforesaid in concert, shall judge convenient. And to the end that the said Fortresses which are to remain in the Possession of the Republick, may have some convenient Space of Territory before them, the Commissioners shall mark out about the Fortresses of Chnin, Verlica, Sing, Duara, Vergeraz, and Ciclut, such a space of Ground as may be march 'd in an hour, in a strait Line or Semi-Circle as the Ground will permit. The Fortress of Chnin shall present her Flank on that fide next Croatia, as far as the Emperor's Frontiers, without doing any Prejudice to the three Potentates whose Confines shall join to the said Limits ; but they shall be always oblig'd inviolably to observe the Right which belongs to each of the said three Potentates, according to the Agreements of this Universal Peace. Both Partys shall be equally bound to observe the said Line ; and if it shou'd happen that in the Neighbourhood of the said Line, or in the Line itself, there shou'd be any Fortress depending upon the Sublime Empire, the Territory situate behind that Place shall remain intire to the Empire ; and in Front a space of Ground shall be mark'd out in the Circumference of the said Line, and which shall also have the Extent of an Hour's March. As for the Fortress of Ciclut there shall be in like manner assign'd to it in Front, a space of Ground of an Hour's March 5 and towards the Flank there shall be a space of two Hours March, without the Line, drawing out a strait Line to the Sea. And when the Limits are once fix'd, and the Bounds placed, and Territorys separated so as to remain in manner and form aforesaid, in the possession of both Partys, they shall be inviolably observ'd without the least Alteration ; and if ever it happens that any Person shou'd have the Boldness to violate the said Frontiers, or to go beyond the Bounds, or that the Officers themselves shou'd fail in their Duty and necessary Care in that particular, by not punishing the Offenders according to their Demerits, they shall themselves be severely punish'd on both sides. And in cafe the Commissioners shou'd meet with any Difficultys, or shou'd not agree among themselves, they shall faithfully and exactly inform their Masters thereof, to the end that such Differences may be amicably adjusted by the good Offices and Mediation of those who represent his Imperial Majesty, and the Lords Mediators, at the Ottoman Porte.
IX. The Territory and Dependences of the Signiory of Ragusa, fhall be annex'd to the Territorys and Cantons of the Sublime Empire ; and all Obstacles that hinder the Union and Communication of the Lands of the said Signiory with the Lands of the said Empire, shall be remov'd.
X. Castelnovo and Risano, which are in the Neighbourhood of Cattaro, being actually in the Possession and under the Dominion of the Republick of Venice, it shall remain in the peaceable Enjoyment of the laid Places and their Territorys. Which is likewise to be understood of any other Fortress whatsoever situate in that Canton, and of which the said Republick is in actual Possession. And the Commissioners who shall be deputed on both sides, shall be chose out of Persons of known Probity, to the end that not being sway'd by Passion or private Interest, they may determine this important Affair with all possible Equity, by making a Separation of the Territorys of the Country, and marking them out by Tokens so evident, as to cut off all occasions or Disturbance and Contention between the two Partys. But Advice shall be given on the same side, that the Communication of the Lands of Ragusa with those of the Ottoman Empire must not be interrupted.
XI. And forasmuch as the fixing the Limits of both Partys ought to begin in Dalmatia, and on the side of Cattaro, as foon as the Weather favours, the Commissioners deputed for that End, shall give reciprocal notice of their Meeting, and shall meet in a Place proper and convenient for such Business, with an equal number of armed Attendants, Men of Peace, and not given to create Trouble ; and the said Commissioners shall, with the Help of God, begin their Function and Conferences on the first Day of the Equinox, that is to say 12/22 of March this present Year : and they shall with all possible Care and Diligence employ themselves in distinguishing the Confines of both Partys ; in such manner that they may entirely finish the Separation in two Months, or sooner if possible.
XII. And whereas both the said Partys have mutually express'd an ardent Desire to be united to one another, by a firm and constant Friendship, and to procure the Tranquillity of their Subjects, they must naturally have the greater Aversion to such ill-minded Persons as disturb the Tranquillity of the Frontiers by Robberys, and Hostilitys of other kinds : Therefore no Shelter or Protection shall be given on either side to such Fugitives, of what Quality soever they are ; bur, on the contrary, they shall be pursued, apprehended and imprison'd, that they may have condign Punishment for a warning to others : and for the future, the giving Support or Protection to People of this fort shall be prohibited.
XIII. Both Partys shall be permitted to repair and fortify the Fortresses in their Possession, but not to build any new ones upon the Frontiers, nor to rebuild those which have been demolish'd by the Republick of Venice on the Confines of the Terra Firma : The Subjects also of both Partys are permitted to build Towns and Villages every where, on condition that they live sociably like good Neighbours and Friends, and keep strictly within their own Bounds. And if any Difference happen among them, the Governours of the Frontiers on both sides shall be amicably inform'd thereof, to the end that they may with the greatest Equity prevent all Cause of Complaint.
XIV. As for what concerns Religion, the release and exchange of Slaves, and matter of Commerce, the conditions of the last Treaty shall be observed according to their Form and Tenour, and the Ambaffador of the Republick shall have leave to make new Instances to the Imperial Throne upon this Head. As to Traffick, the Sacred Imperial Edicts formerly granted to this Republick, are confirm'd by the present Treaty of Peace ; and Trade shall be carry'd on in the same manner as it was before the last War, and the Venetian Merchants shall enjoy all the Privileges that were ever granted them heretofore.
XV. From the Day of signing the Treaty concluded between the Plenipotentiarys of the Sublime Empire and the Republick:, all Hostilitys shall cease both by Land and Sea, and the Subjects of both Partys shall live in good Friendship and Correspondence : And to the end that the Governours of the Frontiers may be inform'd of this Suspenflon of Arms, the Partys are agreed on a Term of thirty Days for the Provinces of Bosnia, Albania and Dalmatia, and forty Days for the Isle of Candia, the Morea, and other Frontiers on the same Coast ; during which Space of Time, the Sublime Empire and the Republick shall each on his part do all that is possible to hinder the Contravention of any one of the Articles. Moreover, a sincere and general Amnesty is to be allow'd to the Subjects of both Partys, for any Action or Crime committed during the War, which shall be entirely bury'd in Oblivion; and no Person shall on that account be prosecuted, molested or punish'd for the future as a Delinquent.
XVI. It shall be determin'd how long the present Treaty between the Sublime Empire and the Republick shall continue, when the Instruments of it are deliver'd, and when the Plenipotentiarys of both Partys proceed to the immediate signing of the said Treaty, in the Form and Manner that shall be declar'd afterwards. And they shall in like manner agree to the Conventions that shall be thought necessary, for establishing the Friendship and perfect Correspondence of the Partys more and more.
After all 'tis stipulated and agreed by this present Instrument, that if while we are here, the said Plenipotentiary of Venice shall resolve to accept and Sign it, he may immediately, and without delay, copy the whole Instrument, and confirm it with his own Hand and Seal, and deliver it to us, and at the same time receive from us the Instrument confirm'd with our Seals and Subscriptions ; provided nevertheless, that the abovemention'd Articles be not violated or alter'd, or restrain'd, or magnify'd, and that only those Things be added by mutual Consent, which seem to tend more to the renewing the Offices of Friendship, without changing the Articles of the Places and Limits.
But if the said Ambassador Plenipotentiary of the Republick of Venice shou'd remain here when we are going away, without having come to any Determination, the said Republick is allow'd by virtue of that Instrument, the space of thirty Days, from the Conclusion of the Peace, to ratify the said Instrument, to transmit their Ratification to the Ambassadors Mediators, to extend the Articles to reciprocal Offices of Friendship, and compleatly to finish the present Treaty at Vienna, by their Ambassador Plenipotentiary residing there, within the space of two Months.
But if the said Republick does not acquiesce in the above recited Articles, even while the illustrious Mediation continues at Vienna, and while either of the Emperor's Plenipotentiarys is present, the Ambassadors of both Partys may reassume and direct this Treaty ; on these Conditions nevertheless, that the fundamental Instrument, now stipulated once for all by the mutual Consent of the Partys, may be religiously and inviolably observ'd by both, equally alike in all things ; nor shall the Articles in this present Instrument mention'd be call'd in question, nor shall one Party take more Advantage of them than the other. Moreover, within the space of six Months, from the Day that the solemn Embassy arrives at Vienna from the Sublime Empire, according to the Terms of the Preliminary and Fundamental Instrument so often mention'd, the Venetian Ambassador Plenipotentiary at Vienna shall finish his Treaty, and to this end exchange the authentick Instruments necessary for both Partys ; and consequently the Venetian Republick shall be included in this happy Peace, the Cessation of Arms being observed in the mean time on both sides, according to the Reason declar'd in the Articles above inserted, and all manner of Hostilitys and Offences being stopp'd by Land and Sea, and no Contravention of the Articles hereby establish'd being admitted. But if this neither be pleasing to the abovenam'd Republick, it shall rest upon the said Republick, after the Term abovemention'd, to manage the Affair either of War or Peace by themselves, and not to lay the Blame upon any but themselves. And whereas the abovemention'd Ambassadors Extraordinary and Plenipotentiarys of his Imperial Majesty, and the King and Republick of Poland, in presence of the Ambassadors Plenipotentiary Mediators, have deliver'd to us the authentick and lawful Instrument drawn up in the Latin Tongue, confirm'd with their Hands and Seals, by virtue of the Authority, and Power, and Deputation to them granted ; we also, by virtue of our Power, Authority and Deputation, have deliver'd this valid and legal Instrument, confirm'd with our Hands and Seals. Done the 24th of the Month call'd Reciep, in the Year of the Hegira 1110.
Sign'd,
(L. S.) MEHEMEMET RAMI, Great Chancellor.
(L. S.) ALEXANDER Mauro Cordato di Scarlato.
BE it known to all and every one whom it concerns, That after a Declaration of Peace was made by the Mediation of the most Serene and most Potent Prince and Lord, William III. King of Great Britain, France and Ireland, and the High and Mighty States General of the United Netherlands, for restoring Tranquillity, which had been disturb'd several Years by a War, and for renewing the Friendship between the Sublime Ottoman Emperor and the most Serene Republick of Venice, a Congress was appointed for that end, between the Plenipotentiarys of both Partys at Carlowitz in Szerem, by the Intervention of the most illustrious and the most excellent Lords, the Lord William Paget, Baron of Beaudefert, and the Heer James Colyer, both Ambassadors at the Ottoman Porte, the former from the most Serene King of Great Britain, and the latter from the High and Mighty States of the United Netherlands, who most diligently and faithfully perform'd the mediatorial Office of Ambassadors Plenipotentiary for restoring this Peace, and after the Exchange of the full Powers on both sides, the Congress was continued. But the most illustrious, and most excellent Lord, Charles Ruzzini Knt. Ambassador Plenipotentiary of the said most Serene Republick, after various Conferences held concerning a Peace, even tho he had time enough and to spare for consideration of the Articles, yet by reason of several Difficultys which occurr'd to him, cou'd not proceed in the Treaty : We therefore the underwritten Ambassadors Extraordinary and Plenipotentiary of his Sacred Imperial Majesty, and of his Royal Majesty of Poland, perceiving the Expiration of the last Term granted near at hand, and the immediate Necessity of bringing the Treaty to an absolute Conclusion, in regard to the Preliminarys settled at this Congress by the Endeavours of the said Lords the Mediators, and by the Consent of all of us, especially in regard to the Reason declar'd in the 3d Article, having a desire to promote the Peace of the most Serene Republick of Venice, have undertaken the Treaty in their Name ; and in regard to the solemn Foundation of this Peace, heretofore establish'd inviolably between his Imperial Majesty, the Republick of Venice, and the Sublime Empire, have in the best manner we cou'd, concluded a Treaty with the most illustrious and most excellent the Lords Ambassadors Plenipotentiary of the Ottoman Porte, viz. the Lord Mehemet Effendi, Chancellor of the Sublime Ottoman Empire, and the Lord Mauro Cordato, of the Noble Family of Scarlati, late Chancellor of the said Empire, and private Secretary, containing sixteen Articles as follows.
After all 'tis further agreed, with the abovemention'd Ambassadors of the Sublime Ottoman Empire, that as long as the said Lords the Ambassadors stay here, if the Venetian Ambassador resolve to accept of the Articles above inserted, he mall presently reduce them into the Form of an Instrument, and after having sign'd and seal'd it, deliver it to the Ottoman Plenipotentiarys, and receive the Duplicate of it sign'd and seal'd in like manner by them ; on Condition nevertheless, that it shall not be lawful to change, restrain, amplify or alter the abovemention'd Articles with respect : to the Limits and Places, nor in any other respect, but in those things only which shall seem to appertain to the Offices of greater Friendship. But if when the Lords Ambassadors of the Sublime Ottoman Empire go away, it happens that the said Lord Ambassador of Venice be still undetermin'd, then it shall be lawful for the said Republick of Venice, within thirty Days after the Conclusion of this happy general Peace, to ratify this Instrument, to transmit their Ratification to the Lords the Ambassadors Mediators, to extend the Articles to reciprocal Offices of Friendship, and compleatly to finish the present Treaty at Vienna, by their Ambassador Plenipotentiary residing there, within the space of two Months.
But if the said Republick does not acquiesce in the above recited Articles, even while the illustrious Mediation continues at Vienna, and while one or other of the Imperial Ministers Plenipotentiary be present, the Ambassadors of both Partys may reassume and direct this Treaty : on these Conditions nevertheless, that the Preliminary and Fundamental Instrument heretofore Stipulated, by the mutual Consent of the Partys, may religiously and inviolably be observ'd by both equally alike in all Things ; nor shall the Articles of Peace recited in this present Instrument be called in question, nor shall one Party take more Advantage of them than the other.
Moreover, within the space of six Months, from the Day that the solemn Embassy of the Sublime Ottoman Empire arrives at Vienna, according to the Terms of the Preliminary and Fundamental Instrument so often mention'd, the Venetian Ambassador Plenipotentiary at Vienna shall finish his Treaty, and moreover exchange the authentick Instruments necessary for both Partys ; and consequently the Republick of Venice shall be included in this happy Peace, a Cessation of Arms being observ'd in the mean time on both sides, according to the Reason declar'd in the Articles above inserted, and all manner of Hostilitys and Offences being stop'd by Land and Sea, and no Contravention of the Articles hereby establish'd being admitted. But if neither the abovenam'd Republick can bring its Treaty to a Conclusion within the Terms abovemention'd, it shall rest upon the said Republick to take care of their own Affairs. And whereas the abovemention'd Ambassadors Plenipotentiarys of the Sublime Ottoman Empire have, by virtue of their Power, Authority and Deputation, deliver'd to us the authentick and lawful Instrument, confirm'd with their Hands and Seals ; we also the Ambassadors Extraordinary and Plenipotentiarys of his Imperial Majesty, and his Majesty the King of Poland, by virtue of his Imperial Majesty's, and the most Serene King of Poland, general full Powers, and the Lords Ambassadors Plenipotentiarys Mediators being also present, and witnessing it, have likewise confirm'd the said Instrument of the Conditions of the Peace (promoted, as above, by our Officers for the famous Republick of Venice) with our Hands and Seals. Done at the Congress of Carlowitz in Szerem under the Tent, Jan. 26, 1699.
(L. S.) Wolfgangus C. ab Otting.
(L. S.) Leopoldus C. Schlik,
(L. S.) S. Matachouski.
We attest and confirm, by our Hands and Seals, that the foregoing Instruments were done, concluded and confirm'd in presence of us, by virtue of our publick Function as Mediators, the Year and Day abovementioned.
(L. S.) WILLIAM PAGET.
(L. S.) J. COLYER.
SLYVESTER VALERIO, by the Grace of God, Doge of Venice, &c. We make known and certify, that on the 26th Day of January 1699, according to the Computation of the Empire, an Instrument of the following Tenour was concluded in the Congress at Carlowitz.
We therefore, and our Senate, do altogether approve of, and ratify the said sixteen Articles of the Peace, between the most Serene Mustapha Emperor of the Turks, and our Republick, promising on the Word of the aforesaid Republick, inviolably to observe all and singular the Articles, and not to suffer them, if we can help it, to be violated by others. In Witness whereof, we acknowledge these Presents to be our Act and Deed, have sign'd them with our Hand, and confirm'd them with our Ducal Seal, at the Ducal Palace on the 7th of February 1699.
M.V.
Sylvester Valerio Doge of Venice.
The Ducal Seal is appendant in Silver.
Agostino Bianchi Secretary.
Whatley, Samuel. A General Collection of Treatys of Peace and Commerce, Manifestos, Declarations of War, and other Publick Papers, from the End of the Reign of Queen Anne to the Year 1731, Vol. IV. London: J.J. and P. Knapton et al., 1732. pp. 290-322.
Treaty of Peace (Küçük Kaynarca), 1774
Count Peter Rumyantsev; Musul Zade Mehmed Pasha
ART. I. From the present time all the hostilities and enmities which have hitherto prevailed shall cease for ever, and all hostile acts and enterprises committed on either side, whether by force of arms or in any other manner, shall be buried in an eternal oblivion, without vengeance being taken for them in any way whatever; but, on the contrary, there shall always be a perpetual, constant, and inviolable peace, as well by sea as by land. In like manner there shall be cultivated between the two High Contracting Parties, Her Majesty the Empress of all the Russias and His Highness, their successors and heirs, as well as between the two empires, their states, territories, subjects, and inhabitants, a sincere union and a perpetual and inviolable friendship, with a careful accomplishment and maintenance of these Articles; so that neither of the two parties shall, in future, undertake with respect to the other any hostile act or design whatsoever, either secretly or openly. And in consequence of the renewal of so sincere a friendship, the two Contracting Parties grant respectively an amnesty and general pardon to all such of their subjects, without distinction, who may have been guilty of any crime against one or other of the two Parties; delivering and setting at liberty those who are in the gallies or in prison; permitting all banished persons or exiles to return home, and promising to restore to them, after the peace, all the honours and property which they before enjoyed, and not to subject them, nor allow others to subject them, with impunity, to any insult, loss, or injury under any pretext whatsoever; but that each and every of them may live under the safeguard and protection of the laws and customs of his native country in the same manner as his native fellow countrymen.
II. If, after the conclusion of the Treaty and the exchange of the ratifications, any subjects of the two Empires, having committed any capital offence, or having been guilty of disobedience or of treason, should endeavour to conceal themselves, or seek an asylum in the territories of one of the two Powers, they must not be received or sheltered there under any pretext, but must be immediately delivered up, or at least expelled, from the States of the Power whither they had escaped, in order that, on account of such criminals, there should not arise any coolness or useless dispute between the two Empires, with the exception, however, of those who, in the Empire of Russia, shall have embraced the Christian religion, and, in the Ottoman Empire, the Mahometan religion. In like manner, should any subjects of the two Empires, whether Christians or Mahometans, having committed any crime or offence, or for any reason whatsoever, pass from one Empire into the other, they shall be immediately delivered up, so soon as a requisition to that effect is made.
III. All the Tartar peoples - those of the Crimea, of the Budjiac, of the Kuban, the Edissans, Geambouiluks and Editschkuls shall, without any exception, be acknowledged by the two Empires as free nations, and entirely independent of every foreign Power, governed by their own Sovereign, of the race of Ghengis Khan, elected and raised to the throne by all the Tartar peoples; which Sovereign shall govern them according to their ancient laws and usages, being responsible to no foreign Power whatsoever; for which reason, neither the Court of Russia nor the Ottoman Porte shall interfere, under any pretext whatever, with the election of the said Khan, or in the domestic, political, civil and internal affairs of the same; but, on the contrary, they shall acknowledge and consider the said Tartar nation, in its political and civil state, upon the same footing as the other Powers who are governed by themselves, and are de pendent upon God alone. As to the ceremonies of religion, as the Tartars profess the same faith as the Mahometans, they shall regulate themselves, with respect to His Highness, in his capacity of Grand Caliph of Mahometanism, according to the precepts prescribed to them by their law, without compromising, nevertheless, the stability of their political and civil liberty. Russia leaves to this Tartar nation, with the exception of the fortresses of Kertsch and Jenicale (with their districts and ports, which Russia retains for herself), all the towns, fortresses, dwellings, territories, and ports which it has conquered in Crimea and in Kuban; the country situated between the rivers Berda, Konskie, Vodi, and the Dnieper, as well as all that situated as far as the frontier of Poland between the Boug and the Dniester, excepting the fortress of Oczakow, with its ancient territory, which shall belong, as heretofore. to the Sublime Porte, and it promises to withdraw its troops from their possessions immediately after the conclusion and exchange of the Treaty of Peace. The Sublime Ottoman Porte engages, in like manner, on its part, to abandon all right whatsoever which it might have over the fortresses, towns, habitations, &c., in Crimea, in Kuban, and in the island [sic] of Taman; to maintain in those places no garrison nor other armed forces, ceding these States to the Tartars in the same manner as the Court of Russia has done, that is to say, in full power and in absolute and independent sovereignty. In like manner the Sublime Porte engages, in the most solemn manner, and promises neither to introduce nor maintain, in future, any garrison or armed forces whatsoever in the above-mentioned towns, fortresses, lands, and habitations, nor, in the interior of those States, any intendant or military agent, of whatsoever denomination, but to leave all the Tartars in the same perfect liberty and independence in which the Empire of Russia leaves them.
IV. It is conformable to the natural right of every Power to make, in its own country, such dispositions as it may consider to be expedient: in consequence whereof, there is respectively reserved to the two Empires a perfect and unrestricted liberty of constructing anew in their respective States, and within their frontiers, in such localities as shall be deemed advisable, every kind of fortresses, towns, habitations, edifices, and dwellings, as well as of repairing and rebuilding the old fortresses, towns, habitations, &c.
V. After the conclusion of this happy peace, and the renewal of a sincere and neighbourly friendship, the Imperial Court of Russia shall always have, henceforth, at the Sublime Porte, a Minister of the second rank, that is to say, an Envoy or Minister Plenipotentiary; the Sublime Porte shall show to him, in his official character, all the attentions and respect which are observed towards the Ministers of the most distinguished Powers; and upon all public occasions the said Minister shall immediately follow the Emperor's Minister, if he be of the same rank as the latter; but if he be of a different rank, that is to say, either superior or inferior, then the Russian Minister shall immediately follow the Ambassador of Holland, and, in his absence, that of Venice.
VI. If any individual in the actual service of the Russian Minister during his stay at the Sublime Porte, having been guilty of theft or having committed any crime or act liable to punishment, should, for the purpose of escaping the penalty of the law, become Turk; although he cannot be prevented from so doing, yet after he has undergone the punishment be deserves, all the articles stolen shall be restored in toto, according to the specification of the Minister. But those who, being intoxicated, might be desirous of adopting the turban, must not be allowed so to do until after their fit of drunkenness is over, and they have come to their right senses; and even then, their final declaration shall not be taken, unless in the presence of an interpreter sent by the Minister, and of some Musslman free from the suspicion of partiality.
VII. The Sublime Porte promises to protect constantly the Christian religion and its churches, and it also allows the Ministers of the Imperial Court of Russia to make, upon all occasions, representations, as well in favour of the new church at Constantinople, of which mention will be made in Article XIV, as on behalf of its officiating ministers, promising to take such representations into due consideration, as being made by a confidential functionary of a neighbouring and sincerely friendly Power.
VIII. The subjects of the Russian Empire, as well laymen as ecclesiastics, shall have full liberty and permission to visit the holy city of Jerusalem, and other places deserving of attention. No charatsch [ie., haraç or military-exemption tax], contribution, duty, or other tax, shall be exacted from those pilgrims and travellers by any one whomsoever, either at Jerusalem or elsewhere, or on the road; but they shall be provided with such passports and firmans as are given to the subjects of the other friendly Powers. During their sojourn in the Ottoman Empire, they shall not suffer the least wrong or injury; but, on the contrary, shall be under the strictest protection of the laws.
IX. The interpreters attached to the Russian Ministers resident at Constantinople, of whatever nation they may be, being employed upon State affairs, and consequently in the service of both Empires, must be regarded and treated with every degree of kindness; and they shall be subjected to no ill-treatment on account of the business with which they may be entrusted by their principals.
X. If between the signing of these Articles of Peace and the orders which shall thereupon be dispatched by the Commanders of the two respective armies, an engagement should anywhere take place, neither party shall be offended thereat, nor shall it be productive of any consequences, every acquisition made thereby being restored, and no advantage shall accrue therefrom to one party or the other.
XI. For the convenience and advantage of the two Empires, there shall be a free and unimpeded navigation for the merchantships belonging to the two Contracting Powers, in all the seas which wash their shores; the Sublime Porte grants to Russian merchant-vessels, namely, such as are universally employed by the other Powers for commerce and in the ports, a free passage from the Black Sea into the White Sea, and reciprocally from the White Sea into the Black Sea, as also the power of entering all the ports and harbours situated either on the sea-coasts, or in the passages and channels which join those seas. In like manner, the Sublime Porte allows Russian subjects to trade in its States by land as well as by water and upon the Danube in their ships, in conformity with what has been specified above in this Article, with all the same privileges and ad vantages as are enjoyed in its States by the most friendly nations, whom the Sublime Porte favours most in trade, such as the French and the English; and the capitulations of those two nations and others shall, just as if they were here inserted word for word, serve as a rule, under all circum stances and in every place, for whatever concerns commerce as well as Russian merchants, who upon paying the same duties may import and export all kinds of goods, and disembark their merchandize at every port and harbour as well upon the Black as upon the other Seas, Constantinople being expressly included in the number.
While granting in the above manner to the respective subjects the freedom of commerce and navigation upon all waters with out exception, the two Empires, at the same time, allow merchants to stop within their territories for as long a time as their affairs require, and promise them the same security and liberty as are enjoyed by the subjects of other friendly Courts. And in order to be consistent throughout, the Sublime Porte also allows the residence of Consuls and Vice-Consuls in every place where the Court of Russia may consider it expedient to establish them, and they shall be treated upon a perfect footing of equality with the Consuls of the other friendly Powers. It permits them to have interpreters called Baratli, that is, those who have patents, providing them with Imperial patents, and causing them to enjoy the same prerogatives as those in the service of the said French, English, and other nations. Similarly, Russia permits the subjects of the Sublime Porte to trade in its dominions, by sea and by land, with the same prerogatives and advantages as are enjoyed by the most friendly nations, and upon paying the accustomed duties. In case of accident happening to the vessels, the two Empires are bound respectively to render them the same assistance as is given in similar cases to other friendly nations; and all necessary things shall be furnished to them at the ordinary prices.
XII. When the Imperial Court of Russia shall have the intention of making any Commercial Treaty with the regencies of Africa, as Tripoli, Tunis, and Algiers, the Sublime Porte engages to employ its power and influence in order to accomplish the views of the above-named Court in this respect, and to guarantee, as regards those regencies, all the conditions which shall have been stipulated in those Treaties.
XIII. The Sublime [Porte] promises to employ the sacred title of the Empress of all the Russias in all public acts and letters, as well as in all other cases, in the Turkish language, that is to say, "Temamen Roussielerin Padischag.''
XIV. After the manner of the other Powers, permission is given to the High Court of Russia, in addition to the chapel built in the Minister's residence, to erect in one of the quarters of Galata, in the street called Bey Oglu, a public church of the Greek ritual, which shall always be under the protection of the Ministers of that Empire, and secure from all Coercion and outrage.
XV. Although, according to the manner in which the boundaries of the two Contracting Powers are arranged, there is every reason to hope that the respective subjects shall no longer find any occasion for serious differences and disputes amongst them selves, nevertheless, at all events to guard against whatever might occasion a coolness or cause a misunderstanding, the two Empires mutually agree that all such cases of disagreement shall be investigated by the Governors and Commanders of the frontiers, or by Commissioners appointed for that purpose, who shall be bound, after making the necessary inquiries, to render justice where it is due, without the least loss of time: with the express condition that events of this nature shall never serve as a pretext for the slightest alteration in the friendship and good feeling re-established by this Treaty.
XVI. The Empire of Russia restores to the Sublime Porte the whole of Bessarabia, with the cities of Ackermann, Kilija, Ismail, together with the towns and villages, and all contained in that Province; in like manner it restores to it the fortress of Bender. Similarly the Empire of Russia restores to the Sublime Porte the two Principalities of Wallachia and Moldavia, together with all the fortresses, cities, towns, villages, and all which they contain, and the Sublime Porte receives them upon the following conditions, solemnly promising to keep them religiously:
1. To observe, with respect to all the in habitants of these Principalities, of what ever rank, dignity, state, calling, and extraction they may be, without the least exception, the absolute amnesty and eternal oblivion stipulated in Article I of the Treaty, in favour of all those who shall have actually committed any crime, or who shall have been suspected of having had the intention of doing injury to the interests of the Sublime Porte, re-establishing them in their former dignities, ranks, and possessions, and restoring to them the property which they were in the enjoyment of previously to the present war.
2. To obstruct in no manner whatsoever the free exercise of the Christian religion, and to interpose no obstacle to the erection of new churches and to the repairing of the old ones, as has been done heretofore.
3. To restore to the convents and to other individuals the lands and possessions formerly belonging to them, which have been taken from them contrary to all justice, and which are situated in the environs of Brahilow, Choczim, Bender, &c., now called Rai.
4. To entertain for ecclesiastics the particular respect due to their calling.
5. To grant to families who shall be desirous to quit their country in order to establish themselves elsewhere, a free egress with all their property; and in order that such families may duly arrange their affairs, to allow them the term of one year for this free emigration from their country, reckon ing from the day on which the present Treaty shall be exchanged.
6. Not to demand or exact any payment for old accounts, of whatever nature they may be.
7. Not to require from these people any contribution or payment for all the time of the duration of the war; and even, on ac count of the devastations to which they have been exposed, to relieve them from all taxes for the space of two years, reckoning, from the day on which the present Treaty shall be exchanged.
8. At the expiration of the above-mentioned term, the Porte promises to treat them with all possible humanity and generosity in the monetary taxes which it shall impose upon them, and to receive them by means of deputies, who shall be sent to it every two years; and after the payment of these taxes, no Bacha, Governor, nor any other person whatsoever shall molest them, or exact from them any other payments or taxes of what description soever, but they shall possess all the advantages which they enjoyed during the reign of the late Sultan.
9. The Porte allows each of the Princes of these two States to have accredited to it a Chargé d'Affaires, selected from among the Christians of the Greek communion, who shall watch over the affairs of the said Principalities, be treated with kindness by the Porte, and who, not withstanding their comparative want of importance, shall be considered as persons who enjoy the rights of nations, that is to say, who are protected from every kind of violence.
10. The Porte likewise permits that, according as the circumstances of these two Principalities may require, the Ministers of the Imperial Court of Russia resident at Constantinople may remonstrate in their favour; and promises to listen to them with all the attention which is due to friendly and respected Powers.
XVII. The Empire of Russia restores to the Sublime Porte all the islands of the Archipelago which are under its dependence; and the Sublime Porte, on its part, promises:
1. To observe religiously, with respect to the inhabitants of these islands, the conditions stipulated in Article I concerning the general amnesty and the eternal oblivion of all crimes whatsoever, committed or suspected to have been committed to the prejudice of the interests of the Sublime Porte.
2. That the Christian religion shall not be exposed to the least oppression any more than its churches, and that no obstacle shall be opposed to the erection or repair of them; and also that the officiating ministers shall neither be oppressed nor insulted.
3. That there shall not be exacted from these islands any payment of the annual taxes to which they were subjected, namely, since the time that they have been under the dependence of the Empire of Russia; and that, moreover, in consideration of the great losses which they have suffered during the war, they shall be exempt from any taxes for two years more, reckoning from the time of their restoration to the Sublime Porte.
4. To permit the families who might wish to quit their country, and establish them selves elsewhere, free egress with their property; and in order that such families may arrange their affairs with all due convenience, the term of one year is allowed them for this free emigration, reckoning from the day of the exchange of the present Treaty.
5. In case of the Russian fleet, at the time of its departure, which must take place within three months, reckoning from the day on which the present Treaty is exchanged, should be in need of anything, the Sublime Porte promises to provide it, as far as possible with all that may be necessary.
XVIII. The Castle of Kinburn, situated at the mouth of the Dnieper, with a proportionate district along the left bank of the Dnieper, and the corner which forms the desert between the Bug and the Dnieper,remains under the full, perpetual, and incontestable dominion of the Empire of Russia.
XIX. The fortresses of Jenicale and Kertsch situated in the peninsula of Crimea, with their ports and all therein contained, and moreover with their districts, commencing from the Black Sea, and following the ancient frontier of Kertsch as far as the place called Bugak, and from Bugak ascending in a direct line as far as the Sea of Azow, shall remain under the full, perpetual, and incontestable dominion of the Empire of Russia.
XX. The city of Azow, with its district, and the boundaries laid down in the Conventions made in 1700, that is to say in 1113 between the Governor Tolstoi and Hassan Bacha, Governor of Atschug, shall belong in perpetuity to the Empire of Russia.
XXI. The two Cabardes, namely, the Great and Little, on account of their proximity to the Tartars, are more nearly connected with the Khans of Crimea; for which reason it must remain with the Khan of Crimea to consent, in concert with his Council and the ancients of the Tatar nation, to these countries becoming subject to the Imperial Court of Russia.
XXII. The two Empires have agreed to annihilate and leave in an eternal oblivion all the Treaties and Conventions heretofore made between the Two States, including therein the Convention of Belgrade, with all those subsequent to it; and never to put forth any claim grounded upon the said Conventions, excepting, however, the one made in 1700 between Governor Tolstoi and Hassan Bacha, Governor of Atschug, the subject of the boundaries of the district of Azow and of the line of demarcation of the frontier of Kuban, which shall remain invariably such as it has heretofore been.
XXIII. The fortresses which are standing in a part of Georgia and of Mingrelia, as Bagdadgick, Kutatis, and Scheherban, conquered by the Russian arms, shall be considered by Russia as belonging to those whom they were formerly dependent; so that if, in ancient times, or for a very long period, they have act ally been under the dominion of the Sublime Porte, they shall be considered as belonging to it; and after the exchange of the present Treaty the Russian troops shall, at the time agreed upon, quit the said Provinces of Geo g1a and Mingrelia. On its part, the Sublime Porte engages, conformably to the contents of the present Article, to grant a general amnesty to all those in the said countries who, in the course of the present war, shall have offended it in any manner whatsoever. It renounces solemnly and for ever to exact tributes of children, male and female, and every other kind of tax. It engages to consider such of these people only as its subjects as shall have belonged to it from all antiquity; to leave and restore all the castles and fortified places which have been under the dominion of the Georgians and Mingrelians, to their own exclusive custody and government; as also not to molest in any manner the religion, monasteries, and churches; not to hinder the repairing of dilapidated ones, nor the building of new ones; and it promises that these people shall not be oppressed on the part of theGovernor of Tschildirsk, and other chiefs and officers, by exactions which despoil them of their property. But as the said people are subjects of the Sublime Porte, Russia must not, in future, intermeddle in any manner in their affairs, nor molest them in any way.
XXIV. Immediately upon the signing and confirmation of these Articles, all the Russian troops which are in Bulgaria on the right bank of the Danube shall withdraw, and within one month, reckoning from the day of the signature, they shall cross to the other side of the river. When all the troops shall have passed the Danube, the castle of Hirsow shall be delivered up to the Turks, the said castle being evacuated to them when all the Russian troops shall have completely passed over to the left bank of that river. After which, the evacuation of Wallachia and Bessarabia shall be effected simultaneously, the term of two months being allowed for that operation. After all the Russian troops shall have quitted these two Provinces, the fortresses of Giurgewo and afterwards Brahilow on the one side (of the river), and on the other, the town of Ismail and the fortresses of Kilia and Akkerman, shall be delivered up to the Turkish troops, from all which places the Russian garrisons shall withdraw for the purpose of following the other troops, so that for the complete evacuation of the said Provinces the term of three months shall be assigned. Lastly, the Imperial troops of Russia shall, two months afterwards, withdraw from Moldavia, and shall pass over to the left bank of the Dniester; thus, the evacuation of all the aforesaid countries shall be effected within five months, reckoning from the above mentioned signing of the Treaty of Perpetual Peace between the two contracting Empires. When all the Russian troops shall have passed to the left bank of the Dniester, the fortresses of Chotzum and of Bender shall be given up to the Turkish troops; upon this condition, however, that the castle of Kinburn with the district belonging to it, and the desert situated between the Dnieper and the Boug, shall have been already restored in full, perpetual and incontestable sovereignty to the Empire of Russia, conformably to Article XVIII of the Treaty of Perpetual Peace between the two Empires.
As to the islands of the Archipelago, they shall be left, as heretofore, under the legitimate dominion of the Ottoman Porte, by the fleet and the Imperial troops of Russia, as soon as the arrangements and peculiar necessities of the fleet shall permit, with regard to which it is not possible to assign here the precise time. And the Sublime Porte, in order to accelerate as much as possible the departure of the said fleet, already engages, as a friendly Power, to furnish it, as far as it can, with every necessary of which it may be in need. During the stay of the Imperial troops of Russia in the Provinces to be restored to the Sublime Porte, the government and police shall remain there in the same vigour as at present and since the conquest, and the Porte must take no part whatever therein, during the whole of this time, nor until the entire withdrawal of all the troops. Up to the last day of their quitting these countries, the Russian troops shall be provided with all necessaries, as well provisions as other articles, in the same manner as they have hitherto been furnished with them.
The troops of the Sublime Porte must not enter the fortresses which shall be restored to it, nor shall that Power commence to exercise its authority in the countries which shall be given up to it, until at each place or country which shall have been evacuated by the Russian troops, the Commander of those troops shall have given notice thereof to the officer appointed for that purpose on the part of the Ottoman Porte. The Russian troops may, at their pleasure, empty their magazines of ammunition and provisions which are in the fortresses, towns and wherever else they may be, and they shall leave nothing in the fortresses restored to the Sublime Porte but such Turkish artillery as is actually found there. The inhabitants in all the countries restored to the Sublime Porte, of whatever state and condition they may be, and who are in the Imperial service of Russia, have the liberty, besides the term allowed of one year, as assigned in the Articles XVI and XVII of the Treaty of Peace, of quitting the country and withdrawing with their families and property in the rear of the Russian troops; and conformably to the above-mentioned Articles, the Sublime Porte engages not to oppose their departure, neither then nor during the entire term of one year.
XXV. All the prisoners of war and slaves in the two Empires, men and women, of whatever rank and dignity they may be, with the exception of those who, in the Empire of Russia shall have voluntarily quitted Mahometanism in order to embrace the Christian religion, or in the Ottoman Empire shall have voluntarily abandoned Christianity in order to embrace the Mahometan faith, shall be, immediately after the exchange of the ratifications of this Treaty, and without any excuse whatever, be [sic] set at liberty on either side, and restored and delivered up without ransom or redemption money; in like manner, all the Christians fallen into slavery, such as Poles, Moldavians, Wallachians, Peloponnesians, inhabitants of the islands, and Georgians, all, without the least exception, must be set at liberty without ransom or redemption money. Similarly all Russian subjects who, since the conclusion of this happy peace, shall by any accident have fallen into slavery, and who shall be found in the Ottoman Empire, must be set at liberty and restored in like manner; all which the Empire of Russia promises also to observe, on its part, towards the Ottoman Porte and its subjects.
XXVI. After having received in Crimea and in Oczakow intelligence of the signature of these Articles, the Commander of the Russian army in Crimea, and the Governor of Oczakow must immediately communicate with each on the subject, and within two months after the signing of the Treaty send, respectively, persons duly ac credited for effecting, on the one hand, the cession, and on the other the taking possession, of the Castle of Kinburn, with the desert, as stipulated in Article XVIII above; and this the said Commissioners must absolutely effect within two months from the day of their meeting, in order that within four months, or even sooner, reckoning from the signing of the Treaty, the whole of this business be accomplished, and immediately after the said execution thereof, notice of the same shall be given to their Excellencies the Field-Marshal and the Grand Vizier.
XXVII. But in order that the present peace and sincere friendship between the two Empires be so much the more strongly and authentically sealed and confirmed, there shall be sent on both sides solemn and extraordinary Embassies with the Imperial ratifications signed, confirmatory of the Treaty of Peace, at such time as shall be agreed upon by both the High Contracting Parties. The Ambassadors shall be met on the frontiers in the same manner, and they shall be received and treated with the same honours and ceremonies as are observed in the respective Embassies between the Ottoman Porte and the most respectable Powers. And as a testimonial of friend ship, there shall be mutually sent through the medium of the said Ambassadors presents which shall be proportionate to the dignity of their Imperial Majesties.
And as the negotiation and accomplishment of this peace have been confided by the Sovereigns of the respective Empires to the care of the Commanders-in-chief of their armies, namely, the Field-Marshal Count Pierre de Roumanzow, and the Grand Vizier of the Sublime Porte, Mousson Zade Mechmet Bacha, the said Field Marshal and Grand Vizier must, by virtue of the full power given to each of them by their Sovereigns, confirm all the said Articles of the perpetual peace as they are here in expressed, and with the same force as if they had been drawn up in their presence, sign them with the seal of their coat-of arms, observe and faithfully and inviolably accomplish all that has been there stipulated and promised, do nothing, nor suffer anything whatsoever to be done in contravention of the said Treaty, and the copies, in every respect similar to the present one, signed by them, and having their seals attached, on the part of the Grand Vizier in the Turkish and Italian language, and on the part of the Field-Marshal in Russian and Italian, as well as the full-powers to them given by their Sovereigns, shall be respectively exchanged by the same persons above-mentioned, who have been sent, on the part of the Sublime Porte, to the Field Marshal, within five days without fail reckoning from the day of the signing of the present Treaty, and sooner if it be possible it being, from this present time, determined that they shall receive the said copies from the Field-Marshal as soon as they shall have notified that those of the Grand Vizier have reached them ....
ART. I. Although it is indicated in Article XVII of the Treaty of Peace signed today, that in three months the Imperial Russian fleet will evacuate the islands of the archipelago, in Article XXIV of the same Treaty it is explained that, taking such a distance into consideration, it is not possible to specify how much time may be necessary; we have agreed to hold ourselves to the latter Article. Accordingly, we repeat that the said Imperial Russian fleet, will evacuate the archipelago as soon as Possible, without setting a time limit and to facilitate the evacuation, the sublime Porte will provide [the Imperial Russian fleet] with all that it needs for its voyage, insofar as that depends upon [the Sublime Porte].
This separate Article will receive the same confirmation as the entire Treaty, and we shall give it the same force and validity as if it had been inscribed word for word in the Treaty executed today, in the faith of which we have signed it in our own hand and sealed it with our seals....
ART. II. It is regulated and established by this separate Article that the Sublime Porte will pay the sum of 15,000 purses or 7.5 million piasters, which in Russian money equals 4.5 million rubles, to the Russian Empire in three periods, for the expenses of the war. The first payment will fall due on 1/12 January 1775; the second payment, on 1/12 January 1776; the third payment, on 1/12 January 1777. Each payment of 5,000 purses will be made by the Sublime Porte to the Russian Minister accredited to the said Sublime Porte; and if the Court of Russia should wish some other assurance beyond that, the Ottoman Porte solemnly obligates itself to satisfy [Russia] on that score. This separate Article will be confirmed, together with the entire Treaty signed today and we shall give 1t the same force and validity as if it had been inscribed word for word in the Treaty concluded today between the two respective Empires; in the faith of which we have signed it with our hand and sealed it with our seals....
Great Britain, Parliamentary Papers, 1854, vol. 72, pp. 171-79.
Russia
The Gorchakov Memoradum, 1864
Alexander Mikhailovich, Prince Gorchakov
In 1864 Russia began actively moving its imperial boundary east of the Caspian into the Kazakh steppe and the khanates of Kokand, Khiva and Bukhara, collectively known to the Russians as Turkestan. Although the advance was partly motivated by Russia’s strategic rivalry with Great Britain in Central Asia, the so-called “Great Game”, there were other factors at work. In addition to opening badly-needed markets to Russian goods and access to new sources of cotton following the supply disruptions of the American Civil War, the conquest of Turkestan was seen as a means of recouping Russian military prestige following the disaster of the Crimea and of countering British strength elsewhere by placing the tsar’s armies in a position to menace the Achilles’ heel of its rival’s rich Indian possessions.
Following a failed attempt in July of that year, Russian troops succeeded in capturing the oasis town of Shymkent (Tchemkend), expelling the Kokandians and occupying it in September. Anticipating the outcry, particularly from Britain, which would accompany any further advances into Central Asia, Prince A.M. Gorchakov, the Russian Imperial Chancellor and Foreign Minister, prepared an official explanation for the diplomatic corps to provide foreign governments which he hoped would allay European fears and suspicions. In a memorandum dated 14 November intended to clarify Russia’s policy and circulated via its embassies, Gorchakov justified the succession of conquests by citing the need to protect its borders against lawless tribesmen in “the interests of humanity and civilisation.”
Gorchakov explained the idea behind his country’s imperial advance into Central Asia in terms that many of his European counterparts would have found difficult to dispute, likening the Russian ‘dilemma’ of advancing until it could establish secure frontiers, and the need for final extension to be based on fertile land suitable for colonisation in order to counter strong states such as Kokand, to those of other empires, namely Britain, France, Holland and the United States. Like them, Russia had been “irresistibly forced, less by ambition than by imperious necessity, into this onward march, where the greatest difficulty is to know when to stop.” The memorandum’s comparison of Russia’s situation with that of the Western countries reflected the belief that Russian policies were consistent with those of other colonial powers, and was skilfully designed to make it difficult for them to protest its actions by equating its position in Central Asia to theirs in their own extensive overseas territories.
In spite of these justifications, Gorchakov averred that Russia’s advance into Central Asia would be limited. The memorandum relied on a distinction between “civilised states” and “half-savage, nomadic populations who possess no fixed social organisation.” In such cases, according to Gorchakov, “the more civilised state is forced, in the interests of security and commerce, to exercise a certain ascendancy over those whose turbulent and unsettled character makes them most undesirable neighbours.” He presents this boundary concept as vindicating further expansion of empire in Turkestan while appearing to accord respect to state boundaries upon which the European international system rested, discriminating the “unstable communities” of nomad tribes from the “agricultural and commercial populations attached to the soil” of the Central Asian khanates, who, in spite of their “backward civilisation” and “the instability of their political condition”:
“… possessing a more advanced social organisation, offer us every chance of gaining neighbours with whom there is a possibility of entering into relations. Consequently, our frontier line ought to swallow up the former, and stop short at the limit of the latter.”
He went on to promise that once Russia had reached what is now approximately the southern border of modern Kazakhstan, between Ysyk Köl and the Syr Darya, its frontier would be fixed in order to avoid “the danger of being carried away, as is almost inevitable, by a series of repressive measures and reprisals, into an unlimited extension of territory.” Accordingly, the Russian Empire would only expand to wherever it met a government able to impose order on a settled population and willing to maintain commercial relations, absorbing areas and peoples lacking “some organised form of society and a Government to direct and represent it,” but not those who “accept that peaceful and commercial relations with her are more profitable than disorder, pillage, reprisals, and a permanent state of war.” Gorchakov expressly identifies the former as an essential criterion for civilisation, stating that “no agent has been found more apt for the progress of civilisation than commercial relations.” Their development, however, “requires everywhere order and stability,” which would only follow “a complete transformation of the habits of the people” – to be imposed by Russian arms.
As a statement of intent and summary of the Russian view of the peoples of Turkestan, the memorandum is a significant document, supplying not only the motive and legal basis of Russia’s Central Asian policy – although Khiva and Bukhara were subsequently absorbed, contrary to Gorchakov’s promises, they remained nominally independent as Russian protectorates until Bolshevik annexation in 1920 – but also the moral rationale for intervention, in its interpretation of a tsarist ‘civilising mission’ not dissimilar from those in circulation in Western colonial discourse at the time. With its parallels to the imperial experience elsewhere, the imposition of highly subjective concepts such as order, commerce and civilisation, filtered through an industrial European lens, onto Central Asian khanates belonging to a much different civilisation and political tradition, presents another example of the difference between modern and early modern conceptions of empire.
The Gorchakov Memorandum of 1864
(Circular.) St Petersburg: November 21, 1864
The Russian newspapers have given an account of the last military operations executed by a detachment of our troops in the regions of Central Asia with remarkable success and important results. It was to be foreseen that these events would the more attract the attention of the foreign public that their scene was laid in scarcely known countries.
Our august Master has commanded me to state to you briefly, but with clearness and precision, the position in which we find ourselves in Central Asia, the interests which inspire us in those countries, and the end which we have in view.
The position of Russia in Central Asia is that of all civilised States which are brought into contact with half-savage nomad populations, possessing no fixed social organisation.
In such cases it always happens that the more civilised State is found, in the interest of the security of its frontier and its commercial relations, to exercise a certain ascendancy over those whom their turbulent and unsettled character make most undesirable neighbours. First, there are raids and acts of pillage to be put down. To put a stop to them, the tribes on the frontier have to be reduced to a state of more or less perfect submission. This result once attained, these tribes take to more peaceful habits, but are in their turn exposed to the attacks of the more distant tribes.
The State is bound to defend them against these depredations, and to punish those who commit them. Hence the necessity of distant, costly, and periodically recurring expeditions against an enemy whom his social organisation makes it impossible to seize. If, the robbers once punished, the expedition is withdrawn, the lesson is soon forgotten; its withdrawal is put down to weakness. It is a peculiarity of Asiatics to respect nothing but visible and palpable force; the moral force of reason and of the interests of civilisation has as yet no hold upon them. The work has then always to be done over again from the beginning.
In order to put a stop to this state of permanent disorder, fortified posts are established in the midst of these hostile tribes, and an influence is brought to bear upon them which reduces them by degrees to a state of more or less forced submission. But soon beyond this second line other still more distant tribes come in their turn to threaten the same dangers and necessitate the same measures of repression. The State thus finds itself forced to choose one of two alternatives, either to give up this endless labour and to abandon its frontier to perpetual disturbance, rendering all prosperity, all security, all civilisation an impossibility, or, on the other hand, to plunge deeper and deeper into barbarous countries, where the difficulties and expenses increase with every step in advance.
Such has been the fate of every country which has found itself in a similar position. The United States of America, France in Algeria, Holland in her Colonies, England in India – all have been irresistibly forced, less by ambition than by imperious necessity, into this onward march, where the greatest difficulty is to know when to stop.
Such, too, have been the reasons which have led the Imperial Government to take up at first a position resting on one side on the Syr-Daria, on the other on the Lake Issyk-Kaul, and to strengthen these two lines by advanced forts, which, little by little, have crept on into the heart of those distant regions, without however succeeding in establishing on the other side of our frontiers that tranquillity which is indispensable for their security.
The explanation of this unsettled state of things is to be found, first, in the fact that, between the extreme points of this double line, there is an immense unoccupied space, where all attempts at colonisation or caravan trade are paralysed by the inroads of the robber tribes; and, in the second place, in the perpetual fluctuations of the political condition of those countries, where Turkistan and Khokand, sometimes united, sometimes at variance, always at war, either with one another or with Bokhara, presented no chance of settled relations or of any regular transactions whatever.
The Imperial Government thus found itself, in spite of all its efforts, in the dilemma we have above alluded to, that is to say, compelled either to permit the continuance of a state of permanent disorder, paralysing to all security and progress, or to condemn itself to costly and distant expeditions, leading to no practical result, and with the work always to be done anew; or, lastly, to enter upon the undefined path of conquest and annexation which has given to England the Empire of India, by attempting the subjugation by armed force, one after another, of the small independent States whose habits of pillage and turbulence and whose perpetual revolts leave their neighbours neither peace nor repose.
Neither of these alternative courses was in accordance with the object of our august Master’s policy, which consists, not in extending beyond all reasonable bounds the regions under his sceptre, but in giving a solid basis to his rule, in guaranteeing their security, and in developing their social organisation, their commerce, their well-being, and their civilisation.
Our task was, therefore, to discover a system adapted to the attainment of this three-fold object.
The following principles have, in consequence, been laid down:–
1. It has been judged to be indispensable that our two fortified frontier lines – one extending from China to the Lake Issyk-Kaul, the other from the Sea of Aral along the Syr-Daria – should be united by fortified points, so that all our posts should be in a position of mutual support, leaving no gap through which the nomad tribes might make with impunity their inroads and depredations.
2. It was essential that the line of our advanced forts thus completed should be situated in a country fertile enough, not only to insure their supplies, but also to facilitate the regular colonisation, which alone can prepare a future of stability and prosperity for the occupied country, by gaining over the neighbouring populations to civilised life.
3. And, lastly, it was urgent to lay down this line definitively, so as to escape the danger of being carried away, as is almost inevitable, by a series of repressive measures and reprisals, into an unlimited extension of territory.
To attain this end a system had to be established, which should depend not only on reason, which may be elastic, but on geographical and political conditions, which are fixed and permanent.
This system was suggested to us by a very simple fact, the result of long experience, namely, that the nomad tribes, which can neither be seized nor punished, nor effectually kept in order, are our most inconvenient neighbours; while, on the other hand, agricultural and commercial populations attached to the soil, and possessing a more advanced social organisation, offer us every chance of gaining neighbours with whom there is a possibility of entering into relations.
Consequently, our frontier line ought to swallow up the former, and stop short at the limit of the latter.
These three principles supply a clear, natural, and logical explanation of our last military operations in Central Asia. In fact, our original frontier line, extending along the Syr-Daria to Fort Perovsky on one side, and on the other to the Lake Issyk-Kaul, had the drawback of being almost on the verge of the desert. It was broken by a wide gap between the two extreme points: it did not offer sufficient resources to our troops, and left unsettled tribes over the border, with which any settled arrangement became impossible.
In spite of our unwillingness to extend our frontier, these motives had been powerful enough to induce the Imperial Government to establish this line between Lake Issyk-Kaul and the Syr-Daria, by fortifying the town of Tchemkend, lately occupied by us. By the adoption of this line we obtain a double result. In the first place, the country it takes in is fertile, well wooded, and watered by numerous watercourses; it is partly inhabited by various Kirghiz tribes, which have already accepted our rule; it consequently offers favourable conditions for colonisation and the supply of provisions to our garrisons. In the second place, it puts us in the immediate neighbourhood of the agricultural and commercial populations of Khokand. We find ourselves in presence of a more solid and compact, less unsettled, and better organised social state; fixing for us with geographical precision the limit up to which we are bound to advance, and at which we must halt, because, while on the one hand any further extension of our rule, meeting, as it would, no longer with unstable communities, such as the nomad tribes, but with more regularly constituted States, would entail considerable exertions, and would draw us on from annexation to annexation with unforeseen complications; on the other, with such States for our future neighbours, their backward civilisation, and the instability of their political condition, do not shut us out from the hope that the day may come when regular relations may, to the advantage of both parties, take the place of the permanent troubles which have up to the present moment paralysed all progress in those countries.
Such, sir, are the interests which inspire the policy of our august Master in Central Asia: such is the object, by his Imperial Majesty’s orders, of the action of his Cabinet.
You are requested to take these arguments as your guide in any explanations you may give to the Government to which you are accredited, in case questions are asked or you may see credence given to erroneous ideas as to our action in these distant parts.
It is needless for me to lay stress upon the interests which Russia evidently has not to increase her territory, and, above all, to avoid raising complications on her frontiers, which can but delay and paralyse her domestic development.
The programme which I have just traced is in accordance with these views.
Very frequently of late years the civilisation of these countries, which are her neighbours on the continent of Asia, has been assigned to Russia as her special mission.
No agent has been found more apt for the progress of civilisation than commercial relations. Their development requires everywhere order and stability; but in Asia it demands a complete transformation of the habits of the people. The first thing to be taught to the populations of Asia is that they will gain more in favouring and protecting the caravan trade than in robbing them. These elementary ideas can only be accepted by the public where one exists; that is to say, where there is some organised form of society and a Government to direct and represent it.
We are accomplishing the first part of our task in carrying our frontier to the limit where the indispensable conditions are to be found.
The second we shall accomplish in making every effort henceforward to prove to our neighbouring States, by a system of firmness in the repression of their misdeeds, combined with moderation and justice in the use of our strength, and respect for their independence, that Russia is not their enemy, that she entertains towards them no ideas of conquest, and that peaceful and commercial relations with her are more profitable than disorder, pillage, reprisals, and a permanent state of war.
The Imperial Cabinet, in assuming this task, takes as its guide the interests of Russia. But it believes that, at the same time, it is promoting the interests of humanity and civilisation. It has a right to expect that the line of conduct it pursues and the principles which guide it will meet with a just and candid appreciation.
(Signed) Gorchakov.
Causes of the Afghan War: Being a Selection of Papers Laid Before Parliament with a Connecting Narrative and Comment. London : Chatto & Windus, 1879. pp. 222-227.
Annotated by Daniel Lee
Muhgals
Tarikh-I Sher Shahi by Abbas Khan Sarwani, 1580
Abbas Khan Sarwani
During the second half of the sixteenth century, the Mughal emperor Akbar commissioned the Tarikh-I Sher Shahi (history of the reign of Sher Shah) to be written. Interested in the history of administrative apparatuses during the reign of Afghan empire builder Farid Khan or Sher Shah (r.1540 – 1545), Akbar commanded Abbas Khan, an Afghan newswrite (waqia-navis) in his employ, to complete this work. The author of this source claims to have been related to the family of Sher Shah by marriage. This allegedly gave him an access to authentic information concerning the aspects of Sher Shah’s administration. The author also interviewed those who were contemporary to Sher Shah or had witnessed some important events. According to the editor, John Dowson, the work is “a biography, not a history.”
Although this source is in the form of a biography, it contains valuable historical information on political developments and state formation in northern India during the first half of the sixteenth century. The fluid political situation of this period, which witnessed the political transition from the Afghans to the Mughals, offered excellent opportunities to the sturdy warlords who staked claims at forming their own kingdoms. One of these warlords, Farid Khan succeeded in concentrating the resources and power, recruited militia, expanded his sphere of influence and eventually ousted the Mughals to form his own empire. Farid Khan achieved this by his political ingenuity and administrative skills that he learnt while managing his father’s jagir (revenue bearing land) in southern Bihar.
This is a valuable source for the South Asian history. The politically unsettled conditions of the first half of the sixteenth century remind of the similar circumstances in the first half of the eighteenth century. The region that had given rise to Sher Shah once again harbored many warlords cum state-builders who were accumulating more wealth and power. Taking cue from these warlords and after an initial foray into zamindari, the EIC expanded militarily and politically and formed its own Indian empire.
Táríkh-i Sher Sháhí; or, Tuhfat-i Akbar Sháhí, of 'Abbás Khán Sarwání
[Praise of God and the Prophet.]
1The First Chapter contains the history of the reign of Sher Sháh Súr. The Second relates the history of the reign of Islám Sháh, son of Sher Sháh Súr. The Third Chapter concerns the history of the princes who were descended from Sher Sháh, and who, subsequent to Islám Khán, laid claim to the sovereignty, and struck coin and read the khutba in their own names; and who dethroned the son of Islam Sháh.
I, the humble sweeper of the threshold of the dweller in the palace the Second Alexander, the author of the history of the reigns of the Afgháns—'Abbás, son of Shaikh 'Alí Sarwání— write by order of the Emperor Akbar.
I derive my information from trustworthy Afgháns, skilled in the science of history and in rhetoric, who accompanied the king from the beginning of his fortunes to the end of his reign, and were employed in his confidential service. I have written also what I have well ascertained from others. Whatever was opposed to the information thus acquired, and could not stand the touchstone of truth, I have rejected.
When Sultán Bahlol, of the family of Sáhú-khail, of the tribe of Lodi Afghán, possessed the throne of Dehlí, there were many persons in the various kingdoms of Hind who struck coin, and had the khutba read in their own names, and who were hostile to him.
Sultán Mahmúd bin Sultán Ibráhím Sharkí possessed the throne of Jaunpúr, Sultán Mahmúd Khiljí reigned in Málwá, Sultán Kutbu-d dín in Gujarát, Sultán 'Aláu-d dín Ahmad Sháh in the Dekhin, and Sultán Zainu-l 'ábidín in Kashmír; but the names of the rulers of Bengal2 and Tatta are not known to me. The ruler of Multán was Shaikh Yúsuf, the spiritual successor of Shaikh Makhdúm Baháu-d dín Zakariyá Kuraishí. As long as Sultán Bahlol remained within the great city of Dehlí, the capital, no one of these Sultáns placed the foot of presumption in the plain of opposition.
Ráí Síhar Langáh, Zamíndár of Zábírí,3 having expelled Shaikh Yúsuf from the city of Multán, himself assumed the kingdom, with the title of Sultán Kutbu-d dín. Shaikh Yúsuf came to Dehlí and entreated the Sultán's aid. Sultán Bahlol and his veteran army having accordingly set out for Multán, in company with Shaikh Yúsuf, Sultán Mahmúd of Jaunpúr came to Dehlí and besieged it.
Sultán Bahlol was at Dípálpúr when he heard the distressing intelligence of the siege of Dehlí, and he said to his nobles and ministers: “The countries of Hind are broad and rich, and their kings are of Indian extraction. In my own land I have many kinsmen renowned for their valour and strength, who are pressed for a livelihood. Were they here they would be relieved from the contempt of poverty, and I could grasp Hind and destroy my enemies.”
His chiefs replied: “*** It is expedient under present circumstances that His Majesty the Sultán should send letters to the chiefs of the tribes in the Roh country to this effect: ‘God in his goodness has granted the kingdom of Dehlí to the Afgháns, but the other kings of Hind wish to expel them from the country. The honour of our women is concerned; the lands of Hind are broad and rich, and can afford maintenance to many. Come, then, to this country; the name indeed of sovereignty shall remain with me, but whatever countries we may conquer shall be shared between us as brothers. Sultán Mahmúd of Jaunpúr is now besieging Dehlí, where the families of the Afgháns are. If you feel disposed to assist me, you must do so now, and with a large force.’” ** The king, approving of this advice, issued farmáns to the chiefs of the various Afghán tribes. On receipt of the farmáns, the Afgháns of Roh came, as is their wont, like ants and locusts, to enter the king's service.
When they drew near to Dehlí, a force was sent by Sultán Mahmúd Sharkí to give them battle. Fath Khán Hirawí, Sipah-sálár of Sultán Mahmúd, had with him a large force, and elephants like mountains; but the Afgháns, in a moment, overthrew his army and levelled it with the dust. When Sultán Mahmúd heard of the death of Fath Khán, he fled without fighting, and of the countries of Hind a considerable portion fell on this occasion into the possession of Sultán Bahlol.
Kálú Khán, chief of the Mahmúd-khail, of the family of Sáhú-khail Bahlolí, was wounded in the engagement above mentioned, and Sultán Bahlol sent him a present of money by way of recompense; but he refused it, saying, “I did not come here to sell my wounds.” At the same time, many of the chiefs of name besought the king for leave to depart. The king entreated them to remain, but they said:—“We came on this occasion to succour and assist you, to save the reputation and honour of your women. Dismiss us now we entreat of you, hereafter we will again return to your service.” The king loaded them with presents of money and goods of all kinds, beyond their utmost expectations, and provided them with everything they could possibly want. Such Afgháns as chose to remain in his service he ennobled, and gave them jágírs to their full content. Kálú Khán, however, said:—“Your Majesty must excuse my declining to accept anything, as I did not come to this country from any worldly motives.”
When the chiefs of the tribes of Roh had gone, the king commanded his nobles, saying:—“Every Afghán who comes to Hind from the country of Roh to enter my service, bring him to me. I will give him a jágír more than proportioned to his deserts, and such as shall content him; but if he for reasons of kindred or friendship prefers remaining in the service of any one of you, do you provide for him to his satisfaction; for if I hear of one Afghán from Roh returning thither again for want of a livelihood or employment, I will resume the jágírs of that noble who may have refused to entertain him.” When the Afgháns of Roh heard of this, and saw the favour and affection of the king towards them, they began every day, every month, and every year, to arrive in Hind, and received jágírs to their heart's content.
It was at the time of this bounty of Sultán Bahlol, that the grandfather of Sher Sháh, by name Ibráhím Khán Súr,4 with his son Hasan Khán, the father of Sher Sháh, came to Hindu-stán from Afghánistán, from a place which is called in the Afghán tongue “Shargarí,”5 but in the Multán tongue “Rohrí.” It is a ridge, a spur of the Sulaimán Mountains, about six or seven kos in length, situated on the banks of the Gumal. They entered into the service of Muhabbat Khán Súr, Dáúd Sáhú-khail, to whom Sultán Bahlol had given in jágír the parganas of Hariána and Bahkála, etc., in the Panjáb, and they settled in the pargana of Bajwára.
Sher Sháh was born in the reign of Sultán Bahlol, and they named him Faríd Khán.6
After some time had elapsed, Ibráhím Khán left Muhabbat Khán, and entered the service of Jamál Khán Sárang-kháni, of Hisár-Fírozah, who bestowed on him several villages in pargana Nárnaul for the maintenance of forty horsemen. And Míán Hasan Khán, the father of Faríd Khán, entered the service of Masnad-i 'álí 'Umar Khán Sarwání Kalkapúr, who bore the title of Khán-i 'azam, and was a counsellor and courtier of Sultán Bahlol. After the death of Masnad-i 'álí Tátár Khán, Bahlol gave (the government of) Láhore to this 'Umar Khán, who held as jágírs, in the sirkár of Sirhind, Bhatnúr, Sháhábád, and Páelpúr; and 'Umar Khán gave several villages in the pargana of Sháhábád as a jágír to Hasan Khán.
After some time, Faríd Khán said to his father Hasan Khán, “Take me before Masnad-i 'álí 'Umar Khán, and say for me: ‘Faríd Khán wishes to serve you—order him on any duty of which he is capable.’” Hasan Khán declined compliance on account of his tender age, recommending him to wait some time longer. Faríd Khán then spoke to his mother, and his mother said to Hasan Khán—“Since he desires to see the Masnad-i 'álí, take him with you—perhaps he may be pleased at the request of so young a boy, and give him something” Hasan Khán, to please Faríd and his mother, took him with him before Masnad-i 'álí 'Umar Khán, and said:—“Faríd wishes to serve you.” 'Umar Khán replied—“Faríd is now a little boy; when he is fit for my service I will employ him. For the present I give him Balhú, a hamlet of the village of Maháwalí.”7 Hasan Khán and Faríd Khán were exceedingly delighted, and when Faríd got home he said to his mother—“My father would not take me but at your request, and Masnad-i 'álí has given me a village in pargana Sháhábád.”
Several years after this, Ibráhím Khán, the father of Hasan Khán, died at Nárnaul. Hasan Khán, when he heard of his father's death, left Sháhábád, and coming before 'Umar Khán, who was with Sultán Bahlol's army, requested leave of absence to condole with the members of his father's family and retainers, saying he would return with them, for that he would not quit 'Umar Khán's service for any worldly advancement. 'Umar Khán replied: “You are aware that I have already given you your share of the jágírs which I possess, nor can I entertain more men. Your father's retainers now all look to you. You will be able to obtain you father's jágír, or even a larger one than your father's was. I am not so unjust to my own tribe as to keep you on a small jágír.” Such were the Afghán nobles, and such their favour towards their own race and kindred, that if they saw their Afgháns could elsewhere obtain more than they themselves were able to give, they at once sent them with recommendations in search of better employment.
Hasan Khán was well pleased, and the next day Masnad-i 'álí sent for Jamál Khán, and strongly recommending Hasan Khán to him, persuaded him to bestow on him his father's jágír, with several villages in addition to it, and said, “Whatever kindness you show to Hasan Khán, you will be doing a favour to me.” Then giving Hasan Khán a horse and a dress of honour, he dismissed him. After this, Hasan Khán did such service for Jamál Khán as satisfied and pleased him.
After Sultán Bahlol's death, Sikandar his son succeeded, and conquered Jaunpúr from his brother Baibak, and conferred the súbah on Jamál Khán, and ordered him to keep up 12,000 horse, and to assign them jágírs. Jamál Khán, who was much pleased with Hasan Khán's good service, took him with him, and gave him in jágír the parganas of Sahsarám, Hájípúr, and Tánda,8 near Benares, to maintain 500 horsemen.
Hasan Khán had eight sons. Faríd Khán and Nizám Khán were born of one Afghán mother; 'Alí and Yúsuf of another mother; Khurram9 and Shádí Khán of a third; Sulaimán and Ahmad of a fourth.
Hasan Khán did not care for or love the mother of Faríd and Nizám, but was very fond of his slave-girls, and was especially attached to the mother of Sulaimán and Ahmad; and she gained such influence over Hasan Khán, that she entirely ruled him. Angry words often passed between Hasan and Faríd. When he was assigned jágírs, Míán Hasan showed little partiality to Faríd, and did not give him a jágír which contented him. Faríd Khán, annoyed with his father, went to Jamál Khán at Jaunpúr. When Míán Hasan discovered that Faríd had gone there, he wrote to Jamál Khán thus: “Faríd Khán, being annoyed with me, has gone to you without sufficient cause. I trust in your kindness to appease him, and send him back; but if refusing to listen to you, he will not return, I trust you will keep him with you, for I wish him to be instructed in religious and polite learning.”
Jamál Khán sent for Faríd, and advised him in every possible way to return to his father; but he refused, and said, “If my father wants me back to instruct me in learning, there are in this city many learned men: I will study here.” Jamál Khán made no further objection. Faríd employed himself in studying Arabic at Jaunpúr. He also studied thoroughly the Káfíá,10 with the commentaries of Kází Shahábu-d dín, and the biographies of most of the kings of ancient times. He had got by heart the Sikandar-náma, the Gulistán, and Bostán, etc., and was also reading the works of the philosophers. Subsequently, whenever, during his reign, learned men came to ask him for a maintenance (madad-ma'ásh), he used to ask them about the Háshia-i Hindia, and he still retained his liking for books of history and the lives of ancient kings.
It happened after some years, that Hasan Khán came to Jamál Khán, when all his kinsmen who were in Jaunpúr reproached him for having sent Faríd away from his presence for the sake of a slave-girl; and they remarked that Faríd Khán, young as he was, gave promise of future greatness; that he bore the marks of excellence on his forehead, and that in all the tribe of Súr there was none who possessed learning, talent, wisdom, and prudence like him; and he had qualified himself so well, that if Hasan Khán would entrust him with the charge of a pargana, he would discharge it excellently well, and perfectly perform all his duties. Hasan Khán assented to what his kindred said, and replied, “Pacify him and bring him to me; I will agree to whatever you say.” His friends replied, “As you are generally in Jaunpúr in attendance on Jamál Khán, it is advisable you should entrust the administration of your two parganas to Faríd.” Hasan Khán agreed to his kinsmen's request. In great glee they came to Faríd, and said, “Míán Hasan has agreed to everything we have said in your behalf, and has dissented from nothing. It behoves you also to assent to what we say to you.” Faríd Khán replied, “I will agree to anything you may say, nor will I ever draw back from it; but as soon as Hasan Khán sees the face of the slave-girl, he will do whatever she tells him.” His kinsmen rejoined: “Do you nevertheless agree; if he departs from his agreement with us, we will remonstrate with him.”
When Faríd heard these words of his kinsmen, he said, “To please you I accept the management of the two districts. I will not fail to do my duty to the best of my power.” Faríd Khán, much pleased, accompanied his relatives to his father's presence. His father also was much gratified, and kept him for some months with him. Afterwards, Hasan Khán wished to send Faríd to the parganas; but Faríd representing to Hasan Khán that he wished first to speak with him, he obtained leave to do so, and thus began: “Many soldiers and subordinates, our kinsmen, have jágírs in these parganas. I shall devote myself to increase the prosperity of the district, and that depends on a just administration; for it has been said by the learned:” *** When Hasan Khán heard his son's speech he was much gratified, and said:—“I will give you the power both to grant and to resume the soldier's jágírs, and I will not reverse anything you may do.” He accordingly sent Faríd Khán to his two parganas, with every mark of favour.
When he got to his jágírs, he said:—“Let all the head men, (mukaddamán) and the cultivators (muzárí'án) on whose labour the prosperity of the district depends, and all the village accountants (patwárís), attend my presence. When they came, he summoned also the soldiery, and thus addressed them:—“My father (abú) has committed to me the power of appointing and dismissing you. I have set my heart on improving the prosperity of the district, in which object also your own interests are concerned; and by this means I hope to establish my reputation.” *** When he had finished exhorting the soldiery, he turned to the peasantry, and said:—“This day I give you your choice as to your mode of payment. Do whatever is most advantageous to your own interests in every possible way.”
Some of the head-men asked for written agreements for a fixed money rent;11 others preferred payment in kind (kismat-í ghalla). Accordingly he gave leases and took agreements, and fixed the payments for measuring the fields (jaríbána), and the fees for the tax-collectors and measurers (muhassilána); and he said to the Chaudharis and head-men:—“I know well that the cultivation depends on the humble peasants, for if they be ill off they will produce nothing, but if prosperous they will produce much. I know the oppressions and exactions of which you have been guilty towards the cultivators; and for this reason I have fixed the payments for measurements, and the tax-gatherers' fees,—that if you exact from the cultivators more on this account than is fixed, it may not be credited to you in making up your accounts. Be it known to you, that I will take the accounts of the fees in my own presence. Whatever dues are rightly taken I will sanction, and compel the cultivators to pay them; and I will also collect the Government dues for the autumn harvest in the autumn, and for the spring harvest in the spring; for balances of Government dues are the ruin of a pargana, and the cause of quarrels between the cultivators and the Government officers. It is right for a ruler to show leniency to the cultivators at the period of measurement, and to have a regard to the actual produce; but when the time of payment comes he should show no leniency, but collect the revenue with all strictness. If he perceives the cultivators are evading payment, he should so chastise them as to be an example to others not to act in the same way.” He then said to the peasantry:—“Whatever matter you have to represent, bring it always yourselves to me. I will suffer no one to oppress you.”
Having thus addressed them, he dismissed them with honorary dresses to carry on their cultivation. After dismissing the cultivators, he said to his father's officers:—“The cultivators are the source of prosperity. I have encouraged them and sent them away, and shall always watch over their condition, that no man may oppress and injure them; for if a ruler cannot protect humble peasantry from the lawless, it is tyranny to exact revenue from them. There are certain zamíndárs who have been behaving contumaciously in these parganas, who have not presented themselves at the Governor's court (mahkama-i-hákim), do not pay their full revenue, and harass the villages in their neighbourhood—how shall I overcome and destroy them?” They replied:—“Most of the troops are with Míán Hasan; wait a few days and they will return.” Faríd said, “I cannot have patience while they refuse to come to me, and continue to oppress and injure the people of God; do you consider what I can contrive against these rebels, and how I may chastise them.”
He ordered his father's nobles to saddle 200 horses, and to see how many soldiers there were in the pargana, and he sent for all the Afgháns and men of his tribe who were without jágírs, and said to them,—“I will give you subsistence and clothing till Míán Hasan returns. Whatever goods or money you may get from the plunder of these rebels is yours, nor will I ever require it of you; and whoever among you may distinguish himself, for him I will procure a good jágír from Míán Hasan. I will myself give you horses to ride on.” When they heard this they were much pleased, and said they would not fail in doing their duty under his auspices. He put the men who had engaged to serve him in good humour by all sorts of favours, and by gifts of clothes, etc., and presented them also with a little money.
He then sent to the cultivators for horses, saying, “Bring your horses to me as a loan for a few days, as I particularly require them. When I return after finishing this business, I will give you back your horses.” They willingly and cheerfully agreed to lend their horses, and from every village they brought one or two horses, and put on the saddles which they had ready in their houses, etc. Faríd gave to every one of his soldiers who had not one of his own, a horse to ride, and hastened against the rebels, and plundered their villages, bringing away the women and children, cattle and property. To the soldiery he made over all the property and quadrupeds which came into their possession; but the women and children and the peasantry he kept himself in confinement, and sent to the head-men, saying:—“Pay me my rights; if not, I will sell your wives and children, and will not suffer you to settle anywhere again. Wherever you may go, thither will I pursue you; and to whatever village you may go, I will command the head men to seize and make you over to me, or else I will attack them also.” When the head-men heard these words, they sent to say: “Pardon our past offences, and if hereafter we do anything you do not approve, punish us in any way you choose.” Faríd Khán sent to say in reply, “Give security, in order that if you offend and abscond, your security may be held responsible for your appearance.” So the head-men, whose wives and families he had in confinement, paid what was due from them to Government, and gave security for their appearance, and so released their wives and families.
There were some zamíndárs who had committed all sorts of offences, such as theft and highway robbery, and refusing to pay revenue, never came to the Governor's presence, but were insolent from confidence in their numbers. Although these were often warned, they took no heed. Faríd Khán collected his forces, and commanded that every one of his villagers who had a horse should come riding upon it, and that he who had not a horse should come on foot. And he took with him half his own soldiers, and the other half he employed in collecting revenue and other local duties.
When the soldiers and peasantry were assembled, he marched towards the villages of the recusants, and at a distance of a kos threw up an earthen entrenchment; and ordered them to cut down the neighbouring jungle. His horsemen he directed to patrol round the villages; to kill all the men they met, and to make prisoners of the women and children, to drive in the cattle, to permit no one to cultivate the fields, to destroy the crops already sown, and not to permit any one to bring anything in from the neighbouring parts, nor to allow any one of them to carry anything out of the village, and to watch them day and night; and he every day repeated the order to his force to invest the village, and not to permit a soul to go out. His footmen he also ordered to cut down the jungle. When the jungle was all cut down, he marched from his former position, and made another entrenchment nearer the village, and occupied it. The rebels were humbled, and sent a representative saying, that if Faríd Khán would pardon their fault, they would submit. Faríd Khán replied that he would not accept their submission, and that there could be nothing but hostility between him and them; to whichever God might please, he would give the victory.
Although the rebels humbled themselves in every way, and offered to pay a large sum of money, yet Faríd Khán would not accept the money, but said to his men:—“This is the way of these rebels: first they fight and oppose their rulers; if they find him weak, they persist in their rebelliousness; but if they see that he is strong, they come to him deceitfully and humble themselves, and agree to pay a sum of money, and so they persuade their ruler to leave them alone; but as soon as they find an opportunity, they return to their evil ways. ***
Early in the morning, Faríd Khán mounted and attacked the criminal zamíndárs, and put all the rebels to death, and making all their women and children prisoners, ordered his men to sell them or keep them as slaves; and brought other people to the village and settled them there. When the other rebels heard of the death, imprisonment, and ruin of these, they listened to wisdom, repented of their contumacy, and abstained from theft and robbery.
If any soldier or peasant had a complaint, Faríd would examine it in person, and carefully investigate the cause, nor did he ever give way to carelessness or sloth.
In a very short time, both parganas became prosperous, and the soldiery and peasantry were alike contented. When Míán Hasan heard of this, he was much pleased; and in all companies used to make mention of the prosperity of his parganas, the gallantry of his son, and the subjection of the zamíndárs.
The fame of Faríd's wisdom was noised abroad over the kingdom of Bihár, and all the nobles of that country who heard of it praised it. He gained a reputation among men, and satisfied and pleased all his friends and others, except a few enemies, such as the mother of Sulaimán.
When, after some time, Míán Hasan came to his home from attendance on Masnad-i 'álí Míán Jamál Khán, all the vassals and soldiery with one voice unanimously proclaimed their wellbeing, and he witnessed himself the prosperity of the country and replenishment of the treasury, and was extremely delighted with Faríd. The dislike which he formerly entertained was dispelled, and he distinguished both brothers with all kinds of favours. “I am now old,” he said, “nor can I bear the labour and trouble and thought of governing the parganas and the soldiery while I live; do you manage them.”
This speech displeased Sulaimán and his mother, and they made all kinds of lying and false complaints to Míán Hasan, and the money which Faríd had, for his sister's wedding, given to Sulaimán, they changed, and showed to Míán Hasan, declaring it was bad. Every day they complained and railed against Faríd Khán, but Míán Hasan gave ear to none of them. Sulaimán and his mother perceived that Míán Hasan was not incensed against Faríd by their lying complaints, but said to them, “It is not right that you should always rail at Faríd. Except you two, there is not a person among my friends, soldiers, or vassals, who complains of him; and I also am satisfied and grateful for his conduct and excellent behaviour, for both my parganas are prosperous.”
When the mother of Sulaimán heard Míán Hasan thus speak, she was overcome with grief, and discontinued complaining to Míán Hasan, but from that day seldom held any intercourse with Míán Hasan. She publicly displayed her grief, and the love and the intimacy which Míán Hasan had previously enjoyed with her were interrupted. Míán Hasan perceived her great affliction, and one day said to her, “What is the cause of your grief? and what is the reason of your shunning me?” She replied, “I was once your humble slave, you distinguished me by your love and affection, and the rest of your family, from envy, are little affectionate towards me; nor yet, to the best of my ability, have I failed in my duty to them. He (Faríd) is your eldest son, and looks to succeed to your position, and if, during your life, you do not distinguish my sons as well as Faríd, nor give them the management of a pargana, I will in your presence kill myself and my sons; for in your lifetime they should acquire property. Faríd and your kindred, who are my enemies, after your death will insult and turn us out of the parganas. Therefore, it is better for us to die in your presence, than to survive dishonoured among our enemies.”
Míán Hasan, bound in the chain of her love, and helpless from the force of his affection (from which to the lover there is no escape), was persuaded by her, and withdrew his fickle affections from his eldest son, and sought to remove him from the country, and to place his other sons in his room. The mother of Sulaimán said, “I hope much from your love, but your relatives will not permit you to take away the management of the parganas from Faríd.” Míán Hasan, who was entangled in the noose of her love, swore a solemn oath to her and appeased her.
After this Míán Hasan sought to discover some fault in Faríd, and to remove him, and employed himself in examining his actions. Excessive aversion was kindled and angry words passed between Míán Hasan and Faríd. When Faríd discovered that Míán Hasan had promised the mother of Sulaimán that he would give the management of both parganas to her sons, and had violated the promise which he had given to his kinsmen, Faríd threw up the management of them, and sent to Míán Hasan, saying, “So long as I saw my father's affections and kindness turned towards me, I carried on the business of the parganas—now make anybody manager you like. Certain persons from envy and enmity have conveyed to your hearing reports which have grieved you. My father, inquire into them, as I shall show you how.” ***
Míán Hasan sent to Faríd in reply, saying, “There is no reason that I should make inquiries; for while I was even absent with the army, I understood the real state of the parganas, and that you doubled the prosperity of the country. And if you have appropriated anything, well and good. It is your own property, and it is no reproach. *** Your degenerate brothers, Sulaimán and the rest, give me daily annoyance. I do not think they are able to manage the country. However much I advise, it makes no impression on them: they have taken away my rest and peace, and their mother is interfering perpetually in my affairs on behalf of her sons. I am obliged to permit Sulaimán and Ahmad to act for a short time as shikkdárs of the parganas, that I may be freed from this daily and nightly vexation.” When Faríd heard these words from his father, he said, “The two parganas are my father's, let him give their management to whomsoever he will.”
When Míán Hasan's relations heard that he had taken away the management of the two parganas from Faríd, and was intending to confer it on Sulaimán and Ahmad, and that Faríd was preparing to go to Ágra to gain his livelihood (for in those days Ágra was the capital city), they came to Míán Hasan, and said:—“It is not right for you to take away the management of the parganas from this son, and give it to Sulaimán and Ahmad; for Faríd, by his care, has doubled their prosperity, and has so established his authority in them, as no one ever before did, nor has he committed any fault for which he ought to be removed. It is not right to quarrel with such an able son in your old age; especially in these times, when the authority of Sultán Ibráhím is shaken, and every Afghán of influence is aiming at power and independence.”
Míán Hasan replied to his relatives, “I know it is not right to grieve Faríd; but what can I do? for Sulaimán and his mother have driven me into a strait, nor do they give me a moment's rest. *** I am an old man, the time of my death is near at hand. I cannot break my promise. I give the management of the parganas to Sulaimán and Ahmad during my life. If they govern well, so that the parganas prosper, the people are happy and the soldiery content, well and good; for then during my lifetime they will acquire a good name. For thus Faríd has gained a name among men, and has gladdened my heart. Wheresoever he may go, he will be able to gain his own livelihood. But if they prove unfit, they will (at any rate) be for some time during my life laying up worldly goods. Of this I am certain, that after my death the government of the parganas will be conferred on Faríd, who is deserving of it.” ***
When his kinsmen heard this reply of Míán Hasan, they said, “You send Faríd away from you to please a slave-girl! It is wrong in these times to stir up strife for a slave-girl's sake. For from the proceedings of the Lohánís in Bihár, it appears that they will shortly throw off the king's yoke, and declare their independence. It has been said, ‘it is wrong to place confidence in women,’” etc. *** But in spite of what his relatives said, Míán Hasan, who was a captive in the bonds of his love for the slave-girl, did not assent to their representation.
When Faríd entertained no longer any hope from Míán Hasan, he took leave of his friends, and set off for Ágra, by way of Káhnpúr (Cawnpore), which pargana then belonged to the jágír of 'Azím Humáyún Sarwání, who there maintained a large number of followers. Most of the Sarwánís were settled in that neighbourhood. When Faríd reached Káhnpúr, the Sar-wánís who were connected by marriage with Míán Hasan entertained Faríd. Among them, one Shaikh Isma'íl was present. Faríd asked who he was. The Sarwánís at first said that he was a Sarwání; but afterwards that he was a Súr of Faríd's own tribe, but that his mother was a Sarwání. Faríd said to him, “Why did you not tell me you were a Súr?” Shaikh Isma'íl said, “I did not tell you that I was a Sarwání, but if they said so, what fault is it of mine?” Faríd said to Shaikh Isma'íl, “Come with me.” Shaikh Isma'íl and Ibráhím both accompanied Faríd, and in the battle in which Faríd defeated Kutb Sháh, King of Bengal, Isma'íl greatly distinguished himself. Habíb Khán Kákar, who was his sister's son and lived in his house, slew Kutb Sháh with an arrow, and as Habíb Khán was a follower of Shaikh Isma'íl, the latter got the credit of having killed Kutb Sháh. On that occasion, Faríd gained the surname of Sher Sháh, and he bestowed that of Shujá'at Khán on Shaikh Isma'íl. When Sher Sháh Súr gained the kingdom of Hindustán, he bestowed the government of Mandú on him, and gave to Ibráhím Khán, who also attained to great consideration, the title of Sarmast Khán.
It so happened that when Faríd arrived at Ágra, Daulat Khán, the son of Budhú (who had been brought up in 'Azím Humáyún Sarwání's house), held the command of 12,000 horse, and was in great favour with Sultán Ibráhím. Faríd Khán chose Daulat Khán for his patron, and did him such good service that Daulat Khán often said: “I am ashamed to look Faríd Khán in the face; if he will only say what I can do for him, I will not fail to use my utmost endeavours to accomplish his desire, only let him say what he wants.”
When Faríd understood that Daulat Khán took an interest in his affairs, he wrote saying, “Míán Khán is old, and his senses are failing him, and he is spell-bound and infatuated with a Hindu slave-girl. Whatever she tells him he does, and has permitted her to manage his districts, and she has trampled on all his relatives, and disgusted his soldiery and the people he rules. Both parganas are falling to ruin from the folly of this slave-woman. If the king will confer on me the two parganas, I and my brother will, with 500 horse, serve him in any place or way he orders, in addition to the service Míán Hasan now renders. When Daulat Khán heard his request, he encouraged him in every possible way, and said, “Be of good heart, for I will tell the king the truth about Míán Hasan, and will get the parganas taken from your father and given to you.”
Daulat Khán, on representing the state of Míán Hasan's case to the king, said:—“Faríd is the ablest of his sons, and has long managed the parganas. The soldiery and inhabitants are content with him. If the king will bestow on him the management of the two parganas, he and his brother will do whatever duty you may command with 500 horse.” The king replied, “He is a bad man who complains against and accuses his own father.” Daulat Khán informed Faríd, and said:—“This reply came from the king's own mouth, but do not you be cast down. God willing, I will get for you the management of these two parganas, and will, moreover, watch over your interests.” When Faríd heard the matter, he was grieved, but to please Daulat Khán remained with him. He assisted Faríd with money, and indeed gave him such a daily allowance as to enable him to accumulate somewhat.
After some time Míán Hasan died. On the third day after his death Sulaimán placed Míán Hasan's turban on his own head, and was sitting among his friends when Míán Nizám came, accompanied by his partisans, and took the turban from off Sulaimán's head, saying, “It does not become you, in the absence of your elder brother, who is celebrated for every excellent quality, and is on service with the king, to place the turban of Míán Hasan on your own head. Have a fear of God! Have you no shame before the people of the Lord, that you thus act in contravention of law and custom, and create a cause of contention? During our father's life you acted ungenerously to Faríd through your mother's influence; on my father's account I could say nothing. Had it been otherwise, your strength and courage should have been tried; but now such conduct is no longer right. It behoves you to act to Faríd in a very different manner from what you have in times past; and abandon strife, for it is not good to contend with your elder brother. Míán Hasan in his lifetime assigned separate jágírs to his sons; be content with this, and resign your superiority; for it is your elder brother's right. If you will not give up fighting, you will become dependent on others; nor will any one speak well of you. Contention will only get you a bad name and ruin the parganas.” Sulaimán said, “If my brother treats me with any kindness, I cannot choose but serve him.”
After this Míán Nizám wrote to Faríd, telling him of the death of Míán Hasan, and of the whole affair. When Faríd got the news, he performed the usual mourning, and told Daulat Khán the posture of affairs as regarded Sulaimán. Daulat Khán said, “Do not be anxious. Please God, the king will give you the government of the two parganas.” Daulat Khán told the king the news of Míán Hasan's death, and procuring farmáns for the two parganas, gave them to Faríd, and procured him also leave to go to his jágír, that he might establish his possession and authority over them, and console his family and followers; after which he was again to present himself before the king. When Faríd arrived, all his relations and all the soldiery came out to meet him, and yielded obedience to the farmán. Sulaimán, unable to oppose him, went away to Muhammad Khán Súr Dáúd-Sháh-khail, governor of the pargana of Chaundh, etc., who commanded 1500 horse. As there had been some little ill-feeling between this Muhammad Khán and Hasan Khán, he desired nothing better than that the brothers should quarrel, and both become dependent on him. He said to Sulaimán, “Have patience for a short while, for Faríd has got a royal farmán for the government. But Sultán Ibráhím has maltreated the nobles of Sultán Bahlol and Sultán Sikandar, and they have all retired to their own districts, and remain there. And the Khán-khánán Yúsuf-khail, who was governor of the Panjáb, etc., has sent his son Diláwar Khán to Kábul, to fetch the Emperor Bábar, and he is now coming back with the Mughals. There will be war between the two monarchs. If Sultán Ibráhím prevails, you must go to him, and I will write to him on your behalf, and describe Faríd as hostile to Míán Hasan, as well as yourself, and that Míán Hasan preferred you. Whatever assistance your fortune gives you, you will get; and if the Mughals conquer, I will by force take the parganas from Faríd, and give them to you.” Sulaimán replied, “I have taken refuge with you from fear of Faríd. Because there is none like you in the tribe of Súr, I place myself in your hands.” Shortly after Muhammad Khán sent his vakíl to Faríd with this message: “Listen to my advice, and have respect to my interference. I come to mediate between you; whichever of you declines my mediation will bring shame on his kindred.” Faríd Khán wrote in reply, “You are, indeed, very great and powerful, and the Dáúd-Sháh-khail is the most exalted among the tribes of Súr; the chieftaincy of the tribe is therefore yours of right. ** The truth is not hid from you, my lord; which is, that in my father's lifetime he was always disputing with me. Even after his death, I offered to give my three brothers a larger jágír than had been assigned to them during my father's lifetime, and I said to Sulaimán, ‘Let us put aside the ill-feeling that existed between us during our father's life, and let us pass the rest of our lives in amity and affection.’ *** I send my brother Nizám to bring him to me, and I will give him such a jágír as will satisfy him; but let him put aside the desire of sharing as his portion in (the government of) my pargana; for while I live he shall never obtain this.” When Muhammad Khán's vakíl reported what Faríd Khán had said and written, Muhammad Khán said to Sulaimán, “Faríd Khán will not give you a share quietly. I will make him do so by force.” ***
Sulaimán was much delighted; but the matter was reported to Faríd Khán, who consulted with his brother Nizám and his other adherents, and said, “I must ally myself with some one who will be able to oppose Muhammad Khán, and there is no one within reach except Bihár Khán, son of Daryá Khán Lohání. However, it is best to wait a little. If Sultán Ibráhím prevails, no one will be able to say a word against me; for do I not hold the Sultán's farmán? And if (which God avert) the Mughals should defeat Sultán Ibráhím, then indeed I must of necessity ally myself to Bihár Khán, and remain in his service.” After some time news came that the two monarchs had joined battle on the field of Pánípat, and that after a severe contest Sultán Ibráhim had been slain, and that the kingdom of Dehlí had fallen into the hands of the Emperor Bábar, in the year 932. **
Faríd Khán, being thus compelled, went to Bihár Khán, and entered into his service, and employed himself day and night in his business; nor did he rest one moment from it, and from this good service he gained Bihár Khán's favour; so that he had access to him in public and in private, and became one of his most intimate friends. In consequence of his excellent arrangements, he became celebrated throughout the country of Bihár. One day he went out hunting with Bihár Khán, and a tiger (sher) having been started, Faríd Khán slew it. Bihár Khán, who on the death of Sultán Ibráhím had assumed the title of “Sultán Muhammad,” and had caused coin to be struck, and the khutba to be read in his own name throughout the country of Bihár, gave to Faríd Khán, on account of this gallant encounter, the title of “Sher Khán,” and made him the deputy to his son Jalál Khán.
He performed the duties of deputy for a long time, but at length went on leave to visit his own parganas, where he delayed for some time. On account of his long absence, Sultán Muhammad used to talk reproachfully of him, and said, “Sher Khán promised to return very shortly, but has remained a long time away.” Those were days of confusion, no man put entire confidence in another.
Muhammad Khán Súr came to Sultán Muhammad and spoke detractingly of Sher Khán, saying, “He sees some probability of the advent of Sultán Mahmúd, the son of Sultán Sikandar, to whom many of the nobles and Afgháns have given in their adhesion. If Your Majesty commands me, I will contrive to bring Faríd Khán here without any stir. His brother Sulaimán is an able young man, to whom Hasan Khán during his lifetime made over the management of both his parganas, when he banished Sher Khán from his districts, who even formerly preferred an accusation against his own father, and of whom the Sultán said, ‘This is a bad man who complains even against his own father.’ When Hasan Khán died, Faríd Khán, through his patron Daulat Khán, obtained a grant of both parganas from Sultán Ibráhím. Sulaimán was also desirous of going to Sultán Ibráhím, to show the recommendatory letter which Míán Hasan when dying had written to the Sultán. But disturbances arose, and he was unable to go, and has now come to you to complain of his brother. If Your Majesty will confer these parganas on Sulaimán, Faríd Khán will very quickly come unto your presence again. It is now long since that Sulaimán, flying from him, sought refuge with me; and if he attains his rights, he will ever be your obliged servant.” Sultán Muhammad replied, “He has done me much good service, how can I give away his jágírs to another, and that for a trifling fault, and without inquiry? However, to please you they shall both bring their cause before you. Both are similarly related to you—do you favour neither, that the right may be established, and the dust of the enmity which exists between them may be allayed.”
Muhammad Khán, when he was dismissed, returned to his own jágír, and sent Shádí Khán, his confidential servant, to Faríd Khán with a message to this effect:—“It is not right for you to take possession of both parganas and to disinherit your brothers, and lay the foundation of strife among your own kindred. I have sent Shádí Khán to you, and I hope you will take heed to what he will say to you. Your brothers have now been a long time with me, and the laws and customs of the Afgháns are no secret to you.”
When Shádí came to Sher Khán, and delivered at full length Muhammad Khán's message, Sher Khán replied:—“Do you, Shádí Khán, tell the Khán from me, that this is not the Roh country that I should share equally with my brothers. The country of India is completely at the disposal of the king, nor has any one else any share in it, nor is there any regard to elder or younger, or to kindred. Sikandar Lodí thus decided: ‘If any noble dies, whatever money or other effects he may leave should be divided among his heirs according to the laws of inheritance; but his office and his jágírs and his military retinue let him confer on whichever of the sons he thinks most able; and in these no one else has a right to share, nor is any remedy open to them.’ Whatever goods and money my father left, Sulaimán with my brothers appropriated before he sought refuge with you. Hitherto, out of regard for my relationship to you, I have said nothing; but whenever he may quit you, I shall reclaim my share of my patrimonial inheritance from him. The jágír and office were conferred on me by Sultán Ibráhím; in them no one has any share. But I said to my brothers, ‘The jágírs which you enjoyed in my father's lifetime I will continue, nay increase to you; but no one can participate in my office.’ It does not become you to say, ‘Give up Tánda and Malhú to Sulaimán.’ I will not willingly yield them. If you take them by force, and give them to him, it is in your power to do so. I have not another word to say.”
When Shádí returned from Sher Khán, and reported the whole affair to Muhammad Khán, he was much enraged, and said to Shádí, “Take all my forces with you, seize parganas Tánda, and Malhú, and make them over to Sulaimán and Ahmad. If he resists you, fight him with all your might; and if you defeat and put him to flight, make over both parganas to Sulaimán, and, leaving your army to assist him, return to me, lest when he sees Sulaimán with few followers he will attack him.”
When this news reached Sher Khán, he wrote to Sukha, his slave (father of Khawás Khán), the shikkdár of Tánda and Malhú, near Benares, and with whom the greater part of Sher Khán's forces were, apprising him that Sulaimán, accompanied by Shádí Khán, was advancing against him, and directing him not to yield up Tánda and Malhú without resistance. When the army of Muhammad Khán approached, Sukha came out of the city to meet it. In the engagement which followed, Sukha was slain, and his army were defeated and fled to Sher Khán, at Sahsarám, nor did they even rally there.
Some persons advised Sher Khán to go to Sultán Muhammad, but he did not agree to this, saying, “These are uncertain times, the Sultán will not quarrel with Muhammad Khán for my sake. He will endeavour to bring about some compromise; but it is not my interest to enter into a compromise.” Míán Nizám Khán said, “If it be not your interest to make a compromise, I think it will be best to go to Patna; thence, through the intervention of some proper person, to procure an interview with Sultán Junaid Birlás, at Ágra, and to offer to enter his service. Perhaps this might afford an opportunity not only of vengeance on Muhammad Khán, but even of driving him out of Chaundh.” Sher Khán agreed to this, and went to Patna, and sent an agent to Sultán Junaid, at Ágra, saying, “If Sultán Junaid will give me his parole, and promise not to molest me, I will come and wait upon him, and serve him loyally with all my heart and soul.” Sultán Junaid agreeing to this, Sher Khán came to him, bringing with him a very large present. Sultán Junaid was much pleased, and gave him the aid of a large force to recover his parganas. Muhammad Khán and Sulaimán, unable to resist, fled to the hill of Rohtás, and Sher Khán got possession not only of his own parganas, but also of Chaundh and of several parganas which had formerly appertained to the crown. To many of the Afgháns and his kindred who had fled to the mountains, he wrote, promising to double their former jágírs, and said, “The honour of our women is one (to us all); I have accomplished my revenge, and have regained my parganas.” Consequent on the acquisition of these parganas, many Afgháns came to him. When he perceived that many of the Afgháns were collecting round him, he became at ease; gaining confidence, he dismissed the army which Sultán Junaid had sent to his aid with very handsome presents. Sher Khán then wrote to Muhammad Khán Súr, the former ruler of Chaundh, who had fled to the hills, to this effect: “Do not let any fear find its way to your heart, but make your mind quite easy, and come and take possession of your pargana. I have acquired several parganas which formerly paid revenue to Sultán Ibráhím, and do not covet the possessions of my kindred. This is a time of sedition and misfortunes. Every Afghán who has any forces is coveting my government and country, and it therefore behoves those who have the means in such a time to collect for their aid and assistance soldiery of their own tribe, so as to preserve their own dominion, and even gain fresh territory. This, therefore, is the wisest course; let us put away our former envy and hatred, and in place of it let us plant the young tree of love and kindness in our hearts, that it may bring forth the fruit of friendship; and this may be the means of our collecting our friends, and so of attaining high station and dignity.” On receiving Sher Khán's letter, Muhammad Khán came down from the hills, and again took possession of his own parganas of Chaundh, etc.; and he and Sher Khán forgave each other their previous enmity; and Muhammad Khán thus came under obligations to Sher Khán.
Sher Khán, being relieved from all apprehension as regarded Muhammad Khán, went to Sultán Junaid Birlás, at Ágra, and thence accompanied him to the presence of the Emperor Bábar; was admitted to his Court, was present during the affair of Chánderí, and remained for some time amongst the Mughals, and acquainted himself with their military arrangements, their modes of governing, and the character of their nobles. He often said among the Afgháns, “If luck aided me, and fortune stood my friend, I could easily oust the Mughals from Hindustán.” When people heard him speak thus, they ridiculed him, and used to say behind his back, “What vain boasting is this of Sher Khán's; he talks about a thing far beyond his power.”
I, 'Abbás, the writer of the adventures of Sher Khán, have heard from the mouth of Shaikh Muhammad my own uncle, whose age was nearly eighty years, the following story: “I was at the battle of Chánderí, with the force of the victorious Emperor Bábar, the second Farídún, and in attendance on the Khán Khánán Yúsuf-khail, who brought the Emperor Bábar from Kábul, and Shaikh Ibráhím Sarwání said to me, ‘Come to Sher Khán's quarters, and hear his impossible boastings, which all men are laughing at.’ And accordingly we rode over to Sher Khán's quarters. In the course of conversation, Shaikh Ibráhím said: ‘It is impossible that the empire should again fall into the hands of the Afgháns, and the Mughals be expelled from the country.’ Sher Khán replied: ‘Shaikh Muhammad, be you witness now between Shaikh Ibráhím and myself, that if luck and fortune favour me, I will very shortly expel the Mughals from Hind, for the Mughals are not superior to the Afgháns in battle or single combat; but the Afgháns have let the empire of Hind slip from their hands, on account of their internal dissensions. Since I have been amongst the Mughals, and know their conduct in action, I see that they have no order or discipline, and that their kings, from pride of birth and station, do not personally superintend the government, but leave all the affairs and business of the State to their nobles and ministers, in whose sayings and doings they put perfect confidence. These grandees act on corrupt motives in every case, whether it be that of a soldier's, or a cultivator's, or a rebellious zámíndár's. Whoever has money, whether loyal or disloyal, can get his business settled as he likes by paying for it; but if a man has no money, although he may have displayed his loyalty on a hundred occasions, or be a veteran soldier, he will never gain his end. From this lust of gold they make no distinction between friend and foe, and if fortune extends a hand to me, the Shaikh shall soon see and hear how I will bring the Afgháns under my control, and never permit them again to become divided.’”
After some time, Sher Khán waited upon the Emperor one day at an entertainment, when it happened that they placed before him a solid dish, which he did not know the customary mode of eating. So he cut it into small pieces with his dagger, and putting them into his spoon easily disposed of them. The Emperor Bábar remarked this, and wondered at Sher Khán's ingenuity, and said to Khalífa, his minister, who was at his elbow, “Keep an eye on Sher Khán; he is a clever man, and the marks of royalty are visible on his forehead. I have seen many Afghán nobles, greater men than he, but they never made any impression on me; but as soon as I saw this man, it entered into my mind that he ought to be arrested, for I find in him the qualities of greatness and the marks of mightiness.” When Sultán Junaid took his leave, he had recommended Sher Khán strongly to the minister.12 Sher Khán had also made him a very handsome present. So he replied to the Emperor: “Sher Khán is without blame, and does not command a sufficient force to become a cause of uneasiness to Your Majesty. If you arrest him, the Afgháns who are present with you will all become suspicious, nor will any other Afghán trust your faith and promises, and hence will arise disunion.” The Emperor was silenced; but Sher Khán sagaciously perceived that the Emperor had spoken something concerning him.
When Sher Khán got to his own quarters, he said to his men: “The Emperor to-day looked much at me, and said something to the minister; and cast evil glances towards me. This is not a fit place for me to remain—I shall go away.” Mounting at once, he left the army. Shortly afterwards the king missed Sher Khán from among the courtiers, and sent for him. The man who was despatched in search of him came to his quarters, but Sher Khán was gone. The Emperor said to the wazír, “If you had not hindered me, I would have arrested him at once; he is about to do something, God only knows what!”
When Sher Khán reached his jágír after leaving the army, he sent a handsome present to Sultán Junaid, and wrote to say, “I was necessitated to quit the king without taking leave. If I had asked for leave, he would not have given it to me. I was compelled to come to my jágír, for my brother Nizám wrote to say that Muhammad Khán and Sulaimán had represented to Sultán Muhammad that I had allied myself with the Mughals, by whose aid I had seized their parganas, and they offered, if ordered, to retake these districts. Sultán Muhammad, however, gave them no answer. When I heard this news, it was impossible for me to remain where I was. I am His Majesty's grateful servant; I will do whatever he desires.”
After this, Sher Khán took counsel with his brother Nizám and others, saying, “I have no longer any confidence in the Mughals, or they in me; I must go to Sultán Muhammad Khán.” He decided on this plan, and when he came to Sultán Muhammad, in Bihár, the latter was much delighted, for he had had experience of his great talent. He entrusted his son Jalál Khán to him, and said: “I make you my son's lieutenant. Do you instruct him with all your care, for he is of tender age.” Sher Khán was much pleased, and took great pains in the discharge of his office. When Sultán Muhammad died, his son Jalál Khán succeeded him, whose mother's name was Dúdú, a concubine; and being himself very young, his mother Dúdú ruled the kingdom, and she made Sher Khán her deputy in the Government of Bihár and its dependencies. After the death of Dúdú, Sher Khán also discharged the duties of the State as deputy for Jalál Khán.
An intimate friendship sprang up between Sher Khán and Makhdúm 'Álam, ruler of Hájípúr, a noble in the service of the King of Gaur and Bengal. The King of Bengal became displeased with Makhdúm 'Álam; for he (the king), having conceived a design of conquering Bihár from the Afgháns, despatched Kutb Khán with a large force for that purpose. Sher Khán earnestly and repeatedly remonstrated. *** Nevertheless, Kutb Khán gave no heed to his remonstrances. Sher Khán therefore said to his Afgháns, “With the Mughals on one side and the army of Bengal on the other, we have no resource save in our own bravery.” The Afgháns replied, “Be of good cheer, for we will fight to the utmost; we will never yield the field until we either conquer or die, nor will we be ungrateful to those we have served so long.” Sher Khán having prepared for a sturdy resistance, met the enemy. A severe action ensued, in which the Bengal army was defeated. In that engagement Shaikh Isma'íl much distinguished himself, and Kutb Khán and Habíb Khán Kákar were with him. Kutb Khán, leader of the Bengal army, was struck by an arrow, and falling off his horse, expired. Shaikh Isma'íl gained the victory, and Sher Khán bestowed on him the title of Shujá'at Khán.13 Of the treasure, horses, elephants, etc. which fell into his hands, Sher Khán did not give any part to the Lohánís, and so he became a man of wealth.
The Lohánís were much angered at this, and hostile feelings sprang up between them and Sher Khán; but they did not openly manifest them. Now Makhdúm 'Álam had not assisted Kutb Khán, and as this misfortune had befallen the latter, the King of Bengal sent an army against Makhdúm 'Álam. I, who am the author of the Tuhfa Akbar Sháhí, reckon among my ancestors 'Abbás Khán. Very many sons of 'Abbás Khán were in Sher Khán's service; (of these) he gave to Míán Hasnú the title of Daryá Khán. Among the Khán's nobles, none were equal to him, and he had married Sher Khán's own sister. This Daryá Khán died in the beginning of Sher Sháh's reign. My object in this detail is as follows: Since a connexion exists between Sher Sháh and myself, I am thus better acquainted with his history, which I have learnt from my ancestors. To be brief, Sher Khán was prevented by the hostility of the Lohánís from assisting in person Makhdúm 'Álam, but he sent Míán Hasnú Khán to his assistance. Makhdúm 'Álam made over all his property and worldly possessions to Sher Khán, saying, “If I am victorious, I will reclaim my property; if not, better you should have it than any other.” Makhdúm 'Álam was killed in battle, but Míán Hasnú Khán returned alive, and Makhdúm 'Álam's property fell to Sher Kkán.
The enmity between Sher Khán and the Lohánís increased daily, until the latter at last plotted to kill Sher Khán, and they thus took counsel among themselves, saying, “Sher Khán waits every day upon Jalál Khán with a very small retinue; let us pretend that Jalál Khán is ill. Sher Khán will go inside the palace to inquire after him. When he is returning, and has passed through one gate, and before he reaches the other, let us kill him, while thus inclosed between the two gates of Jalál Khán's palace.”
Some of the Lohánís, who were friends and connexions of Sher Khán, having heard of these machinations, told Sher Khán, who, before receiving the news, had, by his own penetration, discovered from the actions and motions of the Lohánís that they meditated some injury to himself. As he was a wise man he said nothing of the matter, but privately took precaution for his own safety; and all the land and property he had recently acquired he expended in enlisting fresh retainers, to whom he gave jágírs and maintenance to their heart's content; but to the Lohánís he gave nothing. When he perceived that he had got so large a number of new soldiers collected together that the Lohánís could not injure him or prevail against him in battle, he proclaimed the enmity of the Lohánís, and said to Jalál Khán, “You well know that the King of Bengal has the design to send an army and seize to-morrow, if not to-day, the kingdom of Bihár. The Lohánís for three or four descents have enjoyed jágírs, and live at their ease; nay, they even now covet all the newly acquired land. But I, who am your well-wisher, think it fit to entertain fresh men with the money and districts newly acquired; so that your power may be strengthened, and that when the enemy (i.e., the King of Bengal) sees our large force, he may abandon his designs on the kingdom. On this account the Lohánís are dissatisfied with me, and complain of me, and are plotting to do me injury, and out of envy and hatred make all kinds of false complaints and accusations to you against me. If you believe me loyal, uphold that which I have in all loyalty done, and dissuade the Lohánís from their hostility to me, nor listen to what they say. You know that the Lohánís are a much stronger and more powerful tribe than the Súrs; and the custom of the Afgháns is, that if any man has four kinsmen more than another, he thinks little of killing or dishonouring his neighbour. These are troublous times; are you not anxious, and on your guard? For myself, I know the Lohánís are plotting my death. From to-day I shall come to you with every precaution. Excuse me from coming inside of the palace, or, if it be indispensable that I should go within, permit me to enter it with a strong guard.”
Jalál Khán and the Lohánís perceived that Sher Khán had found them out in their designs, and that their plots had failed; so Jalál Khán said to Sher Khán, “What power have the Lohánís that they should regard you with an evil eye? All the Afghán race know that the Lohánís are a foul-mouthed people, and are without caution or prudence, and that their tongues are not under their control. They speak whatever comes to their lips, but they do not act upon it. Come to me, accompanied by your followers, in any manner that may reassure you, and permit no fear or anxiety to find a place in your mind. I will agree to whatever you do.”
Thus assuring Sher Khán in every way, Jalál Khán dismissed him. But after that, the Lohánís and Sher Khán distrusted each other, and there sprang up two parties; those of the Lohánís who had given intelligence to Sher Khán sided with him, and thus the Lohánís themselves became disunited. As enmity had arisen among them, a considerable number of the Lohánís bound themselves by vows and oaths to Sher Khán, who said to them, “I cannot choose but serve Jalál Khán loyally; his father and his mother both showed me kindness; when he was very young, I was appointed to educate him, and I did not fail to use my best endeavours in his education, as he well knows.” *** The Lohánís who had joined themselves to Sher Sháh replied: “The counsel which your heart has approved is very good; for between them and ourselves there has arisen deadly enmity: it is not fitting we should be in the same place.” *** Sher Khán said to the friendly Lohánís, “The scheme which I have devised for my own protection and the good of Jalál Khán is as follows: I shall say to Jalál Khán thus: ‘You have two matters in hand, one to oppose your enemy, the King of Bengal; the other, the preservation of the internal peace of the country, and the collection of revenue from the cultivators.’” *** The Lohánís answered: “You have now a large force with you; there is no necessity for retaining men who are seditious and ill-disposed. Say simply to Jalál Khán that he ought to send them away, and should give their jágírs to other soldiers.” Sher Khán replied: “My object is my own safety; out of regard for one's own life, it is not good to confirm the hostility of one's enemies.” *** All present assented, and afterwards Sher Khán wrote to Jalál Khán in the following terms: “When Sultán Muhammad exalted me to Your Majesty's deputyship, this was displeasing to the envious Lohánís. After Sultán Muhammad's death, your mother employed me in the administration of the kingdom. The envy of the Lohánís increased, and they constantly complained of me, both openly and secretly; but as my skirts were free from the contamination of dishonesty, how much soever they searched my conduct, they could find in my acts no opening through which they might effect my removal from the office of deputy. ** The Mughals who conquered the country from Sultán Ibráhím did not do so by the sword, but through the quarrels which the Afgháns had among themselves. It has become known to me from a great many sources that the Lohánís wish to assassinate me, and day and night employ themselves in contriving how to get me out of the way, and presume on the greater number of their tribe. And you also have two objects: one to oppose your enemy, the ruler of Bengal; the other, to preserve the kingdom against internal enemies, and to collect the revenues. Since your army is split into two parties, opposed to each other, it is impossible to keep them both in one place; therefore, whichever of the two it pleases you keep with yourself, send the other to their jágírs. I have spoken because it was incumbent on me. A man's life is dear to him, he will not part with it for nothing.”
When Jalál Khán was informed of this representation, he said to Sher Khán's vakíl: “Tell Sher Khán that he has right on his side. *** Let him wait a little, for I have powerful enemies: this sedition must be repressed by degrees. I will distinguish the truth from what is false.” When Sher Khán was informed of the reply to his letters, he again sent his vakíl to Jalál Khán's presence to say, “What Your Majesty has said is true. *** Whatever you do, I will obey you; nor will I transgress your orders.
After this, Jalál Khán sent for the Lohánís who sought to kill Sher Khán, and showed them Sher Khán's letters, and said: “Certain of the Lohánís who were aware of your designs went to Sher Khán and informed him, and have joined themselves to him, and they have sworn and vowed, whatever good or ill betide, never to separate from each other. What is to be done?” The Lohánís who sided with Jalál Khán14 replied: “We did not in the least care that Sher Khán has become acquainted with our designs; but it has fallen out ill that so large a number of our brethren should have sided with him, and that disunion should have fallen on the tribe of Lohánís. *** Do you send Sher Khán to his jágírs, and station him there; and do you, with a cheerful and confident mind, go to the King of Bengal, and getting a jágír for yourself in Bengal, make over the kingdom of Bihár to him as a present, before any one else has attempted to seize it.” The advice of the Lohánís pleased Jalál Khán, who, instantly sending for Sher Khán, said: “The Lohánís, who, on account of your loyalty to me, bear enmity against you, will, please God, receive their deserts and punishment. Do you remain to oppose the Mughals, and also administer the affairs of the kingdom. I will go to attack the King of Bengal.” Sher Khán assented, and Jalál Khán, bestowing a horse and dress of honour upon him, sent him off at once.15 When Sher Khán had reached his jágír at Sahsarám, Jalál Khán went over to the King of Bengal, who attached to his person a division of the army under Ibráhím Khán, son of Kutb Sháh. As soon as Sher Khán heard that Jalál Khán had gone over to the King of Bengal, he was much pleased, and said: “Now the kingdom of Bihár has fallen into my hands. I felt certain that the army of the King of Bengal would assuredly come to attempt the conquest of Bihár, and as enmity existed in the army of Jalál Khán between the Lohánís and myself, I feared lest the enemy should be victorious, for the surest means of defeat are divisions in your own army. Now that the Lohánís are gone to Bengal, there are no quarrels in my army, and if there be no divisions among the Afgháns, how can the Bengal army compare with them in the day of battle? Even the Mughals cannot equal them. Please God, when I have dispersed the Bengal army, you will soon see, if I survive, how I will expel the Mughals from Hindustán.”16 After this, Sher Khán began to strengthen himself, and enlist more men. Wherever there were any Afgháns he sent to them, and gave them any money they asked. Having collected a very large force, and made every preparation, and having gained the good will of his whole army, he placed the country of Bihár in his rear, and proceeded against the army of the King of Bengal, fortifying his position with an earthen circumvallation.
The King of Bengal had appointed Ibráhím Khán the leader of his army, and despatched him to conquer the kingdom of Bihár.17 Ibráhím Khán had under him a large Bengal army, and many elephants, and a park of artillery (átish-bází). In the excess of his pride he altogether despised the army of Sher Khán. Sher Khán, keeping under the shelter of his entrenchments, skirmished every day; and in spite of all their endeavours, the army of Ibráhím could not inflict any injury on his forces, on account of the earthen embankments. The Afgháns behaved with great gallantry, and repelled the endeavours of Ibráhím Khán's army to penetrate their entrenchments. Every time the latter attacked, they were compelled to return unsuccessful; but neither army gained any solid advantage over the other. Ibráhím Khán, who was very confident in the prowess of the Bengális, thought that in the day of battle the Afgháns would be no match for them; whereas it was only from his superior numbers, his elephants, and his artillery, that he had up to that time maintained his ground against them: so he wrote to his sovereign to request reinforcements, saying that Sher Khán had taken up a fortified position, and that he was unable to dislodge him with his present force.
When Sher Khán heard that Ibráhím Khán had sent for reinforcements, he called his Afgháns together and said: “I have for some time abstained from meeting the Bengális in the open field, and have kept myself sheltered under entrenchments, and I have brought out only a few men to fight with them, and for this reason, lest they should be discouraged by the large numbers of the enemy. Now I am convinced that the Bengális are much inferior to the Afgháns in war. I have remained within entrenchments for some time without any general engagement, in order that the comparative prowess of the two nations might be manifested, and the presumption of the Bengális be abated, while the Afgháns might be no longer discouraged by the disparity of forces. I will now engage in open battle, for without a general engagement we cannot destroy and disperse our enemies. Praise be to God! whenever such an engagement occurs between Afgháns and Bengális, the Afgháns must prevail. It is impossible that the Bengális can stand against them. At present this is my purpose. To-morrow morning, if you concur with me, hoping in the mercy of the Protector, and trusting on this text, ‘By God's command the lesser number overcomes the greater,’ I will engage the enemy in open battle, for it behoves us not to delay or be backward in this matter, as reinforcements will soon reach them.” The Afgháns replied: “That which your noble mind has determined is extremely right.” ***
When Sher Khán saw the Afgháns were in good heart to engage the Bengális, and that Ibráhím Khán was daily pondering how much longer Sher Khán would yet remain in his entrenchments, and was anxious for an engagement, as he so presumed on the number of his forces that he had encamped them all round Sher Khán's entrenchment, and had not thrown up any works to protect them, he determined to give him battle; and to send his vakíl to tell Ibráhím Khán that it behoved him to be prepared the following morning, as he intended to come out of his entrenchments for that purpose. When Sher Khán told the message to his friends, it pleased them, and he sent his vakíl to Ibráhím Khan, saying, “You have often said to me, ‘Come out of your entrenchments, and let us meet in battle on the open field that we may test each other's prowess.’ I have purposely remained patiently in my entrenchments for a time, hoping that peace might be concluded with you; but if you will agree to no peace, to-morrow morning put your army in array and come out, so that we may meet in open battle.” Ibráhím Khán replied to the vakíl, “Say to Sher Khán, ‘Have all your forces present on the field of battle early to-morrow morning.’” When Sher Khán heard this reply, he was much delighted, and told the intelligence to his men. Ibráhim Khán also told Fath Khán to give orders that his men should be ready and present on the morrow.
When one watch of the night was yet remaining, Sher Khán arrayed his forces, and brought them out of their entrenchments; and after the morning prayers, he himself came out, and said to his chiefs, “In the enemy's army there are many elephants and guns, and a great force of infantry; we must fight them in such a manner that they shall not be able to preserve their original order.” The Bengáli cavalry should be drawn away from their guns and infantry, and the horses intermingled with the elephants, so that their array may be disordered. I have thought of a stratagem by which to defeat the Bengális. I will draw up the greater part of my forces behind the cover of that height which we see, but will retain for the attack a small number of experienced and veteran horse. Now, they will fight exactly in the same manner as they did on the former occasion, without any expectation of defeat. I will bring up my selected division, who, after discharging one flight of arrows into the Bengáli army, shall retreat. Ibráhím Khán still bears in mind the old feud regarding the death of his father, and is presumptuous on account of his superior force. He will think the Afgháns are beginning to fly; and, becoming eager, he will leave his artillery and foot in the rear, and press on with all expedition himself, and disorder and confusion will find their way into his order of battle. I will then bring out my force which had been concealed behind the eminence, who will attack the enemy. The Bengáli cavalry, deprived of the support of their artillery and infantry, are by themselves unable to cope with the Afghán horse. I hope, by the favour of God, that their force will be routed and put to flight.” All the Afgháns expressed their approbation of Sher Khán's plan of battle, and were much delighted, and observed there could be no better possible scheme devised.
After this was agreed upon, Sher Khán drew out, as described above, a picked force, and explained to them that they were to act as had been determined; and the rest of his force he drew up behind the shelter of the rising ground. When the army of Ibráhím Khán was descried, the horsemen, according to their instructions, coming up to the Bengáli army, discharged one volley of arrows, and then turned about. The Bengáli cavalry, supposing the Afgháns were flying, broke their ranks, just as Sher Khán had anticipated, and pursued the Afgháns. Accordingly, as soon as Sher Khán perceived that the Bengáli cavalry had advanced, and left their infantry and artillery in the rear, he appeared at the head of his force which had been lying in ambuscade, and advanced. The Bengális were panic-struck, and the Afgháns who had fled returned, and, joining the rest, they all stirrup to stirrup, after the manner of the Afgháns, fell upon the hostile army. The Bengális, however, rallied, and stood their ground, and the two armies became closely engaged. After warriors of note had fallen in the contest, the sun of victory rose in favour of Sher Khán from the horizon of the East, and the Bengáli army was defeated. Ibráhim Khán exerted himself much, and said to the Bengális, “Turn and exert yourselves, for the army of the Afgháns is small. What face can we show to the king?” But it was no use. *** Ibráhím Khán again said to his men: “What face can I show to the king? *** I will either be victorious or die.” He exerted himself much; but as his (term of) life had arrived, he was killed.
Jalál Khán fled to the King of Bengal. The whole of the treasure, elephants, and train of artillery (top-khána) fell into the hands of Sher Khán, who was thus supplied with munitions of war, and became master of the kingdom of Bihár, and of much other territory beside. Since God, the most holy and omnipotent, had pre-ordained from all eternity to give the kingdom of Hind to Sher Khán, and that the people of the Lord should live in ease and comfort under the shadow of his justice, and that he should be a zealous and just ruler, his wealth daily increased, and the whole country gradually came into his possession. He employed himself in the improvement of his provinces, so that, in a short time, they much surpassed their previous condition, and reached to perfection;—for this reason, that he personally superintended every business; nor did he show favour to any oppressor, even though of his own relations or dependents; and if any one entered his service, he said to him from the first: “The stipend and maintenance which I may agree to give you, I will pay you in full, and not diminish them a single falús; but you shall not oppress or quarrel with any one. If you do, I will visit you with such a punishment as shall be an example to others.” In a short season he acquired a good reputation among the people of God, and it was everywhere known that Sher Khán paid his troops regularly, and neither oppressed any one himself, nor suffered others to do so.
I, the author of this history of Sher Khán, 'Abbás Khán bin Shaikh 'Alí Sarwání, have heard from my kindred and connexions, who were great nobles and companions of Sher Khán, that he got possession of the fort of Chunár in the following manner. Sultán Ibráhím Lodí had entrusted the fort of Chunár to Táj Khán Sárang-khání, and the royal treasures were deposited in the fort. Now this Táj Khán was altogether a slave to his love for his wife Lád Malika, who was a woman of great sagacity and wisdom; and Táj Khán had made three Turkomán brothers his lieutenants, by name Mír Ahmad, Is'hak, and Mír Dád; they were own brothers, experienced, talented, and wise men. As they perceived that Táj Khán was completely under the control of his wife, they of course ingratiated themselves with her, and promised and swore to Lád Malika that they would not oppose her, and would be faithful to her.
Lád Malika had no sons, but Táj Khán had several sons by other wives. On account of his affection for Lád Malika, he did not give a fitting maintenance to his sons, and their mothers did not even receive a sufficiency of daily food. Although the sons often remonstrated, it was of no avail. Hence they continually laid up the seeds of enmity and hate against Lád Malika. One night Táj Khán's eldest son wounded Lád Malika with a sabre, but not severely. Her servants complained to Táj Khán, who drew his sword, and ran out to kill his son. He perceiving that his father was about to kill him for the sake of his wife, struck his father with his sabre, and escaped out of the house. Táj Khán died of the wound.
The sons of Táj Khán, although but young, were on bad terms with the greater part of his troops; but Lád Malika, being a clever woman, by the liberality and benevolence of her conduct, had ingratiated herself with them during Táj Khán's lifetime, and after his death also they adhered to her. A few ill-disposed persons adhered to Táj Khán's sons; but they daily quarrelled, and disputed among themselves over the treasure, and showed themselves so incapable, that their followers became disgusted with them. Sher Khán therefore sent secretly to Mír Ahmad, saying, “Send Mír Dád to me, for I have a message for you which I will send through him.” Mír Ahmad sent Mír Dád to Sher Khán, who said to him, “Tell Mír Ahmad that I am ready to confer great benefits on him.” Mír Ahmad, when he heard this, said to his brothers, “Lád Malika possesses talent for government, yet she is but a woman; and there are many who covet the fort and the treasure in it. Lád Malika will not be able to hold the fort, therefore it is best that I should surrender the fort to Sher Khán, and so lay him under an obligation to myself; it will be to our advantage.” The brothers approved of Mír Ahmad's counsel, and went to Lád Malika, and showing to her Sher Khán's letters, said, “We obey you, whatever you order us that we will do.” She replied, “You are to me as father and brothers; do what you like, I will agree to whatever you say.” They said, “If you will not be angry we will say what we consider to be most to your advantage.” She replied, “Fear not; speak without hesitation the purpose you entertain.” Mír Ahmad said, “Even if there should be no disturbance in the fort, still you would be unable to hold it, for you are a woman and have no sons, and there are many persons who seek to gain possession of it. It is a royal possession, and until some one assumes the sovereignty, it will be best to give the fort over to Sher Khán. You shall marry him, and thus find an asylum, and so no one shall deprive you of the fort and royal treasures.” Lád Malika said, “Send your brother Mír Dád to Sher Khán in order to arrange with him that I shall give up the fort; but on one condition, that he shall deprive of his ears and nose that miserable son who murdered his father, that he may be a warning to others.”
When Mír Dád came to Sher Khán, he made him agree that he would not hurt or injure Lád Malika or the mother of the three brothers. Sher Khán received him with all honour and hospitality, and using every endeavour to assure him, and making the utmost protestations of friendship and good feeling, said, “If Lád Malika gives me up the fort and will marry me, I shall be for ever indebted to your kindness.” And Sher Khán thus having employed himself in captivating the bud of his heart by kindness, Mír Dád said, “It is not fit to surrender the fort except to the king; but since I have come to you, you have shown me such kindness and goodwill, and have displayed such hospitality, that I have considered nothing but how, in return for this, to get the fort into your power. I will not fail to use my best exertions to this end. My hope in God is, that Lád Malika will not dissent from what I say; but when the business is performed to your heart's content, do not so act as to disgrace me.” Sher Khán swearing everything he wished, assured him and said, “While I live I will never cause you grief. *** Mír Dád recommended that they should start at once, and Sher Khán mounting with all haste set off. Mír Dád went on before and gave intelligence that Sher Khán was coming, and urged them not to delay giving up the fort, and got Lád Malika and his brothers to consent. So Mír Dád was sent back to bring in Sher Khán quickly, and to take possession of the fort before the sons of Táj Khán should be aware of their designs.
As soon as Mír Dád had come to Sher Khán, and had told him that it was agreed to give him up the fort and treasure, and that he should marry Lád Malika, and when he had admitted him at once into the fort, they immediately proceeded to celebrate the marriage between Lád Malika and Sher Khán. She gave him a present consisting of 150 of the most exceedingly valuable jewels, and seven mans of pearls, and 150 mans of gold, and many other articles and ornaments.18 Sher Khán subsequently got into his power and possession the parganas near the fort of Chunár; and after this, he strengthened his resources still further by inheriting sixty mans of gold from Guhar Kusáín, widow of Nasír Khán.19 His power was now firmly established, as he was master of a fort and of much of the treasure of the kingdom, and had collected a large force, both horse and foot. After this Sultán Mahmúd, the son of Sultán Sikandar, whom Hasan Khán Mewáttí and the Ráná Sángá20 and certain Afgháns had set up as king, engaged the second Jamshíd the Emperor Bábar in an action near Síkrí, in which Hasan Khán, son of 'Ádil Khán Mewáttí, and the Rájá of Dúngarpúr, Ráwal by name, were slain, and Sultán Mahmúd and the Ráná Sángá being defeated fled to Chitor. Sultán Mahmúd remained for a season in that neighbourhood, and afterwards came towards Patna. Masnad 'Álí 'Azam Khán Humáyún Sání (whose son-in-law Sultán Mahmúd was), Masnad 'Álí Ísá Khán, son of Haibat Khán, the son of Masnad 'Álí 'Umar Khán Kalkapúria,21 who had formerly been governor of Láhore, and Ibráhím Khán, son of Ahmad Khán, son of Mubáriz Khán Yúsuf-khail, and Míán Babin, son of Míán Atta Sáhu-khail, governor of Sirhind, and Míán Báyazíd Farmulí, had at that time assembled themselves together and threw obstacles in the way of the Mughals. Míán Babin and Míán Báyazíd were the leaders of a large force, and had very often fought against the Mughals, and had obtained a great name for their valour. These nobles invited Sultán Mahmúd to Patna, and made him king. When Sultán Mahmúd came with these nobles unto Bihár, Sher Khán found it impossible to offer any resistance, as they possessed so considerable a force, and he himself was not held in sufficient repute among the Afgháns to admit of such an attempt. He was therefore necessitated to present himself before Sultán Mahmúd. The Afgháns portioned out among themselves the kingdom of Bihár,22 but the king said to him, “When I get possession of Jaunpúr, I will give to you the kingdom of Bihár which you conquered after defeating the army of the King of Bengal. Be not at all uneasy, as Sultán Sikandar bestowed the kingdom of Bihár upon Daryá Khán, so will I bestow it on you.” Sher Khán requested a farmán to this effect, and Sultán Mahmúd assented, and ordered one to be executed, and so Sher Khán received a farmán for the kingdom of Bihár from the king; and having taken several months' leave, returned to his jágír to prepare his forces.
When Sultán Mahmúd had equipped his army, he marched towards Jaunpúr, and issued a mandate directing Sher Khán to join him immediately. On the receipt of this order, Sher Khán wrote back in reply, that he would come as soon as he could complete the arrangements about his force. When the nobles about the king knew the purport of Sher Khán's reply, they represented that Sher Khán was in confederacy with the Mughals, and was merely finessing and making pretences, and that the king ought not to trust what he wrote or said, but to compel him to accompany the army. 'Azam Humáyún Sarwání said: “It will be easy to bring Sher Khán along with us. Put your mind at ease. Let us march in the direction of his jágír, and go wherever Sher Khán may be. As punishment for his delay, let us exact from him a large and handsome reception, and then let us compel him to join us.” Sultán Mahmúd and his nobles were greatly pleased at 'Azam Humáyún's advice, and praised his sagacity. They proceeded by regular marches to Sahsarám, where Sher Khán then was. Sher Khán hearing that Sultán Mahmúd was come with all his followers, and would compel him to join them, whether he would or no, was much vexed, and said to his friends, “The plan I had devised has not succeeded. Of the nobles who are with the king, two—the one named 'Azam Humáyún, and the other 'Ísá Khán Sarwání—are clever and wise men, and have much experience in public affairs. They have joined this army for the honour of the Afgháns and from regard to their kindred; albeit, they are aware that the army will do no good, for the nobles who are in it are not at unity among themselves, and without unity they can accomplish nothing. *** I can no longer excuse myself, I must go along with the army. Do you tell your troops to prepare for marching with all haste, while I go out to meet the king and his army myself, and put them in good humour, make my own excuses, and bring them with me; for my guests are my own kin, and do you make all preparations for entertaining them.” Sher Khán then went out to welcome the king, and having prepared rich entertainments of divers kinds, sent them to the quarters of the various nobles and chiefs, who were his friends, according to their rank; and also gave large presents and a magnificent entertainment to Sultán Mahmúd, so that all parties were pleased and delighted with him.
Sher Khán requested Sultán Mahmúd to halt a few days, while he equipped his forces. Sultán Mahmúd acceded to this request, and after a halt of some days, Sher Khán having made his preparations, marched in company with Sultán Mahmúd. When they approached Jaunpúr, the Mughals who were there abandoned the place and fled. Sultán Mahmúd delayed some days at Jaunpúr, but sent on his army in advance and occupied Lucknow and other districts.
On hearing this intelligence, the Emperor Humáyún set off from Ágra23 for Lucknow, whither Sultán Mahmúd arrived also from Jaunpúr. The two armies met near Lucknow, and daily skirmishes ensued. Warriors on either side came out and engaged one another. Sher Khán perceiving that there was no unanimity among the Afgháns, but that every one acted as he thought best, wrote to Hindú Beg, and said, “The Mughals raised me from the dust. These people have brought me with them by force; but in the day of battle I will not fight, and will go off the field without engaging. Tell the Emperor Humáyún the true state of my case, and that I will serve him in the day of battle, and will cause the defeat of this army.” When Hindú Beg showed Sher Khán's letter to the Emperor, the latter ordered him to write to Sher Khán, “Be at your ease as to your accompanying these people; act as you have written; if you do, it will be for your advancement.” After some days had elapsed, the two armies joined in a general engagement, and Sher Khán drew off his forces at the critical moment of the battle, and retreated without engaging. This caused Sultán Mahmúd's defeat. Ibráhím Khán Yúsuf-khail made desperate exertions, and showed great gallantry in that engagement, nor did he quit his post while life remained; he repulsed every Mughal force which was opposed to him; but was at last slain. As Mián Báyazíd had drunk more wine than than he could bear, and had got drunk and careless, he also was slain in that battle. Sultán Mahmúd and the other chiefs being defeated, fled to the kingdom of Bihár. The Sultán had neither money nor territory to entertain a force of his own, and his nobles who had placed him on the throne were most of them killed in the battle at Lucknow, while the few who remained were from their quarrels dispersed. Sultán Mahmúd was greatly given to dancing women, and passed most of his time in amusing himself; and as he had no power to oppose the Mughals, he abdicated his royalty, and went and settled himself in the province of Patna, and never again attempted the throne. He died in A.H. 949.24
When Humáyún had overcome Sultán Mahmúd, and had put the greater number of his opponents to death, he sent Hindú Beg to take Chunár from Sher Khán, but Sher Khán declined to give it up to him. When he heard this, Humáyún commanded his victorious standards to be set in motion towards Chunár. Sher Khán leaving Jalál Khán (who after the death of Sher Khán succeeded him under the title of Islám Sháh), and another Jalál Khán, son of Jalú, in Chunár, withdrew with his family and followers to the hills of Nahrkunda.25 The army of Humáyún besieged Chunár, and daily fighting ensued, in which both Jalál Khans displayed valour great beyond description, and from their gallantry gained great renown. Sher Khán's custom was to despatch spies to all the neighbouring countries, in order to inquire into their actual condition.
Sher Khán knew that the Emperor Humáyún would be unable to delay long in those parts; for his spies brought him word that Bahádur Sháh, the King of Gujarát had conquered the kingdom of Mandú, and was meditating the seizure of Dehlí, and would shortly declare war. Humáyún also having received this intelligence, Sher Khán sent his vakíl to him and wrote, saying: “I am your slave, and the client of Junaid Birlás. Moreover, the good service which I did at the battle of Lucknow is known to you, and as you must entrust the fort of Chunár to some one, make it over to me, and I will send my son Kutb Khán to accompany you in this expedition. Do you lay aside all anxiety as regards these parts; for if either I or any other Afghán do any act unbefitting or disloyal, you have my son with you; inflict on him such reprisals as may be a warning to others.”
When Sher Khán's emissary represented this to the Emperor Humáyún, he replied: “I will give Chunár to Sher Khán, but on this condition, that he sends Jalál Khán with me.” Sher Khán sent word in reply, “In the love and estimation of their father and mother, all sons are alike. Jalál Khán is not superior to Kutb Khán, but I have many opponents and I have vowed that I will not permit one to get a footing in the country, lest afterwards the Emperor should be compelled to war with him.” Just at this time news arrived that Mirzá Muhammad Zamán,26 who had been sentenced to imprisonment in the fort of Bayána, had regained his liberty by producing a forged farmán for his release, and had created a disturbance in the country; and also that Bahádur Sháh of Gujarát was intending to march on Dehlí. So Humáyún said to Sher Khán's agent, that as Sher Khán was a loyal man, he would agree to this proposal, and that if he would send Kutb Khán, he would leave the fort of Chunár with Sher Khán. Sher Khán was delighted, and sent Kutb Khán his son, and 'Ísá Khán his chamberlain, to the Emperor, who set off for Ágra, and employed himself in suppressing the rebellion of Sultán Bahádur.27 Sher Khán took advantage of this opportunity, and did not leave one enemy of his remaining throughout the kingdom of Bihár. He also began to patronize all Afgháns. Many of them, who had assumed the garb of religious mendicants on account of their misfortunes, he relieved, and enlisted as soldiers; and some who refused to enlist, and preferred a life of mendicancy, he put to death, and declared he would kill every Afghán who refused to be a soldier. He was also very careful of his Afgháns in action, that their lives might not be uselessly sacrificed. When the Afgháns heard that Sher Khán was eagerly desirous of patronizing their race, they entered into his service from all directions.
Sultán Bahádur being defeated, went towards Súrat, and the whole of the Afgháns who were in his service, whether chiefs or common soldiers, came to Sher Khán. Several powerful chiefs, who had at first scorned to enter Sher Khán's service, when they saw his power day by day increasing, put aside their pride, and volunteered to serve under him. Accordingly 'Azam Humáyún Sarwání, and Masnad 'Álí 'Ísá Khán son of Masnad 'Álí Haibat Khán Sáhú-khail, and Míán Babin Sáhú-khail, Kutb Khán Mochí-khail, Ma'rúf Farmulí, and 'Azam Humáyún, eldest son of Sultán 'Álam Khán Sáhú-khail, and in short every Afghán of high rank joined him, and he assumed the title of Hazrat 'Álí.
Bíbí Fath Malika was exceedingly wealthy; she was the daughter of Míán Kála Pahár*[Or " Bihár."] Farmulí, sister's son to Sultán Bahlol. This Mián Muhammad was a very prudent man; he entertained but few soldiers, and gave his chief attention to the accumulation of wealth. Sultán Bahlol gave him in jágír the whole sarkár of Oudh, and several parganas besides. He inherited also wealth from his father. During the reigns of Sultáns Bahlol, Sikandar, and Ibráhím, his jágírs were never disturbed, and during all this time he gave his attention to nothing else except the accumulation of wealth. I have heard from persons of veracity that he had amassed three hundred mans of red hard28 gold, and he did not purchase any other but golden jewelry. He had no child save Fath Malika, and he married her to a lad named Shaikh Mustafa.
When Míán Muhammad died, towards the end of the reign of Sultán Ibráhím, he left one boy of uncertain parentage, who was called Míán Nia'mú. His parentage was for this cause uncertain, as Míán Kálá Pahár had bestowed one of his concubines on a servant. When the girl had been some time in the servant's house, she bore a male child, whom she declared to be the offspring of Míán Muhammad Kálá Pahár. When Míán Muhammad heard this, he took the girl away from his servant, and brought her into his own house, and acknowledged the child as his own son. The child grew up an able man. Sultán Ibráhím made Shaikh Mustafa, the husband of Fath Malika, and who was also her father's brother's son, the successor to Míán Muhammad Kálá Pahár; but gave a small portion of Kálá Pahár's treasury to Míán Nia'mú, and also bestowed one or two par-ganas of the sarkár of Oudh in jágír on him; but the greater portion of Kálá Pahár's treasure came into the possession of Fath Malika.
This Mustafa, during the time of Sultán Ibráhím and afterwards, distinguished himself in action.29 I have heard from various relators of history, that during the lifetime of Sultán Ibráhím, Míán Mustafa and Míán Ma'rúf Farmulí quarrelled regarding some territory, and fought about it. It was Míán Mustafa's custom, when about to engage, to prepare sundry mans of sweetmeats in commemoration of his father Míán Muhammad, and distribute them to fakírs. This done, he used to set off to fight. Míán Ma'rúf employed himself in reading prayers and supplications.
When Míán Mustafa died, he left a young daughter, by name Mihr Sultán. Fath Malika, being a very able woman, had educated Míán Báyazíd, a younger brother of Mustafa. She said to him, “Do you look to the soldiery, I will provide money.” Míán Báyazíd with this money collected a very large force, and greatly distinguished himself, gaining several victories over the troops of the Emperor Bábar; so that the names of Míán Bábin and Míán Báyazíd became famous; but since the death of Báyazíd has been already described, there is no need for repeating the story here. When he was slain, Fath Malika was in Bihár, and collecting a number of men to protect the treasure, she proceeded to the hills adjoining Bihár, intending to go to Patna; for the Rájá of Patna had shown great favour to the more wealthy Afgháns. When Báyazíd was killed, and Sultán Mahmúd had given up striving for the Empire, the Rájá of Patna considered that the fortune of the Afghán connexion was on the decline, and stretched out the hand of oppression against the possessions of the Afgháns to whom he had given shelter. Fath Malika, on hearing this news, abandoned her intention of going to Patna. When Sher Khán heard that the Bíbí, from this apprehension, had abandoned her design of going to Patna, he was much delighted, and conceived the intention of getting Fath Malika, by means of some pretence or stratagem, into his own clutches, lest she should go into the territories of some other potentate, and the treasure should thus slip out of his grasp, which would have grieved him to all eternity. So he sent his vakíl to the Bíbí, and wrote to this effect: “The nobles and grandees of Sultáns Bahlol and Sikandar have come into these parts, and have honoured me by taking shelter with me, and are collected together for the honour of the Afgháns. Your servant also has girt up his loins in this cause and design, and you have strong claims on the consideration of the Afghán race, first because you are of the family of Shaikh Muhammad; secondly, there is your connexion with a descendant of Sultán Bahlol. What fault has your servant committed, that you delay in visiting his country? There is no trusting the promises of the unbelievers of these parts; and (which God forbid!) if any injury should occur to your people among these hills in which you now are, it would be an eternal disgrace to me. Men would say, ‘Because she could not trust Sher Khán, she would not enter his country.’” When the vakíl came to Fath Malika, and she heard what Sher Khán wrote, she wrote in reply, that if he would make a covenant with her, and confirm it by oaths, she would come to him. To this Sher Khán agreed, and she sent a trustworthy man to Sher Khán, in whose presence he swore, and pledged himself by the most solemn oaths. Bíbí Fath Malika being fully assured, came to Sher Khán, and remained some time with him.
When Nasíb Sháh, the ruler of Bengal, died, the nobles of Bengal made Sultán Mahmúd his successor; but he was not able to manage the kingdom, and it fell into disorder. Sher Khán conceived the desire of seizing the kingdom of Bengal, and took from the Bíbí 300 mans of gold to equip his army; and gave her two parganas for her support (madad-ma'ásh), besides leaving her some ready money for her immediate expenses.30 But Jalál Khán having, against the Bíbí's consent, wished to espouse her daughter Mihr Sultán, Sher Khán, on hearing of it, forbade Jalál Khán; and she married her daughter to one Sultán Sikandar, a relation of her own. This Sikandar proved very unworthy. During Mihr Sultán's life he lived in comfort; and in the reign of the Emperor Akbar, in the year 975 A.H., Mihr Sultán, on her way to the pargana of Kayat, in the direction of Sind, died in the house of Muzaffar Khán. Sher Khán having equipped his army with this money, attacked the kingdom of Bengal, and got possession of all of it on this side Gharí (Síkrí-galí).
When the Emperor Humáyún came back from Gujarát, the Khán-khánán Yúsuf-khail (who brought the Emperor Bábar from Kábul to Hindustán) said to him: “It is not wise to neglect Sher Khán, for he is rebelliously inclined, and well understands all matters pertaining to government; moreover, all the Afgháns are collected round him.” The Emperor Humáyún, relying on the vastness of his forces, and on the pride of Empire, took no heed of Sher Khán, and remaining the rainy season at Ágra, sent Hindú Beg to Jaunpúr, with directions to write a full and true report regarding Sher Khán.
When Sher Khán heard that the Emperor Humáyún intended himself marching towards Bihár, he sent magnificent presents to Hindú Beg, governor of Jaunpúr, and gained his goodwill. At the same time Sher Khán wrote thus: “From what I promised I have not departed. I have not invaded the Emperor's country. Kindly write to the Emperor; and assuring him of my loyalty, dissuade him from marching in this direction; for I am his servant and well-wisher.” When Hindú beheld Sher Khán's presents, he approved of them, and was well pleased, and he said to the vakíl, “So long as I live, let your mind be easy. No one shall injure you.” And in the presence of Sher Khán's vakíl, Hindú Beg wrote a letter to the Emperor Humáyún, saying: “Sher Khán is a loyal servant of Your Majesty, and strikes coin and reads the khutba in your name, and has not transgressed the boundaries of Your Majesty's territory, or done anything since your departure which could be any cause of annoyance to you.” The Emperor, on receipt of Hindú Beg's letter deferred his journey that year. Sher Khán, meanwhile, detached Jalál Khán, Khawás Khán senior, and other chiefs, to conquer Bengal and the city of Gaur. On their entering Bengal, Sultán Mahmúd, unable to oppose them, retired to the fort of Gaur. The Afgháns, having made themselves masters of the surrounding country, invested and besieged that fortress, before which daily skirmishes took place.
The following year the Emperor marched towards Bihár and Bengal. When he arrived near Chunár, he consulted his nobles whether he should first take Chunár, or march towards Gaur, which the son of Sher Khán was besieging, but had not yet taken. All his Mughal nobles advised that he should first take Chunár, and then march on Gaur, and it was so determined; but when Humáyún asked the Khán-khánán Yúsuf-khail for his opinion, he (having previously heard that the Mughal nobles had agreed it was advisable first to take Chunár) said, “It is a counsel of the young to take Chunár first; the counsel of the aged is, that as there is much treasure in Gaur, it is advisable to take Gaur first; after that the capture of Chunár is an easy matter.” The Emperor replied: “I am young, and prefer the counsel of the young. I will not leave the fort of Chunár in my rear.” The author has heard from the Khán-khánán's companions, that when he returned to his quarters, he observed: “The luck of Sher Khán is great, that the Mughals do not go to Gaur. Before they take this fort, the Afgháns will have conquered Gaur, and all its treasures will fall into their hands.”
Sher Khán left Ghází Súr and Buláki,31 who was the commandant of Chunár, in that fortress, and removed his family and those of his Afghán followers to the fortress of Bahrkunda; but as he had many families with him, that fort could not hold them all. There existed a friendly connexion between Sher Khán and the Rájá of the fort of Rohtás, and Chúráman, the Rájá's náíb, was on particular terms of intimate friendship and alliance with Sher Khán. This Chúráman was a Bráhman, and was a person of the highest rank, and had formerly shown kindness to the family of Míán Nizám, own brother to Sher Khán, and procured them shelter in the fort of Rohtás; and when all danger had gone by, the family again quitted the fort, and made it over to the Rájá. On the present occasion, Sher Khán wrote that he was in great straits, and that if the Rájá would give him the loan of the fort for a short time, he would be obliged to him all his days, and that when all danger was past, he would again restore the fort. Chúráman replied, “Be of good cheer, I will manage it, so that the Rájá shall lend you the fort.” When Chúráman went to the Rájá, he said, “Sher Khán has asked for the loan of Rohtás for his family. He is your neighbour. This is my advice, it is an opportunity to show kindness; you should admit his family.” The Rájá agreed.
When Sher Khán sent his family from Bahrkunda, the Rájá retracted his promise, and said, “When I admitted Míán Nizám into the fort, they had but a small force. I was the stronger. Now they have the larger force, and I a small one. If I admit them into the fort, and they will not restore it, I cannot take it from them by force.” Chúráman wrote to Sher Khán, saying: “Certain persons, my enemies, have given very evil counsel to the Rájá, and persuaded him to violate his promise, and to decline giving you the fort.” Sher Khán, on receiving this news, was much grieved and anxious, and he wrote to the Rájá, and said: “On the faith of your promise, I have brought my family from Bahrkunda. If the Emperor Humáyún hears this news, he will send his army, and all the families of the Afgháns will be taken and enslaved. This misfortune will rest on your head.” Sher Khán also gave to Chúráman a bribe of six mans of gold, and said: “Persuade in any way you can the Rájá to give me the loan of this fort for a few days, for my family; but if he will not give it, then I will go and make my peace with the Emperor Humáyún, and will revenge myself on everything belonging to the Rájá.” Chúráman said, “Be of good heart, I will procure admittance for your women and children.” So Chúráman then went to the Rájá, and said: “It is not becoming your dignity to break your promise. Sher Khán, on the strength of it, has brought his family from the fort of Bahrkunda. If the Emperor hears that his family is not in safety, he will attack and destroy them, and the blame will rest on my shoulders. Moreover, if Sher Khán be in extremities, he will make peace with the Emperor, and will attack you, and you are not strong enough to oppose him. Why do you thus heedlessly provoke his hostility, and throw your kingdom into confusion? I am a Bráhman, and since Sher Khán came here relying on my word, if his family be slain, the blame will rest on me. If you do not admit him into the fort, I will take poison and die at your door.” When the Rájá saw Chúráman thus determined, he agreed to admit the family of Sher Khán into the fort. Sher Khán had not heard of the permission, when he received intelligence that Khawás Khán senior had been drowned in the ditch of the fort of Gaur, and that the fort of Chunár had surrendered to the Emperor Humáyún.32 He became very depressed and anxious, and bestowing on the younger brother of Khawás Khán, whose name was Musáhib Khán, the surname of Khawás Khán, detached him with urgent instructions, that since Chunár had fallen, and that the Emperor Humáyún would in a few days march towards Bengal, he was to press the siege of Gaur with all possible despatch.
Khawás Khán arrived at Gaur, and said to Jalál Khán, “My orders from the king33 are to take the fort of Gaur without delay, as the Emperor is coming up in our rear.” Jalál Khán said: “Wait yet to-day.” But Khawás Khán replied, “I cannot disobey my orders; we must at once make the attack.” Jalál Khán said: “Be it so! go to your post.” Khawás Khán, taking his leave of Jalál Khán, came to his brother's post, and encouraged his brother's force, saying, “My orders are these: The instant I arrive to use every endeavour to take the fort and not in any way to delay.” He directed the heralds to command the army to prepare themselves with all haste, as there was no time to lose; and arming himself, he sent to Jalál Khán to say, “I am ready with my whole force in obedience to the orders of Sher Khán, and only wait for you. Do you array yourselves also; it is not good to delay. By God's grace we will be victorious.” Jalál Khán, Shujá'at Khán, and the rest were displeased, but, nevertheless, got ready. Khawás Khán personally displayed such energy and gallantry, that he succeeded in mastering the fortress even before Jalál Khán arrived. From that day his valour became celebrated, and after that he conquered wherever he went, so that in all Sher Khán's army there was none like him for intrepidity as well as liberality.
Gaur having fallen, Jalál Khán sent an account of the victory to his father, and attributed it to Khawás Khán. On hearing the news, Sher Khán was exceedingly delighted; and Chúráman also came to him, and said that the Rájá had consented to give him the fort of Rohtás, into which he might bring his women and children. Sher Khán brought his women and children near to the fort, and expressed his devoted friendship for and obligation to the Rájá, and gave him much money and goods of various kinds, saying: “If ever I am again prosperous, I will not consider myself absolved from my obligations to you.” The Rájá was much delighted, and said, “The fort of Rohtás is yours, order in your family.” Sher Khán had given orders to his men that none should go out who once went in; after this, Sher Khán himself went in and examined the fort. He thanked God, and said: “The fort of Chunár is no fort in comparison with this; as that has gone out of my possession, this has come into it. I was not so pleased at the conquest of Gaur as (I am) at getting possession of Rohtás.” And he said to the guards of the fort, “You had best go to the Rájá, and say, ‘You cannot remain in the same place with the Afgháns, or it will be the worse for you.’” And he ordered his own men, if the guards did not obey the order to leave the fort, to eject them by force. Sher Khán's men were all prepared, as, when they told the guards what Sher Khán had said, and these refused, they turned them out by force of arms. So Sher Khán placed his own guards and sentries in every part of the fort, and took the greatest precaution for its safe custody, and drove the Rájá away from the fort. In the manner thus described he got possession of the fort of Rohtás.
The commonly received report that Sher Khán put Afgháns into dolís, and sent them into the fort as women, is altogether erroneous and false.34 For I, the writer of this history, Tuhfa-i Akbar Sháhí, the son of Shaikh 'Álí, have inquired of several chiefs and nobles who were with Sher Khán in the affair. For example, I inquired of the chief of great nobles Muzaffar Khán, and nephew of Masnad 'Álí 'Ísá Khán, and of Shaikh Muhammad, son of Míán Báyazíd Sarwání, and several others who were present on the occasion; and they said, “It is needful you should hear from us the history of your ancestors, for you are connected with Sultán Bahlol, Sultán Sikandar, Sher Sháh, and Salím Sháh. Take heed to our words, for after a lapse of many days, frequent errors and mistakes arise. We will tell you what we heard and saw.” I said to Khán-'azam Muzaffar Khán, son of Jalál Khán, the son of Haibat Khán, “It is commonly said that Sher Khán took Rohtás by introducing the Afgháns in covered litters, and you contradict this story. I do not know whom to believe.” He replied: “You know I was with the followers of Masnad 'Álí 'Ísá Khán, and my family was in Rohtás, while I accompanied Sher Khán to the hills.” When Sher Khán got possession of Rohtás, he left there his women and children, with his eldest son 'Ádil Khán, and Kutb Khán; and he himself went to the hills of Bahrkunda, and wandered about from place to place.35
After the Emperor Humáyún had got possession of Chunár, he halted in Benares, and sent an envoy to Sher Khán, having it in view to get possession of the country of Bihár. Sher Khán knew he had this design, and said to the envoy, “I have captured the fort of Gaur, and have collected about me a very large force of Afgháns. If the Emperor will abandon all design upon Bengal, I will surrender Bihár to him, and make it over to whomsoever he will depute, and will agree to the same boundaries of Bengal as existed in Sultán Sikandar's time; and I will send all the ensigns of royalty—as the umbrella throne, etc.—to the Emperor, and will yearly send him ten lacs of rupees from Bengal. But let the Emperor return towards Ágra.” The envoy came back to Humáyún, and reported what Sher Khán had said. The Emperor, on hearing about Bihár, became exceedingly glad, and agreed to what Sher Khán proposed, and gave a horse, and a peculiarly splendid khil'at to the envoy for delivery to Sher Sháh; and directed him to say to Sher Sháh that his proposals were accepted, and that he should not delay to put them in execution. The vakíl came to Sher Sháh, and gave him the horse and dress, and told him what the Emperor had said. Sher Khán was much delighted, and said, “I will fulfil the terms agreed upon, and will pray day and night to Almighty God that while life lasts no hostility may befall between the Emperor and myself, for I am his dependent and servant.”
Three days after this despatch the envoy of Sultán Mahmúd, the ruler of Bengal, came into the presence of the Emperor Humáyún, and made the following communication: “The Afgháns have seized the fort of Gaur, but most of the country is yet in my possession; let not Your Majesty trust to Sher Khán's promises, but march towards these parts, and before they have established and strengthened themselves, expel them from the country, and altogether suppress this revolt. I also will join you, and they are not powerful enough to oppose you.” As soon as he heard this request of Sultán Mahmúd, the Emperor ordered his victorious standards to be set in motion towards Bengal; and afterwards he ordered the Khán-khánán Yúsuf-khail, the Birlás chiefs, and some other nobles, to go on in advance, and with their force in battle array to move towards the hills of Bahrkunda, where Sher Khán was. Mirzá Hindál also was ordered to cross the Ganges with his division, and to move on Hájípúr. The Emperor himself went towards Bengal.
When Sher Khán heard this intelligence, he entirely gave up all trust in the promises and faith of Humáyún, and said to the envoy: “I have observed all loyalty to the Emperor, and have committed no offence against him, and have not encroached upon his boundaries. When I got Bihár from the Lohánís, and the King of Bengal formed a design to seize that country, I besought him most submissively to leave me as I was, and not to attempt to deprive me of Bihár. By reason of his large army and forces he would not attend to me, and since he thus oppressed me, the Almighty gave me the victory; and as he coveted the kingdom of Bihár, God wrested away from him also the kingdom of Bengal. The Emperor has only considered the word of the ruler of Bengal, and has overlooked the service I have rendered, and all the force of Afgháns which I have assembled for his service, and has marched against Bengal. When the Emperor besieged Chunár, the Afgháns urged me to oppose him, but I restrained them from declaring war, and said, ‘The Emperor is powerful; you should not fight with him for the sake of a fort, for he is my lord and patron, and when he perceives that, in spite of my powerful forces, I pay respect to him, he will understand that I am his loyal servant, and will give me a kingdom to maintain this large army. The Emperor desired the kingdom of Bihár, and I was willing to surrender it. But it is not the right way to govern a kingdom to separate so large a force from his service, and in order to please their enemies, to ruin and slay the Afgháns.’ But since the Emperor takes no heed of all this good service, and has violated his promise, I have now no hope or means of restraining the Afgháns from opposing him. You will hear what deeds the Afgháns will do, and the march to Bengal will end in repentance and regret, for now the Afgháns are united, and have laid aside their mutual quarrels and envyings. The country which the Mughals have taken from the Afgháns, they got through the internal dissensions among the latter.” So saying, he gave him a parting present, and dismissed him. The force he had with him Sher Khán sent to Rohtás, and he himself with a few horsemen, in order that he might not be traced, set off from that place towards Gaur secretly. From thence he proceeded, unknown to any one, to the hills, and lay hid there, and sent spies into the camp of the Emperor in order to discover his intentions. Humáyún was told, after he had made two marches, that Sher Khán had gone to the hills. He, therefore, returned; and the Khán-khánán Yúsuf-khail and Barrí Bírlas, who had been sent against Sher Khán, were halted in the pargana of Munír Shaikh Yahyá, where they heard that Sultán Mahmúd Barrí, the King of Gaur, was come. Bírlas went out to meet him. They had not yet escorted him to his encamping ground, when the Emperor himself arrived at Munír. They brought Sultán Mahmúd to the Emperor, who did not receive him kindly or pay him the respect he anticipated; so that Sultán Mahmúd repented that he had come, and shortly afterwards died from extreme grief. The Emperor issued orders for the arrangement of his army at the town of Munír.
Muyid Beg, son of Sultán Mahmúd, and Jahángír Kúlí, son of Ibráhím Báyazíd, Mír Núrká, Tardí Beg, Barrí Bírlas, Mubárak Farmulí, and other chiefs, with a force of 30,000 horse, were ordered to march seven kos in advance of the Imperial army. Sher Khán, on hearing that Humáyún had set off towards Bengal, departed himself secretly with only a few horsemen. When the Emperor reached Patna, the division which was seven kos in advance had not reached their ground, when their vedettes came to a village where what should they see but some cavalry in a garden. They asked of one of the villagers whose those horsemen were? He said, “It is Sher Khán himself.” The vedettes, when they heard the name of Sher Khán, were so alarmed, that they never examined what amount of force Sher Khán had with him, but returned and told to Muyid Beg that “Sher Khán was encamped at such and such a village.” Muyid Beg was of opinion that Sher Khán was there to oppose them, and sent to the Emperor to ask for orders; and encamped where he was, sending out a reconnoitring party to bring intelligence. When the persons sent to reconnoitre came near the place, they could not discover a single horseman there; on which the Mughals entered the village, and inquired of the head-man (mukaddam), who said, that Sher Khán had halted there with a few horsemen; but on seeing the advance of their cavalry had gone off with all speed on the road to Mungír. When the party returned from reconnoitring, it was nearly evening, and on this account they delayed the pursuit of Sher Khán.
When Sher Khán had crossed the defile of Gharí, he saw Saif Khán Acha-khail Sarwání, who was taking his family towards Rohtás. Sher Khán said, “Turn, for the Mughal army is near at hand.” When Saif Khán was apprised of the actual truth regarding the Emperor's army, he said to Sher Khan, “There are but few men with you, and the distance between the armies is small. The Emperor will pursue you with the utmost expedition, in the hope you may fall into his hands. Do you take my family with you, and go your way. Early to-morrow morning I will occupy the entrance of the pass, and while life remains in my body I will hold the Emperor's army in check, so that an ample distance may be placed between you and the Mughals.” Sher Khán said, “It is not right that to preserve myself I should cast you into the whirlpool of destruction.” Saif Khán replied: “All men are not equal; a man ought to sacrifice himself for his own household. *** My life and those of my brethren shall be expended in the service of my lord.” Although Sher Khán urged him repeatedly to go along with him, Saif Khán would not consent; so Sher Khán took his family with him, and relieved from all anxiety regarding the pursuit of the Mughals, proceeded on his course with all speed.
The next morning, when the sun was well risen, Saif Khán told his brethren to bathe, and be prepared for death. ** Saif Khán's brethren said: “Since you have decided to do this, we are ready to sacrifice a thousand lives for you; it is the time now to act, not to talk; we will not fail to do our best.” On this they put themselves at their several posts, and occupied the entrance of Gugárghar. When the army of the Emperor drew near, Saif Khán commenced the action. Notwithstanding great exertions on the part of the Mughals, they could not force the entrance of Gugárghar. The gallantry displayed by Saif Khán's brethren was beyond all description; they held the Mughals in check till a little after mid-day, when most of Saif Khán's brethren were slain, and he himself was severely wounded in three places; and becoming insensible, was taken alive by the Mughals. They took him before Muyid, who sent him to the Emperor; and he, when he heard his story, praised him very highly, saying, “Such it behoves a soldier to be, who should lay down his life to advance his master's interests.” He then said to Saif Khán, “I set you free, go whither you please.” Saif Khán said, “My family is with Sher Khán, I wish to go to him.” The Emperor replied: “I have given you your life, do as you will.” So Saif Khán returned to Sher Khán.
When Sher Khán arrived at Mungír, where Shujá'at Khán Níází36 was, he ordered him, as Humáyún's army was approaching, to take Saif Khán's family to the fort of Gharí, and embarking in a swift sailing boat, went down the river towards Gaur. When he arrived there, he sent his son Jalál Khán with some of his nobles to occupy the pass of Gharí,37 and to hold the Emperor Humáyún in check there, while he himself made all necessary preparations and arrangements, and conveyed to Rohtás the treasure which had fallen into his possession at Gaur. When Jalál Khán came to Gharí, the van of the Emperor's army was already near at hand. Jalál Khán proposed to attack it, but his chiefs dissuaded him, saying that he had not been sent by Sher Khán to risk an engagement, and that he ought merely to hold the pass against Humáyún's advance. Jalál Khán, however, did not assent to their counsel, but leaving 1000 horse to hold Gharí, and advancing himself with 6000, attacked the Imperialists, and after a sharp action defeated them.38 Mubárak Farmulí, Abú-l Fath Langáh, as well as many men on the side of the Mughals, fell in the engagement.39
Jalál Khán, returning to Gharí, fortified the pass. The night after the action it rained so hard, that the road was rendered impassable, for it was the commencment of the rainy season. The Emperor was delayed in this spot one month, and Sher Khán availing himself of the interval, and taking with him all the treasure which had come into his hands by the fall of Gaur, went by way of Jhárkand to Rohtás; and on arriving there, sent to Jalál Khán, directing him to abandon Gharí and to come to Rohtás. When the Emperor heard that Jalál Khán had abandoned and gone away from Gharí, he sent (on account of the excessive rain) a part of his force under Mirzá Hindál to Ágra, and proceeded himself to Gaur, the capital of Bengal, where he lay for three months, and admitted no one to an audience with him, A.H. 945 (A.D. 1538-9).
Meanwhile, Sher Khán came to Benares, and besieged the governor, and detached thence Khawás Khán to Mungír, where the Emperor had left the Khán-khánán Yúsuf-khail, when he himself went to Gaur. Sher Khán sent Khawás Khán with instructions to take Khán-khánán prisoner, and bring him to his presence, because this same Khán-khánán had brought the Emperor Bábar from Kábul to India. Khawás Khán came suddenly by night upon the city, and seizing the Khán-khánán, brought him to Benares. Shortly after this, Benares was taken, and the greater part of the Mughal garrison was killed. Subsequently, Haibat Khán Níází, Jalál Khán Jalú, Sarmast Khán Sarwání, and other chiefs were sent against Bahráích, and they drove out the Mughals from those parts until they arrived at and captured the city of Sambhal, and made slaves of the inhabitants, and spoiled the city. Another force was sent towards Jaunpúr, the governor of which place was killed in battle, and the same force was then sent in the direction of Ágra. Every governor on the part of the Emperor Humáyún, throughout the whole country, who offered any opposition, was killed, or was defeated and driven out of the country; so that all the districts as far as Kanauj and Sambhal fell into the possession of the Afgháns. Sher Khán also sent Khawás Khán against the city of Mahárta, zamíndár, with orders to cut down his jungle fastness, and to capture him. The officers of Sher Khán also collected the revenue of both the autumn and spring harvests of these parts.
When the Emperor heard that Mirzá Hindál had slain Shaikh Bahlol, and excited a sedition in the neighbourhood of Ágra, he became distracted,40 and started from Bengal (as the heat of the season had somewhat abated) towards Ágra. Sher Khán, summoning all his forces from Bihár, Jaunpúr, and other places, excepting only the division with Khawás Khán acting against Mahárta.41
When the Emperor Humáyún advanced in the direction of Sher Khán, thus encamped about Rohtás, Sher Khán assembled his chiefs, and addressed them thus: “The army of the Emperor Humáyún is in great disorder from his delay in Bengal; moreover, sedition has arisen in Ágra. It is on this account that he neglects me, and is taking his departure. If you agree with me, I will try my fortune, for my force at this moment is in perfect order. Before the Emperor marched against Bengal I made every submission, and agreed to pay a yearly tribute, if the Emperor would confer Bengal on me, that I might not be brought into hostilities with my patron. He agreed to give me Bengal, but when the envoy of the King of Bengal, Sultán Mahmúd, came to him, the king retracted his promise, and I was compelled to oppose him; and now that I have overthrown his armies which were in Bihár and Jaunpúr, and taken those countries, the way to peace is closed.” 'Azam Humáyún Sarwání (who had been one of Sikandar's nobles, and had now joined himself to Sher Khán) replied: “You ought not to take counsel with the nobles of Sultáns Bahlol and Sikandar as to fighting the Mughals, for this reason, that every plan we have devised has by our ill-fortune failed, and as often as we have fought, we have from our internal dissensions been defeated. Fortune has befriended you, in that the whole of the Afgháns have become united heart and soul under you, and have been always ready to engage the Mughals. Men of experience and sagacity have declared to me that the Afgháns are not inferior to the Mughals in warlike prowess, but fly away only because of their internal disunion. The Afgháns will drive the Mughals from India, whenever they obey one leader and are united under him. You are that fortunate man. Ask your other chiefs and act on their advice; as for us, victory has become your friend, and I have nothing to recommend.”
When Sher Khán heard these words of 'Azam Humáyún, he asked his other nobles, for example, Kutb Khán, Haibat Khán Níází, Jalál Khán bin Jaloí, Shujá'at Khán, Sarmast Khán Sar-wání, and others; and they unanimously declared that it was advisable to fight, for they would never have such an opportunity again.
When Sher Khán perceived that the Afgháns were united in his favour and in good heart to fight the Mughals, he quitted the hills of Rohtás, and marched to meet the Emperor's army. At every stage he entrenched himself with an earthwork, and going on entirely at his leisure, made very short marches. When the Emperor heard that Sher Khán was coming, he retraced his steps, and turned in the direction of Sher Khán's army. Sher Khán on hearing this, wrote to the Emperor, saying, that if the Emperor would give him the kingdom of Bengal, and be satisfied that the khutba be read and money struck in the Emperor's name, he would be the Emperor's vassal. Sher Khán then marching on, and selecting an advantageous place,—a large village with a stream of water intervening between himself and the Emperor,—entrenched himself there.42 The breadth of the stream was twenty-five yards.
Khawás Khán also, who had been sent against Mahárta, was summoned to come with all speed. The Emperor, on receiving Sher Khán's missive, agreed to give him the kingdom of Bengal, but on condition that whereas he had transgressed his boundaries, and had encamped himself in face of the Emperor on the other side the stream, he should show his respect to the Emperor by retreating, and leaving the passage of the river free to the Emperor; and that when the Emperor Humáyún had crossed, he would march two or three marches in the track of Sher Khán, and then turn back.43 Sher Khán agreed to these conditions, and leaving the passage of the river free, retraced his march. The Emperor bridging the river, crossed it with his whole camp and army and family, and pitched on the further side.
He then sent Shaikh Khalíl, a descendant44 of Shaikh Faríd Shakar-ganj (the pole of the world), on an embassy to Sher Khán, to urge him to march by regular stages back to Rohtás, and to delay nowhere, and to promise that the Emperor, after making some marches in his rear, would turn aside, and after that would give, as he had agreed, to Sher Khán's agent, a farmán for the kingdom of Bengal. When Shaikh Khalíl came to Sher Khán, he told him what the Emperor had said. Sher Khán ostensibly agreed to this arrangement, and received him with all honour and hospitality; nor did he omit the slightest point of customary etiquette. Shaikh Khalíl, in the presence of the Emperor's men who had accompanied him, debated earnestly and long with Sher Sháh, and strongly advised the proposed peace; and during the consultation the following words fell from Shaikh Khalíl: “If you do not agree to peace, away with you; declare war, and fight.” Sher Khán said, “What you say is a good omen for me; please God, I will fight.” After the consultation, Sher Khán gave to Shaikh Khalíl money and rich clothes and manufactures of Málda and of Bengal in enormous quantities, and captivated his heart by these presents and favours. Sher Khán then sent for Shaikh Khalíl in private, and speaking of the reverence the Afgháns entertained for the holy Shaikh Faríd Shakar-ganj, and of their mutual fatherland, and making him promises to his heart's content, said, “I wish you to give me advice regarding peace or war with the Emperor Humáyún, for the learned have said, ‘It behoves one to take counsel with the wise, with the intelligent, and with far-seeing holy men.’ Now, in you all these qualifications are united. Tell me, therefore, without diminution or reserve, what your mind, clear as the sun, thinks concerning my well-being. Is peace or war with the Emperor most to my advantage?” After much hesitation, Shaikh Khalíl said, “By asking my advice, you have in two ways placed me in a great difficulty: first, since I have come to you as an envoy from the Emperor, it is not right that I should say anything except to his advantage; and, secondly, you have asked advice from me, and those of old have said, ‘If even your enemy asks your advice, speak the truth.’ If I give advice contrary to my own opinion, I shall act dishonestly. The Afgháns for generations past have held my ancestors in reverence; and it appears from the miraculous precepts of the holy prophet Muhammad (may God's mercy rest on him!), that it behoves him who gives advice to do so in good faith. I am compelled, therefore, to speak the truth. War with the Emperor Humáyún is more for your advantage than peace; for this reason, that in his army the most complete disorder exists, he has no horses or cattle, and his own brothers are in rebellion against him. He only makes peace with you now from necessity, and will not eventually abide by the treaty. Look on this opportunity as so much gained, and do not let it out of your grasp, for you will never again have such another.” Sher Khán was wavering in his decision as to peace or war; but as Shaikh Khalíl advised against the peace, he abandoned all idea of it, and determined on war. He had before sent for Khawás Khán, and when he arrived he ordered the whole of his troops to arms, as if Mahárta was approaching to attack them. When he had gone four kos out of his encampment he returned, saying the spies had reported that Mahárta was yet distant.
The next day he again arrayed his army and moved out, and when he had gone several kos, returned, and said that Mahárta was not coming that day. A little before midnight he assembled all his chiefs, and said, “I have promised peace to the Emperor Humáyún; but I have considered that all the good service I have rendered has produced no good fruit; and after all my loyalty to him in producing the defeat of Sultán Mahmúd, he demanded from me the fort of Chunár. When I refused to yield it, he sent a force to take it; and when that failed, he came himself to seize the fort by force, but abandoned his intentions when he heard that Mirzá Muhammad Zamán had escaped from prison, and had raised a sedition in the country. Moreover, Sultán Bahádur, King of Gujarát, was coming to invade the country of Dehlí, and so he was compelled to return. I sent my son Kutb Khán with him throughout the Gujarát campaign.45 Though I could have taken possession of the country of Jaunpúr, etc., yet I did not commit any act of hostility, for the Emperor is mighty; and though I had the power, I would not do any disloyal and evil act, that the Emperor might perceive I was his faithful servant, and desist from seeking to injure me. When he returned from Gujarát, he got his army in readiness, and without regarding my loyalty, did his best to expel me; but as my fortune was great, he did not achieve his desire. I made every submission, but it was all profitless. When, in violation of his promises, he attacked Bengal, I lost all hope in his goodness, and apprehending evil from him, was compelled to declare hostilities against him, and I expelled his governors and spoiled his country as far as Sambhal, and have not left a single Mughal in those parts. Now, with what hope can I conclude this peace with him? He makes peace and manifests a friendly disposition towards me, because his army is in want of horses and cattle and of every equipment, and because his brothers have rebelled against him. He is but playing with me, and eventually will not abide by this peace; but having appeased the rebellion of his brothers on his arrival at Ágra, and refurnished his army, he will not fail to uproot and destroy me. I have often experienced that the Afgháns are braver in battle than the Mughals, who only got the country from the dissensions of the Afgháns. If my brothers advise so, I will break off the peace, and will try my fortune.” They all replied: “By your blessing, dissension has been banished from among the Afghán nation, and we all have been cherished by you; we will not fail in devotion and gallantry to our utmost capability. Your purpose of breaking off the treaty is most wise.” Sher Khán said, “I break off the treaty. I have put my trust in the Protector, and will fight the Emperor Humáyún, as Míán Nizámí has observed.” *** When he dismissed the chiefs, he ordered them to array their men with all speed, as if they were still in alarm as to Mahárta; and when one watch of the night yet remained, the whole army, according to Sher Khán's command, marched two and a half kos in the direction of Mahárta's country. Sher Khán then halted, and addressed his army, saying, “For two days I have drawn out my army, and have returned to my encampment, that I might put the Emperor off his guard, and that he might not suspect that my army was coming towards him. Now, turn; set your faces towards the army of the Emperor, and let not the honour of the Afgháns out of your grasp nor fail to display your utmost devotion, for now is the time to regain the Empire of Hindustán.” The Afgháns replied: “Let not our lord allow any hesitation to find its way to his noble heart.” ***
Having read the fátiha, and drawn up his forces in order of battle, Sher Sháh with all haste marched towards the Emperor's camp. When the Afgháns were close at hand, news was brought to the Emperor that Sher Khán was coming with all speed to battle with him. The Emperor ordered out his army to resist the attack, saying that after a short delay, and having performed his ablutions, he also would follow. The Emperor was a lion (in valour), and in the excess of his gallantry and daring. ** So from the pride of youth, and confidence in the multitude of his forces and followers, who had no equals for intrepidity and gallantry, he despised the forces of Sher Sháh, who were all Afgháns, and did not even inspect his forces nor pay regard to what is necessary in an engagement; nor did he take into consideration the disorganization which the climate of Bengal had produced in his army. Sher Khán knew all the devices and stratagems of war, and knew how to commence and conclude an engagement, and had experienced both prosperity and misfortune. The army of the Mughals had not extricated themselves from their camp, before the Afghán army were already upon them, and coming boldly on, attacked the army of the Emperor without hesitation. In the twinkling of an eye they routed the Mughal forces. Humáyún had not completed his ablutions when the intelligence reached him that the Mughals were utterly scattered, so that to rally them was impossible. The confusion in the army was so great that he had no time to remove his family, but fled in the direction of Ágra, with the intention of collecting all his forces at that place, and returning again from thence to destroy his enemy.
Masnad 'Álí Haibat Khán told me 'Abbás Khán, the author of this book, that he was at Sher Khán's side when the Emperor Humáyún's queen, with other noble ladies and a crowd of women, came out from behind the parda. As soon as Sher Khán's eye fell upon them, he alighted off his horse, and showed them every respect and consoled them.46 He then performed a special ablution, and returned twofold thanks to the Lord of Eternity, and raising up his hands in prayer with all humility and with tears, said *** After this he sent the heralds to proclaim throughout the army, that no person should make captives of or keep a Mughal woman, child, or female slave in his tent one night, but should bring them all to the queen's encampment, and the strictness of his command carried such authority among the Afgháns that no person had any power to resist it; and the heralds before night brought all the wives and families of the Mughals to the queen's encampment and assigned rations to each person. Sher Khán some days afterwards sent the queen to Rohtás under charge of Husain Khán Nírak, and providing the families of the other Mughals with carriages and their necessary expenses, sent them on towards Ágra.47
Sher Khán, who had assumed the title of “Hazrat 'Álí,” since the star of victory had risen in the horizon of his good fortune, ordered his munshís to write letters descriptive of his victory to all parts of the country which were in his possession. Masnad 'Álí 'Ísá Khán, son of 'Umar Khán, whose title was “Khán-i 'azam,” and who during the time Sultán Bahlol, after the death of Tátár Khán Yúsuf-khail, held Lahore in jágír, said to Sher Khán, “You should write the letters describing your victory in the style of farmáns.” Sher Khán observed: “You, who formerly were nobles of Sultáns Bahlol and Sikandar, have, for the cause of the Afgháns, done me the honour of joining yourselves to me. It does not become me to send farmáns to you, and to seat myself on the throne while you stand around me. The King of Hindustán has escaped alive, and still holds most of the country in his possession.” 'Ísá Khán explained that he had a great desire to seat Sher Khán upon the throne, and said, “Sultán Sikandar and his descendants, who, out of regard to their clansmen, would not ascend the throne, acted in violation of the custom of kings. It behoves him whom God Almighty brings to empire, and elevates and exalts above the rest of mankind, to observe the rules of etiquette of former princes.” *** After this, 'Azam Humáyún Sarwání, said, “The Mughals have been kings for two descents; they despise the Afgháns, and consider them as not their own equals in the day of battle; yet by the excellence of your wisdom and your conquering fortune, the Afgháns have overthrown them.” *** Míán Bábin Lodí and the other Afgháns with one consent cried: “There are none like Masnad 'Álí Kalkapúr48 Sarwání and 'Azam Humáyún Sarwání in the army of the Afgháns; what they have said is most right; it is not good to delay.” Sher Khán was much delighted, and said, “The kingly name is a very exalted thing, and is not devoid of trouble; but since the noble minds of my friends have decided to make me king, I agree.” He ordered the astrologers to fix an auspicious moment for his ascent to the throne. When they had consulted the calendar, they came with great delight and said, “An auspicious moment, by the good fortune of your birth hour, has now come. If you at this moment seat yourself upon the throne, defeat and rout will never show their face in your victorious army.” He seated himself on the throne, unfolded the umbrella over his head, and assumed the name of Sher Sháh, and struck coin and caused the khutba to be read in his own name; and he took also the additional title of “Sháh 'Álam.”49 He said to 'Ísá Khán, “You are the son of Shaikh Malahi, and have induced me to strike coin and have the khutba read in my own name; write one letter descriptive of the victory with your own hand, the munshís will write the rest.” So 'Ísá Khán wrote one copy with his own hand, and the munshís wrote the rest. For seven days drums were beaten in token of rejoicing; and the young men of the Afghán army came in crowds from every tribe and danced, as is the custom of the Afgháns. ***
Sher Khán himself pursued the Emperor Humáyún, and got possession of the whole country as far as Kálpí and Kanauj. He again sent Khawás Khán against Mahárta Cherúh,50 to utterly destroy him. Jahángír Kúlí Beg, with 6000 cavalry, was in Bengal; him he ordered to be put to death51 and the chiefs of Hind who were with the Emperor Humáyún he let go free; but Shaikh Khalíl he kept, and made him one of his own friends and counsellors. He sent 'Ísá Khán towards Gujarát and Mándú, and to the chiefs of those parts he wrote, saying, “I am about to send a son of mine into your neighbourhood. When the Emperor Humáyún moves towards Kanauj, do you accompany my son, and seize and lay waste the country about Ágra and Dehlí. At that time a certain man, by name Mallú Khán, had made himself king in Mándú, Sárangpúr, and Ujjain, and had assumed the name of Kádir Sháh; and in Ráísín and Chanderí, Bhaiá Púran Mall ruled as deputy of the infant Rájá Partáb, son of Bhúpat Sháh, the son of Saláhu-d dín. In Sewás, Sikandar Khán Miána held sway; and Mahesar was Rájá of Bhopál. These rulers of Málwá wrote in reply, that when Sher Sháh's son came to those parts, they would not fail to assist and serve him. Mallú Khán put his seal at the head of the letter which he sent, and when the letter arrived, Sher Sháh tore up the letter and put the seal in his turban (by way of showing respect ironically).
When 'Ísá Khán went to Gujarát, Sultán Mahmúd was a minor; but his minister Daryá Khán wrote that the king was a minor, the chiefs at enmity among themselves, and that the Khán-khánán Yúsuf-khail had taken away with him all the army of Mándú and Gujarát. 'Ísá Khán observed to Sher Sháh that “wherever misfortunes have befallen the Afgháns from the Mughals, it has been through this man. The Khán-khánán Yúsuf-khail brought the Emperor Bábar into India from Kábul; and if the Emperor Humáyún had acted according to what the Khán-khánán advised, he would not have repented it, and would have utterly destroyed you; but your good fortune prevailed, so that the Emperor did not act upon his advice. He must be put to death, for it is not right to allow him to live, even though he be a prisoner (at Mungír).” Sher Sháh said, “Every Afghán whom I have consulted has said, ‘He is an Afghán of consideration, and it is not advisable to kill him.’ But my opinion has been that which 'Ísá Khán has expressed.” So he gave orders that the Khán-khánán, who had been kept in confinement since his capture at Mungír, and who had received a daily allowance of half a sír of unground barley, should be put to death; so he was slain. News arrived that the Emperor Humáyún purposed marching towards Kanauj. Sher Khán despatched his son, by name Kutb Khán, to Mándú, in order that he might, in concert with the chiefs of those parts, alarm and ravage the country about Ágra and Dehlí. When the Emperor Humáyún heard that Sher Sháh had sent his son towards Chanderí, that he might raise disturbances in those parts, he sent both his brothers, Mirzá Hindál and Mirzá 'Askarí, with other nobles, in that direction. When the Málwá chiefs heard that two brothers of the Emperor were coming to oppose Kutb Khán, they gave him no assistance. Kutb Khán went from Chanderí to the city of Chondha, and engaging the Mughals at Chondha,52 was slain. Mirzá Hindál and Mirzá 'Askarí having gained this victory, returned to the Emperor.
When Sher Sháh heard that the chiefs of the country of Mándú had not assisted Kutb Khán, and that Kutb Khán was slain, he was extremely grieved and enraged; nevertheless, he did not openly manifest this by his conduct, but kept his grudge against the chiefs of Mándú concealed in his own bosom. The Mughals gained excessive confidence from this victory, and large forces having come also from their own country, the Emperor Humáyún arrayed his army and came to Kanauj (Zí-l ka'da, 946 A.H., April, 1540 A.D.). Sher Sháh also fortified himself on the opposite side of the river Ganges. At this conjuncture he received intelligence that Khawás Khán had slain Mahárta. There was great rejoicing in the Afghán army53 and Sher Sháh wrote to Khawás, saying: “Come with all speed to me; for I and your other friends are awaiting your coming before we engage the enemy; we are looking anxiously in your direction.” And when he heard of the near approach of Khawás Khán, he sent a herald to the Emperor Humáyún, saying, “I have for some time entrenched myself here. The Emperor has the power to choose. If he will cross the river he may fight with me on this side; or, if he prefer it, I will cross the river, and fight with the Emperor on that side.” When the herald came to the Emperor, and reported what Sher Sháh had said, the Emperor, in utter contempt of Sher Sháh, replied: “Say to Sher Khán that if he will retreat some kos from the waterside, I will cross the river Ganges and give him battle.” The herald returned and told Sher Sháh what the Emperor had said. Sher Sháh retreated several kos from the river bank. The Emperor Humáyún, having prepared a bridge, crossed the river Ganges. Hamíd Khán Kákar, one of Sher Sháh's nobles, said, “You ought to attack the Mughal army before they have all crossed the river.” Sher Sháh replied: “I have never before had any advantages, and have been compelled to use stratagems in warfare. Now by the favour of the all-powerful, my force is not inferior to the Emperor's. I will not now, notwithstanding my advantages, break my promise in the face of day. With my army arrayed in the open field, I will give battle without fraud or stratagem. God's will, whatever it may be, will be manifested.” When Sher Sháh understood that the whole force of the Emperor was across the river, he returned towards it, and carefully throwing up, according to his custom, an earthwork embankment opposite the Emperor's army, encamped close by it.
After some days Khawás Khán also came; on the very day he arrived, Sher Sháh marched in fighting order, and captured all the supplies which were coming to the Emperor's army, and took 300 camels, and a large convoy of bullocks. On the 10th Muharram, 947 H., both armies drew out their forces. Sher Sháh thus arranged his army. In the centre was Sher Sháh himself, with Haibat Khán Níází, who bore the title of 'Azam Humáyún, Masnad 'Álí 'Ísá Khán Sarwání, Kutb Khán Lodí, Hájí Khán Jaloí, Buland Khán, Sarmast Khán, Saif Khán Sarwání, Bijlí Khán, and others. On the right were Jalál Khán, son of Sher Sháh, who after Sher Sháh's death succeeded him on the throne, and was entitled Islám Sháh, Táj Khán, Sulaimán Khán Kiráni, Jalál Khán Jaloí, and others. On the left, 'Ádil Khán, son of Sher Sháh, Kutb Khán, Ráí Husain Jalwání, and others. When Sher Sháh had drawn up his army in this order, he said to the Afgháns: “I have used my best exertions to collect you together, I have done my best in training you, and have kept you in anticipation of such a day as this. This is the day of trial; whoever of you shows himself to excel in valour on the field of battle, him will I promote above his fellows.” *** The Afgháns replied: “The mighty king has much protected and favoured us. This is the time for us to serve him and show our devotion.” Sher Sháh ordered each chief to return to his own followers and to remain with them; and he himself went through the army and set it in proper array.
The Emperor's forces were broken by Khawás Khán's division, but Sher Sháh's right, under his son Jalál Khán, was defeated four of the chiefs, however, kept their ground, such as Jalál Khán himself, Míán Aiyúb Kalkapúr Sarwání, and Ghází Mujlí. When Sher Sháh saw that his right was broken, he wished to go to its assistance; but Kutb Khán Lodí said: “My lord, do not quit your own post, lest men should think the centre also is broken. Go on into the midst of the enemy.” As Sher Sháh's division proceeded straight on, they encountered the Mughal force which had routed Sher Sháh's right; they defeated and drove it on the Emperor's centre division. Sher Sháh having driven away the Mughal force in front of his son Jalál Khán; and his left, in which was his other son 'Ádil Khán and Kutb Khán Banet, having repulsed the troops opposed to them, fell on the Mughal centre. Sher Sháh's right, which had been defeated, rallied at the same time, and thus the Afghán army completely surrounded the Mughal force. Sher Sháh's sons and other Afghán chiefs performed many gallant acts, especially Haibat Khán Níází and Khawás Khán, who drove back the Mughals with the stroke of the watered sabre and the point of the life-melting spear. The Emperor Humáyún himself remained firm like a mountain in his position on the battlefield, and displayed such valour and gallantry as is beyond all description. ***
When the Emperor saw supernatural beings fighting against him, he acknowledged the work of God, abandoned the battle to these unearthly warriors, and turned the bridle of his purpose towards his capital of Ágra. He received no wound himself, and escaped safe and sound out of that bloodthirsty whirlpool. The greater part of his army was driven into the river Ganges.54 *** Sher Sháh being at his ease regarding the Mughals, wrote to Shujá'at Khán, whom he had left as faujdár, in the country of Bihár and Rohtás, to besiege the fort of Gwálior, and he told the bearer of the farmán: “The son of Shujá'at Khán, by name Mahmúd Khán, has been slain; do not tell him before he has quitted Rohtás, lest on hearing of the death of his son he delays and puts off his coming.” As soon as he received the farmán, Shujá'at Khán went and besieged Gwálior.55 From Kanauj Sher Sháh despatched Barmazíd Gúr with a large force in advance, but directed him not to hazard an engagement with the Emperor Humáyún, and he also sent another force under Nasír Khán towards Sambhal. Having speedily settled the country about Kanauj, he betook himself in the direction of Ágra.
The Emperor Humáyún, on reaching Ágra, told Amír Saiyid Amíru-d dín, that the Afgháns had not defeated his army, but that he had seen supernatural beings fighting his soldiers, and turning back their horses. When he arrived at Sirhind, he told the same story to Muhibu-d dín Sirhindí. When Sher Sháh approached Ágra,56 the Emperor, unable to remain there, fled towards Lahore. Sher Sháh was greatly displeased at this, and reproached Barmazíd very much, and on his arrival at Ágra remained there for some days himself, but sent Khawás Khán and Barmazíd Gúr in the direction of Lahore, with a large Afghán force, to pursue the Emperor.57 On arriving at Dehlí, the principal men and inhabitants of the city of Sambhal came and complained that Nasír Khán had oppressed and tyrannized over them in various ways. Sher Sháh said to Kutb Khán, “We must select some person endowed both with valour and justice whom to send to Sambhal, for in that sarkár are many lawless and rebellious persons, and the person selected should be able to keep them under.” Kutb Khán replied, “That for these qualities there was no Afghán like to 'Ísá Khán Kalkapúr.” Sher Khán replied, “Right, it shall be so. You yourself go to Masnad 'Álí 'Ísá Khán, and tell him, if he consents, I will appoint him.” Kutb Khán went to 'Ísá Khán, who readily assented. ***
In addition to sarkár Sambhal, Sher Sháh gave him the parganas of Kánt and Gola for his family, and ordered him to maintain five thousand horse, and placed also Nasír Khán under him. When Sher Sháh dismissed 'Ísá Khán to go to sarkár Sambhal, he said, “I am now at my ease regarding the whole country from Dehlí to Lucknow.” Masnad 'Álí, on his arrival at Sambhal, found Nasír Khán had seized Bairam Beg, the keeper of the seals to the Emperor, who afterwards in the time of the Emperor Akbar received the title of Khán-khánán. The reason of Bairam Beg being in Sambhal was as follows. When the army of the Emperor Humáyún was dispersed, Bairam Beg went to Sambhal, having formed an intimate friendship with Míán 'Abdu-l Waháb, son of Míán 'Azízu-lla Dánishmand, one of the chief men of the city of Sambhal. 'Abdu-l Waháb, from fear of Nasír Khán, dared not keep him in the city, but made him over to the Rájá of Lukhnor,58 by name Mitr Sen. The Rájá kept him for some time in the northern part of his country, where there is much jungle. Nasír Khán was informed that Bairam Beg was with Mitr Sen, so he wrote to the Rájá that he must bring Bairam Beg to him. The Rájá, from fear and dread of Sher Sháh, surrendered him to Nasír Khán, who was desirous of putting him to death. An old friendship had subsisted between 'Abdu-l Waháb and 'Ísá Khán from the time of Sultán Sikandar, so he went to 'Ísá Khán, and told him he ought to save Bairam Beg from the hands of the cruel Nasír Khán, who was desirous of putting him to death. 'Ísá Khán accordingly having rescued Bairam Beg from Nasír Khán, brought him into his own house, and kept him there for some time, and gave him an allowance for his support; and he took Rájá Mitr Sen's security that whenever he ('Ísá Khán) should go to Sher Sháh, thither Bairam Beg should accompany him.
When 'Ísá Khán joined Sher Sháh, during the campaign of Mándú and Ujjain, he brought Bairam with him, and introduced him to Sher Sháh in the town of Ujjain. Sher Sháh angrily asked where he had been up to that time. Masnad 'Álí said he had been in the house of Shaikh Malhí Kahál. Sher Sháh replied, “Since it is an established custom among the Afgháns that whatever criminal takes refuge among the relatives of Shaikh Malhí Kahál should be pardoned, I also pardon Bairam Beg. When Sher Sháh was about to leave the darbár, 'Ísá Khán said: “You have for Shaikh Malhí's sake given Bairam Beg his life; give him also for my sake, who have brought him to you, a dress of honour and a horse, and order that he shall pitch his tent with Muhammad Kásim, who surrendered the fort of Gwálior. Sher Sháh assigned him a place near Muhammad Kásim, when Sher Khán marched from Ujjain; but both Bairam Beg and Muhammad Kásim fled towards Gujarát. Muhammad Kásim was killed by the way, but Bairam Beg reached Gujarát. One Shaikh Gadáí was in Gujarát, to whom he did good service, and from Gujarát, Bairam Beg reached the Emperor Humáyún.
After the death of that Emperor, Bairam Beg, who had been dignified with the title of Khán-khánán, returned the kindness of Shaikh Gadáí, Shaikh 'Abdu-l Waháb, and Rájá Mitr Sen with every imaginable favour. 'Ísá Khán was still alive: his age then was ninety years. Many persons said to him that he ought to wait on the Khán-khánán. Masnad 'Álí said: “I will not for any worldly gain wait on the Mughal, nor is it the custom of the sons of Masnad 'Álí 'Umar Khán to ask for a return of their favours.” I have heard from Maulána Muhammad Binor and 'Abdu-l Momin, his son-in-law, who were among the intimates of the Khán-khánán, that they asked the Khán-khánán thus: “Did Masnad 'Álí 'Ísá Khán ever do you a kindness?” He replied: “He saved my life; if he will come to me, I shall feel myself honoured. If I cannot give him more than Sher Sháh, I at least will give him his own Sambhal.” I, 'Abbás Khán, the author of the Tuhfa-i Akbar Sháhí, and Masnad 'Álí 'Ísá Khán Kalkapúr came of the same tribe and family, and I am married to the daughter of his brother's son, whose name is Muzaffar Khán. Much of the history of the Afgháns which I describe I learnt from Khán-'azam Muzaffar Khán, whose ancestors were formerly nobles of Hindustán. When Sultán Sikandar banished Haibat Khán, the father of 'Ísá Khán, the latter went to Sultán Mahmúd, the King of Mándú, and became his chosen counsellor and associate; and when he left Sultán Mahmúd and went to Muzaffar King of Gujarát, he also became his counsellor and friend.
When the Sultán took the fort of Mándú from the unbelievers, he said to Masnad 'Álí: “Go to Sultán Muzaffar, and tell him he should visit the fort of Mándú, for it is a fine place.” Sultán Muzaffar said, “May the fort of Mándú bring Sultán Mahmúd good fortune, for he is the master of it. I, for the sake of the Lord, came to his assistance. On Friday I will go up to the fortress, and having read the khutba in his name, will return.” 'Ísá Khán brought this good news to Sultán Mahmúd. Afterwards, when he left Gujarát, and went to Sultán Ibráhím, he became also his associate and adviser. Sultán Ibráhím entrusted the city of Dehlí to him, when Sultán 'Aláu-d dín, son of Sultán Bahlol, was repulsed from it; for in spite of all his efforts, 'Ísá Khán would not surrender it. He afterwards went to Sher Sháh, became one of his attendant nobles, and after he had conquered Dehlí, Sher Sháh gave Sambhal to him, as has before been stated. Sher Sháh, entrusting Mewát to Hájí Khán, went himself towards Lahore. On arriving near Sirhind, he bestowed it on Khawás Khán. Khawás Khán entrusted it to Malik Bhagwant, who was his slave. When the Emperor Humáyún reached Lahore, certain Mughals, who had newly arrived from their own country, and had never yet encountered the Afgháns, said to the Emperor, “You should send us to fight the Afgháns,” and vaunted much, saying, “Who and what manner of men are these Afgháns, that they should be able to contend with us in the day of battle?” So the Emperor Humáyún sent these Mughals to make the attempt, and Khawás Khán and Barmazíd Gúr, who had marched in advance of Sher Sháh from Dehlí, met them at Sultánpúr, where they engaged. The Mughals were defeated, and retired to Lahore. Khawás Khán halted at Sultánpúr; but the Emperor and Mirzá Kámrán quitted Lahore, which was shortly afterwards occupied by Sher Sháh, who, however, made no halt there. On the third march beyond Lahore, he heard that Mirzá Kámrán had gone by way of the Júdh hills to Kábul, and that the Emperor Humáyún was marching along the banks of the Indus to Multán and Bhakkar. The King went to Khusháb, and thence despatched Kutb Khán Banet, Khawás Khán, Hájí Hhán, Habíb Khán, Sarmast Khán, Jalál Khán Jaloí, 'Ísá Khán Níází, Barmazíd Gúr, and the greater part of his army, in pursuit of the Emperor, towards Multán. He instructed them not to engage the Emperor, but to drive him beyond the borders of the kingdom, and then to return. When they had gone two marches, they heard that the Mughal army had divided into two portions. The Afghán army was in great anxiety, lest, as the force with the King was so small, the Mughals should make forced marches, and attack him. The Afghán army, therefore, also dividing itself into two divisions, the one under Khawás Khán, 'Ísá Khán, and others, crossed the river, and marched along the bank of the Jelam towards Multán; and Kutb Khán and the rest remained and marched along the nearer bank of the same stream. The Mughal division which had quitted the Emperor, and was marching towards Kábul, encountered Khawás Khán, and not being strong enough to fight, fled, leaving their drums and standards behind, which fell into Khawás Khán's hands,59 and the Afghán army returning from that place, rejoined Sher Sháh. Sher Sháh delayed some time at Khusháb. While there, Isma'íl Khán, Fath Khán, and Ghází Khán Bilúchí, came and waited on him. Sher Sháh ordered the Bilúchís to brand their horses. Isma'íl Khán said: “Other persons brand their horses—I will brand my own body.” Sher Sháh was pleased, and excused him from the branding, and confirmed to him the country of Sind. The chiefs of every tribe and family of Roh came to wait on Sher Sháh. The writer's grandfather, Shaikh Báyazíd Kalkapúr Sarwání, who was the successor to the very holy Shaikh Ahmad Sarwání, who was the grandfather of Shaikh Malhí Kayál, whose holiness and glory is famous all over the country of Roh, and whose disciples and followers most of the Afgháns are, and whose descendants are celebrated for their austerity and for the strictness of their devotional observances, and who are also known for their gallantry and wealth; nor does any person excel them in honour and consideration—the whole race of Afgháns acknowledge their greatness, and their own, and their ancestors' virtues: —this said Shaikh Báyazíd came to Sher Sháh at Khusháb, and had an interview with him.
Since the previous kings of whom I have treated in this history paid extreme respect to Shaikh Báyazíd, he was very anxious as to whether Sher Sháh would or would not show him the same civilities. The moment Shaikh Báyazíd came unto Sher Sháh's darbár, the latter came forward several steps to receive him; and abasing himself gave Shaikh Báyazíd precedence. My grandfather expected that Sher Sháh would give him his hand, but he said: “Embrace me.” When he took leave also, he showed every sign of respect and friendship. When he returned towards Bengal, Sher Sháh sent him back to Roh, and gave him one lac of tankas in cash, as well as Bengal silks and clothes of Hindustán. The Shaikh said:—“Since the time of the Langáhs the Bilúchís have possessed themselves of the rent-free tenures of my predecessors.” Sher Sháh ordered that Isma'íl Khán Bilúch should receive instead the pargana of Ninduna, in the Ghakkar country, and that the Bilúchís should be made to restore to Shaikh Báyazíd, the rightful owner, the land of the Sarwánís, which they had usurped. Isma'íl Khán dared not disobey the orders of Sher Sháh, so he took pargana Ninduna and the Ghakkar villages, and restored the Sarwánís' land to Shaikh Báyazíd. Shaikh Báyazíd came a second time to see Sher Sháh during the Ujjain and Sárangpúr campaign. *** Sher Sháh conferred on the Shaikh 2000 bighás of land in the pargana of Batnúr, which had been the settlement of his ancestors, and also fixed the amount of present he was to receive on visiting the king at a lac of tankas, and promised that after the fall of Kálinjar he would give him the provinces of Sind and Multán, the country of the Bilúchís.
When Shaikh Báyazíd surrendered his life to the Almighty, my father, Shaikh 'Álí, took his place in the country of Roh, and in those days he had an interview with Islám Khán, who also paid the customary respect and honour to Shaikh 'Álí without difference or diminution, and confirmed his assignments. In the reign of the Emperor Akbar I also enjoyed these as usual, until the twenty-fourth Iláhí year (corresponding to 987 A.H.), when the Emperor ordered that I should be advanced to the command of 500 horse, and brought to his presence. But the Kází-'álí did not give a true account of myself or of my ancestors, but spoke ill of us, and said, “Shaikh 'Abdu-l Nabí has given 2000 bighás of land to two Afgháns!” In short, my bad fortune so ordered it that my share of the assignment (madad-ma'ásh) was resumed. When the Khán-khánán, who was a follower of Saiyid Hámid, son of Saiyid Mirán, son of Saiyid Mubárak of Bukhára and Gujarát, became acquainted with my history and that of my ancestors, he said it was a pity I should remain unemployed; but I refused employ, and said that I would go to the country of my fathers. He then brought Mír Hámid to my house without invitation, and since Mír Hámid was so kind as thus to honour me, I could not act in contravention to his wishes. So I entered the service of the chief of the great Shaikhs, Mír Saiyid Hámid. He assigned to me a clear 200 rupees a month, and moreover showed me all manner of kindness. At last, by ill luck of the unpropitious heavens, he sent me to Bajwára on some urgent business, and a short time afterwards was himself slain, at which I remained immersed in grief and distress.
Sher Sháh gave to many of his kindred who came from Roh money and property far exceeding their expectations. *** Sárang Ghakkar did not come to wait on Sher Sháh. That monarch, therefore, marched with all his forces and retinue through all the hills of Padmán and Garjhák, in order that he might choose a fitting site and build a fort there to keep down the Ghakkars, in which he might leave a garrison on the Kábul road,60 when he himself returned. Having selected Rohtás, he built there the fort which now exists, and laid waste the country of the Ghakkars,61 and carried them into captivity, and having seized the daughter of Sárang Ghakkar, bestowed her on Khawás Khán.
In the midst of this, news came from Bengal that Khizr Khán Bairak, the governor of Bengal, had married the daughter of Sultán Mahmúd, late King of Bengal, and, after the manner of the kings of that country, sat on the “Tokí,” which means “an upper place.” Sher Sháh was much annoyed at this, and wishing to avert the evil ere it could take place, left Haibat Khán Níází, Khawás Khán, 'Ísá Khán Níází, Habíb Khán, Ráí Husain Jalwáni, in the fort of Rohtás, and set out himself for Bengal. On his arrival in Bengal, Khizr Khán Bairak came to give him a regal reception. Sher Sháh said to him: “Why did you without my order take in marriage the daughter of Sultán Mahmúd, and seat yourself on the “Tokí,” after the manner of the kings of Bengal? It becomes not a noble of the State to do a single act without the King's permission. Sher Khán ordered him to receive a severe punishment and to be put in chains, and said, that if any of his nobles should do anything without his leave, he should receive a similar punishment. And he divided the kingdom of Bengal into different provinces, and made Kází Fazílat, better known as Kází Fazíhat, manager (amír) of Bengal, and himself returned to Ágra.
When he arrived at Ágra, a letter arrived from Shujá'at Khán, saying that Muhammad Kásim had consented to the following terms:—that the Afgháns should be allowed to enter the fort; that the Mughals should have free access to the camp of Sher Sháh; and that as soon as Sher Sháh should come to Gwálior, Muhammad Kásim was to be introduced to the king's presence, when he would give up the fort to the king's commissioners. Sher Sháh replied that his standards would shortly move towards the country of Mándú, by way of Gwálior, in order to wreak on the rulers of Mándú his revenge for their backwardness in assisting Kutb Khán. At this time there were persons in the kingdom of Mándú who ruled independently. Mallú Khán, who had assumed the title of king, and the name of Kádir Sháh, held possession and rule of the city of Shádmábád, that is to say the fort of Mándú, and of Ujjain, Sárangpúr, and the fort of Rantam-bhor; secondly, Sikandar Khán Míána, who was ruler of the country of Sewás and Hindia; thirdly, Rája Partáb Sháh, the son of Bhúpat Sháh, son of Saláhu-d dín, who was a minor, and whose deputy Bhaiá Púran Mal held the districts of Chanderí and Ráísín; and, fourthly, Bhopál, who possessed the country of Bíjá-garh and Tamhá.62 When the king came to Gwálior,63 Muhammad Kásim, who was one of Humáyún's nobles, and governor of the fort, came and paid his respects to the king, and surrendered the fort to the royal commissioners. When he came to Gágrún, Shujá'at Khán sent Rám Sáh, Rájá of Gwálior, to bring Púran Mal of Ráísín to the king. Púran Mal wrote, saying he would come if Shujá'at Khán himself went to fetch him. So Shujá'at Khán went to the fort of Ráísín, and brought Púran Mal with him to the king's presence. Upon his setting out, the wife of Rájá Púran Mal, by name Ratnávalí, who was exceedingly beloved by him, sent to Shujá'at Khán, saying, “I will then break my fast when I shall see Púran Mal again, and the whole time he is away I will sit on a bastion of the fort, and watch for his return.” Shujá'at Khán sent to her to be of good cheer, for that Bhaiá Púran Mal would return to her next day. Shujá'at brought Púran Mal to the king's presence, with 6000 horsemen, none of whom were forty years of age. Sher Sháh instantly bestowed 100 horses and 100 splendid dresses of honour on Púran Mal, and allowed him to return. Bhaiá Púran Mal left to serve the king his younger brother, whose name was Chatur Bhoj.
When the king arrived at Sárangpúr, the agent of Mallú Khán came and made his obeisance, and said that Mallú Khán was coming to meet the king. Sher Sháh ordered Shujá'at Khán to go and receive him, and he went accordingly. Sher Sháh came, seated himself outside his tents, and held an open darbár. Shujá'at Khán brought Mallú Khán to him, and he asked where Mallú Khán had pitched his camp. He replied: “I have come alone into your presence, my place is in your darbár. My hope is, I may be permitted to perform the office of a sweeper therein.” Shujá'at Khán represented that Mallú Khán had brought 200 horsemen with him. Sher Sháh ordered that a scarlet tent, a bed, a canopy, and other conveniences, as well as a handsome entertainment, should be provided for him. When they marched from Sárangpúr, Sher Sháh showed the whole array of his army to Mallú Khán, who was astounded, for he had never anywhere seen such an army before.64 At every stage they threw up an earthen entrenchment, and when he saw the labour and exertions of the soldiers, and the rigour of Sher Sháh's discipline, Mallú Khán said to the Afgháns, “You submit yourselves to wonderful labours and exertions, night and day you have no rest; ease and comfort are things forbidden to you.” The Afgháns replied—“Such is our master's custom. *** It behoves a soldier, whatever service his chief may order, or whatever labour or exertion he may require, not to consider it a hardship. Ease is for women, it is shameful to honourable men.”65
When Sher Sháh went to Ujjain, he encamped at Kalídah. Sikandar Khán Miána came and made obeisance. Sher Sháh assigned the country of Mándú to Shujá'at Khán; and when he reflected that Mallú Khán had submitted to him, *** he pardoned him, and bestowed on him the sarkár of Kálpí.66
Mallú Khán, having brought his family out of Ujjain, considered that he was not equal to the labour and exertion which Sher Khán required, and that therefore it was better to escape by some contrivance from his camp.67 Accordingly, like a Hindú slave, he made up his mind to run away. Sher Sháh perceived his intention, and ordered Shujá'at Khan to arrest hím. Shujá'at Khán looked towards Mallú Khán, who, being an intelligent man, understood what was going on, and said to Shujá'at Khán: “Tell the king that I have no carriage to take my family to Kálpí.” When Shujá'at Khán represented this, it was ordered that 100 camels and 100 mules, with camelmen and mulemen, and several carts with drivers, should be given to Mallú Khán for the conveyance of his family. When he received the camels, mules and carriages, he took them, together with their drivers, to his own encampment, and gave them some very powerful wine, so that they got drunk and became insensible. Mallú Khán, taking his treasures and his family, absconded. When it was day, it became known that Mallú Khán had fled. Sher Sháh said: “Mallú Khán, the slave! Have you seen what a trick he has played me?” *** Sher Sháh was angry with Shujá'at Khán, and sent him in pursuit of Mallú Khán, saying: “Where-ever Mallú Khán may go, you go also and bring him to me. Did not I tell you to arrest him? But you did not, and acted negligently.”68 Shujá'at Khán went in pursuit, but failed to overtake Mallú Khán, who went to Sultán Mahmúd at Gujarát,69 and Shujá'at Khán returned from the frontier of Mándú. The whole of the kingdom of Mándú had been bestowed on Shujá'at Khán; but the king in his anger deprived him of it, and in lieu of it gave him Sewás, Hindia, etc., which had been in Sikandar Khán Míána's possession, equal to the maintenance of 4000 horse; and gave Ujjain to Daryá Khán Gujarátí, who had been wazír of Sultán Mahmúd, King of Gujarát, and who had fled to Sher Sháh; and Sárangpúr to 'Álam Khán Lodí, who also had been a noble of Sultán Mahmúd's court; and making Hájí Khán and Junaid Khán faujdárs of that country, he left them in the city of Dhár, and returned himself, by the fort of Ran-tambhor,70 on the road to which place Sikandar Khán Míána, who had been ruler of sarkár Sewás, fled. 'Usmán Khán, whose name was previously Abú-l Farra, was governor of Rantambhor, on behalf of Mallú Khán. When Sher Sháh approached, he came and submitted to him, and Sher Sháh, making over the fort of Rantambhor to his eldest son 'Ádil Khán, went himself to Ágra.71
Sher Sháh left Mándú for Ágra, Násir Khán, brother of Sikandar Khán Míána, with 6000 horse, and 200 elephants, came against Shujá'at Khán. Shujá'at Khán had with him only 2000 horse. Násir Khán said to his men: “Seize Shujá'at Khán alive, that I may retain him as a hostage for Sikandar Khán.72 When Sher Sháh releases Sikandar Khán, I will release Shujá'at Khán,” When Shujá'at heard that Násir Khán was approaching, he went out to meet him, and gave him battle at Nílgarh.73 When the two armies were commingled together, part of Násir Khán's and part of Shujá'at Khán's force were put to flight. Three men had sworn an oath to attack only Shujá'at Khán. One was Míán 'Umar, the second Saiyid Táhir, the third Koká. One of these wounded Shujá'at Khán in the neck with a dagger; the second wounded him in the nostril with a spear thrust, and broke his front teeth; the third, having wounded him with a sabre, caught hold of the hair of his head, to take him alive before Násir Khán. Shujá'at Khán struck him with his sabre on the hand and cut it off, and so freed himself. Jajhár Khán, who was of Shujá'at Khán's own tribe, slew the second horseman; and Mubárak Khán Shíríní killed the third. So Shujá'at was rescued, and raised again his standard which had fallen. Those of Shujá'at Khán's men who had fled returned, and rallying round him on all sides, gained the victory. Násir Khán fled, and the 200 elephants fell into Shujá'at Khán's hands. Almighty God made Shujá'at Khán victorious, and he returned from Nílgarh to Hindia.
After this, Shujá'at Khán heard that Mallú Khán was approaching, and had surrounded Hájí Khán, who had fortified himself in Mándú. Although Shujá'at's wounds were not well, yet, taking the 200 elephants with him, he went to the succour of Hájí Khán, and encamped outside the walls. The next day at sunrise the two armies, drawn out in battle array, engaged in the open field. The Afghán army displayed such gallantry as is beyond all power of description; the victory remained with Shujá'at Khán, and Mallú Khán fled to Gujarát. When Sher Sháh heard this intelligence, he called Hájí Khán to his own presence from Mándú, and bestowed on him the command of 12,000 horse, and gave to Shujá'at Khán Ujjain, Mándú, Sárangpúr, and Mansúr in jágír; and the country of Sewás he gave to Shams Khán, Bihár Khán, and Mír Khán Níází, who were of Shujá'at Khán's kindred; and Shujá'at Khán became ruler of all the country of Mándú.
Sher Sháh went from Ágra in the direction of Bihár and Bengal,74 when he was attacked by fever and ague. During his illness he several times said: “I did wrong when I said I would go towards Bengal. If Almighty God will vouchsafe me a recovery from this fever, I will return with all speed; and Púran Mal, who has enslaved the families of the Musulmáns in Chanderí and has made dancing-girls of their daughters, and did not accompany my son Kutb Khán—him I will so punish that he may be a warning to others, that hereafter no unbelievers in Hind may oppress and injure the families of Musulmáns.75 Almighty God vouchsafed to Sher Sháh a recovery from that fever, and he quickly turned back towards Ágra. When he arrived there, in all the pride of his state, he set off for the country of Mándú, in the year A.H. 950,76 and took the fort of Ráísín. He ordered his noble son, Jalál Khán, to go on in advance with his victorious troops. When Jalál Khán came to the stage of Bhílsa, Sher Sháh joined him. From this place Sher Sháh, by forced marches, brought his conquering army into the vicinity of the fort of Ráísín.77 Bhaiá Púran Mal sent 600 elephants, but did not himself come out. Sher Sháh laid siege to Ráísín, when a report came from Khawás Khán that enmity had broken out between him and Haibat Khán, and requesting him to send for a representative from each of them. When Sher Sháh knew of the quarrel between Khawás Khán and Haibat Khán Níází, he sent for 'Ísá Khán and Habíb Khán, and confirmed Haibat Khán in the government of the Panjáb, attaching Fath Jang Khán to him. And whereas Fath Khán Jat had been in rebellion in Kayúla, and in the time of the Mughals had plundered the whole country and laid it waste as far as Pánípat,78 and the Bilúchís had got into their power and possession the country of Multán, Sher Sháh ordered Haibat Khán to expel these people from the country, and to punish them, and to restore to prosperity the city of Multán. Instantly on the receipt of this farmán, Haibat Khán said to the vakíl of Chákar Rind, who at that time was ruler of Satgarh, “Go, tell Chákar Rind that I shall halt within his confines, and he must have his forces ready, for I am going to seize Mahla.” ***
Early in the morning news came that Haibat Khán had arrived. Chákar went out to welcome Haibat Khán, but was in a state of great alarm. As soon as Haibat Khán saw him, he said, “I shall take your muster at Dípálpúr, lest in the delay Fath Khán should escape.” Within two days Haibat Khán arrived at the Pattan79 of Kutb 'Álam Shaikh Faríd. Fath Khán fled, and Haibat Khán pursued him. As Fath Khán had his family and women with him, he perceived he was unable to escape from Haibat Khán. There was near Karor and Fathpúr a mud fort; he took possession of it, and Haibat Khán coming up in pursuit, laid siege to it. Fath Khán held out the fort for some days; at last, being reduced to extremities, he sent Shaikh Ibráhím, son of Kutb 'Álam Shaikh Faríd, to Haibat Khán as an intercessor. He came before Haibat Khán, who said to him, “I am a servant of Sher Sháh's, what my master orders that I must do.” He put Fath Khán in prison. In the night, Hindú Bilúch with 300 men came out of the mud fort, and attacking the besiegers fiercely, cut their way through by their valour. When it was day, the Afgháns occupied the fort. The women of the better sort had been mostly slain by the Bilúchís, and the rest the Afgháns made slaves; and they took Hindú Bilúch and Bakshú Langáh prisoners. Haibat Khán then went to the city of Multán, which the Bilúchís had laid waste. Haibat Khán restored it to its former state, and the inhabitants who were scattered abroad he again collected together, and he wrote letters to Sher Sháh reporting the true condition of the country, and concerning the capture of Fath Khán, Hindú Bilúch, and Bakshú Langáh. Sher Sháh was exceedingly rejoiced, and made him a Masnad 'Álí and gave him the title of 'Azam Humáyún. He also gave him a red tent, and wrote to him to repeople Multán, and to observe the customs of the Langáhs, and not to measure the land, but take a share of the produce.80 He ordered him to put Fath Khán and Hindú Bilúch to death, to keep Bakshú Langáh or his son always with him, but to confirm his districts to him. As soon as 'Azam Humáyún received this order at Multán, he left Fath Jang Khán in Mult n and came to Lahore, and put Fath Khán and Hindú Bilúch to death. Fath Jang Khán so repeopled Multán, and showed such benevolence to the people, that Multán flourished more than it had done, even under the Langáhs, and in the country of Multán he founded a city which he called “Shergarh.” Sher Sháh, while besieging the fort of Ráísín, gave orders that no Afghán should approach it; for that he would take the fort by the exercise of his skill and prudence.
One day, certain followers and retainers of the Afgháns were sitting together, when the conversation turned on the gallantry and valour of Bhaiá Púran Mal's soldiers. Most of those present said, that no one in those days was a match for Púran Mal's soldiers in these qualities, who daily came out of the fort and said: “There is no one in the army of Sher Khán who can fight with us,” and that it was from fear that none of the Afgháns approached them. When the Afgháns amongst these retainers pondered on these remarks, the reproach thus thrown upon Afghán honour overcame them, and they said, “Though Sher Sháh should cut our throats or banish us from his kingdom, yet we will for once encounter the soldiers of Púran Mal, that we may test their gallantry and valour.”
The next day before sunrise, 1500 horsemen assembled at an appointed place, and drawing up in order of battle, sent to Púran Mal, saying: “Your men every day boast of their valour. We, 1500 horse, against Sher Sháh's command, have come and are drawn up in order of battle; do you also collect your men, and come out of the fort, that we may fight, and the valour of either side may be made manifest.” Bhaiá Púran Mal had great reliance on the valour and gallantry of his men, and did not think the Afgháns were at all equal to them in bravery. He sent out to answer the challenge the most famous of his soldiers, veterans in battle, and he himself took his seat above the gateway. The Afgháns and Rájpúts joined battle, and the fight continued till the first watch of the day, up to which time neither party had succeeded in driving the other from their ground. At length the Afgháns got the advantage, and began to make the Rájpúts give ground, when such bravery was displayed on both sides as surpasses all description. In the end, Almighty God gave the victory to the Afgháns, and they drove the Rájpúts from their position to near the gate of the fort. The Rájpúts again made a stand near the gate of the fort, but the Afgháns made a headlong charge upon them, which they were unable to resist, and fled within the gate; and the Afgháns returned triumphant to their camp.
When Sher Sháh heard that the Afghán retainers had displayed such gallantry and bravery, he was much pleased; but in public severely reprimanded those who had risked an engagement in defiance of his orders. After some days, he gave fitting rewards to every one of them, and good appointments and jágírs, and said, “The gallantry you have displayed has been made known to me; now look at my work, and see what I shall do to this fort.” After this Sher Sháh issued an order that they should bring all the brass in camp and make mortars (deghá) of it. When, according to his order, they had brought all the brass that was in the bázár or in the tents of the soldiery, in pots, dishes, and pans, they made it all into mortars, and when they were finished he ordered them to bombard the fort from all simultaneously. When they had battered the fort and breached it in all directions, Púran Mal became alarmed, and after the lapse of six months, he came out himself to Sher Sháh, who said to him, “I grant you quarter, and the government of Benares; provided you give up the families of the Musulmáns whom you have enslaved.” Púran Mal replied: “I had none of these families in slavery, neither am I the Rájá; I am but his deputy. I will go to him, and I will say whatever you order me, and see what he replies.” Sher Khán permitted him to go. When he went up into the fort, he got together all his jewels, and sent to Sher Khán to say, “I dare not again face your presence, but do you first go away two marches from the fort. I will come out and give up the fort to your soldiers, and go myself to other countries. And if your eldest son 'Ádil Khán and Kutb Khán Banet will bind themselves by promise and oaths that I shall suffer no injury in property or person, I will come with my women and family out of the fort.” Sher Sháh told 'Ádil Khán and Kutb Khán Banet what Púran Mal said, and ordered them to satisfy him and bring him out. Kutb Khán Banet went up to the fort, and binding himself by solemn oaths, brought Púran Mal out of the fort of Ráísín with his family and wives. Kutb Khán requested that some encamping ground for Púran Mal might be selected, and Sher Sháh indicated a spot in the midst of his encampment, and Kutb Khán himself accompanied Púran Mal to the spot Sher Sháh had directed.
After some days the widows of the chief men of Chanderí and others waited for Sher Sháh by the road-side, and cried out to him. Sher Sháh asked who they were, and ordered them to be brought to him. They said: “We have suffered from this inhuman and malignant infidel all kinds of tyranny and oppression. He has slain our husbands, and our daughters he has enslaved, and has made dancing-girls of them, and has seized our lands, and all our worldly goods, for a long time past. *** If you do not give us justice, hereafter, in the day of resurrection, when the first and the last of all men shall be collected together, we will accuse you.” As Sher Sháh was a believing and just ruler, on hearing these zeal-stirring words of the oppressed, the tears dropped from his eyes, and he said: “Have patience, for I have brought him out by promises and oaths.” They replied: “Consult with your 'Ulamá, and act upon the decision they shall pronounce.” When Sher Sháh came back to his tent, he sent for all of the 'Ulamá who accompanied his victorious army, and related one by one the inhuman deeds Púran Mal had committed with respect to the wives and families of the Musulmáns, and asked them to give their decision. Amír Shaikh Rafí'u-d dín and the other 'Ulamá who accompanied the victorious army pronounced a decision for the death of Púran Mal.
At night orders were given to 'Ísá Khán Hájib, that he should desire his troops to collect with the elephants in all haste at a certain spot, for that Sher Sháh intended to make a forced march towards Gondwána. To Habíb Khán he gave secret orders that he should watch Bhaiá Púran Mal, and take care he did not fly, and not to speak a word of this to any living creature, for that he (Sher Shah) had long entertained this design. When the elephants and troops were at the appointed spot, they reported it. Sher Sháh ordered that at sunrise they should surround the tents of Bhaiá Púran Mal. Púran Mal was told that they were surrounding his encampment, and going into the tent of his beloved wife Ratnávalí, who sang Hindí melodies very sweetly, he cut off her head, and coming out said to his companions: “I have done this: do you also slay your wives and families.” While the Hindús were employed in putting their women and families to death, the Afgháns on all sides commenced the slaughter of the Hindús. Púran Mal and his companions, like hogs at bay, failed not to exhibit valour and gallantry, but in the twinkling of an eye all were slain. Such of their wives and families as were not slain were captured. One daughter of Púran Mal and three sons of his elder brother were taken alive, the rest were all killed. Sher Khán gave the daughter of Púran Mal to some itinerant minstrels (bázigarán), that they might make her dance in the bázárs, and ordered the boys to be castrated, that the race of the oppressor might not increase. He made over the fort of Ráísín to Munshí Sháhbáz Khán Acha-khail Sarwání, and returned himself towards Ágra, and remained at the capital during the rainy season.81
After the conclusion of the rains, he consulted his nobles of name, and the wise among his courtiers, saying that he was quite at ease concerning the kingdom of Hind. *** The nobles and chiefs said, “*** It seems expedient that the victorious standards should move towards the Dekhin, for certain rebellious slaves have got the country out of the power of their master, and have revolted, and following the heresy of the people of dissent (Shía'), abuse the holy posterity. It is incumbent on the powerful and fortunate to root out this innovating schism from the Dekhin.” Sher Sháh replied: “What you have said is most right and proper, but it has come into my mind that since the time of Sultán Ibráhím, the infidel zamíndárs have rendered the country of Islám full of unbelievers, and have thrown down the masjids and buildings of the believers, and placed idol-shrines in them, and they are in possession of the country of Dehlí and Málwá. Until I have cleansed the country from the existing contamination of the unbelievers, I will not go into any other country. *** First, I will root out that accursed infidel Máldeo, for that he was the servant of the ruler of Nágor and Ajmír, who placed the greatest confidence in him. The evil-minded and ungrateful infidel slew his master, and by violence and oppression possessed himself of those kingdoms.” The chiefs and nobles assented, and it was so settled. In the year 950 A.H. (1543-4 A.D.),82 the king ordered that his conquering forces, beyond all calculation or numeration, should, under the shadow of his victorious standards, march towards the country of Nágor, Ajmír, and Júdhpúr. I have heard from the mouth of the respectably descended Shaikh Muhammad, and of the Khán-'azam, and of Muzaffar Khán, that in this campaign Sher Sháh had so great an army with him that the best calculators, in spite of all reflection and thought and calculation, were at a loss to number and reckon them, and we often ascended the tops of eminences that the length and breadth of the army might appear to us; but so exceeding was its magnitude, that its whole length and breadth were never visible together; and we asked old men of great age, whether they had ever seen or heard of so great an army, but they replied they had not.83
When Sher Sháh marched from the capital of Ágra, and arrived at Fathpúr Síkrí, he ordered that each division of the army should march together in order of battle, and should throw up an earthen entrenchment at every halting-ground. On the way they encamped one day on a plain of sand, and in spite of every labour, they could not, on account of the sand, make an entrenchment. Sher Sháh considered by what contrivance the entrenchment could be completed. Mahmúd Khán, grandson84 of Sher Sháh, said: “Let my lord order that sacks should be filled with sand, and that they should make the entrenchment with the bags.” Sher Sháh praised his grandson's contrivance, and was greatly delighted, and ordered that they should make the fortification of bags filled with sand, and, accordingly, at that halting-place they did so. When he approached the enemy, Sher Khán contrived a stratagem; and having written letters in the name of Máldeo's nobles to this effect, viz., “Let not the king permit any anxiety or doubt to find its way to his heart. During the battle we will seize Máldeo, and bring him to you,” and having inclosed these letters in a kharíta or silken bag, he gave it to a certain person, and directed him to go near to the tent of the vakíl of Máldeo, and remain there, and when he went out to drop the kharíta on his way, and conceal himself. Sher Sháh's agent did as he was ordered; and when the vakíl of Máldeo saw the kharíta lying, he picked it up, and sent the letters to Máldeo. When the latter learnt their contents, he was much alarmed, and fled without fighting. Although his nobles took oaths of fidelity, he did not heed them. Some of the chieftains, such as Jaya Chandel and Gohá, and others, came and attacked Sher Sháh, and displayed exceeding valour. Part of the army was routed, and a certain Afghán came to Sher Sháh, and abused him in his native tongue, saying, “Mount, for the infidels are routing your army.” Sher Sháh was performing his morning devotions, and was reading the Musta'ábi-i 'ashr. He gave no reply to the Afghán. By a sign he ordered his horse, and mounted, when news of victory was brought, to the effect that Khawás Khán had slain Jaya and Gohá with all their forces. When Sher Sháh learnt the valour and gallantry of Jaya and Gohá, he said: “I had nearly given the kingdom of Dehlí for a millet (bájra) seed.”85 He left Khawás Khán and 'Ísá Khán Níází, and some other chiefs, in the country of Nágor, and himself returned. Khawás Khán founded a city in his own name near the fort of Júdhpúr, and called it “Khawáspúr,” and brought into his power and possession the whole country of Nágor and Ajmír, the fort of Júdhpúr, and the districts of Márwár. Máldeo went to the fort of Siwána, on the borders of Gujarát.
Sher Sháh's nobles represented to him that, as the rainy season was near at hand, it was advisable to go into cantonments. Sher Sháh replied, “I will spend the rainy season in a place where I can carry on my work,” and marched towards the fort of Chitor.86 When he was yet twelve kos from the fort of Chitor, the Rájá who was its ruler sent him the keys. When Sher Sháh came to Chitor, he left in it the younger brother of Khawás Khán, Míán Ahmad Sarwání, and Husain Khán Khiljí. Sher Sháh himself marched towards Kachwára. His eldest son 'Ádil Khán took leave to go and visit Rantambhor. Sher Sháh said: “I give you leave in order to please you, but come again quickly, and do not remain for a long time at that fort.” When Sher Sháh came near Kachwára, Shujá'at Khán went towards Hindia. Certain persons who were envious of Shujá'at Khán, said that Shujá'at Khán kept up no troops, though he had to maintain 12,000 horse, and on this account he dared not come into the presence, and made a pretext of going to Hindia. The sons of Shujá'at Khán, Míán Báyazíd and Daulat Khán, were with Sher Sháh, and wrote the true state of the case to Shujá'at Khán. On hearing the news, Shujá'at Khán came to Kachwára, to the king, and requested his horses should be branded. 7500 he passed under the brand, and he said that the rest were in his districts on duty, and if ordered he would send for them and pass them too under the brand. Sher Sháh replied: “There is no necessity for branding them, for your force is with you; and as to the persons who have defamed you, their faces are blackened.” When he dismissed Shujá'at Khán, he said: “As soon as you receive news that Kalinjar87 has fallen, do you, without fail, set off for the Dekhin with all haste. Do not delay or linger at all.”
Sher Sháh himself marched from Kachwára towards Kalinjar. When he reached the stage of Sháhbandí, news came that 'Álam Khán Míána had created a disturbance in the Doáb, and having raised the province of Mírath (Meerut), had ravaged great part of the neighbouring country. Sher Sháh turned from Sháhbandí, and had gone two marches, when news arrived that 'Álam Khán had been conquered; for Bhagwant, the slave of Khawás Khán, and governor of Sirhind, had slain him near Sirhind. Upon this, Sher Sháh turned again towards Kalinjar.88 The Rájá of Kalinjar, Kírat Sing, did not come out to meet him. So he ordered the fort to be invested, and threw up mounds against it, and in a short time the mounds rose so high that they overtopped the fort. The men who were in the streets and houses were exposed, and the Afgháns shot them with their arrows and muskets from off the mounds. The cause of this tedious mode of capturing the fort was this. Among the women of Rájá Kírat Sing was a Pátar slave-girl, that is a dancing-girl. The king had heard exceeding praise of her, and he considered how to get possession of her, for he feared lest if he stormed the fort, the Rájá Kírat Sing would certainly make a jauhar, and would burn the girl.
On Friday, the 9th of Rabí'u-l awwal, 952 A.H., when one watch and two hours of the day was over, Sher Sháh called for his breakfast, and eat with his 'ulamá and priests, without whom he never breakfasted. In the midst of breakfast, Shaikh Nizám said, “There is nothing equal to a religious war against the infidels. If you be slain you become a martyr, if you live you become a ghází.” When Sher Sháh had finished eating his breakfast, he ordered Daryá Khán to bring loaded shells,89 and went up to the top of a mound, and with his own hand shot off many arrows, and said, “Daryá Khán comes not; he delays very long.” But when they were at last brought, Sher Sháh came down from the mound, and stood where they were placed. While the men were employed in discharging them, by the will of God Almighty, one shell full of gunpowder struck on the gate of the fort and broke, and came and fell where a great number of other shells were placed. Those which were loaded all began to explode. Shaikh Halíl, Shaikh Nizám, and other learned men, and most of the others escaped and were not burnt, but they brought out Sher Sháh partially burnt. A young princess who was standing by the rockets was burnt to death. When Sher Sháh was carried into his tent, all his nobles assembled in darbár; and he sent for 'Ísá Khán Hájib and Masnad Khán Kalkapúr, the son-in-law of 'Ísá Khán, and the paternal uncle of the author, to come into his tent, and ordered them to take the fort while he was yet alive. When 'Ísá Khán came out and told the chiefs that it was Sher Sháh's order that they should attack on every side and capture the fort, men came and swarmed out instantly on every side like ants and locusts; and by the time of afternoon prayers captured the fort, putting every one to the sword, and sending all the infidels to hell. About the hour of evening prayers, the intelligence of the victory reached Sher Sháh, and marks of joy and pleasure appeared on his countenance. Rájá Kírat Sing, with seventy men, remained in a house. Kutb Khán the whole night long watched the house in person lest the Rájá should escape. Sher Sháh said to his sons that none of his nobles need watch the house, so that the Rájá escaped out of the house, and the labour and trouble of this long watching was lost. The next day at sunrise, however, they took the Rájá alive.90
On the 10th Rabí'u-l awwal, 952 A.H. (May, 1545 A.D.), Sher Sháh went from the hostel of this world to rest in the mansion of happiness, and ascended peacefully from the abode of this world to the lofty heavens. The date was discovered in the words az átash murd, “He died from fire.”
When fortune gave into the hands of Sher Sháh the bridle of power, and the kingdom of Hind fell under his dominion, he made certain laws, both from his own ideas, and by extracting them from the works of the learned, for securing relief from tyranny, and for the repression of crime and villany; for maintaining the prosperity of his realms, the safety of the highways, and the comfort of merchants and troops. He acted upon these laws, and it was proved by experience that they became the means of procuring tranquillity for the classes above mentioned. Sher Sháh often said, “It behoves kings to inscribe the page of their history with the characters of religion, that their servants and subjects may love religion; for kings are partakers in every act of devotion and worship which proceeds from the priests and the people. Crime and violence prevent the development of prosperity. It behoves kings to be grateful for the favour that the Lord has made his people subject to them, and therefore not to disobey the commandments of God.”
Sher Sháh attended to every business concerning the administration of the kingdom and the revenues, whether great or small, in his own person. Nor did he permit his temporal affairs to be unmixed with devotion; day and night he was employed in both works. He had his dependents in waiting to awake him when two-thirds of the night were passed; and bathing himself every night he employed himself in prayer and supplication until the fourth watch. After that he heard the accounts of the various officers, and the ministers made their reports of the work to be done in their respective departments, and the orders which Sher Sháh gave they recorded for their future guidance, that there might be no necessity for inquiry in future. When the morning had well broken, he again performed his ablutions, and with a great assembly went through his obligatory devotions, and afterwards read the Musta'áb-i 'ashr, and other prayers. After that his chiefs and soldiers came to pay their respects, and the “heralds” (nakíbs) called out each man by name, and said:—“Such and such a one, the son of such a one, pays his respects.” One full hour after sunrise, that is to say about the first hour of the day, he performed the Namáz-i ishrák.91 After this, he inquired of his chiefs and soldiers if any of them had no jágír, that he might assign them one before entering on a campaign; and said that if any asked for a jágír while engaged in a campaign, he should be punished. After that he asked if there were any who were oppressed or evil treated, that he might right them, for Sher Sháh was adorned with the jewel of justice, and he oftentimes remarked, “Justice is the most excellent of religious rites, and it is approved alike by the kings of infidels and of the faithful.” *** So he employed himself in personally discharging the administration of the kingdom, and divided both day and night into portions for each separate business, and suffered no sloth or idleness to find its way to him. “For,” said he, “it behoves the great to be always active, and they should not consider, on account of the greatness of their own dignity and loftiness of their own rank, the affairs and business of the kingdom small or petty, and should place no undue reliance on their ministers. *** The corruption of ministers of contemporary princes was the means of my acquiring the worldly kingdom I possess. A king should not have corrupt vakíls or wazírs: for a receiver of bribes is dependent on the giver of bribes; and one who is dependent is unfit for the office of wazír, for he is an interested personage; and to an interested person loyalty and truth in the administration of the kingdom are lost.”
When the young shoot of Sher Sháh's prosperity came into bearing, he always ascertained the exact truth regarding the oppressed, and the suitors for justice; and he never favoured the oppressors, although they might be his near relations, his dear sons, his renowned nobles, or of his own tribe; and he never showed any delay or lenity in punishing oppressors. *** Among the rules which Sher Sháh promulgated, and which were not before known in the world, is the branding of horses;92 and he said he ordered it on this account, that the rights of the chiefs and their soldiers might be distinct, and that the chiefs might not be able to defraud the soldiers of their rights; and that every one should maintain soldiers according to his rank (mansab), and should not vary his numbers. “For,” said he, “in the time of Sultán Ibráhím, and afterwards, I observed that many base nobles were guilty of fraud and falsehood, who, at the time when their monthly salary was assigned to them, had a number of soldiers; but when they had got possession of their jágírs, they dismissed the greater number of their men without payment, and only kept a few men for indispensable duties, and did not even pay them in full. Nor did they regard the injury to their master's interests, or the ingratitude of their own conduct; and when their lord ordered a review or assembly of their forces, they brought strange men and horses, and mustered them, but the money they put into their own treasuries. In time of war they would be defeated from paucity of numbers, but they kept the money, and when their master's affairs became critical and disordered, they, equipping themselves with this very money, took service elsewhere; so from the ruin of their master's fortunes they suffered no loss. When I had the good fortune to gain power, I was on my guard against the deceit and fraud of both chiefs and soldiers, and ordered the horses to be branded, in order to block up the road against these tricks and frauds; so that the chiefs could not entertain strangers to fill up their ranks.” Sher Sháh's custom was this, that he would not pay their salary unless the horses were branded, and he carried it to such an extent that he would not give anything to the sweepers and women servants about the palace without a brand, and they wrote out descriptive rolls of the men and horses and brought them before him, and he himself compared the rolls when he fixed the monthly salaries, and then he had the horses branded in his presence.
After the Namáz-i ishrák, he went through various business: he paid each man separately, mustered his old troops, and spoke to the newly-enlisted men himself, and questioned the Afgháns in their native tongue. If any one answered him accurately in the Afghán tongue, he said to him, “Draw a bow,” and if he drew it well, he would give him a salary higher than the rest, and said, “I reckon the Afghán tongue as a friend.” And in the same place he inspected the treasure which arrived from all parts of the kingdom, and gave audience to his nobles or their vakíls, or to zamíndárs, or to the envoys of the kings of other countries, who came to his victorious camp; or he heard the reports which came from the nobles who were his 'ámils, and gave answers to them according to his own judgment, and the munshís wrote them. When two hours and a half of the day were over, he rose up and eat his breakfast with his 'ulama and holy men, and after breakfast he returned and was engaged as before described till mid-day. At mid-day he performed the kailúla (which is a supererogatory act of devotion), and took a short repose. After his rest he performed the afternoon devotions in company with a large assembly of men, and afterwards employed himself in reading the Holy Word. After that he spent his time in the business described above; and whether at home or abroad, there was no violation of these rules.
The rules for the collection of revenue from the people, and for the prosperity of the kingdom, were after this wise: There was appointed in every pargana,93 one amír, one God-fearing shikkdár, one treasurer, one kárkun to write Hindí, and one to write Persian; and he ordered his governors to measure the land every harvest, to collect the revenue according to the measurement, and in proportion to the produce, giving one share to the cultivator, and half a share to the mukaddam; and fixing the assessment with regard to the kind of grain, in order that the mukaddams, and chaudharís, and 'ámils should not oppress the cultivators, who are the support of the prosperity of the kingdom. Before his time it was not the custom to measure the land, but there was a kánúngo in every pargana, from whom was ascertained the present, past, and probable future state of the pargana. In every sarkár he appointed a chief shikkdár and a chief munsif, that they might watch the conduct both of the 'ámils and the people; that the 'ámils should not oppress or injure the people, or embezzle the king's revenue; and if any quarrel arose among the king's 'ámils regarding the boundaries of the parganas, they were to settle it, that no confusion might find its way amongst the king's affairs. If the people, from any lawlessness or rebellious spirit, created a disturbance regarding the collection of the revenue, they were so to eradicate and destroy them with punishment and chastisement that their wickedness and rebellion should not spread to others.
Every year, or second year, he changed his 'ámils, and sent new ones, for he said, “I have examined much, and accurately ascertained that there is no such income and advantage in other employments as in the government of a district. Therefore I send my good old loyal experienced servants to take charge of districts, that the salaries, profits, and advantages, may accrue to them in preference to others; and after two years I change them, and send other servants like to them, that they also may prosper, and that under my rule all my old servants may enjoy these profits and advantages, and that the gate of comfort and ease may be opened to them.”
And this amount of forces fully equipped and stored came yearly to the king's presence. His whole army was beyond all limit or numbering, and it increased every day. The rule regarding the army for guarding the kingdom from the disturbances of rebels, and to keep down and to repress contumacious and rebellious za-míndárs , so that no one should think the kingdom undefended, and therefore attempt to conquer it, was as follows: Sher Sháh always kept 150,000 horse and 25,000 footmen, either armed with matchlocks or bows, present with him, and on some expeditions took even more with him. Haibat Khán Níází, to whom the title of 'Azam Humáyún had been granted, had one force consisting of 30,000 horsemen in the neighbourhood of the fort of Rohtás, near to Bálnáth of the jogís, and held in check the country of Kashmír and of the Ghakkars. Díbálpúr and Multán were committed to Fath Jang Khán, and in that (latter) fort much treasure was stored; and in the fort of Milwat (which Tátár Khán Yúsuf-khail built in the time of Sultán Bahlol) was stationed Hamíd Khán Kákar, who held such firm possession of the Nagarkot, Jwála, Dihdawál, and Jammú hills, in fact the whole hill-country, that no man dared to breathe in opposition to him; and he collected the revenue by measurement of land from the hill people. The sarkár of Sirhind was given in jágír to Masnad 'Álí Khawás Khán, who kept in that sarkár his slave Malik Bhagwant, at the capital Dehlí. Míán Ahmad Khán Sarwání was amír, and 'Ádil Khán and Hátim Khán shikkdar and faujdár. And as the head-men and cultivators of the sarkár of Sambhal had fled from the oppression of Nasír Khán, Sher Sháh sent there Masnad 'Álí 'Ísá Khán, son of Masnad 'Álí Haibat Khán Kalkapúr Sarwání, who had the title of Khán-i 'Azam, and was a counsellor and adviser of Sultáns Bahlol and Sikandar; and he said to him: “I have given to you the parganas of Kánt, Gola, and Tilhar for your family and your old horsemen. Enlist five thousand new cavalry, for the sarkár of Sambhal is full of disaffected and riotous people, and the cultivators of that sarkár are for the most part rebellious and contumacious, and they are always given to quarrelling with and resisting their rulers.”
When Masnad 'Álí 'Ísá Khán came to that sarkár, he being a lion in valour and gallantry, so humbled and overcame by the sword the contumacious zamíndárs of those parts, that they did not rebel even when he ordered them to cut down their jungles, which they had cherished like children, but cut them with their own hands, though drawing deep sighs of affliction; and they reformed and repented them of their thieving and highway robberies, and they paid in at the city their revenue according to the measurements. Sher Khán said: “By reason of these two Sarwánís, that is to say, 'Ísá Khán and Míán Ahmad, I have no cause for anxiety from the sarkár of Dehlí to the sarkár of Lucknow.
And Bairak Níází, who was shikkdar of Kanauj, so subjected the contumacious and highway plunderers inhabiting the pargana of Malkonsah, that no man dared to draw a breath in contravention of his orders. Bairak Níází so established authority over the people of Kanauj, that no man kept in his house a sword, an arrow, a bow, or a gun, nay, any iron article whatever, except the implements of husbandry and cooking utensils; and if he ordered the head-men of any village to attend him, they obeyed his order, and dared not for one moment to absent themselves. The fear and dread of him was so thoroughly instilled into the turbulent people of those parts, that according to the measurement they paid their revenue to the treasurers.
And when the rebellion and disobedience of the zamíndárs who live in the parts about the banks of the rivers Jumna and Chambal became known to Sher Sháh, he brought 12,000 horsemen from the Sirhind sarkár, and quartered them in the pargana of Hatkánt and that neighbourhood, and they repressed the zamíndárs and cultivators of those parts; nor did they pass over one person who exhibited any contumacy. And in the fort of Gwálior, Sher Sháh kept a force to which were attached 1000 matchlockmen. In Bayána, he left a division, besides a garrison of 500 matchlocks; in Rantambhor, another division, besides 1600 matchlockmen; in the fort of Chitor, 3000 matchlockmen;94 in the fort of Shadmábád, or Mandú, was stationed Shujá'at Khán, with 10,000 horse and 7000 matchlocks. He had his jágírs in Málwá and Hindia. In the fort of Ráísín a force was stationed, together with 1000 artillerymen; and in the fort of Chunár another force also, with 1,000 match-lockmen; and in the fort of Rohtás, near Bihár, he kept Ikhtiyár Khán Panní, with 10,000 matchlockmen; and Sher Sháh kept treasures without number or reckoning in that fort. And he kept a force in the country of Bhadauria,95 and another under Khawás Khán and 'Ísá Khán in the country of Nágor Júdhpúr and Ajmír; another in Lucknow, and one in sarkár Kálpí. The kingdom of Bengal he divided into parts, and made Kází Fazílat amír of that whole kingdom. And in every place where it served his interests, he kept garrisons.
After a time he used to send for the forces which had enjoyed ease and comfort on their jágírs, and to send away in their stead the chiefs who had undergone labour and hardship with his victorious army. He appointed courts of justice in every place, and always employed himself in founding charities, not only for his lifetime, but even for after his death. May glory and blessings be upon his eminent dignity! For the convenience in travelling of poor travellers, on every road, at a distance of two kos, he made a saráí; and one road with saráís he made from the fort which he built in the Panjáb to the city of Sunárgáon, which is situated in the kingdom of Bengal, on the shore of the ocean. Another road he made from the city of Ágra to Burhánpúr, which is on the borders of the kingdom of the Dekhin, and he made one from the city of Ágra to Júdhpúr and Chitor; and one road with saráís from the city of Lahore to Multán. Altogether he built 1700 saráís96 on various roads; and in every saráí he built separate lodgings, both for Hindús and Musulmáns, and at the gate of every saráí he had placed pots full of water, that any one might drink; and in every saráí he settled Bráhmans for the entertainment of Hindús, to provide hot and cold water, and beds and food, and grain for their horses; and it was a rule in these saráís, that whoever entered them received provision suitable to his rank, and food and litter for his cattle, from Government. Villages were established all round the saráís. In the middle of every saráí was a well and a masjid of burnt brick; and he placed an imám and a mua'zzin in every masjid, together with a custodian (shahna), and several watchmen; and all these were maintained from the land near the saráí. In every saráí two horses were kept, that they might quickly carry news.97 I have heard that Husain Tashtdar98 once, on an emergency, rode 300 kos in one day.99 On both sides of the highway Sher Sháh planted fruit-bearing trees, such as also gave much shade, that in the hot wind travellers might go along under the trees; and if they should stop by the way, might rest and take repose.100 If they put up at a saráí, they bound their horses under the trees.
Sher Sháh also built a fort, Rohtás, on the road to Khurásán, to hold in check Kashmír and the country of the Ghakkars, near the hill of Balnáth Jogí, four kos from the river Behat, and about sixty kos from Lahore, and fortified and strengthened it exceedingly. There was never seen a place so fortified, and immense sums were expended upon the work. I, 'Abbás Kalkapúr Sarwání, author of the Tuhfa-i Akbar Sháhí, have heard from the relators of the history of Sher Sháh, that, when building this fort, stones were not procurable. The overseers wrote in their reports that stone was not procurable, or only procurable at an enormous outlay. Sher Sháh wrote back in reply, that his order should not be allowed to fail from avarice, and they should go on with the building though they paid for the stone its weight in copper. He called that fort “Little Rohtás.”101
The former capital city of Dehlí was at a distance from the Jumna, and Sher Sháh destroyed and rebuilt it by the bank of the Jumna, and ordered two forts to be built in that city, with the strength of a mountain, and loftier in height; the smaller fort for the governor's residence; the other, the wall round the entire city, to protect it;102 and in the governor's fort he built a jamá' masjid of stone, in the ornamenting of which much gold, lapis lazuli, and other precious articles were expended. But the forti-cations round the city were not completed when Sher Sháh died. He destroyed also the old city of Kanauj, the former capital of the Kings of India, and built a fort of burnt brick there; and on the spot where he had gained his victory he built a city, and called it Sher Súr. I can find no satisfactory reason for the destruction of the old city, and the act was very unpopular. Another fort, that of Bohnkundal, he also built, and ordered another fort to be built in these hills, and called it “Sher Koh.”103 He said, “If my life lasts long enough, I will build a fort in every sarkár, on a suitable spot, which may in times of trouble become a refuge for the oppressed and a check to the contumacious; and I am making all the earthen-work saráís of brick, that they also may serve for the protection and safety of the highway.”
For the protection of the roads from thieves and highway robbers, he made regulations as follows: He strictly impressed on his 'ámils and governors, that if a theft or robbery occurred within their limits, and the perpetrators were not discovered, then they should arrest the mukaddams of the surrounding villages, and compel them to make it good; but if the mukaddams produced the offenders, or pointed out their haunts, the mukaddams of the village where the offenders were sheltered were compelled to give to those of the village where the crime occurred the amount of restitution they had paid; the thieves and highway robbers themselves were punished with the penalties laid down in the holy law. And if murders should occur, and the murderers were not discovered, the 'ámils were enjoined to seize the mukaddams, as detailed above, and imprison them, and give them a period within which to declare the murderers. If they produced the murderer, or pointed out where he lived, they were to let the mukaddam go, and to put the murderer to death; but if the mukaddams of a village where the murder had occurred could not do this, they were themselves put to death; for it has been generally ascertained that theft and highway robberies can only take place by the connivance of these head-men. And if in some rare case a theft or highway robbery does occur within the limits of a village without the cognizance of the mukaddam, he will shortly make inquiry that he may ascertain the circumstances of it; for mukaddams and cultivators are alike thieves, and they bear to each other the intimate relations of kinsmen: hence either the mukaddams are implicated in thefts and highway robberies, or can ascertain who perpetrated them. If a mukaddam harbours thieves and robbers unknown to the governor, it is fit he should be punished, or even be put to death, that it may be a warning to others to abstain from similar acts.104
In the days of Sher Sháh and of Islám Sháh, the mukaddams used to protect the limits of their own villages, lest any thief or robber, or enemy of their enemies, might injure a traveller, and so be the means of their destruction and death. And he directed his governors and 'ámils to compel the people to treat merchants and travellers well in every way, and not to injure them at all; and if a merchant should die by the way, not to stretch out the hand of oppression and violence on his goods as if they were unowned; for Shaikh Nizámí (may God be merciful to him!) has said: “If a merchant die in your country, it is perfidy to lay hands on his property.” Throughout his whole kingdom Sher Sháh only levied customs on merchandize in two places, viz.: when it came from Bengal, customs were levied at Gharrí (Sikrí-galí); when it came from the direction of Khurásán, the customs were levied on the borders of the kingdom; and again, a second duty was levied at the place of sale. No one dared to levy other customs, either on the road or at the ferries, in town or village. Sher Sháh, moreover, forbad his officials to purchase anything in the bázárs except at the usual bázár rates and prices.
One of the regulations Sher Sháh made was this: That his victorious standards should cause no injury to the cultivation of the people; and when he marched he personally examined into the state of the cultivation, and stationed horsemen round it to prevent people from trespassing on any one's field. I have heard from Khán-i'azam Muzaffar Khán, who said he often accompanied Sher Sháh, that he used to look out right and left, and (which God forbid!) if he saw any man injuring a field, he would cut off his ears with his own hand, and hanging the corn (which he had plucked off) round his neck, would have him to be paraded through the camp.105 And if from the narrowness of the road any cultivation was unavoidably destroyed, he would send amírs, with a surveyor, to measure the cultivation so destroyed, and give compensation in money to the cultivators. If unavoidably the tents of his soldiery were pitched near cultivation, the soldiers themselves watched it, lest any one else should injure it, and they should be blamed and be punished by Sher Sháh, who showed no favour or partiality in the dispensation of justice. If he entered an enemy's country, he did not enslave or plunder the peasantry of that country, nor destroy their cultivation. “For,” said he, “the cultivators are blameless, they submit to those in power; and if I oppress them they will abandon their villages, and the country will be ruined and deserted, and it will be a long time before it again becomes prosperous.” Sher Sháh very often invaded an enemy's country; but on account of his justice the people remained, and brought supplies to his army, and he became known by the fame of his generosity and benevolence; and he was all day long occupied in scattering gold like the sun, in shedding pearls like a cloud; and this was the reason that the Afgháns collected round him, and that the kingdom of Hindústán fell to him. And if any want befell his victorious army, he did not suffer one soldier or any poor helpless person to be in despair or utterly unprovided for, but gave them something for their subsistence. Every day he enlisted men, to give them a subsistence.
His kitchen was very extensive, for several thousand horsemen and private followers, who in the Afghán tongue are called “Fiáhí,” fed there; and there was a general order, that if any soldier or religious personage, or any cultivator, should be in need of food, he should feed at the king's kitchen, and should not be allowed to famish. And places for the dispensing of food to the poor and destitute, and to all necessitous persons, were established in the camp, that they might feed every one as above described. The daily cost of these meals, and of these places for the distribution of food, was 500 gold pieces (ashrafís).
It became known to him that the imáms and religious persons had, since the time of Sultán Ibráhím, by bribing the 'ámils, got into their possession more land than they were entitled to hold; he therefore resumed their holdings, and investigating the cases himself, gave to each his right, and did not entirely deprive any man of his possessions. He then gave them money for their road expenses, and dismissed them. Destitute people, who were unable to provide for their own subsistence, like the blind, the old, the weak in body, widows, and the sick, etc., to such he gave stipends from the treasury of the town in which they were resident, and giving them the expenses of their journey sent them away. And on account of the fraudulent practices of the religious personages (imáms), he made this arrangement: he did not give the farmáns directing the assignments to the religious personages themselves, but ordered the munshís to prepare the farmáns relating to one pargana, and to bring them to him. Sher Sháh then put them all into a letter and put his seal on it, and gave it to a trustworthy man of his own, and said to him, “Carry these farmáns to such and such a pargana.” When the farmáns came to the shikkdár, he first made over to the holy personages their stipends, and then gave the farmáns into their possession. Sher Sháh often said, “It is incumbent upon kings to give grants to imáms; for the prosperity and populousness of the cities of Hind are dependent on the imáms and holy men; and the teachers and travellers, and the necessitous, who cannot come to the king, they will praise him, being supported by those who have grants; and the convenience of travellers and the poor is thereby secured, as well as the extension of learning, of skill, and religion; for whoever wishes that God Almighty should make him great, should cherish 'Ulamá and pious persons, that he may obtain honour in this world and felicity in the next.”
To every pious Afghán who came into his presence from Afghánistán, Sher Sháh used to give money to an amount exceeding his expectations, and he would say, “This is your share of the kingdom of Hind, which has fallen into my hands, this is assigned to you, come every year to receive it.” And to his own tribe and family of Súr, who dwelt in the land of Roh, he sent an annual stipend in money, in proportion to the numbers of his family and retainers; and during the period of his dominion no Afghán, whether in Hind or Roh, was in want, but all became men of substance. It was the custom of the Afgháns during the time of Sultáns Bahlol and Sikandar, and as long as the dominion of the Afgháns lasted, that if any Afghán received a sum of money, or a dress of honour, that sum of money or dress of honour was regularly apportioned to him, and he received it every year.
There were 5000 elephants in his elephant sheds, and the number of horses personally attached to him was never fixed, for his purchases and gifts of them were equally great; but 3400 horses were always kept ready in the saráís to bring intelligence every day from every quarter. 113,000 villages of Hind were included in the royal fisc.106 He sent a shikkdár to each of his parganas, which were all prosperous and tranquil, and there was not one place which was contumacious or desolated; the whole country was settled and happy; corn was cheap, nor during his time was there anywhere scarcity or famine. His army was beyond all reckoning, and every day increased. For the enforcement of the regulations which he had published for the protection of the people, Sher Sháh sent trusted spies with every force of his nobles, in order that, inquiring and secretly ascertaining all circumstances relating to the nobles, their soldiers, and the people, they might relate them to him; for the courtiers and ministers, for purposes of their own, do not report to the king the whole state of the kingdom, lest any disorder or deficiency which may have found its way into the courts of justice should be corrected.
I have heard from a trustworthy Afghán, who was with Shujá'at Khán, that when Sher Sháh gave him the government of the kingdom of Málwá, at the time of assigning jágírs, his ministers said to him: “It is time to assign jágírs to the solidery if it pleases your worship; keep a share for yourself from the portion assigned to the soldiery, and divide the rest among them.” Shujá'at Khán, from covetousness, agreed to his ministers' proposal. When his soldiers heard of it, 2000 of them, men of repute, both horse and foot, bound themselves together by an agreement, that if Shujá'at Khán permitted himself, from covetousness, to infringe their rights, they would represent the case to Sher Sháh, who showed no favour in dipensing justice to any one on account of the amount of his followers, or on account of his kindred; that they would unanimously expose the innovations of Shujá'at Khán and his ministers, and that they would stand by and assist each other in good or evil, and would not, for any worldly covetousness, scratch the face of friendship and alliance with the nail of disunion. After this agreement, they went on a march from Shujá'at Khán's forces, and sent a man of their own to him, saying: “Your ministers do not give us the full rights which Sher Sháh has bestowed on us, and it is contrary to his regulations, that the soldiery should be defrauded; nay, the nobles ought rather to encourage the poor among their soldiery with presents, over and above their monthly pay, that in time of action they may serve them with earnestness and devotion. If you covet our rights, the door will be opened to enmity and mutiny, and your army and your forces will become disunited and dispirited, which will be the cause of disgrace to your ministers.”
When Shujá'at Khán became aware of the request of his soldiers, he asked of his ministers what course it behoved him to pursue. They replied:—“Two thousand cavalry have turned aside from the path of obedience, and you are lord of 10,000; if you fully satisfy these impudent persons, people will think you have done so for dread of Sher Sháh, and dilatoriness and infirmity will find their way among the officers of your province and into the stability of your authority. It now becomes you to give a stern and peremptory reply, and such as shall leave no hope, so that others may not behave ill and may not disobey your commands.” Covetousness sewed up the far-seeing eye of Shujá'at Khán's sagacity, and made him forgetful of the justice and watchfulness of Sher Sháh. The soldiers, on receiving his harsh answer, took counsel together; some said that they ought to go to the presence of Sher Sháh the Just; but some Afgháns, who knew Sher Sháh's disposition, and were moreover possessed of some share of prudence and sagacity, said to their friends,—“It is not proper to go ourselves to Sher Sháh, for this reason: that he has posted us with Shujá'at Khán in this country of the Dekhin, and it is not right for us to move out of these parts without his orders. Let us send a vakíl to Sher Sháh, the protector of the oppressed, to represent the real circumstances of our case to him. Whatever he orders, let us act up to it; and if any business of the king's should meanwhile occur, it behoves us to exert ourselves in its settlement more than all others.” At length the opinion of these Afgháns was adopted by all, and they wrote an account of their state and sent it. Their vakíl had not yet arrived when Sher Sháh's spies reported the circumstances of Shujá'at Khán's quarrel with the 2000 remonstrants to Sher Sháh. On hearing the news, Sher Sháh was enraged, and sending for Shujá'at Khán's vakíl, said to him, “Write to Shujá'at, and say:— ‘You were poor, and I ennobled you, and put under you Afgháns better than yourself. Are you not satisfied with the revenue of your government, that you covet the rights of the soldiery? and are you without any shame before the people or any fear of God, and have you violated my regulations which I have enacted and promulgated for this very purpose, that the chief's rights and those of his soldiery might be distinct, and that the chiefs might respect the rights of the soldiers? If you were not a protégé of my own, I would strip off your skin; but I pardon you this first fault. Do you, before their vakíl reaches me, appease your soldiery, and give them a satisfactory answer; if not, and their vakíl comes and complains to me, I will resume your jágírs, and arrest and punish you severely. It does not behove nobles to disobey their master's orders, for this occasions the loss to him of his honour and authority.’”
When the vakíl's letter reached Shujá'at Khán, he was exceedingly confounded and ashamed, and disturbed with dread and apprehension; so reproaching his ministers, he said:— “Your counsel has been the cause of disgrace and distress to me. How shall I show my face to the king?” Then going himself to the encampment of the 2000 remonstrants, he made many excuses for himself, and appeasing the soldiery with promises and oaths that he would not do them any harm, and encouraging them with gifts and presents, brought them back to his own encampment. When the vakíl of the soldiers turned back again from his journey, and came to Shujá'at Khán, the latter returned many thanks to heaven, and distributed much money to the poor and needy, and gave him a horse and a princely robe of honour. Sher Sháh's authority, whether he was absent or present, was completely established over the race of Afgháns. From the fear, either of personal punishment or of deprivation of office, there was not a creature who dared to act in opposition to his regulations; and if a son of his own, or a brother, or any of his relatives or kin, or any chief or minister, did a thing displeasing to Sher Sháh, and it got to his knowledge, he would order him to be bound and put to death. All, laying aside every bond of friendship or respect, for the sake of the honour of the Afghán race, obeyed without delay his irresistible farmáns.
I, the author of this relation, 'Abbás Kalkapúr Sarwání, have heard that during the reign of Sher Sháh, 'Azam Humáyún Níází was ruler of the Panjáb and Multán, and had a force of 30,000 horse under him. No other of Sher Sháh's nobles had so great a force. Sher Sháh sent his own nephew, Mubáriz Khán, to govern the district of Roh, which was in the possession of the Níázís. Mubáriz Khán ordered Khwája Khizr Sambhali, chief of the Sambhals, to give him a mud fort which he had built on the Indian (i.e. eastern) bank of the river Sind. Mubáriz Khán lived in this fort, and the Sambhals were generally with him; indeed there was not a moment they were not employed in his service, and always obedient and submissive to him. The daughter of Allah-dád Sambhal had no equal in that tribe for beauty and comeliness. When Mubáriz Khán heard the fame and renown of her beauty, he became, without having seen her, desperately in love with her, and the bird of rest and quiet flew out of his hand. Actuated by the pride of power, he took no account of clanship, which is much considered among the Afgháns, and especially among the Rohilla men; and sending a confidential person to Allah-dád, demanded that he should give him his daughter in marriage. Allah-dád sent a civil reply, saying:—“My lord is of high power and rank, and has many sons, and many high-born wives and women servants are in his female apartments; besides, my lord has been bred and brought up in Hindustán, and is possessed of delicate breeding and graceful accomplishments: my sons have the habits and manners of Roh. Alliance between myself and my lord is altogether unadvisable, as there is so wide a difference between us.” When Mubáriz Khán heard Allah-dád's answer, he was convulsed with exceeding anger, and set himself to injure and persecute the Sambhals, in the hope that they, being driven to extremities by his violence and oppression, might give him Allah-dád's daughter. From fear of Sher Sháh, the Sambhals submitted to all the violence and oppression which Mubáriz committed; but when it reached beyond all bounds of sufferance, Faríd, Idrís,*This name is doubtful. and Nizám, three illegitimate brothers of Allah-dád, said to Mubáriz Khán,—“We three brothers have several daughters, and possess more influence in our tribe than Allah-dád. We will give you a daughter of any of us brothers you may wish, and do you then abstain from persecuting the Sambhals.” Mubáriz Khán replied:—“I do not require your daughters; give me Allah-dád's daughter.”
When the Sambhals perceived that Mubáriz Khán desired a thing which could never come to pass, they said undisguisedly to him,—“Intermarriages have continually taken place between our families and yours, but always those of pure descent have intermarried with those of pure descent, and the illegitimate with the illegitimate. Although, with regard to your station in life, such a marriage is not an equal one, yet, as the mother of us three was, as yours was, a slave, and respecting the royal authority, we have agreed to our daughters being given in marriage to you, in order that the rust of quarrel and contention might be effaced from between us. To this you have not consented, which we much regret: do not act in opposition to the fear of God and the customs of the Afgháns. Allah-dád is of pure birth, and he never will be compelled to connect himself with you by force and violence, or from fear of you; do not entertain so vain a desire.” When Mubáriz Khán heard these words, from presumption, arrogance, and the pride of power, his wrath overpowered him; he gave way to anger and enmity, and hastened to persecute the Sambhals; and, on account of his hatred, without any fault of theirs, laid waste their villages and their property, and made prisoners of many of the inhabitants. Among these he carried off to his own house the daughter of Kherú, who was a dependent of Allah-dád, and filled the post of shahna among the Sambhals. The chiefs of the Sambhals came in a body to Mubáriz Khán, and said: “The honour of our women and yours is one. Release the daughter of Kherú the shahna, and respect the honour of our women.” But although the Sambhals humbly and earnestly entreated him, he would not listen to them, for his predestined time was near at hand. When the Sambhals were driven to despair, they said to Mubáriz Khán:—“You were born in Hindustán, and do not understand the habits of the Afgháns. The crane has never yet overpowered or domineered over the hawk. We have paid the reverence due to the king and to yourself. Leave us alone, and do not oppress and injure us beyond all bounds, and let this helpless one go free.” Mubáriz Khán in a passion replied:—“You talk of the honour of this dependent of yours; you will know what it is when I tear Allah-dád's daughter by force from her house, and bring her away.” The chiefs of the Sambhals fell into a passion also, and said to Mubáriz Khán:—“Have respect to your own life, and do not step beyond your own bounds. If you so much as look towards our women, we will slay you; though, in return for your life, they will put several of our chiefs to death.” Mubáriz Khán, on hearing this angry reply of the Sambhals, told his Hindustání doorkeepers to beat the chiefs of the Sambhals out of his house, for they were insulting him. When the Hindustání doorkeepers lifted up their sticks to beat the Sambhals out of the house, a tumult arose. The gallant Sambhals, who had, by Mubáriz Khán's violence and oppression, been driven to extremities, grew enraged, and, in the twinkling of an eye, killed Mubáriz Khán and most of his followers.
When Sher Sháh heard the news, he wrote to 'Azam Humáyún, saying:—“The Súrs are a tribe the least quarrelsome of the Afgháns, and if every Afghán was to kill a Súr not one would be left in the world. The Sambhals are of your own tribe. Do you bring them to order, and chastise them, that they may not set a bad example to others, and may refrain from killing their governors for the future.” When this order reached 'Azam Humáyún Níází, he collected an army against the Sambhals. They hearing that 'Azam Humáyún was coming in person against them, left their country, and took to the hills, where they occupied fortified positions, intending to go with their families to Kábul.
When 'Azam Humáyún heard that it was the intention of the Sambhals to go to Kábul, he was overwhelmed with anxiety and grief, and took counsel with his people, saying:—“The Sambhals are my brethren, and a numerous tribe and race: we cannot seize them by force. If they go to Kábul, Sher Sháh will think that I have been negligent in seizing them, and that they have escaped from these parts by my connivance. We must get hold of them by some stratagem or contrivance.” He sent his vakíl to them, and said:—“I have ascertained you are not to blame. You were much injured and oppressed by Mubáriz Khán. I will send you to Sher Sháh, and beg him to forgive your fault. According to the Afghán custom, the Níázís shall give several of their daughters in marriage to the Súrs, or Sher Sháh may put to death two or three of your chiefs. It is not fitting that the whole tribe should be exiled, and compelled to go to other countries.” The Sambhals wrote in their reply:—“We are in difficulties. If the Súrs come to fight with us, we will do our best against them, that it may be remembered in the world, how the Níázís combated, and how they went into exile! If you come and fight with us, on both sides Níázís will be killed; and if we are cast out, you will even then be disgraced—for it was your own tribe who were driven out, and you had no pity. But if you will bind yourself by promises and oaths, that you will not seek to injure or persecute us, we will come in and make our submission. 'Azam Humáyún replied:—“Have I no regard for my kin, that I should injure or persecute you?” So 'Azam Humáyún made the most solemn promises and oaths to the Sambhals; and the whole tribe, with their wives and families, came to him. When he saw that he had deceived the whole tribe of Sambhals, and that they had come in with their wives and families, he took measures to prevent their escape, and slew 900 persons. While he was putting them to death, the Níázís said to several of their friends among the Sambhals, “We will let you escape, fly!” But the Sambhals maintained the Afghán honour, and said:—“It is better to die with our wives and families than to live dishonoured; for it is a well-known proverb, ‘The death of a whole tribe is a solemn feast.’” When 'Azam Humáyún had slain most of the Sambhals, he sent their wives and families to Sher Sháh. Sher Sháh, who wished no man evil, disapproved of 'Azam Humáyún's cruelty, and said: “Never before has such a shameful thing been done among the race of Afgháns; but 'Azam Humáyún in fear of the King has slain so many of his own tribe. It is only from his affection for the King that he would thus uselessly shed so much blood of his own tribe.” He had intended to remove 'Azam Humáyún from his government of the Panjáb, but had no time before he was glorified in martyrdom. After his death, 'Azam Humáyún displayed great loyalty, which shall be narrated in its proper place.
From the day that Sher Sháh was established on the throne, no man dared to breathe in opposition to him; nor did any one raise the standard of contumacy or rebellion against him; nor was any heart-tormenting thorn produced in the garden of his kingdom; nor was there any of his nobles or soldiery, or a thief or a robber, who dared to direct the eye of dishonesty to the property of another; nor did any theft or robbery ever occur in his dominions. Travellers and wayfarers, during the time of Sher Sháh's reign, were relieved from the trouble of keeping watch; nor did they fear to halt even in the midst of a desert. They encamped at night at every place, desert or inhabited, without fear; they placed their goods and property on the plain, and turned out their mules to graze, and themselves slept with minds at ease and free from care, as if in their own house; and the zamíndárs, for fear any mischief should occur to the travellers, and that they should suffer or be arrested on account of it, kept watch over them. And in the time of Sher Sháh's rule, a decrepit old woman might place a basket full of gold ornaments on her head and go on a journey, and no thief or robber would come near her, for fear of the punishments which Sher Sháh inflicted. “Such a shadow spread over the world, that a decrepit person feared not a Rustam.” During his time, all quarrelling, disputing, fighting, and turmoil, which is the nature of the Afgháns, was altogether quieted and put a stop to throughout the countries of Roh and of Hindustán. Sher Sháh, in wisdom and experience, was a second Haidar. In a very short period he gained the dominion of the country, and provided for the safety of the highways, the administration of the Government, and the happiness of the soldiery and people. God is a discerner of righteousness!
The History of India as Told by its Own Historians, Vol. IV: To the Year A.D. 1450. Translated by H.M. Elliot and edited by John Dowson. London: Trübner & Co. 1871; repr. Calcutta: Susil Gupta, 1957. pp. 301-433.
1 This passage is not in Sir H. Elliot's MS., in which the mention of Chapter III. comes immediately after the doxology.
2 The writer of Gen. Cunningham's MS. remarks that this is an extraordinary statement, considering that the author, in the course of his work, gives the history of the wars of Sher Sháh and his sons with the kings of Bengal.
3 "Bari," Gen. Cunningham's MS.
4 The Súr represent themselves as descendants of Muhammed Súr, one of the princes of the house of the Ghorians, who left his native country, and married a daughter of one of the Afghán chiefs of Roh.
5 Var. "Zaghari," "Zhaghari."
6 The Táríkh-i Khán Jahán Lodí (MS. p. 151) says he was born in Hisár-Fírozah.
7 Var. "Háni."
8 The other historians, as Nia'matu-lla, are more specific, and call it Kháspúr Tánda, which is one of the parganas attached to the sirkár of Janpúr.
9 Some copies, as well as the Makhzan-i Afghání, read Mudáhir instead of Khurram, and make him own brother to Sulaimán and Ahmad.
10 A work on grammar
11 In two copies jarib ; in one, patta-kabúliyat.
12 Mír Khalífa was the elder brother of Sultán Junaid.
13 The Táríkh-i Khán-Jahún Lodí says that when he was appointed governor of Málwa, the people called him "Shujáwal Khán."
14 This expression would seem to imply that Jalál Khán was privy to their plot. As both private and public virtue were strangers to the hearts of these Afghán nobles, we have no reason to hesitate about the perfidy of any of them, especially as Jalál Khán was himself a Lohání. Indeed, Nia'matu-lla, in both his works, distinctly says that the scheme to out off Sher Khán was devised by the Lohánís in co-operation with Jalál Khan. See Dorn, p. 96.
15 The object of all this is not very evident; but Nia'matu-lla says it was a sort of strategem, by which it was devised to bring back the Bengális asauxilliaries for the expulsion of Sher Khán from Bihár. The whole counsel is worthy of the children who suggested and assented to it. See Dorn, p. 97.
16 Nia'matu-lla tells is that one night about this time, while wandering in the bázár of Bihár, in which excursions he used secretly to deposit gold and clothes on the cushions of the sleeping who were oppressed by indigence,"— a darwesh unexpectedly raised his head and exclaimed, "God be praised! the Emperor of Dehlí has come." Which words Sher Khán regarded as a divine inspiration.- Dorn p. 98.
17 Nia'matu-lla (ibid.) calls him eroneously Ibráhím Sháh, King of Bengal
18 Ahmad Yádgár gives a different enumeration (MS., p. 262), but gives the total value at nine lacs of rupees.
19 Dr. Dorn, History of the Afgháns, p. 101, says, "600 mans of pure gold, besides many other rarities of various descriptions." This is not borne out by the Persian originals, which all read only "sixty," instead of "600." [Gen. Cunningham's MS. agrees with the translation. Literally it says, " Afterwards Guhar Kusháín, the wife (widow) of Nasir Khán, died, and sixty mans of her gold came into the hands of Sher Sháh." But Sir H. Elliot's MS. says, "After this he married Guhar Kusháín, the widow, and sixty mans, etc., etc.]
20 The "Rána Sanka" of Bábar's Memoirs.
21 Var. Kaktúr.
22 Nia'matu-lla adds, " except Sahsarám, which was the old jágír of Sher Khán." — Dorn, p. 101.
23 I concur with Elphinstone (History of India, vol. ii., 128), in considering this march to have commenced in Safar, 944 H. (July, 1537 A.D.) He says the Táríkh-i Sher Sháhí says 942. Which one? Not this. Firishta and Kákhí Shírází say 943; but there is impossibility in the former date, and great improbability in the latter. All the Afghán histories of the period are very deficient and contradictory in their dates.
24 The Tárikh-i Khán Jahán (MS. p. 165) says that he died in Orissa in 944 H. The Tárikh-i Dáúdí (MS. p. 211) says in Orissa in 949 H.
25 Var. " Bahrkunda."
26 He was grandson of Sultán Husain Mirzá, and endeavoured to supplant Humáyún on the throne of India by two different schemes of assassination. After various other treacheries and machinations, he was again reconciled to Humáyún, and was killed at the battle of Chaunsa in 946 H., which was lost chiefly through his supineness and neglect.
27 Nearly all the other authorities inform us that Kuth Khán effected his escape from Humáyún's camp, Ahmad Yádgár (MS. p. 264) says that he succeeded in doing this at Ajmír.
28 This word appears variously, "háshi," "jáshí," and "cháshí."
29 He will be found mentioned under that reign
30 Dr. Dorn (p. 105) says she had placed her "district under the protection of the Mughals. At this Sher Khán was so enraged, that he seized upon her whole wealth and effects. *** This treasure is said to have consisted of 600 mans of pure gold, besides specie and other valuables." This is not at all in accordance with any original MS. I have seen, which simply says: "Having escaped the violence of the Mughals, she sought refuge in this kingdom. *** They say, that amongst her property were sixty mans of red gold besides silver and valuables." Here the deliberate treachery of this belauded king is not attempted to be accounted for, as it is in Dr. Dorn's translation. The Táríkh-i Khán Jahán (MS. p. 174) has 300 mans.
31 In other MSS. "Sultán Sarwání," and "Sultán Barolí."
32 Respecting the capture of Chunár, and the cruelties perpetrated on the garrison by the Mughals, see the history of Humáyún. It is passed oyer very cursorily by all the Afghán writers, while the Tímúrians expatiate upon it. Elphinstone's date of ISth Sha'bán, 944 (8th January, 1S38), for the commencement of the siege, is the most probable one.
33 This title is now first applied to Sher Khán in the MSS.
34 Our author is strictly followed by the Makhzan-i Afghání ; but the Táríkh-i Khán-Jahán adheres to the dolí story. It says (MS. p. 168) that there were 1200 litters, in each of which were two Afghans armed, except in some of the foremost, in which there were old women. After the examination of some of the leading litters, Sher Khán, sent a message to the Rájá, to represent that the Rájá having now satisfied himself there were only women in the litters, and as it was highly indecorous to expose them to the gaze of the sentries, the search ought to be discontinued. The Rájá, readily assented, and when the litters had all been introduced, and discharged their burdens, the Afghans seized possession of the gates, and admitted Sher Sháh who was ready with his army outside, awaiting the successful result of his stratagem. Ahmad Yádgár (MS. p. 266) says that there were 300 litters, with two soldiers in each, and four Rohillas as bearers, that they killed the Rájá, and then made a general massacre of the garrison. Firishta also accredits (vol. ii. p. 115) the dolí story, and calls the Rájá, Harí Krishn Ráí, and says he escaped with a few followers by a private passage. By the Tímurian authors the seizure of Rohtás by treachery is spoken of with an indignation which they seldom bestowed upon their patrons for deeds of a much more heinous nature.- See Dorn, p. 109.
35 Ahmad Yádgár (MS. pp. 170-6) mentions an expedition against the Rájá of Jhárkand, in order to secure possession of a favourite white elephant, called "Syám Chaudar," which had the "peculiarity of never throwing dust upon its head." This was duly obtained, along with other plunder, and brought to Sher Sháh, who chose to consider it as an omen that he should one day obtain the Empire of Dehlí. [It is odd that a white elephant should have been called syám, i.e. black.]
36 "Thána" in one MS.
37 "Which," adds Nia'matu-lla, who calls it Garhí, "is the only passage to the countries of Gaur and Bengal ; there being, except by that gate, no other way of entry or exit." - Makhzan-i Afghání, MS. p. 202. It is now better known as "Sicly-gully", properly Sankrí-galí, the narrow pass about eight miles north-west from Rájmahál. It is incorrect to call it the only passage into Bengal, for the Mahrattas, in 1742, penetrated through another to the south-west, to say nothing of others.
38 One MS. has : "But although there was much fighting, did not defeat the Emperor's force."
39 Some further details will be found among the extracts from the Makhzan-i Afghání.
40 Because, as stated in the Makhzan-i Afghání, the Shaikh was a man unequalled in erudition and piety, and the Emperor was personally much attached to him. The Shaikh had been sent by Humáyún to Hindál, to admonish him against his ambitious designs — See Dorn, p. 116.
41 "Who, whenever Sher Khán was in any trouble, used to descend from his hills and jungles and harass the tenants around Bihar ; and taking to highway robbery, closed the road to travellers proceeding to Gaur and Bengal, and took every opportunity of plundering horses, camels and bullocks from the camp of Sher Khán. Therefore, his extermination being considered urgently necessary, Khawás Khán was not summoned." Makhzan-i Afghání, MS., p. 208. Dorn, p. 116.
42 Nia'matu-lla indicates the place with greater exactness : "Sher Khán pitched his own opposite the royal camp, at a village called Shataya, between Jhúsa (Chaunsa) and Baksar, so that both armies were encamped on the same side of the Ganges. There was also a small stream flowing between the two camps, of which the banks were so steep, that it could not be crossed except at the usual ford." Makhzan-i Afghání, MS., p. 212 (Dorn, p. 118).
43 This silly manoeuvre is also mentioned by Nia'matu-lla ; it was to be a feigned pursuit, in order to save appearances. - Dorn, p. 120
44 "The original has farzand, literally "a son". The Táríkh-i Khán Jahán (MS. p. 190) has nabira, "grandson." The latter work entirely exonerates Shaik Khalíl from the charge of the perfidy, by representing him as the agent, not of Humáyún , but of Sher Sháh, who was his spiritual pupil. So does Ahmad Yádgár (MS. p. 279), and Firishta (Briggs. vol. ii., p. 37). This is by far more probable than the statement in the text.
45 "Accompanied by 5000 valiant horsemen skilled in the use of the sabre." — Makhzan-i Afghání, MS., p. 216. Others give the more probable amount of 500.
46 Some further particulars respecting this defeat will be found among the Extracts from the Makhzan-i Afghání, and under the reign of Humáyún. The date assigned by Nia'matu-lla in Muharram, 946
47 Ahmad Yádgár (MS. p. 284) says there were no less than 4,000 Mughal women.
48 Var. "Kaknúr," "Kalnúr," "Laknúr."
49 The Wáki'át-i Mushtákí gives the same title, but from his coins it would appear that it was "Sultánu-l 'Ádil." See Thomas's Chronicles of the Pathán Kings, p. 395.
50 Var. "Jarú."
51 The Makhzan-i Afghání adds, that Jalál Khán Jaloí and Hájí Khán Batni were sent to Bengal; and after defeating Jahángír Kúlí, the governor, who was at the head of 6,000 horse. Bengal fell again under the dominion of the Afgháns.
52 [This name is a very doubtful one.] The Tímúrian authors put this engagement at Kálpí.
53 Great importance appears always to have been attached to this conquest. In the Wáki'át-i Mushtákí (MS. p. 110) we find it mentioned, towards the close of Sher Shah's reign, that the three great works accomplished by him were, the destruction of the infidel Mahárta, the massacre of the idolaters of Ráísín, and the re-establishment of Islam in Nágor, by the expulsion of Maldeo. "If God please! these three deeds will secure his salvation." The supineness of Sultán Ibráhím had occasioned the two latter to triumph for a time, but Sher Sháh had never ceased to pray for their extermination.
54 The Makhzan-i Afghání (MS., p. 229) and Táríkh-i Khán Jahán (MS., p. 161), represent that there was a bridge, which was broken by the excessive pressure upon it during the retreat. All authorities concur in saying there was a bridge by which the Imperialists crossed to the eastern side, but few mention it on the retreat. The Emperor himself fled on an elephant which swam the river with difiiculty.
55 All the copies and many writers of the same period concur in reading Gwálír [which may also be read Gwáliyar].
56 The Táríkh-i Khán Jahán (MS., p. 194) says he was two years arranging preliminaries and trying his forces before he advanced on Ágra
57 The Táríkh-i Dáúdí (M.S., p. 230) says the instructions were to remain fifty kos in the rear of the Mughals, as Sher Sháh only wished to expel them from Hindustan without coming to action.
58 All the copies and corresponding passages in other works concur in reading "Lakhnau;" but I suspect "Lakhnór" is meant — an ancient native capital of the Kathárya Rájpúts, a little to the east of Sambhal, on the banks of the Rámgangá. More will be found respecting the place in my Supplemental Glossary (vol. ii., p. 136). It is observable that Dr. Dorn occasionally reads Lucknor where he should have said Lucknow. In this particular passage he is correct in reading Lucknor. — Hist. Afgháns, p. 128.
59 The Táríkh-i Dáúdí, which is partial to the fabulous, represents (MS., p. 235) that Khawás Khán came up with Humáyún near Khusháb, when the Emperor, being hard up for supplies, sent to him for something to eat, which he readily furnished; upon which the Emperor went on towards Thatta.
60 The Táríkh-i Khán Jahán speaks of it (MS. p. 176) as being built on the boundary of Hindustán and Kabul.
61 Some further details will be found lower down, and in the extracts from the Makhzan-i Afghání.
62 Var. "Mabhár."
63 The Táríkh-i Khán Jahán (MS., p. 178) says the advance to Gwálior and Málwá occurred in 949 A.H.
64 The Wáki'át-i Mushtákí (MS., p. 102) and the Táríkh-i Dáúdí (MS., p. 254) record an interesting military spectacle which astonished Mallú Khán at this review. When the royal umbrella came in sight, the cavalry drew their sabres, galloped forward towards the umbrella, dismounted from their horses, and saluted the king in due form, "as was their habit on the day of battle." Each division did this in succession.
65 On one of the marches between Sárangpúr and Ujjain, Sher Sháh communicated some of the early events of his life to Mallú Khán, who was riding with him. He told him how he had laboured hard in his youth, and went every day on foot fifteen kos in pursuit of game, armed with his bow and arrows. On one of these excursions he fell in with a party of thieves and highwaymen, with whom he associated for some time, plundering the country all round; till one day, when seated in a boat with his new comrades, he was pursued "by his enemies," who, after a conflict, were completely victorious. Upon this, placing his bow and arrows on his head, he plunged into the water, and after swimming for three kos escaped, with his wife, and from that period abandoned his new profession. — The Wáki'át-i Mushtákí (MS. p. 103) and the Táríkh-i Dáúdí (MS. p. 256). This is a novelty, and either Sher Sháh was "chaffing" his guest, whom he previously vowed to avenge himself upon for his premeditated insult about the seal, and who appears from all his sayings and doings to have been a great simpleton; or our author has, as usual, given too ready credence to an improbable story. Abú-1 Fazl, however, and other courtly Tímúrian authors, are very fond of representing that Sher Sháh's early life was devoted to plunder and robbery and every kind of enormity.
66 The Táríkh-i Khán Jahán says "Marehra." The Wáki'át-i Mushtákí and the Táríkh-i Dáúdí, "Lakhnau."
67 The Wáki'át-i Mushtákí (MS. p. 104) and the Táríkh-i Dáúdí (MS. p. 257) say that he was inspired with alarm at seeing one day a party of respectable Mughals, who had been taken prisoners at Gwálior, working in the camp, as common labourers, at the circumvallation which was constructed every day, and that he apprehended the same fate awaited his own person.
68 The Wáki'át-i Mushtákí (MS., p. 104) and the Táríkh-i Dáúdí (MS., p. 259), on the contrary, say, that on Shujá'at Khán's representing that it was Mallú Khán's intention to fly, Sher Sháh replied, that he was anxious he should effect his escape, and had therefore thrown every facility in his way for that purpose. This, however, is scarcely consistent with the hot pursuit "by soldiers without number," which immediately followed his departure. The same passage teaches us a bit of royal and patrician morality amongst these Afghans: "As he now," said Sher Sháh, "intends to run away, say nothing to him, and pretend not to observe anything. If he offers you money in bribery, take it immediately, and let him run off. Shujá'at Khán consequently took from Mallú Kádir Sháh 700,000 tankas, and let him go his way, and at night-time finding his opportunity, he took to flight." This shameless prostitution, with the encouragement of the Shah, is mentioned by Ahmad Yádgár (MS. p. 197), but the persons are different. "If that black-face offer you a bribe, take it without scruple and let him go; so Ahmad Khán Súr and Fath Khán Niázi, who were in charge of him, took 1000 pieces of red gold and let him escape."
69 Ahmad Yádgár's account is different. He says (MS. pp. 197-8) that Mallú Khán plundered Sárangpúr and other places, and was at last slain with all his adherents in a night attack by Haibat Khún, who on that occasion obtained his title of 'Azam Humáyún ; which our author, a little below, says was conferred for the conquest of Multán.
70 Here called "Ranthúr."
71 Ahmad Yádgár (MS. pp. 292-5) mentions during this campaign an expedition against Chanderí, commanded by Walídád Khán Kákar, which was successful "I through the treachery of the Rájá's nephew. Elephants, horses and treasures fell into the hands of the vistors on the capture of Chanderí, and the Rájá's beautiful daughter was sent to Sher Sháh. The treacherous nephew gained his ends by being made Rájá of Chanderí.
72 From this it would appear either that Násir Khán did not know of Sikandar Khán's flight, narrated above, or that the latter had been again seized.
73 Or "Mahalkarra."
74 The Táríkh-i Dáúdí (MS. p. 264) says that after his return from Málwá, he remained two years at Ágra, going intermediately to Delhí, before he went towards Bengal.
75 Ahmad Yádgár (MS. pp. 296-9) represents them chiefly as captured from the families of the Saiyids of Bilgrám. He also says that this occurred on bis load to Ráísín, and that before starting on this expedition he had been hunting in the neighbourhood of Sorín and Badáún.
76 This expedition the Táríkh-i Khán Jahán (M.S., p. 180) also ascribes to the year 950. In that work Púran Mal is called the son of Ráí Salhadí Púrbiya, Gehlot Rájpút.
77 What follows until the resumption of the story of the capture of Ráísín is only in one MS.
78 The Makhzan-i Afghání (MS. p. 242) says, "Sher Sháh ordered Haibat Khán to seize Fath Khán. This Fath Khán was of Kob Kabúla (Kapúura ?), who had devasted the entire tract of Lakhí Jangal, and kept the high roads from Lahore to Delhí in a constant ferment." Then follows an incomprehensible passage, which has by no means been elucidated by Dr. Dorn's mode of translating it. The Táríkh-i Khán Jahán Lodí is unusually deficient in the corresponding passage, and does not help us in the least — Dorn, p. 134.
79 Pák-pattan
80 The Makhzan-i Afghání says that orders were issued to take only a fourth of the produce of grain for the Government share.
81 Ahmad Yádgár (MS., p. 304) says that before Sher Sháh's return to Ágra, the Shaikh-zádas of Barnáwa represented that their country had been plundered, and their wives and daughters carried oft by Basdeo, a Rájpút. Dúdá Miána was sent to chastise him which he did so effectually that the captives were all released, and immense plunder accrued to the victors. This is followed by another expedition against some Rájkunwar Rájpúts, but the author's notions are so lax on geography, that it is quite impossible to fix the locality of either affair. The former, though with some variation in the details, is the same as that which was instigated by the Shaikh-zádas of Bhandner, as recorded in the Wáki'át-i Mushtákí (MS., p. 109).
82 Elphinstone (Hist. India, vol. ii., p. 149) says 951 H., but as 950 H., began in April 1543, Sher Sháh might easily have completed the conquest of Ráísín in the hot months, returned to Ágra for the rainy season, and set out for Marwar with the six best months of 950 H. before him. If he deferred his Márwár expedition to the cold season of 951 H, there would be no time for his subsequent return to Ágra and operations against Chitor and Kalinjar. The latter alone, according to the Wáki'át-i Mushtákí (MS., p. 110), and the Táríkh-i Dáúdí (MS., p. 285), occupied eight months.
83 The host of the Rájpúts could have been scarcely less, if we are to believe the extravagant statement of the Makhzan-i Afghání, which (MS., p. 249) sets it down at 50,000 cavalry and 300,000 infantry. The Táríkh-i Khán Jahán (MS., p. 182) modestly retrenches the 300,000 infantry altogether.
84 One copy reads "son," but he was "grandson," being, according to the Makhzan-i Afghání (MS., p. 250) the son of Ádil Khán. Dorn (p. 138) calls him "nephew". The Táríkh-i Khán Jahán (MS., p. 182) makes out that he was a grandchild by a daughter, and only seven years old when he suggested this sagacious advice. It does not mention the name of this precocious child.
85 An allusion to the barreness of Márwár.
86 This makes it evident that he could scarcelyhave remained at all at Ágra on his return at the close of 950 or beginning of 951 H. Indeed, had not the Táríkh-i Dáúdí (MS., p. 284) mentioned his proceedings at Ajmír, and his visit to the shrine of Khwája Mu'ínu-d dín Chishtí, his return to Ágra at all might have been disputed. Shortly after the beginning of 951 H. he must have started for Chitor, marching during the hot weather, passing the rains in Kachwára, and then occupying the closing months of 952 and the beginning of 953 with the siege of Kalinjar. This makes the chronology very plain.
87 So spelt in all the copies. It is more usual to write it "Kálinjar."
88 Ahmad Yádgár (MS., p. 313) says that the reason for his advancing against Kalinjar was, that Birsingdeo Bundela, who had been summoned to Court, had fled and taken refuge with the Rájá of Kalinjar, who refused to give him up.
89 Perhaps this may mean only "rockets." The words are "hukkahá púr az átish." It is to be remarked that there is no mention of deg, a mortar; and the shape of a hukka, or smoking bowl, is not unlike that of a loaded rocket. Moreover, if a shell had burst, except very close. It would not have ignited other shells, and shells do not usually rebound unexploded; whereas, it is a common occurrence for a rocket to retrace its path, especially, as appears here to have been the case, when the stick breaks. On the other hand, it is to be remembered that the shape of a hukka is still more like a shell; and that there is, and was, a specific word for rocket (bán) — a Hindi vocable in common use even in Persian authors, and which might easily have been introduced in this passage without any violation of usage or propriety.
90 The Makhzan-i Afghání says that the first act of Islám Sháh's reign was to order him for execution.
91 These as well as some other of the observances noted above are supererogatory. — See Kánún-i Islám, p. 55.
92 But the Táríkh-i Khán Jahán (MS., p. 187) says, that the practice was introduced by Sultán Sangar, and that the example was followed by other Sultáns ; that in Hindustan, it was observed by 'Áláu-d dín Khiljí, and that Sher Sháh merely renewed his ordinance. Abú-l Fazl contemptuously remarks, that he sought the applause of future generations, by mere revivals of 'Áláu-d dín's regulations which he had read of in the Táríkh-i Firoz Sháhí. Sher Sháh was such an admirer of the dagh system, that men, as well as cattle, on his register, had to submit to it. The Táríkh-i Dáúdí, (MS., p. 236) says that even the sweepers had the royal brand impressed on them; it omits to say on what part of the body. Allusion, however, may be made only to the horses of the sweepers, though it seems improbable that such a class should have had any. The passage in the Wáki'át-i Mushtákí (MS., p. 99) runs thus : "Even in the Haram establishment he gave a salary to no one unless his horses were branded, in so much that even a sweeper caused the stamp to be applied. This work, as usual, is the source of the information in the Táríkh-i Dáúdí, and all the trivial ancedotes which follow on the subject of the dagh are the same in both.
93 [The Wáki'át-i Mushtákí has this passage, and states that the parganas were 116,000 in number.]
94 The Táríkh-i Dáúdí (MS., p. 229) says he had 8,000 matchlockmen in his service. He adds, that 1,600 were stationed in Chitor, 500 in Rantambhor, 1,000 in Bayána, 2,000 in Gwálior, and a due proportion in every other fort. Whether all these are included in the 8,000, or the 8,000 were a mere personal guard, is not plain. In no single instance does the enumeration correspond with that of our author.
95 It is to be regretted that the MSS. show a want of concurrence in the enumeration of these forces. The Táríkh-i Dáúdí, in the passage quoted above, says that there was also maintained a body of footmen, acting singly and independently, called paiks; and 113,000 horsemen distributed throughout the parganas for the protection of the district forts.
96 One MS. has 2,500 saráís, The Nawádiru-l Hikáyát (MS., p. 599) boldly says 2,500 saráís on the road from Bengal to the Indus alone. This arises from the double ignorance of rating that distance at 2,500 kos and a reckoning that there was a saráí at each kos, instead of at every second one.
97 We shall see below, that they are said to have amounted to 3,400. The Táríkh-i Khán Jahán (MS. p. 186) adds: "In order that every day news might be conveyed to him from the Níláb and Ágra, and the very extremities of the countries of Bengal." Sikandar Lodí has the credit of having established these dák chaukís before him.
98 In some copies he is called "Shikkdár"; but in others, and very plainly in the two works quoted below, he is called "Tashtdár" or ewer-bearer, a member of the royal household.
99 The Wáki'át-i Mushtákí (MS., p. 97), followed by the Táríkh-i Dáúdí (MS., p. 225), has another account of this impossible feat, which would defy even a twenty-Osbaldistone power. Fifty miles an hour for twelve hours without intermission!!! "Husain Khán Tashtdár was sent on some business from Bengal. He went on travelling night and day. Whenever sleep came over him he placed himself on a bed (chahár-pái) and the villagers carried him along on their shoulders. When he awoke, he again mounted a horse, and went on his way. In this manner he reached Chitor from Gaur in three days; and think what a distance that is!" It is indeed, SOO miles, as the crow flies, over some of the most impracticable parts of India! Such senseless lying should be exposed; but the people's mind is at present so constituted as to put implicit credence even in such an averment as this.
100 The author of the Muntakhabii't Tawarikh says that he himself saw the high road from Bengal to Rohtás, which was in many places so ornamented, after it had stood for fifty-two years. It is strange tLat, at this period, no trace can be found of sarái, mosque, road, or tree. His beautiful mausoleum at Sahsarám is still a stately object, standing in the centre of an artificial piece of water, faced by walls of cut stone.
101 The Táríkh-i Dáúdí (MS., p. 236) says "New Rohtás," and adds, that "it cost eight krors, five lacs, five thousand and two and a half dáms which means Bahlolís. All which is written over the gate of the fort."
102 Literally, that it might be a "Jahán-panáh," which was the name of one of the old cities of Dehlí.
103 There is a notice of the fort of Patna, which was built by him, among the Extracts from the Táríkh-i Dáúdí.
104 The Táríkh-i Dáúdí (MS., pp. 291, 247) mentions two instances in illustration of this enforcement of village responsibility. One was, that a horse was stolen one night from Sher Sháh's camp at Thánesar, for which all the zamíndárs for a circuit of fifty kos were summoned and held responsible, with the threat that if the thief and horse were not forthcoming within three days, the lives of every one of them would fall a sacrifice. Both were shortly produced, and the thief was immediately put to death. Another was a case in which a murder was committed near Etáwá, on a piece of land which had long been disputed between the neighbouring villages. In this instance, it being impossible to fix upon the responsible village, Sher Sháh duirected that two men should be sent to cut down a tree which was near the spot where the murder was committed, with orders that any man who came to prohibit them should be sent in to him. A mukaddam of one of the villages came forward to remonstrate, and was dealt with accordingly. He was tauntingly asked, how he could know of a tree being cut down so far from his village, and yet not know of a man being cut down. All the inhabitants of the village were then seized and threatened with death, if the murderer were not produced within three days. Under these circumstances there was of course no difficulty in getting the culprit, or at least a culprit, who was forthwith executed!
105 The Wáki'át-i Mushtákí (MS., p. 101) and the Táríkh-i Dáúdí (MS., p. 252) record a barbarous punishment inflicted on a camel-driver during a march in Málwá for plucking some green chick-pea. Sher Sháh had a hole bored in his nose, and with his feet bound together he was suspended during a whole march with his head downward. "After that no one stretched out his hand upon corn."
106 The original has "113,000 parganas, that is, villages;" but the Wáki'át-i Mushtákí (MS., p. 98) says "113,000 parganas," without any such qualification.
Annotated by Murari Jha
The Humayun-nama (History of Humayun) by Gul-badan Begum, c. 1587
Gul-badan Begum
Unlike other Mughal sources, the Humayun-nama was relatively less known until Annette S. Beveridge translated the only surviving manuscript. This Persian manuscript belonged to the Hamilton Collection in the British Museum. The later part of the manuscript is missing. In the absence of a second copy of the manuscript, it is not certain whether Gul-badan wrote in Persian or Turkish like her father, Babur, did for his memoirs. Since other contemporary Mughal sources do not mention Gul-badan's book, probably not many copies of it ever existed.
Born about 1523, momentous historical events unfolded during Gul-badan’s lifetime (d.1603). The establishment of the Mughal Empire by Babur, the tumultuous phase of the empire during Babur’s son and successor Humayun, and the consolidation of empire under Akbar – Gul-badan lived through all these. Keenly interested in the past, Akbar commanded his paternal aunt Gul-badan to “[w]rite down whatever you know of the doings of Firdaus-makani [Babur] and Jannat-ashyani [Humayun]”. [p. 83]
Written in simple language, Gul-badan Begam recounts the events primarily from her memory. Events related to Babur’s early struggles in Central Asia must have come down to her mediated through some or the other sources. Gul-badan throws valuable light on the activities of Babur as a badshah at Kabul and his forays into Central Asia aimed at reclaiming his homeland. [pp. 90-91] Of the trials and tribulations of Humayun in Hindustan she had been a witness.
As a source material on Mughal history, thHumayun-nama furnishes valuable information on the sixteenth century political events. It also gives an insider’s view on the Mughal harem, and family life of the sixteenth-century Central Asian empire builders. Written from a woman's perspective, the description of the Mughal family life constitutes an important source for reconstructing the Mughal social history. Since Gul-badan relied on her memory to record most of the past events, there might have been some slippage and errors. However, she also used some of the textual sources such as the Baburnama. The use of texts gives a greater credence to the information on which she based her narrative.
‘Humāyūn-nāma of Gul-badan Begam
This history, which contains an abridgment of the affairs of his Majesty, Ṣāḥib-qirān Gītī-sitānī (Tīmūr), and of his glorious descendants, and of the events of the days of 'Arsh-āshyānī (Akbar)— May God make clear his proof!— down to the twenty-second year of his reign, was written in the time of Shāh Bābā (Akbar).
Signed: Shāh-jahān Pādshāh, son of Jahāngīr Pādshāh, son of Akbar Pādshāh.
There had been an order*Probably that mentioned by Abū'l-fazl, as issued for the gathering-in of material for the Akbar-nāma. (H. Beveridge, I. 29.) If so, the begam's book dates from about 1587 (995IL). There are indications of its use by Abū'l-fazl. issued, ‘Write down whatever you know of the doings of Firdaus-makānī and Jannat-āshyānī.’*Bābar's and Humāyūn's posthumous names, 'Dwelling' and 'Nesting in Paradise.' Several women, and notably Akbar's mother, have been named after death Maryam-makānī, 'Dwelling with Mary.' Babar's half-sister, Shahr-bānū, is styled by A.F. Bilqīs-makānī, Bilqīs being the Queen of Sheba. Many other examples might be quoted of the custom which, amongst some savage tribes, takes the extreme form of total suppression at death of the name borne in life, and towards which affection and reverence incline the most civilized peoples.
At the time when his Majesty Firdaus-makānī passed from this perishable world to the everlasting home, I, this lowly one, was eight*Lunar years. Bābar died December 26th, 1530. The begam's dates and numerical statements must always be taken lightly. years old, so it may well be that I do not remember much. However, in obedience to the royal command, I set down whatever there is that I have heard and remember.
First of all, by way of invoking a blessing (on my work), and in pious commemoration, a chapter (juzū) is written about my royal father's deeds, although these are told in his memoirs.*From this treasury Gul-badan's meagre historical sketch can be filled in. The Tūzūk-i-bābarī (Leyden and Erskine : Longman, Rees, etc., 1826.) will be referred to in these notes as the 'Memoirs' or ' Mems.'. Mr. W. Erskine's ' History of India under Babar and Humāyūn' will be indicated by ' B. & H.'.
From his Majesty Ṣāḥib-qirānī*Lord of the fortunate conjunction, i.e., of Jupiter and Venus, a posthumous title of Tīmūr (1336-1405), from whom Bābar was fifth in descent. down to my royal father there was not one of the bygone princes who laboured as he did. He became king in his twelfth*Bābar was born February 14th, 1483 (Muharram 6th, 888H.). He therefore became king of Farghāna (Khokand) when 11⅓ years old. year, and the khutba*The prayer and oration in which it is ordained that the name of the reigning sovereign should be recited. Cf. Diet, of Islam, Hughes, s.v.. The histories show that it was formerly so recited in India. The term ' Ruler of the Age ' filled Victoria's place. was read in his name on June 10th, 1494,*
Ramzān 5th, 899H. [Text, 909H.]. in Andijān, the capital of Farghāna. (3a)
For eleven full years his wars and struggles against the Chaghatāi and Tīmūrid and Uzbeg princes*The first and second of this triad of foes were near and elder kinsmen ; the third was the Shāibanī of the histories. in Māwarā'un-nahr (Transoxiana) were such that the tongue of the pen is too feeble and weak to recount them.
The toils and perils which in the ruling of kingdoms befell our prince, have been measured out to few, and of few have been recorded the manliness, courage and endurance which he showed in battle-fields and dangers. Twice he took Samarqand by force of the sword. The first time my royal father was twelve years old, the second nineteen, the third time he was nearly twenty-two.*Bābar occupied Samarqand three times. Twice he captured it, and the third time entered without a blow struck and amidst a popular welcome. The dates are respectively 1497, 1500, and 1511, and his age fifteen, seventeen, and twenty-nine. For six months he was besieged*By Shaibānī, after the second occupation. (in Samarqand), and neither Sult̤ān Ḥusain Mīrzā Bāyqrā, his paternal uncle,*ammū. Ḥusain was of the fourth, and Bābar of the fifth degree of descent from their common ancestor, Tīmūr. Bābar's father was (anglice) Ḥusain's fourth cousin. As Ḥusain was of an elder generation, Bābar calls him 'uncle.' If 'ammū were ever used to denote an uncle by marriage, it would have triple application here, since Ḥusain married in succession three paternal aunts of Bābar Shahr-bānū, Latīf and Payanda. Ḥusain is the well-known Mæcenas of Herāt (1438-1506). who (ruled) in Khurāsān, nor Sult̤ān Maḥmūd Khān, his maternal uncle,*taghāi. Sultan Maḥmūd Khan was full-brother of Qutluq-nigār, Bābar's mother, so that here taghāi is exactly equivalent to our 'maternal uncle.' Maḥmūd is 'the Khān' and the 'elder Khān' of the Memoirs, and also Jānaki or Khānakt and Jāngi. He was murdered by Shāibanī in 1508. who ruled in Kāshghar, sent him help. When none came from any quarter, he grew desperate.*He was eighteen.
At this difficult time, Shāhī Beg Khān.*Abū'l-fatḥ Muḥammad Shāhbakht Khan Uzbeg (Shāhī Beg Khān and Shāibanī). sent to say: ‘If you would marry your sister Khānzāda Begam*For details of her life and that of all other women named in this book and some other contemporary works, see Appendix. to me, (3b) there might be peace and a lasting alliance between us.’ At length it had to be done; he gave the begam to the khān, and came out himself (from Samarqand).*For details of her life and that of all other women named in this book and some other contemporary works, see Appendix. With 200 followers on foot, wearing long frocks on their shoulders and peasants' brogues on their feet, and carrying clubs in their hands,—in this plight, unarmed, and relying on God, he went towards the lands of Badakhshān (Badakhshānāt) and Kābul.*Muḥarram, 910H. (June, 1504).
Khusrau Shāh's*A Qipchāq Tūrk, chief beg of Sult̤ān Maḥmūd Mīrzā, the father of Bayasanghar and Mas'ūd. He was put to death by Shāibanī's Uzbegs in 910H. (1505). people and army were in Kunduz and the Badakhshānāt. He came and paid his respects to his Majesty,*Brevet rank. Bābar was an exile from his own kingdom of Farghāna, and not yet master of Kābul. my father, who, being as he was manly and kind and generous, did not in any way touch the question of retaliation, although Khusrau Shāh had committed such crimes as the martyrdom of Bayasanghar Mīrzā and the blinding of Sult̤ān Mas'ūd Mīrzā, both of whom were sons of my royal father's paternal uncle. In addition to this, when in the early days of the forays,*Tūrkī, qazzāqī, from qazzāq (Cossack), the name of the nomads whom the Russians term Kīrghiz. I think Gul-badan uses it to describe the time of her father's military incursions, made when he was trying to carve out a ruler's seat. his Majesty chanced to cross his country, he was watched and rudely driven out. Now he was pleased to command that Khusrau Shāh should take whatever his heart desired of his (own) jewels and golden vessels, and so he got leave to go to Khurāsān in kindness and safety, and took with him five or six strings of camels and five or six of baggage mules.*The begam's brevity makes Bābar's capacity and forbearance seem alike remarkable. He had gathered a force, and safety was the condition of Khusrau's surrender (1504). Mr. Erskine writes (B. & H., I. 208.) : 'Bābar, whose abhorrence of Khusrau was as deep as it was just, ordered his treasurer to send back the treasure, horses, and whatever had been presented to him, just as they were ; although, says our author (Mīrzā Ḥaidar), the King had only one horse suitable for a person of his rank, and that was used by his mother.'
His Majesty now set out for Kābul, which was occupied by Muḥammad Muqīm, a son of Ẕū'l-nūn Arghūn, and grandfather of Nāhīd Begam.*Through his daughter Māh Chūchak. He had captured it after Ulugh Beg Mīrzā's*A son of Abū-sa'īd, known as Kābulī. He died 1502. death from Mīrzā 'Abdu-r-razzāq, son of his Majesty's paternal uncle (Ulugh Beg).
His Majesty reached Kābul in safety. Muḥammad Muqīm kept command for a few days, and then by pact and agreement made over charge to the royal servants, and went off with goods and chattels to his father in Qandahār. This was in the last ten days of Rabī II., 910H.*October, 1504. Bābar was now twenty-three, and had acquired more territory than his lost Fārghana. Being now master of Kābul, his Majesty went to Bangash, took it at a blow, and returned to Kābul.
Her Highness, the khānam,*Qutluq-nigār. She died June, 1505. his Majesty's mother, had fever for six days, and then departed from this fleeting world to the eternal home. They laid her in the New Year's Garden. His Majesty paid 1,000 coined misqāl to his kinsmen, the owners of the garden, and laid her there.
At this time urgent letters arrived from Sult̤ān Ḥusain Mīrzā, saying: (4b) ‘I am planning a war against the Uzbegs. It would be excellent if you came too.’ My royal father sought counsel of God. At length he set out to join the mīrzā. On the way news came that the mīrzā was dead. His Majesty's amīrs represented that, this being so, it was advisable to return to Kābul, but he replied: ‘As we have come so far, we will carry our condolences to the princes.’ In the end he went on towards Khurāsān.*Bābar set out in June, 1506 (Muḥarram, 912H.). Ḥusain had died in May (Ẕū'l-hijja, 911H.), on his way northwards from Herāt, and at Bābā Ilāhī. Word reached Bābar when he had already made a great journey and had crossed the Saighan and Dandān-shikan passes to Kahmard. After receiving the news he marched some 800 miles to the mīrzās' camp on the Murgh-āb.
When the princes*Badī'u-z-zamān and Muḥammad Muz̤affar Ḥusain, sons of Sult̤ān Maḥmūd Mīrzā. The meeting was on November 6th, 1506 (Jumāda II. 8th, 912H.). heard of the royal visit, they one and all set out to give him honourable meeting, except Badī'u-z-zamān Mīrzā, who did not go because Barandūq Beg and Ẕū'l-nūn Beg—amīrs of Sult̤ān Ḥusain Mīrzā—said, in effect, that as his Majesty was fifteen years younger than Badī'u-z-zamān Mīrzā, it was right that he should be the first to bow, and that they should then embrace one another. Qāsim Beg*Bābar's Prime Minister and (I believe) relation. He was of the Qūchīn tribe to which Bābar's grandmother, Aīs-daulat, belonged. rejoined: ‘Younger he is by years, but by the tūra,*The Rules of Chingīz Khān. These are referred to again on points of etiquette. he has precedence because he has more than once taken Samarqand by force of the sword.’ (5a) At length they agreed that his Majesty should bow on coming in, and that Badī'u-z-zamān should then advance to show him honour, and they should embrace. The mīrzā was not attending when his Majesty came in at the door; Qāsim Beg clutched my royal father's girdle and pulled it, and said to Barandūq Beg and Ẕū'l-nūn Beg: ‘The agreement was that the mīrzā should come forward and that then they should embrace one another.’ The prince then advanced in great agitation and they embraced.
As long as his Majesty was in Khurāsān, each one of the princes showed him hospitality, and feasts were arranged, and excursions to all the gardens and places of interest. They set forth to him the inconvenience of winter, and said: ‘Wait till it is over, and we will fight the Uzbegs.’ But they could not in any way settle about the war. Eighty years*A well-rounded number. Sult̤ān Ḥusain was born 842H. (1438), and died 911H. (1506). Bābar calls the joint-kingship of his sons a strange arrangement and one never heard of, and quotes Sa'dī's well-known couplet as applicable - 'Ten darvishes can sleep on one rug, but one climate cannot hold two kings.' long had Sult̤ān Ḥusain Mīrzā kept Khurāsān safe and sound, but the mīrzās could not fill their father's place for six months. When his Majesty saw that they were careless*While on the Murgh-āb, Bābar agreed to winter in Khurāsān, and he went with the joint-kings to Herāt in order to see the ' sights ' of that renowned city. He certainly worked hard, for he names some fifty-two which he saw in twenty days. The invitation to winter was repeated, but neither quarters nor suitable conveniences (? revenues) were allotted. Bābar delicately says he could not explain his real motive for not remaining, and left under pressure of necessity on December 24th, 1506, after snow had fallen along a route which was a month's ordinary journey. It was during this absence from Kābul that he married Maham, Humāyūn's mother. about his expenses and revenue, he went to Kābul on the pretext of seeing the places he had assigned to himself. (5b) Much snow had fallen that year. They took the wrong road. His Majesty and Qāsim Beg chose one*Through the Aimāq and Hazāra country, and south of his route to Herāt. because of its shortness, but the amīrs had given other advice, and when this was not taken, they all left him without a thought for him. He and Qāsim Beg and his sons made a road in two or three days by removing the snow, and the people of the army followed. So they reached Ghūrband. Some Hazāra rebels having met his Majesty here, there was fighting; and cattle and sheep and goods without number belonging to the Hazāra fell into the hands of his people. Then they started for Kābul with their enormous booty.
At the skirts of Minār Hill they heard that Mīrzā Khān*Sult̤ān Wais, a son of Bābar's paternal uncle, Maḥmūd, and his maternal aunt (i.e., his mother's half-sister), Sult̤ān Nigār Khānam. and Mīrzā Muḥammad Ḥusain Gūrkān*Father of Ḥaidar Mīrzā Dughlāt, author of the Tārīkh-i-rashīdī. He married Khūb-nigār, full-sister of Bābar's mother. had rebelled and were holding Kābul. His Majesty sent a comforting and cheering letter (to his friends in the fort), and said: ‘Be of good heart! I too am here. (6a) I will light a fire on the Hill of the Moon-faced Lady; do you light one on the Treasury, so that I may be sure you know of our coming. In the morning we will fall on the enemy, you from that side and we from this.’ But he had fought and won before the people of the fort came out.
Mīrzā Khān hid himself in his mother's house; she was his Majesty's maternal aunt. Mīrzā Muḥammad Ḥusain was in his wife's house. She was his Majesty's younger maternal aunt. He flung himself down on a carpet, and in fear of his life cried to a servant, ‘Fasten it up!’ His Majesty's people heard of this. They took him out of the carpet and brought him to the presence. In the end, his Majesty forgave the mīrzās their offences, for the sake of his aunts. He used to go, in his old fashion, in and out of his aunts' houses,*Text, khāna khālī khālahā'ī. This I do not understand, as there were certainly no mothers' brothers present in Kābul now. and showed them more and more affection, so that no mist of trouble might dim their hearts. He assigned them places and holdings in the plain-country. (6b)
God the most High, having freed Kābul from the power of Mīrzā Khān, committed it to my royal father's care. He was then twenty-three years old*He was twenty-three when he took Kābul from Muḥammad Muqīm Arghūn in 1504. Mīrzā Khān's rebellion took place two years later. and had no child and greatly desired one. In his seventeenth year a girl*Fakhru-n-nisā', the Glory of Women. 'She was my first child, and I was just nineteen. In a month, or forty days, she went to the mercy of God.' (Mems. 90.) had been born to him by 'Āyisha Sult̤ān Begam, a daughter of Sult̤ān Aḥmad Mīrzā, but she had died in a month. The most high God blessed the taking of Kābul, for after it eighteen children were born. (1.) Of my Lady (Akām)*Written sometimes ATcam, and sometimes Akām. The Tūrkī Akā is used as a title of respect from a junior to a senior. It has also the sense ' elder brother,' which makes application to a woman doubtful. (Cf. Vambéry's 'Cagataische Sprach-studien.') Bābar uses the word (Mems. 208.), and Mr. Erskine suggests to read ' My Lady.' who was Māham Begam there were born his Majesty the Emperor Humāyūn, and Bārbūl Mīrzā, and Mihr-jān (jahān) Begam, and Ishān-daulat Begam, and Fārūq Mīrzā.*Born 1525 ; died 1527. His father never saw him.
(2.) Ma'ṣūma Sult̤ān Begam, daughter of Sult̤ān Aḥmad Mīrzā, died in childbed. The mother's name they gave to the daughter.
(3.) Of Gul-rukh Begam were born Kāmrān Mīrzā, and 'Askarī Mīrzā, and Shāh-rukh Mīrzā, and Sult̤ān Aḥmad Mīrzā, and Gul-'iẕār Begam.
(4.) Of Dil-dār Begam were born Gul-rang Begam, and Gul-chihra Begam, and Hindāl Mīrzā, and Gul-badan Begam, and Alwar Mīrzā.*Gul-badan or her copyist does not balance accounts. She says eighteen, and names sixteen children. This may be a clerical error only.
In short, in taking Kābul he got a good omen. All his children were born there except two begams who were born in Khost, viz., Mihr-jān Begam, a daughter of Māham Begam, and Gul-rang, a daughter of Dil-dār Begam. (7a)
The blessed birth of the Emperor Humāyūn, the first-born son of his Majesty Firdaus-makānī, occurred in the night of Tuesday, Ẕū'l-qa'da 4th, 913H. (March 6th, 1508), in the citadel of Kābul, and when the sun was in the sign Pisces.
That same year his Majesty was pleased to order the amīrs and the rest of the world to style him emperor (bādshāh). For before the birth of the Emperor Humāyūn he had been named and styled Mīrzā Bābar. All kings' sons were called mīrzās. In the year of his Majesty Humāyūn's birth he styled himself bādshāh.
They found*i.e., by abjad. Cf. Steingass' Persian Dictionary, s.v. abjad. the date of the birth in Sulṭan Humāyūn Khān, and also in Shāh-(i)-fīroz-qadr.*'The king, victorious in might.'
After children had been born to him, news came that Shāh Ismā'īl had killed Shāhī Beg Khān.*At Merv, December 2nd, 1510. Cf. B. & H., I. 302. On the removal of this formidable foe, Babar again tried to regain his ancestral lands, but was still outmatched by the Uzbegs. Defeat by them led him to take a road of less resistance through Bajaur to Hindūstān.
His Majesty at this time entrusted Kābul to Nāṣir*Bābar's half-brother, son of Umīd, an Andijānī. Mīrzā, and set out*January, 1511 (Shawwāl, 916H.). for Samarqand, taking with him his people and wives and children, who were Humāyūn Mīrzā, and Mihr-jahān Begam, and Bārbūl Mīrzā, and Ma'ṣūma Begam, and Kāmrān Mīrzā. (7b)
With help from Shāh Ismā'īl, he took Samarqand (October, 1511), and for eight (lunar) months the whole of Māwarā'u-n-nahr (Transoxiana) was in his power. Owing to want of co-operation in his brothers and to the opposition of the Mughals,*For a more interesting cause of defeat, cf. B. & H., I. 321, et seq. 'Ubaidu-1-lāh was Shaibānī's nephew. Kūl (Lake) Malik is in Bokhārā. Bābar was again defeated by the Uzbegs in this same year (1511). he was defeated at Kūl Malik by 'Ubaidu-l-lāh Khān. As he could not remain in those parts, he set out for Badakhshān and Kābul, and put out of his head further thought of Māwarā'u-n-nahr.
He had become master of Kābul in 910H. (1504). He had always desired to go into Hindūstān, and had not carried out his wish because of the feeble counsels of his amīrs and the non-agreement of his brothers. When at length these were gone,*i.e., dead. Jahāngīr died in 1507 and Nāsir in 1515, both from drinking. This passage resembles Bābar's own words. (Mems. 309.) and there remained no amīr such as could argue against it, he accomplished his desire.
Bajaur*Gul-badan is confusingly brief. Bajaur was attacked 925H. (1519) on the way to India, and its people put to the sword because they were 'rebels to followers of Islam' and addicted to infidel customs. (Mems. 246 et seq..) he took in two or three hours and ordered a general massacre.
On the same day the father of Afghānī āghācha,*The Afghān Lady. It is thus that Gul-badan always speaks of Bībī (Lady) Mubarika, the Yūsufzai wife of Bābar. Pavet de Courteille defines āghācha thus : 'Se dit des femmes par opposition à begam et khanam; dame.' I do not in Gul-badan's work trace any disrespect attaching to 'āghācha,' such as is indicated by 'concubine,' as which it is sometimes translated. Malik Manṣūr Yūsufzai, came in and paid his respects. (8a) His Majesty took his daughter in marriage and then gave him leave to depart. He bestowed on him a horse and a suit of honour befitting a ruler, and said to him: ‘Go and bring men and labourers, etc., to your native land and cultivate it.’
Qāsim Beg,*Qāsim Beg Qūchīn, an ancient Beg of Andijān, and one of Bābar's best followers. who was in Kābul, sent a letter saying: ‘Another prince has been born. I have ventured to write as an omen of the conquest of Hind and of taking its throne. As for the rest, the Emperor is master, whatever is his pleasure’*Qy., as to the child's name. His true name was Muh. Nāsir, but he is only known as Hindāl. He was Gul-badan's full brother, and was given, before birth, to Maham Begam, who had lost all her children younger than Humayun. Cf. 24a n. (let it be done). In an auspicious hour his Majesty named him Mīrzā Hindāl.
Having subdued Bajaur, his Majesty went towards the Bhīra country, and on his arrival made peace without plundering. He took four laks of shāhrukhīs*Estimated by Mr. Erskine at about 20,000 sterling. and gave to his army, dividing them according to the number of his followers. He then set out for Kābul.*End of February, 1519. In his winning fashion Babar relates that he forbade the news of his return to be taken to Kabul, and that there was therefore no time to put his boys, Humāyūn and Kāmrān, on horseback, and that they were carried out in the arms of the nearest servants to offer their duty on his return, to a place between the fort gates and the citadel.
Just now came a letter from Badakhshān saying: ‘Mīrzā Khān is dead;*Cir. 926H. (1520). Cf. Mems. 286 n., and Tār. Rash., Ney Elias and Boss, 373 n. Mīrzā Sulaimān is young; the Uzbegs are near; take thought for this kingdom lest (which God forbid) Badakhshān should be lost.’ (8b) Until there should be thought taken, Mīrzā Sulaimān's mother*Sult̤ān Nigār Khānam. had brought him (to the Emperor). Agreeably to this petition and their wish, the Emperor assigned to Mīrzā Sulaimān the lands and inheritance which had been his father's, and he gave Badakhshān to Mīrzā Humāyūn.
The mīrzā set out for his province. His Majesty and my Lady (Akām) followed and also went to Badakhshān, and there spent several days together. The mīrzā remained and my royal father and my Lady came back to Kābul*Humāyūn was now thirteen years old. He was young to be sent so far as Badakhshān. That his parents went with him is one of Gul-badan's life-giving touches. Akām may now well have shown her boy to her father and her kinsfolk in Khost. (Memoirs of Bāyazīd, 1.0. MS., 26a.). (926H.—1520).
After a time his Majesty set out for Qilāt and Qandahār.*Held now by Shāh Beg Arghūn, father of Shāh Ḥusain, Humāyūn's later enemy in Sind. Firishta gives three years as the duration of the siege, Khāfī Khān four years, and Mīrzā Ḥaidar five years. The occurrence unfortunately coincides with one of the gaps in the emoirs. This was Bābar's culminating attempt on Qandahār ; his first being in 1505, this one seems to have ended in 1522 (928H.). He was victorious at once in Qilāt, and went on to Qanda-hār and kept its garrison shut up for a year and a half. Then, by the Divine favour and after great fighting and skirmishing, he captured it. Much gold fell into his hands, and he gave moneys and camels to his soldiers and the people of the army. Qandahār he bestowed on Mīrzā Kāmrān, and himself set off for Kābul.
His advance camp having been set up,*Gul-badan, by a sudden transition, passes over some three years, and, as it seems, using her father's Memoirs, enters on the account of his last and successful expedition to Hindūstān. Yak Langa is a hill between Kabul and Butkhak, and on the road to Jalālābād. he crossed the hill of Yak Langa, and gloriously alighted in the valley of Dīh-i-ya'qūb on Friday, Ṣafar 1st, 932H. (November 17th, 1525), when the sun was in Sagittarius. (9a) He spent the following day there, and on the next set forth, march by march, for Hindūstān. In the seven or eight years since 925H. (1519)*Text, 935H. ; clearly a slip. the royal army had several times renewed the attempt on Hindūstān. Each time it used to conquer lands and districts, such as Bhīra, Bajaur, Sīālkūt, Dīpālpūr, Lāhōr, etc., up to the fifth time, when on Ṣafar 1st, 932H., his Majesty went, march by march, from his glorious encamping in Dīh-i-ya'qūb towards Hindūstān. He conquered Lāhōr and Sirhind, and every country that lay on his path.
On Friday, Rajab 8th, 932H. (April 20th, 1526), he arrayed battle at Pānīpat*'A far-reaching, almost illimitable level tract, broken only by insignificant undulations. Here and there, where the shallow soil is moistened from some niggardly watercourse, grow sparse grasses and stunted thorn-bushes. But, for the most part, the eye falls only on the uniform yellowish-gray waste of sterile earth. Everywhere empty silence reigns, and it would almost seem as if this desert had been designed for the battlefield of nations.' (Emperor Akbar, F. v. Noer., trs. A.S.B. I. 74.) Thrice in modern times a decisive battle has been fought out here : (1) by Bābar against Ibrāhim and the Lodīs, 1526; (2) by Akbar against the Indian Afghāns in 1556 ; and (3) by Ahmad Shāh Durrānī against the Mārathās in 1761. against Sult̤ān Ibrāhīm, son of Sult̤ān Sikandar, son of Bahlūl Lodī. By God's grace he was victorious, and Sult̤ān Ibrāhīm was killed in the fight.
His victory was won purely by the Divine grace, for Sult̤ān Ibrāhīm had a lak and 80,000 horse, and as many as 1,500 head of fierce elephants; (9b) while his Majesty's army with the traders and good and all (badr (?) bad, bad) was 12,000 persons and he had, at the outside, 6,000 or 7,000 serviceable men.
The treasures of five kings fell into his hands. He gave everything away. The amīrs of Hind represented that in Hindūstān it was thought disgraceful to expend the treasure of bygone kings, and that people rather added and added to it, while his Majesty, on the contrary, had given all away.*Bābar distributed the treasure on the llth or 12th of May, 1526, and left himself so little that he was dubbed qalandar.
Khwāja*M. Garçin de Tassy says, in his 'Mémoire sur la Religion Musalmane' (46 n.) that khwāja, like sayyid, is a title for a descendant of Muhammad. Shaw's Tūrkī Dictionary states that khwāja is applied to the offspring of a sayyid by a woman of another family, also to their descendants. I find many instances where both titles are applied to the same man. Kilān*One of Bābar's most admirable followers and friends, and perhaps a relation. He was one of seven brothers, sons of Maulānā Muhammad Sadru-d-dīn, who spent their lives in Bābar's service. Beg asked leave several times to go to Kābul. He said: ‘My constitution is not fitted for the climate of Hindūstān. If leave were given, I should tarry awhile in Kābul.’ His Majesty was not at all, at all willing for him to go, but at last gave permission because he saw him so very urgent. He said: 'When you go, I shall send some of the valuable presents and curiosities of Hind which fell into our hands through the victory over Sult̤ān Ibrāhīm, to my elder relations*walīyu-n-ni'matan, lords of beneficence. Gul-badan's application of it is to ' benevolent ladies,' i.e., the numerous aunts. It is a title of respect for seniors. and sisters and each person of the ḥaram. You take them. I shall write a list, and you will distribute them according to it. (10a) You will order a tent with a screen to be set up in the Garden of the Audience Hall for each begam,*I think each begam was to encamp with her own establishment and within her own enclosure (sarāparda), and not in hasty camp fashion of community of quarters. This would exalt the assembly. and when a pleasant meeting-place has been arranged, the begams are to make the prostration of thanks for the complete victory which has been brought about.
‘To each begam is to be delivered as follows: one special dancing-girl of the dancing-girls of Sult̤ān Ibrāhīm, with one gold plate full of jewels—ruby and pearl, cornelian and diamond, emerald and turquoise, topaz and cat's-eye—and two small mother-o'-pearl trays full of ashrafīs, and on two other trays shāhrukhās,*It is waste of time to try to estimate the amount of these money gifts, made as they were in coins of uncertain value and recorded, probably on hearsay, more than fifty years after bestowal. Mr. Erskine puts the shāhrukhī at from lOd. to 1s., Steingass, s.v.ashrafī, gives for its value about 16 rupīs, presumably of undegenerated rank. and all sorts of stuffs by nines— that is, four trays and one plate. Take a dancing-girl and another plate of jewels, and one each of ashrafīs and shāhrukhīs, and present, in accordance with my directions, to my elder relations the very plate of jewels and the selfsame dancing-girl which I have given for them. I have made other gifts;*Qy., for the elder relations. convey these afterwards. (10b) Let them divide and present jewels and ashrafīs and shāh-rukhīs and stuffs to my sisters and children and the ḥarams*Presumably of his kinsmen and of officers whose families were with Bābar's own in Kābul. and kinsmen, and to the begams and āghās*This word seems to describe women who were heads of household departments and not merely the guardians of ḥarams. and nurses and foster-brethren and ladies, and to all who pray for me.’ The gifts were made according to the list.
Three happy days they remained together in the Audience Hall Garden. They were uplifted by pride, and recited the fātiḥa*The first chapter of the Qūran. for the benediction and prosperity of his Majesty, and joyfully made the prostration of thanks.*In this prostration the forehead touches the ground.
The Emperor sent by Khwāja Kilān a large ashrafī,*Perhaps from the Lodī treasury. (Cf. J.A.S.B. Proceedings, 1883 ; Thomas, 423; Richardson's Ar. & Per. Diet., s.v. sikka ; Memoirs of the Mughal Empire, Jonathan Scott, 3 and 3 n.) which weighed three imperial sīr, that is, fifteen sīr of Hind, for … 'Asas.*Lit. a night-guard. The words preceding 'Asas offer much difficulty. They may be read ba 'ammū,to the paternal uncle of 'Asas. But the story is of 'Asas, the night-guard and not of his uncle. Perhaps 'ammū is a clerical error for 'amah, bewilderment, misleading, and this would suit the story well. Mr. Beveridge has suggested to me to read 'Umarī, i.e., an old servant of 'Umar Shaikh. This, too, would be appropriate, for the victim of the hoax is clearly an old man. The title 'Asas is applied several times by Bābar. One 'Asas was a boon companion and partook of Bābar's vow before the battle of Khānwa. (Mems. 283 and 354 ; Firishta, Pers. Text, Briggs I. 449.) Gul-badan names one (206) as entrusted with the care of Babar's tomb, Muh. 'Alī 'Asas. I think he was brother to Maāham Begam, and the governor of Kaābul whom Kamrān murdered in 1547. He said to the Khwāja: ‘If 'Asas asks you, “What has the Emperor sent for me?” say, “One ashrafī,”’ as there really was only one. 'Asas was amazed, and fretted about it for three days. His Majesty had ordered that a hole should be bored in the ashrafī, and that 'Asas should be blindfolded and the ashrafī hung round his neck, and that then he was to be sent into the ḥaram. The hole was bored and the ashrafī hung round his neck. He was quite helpless with surprise at its weight, and delighted and very, very happy. He took it in both hands, and wondered over it and said, ‘No one shall get my ashrafī.’ Each begam, too, gave (? him) ten or twelve ashrafī, so he had seventy or eighty. (11a)
After Khwāja Kilān Beg had started for Kābul, the Emperor made gifts in Agra to his Majesty Humāyūn and to all the mīrzās and Sult̤āns and amīrs. He sent letters in all directions, urgently saying, ‘We shall take into full favour all who enter our service, and especially such as served our father and grandfather and ancestors. If such will come to us, they will receive fitting benefits. Whoever there may be of the families of Ṣāḥib-qirān and Chingīz Khān, let them turn towards our court. The most High has given us sovereignty in Hindūstān; let them come that we may see prosperity together.’
Seven*Six only named. daughters of Sult̤ān Abū-sa'īd came (to Hindū-stān): Gūhar-shād Begam, and Fakhr-jahān Begam, and Khadīja Sult̤ān Begam, and Badī'u-l-jamāl Begam, and Āq Begam, and Sult̤ān Bakht Begam.
(Also) Zainab Sult̤ān Kḥānam, daughter of his Majesty's maternal uncle, Sult̤ān Maḥmūd Khān, and Muḥibb Sult̤ān Kḥānam,*Wife of Mīrzā Ḥaidar Dughlāt, the historian. daughter of Ilācha Khān (Aḥmad), his Majesty's younger maternal uncle.
In short, all the begams and khānams went, ninety-six persons in all, and all received houses and lands and gifts to their heart's desire. (11b)
All through the four years that (my father) was in Āgra he used to go on Fridays to see his paternal aunts. One day it was extremely hot, and her Highness my lady (Akām) said, ‘The wind is very hot, indeed; how would it be if you did not go this one Friday? The begams would not be vexed.’ His Majesty said, ‘Māham! it is astonishing that you should say such things! The daughters of Abū-sa'īd Sult̤ān Mīrzā, who have been deprived of father and brothers! If I do not cheer them, how will it be done?’
To the architect, Khwāja Qāsim, his Majesty gave the following order: ‘We command a piece of good service from you. It is this: whatever work, even if it be on a great scale, our paternal aunts may order done in their palace, give it precedence, and carry it out with might and main.’
He commanded buildings to be put up in Āgra on the other side of the river*i.e., opposite the fort. and a stone palace to be built for himself between the ḥaram and the garden. He also had one built in the audience court, with a reservoir in the middle and four chambers in the four towers. On the river's bank he had a chaukandī*'A building on the roof which has a door on each of the four sides.' Vullers, 602. Bādaonī uses ghurfa, upper room, as an equivalent. Cf. Elliot's History of India, V. 347 and 503. built. (12a)
He ordered a tank made in Dholpūr, ten by ten,*About 20 feet by 20 feet. (Mems. 398 n. .). out of a single mass of rock, and used to say, ‘When it is finished, I will fill it with wine.” But as he had given up wine before the fight with Rānā Sangā, he filled it with lemonade.
A year after Sult̤ān Ibrāhīm's death, the rānā*This decisive battle was fought on March 16th, 1527, on the skirts of the hill of Sīkrī, at Khānwa. Akbar's prænomen of Fatḥipūr the City of Victory was given to Sīkrī in 1573 to commemorate the Gujrāt campaign. appeared from the Mandū (or Hindū) side with a countless host. Amīrs and rājas and rānās, every one of those who had come earlier and paid duty to his Majesty, now became an enemy and went and joined the rānā, until Kūl-jalālī and Sambhal and Rāprī—every pargana,—and rā'is and rājas and Afghāns became hostile. Nearly two laks of cavalry assembled.
At this time, Muḥammad Sharīf, the astrologer, said to the royal soldiers, ‘It would be best for the Emperor not to fight, for the constellation Sakkiz Yildoz (Eight Stars) is opposite.’ Amazing perturbation fell upon the royal army. They became exceedingly anxious and troubled*When the fight had been won, Bābar soundly rated Muhammad Sharīf, gave him money, and dismissed him to the place from which he had emerged, apparently only to cause trouble. He had come to India with a royal kinsman from Kābul, and to Kābul in 1519 from Khost (Māham's home). and showed signs of cowardice. (12b) When his Majesty saw his army in this state, he thought over the whole position. As the enemy was close at hand, this device occurred to his blessed mind; he ordered the remnant of what remained over and above deserters and enemies, to gather together. One and all came—amīrs and khāns and Sult̤āns; plebeian and noble, low and high. Then he addressed them, and said: ‘Do you not know that there lies a journey of some months between us and the land of our birth and our familiar city? If our side is defeated, (God preserve us from that day! God forbid it!) where are we? where is our birthplace? where our city? We have to do with strangers and foreigners. It is in every way best for each man to set resolutely before himself the two alternatives: if we win, we are avengers of the cause of God; if we lose, we die martyrs. In either fate is our salvation; each is a step and upward stage in greatness.’
To this they all agreed. They swore by the divorce of their wives and on the Holy Book; they recited the fātiḥa, and said, ‘O King! God willing, we will not spare ourselves in sacrifice and devotion, so long as there are breath and life in our bodies.’*Mr. Erskine thus gives Bābar's words: 'Every man dies. God only survives unchangeable. He who conies to life's feast must drink the parting cup of death. How much better to die with honour than to live with infamy!' Perhaps, as Gul-badan says, Bābar touched also the thought of home, and this would be recorded by the woman. (13a)
Two days before the battle his Majesty renounced wine, and, indeed, he forswore all forbidden things. Following his example, 400 young men of name, who had given proof of manliness and one-mindedness and friendship, also renounced these things when he did. His Majesty broke up all forbidden utensils,—vessels of gold and of silver, goblets and flasks, etc.; and he gave them to the poor and needy.
He also sent abroad firmāns with the announcement: ‘We exempt (you) from all dues and octroi and tithe on corn, and from all illegal imposts, so that no one, trader or other, may be hampered in his comings and goings, but all may move unmolested and free from interference.’
In the night*Bābar says that Qāsim had come earlier and with 500 men. Muh. Sharīf, the 'rascally fellow' and 'evil-minded wretch,' was with him. (Mems., 352.) before the battle word was brought that Qāsim Ḥusain Sult̤ān,—a grandson of Sult̤ān Ḥusain Mīrzā through a daughter, 'Āyisha Sult̤ān Begam,—had come to within ten kõs (of the royal camp) on his way from Khurāsān. (13b)
This news delighted his Majesty greatly. He asked, ‘How many men are with him?’ When he heard ‘thirty or forty,’ he at once sent off 1,000 troopers, all armed and equipped, at midnight, so that they might march in again with Qāsim Ḥusain Sult̤ān, and in this way the enemy and outsiders be let know that reinforcements had come in good time. Everyone who heard the plan thought it a good one.
Next morning, which was March 16th, 1527 (Jumāda II. [13th], 933H.), his Majesty arrayed battle against Rānā Sangā on the skirts of the hill of Sīkrī, where now Fatḥpūr has been built*How beautifully built may, in small part, be seen by visiting the Oriental section of the South Kensington Museum and there examining the architectural reproductions, the drawings of Mr. W. B. Carpenter, the photographs, etc. The South Kensington Museum and the British Museum furnish numerous illustrations for Gul-badan Begam's MS., and add to it the charm of life and reality. and peopled. By the Divine grace he was victorious and became an avenger of the cause of God.*Ghāzi. Bābar now assumed this title, because he had vanquished non-Muḥammadans.
A year later my lady (akām), who was Māham Begam, came from Kābul to Hindūstān. I, this insignificant one, came with her in advance of my sisters, and paid my duty to my royal father. When my lady reached Kūl(-jalālī—i.e., 'Alighar), his Majesty had sent two litters with three horsemen. (14a) She went on post-haste from Kūl to Āgra. His Majesty had intended to go as far as Kūl-jalālī to meet her. At evening-prayer time some one came and said to him: ‘I have just passed her Highness on the road, four miles out.’ My royal father did not wait for a horse to be saddled but set out on foot. He met her near the house of Māham's nanacha*dar pesh khāna nanacha Māham. This might read 'in the advance camp.' Māham's nanacha appears thrice in the MS.: here and at 186 and 26a. She is clearly of the innermost circle. The word may be rendered ' dear little mother,' and is one of close affection. She wished to alight, but he would not wait, and fell into her train and walked to his own house.*Cf. Mems., 423.
At the time of her meeting his Majesty, she desired me to come on by daylight and pay my respects to him.
… *tūqūz. The Türks made kings' gifts by nines and attached superstitious reverence to the number. nine troopers, with two sets of nine horses and the two extra litters which the Emperor had sent, and one litter which had been brought from Kābul, and about a hundred of my lady's Mughal servants, mounted on fine (tipūchāq) horses,*A tipūcāq horse, according to Shaw, is long-necked like a Türkmān horse, and it seems also to be one with speed, beauty, and specially-trained paces. Vambéry says, 'ein fettes, gutes Pferd.' all elegance and beauty.*The above passage is inserted without break in the text and suggests transcription from an imperfect MS. It may be an enumeration of the items of the cortege which followed Māham with Gul-badan.
My royal father's Khalīfa*Sayyid or Khwāja Niz̤āmu-d-dīn 'Alī Barlās and Bābar's vazīr. His brother, Junaid Barlās, married Shahr-bānū, a half-sister of Bābar. with his wife Sult̤ānam*Clearly an intimate. There were close relations, as has been said, between this Barlās family and Bābar. Cf. Biographical Appendix, s.n. Sult̤ānam. came as far as Naugrām*Some four miles from Āgra and on the east of the Jamna. The royal palace was not yet built on the western bank. Cf. Rājpūtāna Gazetteer, III. 274. to meet (us). My māmās*Steingass translates 'mother,' 'matron,' and 'old women.' One māmā is named later, ' 'Fakhru-n-nisā', my māmā.' (26a) She was the mother of Nadīm Khwāja kūka. She is several times mentioned, and it appears from a MS. belonging to Colonel Hanna which Mr. Beveridge has examined, that she was mother-in-law of the celebrated Maham anaga who was Nadīm's wife. had made me alight at the Little Garden, and having spread a small carpet, seated me on it. They instructed me to rise when Khalīfa came in, and to embrace him. When he came, I rose and embraced him. Then his wife Sult̤ānam came in too. (14b) I, not knowing, wished to get up, but Khalīfa raised objections, and said: ‘She is your old serving-woman. There is no need to rise for her. Your father has exalted this old servant (? himself) by giving such an order*(?) as that she should rise to greet him. about him. So be it! what power have slaves?’
From Khalīfa I accepted 6,000 shāhrukhīs and five horses, and Sult̤ānam gave me 3,000 and three horses. Then she said: ‘A hasty meal (mā ḥaẓarī) is ready. If you will eat you will honour your servants.’ I consented. There was a raised platform in a pleasant spot, and a pavilion of red cloth with lining of Gujrātī brocade, and six canopies of cloth and brocade, each of a (differing) colour, and a square enclosure*Text, chahār chūqa-i-sarāparda. Cf. Notices et Extraits, Quatremere, XIV. 498. of cloth with painted poles.
I sat in Khalīfa's quarters. The meal drew out to almost fifty roast sheep,*The 'fifty' sheep will not reduce by any reading I can suggest. Cf. anglice 'heaps of,' 'hundreds of,' etc. Perhaps the flock is a product of childish weariness recalled half a century later. Possibly one should read panjāhār, five foods, i.e., courses, dishes. Gul-badan is now between five and six. Her doubt as to the reception due to Sult̤ānam rings true, and Khalīfa's words suggest a little play-acting to please the small traveller; he treated her like a grown-up, and she tried to act one. and bread and sherbet and much fruit. Having at length eaten my breakfast, I got into my litter and went and paid my duty to my royal father. (15a)
I fell at his feet; he asked me many questions, and took me for a time in his arms, and then this insignificant person felt such happiness that greater could not be imagined.
When we had been in Āgra three months, the Emperor went to Dholpūr. Her Highness Māham Begam and this lowly person also went. A tank had been made there, ten (gaz) by ten, out of one piece (of rock). From Dholpūr his Majesty went on to Sīkrī. He ordered a great platform made in the middle of the tank, and when it was ready, he used to go and sit on it, or to row about. This platform still exists.
They also made a chaukandī in the Sīkrī garden, and my royal father put up in it a tūr-khāna*"Perhaps a space enclosed by a low railing." (Mems., 202 n..) Possibly and suitably, a mosquito-room (taur, net). Cf. Khwāndamīr, B.M. Or. 1,762, and Add. 30,774, ff. 25-114. where he used to sit and write his book.*"The Tūzūk-i-bābarī.
I and Afghānī āghācha were sitting in the front of the lower storey when my lady went to prayers. I said to Afghānī āghācha: ‘Pull my hand.’ She pulled, and my hand came out. My strength went and I cried. (15b) Then they brought the bone-setter and when he had bound up my hand, the Emperor went to Āgra.
After his arrival, word was brought that the begams were on the way from Kābul. My royal father went as far as Naugrām to give honourable reception to my dearest lady (aka-jānam),*Khānzāda Begam. who was my oldest paternal aunt and my royal father's eldest sister. All the begams who had come with her, paid their duty to the Emperor in her quarters. They were very happy and made the prostration of thanks, and then set off for Āgra. The Emperor gave houses to all the begams.
A few days later he made an excursion to the Gold-scattering Garden (Bāgh-i-zar-afshān). There was a place in it for ablution before prayers. When he saw it, he said: ‘My heart is bowed down by ruling and reigning; I will retire to this garden. As for attendance, T̤āhir the ewer-bearer will amply suffice. I will make over the kingdom to Humāyūn.’ On this my lady (akām) and all his children broke down, and said with tears: ‘God keep you in His own peace upon the throne many, many years, and may all your children after you reach a good old age!’ (16a)
A few days later Alwar Mīrzā fell ill. His illness led to an affection of the bowels, which grew worse and worse in spite of all that the doctors could do, and at last he passed from this transitory world to the eternal home. His Majesty was very sad and sorry, and Alwar's mother, Dil-dār Begam, was wild with grief for the child, who was a rarity of the world and unique of the age. As her lamentation passed due bounds, his Majesty said to my lady and the begams: ‘Come, let us make an excursion to Dholpūr.’ He himself went comfortably and pleasantly by water, and the begams also begged to go by boat.
Just then there came a letter from Maulānā Muḥammad Farghārī (Parghālī) in Dihlī, saying: ‘Humāyūn Mīrzā is ill and in an extraordinary state. Her Highness the begam should come at once to Dihlī, for the mīrzā is much prostrated.’*Cf. Bābar-nāma, Ilminsky, 502 et seq., and P. de Courteille, II. 457 et seq., where is one of the supplementary fragments included in Kehr's Bābar-nāma (Tūzūk) and possibly taken from the Bukhara MS. (Cf. Notes on the Tūrkā texts of the Bābar-nāma, A. S. Beveridge. Journal of the Koyal Asiatic Society, July, 1900.) (16b)
My lady was very much upset on hearing this news, and started for Dihlī, like one athirst who is far from the waters. They met in Mathura. To her experienced eye he seemed ten times weaker and more alarmingly ill than she had heard he was. From Mathura the two, mother and son, like Jesus and Mary, set out for Āgra. When they arrived, this insignificant one went with her own sisters to visit that royal angel of goodness.
He was then growing weaker and weaker. Every time he came to his senses, his pearl-dropping tongue asked for us, and said: ‘Sisters, you are welcome! Come, and let us embrace one another. I have not embraced you.’ It might be three times that he raised his head and that his jewel-dropping tongue let fall these uplifting words.
When his Majesty came and saw how it was, his light-revealing countenance at once became sad and pitiful, and he began more and more to show signs of dread. (17a) On this my lady said: ‘Do not be troubled about my son. You are a king; what griefs have you? You have other sons. I sorrow because I have only this one.’*All Māham's other children died in childhood. His Majesty rejoined: ‘Māham! although I have other sons, I love none as I love your Humāyūn. I crave that this cherished child may have his heart's desire and live long, and I desire the kingdom for him and not for the others, because he has not his equal in distinction.’
During Humāyūn's illness*The account of Bābar's self-surrender which follows is somewhat puzzling to translate, but the sense is clear and the important statements are in accordance with other sources. his Majesty walked round him and turned his face (in intercession) to his Reverence, Murtaẓa 'Alī Karīmu-l-lāh. He kept up that going-round from the Wednesday and made intercession from the Tuesday, in anxiety and deep dejection. The weather was extremely hot and his heart and liver burned. While going round he prayed, saying in effect: ‘O God! if a life may be exchanged for a life, I who am Bābar, I give my life and my being for Humāyūn.’*One of Kehr's (Ilminsky's) 'fragments' (which, if it be not Bābar's own, it is not improbable was added to the Tūzūk by Jahāngīr) tells this story in Bābar's person. After rejection of the suggestion to sacrifice for Humāyūn's life the great diamond (? the Koh-i-nūr), the narrative continues (P. de C., II. 460.) : ' J'entrai dans la chambre où il se tenait, et je tournai trois fois autour de lui, en commencant par la tête et en disant, " J'assume sur moi tout ce que tu souffres." En meme instant je me sentis tout alourdi, tandis que lui se trouvait léger et dispos. II se leva enpleine santé, et moi je m'affaissai, accablé de malaise.' Faith in the rite of circumarnbulation still prevails in Persia. Bābar, it is clear, believed his devotion to have borne fruit. (Cf. Hughes, Diet, of Islām, s.v. Intercession. For Karīmu-l-lāh, see Badāunī, Bib. Ind. Text, III. 191.).
That very day he fell ill, and Humāyūn poured water on his head, and came out and gave audience. (17b) Because of his illness, they carried my royal father within, and he kept his bed for two or three months.
As he grew worse, a messenger was sent to summon his Majesty Humāyūn, who had gone towards Kalinjar. He came post-haste, and on paying his duty to the Emperor, noticed that he was very feeble. Filled with compassion, he began to break down, and kept saying to the attendants: ‘How has he come to such a lamentable pass all at once?’ He sent for the doctors, and said to them: ‘I left him well. What has happened all at once?’ They said this and that in reply.
The whole time my royal father kept repeating: ‘Where is Hindāl? What is he doing?’ Just at this time some-one came in and said: ‘Mīr Bardī Beg, the son of Mīr Khurd Beg,*Hindāl's guardian from birth (1519-1530). He had previously been Bābar's bakāwal (house-steward). One of his sons, Khwāja T̤āhir Muḥammad, served under Humāyūn and Akbar, and was mīr farāghat̤ (master of comfort). He may be the Mīr Bardī (qy. a child's sobriquet, Master Full-of-fun) of this episode. Tāhir's son, Bāqī, was a sewer, i.e., table-decker (sufra-chī,). conveys his obeisance.’ My royal father, full of agitation, sent for him at once and asked: ‘Where is Hindāl? When will he come? What trouble waiting gives!’ (18a) Mīr Bardī said: ‘The fortunate prince has reached Dihlī; he will wait on you to-day or to-morrow.’ On this my royal father said to Mīr Bardī Beg: ‘Ill-fated little fellow! I have heard that they married your sister in Kābul, and you in Lāhōr.*Hindāl, with whom doubtless Mīr Bardī and his father were travelling, was on his way from Badakhshān to the court. It is because of the wedding festivities that you have (not)*The text has no negative. sooner brought my son, and so my weary waiting has been very long.’ He asked: ‘How tall has Hindāl Mīrzā grown?’ and ‘What is he like?’ As Mīr Bardī was wearing one of the mīrzā's dresses, he showed it and said: ‘This is a robe of the prince which he bestowed on his servant.’ His Majesty called him nearer and said: ‘Let me see how tall and how big Hindāl has grown.’*Hindāl was now about eleven years old, so Mīr Bardī must also have been a boy. He kept repeating, ‘Alas! a thousand times alas! that I do not see Hindāl,’ and asking everyone who came in: ‘When will Hindāl come?’
During his illness, he laid a command on my lady, and said: ‘Marriages ought to be arranged for Gul-rang Begam and Gul-chihra Begam. (18b) When the royal aunt, my elder sister,*Khānzāda Begam - aka jānam - dearest lady. honours me with a visit, tell her that I say it has occurred to me to give Gul-rang to Isān-tīmūr Sult̤ān and Gul-chihra to Tūkhta-būghā Sult̤ān.’*Isān (Ishān, or Yussun) was the ninth, and Tūkhta-būghā the tenth, son of Aḥmad Khān, Bābar's maternal uncle. They were uncles of Gul-badan's own husband, Khiz̤r Khwāja.
Dearest lady, the smiling one,*tabassum kunān. came, and they said to her: ‘The Emperor spoke in this manner, and it has occurred to him in such a way. It now remains to know your pleasure. Let it be as you wish.’ She said the same and, ‘God grant blessing and peace! His idea is very good.’ My chīcha*This Tūrkī word presents great difficulty. Vambéry has jīcha, Kirghiz, mother, and chīcha, aunt (inferentially maternal); Shaw, chīcha, Qāzzāq, mother. P. de Courteille, Diet., chīcha, an elder sister. The word has in Samarqand the meaning ' maternal aunt.' It occurs again in the text (23a), and is used for Gul-badan's sisters, the brides of this page (19a); so that it may be right (spite of the singular number) to read 'my elder sisters themselves' i.e., the brides. But it might be 'my mother.' The word occurs at least once in the Memoirs. (Ilm., 446; Ers., 387.) It is preceded by one which Ilminsky writes yanka, and Erskine Bikeh (Bega). The letters of both words might be identical and the points only decisive. Shaw says yangā is an elder brother's wife; Vambéry, belle-sœur, Schwagerin; and Erskine (208 n..), bridesmaid, by which, I believe, is meant one who leads the bride to the bridegroom an exactly appropriate use here, since Ḥabība yangā brings her daughter Ma'ṣūma to marry Bābar. (N.B. Shaw writes yangā and chīcha, where Vambéry and others have a final 'round hā.') But if the chīcha of Mems., 387, is to be read 'elder sister,' Bābar can apply it only to Khānzāda Begam (elsewhere called by him aulugh īgāchī (Ilm., 116.); and this would, I believe, make the reading of Bikeh (Bega) difficult, since Khānzāda could not be called anything less than Khānam. The same objection would apply to the reading of chīcha as mother or as maternal aunt. This inclines one to read yanka, and not bikeh, at Mems., 387 ; and the Zainab of the sentence may be granddaughter (nabïra), through the female line, of the belle-sœur, or bridesmaid, of Khānzāda Begam. But nothing is clear as to the relationship. herself and Badī'u-l-jamāl Begam and Āq Begam, both of whom were paternal aunts of his Majesty, were conducted into the hall. Having raised an estrade*Text, ṣufā dāda. Perhaps, content was given to all, but ṣuffa, estrade, fits better with the following basāt̤. and spread carpets and chosen a propitious hour, Māham's nanacha made both Sult̤āns bow the knee.*Zānū zanā'īnda, literally, 'striking the knee.' Mems., 204 n. in order to exalt them to the rank of sons-in-law.
Meantime his Majesty's disorder of the bowels increased. The Emperor Humāyūn broke down again when he saw his father's condition worsen, and called the doctors, and said to them: ‘Think it well over and find some remedy.’ (19a) Having consulted together, they said: ‘Small is our luck, for our remedies are of no avail. We hope that God, the most Holy, will soon give one from His invisible treasures.’
When they felt his Majesty's pulse, they came to the opinion that there were symptoms of the same poison as that given him by Sult̤ān Ibrāhīm's mother. It was in this way: that ill-fated demon (the mother) gave a tōla of poison to one of her maids, and said: ‘Take this and give it to Aḥmad the taster and tell him to put it in some way or other into the special dishes prepared for the Emperor.’ And she promised him large rewards. The ill-fated demon did this although his Majesty used to call her “mother,” and had assigned her place and lands with every favour, and had been kindly pleased to say: ‘Consider me as in the place of Sult̤ān Ibrāhīm.’*Her son, who died fighting Bābar at Pānīpat. But as ignorance prevails amongst those people, she did not regard his kindnesses. The (fitting) hemistich is well known:
‘Everything reverts to its original type,
(Whether pure gold, or silver, or tin).’*Pers. and Hind. Proverbs, T. Eoebuck, Calcutta, 1824, p. 124, and Merns., 13.
To cut short the story: the cook (Heaven having made him blind and deaf,) spread the poison which had been brought and given to him, on the Emperor's bread only, and so little was eaten. But the symptoms of this illness were like that one's, seeing that day by day he lost strength and became more and more emaciated. (19b) Every day the disorder increased and his blessed countenance changed.
Next day*(?) after Humāyūn's arrival. he called his chiefs together and spoke after this wise: ‘For years it has been in my heart to make over my throne to Humāyūn Mīrzā and to retire to the Gold-scattering Garden. By the Divine grace I have obtained all things but the fulfilment of this wish in health of body. Now, when illness has laid me low, I charge you all to acknowledge Humāyūn in my stead. Fail not in loyalty to him. Be of one heart and one mind with him. I hope to God that Humāyūn also will bear himself well towards men.
‘Moreover, Humāyūn, I commit to God's keeping you and your brothers and all my kinsfolk and your people and my people; and all of these I confide to you.’
At these words hearers and onlookers wept and lamented. His own blessed eyes also filled with tears.
When his family and the people within the ḥaram heard of these occurrences, they were stupefied and overwhelmed, and cried and lamented.
Three days later he passed from this transitory world to the eternal home. The death took place on Monday, December 26th, 1530 (Jumāda I. 5th, 937H.). (20a)
They brought out our paternal aunt*Khānzāda Begam. and our mothers*Bābar's wives. on the pretence that the doctors were coming to look. All rose. They took all the begams and my mothers to the Great House.*Perhaps 'palace,' and the sense may be that they did not go to their separate residences but remained nearer to the dead.
Black fell the day for children and kinsfolk and all. They bewailed and lamented; voices were uplifted in weeping; there was utter dejection. Each passed that ill-fated day in a hidden corner.
The death was kept concealed. After a time Araish Khān,—he was an amīr of Hind,—said: ‘It is not well to keep the death secret, because when such misfortunes befall kings in Hindūstān, it is the custom of the bāzār people to rob and steal; God forbid that the Mughals not knowing, they should come and loot the houses and dwelling-places. It would be best to dress someone in red, and to set him on an elephant, and to let him proclaim that the Emperor Bābar has become a dervish and has given his throne to the Emperor Humāyūn.’ This his Majesty Humāyūn ordered to be done. People were at once reassured by the proclamation, and all offered prayers for his welfare. On Friday, December 29th, 1530 (Jumāda I. 9th, 937H.), the Emperor Humāyūn mounted the throne, and everyone said: ‘May all the world be blessed under his rule.’ (20b)
After that he came to visit his mothers and sisters and his own people, and he made inquiry after their health and offered sympathy, and spoke with kindness and commiseration. He was pleased to order: ‘Let each keep the office, and service, and lands, and residence which he has had, and let him serve in the old way.’
On the same day Hindāl Mīrzā, having come from Kābul, paid his homage to the Emperor, who received him with kindness, and was very happy, and bestowed on him many things from the treasures left by their father.
After my royal father's death, there were the good works and consecrated days of the first assembly*ma'rka. Raverty (Afghan Dict..) gives as the first meaning of this word 'a party of ambassadors, or persons sent to make peace between two tribes'; and, secondly, as 'the business of making peace, or an arrangement between two tribes.' Lane and other writers render it 'battle-field' and 'battle,' etc. Steingass adds 'hubbub, turmoil' (modern colloquial). Gul-badan uses it for the common social assemblies she names, and here for the gathering of relations at a tomb. at his tomb.*Bābar's body was laid first in the Rām or Arām Bāgh (Garden of Rest), on the opposite side of the river from the present Tāj-mahāll. Later it was taken to Kābul. Mr. Erskine (B. & M., I. 517 et seq..) quotes a charming passage from Burns' 'Travels in Bokhara' (IT. 121 et seq.), which describes Bābar's self-chosen resting-place. He follows this by an eloquent estimate of Bābar's character which makes clear his regret in bidding farewell to the great and vivid personality he has so admirably set before his readers. His Majesty named Muḥammad 'Alī 'asas*i.e., of the night-guard. I believe he was the brother of Māham Begam. its guardian, and ordered the appointment of sixty good reciters of the whole Qurān and readers with good voices, so that the congregational prayers might be said five times daily and the whole Qurān recited, and prayer offered for the soul of the royal dweller in Paradise (Firdaus-makānī). (21a) The whole of Sīkrī—now known as Fatḥpūr—together with five laks charged on Bayāna, was given as an endowment to the tomb, for the support of the men of learning ('ulamā) and the reciters who were attached to it.
My lady made an allowance of food twice daily: in the morning an ox and two sheep and five goats, and at afternoon prayer-time five goats. She gave this from her own estate during the two and a half years that she remained in the prison of this world.
During my lady's life I used to see his Majesty in her residence. When she fell into bad health, she said to me: ‘It will be very hard that when I am gone, the Emperor Bābar's daughters should see their brother in Bībī Gul-barg's*Cf.post. 29b, and 'Biographical Appendix,' s.n.. house.’ Just as though her words were in the royal heart and mind, his Majesty used always, so long as he was in Hindūstān, to come to our house. He used to visit us and showed us kindness and affection and favour without stint. He used to come to the house of this insignificant one, and there would come Ma'ṣūma Sult̤ān Begam, and Gul-rang Begam, and Gul-chihra Begam*These three were her half and full sisters respectively. etc. —all the married ladies—and pay their duty to him. (21b)
In short, after the death of my royal father and my lady, his Majesty, in the fulness of his affection, showed this broken one such favour, and spoke with such boundless compassion to this helpless one, that she did not know she was orphaned and headless.*Gul-badan was about eight at her father's death. At three she had been adopted by Māham Begam.
During the ten*Really about nine. years after the death of his Majesty Firdaus-makānī that his Majesty Jannat-āshyānī was in Hind, the people dwelt in repose and safety, and obedience and loyalty.*This rose-coloured picture accords neither with the facts nor with the narrative of Gul-badan. It may be that some limiting word has slipped out; e.g., 'hi Āgra,' or 'the people of the country,' in opposition to the dispossessed Afghans, conquerors of earlier date, or Bābar's people, i.e., household.
Six months after the death of his Majesty Firdaus-makānī, Biban*Text, Bibban. Biban and Bāyazīd were two distinguished Afghīn chiefs and upporters of the fallen Lodī dynasty. The defeat named here occurred at Daura, on the Gumtī, 1531 (937 H.). All who love the story of an adventurous life, chequered through character of individuals in a marked degree, should fill out Gul-badan's brief narrative from Mr. Erskine's life of Humāyūn. and Bāyazīd advanced from the direction of Gaur. On the news of this, his Majesty at once left Āgra and moved to meet them. He defeated them, and then went to Chanāda (Chunār),*1532 (938H.). Taken from Shīr Shāh late in 1532 (939H.). took it, and thence returned to Āgra.
My lady, who was Māham Begam, had a great longing and desire to see a son of Humāyūn. Wherever there was a good-looking and nice girl, she used to bring her into his service. Maywa-jān, a daughter of Khadang (? Khazang), the chamberlain (yasāwal),*An attendant on a man of rank, who carries a gold or silver staff (Johnson, Pers. Diet., s.v..); chamberlain in the service of Khāns of Tūrkistān (Zenker, s.v..) Gul-badan's use of the word (81b) would allow a more extended sense. was in my employ. One day (after) the death of his Majesty Firdaus-makānī,*Text has also dar hayāt khud. This is not the only instance of a similar redundant expression. my lady said: ‘Humāyūn, Maywa-jān is not bad. Why do you not take her into your service?’ So, at her word, Humāyūn married and took her that very night. (22a)
Three days later Bega Begam*Bega had had one son, Al-amān. She is known in the later histories as Hājī Begam, but she made her pilgrimage in 972H. . She was captured at Chausa in 1539 (946H.) by Shīr Shāh; and most writers give her at this date the brevet title of Hājī. It is probable that Bega was not her personal name. It is the title of a lady of rank, and answers to beg. came from Kābul. She became in the family way. In due time*Text, b'ad az yak sāl, which, read literally, spoils the story. she had a daughter, whom they named 'Aqīqa. Maywa-jān said to Lady (Aka) Māham Begam, ‘I am in the family way, too.’ Then my lady got ready two sets of weapons, and said: ‘Whichever of you bears a son, I will give him good arms.’ Then she packed up the arms, and got ready gold and silver walnuts. She procured also the (special) arms of a Mughal commander, and was very happy, and kept saying: ‘Perhaps one of them will have a son.’ She kept watch till Bega Begam's 'Aqīqa was born. Then she kept an eye on Maywa-jān. Ten months went by. The eleventh also passed. Maywa-jān said: ‘My maternal aunt was in Mīrzā Ulugh Beg's*This will be Bābar's paternal uncle, known as Kābulī. ḥaram. She had a son in the twelfth month; perhaps I am like her.’ So they sewed tents and filled pillows.*i.e., made all preparations. Perhaps khirgāhā dohkta is not 'sewed tents,' but 'pitched tents.' Cf. zamīn-doz. But in the end everyone knew she was a fraud.
His Majesty who had gone towards Chanāda (Chunār), returned safe and sound.
My lady who was Māham Begam, gave a great feast. (22b) They lit up the bāzārs.*I am very doubtful as to the meaning of the following paragraph. It can hardly be true that India waited for Māham to instruct it in the art of illumination or decoration. I have conjecturally read that, whereas formerly only bāzārs were made to look festive, she had other houses adorned. Before that time people used to illuminate the bāzārs (only). Then she gave orders to the better class and to the soldiers also to decorate their places and make their quarters beautiful, and after this illumination became general in India.
… a jewelled throne,*Here follows a list of arrangements, plenishing and gifts for the feast. There are here and at p. 123 ff. many difficult words in it. ascended by four steps, and above it gold-embroidered hangings, and laid on it a cushion and pillows embroidered in gold.
The covering of the pavilions and of the large audience tent was, inside, European brocade, and outside, Portuguese cloth. The tent-poles were gilded; that was very ornamental.
(My lady) had prepared a tent-lining and a kannat*Ar., a pent over a doorway, a veil, an umbrella. Perhaps qanāt, .a screen, an enclosure for tents, the tent walls. and sar-i-kannat of Gujrātī cloth-of-gold, and a ewer for rose-water, and candlesticks, and drinking-vessels, and rosewater sprinklers,— all of jewelled gold.
With all her stores of plenishing, she made an excellent and splendid feast.
… twelve strings of camels, and twelve of mules, and seventy tipūchāq horses, and one hundred baggage horses. She gave special robes of honour to 7,000 persons. The festivities lasted several days.*The feast here credited to Māham Begam may be that of the first anniversary of Humāyūn's accession. Of this Gul-badan gives an account, minus such details as are set down here, at 24a et seq.. At the 'accession feast,' held December 19th, 1531, and thus not quite a year after the accession, it is said by Niz̤āmu-d-dīn Ahmad that 12,000 robes were bestowed, 2,000 of these being ' special.' For details as to khil'at, Cf. Memoirs, 274 n.. Lists are dull reading, unless each item calls up an image. It is easy to add splendour and beauty to Gul-badan's few poor words by looking at actual things of the kinds she names, as may be done in the Oriental Section of the South Kensington Museum. The links between Persia and India in her day and earlier and later were many and close. Many Persians born and bred in Persia or by descent formed part of the Mughal court. Persian art and manufacture were at their highest development, experts say, in the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries. The uncritical eye doubts if the products of those centuries, as exhibited in the examples England possesses, can be excelled for splendour and satisfying charm. With such things, the personages of our begam's book surrounded themselves.
At this time came news that Muḥammad-zamān Mīrzā*Son of Badī'u-z-zamān Mīrzā, and grandson of Sult̤ān Ḥusain Mīrzā Bāyqrā, and husband of Ma'ṣūma, a daughter of Bābar. He was drowned in the Ganges at the rout of Chausa. had killed the father of Ḥājī Muḥammad Khān kūkī,*Cf. B. & H., II., s.n. and was meditating rebellion. (23a) His Majesty sent to summon them*Sic; apparently the names of his fellow-rebels are omitted. They occur below. to the presence, and having laid hands on them, imprisoned them in Bayāna, in charge of Uncle Yādgār. Uncle Yādgār's men sided with Muḥammad-zamān Mīrzā, and let him escape (1533—940H.). At this time it was ordered that Sult̤ān Muḥammad Mīrzā*Grandson, through a daughter, of Sult̤ān Ḥusain Mīrzā Bāyqrā. and thus, a cousin of Muḥammad-zamān. and Nai*Called both Nai and Walī in the histories. (Walī) Khūb Sult̤ān Mīrzā should both be blinded. Nai Khūb Sult̤ān lost his sight, but the man who had the blinding of Muḥammad Sult̤ān did not injure his eyes.*See Mr. Erskine's interesting note on blinding. (B. & H., II. 14 n.). Muḥammad-zamān Mīrzā and Muḥammad Sult̤ān Mīrzā, with his sons, Ulugh Mīrzā and Shāh Mīrzā, made their escape a few days later.
There was perpetual disturbance from these people during the years we were in Hind.
When his Majesty returned from the campaign against Biban and Bāyazīd, he was in Āgra*'Occupied in dreamy speculations of false sciences' i.e., astrology. (B. & H., II. 14.) The date is 1534 (941H.). for about a year. He said to my lady: ‘I am sad at heart in these days. If you approved, I would go with you to Guālīār.’*The histories tell us that the Guālīār expedition was a military demonstration against Bahādur Shāh of Gujrāt. Khwānd-amīr fixes its date as Sha'bān 939H. (February, 1533). Her Highness my lady, and my mother (ājam),*Taken as it is written, this name might be charmingly translated as 'Ma desirée,' but considered with other words in this text after which the enclitic am (my) is incorrectly written, it seems that prosaic 'my mother,' Tūrkī, achām, is safer. In favour, however, of reading ājam, desire, is the wording on 256 (No. 48 of the guest-list), ājam wālida-i-mā, our mother. Ājam occurs also at 29. and my sisters Ma'ṣūma*Her husband, Muḥammad-zamān, is the rebel of this name just spoken of. Sult̤ān Begam, whom we used to call Elder sister*Chīcha; which I have rendered ' elder sister ' to suit the actual relationship between Gul-badan and her two sisters. Cf. 186 n. Moon, and Gul-rang Begam, whom we used to call Elder sister Rose,—we all were in Guālīār in attendance on the beneficent ladies.*The aunts, presumably.
As Gul-chihra Begam was in Oude, and her husband, Tūkhtā-būghā Sult̤ān, went to the mercy of God, her attendants wrote to his Majesty from Oude and said: ‘Tūkhtā-būghā Sult̤ān is dead. (23b) What is the order about the begam?’ His Majesty said to Mīr Zāycha:*The Chief Astrologer. ‘Go and bring the begam to Āgra. We also are going there.’
At this time her Highness my lady said: ‘If you approve, I will send for Bega Begam and ‘Aqīqa, so that they also may see Guālīār.’ She despatched Naukār*Bābar names this man as being sent from India in charge of gifts to Kābul (Mems., 337.), and Gul-badan names him again (67b) as guardian of the begams' doorway in the citadel of Kābul. and Khwāja Kabīr, who brought them from Āgra.
They let two months slip by in one another's company in Guālīār, and then set out for Āgra, which they reached in February, 1534 (Sha'bān, 940 H.).*This date cannot be right. The following are approximately correct for this time : Visit to Guālīār undertaken, Sha'bān, 939H. (February, 1533). Return to Āgra and Māham's illness, Shawwāl (April). Death of Māham, 13th Shawwāl (May 8, 1533). Forty days of mourning carries on the time to late in Ẕū'l-qa'da (June). Start for Dihlī, beginning of Ẕū'l-ḥijja, after June 24. The building of Dīnpanā was begun Muḥarram, 940H. (July, 1533).
In April (Shawwāl) my lady was attacked by a disorder of the bowels. On the 27th of the same month (13th Shawwāl) she passed from this transitory life to the eternal home.
The stamp of orphanhood was set anew on my royal father's children, and especially on me, for whom she herself had cared. I felt lonely and helpless and in great affliction. Day and night I wept and mourned and grieved. His Majesty came several times to comfort me, and showed me sympathy and kindness. I was two years old when her Highness my lady took me into her own house and cared for me, and I was ten when she departed from this life. (24a) I remained one year more in her house.*Māham had also adopted Hindāl. Bābar details the circumstances, but the abbreviation, as it seems, of the Persian text, has led to an error. (Mems., 250.) Those children of Bābar who died young, were not born in 'this year' (925H.), as will be seen in the fuller rendering of Ilminsky, 281, and of P. de C., II. 44: ' Après Humāyūn (b. 913H.) j'eus encore plusieurs enfants, nés de la même mère que lui, mais qui ne vécurent pas.' We know from Gul-badan that these were Bārbūl, Mihr-jahān, and Ishān-daulat. 'Hindāl n'etait pas encore venu dans le monde. Comme j'étais dans ces parages [Kehraāj, in Mandesh, and on his way to India], il m'arriva une lettre de Māham, dans laquelle elle me disait, “Sera-ce un fils ou une fille? Prononcez vous-même sur la part que me réserve la fortune; à moi de mettre l'enfant dans le monde [Erskine, 'I will regard the child as mine'] et de l'élever." Le vendredi, 26 du mois, toujours à ce meme campement, j'adjugeai Hindāl à Māham [before birth], et je lui écrivis à ce sujet une lettre qui lui fût portée Kābul par Yūsuf 'Ali rikāb-dār [courier] quoique Hindāl ne fût pas encore né.'.) A passage now follows which, as is noted by P. de C., is neither in the Persian version of the Memoirs nor in the English translation: 'Pour bien comprendre tout ce qui à été dit plus haut, il faut savoir que jusqu'à cette époque, de tout les enfants nés de la même mère que Humāyūn, soit un fils [i.e., Bārbūl], cadet par rapport à lui, l'ainé par rapport à mes autres enfants et trois filles, dont l'une etait Mihrjān, il n'y en avait pas un qui ne fût mort en bas age. Je souhaitais vivement de lui voir naître un frère ou une sœur. [i.e., a child of Māham. There were other children of other wives.] 'Précisément a cette epoque Dil-dār āghācha se trouvait enceinte. Je ne cessais de répéter, "Plût à Dieu que l'enfant qui va naître, sortît du même sein que Humāyūn!" A quoi ma mére [sic. Tūrkī text, Ilminsky, 271, ḥaz̤rat wālida] me répondait, "Si Dil-dar āghācha met au monde un fils, ne pourrais-je pas le prendre et m'en charger?" "Rien de mieux," faisais-je à mon tour. 'D'ordinaire les femmes ont la manière suivante de consulter le sort, quand elles veulent savoir si elles auront un fils ou une fille. Elles prennent deux morceaux de papier; sur l'un elles écrivent, 'Alī ou Ḥasan, sur l'autre Fāt̤ima; puis elles les placent dans deux boules de limon qu'elles inettent dans une coupe d'eau. Celles des deux qui s'ouvre la première, leur sert à prognostiquer l'avenir; si elle renferme le nom d'un garçon, il y aura un garçon; si c'est celui d'une fille, il y aura une fille, disent-elles. On employa cette méthode ; ce fût un enfant mâle qui en sortit. En recevant cette bonne nouvelle, j'écrivis aussitôt pour en faire part à ma mère [sic]. Quelques jours plus tard, effectivement Dieu me donna un garçon. Trois jours après sa naissance et avant de l'annoncer, on enleva Fenfant, bon gré, mal gré, à sa mère et on l'apporta chez moi où on le garda. Lorsque j'en donnai avis à ma mère [sic], celle-ci apprenant qu'elle avait obtenu l'objet de ses vœux, donna au jeune prince le nom de Hindāl, qui etait pour nous de bon augure. Par cet. arrangement cet énfant fût pour moi [? nous] à la fois un frère cadet (for que l'enfant qui va naître, sortît du même sein que Humāyūn) et un fils (for Māham and himself). The words ḥaz̤rat wālida cannot mean the mother of Bābar She had been dead some fourteen years. They may be equivalent to Sult̤ān-wālida - i.e., the mother of the heir-apparent. Certainly it was Māham who adopted Hindāl. This initial misconception as to the identity of Ḥaz̤rat wālida runs through the whole translation of this most interesting passage. According to Gul-badan, Fārūq (born in 932H.) was Māham's son. Bābar names the birth. (Mems., 343.). When I was eleven, and his Majesty went to Dholpūr, I accompanied my mother.*i.e., returned to her own mother's charge i.e., Dil-dār's. This will have been before he went to Guālīār and began to build.*An obscure passage. Humāyūn was building about this time. (Elliot, V. 126.).
At the end of the mourning for my lady, his Majesty went to Dihlī*Beginning of Ẕū'l-hijja, 939H. (June July, 1533). and began to build the fort of Dīn-panā.*Humāyūn-nāma, Khwānd-amīr. He then returned to Āgra.
Dearest lady*Cf. 156 n. (Khānzāda Begam) said to his Majesty: ‘When will you make Mīrzā Hindāl's marriage feast?’ His Majesty replied: ‘B'ismu-l-lāh.’ When Mīrzā Hindāl was married, my lady (Māham) was living, but there was delay in arranging the feast. (Khānzāda Begam) said: ‘The things for the Mystic Feast are also ready. Let us first celebrate this, and afterwards Mīrzā Hindāl's.’ His Majesty said: ‘Let whatever my royal aunt wishes be done.’ She replied: ‘May God bless it and make it good.’
First there was a large octagonal room with an octagonal tank in the centre, and again, in the middle of the reservoir, an octagonal platform on which were spread Persian (wilāyatī) carpets. (24b) Young men and pretty girls and elegant women and musicians and sweet-voiced reciters were ordered to sit in the tank.*The sequel to this order follows later.
The jewelled throne which my lady had given for the feast was placed in the fore-court of the house, and a gold-embroidered divan*tūshāk, (?) anglice, squab. was laid in front of it, (on which) his Majesty and dearest lady sat together.
On her right sat her paternal aunts, the daughters of Sult̤ān Abū-sa'īd Mīrzā:
1.Translator's numbering. For details as to each woman Cf. Appendix s.n. Fakhr-jahān Begam.
2. Badī'u-l-jamāl Begam.
3. Āq*This epithet, the Fair, is given to several persons, not all women; and in some instances the true name is also known e.g., Yasīn-daulat Sult̤ān, Kāmrān's son-in-law, and Salīqa, daughter of Sult̤ān Aḥmad Mīrzā. Begam.
4. Sult̤ān Bakht Begam.
5. Gūhar-shād Begam.
6. Khadīja Sult̤ān Begam.
Upon another cushion sat our paternal aunts, the sisters of his Majesty, Firdaus-makānī:
7. Shahr-bānū Begam.
8. Yādgār Sult̤ān Begam.
(N.B.—Other guests of the right follow).
9. 'Āyisha Sult̤ān Begam, daughter of Sult̤ān Ḥusain Mīrzā.
10. Ulugh Begam, daughter of Zainab Sult̤ān Begam, a paternal aunt of his Majesty.
11. 'Āyisha Sult̤ān Begam.
12. Sult̤ānī Begam, daughter of Sult̤ān Aḥmad Mīrzā, paternal (great-) uncle of his Majesty*The words used of Sult̤ānī do not grammatically apply to 'Āyisha, but I believe she is also a daughter of Sult̤ān Aḥmad Mīrzā and is Bābar's first wife, who left him under the influence of an elder sister, perhaps Salīqa Sult̤ān (Āq Begam). Salīqa married a son of Sult̤ān Maḥmūd Mīrzā, and may have acted under the evil impulses of the family quarrels which did so much to embitter, if also to stimulate, Bābar's early ambitions. and mother of Kilān Khān Begam. (25a)
13. Bega Sult̤ān Begam, daughter of Sult̤ān Khalīl Mīrzā, paternal (grand-)uncle of his Majesty.
14. Māham Begam.*This is not 'my lady,' whose death has been already recorded.
15. Begī Begam, daughter of Ulugh Beg Mīrzā Kābulī, paternal (grand-)uncle of his Majesty.
16. Khānzāda Begam, daughter of Sult̤ān Mas'ūd Mīrzā; on her mother's side, grand-daughter of Payanda Muḥam-mad Sult̤ān Begam, paternal (grand-)aunt of his Majesty.
17. Shāh Khānam, daughter of Badī'u-l-jamāl Begam (No. 2.).
18. Khānam Begam, daughter of Āq Begam (No. 3.).
19. Zainab Sult̤ān Khānam, daughter of Sult̤ān Maḥmūd Khān, eldest maternal (grand-)uncle of his Majesty.
20. Muḥibb Sult̤ān Khānam, daughter of Sult̤ān Aḥmad Khān, — known as Ilācha Khān, the younger maternal uncle of the elder*kilān; perhaps, great. Emperor (Bābar).
21. Khānish, sister of Mīrzā Ḥaidar and daughter of (a) maternal (great-)aunt of his Majesty.
22. Bega Kilān Begam.*Probably the daughter of Sult̤ān Maḥmūd Mīrzā and mother of Shād Begam (No. 28.) by a son, Ḥaidar, of Sult̤ān Ḥusain Mīrzā.
23. Kīchak Begam.
24. Shāh Begam, mother of Dil-shād Begam, and daughter of Fakhr-jahān Begam (No. 1.), paternal (great-) aunt of his Majesty.
25. Kīchakna Begam.
26. Apāq (Āfāq) Begam, daughter of Sult̤ān Bakht Begam (No. 4.).
27. Mihr-līq (? Mihr-bānū) Begam, paternal aunt of his Majesty.
28. Shād Begam, grand-daughter of Sult̤ān Husain Mīrzā, and daughter of a paternal aunt of his Majesty (? No. 22.).
29. Mihr-angez Begam, daughter of Muz̤affar (Ḥusain) Mīrzā, and grandchild of Sult̤ān Ḥusain Mīrzā. (25b) They had great friendship for one another (? Shād and Mihr-angez), and they used to wear men's clothes and were adorned by varied accomplishments, such as the making of thumb-rings*Text zih-gīrī tarāshī, which might be experimentally rendered carving thumb-rings, a gentle art of the day. But if wa be inserted, each word would represent a separate accomplishment of the well-bred in knightly arts. These would be congenial to a lady who played polo (chaugān). Cf. Bābar's account of Ḥaidar's accomplishments (Ilminsky, 14, Merns., 13, P. de C., 22.), and Haidar's own recital in his prologue to the Tārīkh-i-rashīdī. I suggest to take tarāshī (a word not used by Babar or Ḥaidar) as equivalent to the fletchery (auq), or the 'making arrow-heads' (paikān), of Bābar. Another possible reading has been suggested to me by Mr. Beveridge (a)z hikīrī tarāshī, 'by cutting arrows.' Hikīrī is a Hindī name for cultivated reeds grown on low marshy grounds. (Wilson's Glossary, s.v., and Platt's Hindustānī Dict..) There is nothing improbable in Gul-badan's use of a Hindī word. Arrows were fashioned from these reeds and men-at-arms practised the art. Gujrāt reeds were exported for arrows to Persia. The omission of the alif of az is not infrequent in the MS. A few words on the zih-gīr find fit insertion here. It is a thumb-ring worn on the right hand as a protection against the fret of the bow-string both in drawing and release. Persians, like the Japanese and Mongols and Chinese, drew with the thumb. The zih-gīr is of eccentric thickness and unequal width, elongating on one side into a tongue. This elongation lies along the inner side of the thumb, and points towards the thumb-tip. In drawing, the thumb crooks round the string which pulls against the zih-gīr. The arrow is released by straightening the thumb, and the string then flies over the hard surface of the ring. The zih-gīr is of jade, crystal, ivory, brass, gold, etc.. Some are chased and carved, and some are jewelled. In December, 1898, a remarkable one was offered for sale at an auction in Edinburgh of Lord Dalhousie's collections and the jewels of his daughter, Lady S. G. Brown (Connemara). It is cut from a single emerald, and inscribed: 'Jihat zihgīr shāh-i-shāhān Nādir ṣāḥib-qirān bar taskhīr-i-hind az jawāhar-khāna intikhāb shud' ('Selected for a thumb-ring for the king of kings and lord of happy conjunction Nādir, from the jewel-room on the conquest of Hind'). An interesting account of Persian archery is included in the 'Book of Archery,' G. Agar Hansard (Lond., 1840.). It, however, calls the zih-gīr, safn. safn is the rough skin of a fish or lizard which is used to smooth the arrow-shafts. (Cf. Lane's Ar. Diet..) and arrows, playing polo, and shooting with the bow and arrow. They also played many musical instruments.
30. Gul Begam.
31. Fauq Begam.
32. Khān (? Jān) Begam.
33. Āfroz-bānū Begam.
34. Āgha Begam.
35. Fīroza Begam.
36. Barlās Begam.
There were other begams, very many, adding up altogether to ninety-six stipendiaries. There were also some others.
After the Mystic Feast (938 H.) came Mīrzā Hindāl's wedding-feast (Jauhar, 944 H.). Some of the begams already named went away,*Ba wilāyatī. (?) to Kabul and other outside places. and (of those) some had sat at the right hand in that assembly (i.e., the Mystic Feast).*Perhaps this is an explanation of the paucity of right-hand wedding-guests.
Of our begams:
37. Āgha (Āghā,—passim, āgha), Sult̤ān āghācha, mother of Yādgār Sult̤ān Begam.
38. Ātūn māmā.
39. Salīma.
40. Sakīna.
41. Bībī Ḥabība.
42. Ḥanīfa Bega.
And the others who had sat*(?) At the Mystic Feast. Its left-hand guests have not been specified. There are no repetitions of names, although the list seems to give the guests at both feasts. Perhaps down to and including No. 36 the names are of begams who were at the first feast, and then went away. Then come ' our begams ' of the right, whose home was near Humāyūn, and who were at both feasts. at the Emperor's left on embroidered divans.
43. Ma'ṣūma Sult̤ān Begam.
44. Gul-rang Begam.
45. Gul-chihra Begam.
46. This insignificant one, the broken Gul-badan.
47. 'Aqīqa Sult̤ān Begam.
48. Ājam, our mother, who was Dil-dār Begam.*Cf. 236 n.
49. Gul-barg Begam.
50. Bega Begam. (26a)
51. Māham's nanacha.
52. Sult̤ānam, the wife of Amīr (Niz̤āmu-d-dīn) Khalīfa.
53. Alūsh Begam.
54. Nāhīd Begam.
55. Khurshīd kūka, and the children of my royal father's foster-brothers.
56. Afghānī āghācha.
57.*Nos. 57 and 58 are, perhaps, the two Circassians whom Shah Tahmasp sent as a gift to Bābar (Mems., 347.). Gul-nār is named in Abū 'l-fazl's list of pilgrims who went with Gul-badan to Makka in 983H., and as being of Bābar's household. They (Nos. 57 and 58) are named also by Firishta. Gul-nār āghācha.
58. Nāz-gul āghācha.
59. Makhdūma āgha, the wife of Hindū Beg.
60. Fatīma Sult̤ān anaga, the mother of Raushan kūka.
61. Fakhru-n-nisā' anaga, the mother of Nadīm kūka.
62. The wife of Muḥammadī kūka.
63. The wife of Mu'yid Beg.
64. The kūkas of his Majesty: Khurshīd kūka.
65. Sharīfu-n-nisā' kūka.
66. Fatḥ kūka.
67. Rabī'a Sult̤ān kūka.
68. Māh-liqā kūka.
69. Our nurses (anaga).
70. Our kūkas.
71. The begams' people and the wives of the amīrs.
Those who were on the right.
73. Salīma Bega.
74. Bībī Neka.
75. Khānam āgha, daughter of Khwāja 'Abdu-l-lāh Marwārīd.
76. Nigār āgha, mother of Mughal Beg.
77. Nār Sult̤ān āgha.
78. Āgha kūka, wife of Mu'nim Khān.
79. Daughter of Mīr Shāh Ḥusain, (illegible) Bega.
80. Kīsak Māham.
81. Kābulī Māham.
82. Begī āgha.
83. Khānam āgha.
84. Sa'ādat Sult̤ān āgha.
85. Bībī Daulat-bakht.
86. Naṣīb āgha.
87. (Illegible) Kābulī.
Other begas and āghas, the wives of the amīrs, sat on this hand, and all were present at the marriage feast. (26b)
This was the fashion of the Mystic House: (there was) a large octagonal room in which they gave the feast, over against this a small room, also octagonal. In both every sort of profusion and splendour appeared. In the large octagonal hall was set the jewelled throne, and above and below it were spread out hangings (adṣaqahāī) embroidered with gold, and wonderful strings of pearls (shadhīhā) hung, each 1 1/2 yards (gaz) in length. At the end of each string (larī) were two glass globes. There had been made and hung some thirty or forty strings.
In the small room, in an alcove, were set a gilded bedstead and pān-dishes,*This word excites curiosity as to the time when Gul-badan's people learned to eat pān. and water-vessels and jewelled drinking-vessels, and utensils of pure gold and silver.
Facing west (was) the audience hall; facing east, the garden; on the third side and facing south, the large octagon; and on the side facing north, the small one. In these three houses were three upper rooms. One they named the House of Dominion,*As to this threefold classification, Elliot and Dowson, V., 119, may be consulted. and in it were nine military appurtenances, such as a jewelled scimitar and gilded armour, a broad dagger and a curved dagger, and a quiver, all gilt, and a gold-embroidered overmantle.*Six articles only are separately named, but the qūr (translated armour) may be taken in the sense given to it in the Āīn (Blochmann, 109.), and include four weapons, which makes the total the mystic nine. Cf. Āīn, l.c., and plates. (N.B. The numbering of the weapons [l.c. p. 110.] does not agree with that of the plates. Plate X. should be consulted.) (27a)
In the second room, called the House of Good Fortune, an oratory had been arranged, and books placed, and gilded pen-cases,*qalam-dān. Several such are to be seen at the S. K. M. They are boxes damascened or painted with pictures, about 10 inches by 3 inches, and contain writing implements. 'Gilded ' does not seem an appropriate epithet. Perhaps the dictionaries define imperfectly. and splendid portfolios,*juz-dān. Perhaps the beautiful book-covers of the day. Those having flaps might be called portfolios. and entertaining picture-books written in beautiful character.*muraqqa'.
In the third room, which they called the House of Pleasure, were set out a gilded bedstead and a coffer of sandal-wood, and all imaginable pillows. Then in front were spread specially choice coverlets,*nihālcha. Placed, I presume, over carpets. and before these table-cloths, all of gold brocade. Various fruits and beverages had been got ready, and everything for merriment and comfort and pleasure.
On the feast-day of the Mystic House, his Majesty ordered all the mīrzās and begams to bring gifts,*sāchaq. This word appears to have a special meaning of wedding-gifts, but Gul-badan uses it elsewhere more widely. and everyone did so. He said: ‘Divide the gifts into three heaps.’ They made three trays of ashrafīs and six of shāhrukhīs. One of ashrafīs and two of shāhrukhīs he gave to Hindū Beg and said: ‘This is the share of Dominion; give it to the mīrzās and chiefs and vazīrs and soldiers.’ (27b)
He gave in the same way to Mullā Muḥammad Farghārī (Parghālī) and said: ‘This is the share of Good Fortune. Give it to those who are eminent and respectable, and to theologians and religious men, to ascetics and graybeards, and dervishes and devotees, and the poor and the needy.’
Concerning one tray of ashrafīs and two of shāhrukhīs he said: ‘This is the portion of Pleasure. This is mine. Bring it forward.’ They did so. He said: ‘What need is there to count?’ First he himself vouchsafed his blessed hand and said: ‘Let them take to the begams on one small tray ashrafīs and on another shāhrukhīs. Let each person take her hands full.’ What was left, that is two trays of shāh-rukhīs ,—which may have been 10,000,—and all the ashrafīs, —about 2,000—he gave in largesse, and scattered*niṣār. Again a word which, like sāchaq, would seem to fit the marriage feast better than the accession. first before the walī 'u-n-ni' matān (beneficent seniors), and then to those present at the entertainment. No one received less than 100 or 150, and those in the tank especially received very much. (28a) His Majesty was pleased to say: ‘Dearest lady! if you approved, they might put water in the tank.’ She replied: ‘Very good,’ and went herself and sat at the top of the steps. People were taking no notice, when all at once (?) the tap was turned and water came. (28a) The young people got very much excited. His Majesty said: ‘There is no harm; each of you will eat a pellet of anise*shīt. The text has no points and would yield seb, apple ; but anise is the better remedy against cold. and a bit of comfit*ma'jūn any medical confection, but commonly an intoxicant. Here it may be some preventive of chill. and come out of there.’ Upon this, everyone who would eat the comfit came out quickly. The water was as high as their ankles. To end the story, everyone ate the comfit and all came out.
Then the viands of the feast were set forth, and robes of honour were put on,*It was now that 12,000 khil'ats are said to have been distributed. In this passage Gul-badan twice uses the expression sar u-pāī. Perhaps one might say that the 'young people' were given new clothes from head to foot, and so shake off the fetters of the rigid khil'at, sar u-pāī, and 'honorary dresses.' and gifts bestowed, and head-to-foot dresses given to the comfit-eaters and others.
On the margin of the tank was a room (tālār)*The dictionaries I have seen, explain tālār as a saloon built of wood and supported on four columns, and this is appropriate here. Le Strange and Haggard (Vazīr of Lonkurān) say, ' Alcove or chamber in which a ruler sits to give public audience and hear suitors.' It is raised above the level of the (e.g.) courtyard, so that petitioners are below the hakīm. Approaching this meaning is the 'throne' of the dictionaries. fitted with talc windows, and young people sat in the room and players made music. Also a woman's bāzār*Cf. Āīn, Blochmann, 276 ; Khushroz, or Day of Fancy Bāzārs. had been arranged, and boats had been decorated. In one boat was made (?) the semblance of six people (kasī) and six alcoves (kanj); in (another) an upper room, and below it a garden with amaranthus and cockscombs and larkspurs*nā-firmān, stubborn, (?) because they will break and not bend. Balfour (Cyclopaedia) and Forbes (Hind. Dict.) give larkspur ; Fallen, poppy. An account of the boats, etc., may be read in B.M. MS. Add. 30,774, where is a translation by Sir H. Elliott's munshī from Khwānd-amīr. and tulips. In one place there were eight boats, so that there were eight pieces.*parcha. Perhaps flower-gardens; perhaps Fr. pièce. Cf. Un appartement de deux, trois pièces.
In short, everyone was astonished and amazed who beheld what gift of contrivance the great God had bestowed on the blessed mind of his Majesty. (28b)
Sult̤ānam Begam (i.e., the bride) was a sister of Mahdī Khwāja.*Many difficulties gather round this name. Cf. Appendix s.n. Mahdī Khwāja. My father's brother-in law (yazna) had no child except Ja'far Khwāja, and there was no child (?) of Khān-zāda Begam).*The copyist has perhaps omitted one āka-janām. Dearest lady had taken care of Sult̤ānam as though she were her child. Sult̤ānam was two years old when Khānzāda Begam took charge of her. She (Khānzāda) loved her very much, and thought of her as a brother's child of her own. She made a most entertaining and splendid feast.
A kūshka*M. Quatremère uses this word twice with perhaps two meanings. (Notices et Extraits, XIV. 324, 325 and 406-8.) At p. 408 he translates it kiosques, and it seems to be a building. At pp. 324 and 406 he leaves it untranslated. (Here it may have the sense given by Gul-badan.) It is named amongst items prepared for ambassadors at a post-house. These are: 'kat, trône; bastar, estrade; ... kushka; jinlik; sandalī, siége,' etc. Gul-badan might intend to name a canopy or screen for a sleeping-place in a large room or a movable kiosk with sleeping comforts. and hangings (adṣaqa)*Cf. 226. and five divans and five pillows for the head (yīstūq), and one large pillow and two round ones (galūla); and girdles (qūshqa) and veils (naqāb), together with a tent*A word follows tent which I cannot make out. It resembles j-(h,ch)-l-gh (no vowels). … with three gold-embroidered cushions and head-to-foot dresses for a prince, with collar and bordering of gold embroidery, and bath-wrappers (faut̤a) and napkins (rūpāk) and embroidered towels (rūmāl) and an embroidered mantle (qūrposh) to be worn over the armour.
For Sult̤ānam Begam: nine jackets (nīm-tana)*nīm-tana, i.e., demi-corps. Like many of Gul-badan's words, this is marked by Steingass as 'modern colloquial.' Apropos of this, Dr. Fritz Rosen says in the preface of his Modern Persian Colloquial Grammar, that the Persian of Iran differs 'in every respect ' from the Persian of India. The Persian of Gul-badan allows one to feel at home with the vazīr of Lonkurān, and with Dr. Rosen's own book. Perhaps the difference he indicates is between the literary and colloquial. Gul-badan's Persian, however, is presumably that of contemporary Irān, and her teachers were probably Persian born. Dr. Rosen's remark appears to require some restriction. with garniture of jewelled balls,*tukma (dār), usually translated buttons; but the button is so associated with the button-hole as to suggest a fastening. A dressmaker might say 'ball-trimming.' Globular buttons were and are placed round the neck and hem of a boddice. The vazir of Lonkurān ordered a jacket with garniture of twenty-four gold buttons, smaller than a hen's and larger than a pigeon's. Vests trimmed with 'buttons' (Mems.) are repeatedly named by Bābar as gifts. one of ruby, one of cornelian, one of emerald, one of turquoise, one of topaz, and one of cat's-eye.
Again: of necklaces, nine; and one embroidered collar and bordering, and four short jackets*chār qartījī; a suggested rendering only. Johnson gives kartī (qartī) as a short boddice reaching to the hips, and the qar recurs in other words, having the sense of a body garment; e.g., qart̤aq, a short-sleeved jacket; qarza, a woman's vest. with ball-trimming (tukma-dār), and one pair of ruby earrings and another of pearls, three fans,*pankha. and one royal umbrella.
One dirakht and two khuṭb*I find no help as to these words in the dictionaries. My only suggestion as to their possible meaning is too slightly based to be of value. It is this: In the South Kensington Museum, Oriental Section, I have seen tall lamp-stands so shaped that they recall the Qut̤b pillar outside Dihlī. That such stands would be a part of good household furnishing the South Kensington Museum allows us to suppose. We have our 'tall lamps,' our 'pillar lamps,' and also our 'branched candlesticks,' which may be a term parallel to dirakht, a tree. and other furniture and effects, and household goods and chattels and workshops*kār-khānahā. These may be the kitchen and its plenishing; the goldsmith's, with his tools, furnaces, and appliances; the perfumer's, etc.. Cf. Āin, Blochmann, and Tār. Rash., E. & E., 470. of all sorts. (29a) Khānzāda Begam gave everything she had collected, and she arranged a feast such as had not been made for any other child of my royal father. She planned it all and carried it all out.
… nine tipūchāq horses, with jewelled and gold-embroidered saddles and bridles; and gold and silver vessels and slaves,*ghulāmān, which I have rendered slaves, because they were a gift. But I know no warrant for such servitude as is thus implied. Tūrkī and Circassian and Arūs (? Rūs) and Abyssinian,—of each (race) a royal gift of nine.
What my royal father's brother-in-law*yazna, which is explained by Vambéry and Steingass as 'husband of the king's sister.' Niz̤āmu-d-dīn Ahmad styles Mahdi Khwaja damdd, which Meninsky and Steingass explain as 'husband of the king's sister' and ' son-in-law.' I do not find yazna rendered son-in-law by any of the dictionaries. To read yazna brother-in-law of the king 'agrees with the detailed statement of Mahdī's relation to Bābar made by Bāyazīd bīyāt. Cf. Appendix, s.n. Khānzāda. (Mahdī Khwāja) gave to the mīrzā was a set of nine tipūchāq horses, with jewelled and gold-embroidered saddles and bridles; and gold and silver vessels, and two other sets of nine horses, baggage animals, with velvet saddles and bridles; and brocade and Portuguese cloth, and Tūrkī and Ḥabshī and Hindī slaves,—in all, three sets of nine; and three head of elephants.
In his Majesty's leisure after the feast came news that the vazīr of Sult̤ān Bahādur, Khurāsān Khān by name, had attacked Bayāna. His Majesty despatched Mīrzā 'Askarī, with several amīrs, Mīr Faqr-'ali Beg and Mīr Tardī Beg, etc.. These went to Bayāna and fought and defeated Khurāsān Khān.*Mīrzā Muqīm, Khurāsān Khān. (29b) The Emperor set out for Gujrāt shortly afterwards, in prosperity and safety. It was on the 15th of the revered Rajab 941H.*January 29th, 1535. Abu'l-faz̤l gives Jumāda I., 941H. (November, 1534) as the time for collecting the troops. Perhaps the begam's date is that of departure, a day liable to postponement when Humāyūn was in pleasant quarters. that he quite decided to go himself to Gujrāt. He set up his advance camp in the Gold-scattering Garden, and there spent a month while the forces were gathering in.
On court days, which were Sundays and Tuesdays, he used to go to the other side of the river. During his stay in the garden, ājam (Dil-dār Begam) and my sisters and the ladies (ḥaramān) were often in his company. Of all the tents, Ma'ṣūma Sult̤ān Begam's was at the top of the row. Next came Gul-rang Begam's, and ājam's was in the same place. Then the tent of my mother,*It may be that the copyist has transferred the words 'my mother' from a quite usual place, preceding or following the ājam of the previous sentence. They are inappropriate to Gul-barg Begam; at least, I have never seen them used to describe a brother's wife, and such I believe this Gul-barg to be. We know of a 'Bībī Gul-barg,' mentioned somewhat condescendingly (21a) by Māham Begam ; I incline to take Gul-barg there and here as Khalīfa's daughter, and the former wife of Mīr Shāh Ḥusain Arghūn. Cf. Appendix, s.n.. Gul-barg. Gul-barg Begam and of Bega Begam*This is, I think, Humāyūn's wife and the mother of 'Aqīqa. The object of Gul-badan's enumeration of the tents seems to be desire to show that Bābar's daughters and widow had places of honour higher than Humāyūn's family. and the others.
They set up the offices (kār-khānahā) and got them into order. When they had put up the pavilions (khaima) and tents (khar-gāh) and the audience tent (bār-gāh), the Emperor came to see the camp and the splendid set-out, and visited the begams and his sisters. As he had dismounted somewhat near Ma'ṣūma Sult̤ān Begam's (tent), he honoured her with a visit. All of us, the begams and my sisters, were in his society. (30a) When he went to any begam's or sister's quarters, all the begams and all his sisters used to go with him. Next day he came to the tent*khāna, lit., house. of this lowly person, and the entertainment lasted till the third watch*pahr. Gul-badan names the Hindūstanī division of time into watches on which her father had commented as being a novelty to himself. (Mems., 331.) of the night. Many begams were there, and his sisters, and ladies of rank (begahā) and of position (āghāhā), and other ladies (āghāchahā), and musicians and reciters. After the third watch his Majesty was pleased to command repose. His sisters and the begams made resting-places (takīa) in his presence.*It seems, as again later on, that they fell asleep where they were seated, on mattresses and provided with pillows.
Bega Begam woke (us) up, and said: ‘It is time for prayers.’*The early morning prayers, about which the opinion is expressed that prayer is better than sleep. His Majesty ordered water for ablution*waz̤ū ablution before prayers. Cf. Hughes, Dict, of Islām. made ready where he was, and so the begam knew that he was awake. She began a complaint, and said to him: ‘For several days now you have been paying visits in this garden, and on no one day have you been to our*From what follows, Gul-barg would seem to be the fellow -sufferer. house. Thorns have not been planted in the way to it. We hope you will deign to visit our quarters also, and to have a party and a sociable gathering there, too. How long will you think it right to show all these disfavours to us helpless ones? We too have hearts. Three times you have honoured other places by visits, and you have run day and night into one in amusement and conversation.’ (30b)
When she had finished, his Majesty said nothing, and went to prayers. At the first watch of the day he came out and sent for his sisters and the begams, and for Dil-dār Begam, and Afghānī āghācha, and Gul-nār āghācha, and Meywa-jān and Āghā-jān, and the nurses (anagahā). We all went, and he said not a word, so everyone knew he was angry. Then after a little he began: ‘Bībī, what illtreatment at my hands did you complain of this morning?’ and: ‘That was not the place to make a complaint. You all (shumā) know that I have been to the quarters of the elder relations (walī'u-n-ni'matān) of you all (shumāyān). It is a necessity laid on me to make them happy. Nevertheless, I am ashamed before them because I see them so rarely. It has long been in my mind to ask from you all a signed declaration (sijlī), and it is as well that you have brought me to the speaking-point. I am an opium-eater. If there should be delay in my comings and goings, do not be angry with me. Rather, write me a letter, and say: “Whether it please you to come or whether it please you not to come, we are content and are thankful to you.”’
Gul-barg Begam wrote to this effect at once, and he settled it with her.*ba Gul-barg Begam daryāftand. Bega Begam insisted a little, saying: ‘The excuse looked worse than the fault.*A familiar proverb. Cf. Steingass, 840, s.v. 'azr. (31a) We complained in order that your Majesty might lift up our heads by your favour. Your Majesty has carried the matter to this point! What remedy have we? You are Emperor.’ She wrote a letter and gave it to him, and he made it up*daryāftand. Gul-badan frequently uses this word as meaning to embrace and to greet, a sense not mentioned by Johnson or Steingass. The ba of the earlier instance (note 1.) induced me to give it the notion of coming to an understanding. Cf. 16b. with her also.
On February 18th, 1534 (Sha'bān 14th, 941 H.), he set out from the Gold-scattering Garden and marched for Gujrāt, to fall upon Sult̤ān Bahādur. They confronted one another at Manḥasūr (Mandsūr); a battle was fought, and Sult̤ān Bahādur, on his defeat, fled to Champānīr. Then his Majesty resolved to pursue him. Sult̤ān Bahādur left Champānīr and went towards Aḥmadābād.*Taking his treasure with him, Sult̤ān Bahādur fled before Humāyūn to Champānīr, Ahmadābād, Cambay and Diu. His Majesty took the country of Aḥmadābād also, and portioned out the whole of Gujrāt to his men. Aḥmadābād he bestowed on Mīrzā 'Askarī,*Humāyūn's half-brother. Bahrūch on Qāsim Ḥusain Sult̤ān,*Grandson, through a daughter, of Sult̤ān Ḥusain Mīrzā Bāyqrā; on his father's side an Uzbeg. and Patan on Yādgār-nāṣir Mīrzā.*Humāyūn's first cousin, the son of Bābar's half-brother Nāṣir. He was a posthumous child. Mr. Beveridge has drawn my attention to the fact, of which there are other examples, that he is called Yādgār, a souvenir, of Nāṣir, his father.
He himself, with a small following, went from Champānīr to visit Kanbāyat*This excursion preceded the allotment of fiefs. Gul-badan's way of putting the pursuit of Bahādur is borne out by some other writers. This was Humāyūn's first sight of the sea, and the spectacle seems to have been more in her mind than was Bahādur. Ākbar's first sight of the sea is also commemorated in the histories. (Cambay). A few days later there came a woman with news, and said: ‘Why are you sitting here? The men of Kanbāyat have gathered, and will fall upon you unless your Majesty rides off.’ The royal amīrs attacked the rabble,*Abū'l-fazl calls them Bhils and Gawārs. (H.B. I. 309.) They were rude tribesmen acting in Bahādur's interests. Maternal affection saved the small royal camp. The 'woman' had a son a slave in it, and she purchased his freedom by revealing the designs of her fellow-tribesmen. Although Cambay had not furnished the assailants, it paid in fire and pillage for the attack. It lay near, was an enemy's town, and such an incident as the onslaught of the Bhils would not allow of fine distinction of race and person. and got them into their hands and cut them in pieces. (31b)
His Majesty then went to Baroda, and from there towards Champānīr.*Behind this dull statement is a stirring episode. Humāyūn took Champānīr after a four months' blockade, by night escalade of a rock so nearly perpendicular that seventy or eighty iron spikes had to be driven in to allow ascent. Thirty-nine men climbed up. Bairām Khān was the fortieth, Humāyūn the forty-first of the three hundred who mounted. Such a Bābar-like episode makes regret the keener that Humayun's life was ruined and stained by his slavery to a drug. The loot of Champānīr was enormous; it had been regarded as impregnable, and was full of treasure. It was taken in 1536 (943 H.). Humāyūn now relapsed into an evil mood of feasting and indolence. He remained near Champānīr, and affairs entered on a recurrent phase. There was complete relaxation of discipline. Gul-badan's 'we had settled down' (nishista budīm) allows the inference that she and other ladies had joined the camp. A later instance will be found of the inopportune presence of women and children with the army. But it may mean merely 'we were comfortably awaiting events' in Āgra. We had settled down, when there was a tumult, and Mīrzā 'Askarī's people left Aḥmadābād and came to the Emperor. They represented to him that Mīrzā 'Askarī*He was thinking of having the khut̤ba read in his own name in Āgra. Such an aspiration in Humāyūn's brothers was encouraged by his own abdications of sovereignty. and Yādgār-nāṣir Mīrzā had conspired, and wished to go to Āgra. On hearing this, he himself was forced to go; he left the important affairs of Gujrāt [(?) its pacification], and turned away and went to Āgra. Here he spent as much as a year.*A fatal year which allowed Shīr Khān to gather force. Gul-badan's recital of the historical events of this time has no value.
He then went to Chanāda (Chunār), and took it,*Shīr Khān. and also Benares. Shīr Khān was in Charkanda,*Jhārkand. and made an offer of service, saying: ‘I am your old servant. Give me a place with a fixed boundary in which I may establish myself.’
His Majesty was considering this, when the king of Gaur Bangāla*Sayyid Maḥmūd Shāh. He had been defeated by Shīr Khān. (Cf. Erskine's notes on Stewart's Jauhar, B. M. Add. 26,608, p. 12.) came wounded and a fugitive. For this reason he gave no attention (to Shīr Khān), but marched towards Gaur Bangāla. Shīr Khān knew that his Majesty had gone there, and went himself also with a large detachment of horse, and joined his son (Jilāl Khān), who was in Gaur with his servant Khawāṣ Khān. Shīr Khān sent them out, and said: ‘Go and fortify Garhī.’*'The gate of Bengal,' a pass between it and Bihār, and which has a hill on one hand and the Ganges on the other. It is the Teria garhī or Tilia gulley of our maps. (32a)
Both came and occupied Garhī. His Majesty had written to Jahāngīr Beg: ‘Advance a stage, and go up to Garhī.’ There was fighting, and Jahāngīr Beg was wounded and many men were slain.
When the Emperor had spent three or four days in Kohlgānū (Colgong), it became advisable for him to march on and halt near Garhī. He marched forward, and when he came near Garhī, Shīr Khān and Khawāṣ Khān fled by night, and he entered Garhī next day. Thence he went to Gaur Bangāla, and took it.
He was nine months in the far-away country of Gaur, and named it Jannatābād.*City of Paradise. The demoralizing effects of life in Gaur were felt under Akbar. Humāyūn, with his empire crumbling around him, was now (as Jauhar testifies) 'so much devoted to pleasure and sensual enjoyment that, after the first month, he was never seen, as he was always shut up in a private apartment of the palace.' Naturally, Gul-badan's next item of narrative is of rebellion, this time by her own brother, Hindāl.
He was comfortably and safely in Gaur, when news came that some of the amīrs had deserted and joined Mīrzā Hindāl.*He was only nineteen, and the crown may well have seemed at anyone's service. The date is 1538 (945H.). Humāyūn in Gaur was cut off from his capital by Shīr Khān.
Khusrau Beg*Bābar first names him in 1507-8 as coming from Harāt. There are two men named Khusrau kūkaltāshby Bābar, but they were not contemporaries. One died in 1502-3, before the other came upon the scene. (kūkaltāsh) and Zahīd Beg*Husband of the sister of Bega Begam, Humāyūn's wife. He was put to death by Mīrzā Kāmrān at Ghaznī in 1547. and Sayyīd Amīr*Sayyid Nūru-d-dīn Mīrzā, the father of Salīma Sult̤ān Begam, and the husband of a daughter of Bābar. Cf. App. s.n.. Gul-rang. paid their respects to the mīrzā, and said: ‘The Emperor has gone comfortably far away, and the mīrzās, Muḥammad Sult̤ān Mīrzā and his sons, Ulugh Mīrzā and Shāh Mīrzā, have again raised their heads,*Hindāl had recently defeated them. (Erskine, II. 89 et seq..) For causes of Hindāl's rebellion, and for Bega Begam's part in it, see Erskine's Jauhar, l.c., p. 13. and continually keep showing themselves in company.’ (32b)
Just at this time the asylum of shaikhs, the servitor(bandagī) Shaikh Bahlūl, hid*Some words seem to be omitted, e.g., 'was accused of.' Gul-badan cannot have believed the accusation. Perhaps, however, her long friendship with Nūru-d-dīn's daughter Salīma would make her pen discreet in blaming his murder of the shaikh. armour and horse-accoutrements and military stores in an underground place, and would have loaded them on carts and sent them to Shīr Khān and the mīrzās.*The rebels mentioned on p. 23b. Mīrzā Hindāl would not believe it, so Mīrzā Nūru-d-dīn Muḥammad was sent to inquire into the matter. He found the armour and accoutrements, and had Bandagī Shaikh Bahlūl killed.*For the probable facts, Cf B. & H., II. 162 et seq. The Emperor, on hearing news of it, set out for Āgra.
He was coming by that side of the Ganges (i.e., the left bank) opposite Mungīr, when his amīrs represented: ‘You are a great king! Return by the way you came, lest Shīr Khān should say: “Forsaking his road of advance, he took another of retreat.”’*It was Mu'yid Beg Duladai Barlās who urged this foolish point of honour, and who thus led to the disaster at Chausa. He was a cruel man as well as one ignorant in military matters. He was a favourite of Humāyūn, but the Emperor's followers rejoiced when he died. The Emperor returned to Mungīr, and brought many of his people and his family by boat up the river as far as Ḥajīpūr-Patna.
When he went (to Bengal) he had left Qāsim (Ḥusain Sult̤ān Uzbeg) there. Now came news of Shīr Khān's approach. Whenever there was fighting, the royal troops won.
Just now Bābā Beg (Jalāīr) came from Jaunpūr and Mīrak Beg from Chanāda (Chunār), and Mughal Beg from Oude. (33a) As these three amīrs joined the Emperor, corn became dear.
Then,—such was God's will,—they had halted without precaution, when Shīr Khān came and fell upon them. The army was defeated, and many kinsmen and followers remained in captivity. His Majesty's own blessed hand was wounded. Three days he remained in Chunār, and then came to Araīl.*Gul-badan's brevity (natural enough even if she were more historic in method) is somewhat misleading. Mr. Erskine allows one to follow the misadventures which culminated in the defeat. This the rout at Chausa occurred near to where the Sōn falls into the Ganges and at Chūpat Ghat, on June 27th, 1539 (ṣafar 9th, 946H.). The statement of Humāyūn's visit to Chūnar, I do not find elsewhere. Chūnar was then held by royalists. The Araīl named is presumably that near Allāhābād.
When his Majesty reached the river's bank, he stopped, bewildered as to the crossing, and said: ‘How to cross without boats!’ Then came the rāja (Bīrbahān) with five or six horsemen and led him through a ford. For four or five days his people were without food or drink. At last the rāja started a bāzār, so that the people of the army lived some days in comfort and repose. The horses also were rested. Many men who were on foot bought fresh mounts. In short, the rāja rendered fitting and dutiful services. Later on his Majesty gave him leave to go, and at the hour of mid-day prayer came himself, safely and comfortably, to the bank of the Jamna. The army crossed at a ford they had found. A few days later they came to Karra, where corn and grass were plentiful, because it was his Majesty's own country. (33b)
When his people were rested, he went on to Kalpī, and then marched on to Āgra.
Before his arrival in Āgra, he heard news that Shīr Khān was coming (from) the direction of Chausa. Great anxiety fell upon his people.
Of many who were in that rout (at Chausa) there was never heard, in any way soever, news or sign. Amongst them were 'Āyisha Sult̤ān Begam, daughter of Sult̤ān Ḥusain Mīrzā*Wife of Qāsim Ḥusain Sult̤ān Uzbeg, whose timely arrival gave Bābar so much satisfaction. (13a.) Qāsim had been Governor of Patna (326), but, from the circumstance of his wife's being at Chausa, would seem to have left it with Humāyūn. (Bāyqrā); and Bachaka, who was a khalīfa of my royal father;*A Bachaka, who was a khalīfa of Babar's household, escaped with him from Samarqand in 1501 (907H.), some thirty-eight years before the Chausa episode. Khalīfa, as applied to a woman, denotes a servant or slave who exercises surveillance over other women-servants, and has charge of rooms, an upper maid- servant. and Bega-jān kūka; and 'Aqīqa Begam;*Bega Begam's daughter, who will have been about eight years old. and Chānd Bībī, who was seven months with child, and Shād Bībī, all three*Perhaps the copyist has omitted a name; perhaps, as a child of Humāyūn, 'Aqīqa is 'of the ḥaram.' (sic) of whom were of his Majesty's ḥaram. Of these several people, he never heard even a word, as to whether they were drowned or what became of them. In spite of all possible inquiry and search, what had become of them was never found out.
His own illness*From his wound or from distress of mind. The 'forty days' suggest the ceremonial term of mourning. dragged on for forty days, and he then grew better.
At this time, when Khusrau Beg (kūkultāsh), and Diwāna Beg, and Zahīd Beg, and Sayyid Amīr, had come on in advance of his Majesty, news again arrived that the mīrzās, Muḥammad Sult̤ān Mīrzā and his sons, had come to Kanauj. (34a)
After Shaikh Bahlūl's murder, Mīrzā Hindāl went to Dihlī. He took with him Mīr Faqr-'alī and other well-wishers to frustrate and disperse the mīrzās. The mīrzās fled, and came into the Kanauj quarter. Mīr Faqr-'alī brought Mīrzā Yādgār-nāṣir to Dihlī. As there was neither friendliness nor confidence between Mīrzā Hindāl and Mīrzā Yādgār-nāṣir, Mīrzā Hindāl, when Mīr Faqr-'alī made this mistake, sat down out of sheer annoyance and besieged Dihlī.*The whole of the above paragraph it would be safest to hide with Hindāl under his sister's charitable cloak. For a historical account of the time, see B. & H., II., Book IV., Cap. IV.
When Mīrzā Kāmrān heard these things, there arose in him also a desire of sovereignty. With 12,000 fully equipped horsemen he went to Dihlī. Mīr Faqr-'alī and Mīrzā Yādgār-nāṣir closed the city gates on his approach. Two or three days later, Mīr Faqr-'alī, having made an agreement, went and saw Mīzrā Kāmrān. He represented: ‘The news heard of his Majesty and Shīr Khān may be so and so.*Clearly the ill news of the rout at Chausa. Mīrzā Yādgār-nāṣir, from thought of his own interest, does not wait on you. The advisable course at this crisis is, that you should lay hands on Mīrzā Hindāl, go to Āgra, and not think of establishing yourself in Dihlī.’ (34b)
Mīrzā Kāmrān gave heed to Mīr Faqr-'alī's words, and bestowed on him a head-to-foot dress. He then seized Mīrzā Hindāl and came to Āgra. He visited the tomb of Firdaus-makānī,*Bābar's remains then had not been conveyed to Kabul in 1539. saw his mother and sisters, and halted in the Rose-scattering*(?) Gold-scattering. Mr. Erskine calls it so, and it is likely to be that already mentioned by Gul-badan more than once. Garden.
At this time Nūr Beg brought word of his Majesty's coming.*Retreating from Chausa. As Mīrzā Hindāl was excluded from the presence because of the murder of Shaikh Bahlūl, he went to Alwar.*His own jāgīr.
A few days after his Majesty's arrival, Mīrzā Kāmrān came from the Rose-scattering Garden and paid his respects to him. We paid our respects on the evening of the day he came. He took notice of this insignificant one, and was kindly pleased to say: ‘I did not know you at first, because when I led the army (whose footprints are victorious)*z̤afr-az̤ar. This, after Chausa, can only be a precative of Gul-badan's. to Gaur Bangāla, you wore the high cap (t̤āq), and now when I saw the muslin coif*This change appears to indicate that Gul-badan, who is about eighteen or nineteen years old, has been married. The Persian has lachaq qaṣāba, without conjunction. Steingass and Johnson describe the lachaq as a square mantle worn by women, doubled into a triangle, but here the description given in the Burhān-i-qātī' is more apropos, i.e., a square of stuff folded cornerwise and put upon the head so that the corners tie under the chin. It is often (l.c.) elaborately embroidered in gold. Qaṣāba appears to have the same meaning as lachaq. I did not recognise you. And oh, my Gul-badan, I used very often to think of you, and was sometimes sorry, and said: “I do wish I had brought her!” But at the time of the disaster (fit̤rāt) I was thankful I had not, and I said: (35a) “Thank God I did not bring Gul-badan!” For although 'Aqīqa*Cf. p. 33b. was young, I have been consumed by a hundred thousand regrets and cares, and have said: “Why did I take her with the army?”’
A few days later he came to see my mother. He had with him the Holy Book. He commanded the attendants to retire*kināra kardand. This metaphor recalls the arrangement of carpets in Persian rooms, with the carpet proper in the centre, an upper end (sar-andāz) and borders (kināra). 'Go aside ' might be a good rendering. for awhile, and they rose and there was privacy. Then he said to ājam (Dil-dār Begam) and this insignificant one, and to Afghānī āghācha, and Gul-nār āghācha, and Nār-gul āghācha, and my nurse (anaga): ‘Hindāl is my strength*qūl, Mongolian, main body of an army. and my spear;*Ar. qanāt. the desirable light of my eyes, the might of my arm, the desired, the beloved. May what I do be right! What shall I say to Mīrzā Muḥammad Hindāl about the affair of my*Here and in the apostrophe to Gul-badan I have allowed the man to indicate the affection Humāyūn had for his half-sister and for the revered shaikh. It might be, however (as at 'Now there is no anger,' Cf. text), the simple first person. Shaikh Bahlūl? What was to be has been! Now there is no anger in my heart against Hindāl. If you do not believe it’ … He had lifted up the Holy Book when her Highness my mother, Dil-dār Begam, and this poor thing snatched it from his hand. All cried, ‘May what you do be right! Why do you say such things?’
Then again he spoke: ‘How would it be, Gul-badan, if you went yourself and fetched your brother, Muḥammad Hindāl Mīrzā?’ (35b) Her Highness, my mother, said: ‘This girlie (dukhtarak) is young. She has never made a journey (alone). If you approved, I would go.’ His Majesty said: ‘If I give you this trouble, it is because it is clearly incumbent on fathers and mothers to feel for their children. If you would honour him with a visit, it would be a healing-balm applied for us all.’
Then he sent Mīr Abū'l-baqā*B. & H., IL. s.n.. with her Highness my mother, to fetch Mīrzā Hindāl. At once on hearing this news: ‘She has come to see me!’ Muḥammad Hindāl Mīrzā made his mother happy by giving her honourable meeting. He came with her from Alwar, and paid his duty to his Majesty.*Hindāl was received in the presence of Kāmrān and other kinsmen. Humāyūn said to Kāmrān: 'You know who is to blame! Why did Hindāl rebel ?' Kāmrān passed on the question to Hindāl himself, who, with profound shame, pleaded that being young he had listened to bad advice, and begged forgiveness. (Erskine's notes on Stewart's Jauhar, B. M. Add. 26,608.) About Shaikh Bahlūl he said: ‘He used to send arms and military appurtenances to Shīr Khān. When this was ascertained, I killed the shaikh on account of it.’
To put it briefly: in a short time came news that Shīr Khān had come near Lakhnau.
In those days his Majesty had a certain servant, a water-carrier. (36a) As he had been parted from his horse in the river at Chausa and this servant betook himself to his help and got him safe and sound out of the current, his Majesty now seated him on the throne. The name of that menial person we did not hear, some said Niz̤ām, some said Sambal. But to cut the story short, his Majesty made the water-carrier servant sit on the throne, and ordered all the amīrs to make obeisance to him. The servant gave everyone what he wished, and made appointments. For as much as two days the Emperor gave royal power to that menial. Mīrzā Hindāl was not present at his court;*Lit., in that assembly. he had taken leave, and had again gone to Alwar with the intention of getting arms ready. Neither did Mīrzā Kāmrān appear. He was ill, and sent to say to his Majesty: ‘Gifts and favours of some other kind ought to be the servant's reward. What propriety is there in setting him on the throne? At a time when Shīr Khān is near, what kind of affair is this to engage your Majesty?’
In those days Mīrzā Kāmrān's illness increased amazingly. He became weak and so thin that his face was not in the least his own, and there was no hope of his life. (36b) By the Divine mercy he grew better. He suspected that the Emperor's mothers,*i.e., Babar's widows. by his Majesty's advice, had given him poison. His Majesty came to hear of this, and instantly went to see the mīrzā and swore that he had never had such a thought, nor given such an order to any one. Nevertheless, Mīrzā Kāmrān's heart was not purged. Afterwards he got worse, day after day, and he lost power of speech.
When news came that Shīr Khān had left Lakhnau, the Emperor marched towards Kanauj, and left Mīrzā Kāmrān in Āgra to act for him. In a few days the mīrzā heard that he had made a bridge of boats and crossed the Ganges. On this, he himself marched out of Āgra towards Lāhōr.*A treacherous defection.
We had settled down*The royal family, after the Emperor's and the mīrzā's departure. when he sent*Perhaps from his first halting-place outside the city. a farmān like a king's, and said: ‘You*Clearly Gul-badan. are commanded to go with me to Lāhōr.’ He must have said*Before either brother left Agra. to his Majesty about me something of this sort: ‘I am very ill and very miserable and lonely, and I have no one*i.e., of his kinsfolk, and especially of his women kinsfolk. to sympathize with me. (37a) If you will order Gul-badan Begam to go with me to Lāhōr, it will be a real favour and kindness.’ For his sake his Majesty will have said: ‘She shall go.’ Two or three days after the Emperor had gone towards Lakhnau, the mīrzā sent a farmān,*This, I think, is the one already named. in royal style, to the effect: ‘Most assuredly you will come with me.’ Then my mother must have said: ‘She has never travelled apart from us.’ He replied:*īshān farmudand. This seems to mean Humāyūn, and to refer the following speech back to the earliest discussion of the project of Gul-badan' s journey at the time Humāyūn was still in Āgra. The whole episode is confused in narrative. ‘If she has not travelled alone, do you also go with her.’ He sent as many as 500 troopers and trusty grooms, and both his foster-father and his foster-brother, and said (to my mother): ‘If she may not go with me (to Lāhōr), come all of you one stage.’ When one stage was reached, he began to declare, on his oath: ‘I will not let you go.’ Then he took me by main force, with a hundred weepings and complaints and laments, away from my mothers, and my own mother and my sisters, and my father's people, and my brothers, and parted us who had all grown up together from infancy.*It must be remembered that Gul-badan's husband, Khiz̤r Khwāja, was a brother of Āq Sult̤ān (Yasīn-daulat), Kāmrān's son-in-law, and Kamran may have had other motives than affection for desiring her presence, e.g., the attraction of her husband's ontingent.
I saw that the Emperor's command also was in the affair. I was helpless. (37b) I wrote a suppliant letter, saying: ‘I never expected your Majesty to cut off this insignificant one from your service, and to give her to Mīrzā Kāmrān.’ To this humble note he sent a compassionate answer (salām-nāma), to this effect: ‘I had no heart to part with you, but the mīrzā persisted, and was miserable, and begged very hard, and I was obliged to trust you to him. For just now there is important work*The opposition of Shīr Khān, soon to be closed at Kanauj. Gul-badan's enforced departure with Kāmrān saved her a painful and hazardous flight. on hand. God willing, I will send for you when it is settled.’
When the mīrzā was starting, many people, amīrs and traders and so on, made preparation with the intention of letting their wives and families march under his escort to Lāhōr. When we reached (the city) news came of a battle on the Ganges, and that defeat had befallen the royal army.*May 17th, 1540 (Muḥarram 10th, 947H.). Mīrzā Ḥaidar gives an admirable account of it as 'the battle of the Ganges.' Gul-badan's full brother, Hindāl, led the van at Kanauj, and defeated Shīr Khān's son, Jalāl. Hindāl was a successful general. 'Askarī, Kāmrān's full brother, was defeated by Khawās Khān.
At least there was this limit to misfortune,—his Majesty and his brothers came safely through the peril.*As at Chausa, so at Kanauj, Humāyūn was nearly drowned. Here he was saved by Shamsu-d-dīn Muḥammad of Ghaznī, whose wife, under the sobriquet of Jī-jī anaga, became a nurse of Akbar. Our other relations*They were convoyed by Hindāl. See infra. came from Āgra by way of Alwar to Lāhōr. (38a) Just now the Emperor said to Mīrzā Hindāl: ‘'Aqīqa Begam disappeared in that first interregnum (fitrat)*i.e., battle of Chausa. Fitna would read more easily here. Perhaps behind fitrat is the notion of relaxation in effort, or of an interval between two periods of good fortune. and I repented extremely, and said: “Why did I not kill her in my own presence?” Now, again, it is difficult to convey women with us.’ Mīrzā Hindāl answered: ‘What it would be to your Majesty to kill a mother and a sister, speaks for itself! So long as there is life in me, I will fight in their service. I have hope in the most high God, that,—poor fellow as I am,—I may pour out my life's blood for my mother and my sisters.’
Then the Emperor set out for Fatḥipūr (Sīkrī) with Mīrzā 'Askarī and Yādgār-nāṣir Mīrza and the amīrs who had come safely off the battlefield.*Amongst them was Ḥaidar Mīrzā, who describes the fugitives as ' broken and dispirited, and in a state heartrending to tell.' Sīkrī must have rubbed salt into their wounds, since it recalls Bābar's triumph. Their halting-place there was his garden, a token of his genius for living.
Mīrzā Hindāl sent on before him*The known enemy, Shīr Khān, was in the rear. With Hindāl's marriage-feast fresh in mind, one may give a thought to Sult̤ānam. She was probably of this party, since her husband's contingent was with Humāyūn, and he was not on his jāgīr of Alwar. her Highness his mother, who was Dil-dār Begam, and his own sister, Gul-chihra Begam, and Afghānī āghācha, and Gul-nār āghācha, and Nār-gul āghācha, and the amīrs' wives and families, etc.. He was marching along when the Gawārs pursued him in great numbers. (38b) Some of his troopers charged and defeated them. An arrow struck his horse.*Asp i-mubārik, (?) the horse which had the happiness to bear him. Perhaps asp is a mistake for some word to which 'blessed' would be a more fit adjective. There was much fighting and confusion. Having saved the helpless women from the bond of the Gawārs, he sent on (to Lāhōr) his mother and sister, and many of the amīrs' people, etc., and went to Alwar. Here he got together tents and pavilions and numerous requisites, and then started for Lāhōr. He arrived in a few days, and brought what was wanted for the princes and the amīrs.
His Majesty alighted in Khwāja Ghāzī's garden near Bībī Ḥāj-tāj.*Abū'l-fazl says that Hindāl's quarters were in Khwāja Ghāzī's garden, and Humāyūn's in Khwāja Dost munshī's. Bībī Haj, Bībī Tāj, Bībī Nār, Bībī Ḥūr, Bībī Gūhar, and Bībī Shābaz are said to have been daughters of 'Aqīl, brother of 'Alī (Muḥammad's son-in law). They were famous for piety and asceticism. After the murder of Imām Ḥusain at Kerbela, these ladies left Syria for India in obedience to a secret intimation. They alighted outside Lāhōr at the place named by Gul-badan and where their shrine now is. They converted many of the townspeople to their faith, and thus angered the, presumably Hindū, governor. He sent his son to command their departure, but the son fell under their influence, and remained near them. This still more angered his father, who went out against them and their followers with an armed force. The ladies prayed that their honour might be preserved, and they not be seen by strange men. Immediately the earth opened and swallowed them. (Khazīna'u-l-aṣfiyā, II. 407.) Every day there was news of Shīr Khān; and during the three months that the Emperor was in Lāhōr word was brought day after day: ‘Shīr Khān has advanced four miles,’ ‘six miles,’ till he was near Sirhind.
One of the amīrs was named Muz̤affar Beg. He was a Tūrkmān. The Emperor sent him with Qāzī 'Abdu-l-lāh to Shīr Khān to say: ‘What justice is there in this? I have left you the whole of Hindūstān. Leave Lāhōr alone, and let Sirhind, where you are, be a boundary between you and me.” (39a) But that unjust man, fearless of God, did not consent, and answered: ‘I have left you Kābul. You should go there.’
Muz̤affar Beg marched at once, and sent on an express to say: ‘A move must be made.’ As soon as this message came, his Majesty set off. It was like the Day of Resurrection. People left their decorated places and furniture just as they were, but took with them whatever money they had. There was thankfulness to God, because mercifully a ford was found across the Lāhōr water (Rāvī) where everyone crossed. His Majesty halted a few days on the river's bank. Then an ambassador came from Shīr Khān. The Emperor had decided to see him next morning, when Mīrzā Kāmrān made a petition, saying: ‘To-morrow there will be an entertainment, and Shīr Khān's envoy will be present. If I may sit on a corner of your Majesty's carpet, so that there may be distinction between me and my brothers, it will be a cause of my exaltation.’*For an account of Kāmrān's odious and fruitless treachery see B. & H., II. 200 et seq.. The meaning of his message to Humāyūn is not clear to me. Perhaps he wished to show the envoy that he was not on the level of Hindāl and 'Askarī, but able to claim recognition as a ruler and as Humāyūn's equal. Perhaps it was a hint to Humāyūn that he must recognise Kāmrān's equality in the lands in which the latter had been supreme while he himself ruled in Dihlī. At this time Humāyūn was strongly advised to put Kāmrān to death. He refused, but later on and after a dreary waste of good nature, his filial piety had to yield to the common-sense of his victimized followers and allow the blinding.
Ḥamīda-bānū Begam says it was his Majesty who wrote and sent the following verse to the mīrzā.*At the time when the verse was written Hamīda was not married. The discussion in 1587 (circa) of a 'point' between the ladies is a living touch to the old MS.. Which was likely to be right, Hamīda who might later have heard the story from her husband, or Gul-badan who was in Lāhōr? Gul-badan puts the difference of opinion gently but does not surrender, and leaves her readers to draw their own inferences. I had heard that he sent it to Shīr Khān by the envoy. This is the verse:
‘Although one's image be shown in the mirror,
It remains always apart from one's self.’ (39b)
‘It is wonderful to see one's self in another form:
This marvel will be the work of God.’
When Shīr Khān's ambassador arrived he paid his respects.
The Emperor's blessed heart was cast down. He fell asleep in a sad mood, and saw in a dream a venerable man, dressed in green from head to foot and carrying a staff, who said: ‘Be of good cheer; do not grieve;’ and gave his staff into the royal hand. ‘The most high God will give you a son who shall be named Jalālu-d-dīn Muḥammad Akbar.’ The Emperor asked: ‘What is your honourable name?’ He answered: ‘The Terrible Elephant,*Zinda-fīl. Aḥmad of Jām;’ and added: ‘Your son will be of my lineage.’*Humāyūn was of the lineage of Aḥmad of Jām through his mother Māham. (A. N., Bib. Ind., ed. 1. 121.) To give force to the prophecy, however, the coming child's mother had to be of the same descent, since Humāyūn's claim to rank as of the saint's lineage required no prophetic announcement. Indeed this story seems to cast doubt on that claim. Akbar's mother, Ḥamīda, was of the line of Aḥmad of Jām. So, too, was Bega (Ḥājī) Begam. Another of the same family was Bābū or Bānū agha, wife of Shihābu-d-dīn Aḥmad of Nishāpūr.
In those days Bībī Gūnwar*To give value to Ahmad's prophecy, Bībī Gūnwar ought also to have traced back to him. She does not seem to have been a woman of rank. The girl now born was at least the third child of Humāyūn, there having been Al-aman and 'Aqīqa, children of Bega Begam and now both dead. was with child. Everyone said: ‘A son will be born.’ In that same garden of Dost munshī and in the month of Jumāda'u-l-awwal, a daughter was born whom they named Bakhshī-bānū.
At this time his Majesty appointed Mīrzā Ḥaidar to take Kashmīr. Meantime, news was brought that Shīr Khān was there. A wonderful confusion followed, and the Emperor decided to march off next morning. (40a)
While the brothers were in Lāhōr, they conferred and took counsel and asked advice, but they did not settle on any single thing. At last the news was: ‘Shīr Khān is here.’ Then, as there was no help for it, they marched off at the first watch of the day (9 a.m.).
The Emperor's wish was to go to Kashmīr, where he had sent Mīrzā Ḥaidar Kāshgharī; but news of the mīrzā's success had not yet come, and people counselled: ‘If your Majesty were to go to Kashmīr, and the country was not conquered at once, it would—with Shīr Khān in Lāhōr—be a very difficult time.’
Khwāja Kilān Beg*The well-known old servant of Bābar and now one of Kāmrān's chief amīrs. was in Sīālkōt, and disposed to serve his Majesty. With him was Mū'yid Beg, who wrote: ‘The khwāja greatly wishes to serve you and would come, but he has Mīrzā Kāmrān to consider. If your Majesty would come quickly, his help would be made easy in an excellent way.’ The Emperor at once took arms and equipment, and set out to go to the khwāja, and joined company with him and brought him along.*The begam's story here does not agree with that of Mr. Erskine's authorities. Mū'yid Beg is the ill-adviser of the march from Bengal to Chausa.
The Emperor was pleased to say: ‘With my brothers' concurrence, I shall go to Badakhshān. (40b) Let Kābul remain the fief of Mīrzā Kāmrān.’ But Mīrzā Kāmrān would not consent to (his Majesty's) going to Kābul,*Kāmrān may well have feared that Humāyūn would get no further than Kābul on his way to Badakhshān. and said: ‘In his lifetime the Emperor Firdaus-makānī gave Kābul to my mother (Gulrukh Begam). It is not right (for you) to go to Kābul.’
Then said his Majesty: ‘As for Kābul, his Majesty Firdaus-makānī often used to say, “My Kābul I will give to no one; far from it! Let none of my sons covet it. There God gave me all my children, and many victories followed its capture.” Moreover, this expression of opinion is recorded many times in his Wāqi'a-nāma. What was the good of my showing kindness to the mīrzā from civility and brotherliness, if he now keep on talking in this way!’
Let his Majesty talk as he would, pacifying and conciliating, the mīrzā resisted more and more. When he saw that there was a large following with Mīrzā Kāmrān, and that the mīrzā was in no way willing for him to go to Kābul, he had no resource but to move towards Bhakkar and Multān. Having arrived in Multān, he halted one day. (41a) A small quantity of corn was obtained in the fort and having divided that little amongst his men, he marched on till he came to the bank of a river which was seven rivers in one.*i.e., the Indus. The begam's ' seven ' is interesting. Cf. 'Sketch of the Hindūstānī Language,' C. J. Lyall, p.l n.. 'Hindo represents an earlier Hindau, being the modern Persian for the ancient Hendava, i.e., a dweller in the country of the sapta hindū (Sk. sapta sindhu), or "seven rivers," now called, with the omission of two (probably the Saraswati and Drishadwati or Ghaggar) the Panj-āb.' He stood distracted. There were no boats, and he had a large camp with him. Then there came word that Khawāṣ Khān,*A follower of Shīr Khān. with several amīrs, was coming up behind.
There was a Balūchī named Bakhshū (sic) who had forts and many men. His Majesty sent him a banner and kettledrums, and a horse, and a head-to-foot suit, and asked for boats and also for corn. After a time Bakhshū Balūchī got together and sent about a hundred boats, full of corn too, for the royal service,—a proper attention which pleased the Emperor very much. He divided the corn amongst his people, and crossed the water*The Gārā, near Uch. safe and sound. May mercy be shown to Bakhshū for his dutiful service!
After a weary journey, they reached Bhakkar at last. The fort is in the middle of the river and very strong. The governor, Sult̤ān Maḥmūd (Bhakkarī),*Foster-brother of Shāh Ḥusain Arghūn, and the man for whom Sidi 'Alī Reis negotiated terms with Humāyūn in 1555. had fortified himself in it. (41b) The Emperor alighted safe and well over against the fort, near which was a garden*A delightful garden, the Chār-bāgh of Rūhrī (Lūhrī), on the left bank of the Indus. Shāh Ḥusain felt no anxiety as to military operations after hearing that Humāyūn had camped here. Chār-bāgh seems to denote a royal and private garden. made by Mīrzā Shāh Ḥusain Samandar.*'A place in Hindūstān from which aloes are brought.' (Steingass, s.v..) Cf. Samandūrī, aloe-wood, of the Āin. (Blochmann 80.) Samandar seems an equivalent for Sind.
At length his Majesty sent Mīr Samandar to Shāh Ḥusain Mīrzā with this message: ‘We have come into your territory under compulsion. May your country be blessed to you! We shall not take possession of it. Would to Heaven you would yourself come and pay us your respects, and do us the service which is our due! We intend to go to Gujrāt, and should leave you your own country.’ By tricks and wiles, Shāh Ḥusain kept his Majesty as much as five months in Samandar; then he sent a person to wait on him, and to say: ‘I am arranging my daughter's wedding-feast, and I send (someone) to wait on you. I shall come (later).’ His Majesty believed him, and waited still three months. Sometimes there was corn to be had, sometimes not. The soldiers killed and ate their horses and camels. Then his Majesty sent again, by Shaikh 'Abdu-l-ghafūr,*Humāyūn's treasurer (mīr-i-māl) whose official functions must now have been of the least pressing. to ask: ‘How much longer will you be? What prevents you from coming? (42a) Things have come to such a pass that there is inconvenience, and many of my men are deserting.’ The reply was: ‘My daughter*The admirable Māh-chūchak who insisted upon accompanying the blinded Kāmrān to Makka. As her peer in compassion may be commemorated Chilma Beg kūka. (B. & H., II., 418.) is promised to Mīrzā Kāmrān, and a meeting with me is impossible. I could not wait on you.’
As at this time Mīrzā Muḥammad Hindāl crossed the river, some said he might be going to Qandahār.*He encamped at Pāt (text, Paṭr), about twenty miles west of the Indus and about forty miles north of Sehwān. Pāt is in the sarkār of Sīwīstān, a little to the east of the highroad to Hyderābād, and not far north of Meānī, the scene of Napier's victory of 1843. I am indebted to Major-General Malcolm R. Haig for the information that Pāt is 'now a ruin, having been destroyed in the latter part of the eighteenth century when two Kalhora chiefs of Sind called in the Afghāns to quell domestic troubles.' On hearing this his Majesty sent several people after him to make inquiry and to say: ‘It is reported that you plan going to Qandahār.’ When questioned, the mīrzā said: ‘People have given a wrong impression.’ On this the Emperor came*Leaving his troops to prosecute the siege of Bhakkar, and passing through Dārbila where was his cousin, Yādgār-nāṣir. From the wording it might be supposed that Gul-badan was with her mother in Pāt, but I believe she was in Kābul at this time. to see her Highness my mother.
The mīrzā's ḥaram and all his people paid their respects to his Majesty at this meeting. Concerning Ḥamīda-bānū Begam, his Majesty asked: ‘Who is this?’ They said: ‘The daughter of Mīr Bābā Dost.’ Khwāja Mu'az̤z̤am*Cf. Appendix, s.n. Ḥamīda-bānū. was standing opposite his Majesty, who said: ‘This boy will be one of my kinsmen (too?).’*(?) interrogative, but the preceding verb is guftand, and not pursī-dand. Of Ḥamīda-bānū he said: ‘She, too, is related to me.’ (42b)
In those days Ḥamīda-bānū Begam was often in the mīrzā's residence (maḥall). Another day when his Majesty came to see her Highness my mother, he remarked: ‘Mīr Bābā Dost is related to us. It is fitting that you should give me his daughter in marriage.’ Mīrzā Hindāl kept on making objections, and said: ‘I look on this girl as a sister and child of my own. Your Majesty is a king. Heaven forbid there should not be a proper alimony, and that so a cause of annoyance should arise.’*This looks like a side-glance at the wasted fortunes of royalty. No kingdom ! No revenues ! Whence then the dowry ? It is clear from the sequel that the important point was being pressed. Jauhar says that Ḥamīda had been already asked in marriage, but not betrothed or perhaps promised. Her objections to marry Humayun seem personal, and may indicate preference for another and dislike for him. She is said to have been fourteen years old and Humāyūn was thirty-three, an opium-eater, and much married already. Her objections, whatever their true basis, must have been strong or they could hardly have survived, for Gul-badan to record, through the many years of prosperity and proud motherhood which her husband's renewed sovereignty in India and her son's distinction secured to her. Behind Gul-badan' s story of the wooing of Ḥamīda there were doubtless many talks over 'old times' when the royal authoress was freshening her memory for her literary task, begun (it seems probable) when she was about sixty-five and Ḥamīda some few years younger.
His Majesty got angry, and rose and went away. Then my mother wrote and sent a letter, saying: ‘The girl's mother has even before this been using persuasion.*Mādar-i-dukhtar az īn ham peshtar nāz mīkanad. Perhaps, 'caressed the idea.' It is astonishing that you should go away in anger over a few words.’ He wrote in reply: ‘Your story is very welcome to me. Whatever persuasion you may use, by my head and eyes, I will agree to it. As for what they have written about alimony, please Heaven, what they ask will be done. My waiting eye is on the road.’ My mother fetched his Majesty, and on that day she gave a party. When it was over, he went to his own quarters. (43a) On another day he came to my mother, and said: ‘Send someone to call Ḥamīdā-bānū Begam here.’ When she sent, the begam did not come, but said: ‘If it is to pay my respects, I was exalted by paying my respects the other day. Why should I come again?’ Another time his Majesty sent Subḥān Qulī, and said: ‘Go to Mīrzā Hindāl, and tell him to send the begam.’ The mīrzā said: ‘Whatever I may say, she will not go. Go yourself and tell her.’ When Subḥān Qulī went and spoke, the begam replied: ‘To see kings once is lawful; a second time it is forbidden. I shall not come.’ On this Subḥān Qulī went and represented what she had said. His Majesty remarked: ‘If she is not a consort (nā maḥram), we will make her a consort (maḥram).’
To cut the story short: For forty days the begam resisted and discussed and disagreed. At last her highness my mother, Dil-dār Begam, advised her, saying: ‘After all you will marry someone. Better than a king, who is there?’ The begam said: ‘Oh yes, I shall marry someone; but he shall be a man whose collar my hand can touch, and not one whose skirt it does not reach.’ Then my mother again gave her much advice. (43b)
At last, after forty days (discussion), at mid-day on Monday (fault) Jumīdu-l-awwal (sic) 948H. (September, 1541), and in Pātr (sic), his Majesty took the astrolabe into his own blessed hand and, having chosen a propitious hour, summoned Mīr Abū'l-baqā and ordered him to make fast the marriage bond. He gave the mīr two laks of ready money for the dower*Perhaps the ladies romance a little here. Humāyūn was certainly at a loss for money now and later.(nikāḥāna), and having stayed three days after the wedding in Pātr, he set out and went by boat to Bhakkar.
He spent a month at Bhakkar and he sent Mīr Abū'l-baqā to Sult̤ān Bhakkarī. The mīr fell ill while away, and went to the mercy of God.*This is not a historic account of the death. He was sent to Yādgār-nāṣir and was shot while crossing the river on his return to Rūhrī by adherents of Shāh Ḥusain. His death caused great grief to Humāyūn. (B. & H., II., 222.)
His Majesty then gave Mīrzā Hindāl leave to go to Qandahār, and he dismissed Mīrzā Yādgār-nāṣir to his own place, Lār. He himself went towards Seāwān*At the end of September, 1541. Ḥindāl's leave is a sisterly gloss on his acceptance of an invitation to Qandahār given by its governor, Qarācha Khān.(Sehwān), which is six or seven days' journey from Tatta.*Semblance of relevance can be given to this statement only by reference to other writers. Humāyūn had intended to go to Tatta at this time, and was diverted from the journey by a slight success of arms. He then besieged Sehwān. Sehwān has a strong fort, in which was Mīr 'Alīka, a servant of his Majesty the Emperor.*Certainly not so, for 'Alīka was an Arghūn and follower of Shāh Ḥusain. Perhaps Gul-badan wrote or intended to convey that 'Alīka had served Bābar as once all the Arghūns had done. Perhaps she has confused the import of the story that Mir 'Alīka when sent by Shah Ḥusain to take command of Sehwān, actually passed through Humāyūn's lines and the bāzār without recognition as an enemy. There were several cannon, so no one could possibly go near. Some of the royal soldiers made trenches, and got near and gave him ('Alīka) advice, and said: (44a) ‘Disloyalty is not well at such a time,’ but Mīr 'Alīka did not agree with them. Then they made a mine and cast down a tower, but they could not take the fort. Corn became dear and many men deserted. The Emperor spent six or seven months there.
Mīrzā Shāh Ḥusain treacherously laid hands on the royal soldiers in all directions, and made them over to his people, and said: ‘Take them and throw them into the salt sea.’ Three*Text, thirty sīṣad. No wonder Humāyūn's force vanished! He is said to have left Hindūstān, i.e., Lāhor, with a following of 200,000. This presumably included Kāmrān's party, and was made up of soldiers and women, children, traders, servants, etc.. At this time Humāyūn had lost both Hindāl's and Yādgār-nāṣir's troops. or four hundred would be gathered into one place and flung into boats and thrown into the sea, till as many as 10,000 were cast forth.
*The narrative becomes much confused here. As after this there were few men even with the Emperor, (? Shāh Ḥusain) filled several boats with cannon and muskets, and came from Tatta against him. Sehwān is near the river. (? Mīr 'Alīka) hindered the coming of the royal boats and provisions, and sent to say: ‘(?) I am maintaining my loyalty. March off quickly.’ Having no remedy, the Emperor turned to Bhakkar.
When he came near and before he could reach it, Mīr Shāh) Ḥusain Samandar had sent word to Mīrzā Yādgār-nāṣir:(44b) ‘If the Emperor, when he is retreating, should come near Bhakkar,*The mīrzā was at Rūhrī and had not possession of the fort. Cf. B. & H., II., 226, for a good account of his treachery and credulity. do not let him in. Bhakkar may remain your holding. I am with you; I will give you my own daughter.’ The mīrzā believed him and did not allow the Emperor to enter the fort, but wished to make him go on, either by force or fraud.
His Majesty sent a messenger to say: ‘Bābā,*(?) ' My dear boy ' the Persian word of endearment. The relative position and ages of Humāyūn and Yādgār-nāṣir make 'father' inappropriate. you are as a son to me. I left you in my stead, so that you might help me in case of need. What you are doing is done by the evil counsel of your servants. Those faithless servants will be faithless to you also.’ Whatever his Majesty urged had no effect.*In this extremity Humāyūn turned his thoughts towards Makka. Then he said: ‘Very well! I shall go to Rāja Māldeo.*Rāja of Jūdpūr (Mārwār), who had proffered help. I have bestowed this country on you, but Shāh Ḥusain will not let you keep it. You will remember my words.’ Having said this to the mīrzā, the Emperor marched away by way of Jīsalmīr, towards Māldeo. He reached Fort Dilāwar (Dirāwal), on the rāja's frontier, a few days later. (45a) He stayed there two days. Neither corn nor grass was to be had. He then went to Jīsalmīr, and on his approach the rāja sent out troops to occupy the road, and there was fighting. The Emperor and some others went aside off the road. Several men were wounded: Alūsh*Var., Lūsh and Tarsh, all three names of such disagreeable import as to suggest that they are either nicknames or were bestowed to ward off evil influences. Perhaps ūlūs should be read. Cf. App. s.n.. Beg, brother of Shāhaṃ Jalāīr and Pīr Muḥammad the equerry, and Raushang the wardrobe-keeper, and some others.*Muqīm Harāwī, father of Niz̤āmu-d-dīn Aḥmad, took part in this engagement. At length the royal troops won and the infidels fled into the fort. That day the Emperor travelled 60 kos (cir. 120 miles), and then halted on the bank of a reservoir.
Next he came into Sītalmīr, where he was harassed all day till he reached Pahlūdī, a pargana of Māldeo. The rāja was in Jodhpūr, and sent armour and a camel's-load of ashrafīs, and greatly comforted his Majesty by saying: ‘You are welcome! I give you Bīkanīr.’ The Emperor halted with an easy mind, and despatched Atka Khān (Shamsu-d-dīn Ghaznarī) to Māldeo, and said: ‘What will his answer be?’*Presumably to Atka Khān's message from Humāyūn.
In the downfall and desolation in Hind, Mullā Surkh, the librarian, had gone to Māldeo, and had entered his service. (45b) He now wrote: ‘Beware, a thousand times beware of advancing. March at once from wherever you are, for Māldeo intends to make you prisoner. Put no trust in his words. There came here an envoy from Shīr Khān who brought a letter to say: “By whatever means you know and can use, capture that king. If you will do this, I will give you Nagōr and Alwar and whatever place you ask for.”’ Atka Khān also said when he came: ‘This is no time for standing.’ So at afternoon prayer-time the Emperor marched off. When he was mounting, they captured two spies and brought them bound before him. He was questioning them when suddenly they got their hands free, and one snatched a sword from the belt of Muḥammad Gird-bāz*(?) gird-bāzū, strong-limbed. and struck him with it, and then wounded Bāqī Guālīārī. The other at once unsheathed*Doubtful translation; az mayān yak kashīda. a dagger and faced the bystanders, wounded several and killed the Emperor's riding-horse. They did much mischief before they were killed. (46a) Just then there was a cry, ‘Māldeo is here!’ The Emperor had no horse fit for Ḥamīda-bānū Begam. He may have asked for one for her from Tardī Beg,*This excellent officer is frequently a scapegoat. Our begam, however, imputes her blame tentatively. For estimate of his character see B. & EL, I. and II., s.n.. Jauhar brings Eaushan Beg into a similar story of this terrible journey. who apparently did not give it. He then said: ‘Let the camel of Jauhar, the ewer-bearer, be got ready for me. I will ride it, and the begam may have my horse.’ It would seem that Nadīm*The husband of Māham anaga, Akbar's celebrated nurse. (E.A.S.J., January, 1899, art. Māham anaga, H. Beveridge.) His mother was Fakhru-n-nisā'. Cf. Gul-badan, 26a and 71a. Beg heard that his Majesty was giving his horse to the begam and thinking of riding a camel, for he mounted his own mother on a camel and gave her horse to the Emperor.
His Majesty took a guide from this place, and mounted and rode for 'Umrkōt. It was extremely hot; horses and (other) quadrupeds*Perhaps ponies only. Text, chārwā. kept sinking to the knees in the sand, and Māldeo was behind. On they went, thirsty and hungry. Many, women and men, were on foot. (46b)
On the approach of Māldeo's troops, the Emperor said to Īshān (Īsān)-tīmūr Sult̤ān and to Mu'nim Khān*Gul-chihra's husband. and a number of others: ‘You all come slowly, and watch the enemy till we have gone on a few miles.’ They waited; it grew night, and they missed their way.
All through that night the Emperor went on, and at dawn a watering-place was found. For three days the horses had not drunk. He had dismounted when a man ran in, shouting: ‘The Hindūs are coming up in numbers, mounted on horses and camels.’ Then the Emperor dismissed Shaikh 'Alī Beg (Jalāīr), and Raushan kūka and Nadīm kūka, and Mīr Payanda Muḥammad, brother of Muḥammad Walī, and many others.
They recited the fātiḥa, and his Majesty said: ‘Go, fight the infidels!’ He thought: ‘Īshān-tīmūr Sult̤ān, and Mu'nīm Khān,*The well-known Khān-i-khānān of Akbar's reign. and Mīrzā Yādgār,*Perhaps 'Uncle Yādgār' (t̤aghāī), the father of Bega Begam. Yādgār-nāṣir was not here, but still in Sind. and the rest whom we left behind, have been killed or captured by these people who have now come to attack us.’ He mounted and left the camp with a few followers.
Of the band which his Majesty had sent out to fight after reciting the fātiḥa, Shaikh 'Alī Beg struck the Rājpūt captain with an arrow, and cast him from his horse. (47a) Several more (of the royal troop) hit others with arrows; the infidels turned to flee, and the fight was won. They brought in several prisoners alive. Then the camp went slowly, slowly on; but his Majesty was far ahead. Those who had recited the fātiḥa came up with the camp.
There was a mace-bearer named Bihbūd. They sent him galloping after the Emperor, to say: ‘Let your Majesty go slowly. By Heaven's grace, a victory has been vouchsafed, and the infidels have fled.’ Bihbūd himself was taken to the presence, and conveyed the good news.*And also, tied to his girths, two heads of foes which he flung at Humāyūn's feet.
His Majesty dismounted, and a little water even (ham)*to brim of the cup of joy. was found, but he was anxious about the amīrs, and said: ‘What has happened to them?’ Then horsemen appeared in the distance, and again there was a cry: ‘God forbid! Māldeo!’*These cries remind one that even now Humāyūn must have had with him a huge contingent of helpless beings, women and children and non-combatants. His Majesty sent a man for information, who came running back and said: ‘Īshān-tīmūr Sult̤ān, and Mīrzā Yādgār, and Mu'nim Khān are all coming, safe and sound.’ They had missed their way. Their return rejoiced the Emperor, who rendered thanks to God.
Next morning they marched on. For three days they found no water. (47b) On the fourth, they came to some very deep wells, the water of which was extraordinarily red. The Emperor halted and alighted near one of the wells; Tardī Beg Khān was at another; at a third, Mīrzā Yādgār, and Mu'nim Khān, and Nadīm kūka; and at the fourth, Īshān-tīmūr Sult̤ān, and Khwāja Ghāzī, and Raushan kūka.
As each bucket came out of the wells into reach, people flung themselves on it; the ropes broke, and five or six persons fell into the wells with the buckets. Many perished from thirst. When the Emperor saw men flinging themselves into the wells from thirst, he let anyone drink from his own water-bottle. When everyone had drunk his fill, they marched on again at afternoon prayer-time.
After a day and a night they reached a large tank. The horses and camels went into the water and drank so much that many died. There had not been many horses, but there were mules and camels. (48a) Beyond this place water was found at every stage on the way to 'Umrkōt,*The little desert town must indeed have seemed a haven after the terrible journey, and not least so to the young wife who some two months later became the mother of Akbar. Humāyūn reached 'Umrkōt on August 22nd, 1542 (Jumāda I. 10th, 949H.). which is a beautiful place with many tanks.
The rānā*Text, passim, rānā. The 'Umrkōt rānā's name was Parsād. gave the Emperor an honourable reception, and took him into the fort, and assigned him excellent quarters. He gave places outside to the amīrs' people. Many things were very cheap indeed; four goats could be had for one rupī. The rānā made many gifts of kids and so on, and paid such fitting service that what tongue could set it forth?
Several days were spent in peace and comfort.
The treasury was empty. Tardī Beg Khān had a great deal of money, and the Emperor having asked him for a considerable loan, he lent 80,000 ashrafīs at the rate of two in ten.*(?) 20 per cent. Cf. Mems., 138. His Majesty portioned out this money to the army. He bestowed sword-belts and cap-à-pie dresses on the rānā and his sons. Many people bought fresh horses here.
Mīr Shāh Ḥusain had killed the rānā's father. For this, amongst other reasons, the rānā collected 2,000 or 3,000 good soldiers and set out with the Emperor for Bhakkar.*After a stay of seven weeks in 'Umrkōt.(48b)
In 'Umrkōt he left many people, and his family and relations, and also Khwāja Mu'az̤z̤am to have charge of the ḥaram. Ḥamīda-bānū Begam was with child. Three days after his Majesty's departure, and in the early morning of Sunday, the fourth day of the revered Rajab, 949H.,*October 15th, 1542. there was born his imperial Majesty, the world's refuge and conqueror, Jalālu-d-dīn Muḥammad Akbar Ghāzī. The moon was in Leo. It was of very good omen that the birth was in a fixed Sign, and the astrologers said a child so born would be fortunate and long-lived. The Emperor was some thirty miles away when Tardī Muḥammad Khān took the news to him. He was highly delighted, and by way of reward and largesse (niṣār) for the tidings he forgave all soever of Tardī Muḥammad Khān's past offences. He gave the child the name he had heard in his dream at Lāhōr, the Emperor Jalālu-d-dīn Muḥammad Akbar.
On leaving this place, the Emperor went towards Bhakkar with as many as 10,000 men who had gathered round him, people of the rānā and of the outlying tribes and Sūdmas (Sodhas) and Samīchas. (49a) They reached the district of Jūn, where there was one of Shāh Ḥusain's servants with some troopers. He fled.*Cf. B. & H., II., 256, for stories of the taking of Jūn. Here there was the Mirror Garden, a very pleasant and enjoyable place where the Emperor alighted. He assigned its villages (? of Jūn) in jāgīr to his followers.
It is a six days' journey from Jūn to Tatta. The Emperor was as much as six*Other writers say nine. months in Jūn, and brought his family and people and the whole 'Umrkōt party there.*Ḥamīda and her baby were good travellers. They left 'Umrkōt when the child was under five weeks old (November 20th), and joined Humāyūn early in December (1542). The Emperor Jalālu-d-dīn Muḥammad Akbar was six months old when they took him to Jūn. The party which had come from various places with the royal family and the ḥaram now broke up. As for the rānā, he marched off at midnight for his own country, on account of a coolness*shukr rangī. I do not find this word in dictionaries, and translate tentatively on the analogy of shukr-āb, a tiff. caused by some talk between him and Tardī Muḥammad Khān.*Other writers give Khwāja Ghāzī as the second in the quarrel. All the Sūdmas and Samīchas went off by agreement with him, and the Emperor was left alone, as before, with his own people.
He sent brave Shaikh 'Alī Beg (Jalāīr) and Muz̤affar Beg Turkmān towards the large district of Jājkā (Ḥāj-kān). (49b) Mīrzā Shāh Ḥusain sent a force to attack him, and there was a famous fight. At last Muz̤affar Beg was routed and fled, and Shaikh 'Alī Beg (Jalāīr) was killed and perished with all his men.*A stubborn fight, and fateful for Humāyūn. It occurred in November, 1543.
A squabble arose between Khālid Beg*Son of Niz̤āmu-d-dīn 'Alī Khalīfa Barlās and of Sult̤ānam who appears to be Gul-badan's former hostess (14a). and Tarsh Beg, a brother of Shāham Khān Jalāīr and his Majesty turned all his favour to Tarsh Beg. So Khālid Beg deserted and went with all his men to Mīr Shāh Ḥusain. Then the Emperor ordered Khālid Beg's mother, Sult̤ānam, to prison and this made Gul-barg*Daughter of Khalīfa, and as such sister or half-sister of Khālid, and daughter or stepdaughter of Sult̤ānam. She is, I believe, the Gul-barg of earlier episodes and a wife of Humāyūn. Begam angry. Then he forgave Sult̤anam and gave her leave to go to the blessed Makka with Gul-barg Begam. Soon after this Tarsh Beg also deserted. The Emperor cursed him, and said: ‘For his sake, I dealt harshly with Khālid Beg, who on this account left the circle of the faithful for the circle of the disloyal. Tarsh Beg will die young.’ So it was! Fifteen days later, a servant killed him with a knife as he lay sleeping in a boat. When the Emperor heard of it he grew sad and thoughtful. (50a) Shāh Ḥusain Mīrzā brought boats up the river to near Jūn, and his men and the Emperor's often fought on board, and many were killed on both sides. Day by day there were desertions to Shāh Ḥusain. In one of these fights was killed Mullā Tāju-d-dīn whom his Majesty held in the greatest favour as a pearl of knowledge.
There was a squabble between Tardī Muḥammad Khān and Mu'nīm Khān. Mu'nīm Khān consequently deserted. Very few amīrs remained; amongst them were Tardī Muḥammad Khān and Mīrzā Yādgār and Mīrzā Payanda Muḥammad and Muḥammad Walī and Nadīm kūka and Raushan kūka and Khadang*Probably the father of Maywa-jān. Bairām arrived April 12th, 1543 (Muḥarram 7th, 950H.). the chamberlain. Then there was word brought: ‘Bairām Khān has reached Jājkā (Ḥāj-kān) on his way from Gujrāt.’ The Emperor was delighted, and ordered Khadang and others to give him honourable meeting.
Meantime Shāh Ḥusain Mīrzā had heard of Bairām Khān's coming and sent to capture him. Bairām Khān rashly went into a hollow, and there they fell upon him. (50b) Khadang the chamberlain was killed. Bairām Khān and the rest escaped, and the khān came and paid his respects to the Emperor.
At this time letters arrived (addressed to) Mīrzā Hindāl for his Majesty from Qarācha Khān, saying: ‘You have been long near Bhakkar, and during the whole time Shāh Ḥusain Mīrzā has given no sign of good-will but the reverse. By Heaven's grace, an easy way is open, and it is best for the Emperor to come here (to Qandahār). This is really advisable. If he will not come, come you yourself without fail.’ As his Majesty's coming was delayed, Qarācha Khān went out and met Mīrzā Hindāl, and made over the town to him (in the autumn of 1541).
Mīrzā 'Askarī was in Ghaznīn, and to him Mīrzā Kāmrān wrote: ‘Qarācha Khān has given over Qandahār to Mīrzā Hindāl. Qandahār must be considered.’ His idea was to take it from Mīrzā Hindāl.
On hearing of these things, his Majesty came to his aunt Khānzāda Begam,*From this it would seem that Khānzāda was in Sind with Humāyūn. No other writer, I believe, mentions this or the embassy on which she is now sent. The Uzbegs and Turkmāns do not appear apropos here. If, as Gul-badan says, and her authority is good, Khānzāda now went to Qandahār, she will have gone on to Kābul, possibly with Hindāl after he surrendered the town to Kāmrān. Of Mahdī Khwāja, Khānzāda's husband, I find no mention made by any historian after Babar's death, a singular fact and matched by the similar disappearance of the great Khalifa. Abū'l-fazl names his tomb. Cf. App. s.n. Khānzāda. and said with great urgency: ‘Pray do me the honour of going to Qandahār and advising Mīrzā Hindāl and Mīrzā Kāmrān. (51a) Tell them that the Uzbegs and the Turkmāns are near them, and that the best plan is to be friends amongst themselves. If Mīrzā Kāmrān will agree to carry out what I have written to him, I will do what his heart desires.’
Mīrzā Kāmrān came to Qandahār four days after the begam's arrival.*She had a weary journey from Jūn to Qandahār, and Kāmrān had another, but less toilsome, from Kābul. Kāmrān kept Hindāl besieged, but there seems to have been a good deal of communication between besiegers and beleaguered. Day after day he urged: ‘Read the khut̤ba in my name’; and again and again Mīrzā Hindāl said: ‘In his life-time his Majesty Firdaus-makānī gave his throne to the Emperor Humāyūn and named him his successor. We all agreed to this, and up till now have read the khut̤ba in his name. There is no way of changing the khut̤ba.’*Our memory is better than the begam's, and we remember that Hindāl found no difficulty in changing the khut̤ba to his own name in Dihlī. Mīrzā Kāmrān wrote to her Highness, Dil-dār Begam:*She would be probably with her son Hindāl in the fort. ‘I have come from Kābul with you in mind. It is strange that you should not once have come to see me. (51b) Be a mother to me as you are to Mīrzā Hindāl.’ At last Dil-dār Begam went to see him, and he said: ‘Now I shall not let you go till you send for Mīrzā Hindāl.’ Dil-dār Begam said: ‘Khānzāda Begam is your elder kinswoman, and oldest and highest of you all. Ask her the truth about the khut̤ba.’ So then he spoke to Āka. Her Highness Khānzāda Begam answered: ‘If you ask me! well! as his Majesty Firdaus-makānī decided it and gave his throne to the Emperor Humāyūn, and as you, all of you, have read the khut̤ba in his name till now, so now regard him as your superior and remain in obedience to him.’
To cut the matter short, Mīrzā Kāmrān besieged Qandahār and kept on insisting about the khut̤ba for four months. At last he settled it in this way: ‘Very well! the Emperor is now far away. Read the khut̤ba in my name and when he comes back, read it in his.’ As the siege had drawn out to great length, and people had gradually come to cruel straits, there was no help for it; the khut̤ba was read. (52a) He gave Qandahār to Mīrzā 'Askarī and promised Ghaznīn to Mīrzā Hindāl. When they reached Ghaznīn, he assigned the Lamghānāt and the mountain passes (Tangayhā)*(?) The Tangī of Budyard Kipling. to the mīrzā, and all those promises were false.*The Tārīkh-i-badāyunī states that Ghaznīn was given to Hindāl and then taken away, and Mr. Erskine comments on this as probably untrue. (B. & H., II. 265 n. .) Gul-badan here supports 'Abdu-l-qadīr.
Mīrzā Hindāl went off to Badakhshān, and settled down in Khost and Andar-āb. Mīrzā Kāmrān said to Dil-dār Begam: ‘Go and fetch him.’ When she arrived, the mīrzā said: ‘I have withdrawn myself from the turmoil of soldiering, and even*'as good as any other place' is perhaps the import of the ham. Khost is a hermitage. I have quite settled down.’ The begam answered: ‘If you intend to lead the darvish-life, even*'as good as any other place' is perhaps the import of the ham. Kābul is a hermitage. Live where your family and kinsfolk are. That is the better plan.’ Then she made him come, and for awhile he lived as a darvish in Kābul.
About this time, Mīr Shāh Ḥusain sent to the Emperor to say: ‘The course favouring fortune is for you to march for Qandahār. That is the better plan.’ His Majesty was willing, and replied: ‘Horses and camels are scarce in my camp; give me some to travel with to Qandahār.’ (52b) Shāh Ḥusain Mīrza agreed, and said: ‘There are a thousand camels on the other side of the river, which I will send to you as soon as you have crossed.’
[If words by Khwāja Kasak (? Kīsīk), kinsman of Khwāja Ghāzī, are recorded about the journey from Bhakkar and Sind, they are copied from the writings of the said Khwāja Kasak.*We surmise that this is a gloss of Gul-badan. who has copied from a diary or writings of Khwāja Kasak. This name may be the Tuūrkī kīsīk, a guard, a sentinel. No Persian word seems appropriate.]
At length the Emperor went on board boats, with kinsfolk and family, army and the rest, and travelled for three days on the great river. At the frontier of Shāh Ḥusain Mīrzā's territory is a village called Nuāsī.*Runāī, B. & H., II. 262. The text is clear. Here they halted, and his Majesty sent Sult̤ān Qulī, the head-camel-driver, to fetch the camels. Sult̤ān Qulī brought a thousand, all of which his Majesty gave to his amīrs, and soldiers, and others, ordering them to be apportioned.
The camels were such that one might say they had not known city, or load, or man for seven, or rather seventy, generations. As horses were few, many people took camels to ride on, and what were left were assigned for the baggage. Every camel which was mounted, at once flung its rider to the ground, and took its way to the jungle. (53a) Every pack-camel, when it heard the sound of horses' feet, jumped and bounded and tossed off its load, and went off and away to the jungle. If a load was fixed so fast that, jump as it would, it could not get it off, it carried it away and ran with it into the jungle. This was the way the Emperor started for Qandahār. Some 200 camels must have gone off like this.
Shāh Ḥusain Mīrzā's head-camel-driver Maḥmūd was in Sīwī (Sībī), and when the Emperor came near, he strengthened the citadel and retired into it. His Majesty came prosperously to within twelve miles' distance. Then word was brought that Mīr Allāh-dost and Bābā Jūjūk*Both these names may be sobriquets. Abu'1-fazl names Shaikh 'Abdu-l-wahab as Allāh-dost's companion. (A. N., Bib. Ind. ed. I. 189 et seq..) Jūjūk is perhaps the Tūrkī 'sweet-savoured,' and an epithet of 'Abdu-l-wahab, a lawyer with persuasive tongue. had arrived in Sīwī from Kābul two days earlier, and were going on to (visit) Shāh Ḥusain Mīrzā. By them Mīrzā Kāmrān had sent a dress of honour, and tipūchāq horses, and much fruit, and they were to ask for Mīrzā Shāh Ḥusain's daughter.*The daughter has already been named as promised.
The Emperor said to Khwāja Ghāzī: ‘As there is the tie of father and son*Probably a spiritual relationship; that of religious teacher and disciple. between you and Allāh-dost, write and ask him in what way Mīrzā Kāmrān stands towards me, and what he will do if I go into his neighbourhood.’ (53b) He also gave this order to Khwāja Kasak: ‘Go to Sīwī, and ask Mīr Allāh-dost whether he thinks it advisable for me to come to Kābul.’ The khwāja set out, and the Emperor said: ‘We will not march till you have returned.’
When the khwāja came near Sīwī, Maḥmūd, the head-camel-driver, caught him, and asked: ‘Why are you here?’ ‘To buy horses and camels,’ he answered. Maḥmūd ordered: ‘Feel under his arm and search his cap. Heaven forbid that he should have brought a letter to win over Allāh-dost and Bābā Jūjūk.’ They searched, and brought out the letter from under his arm. He had no chance to twist it into a fold.*(?) to toss it secretly into a corner. Maḥmūd took it and read it, and, not letting the khwāja go, forthwith conveyed Allāh-dost and Bābā Jūjūk into the fort, and with various roughnesses made them swear: ‘We had no knowledge of his coming here.’ (54a) (?) He has taken the initiative;*sabq khwānda ast. Perhaps Kasak as a pupil 'has said his lessons to us,' i.e., to Allāh-dost. and ‘Khwāja Ghāzī is related to us and he was with Mīrzā Kāmrān,*He had been Kāmrān's diwān up to the time when the royal family left Lāhōr, and he joined Humāyūn when the brothers parted for Sind and for Kābul. and this is why he has written.’ Maḥmūd decided to send all three to Shāh Ḥusain, and Mīr Allāh-dost and Bābā Jūjūk spent the whole night smoothing him down and entreating him, and in the end they were set free.
Mīr Allāh-dost sent 3,000*Text, sīṣad, but perhaps only 300 should be read. pomegranates and 100 quinces for his Majesty's use, and wrote no letter, because he was afraid it might fall into the wrong hands. By word of mouth he sent to say: ‘If a letter should come from Mīrzā Askarī or the amīrs, it would not be bad to go to Kābul; but if not, it will be clear to your Majesty that nothing is to be gained by going. You have few followers. What, then, will happen?’
Kasak came and reported this. The Emperor was stupefied and bewildered, and said: ‘What is to be done? Where am I to go?’ They all consulted together. (54b) Tardī Muḥammad Khān and Bairām Khān gave it as their opinion that it was impossible to decide to go anywhere but to the north and Shal-mastān,*Approximately Quetta. The route seems to have been over the Bolan. the frontier of Qandahār. ‘There are many Afghans in those parts,’ they said, ‘whom we shall draw over to our side. Mīrzā 'Askarī's people, too, will join us.’
Having settled it in this way, they recited the fātiḥa and went, march by march, for Qandahār. Near Shal-mastān they halted in a village named Ranī (? Ralī), but as it had snowed and rained, and was extremely cold, they determined to go on to Shal-mastān. At afternoon prayer-time an Uzbeg youth, mounted on a sorry and tired-out pony, came in, and cried out: ‘Mount, your Majesty! I will explain on the way; time presses. There is no time to talk.’*The youth was Chupī Bahādūr, a former servant of Humāyūn. Gul-badan's story differs in some details from that told by other writers. The Emperor mounted the very hour the alarm was given, and went off.
He went two arrows' flight, and then sent Khwāja Mu'az̤z̤am and Bairām Khān to fetch Ḥamīda-bānū Begam. (55a) They went and mounted her, but there was not a chink of time in which to take the Emperor Jalālu-d-dīn Muḥammad Akbar. Just when the begam left the camp to join his Majesty, Mīrzā 'Askarī came up with 2,000 troopers. There was an outcry, and when he heard it, he entered the camp*Late in 950H. (1543). The little Akbar reached Qandahār on December 15th, 1543. and asked: ‘Where is the Emperor?’ People said: ‘He went hunting long ago.’ So the mīrzā knew that his Majesty had gone away just as he himself came in. Then he took possession of the Emperor Jalālud-dīn Muḥammad Akbar, and gave him in charge to his wife Sult̤ānam,*I believe she was in Qandahār, and that she received the child on his arrival there. who showed him much kindness and affection. He made all the royal followers march, saying: ‘Go to Qandahār.’
His Majesty, when he left, took the road to the mountains. He went eight miles, and then travelled as fast as possible.*Perhaps he rode four kos, and then, having waited for Ḥamīda, hurried on. (55b) He had with him Bairām Khān, Khwāja Mu'az̤z̤am, Khwāja Nīāzī, Nadīm kūka*His wife, Māham anaga, remained behind with Akbar. With Akbar was also Atka Khān (Shamsu-d-din Muḥammad) and his wife, Jī-jī anaga. and Raushan kūka, and Ḥājī Muḥammad Khān, and Bābā-dost the paymaster, and Mīrzā Qulī Beg chūlī,*Humāyūn's sobriquet for those who went to Persia with him; from chūl, a desert. Others in this list might claim it. and Ḥaidar Muḥammad the master of the horse, and Shaikh Yūsuf chūlī, and Ibrāhīm the chamberlain, and Ḥasan 'Alī, the chamberlain, and Ya'qūb the keeper of the armoury, and 'Ambar the superintendent and the royal agent (mulk-mukhtār), and Sambal captain of a thousand, and Khwāja Kasak.*Niz̤āmu-d-dīn Aḥmad puts the number of the party at twenty-two.
Khwāja Ghāzī says: ‘I also was in attendance.’ This company went with the Emperor, and Ḥamīda-bānū Begam says,*The tense used suggests conference and talking over. Jauhar says that Khwāja Ghāzī joined Humāyūn in Persia from Makka. This looks like a contradiction of Jauhar. ‘There were as many as thirty people,’ and that of women there was, besides herself, the wife of Ḥasan 'Alī, the chamberlain.
The prayer before sleep had passed before they reached the foot of the mountains. The snow lay deep, so there was no road to go up by. Their minds were full of anxiety lest that unjust creature, Mīrzā 'Askarī, should follow them. At last they found a way up, and climbed it in some sort of fashion. They were all night in the snow, and (at first) there was neither wood for fire nor food to eat. They grew very hungry and feeble. (56a) The Emperor gave orders to kill a horse. There was no cooking-pot, so they boiled some of the flesh in a helmet, and some they roasted. They made fires on all four sides, and with his own blessed hand the Emperor roasted some meat which he ate. He used to say: ‘My very head was frozen by the intense cold.’
Morning came at last, and he pointed to another mountain, and said: ‘There are people on that; there will be many Bilūchīs there; and there we must go.’ On they went, and reached the place in two days. They saw a few houses near them, and a few savage Bilūchīs whose speech is the tongue of the ghouls of the waste.
The Emperor halted on the skirt of the mountain. There were about thirty people with him. The Bilūchīs saw him, and collected and came near. He had settled comfortably in his tent, so they knew from far off that he was halting. They said to one another: ‘If we seize these people and take them to Mīrzā 'Askarī, he will certainly give us their arms, and many gifts besides.’ (56b)
Ḥasan 'Alī, the chamberlain, had a Bilūchī wife who understood what the ghouls of the waste were saying, and who made it known that they meant mischief. Early in the morning the Emperor thought of marching on, but they said: ‘Our chief is not here. When he comes, you shall go.’ Besides this, the time had become unsuitable, and so the whole night was spent there in strict watchfulness.
Part of the night had gone when the chief arrived. He waited on the Emperor, and said: ‘A farmān has come from Mīrzā Kāmrān and Mīrzā 'Askarī, in which it is written: “It is reported that the Emperor may visit your dwellings. If he does, beware!—a thousand times beware!— of letting him go. Seize him and bring him to us. You can keep his goods and horses. Take him to Qandahār.” As I had not seen your Majesty, I at first had this evil thought, but now I will sacrifice my life and the lives of my family, I have five or six sons, for your Majesty's head, or rather for one hair of it. (57a) Go where you wish. God protect you! Mīrzā 'Askarī may do what he likes.’ The Emperor gave him a ruby and a pearl and some other things.
At dawn he marched to honour Fort Bābā Ḥājī*Fort of the Pilgrim Father. by a visit. He reached it in two days. It belongs to the Garm-sīr,*i.e., a warm climate, a winter habitation in low ground, and cultivated fields. and lies on the river (Halmand). There are many sayyids there, and they waited on the Emperor and showed him hospitality.
Next morning Khwāja 'Alāwalu-d-dīn (Jalālu-d-dīn) Maḥmūd,*He was a revenue-collector of the Mīrzā. having left Mīrzā 'Askarī, came with an offering of a string of mules, and one of horses and tents, etc., whatever he had. Once more the royal heart was at ease. Ḥājī Muḥammad Khān kūkī*Son of Bābā Qūshka, an intimate of Bābar. brought thirty or forty troopers and offered a string of mules.
Being helpless because of the disunion of his brothers*Kāmrān was master of Kābul and Ghaznī, Qandahār, Khutlān and Badakhshān. 'Askarī was attached to his full-brother's fortunes, and Hindāl was a prisoner in Kābul. Shīr Shāh ruled Bābar's Indian Empire, and Shāh Ḥusain was in Sind. Certainly there seemed no 'crack' to hold Humāyūn. The date is December, 1543. and the desertion of his amīrs, it now seemed best to the Emperor,—with reliance on the Causer of causes,—to decide upon going to Khurāsān.*i.e., on his way to Persia proper. Humāyūn's messenger to the Shāh was Chupī Bahādur. (55a and n..) (57b)
After many stages and a journey of many days, he came to parts adjacent to Khurāsān. When Shāh T̤ahmās (sic) heard that he had reached the Halmand, he remained sunk in wonder and thought, and said: ‘The Emperor Humāyūn has come to our frontier by the perfidious revolution of the firmament,—the firmament unpropitious and crooked of gait! The Lord, whose existence is necessary, has led him here!’
He sent all sorts of people to give honourable reception, nobles and grandees, low and high, great and small. All came to the Halmand to meet the Emperor.*He had crossed the river without receiving invitation or permission, because of Kāmrān's threatened approach. The incidents of Humāyūn's visit to Persia are very entertaining. (B. & H., II. 275 et seq..)
The Shāh sent all his brothers to meet his Majesty,— Bahrām Mīrzā, and Alqās Mīrzā, and Sām Mīrzā. All came and embraced him, and escorted him with full honour and respect. As they drew near (the Shāh) his brothers sent him word, and he also came riding to meet the Emperor. They embraced. (58a) The friendship and concord of those two high-placed pāshas was as close as two nut-kernels in one shell.*A figure of speech too compact to leave room for the facts. The intercourse of the pāshas was dramatic with human passion and foible. Much of the story would be distasteful to Gul-badan's family pride and vexatious to her orthodoxy. Great unanimity and good feeling ensued, so that during his Majesty's stay in that country, the Shāh often went to his quarters, and on days when he did not, the Emperor went to his.
In Khurāsān*Not only in Khurāsān but on and off the route to T̤ahmāsp's summer quarters where the pāshas met, did Humāyūn visit noteworthy places. He saw Harāt as his father had done, and later his devious journey took him to Jām, where he saw the shrine of his own and of Ḥamīda's ancestor, the Terrible Elephant, Aḥmad. He visited the tomb of the Founder of the Ṣafī dynasty at Ardabīl, and the date of his visit (1544) makes it probable that he trod that 'Holy Carpet' of Ardabīl which had been woven in 1540 for the shrine and which now attracts our respectful admiration in the Oriental Section of the Victoria and Albert Museum (S. K. M.). his Majesty visited all the gardens and the flower-gardens, and the splendid buildings put up by Sult̤ān Ḥusain Mīrzā, and the grand structures of olden days.
There was hunting eight times while he was in 'Irāq, and each time trouble was taken for him also. Ḥamīdabānū Begam used to enjoy the sight from a distance in either a camel or a horse litter. Shāhzāda Sult̤ānam,*This lady afforded Humāyūn vital assistance in Persia, and even pleaded for his life when it was in the balance. She was highly esteemed by T̤ahmāsp, and had influence in state affairs. the Shāh's sister, used to ride on horseback, and take her stand behind her brother. His Majesty said (to Ḥamīda-bānū): ‘There was a woman riding behind the Shāh at the hunt. She stood with her reins held by a white-bearded man. People told me it was Shāhzāda Sult̤ānam, the Shāh's sister.’ (58b) In short, the Shāh showed the Emperor much hospitality and courtesy, and laid a charge (on his sister) to show motherly and sisterly hospitality and sympathy (to Ḥamīda-bānū Begam).*An obscure passage in the text, and conjectural only in translation. The Persian words I have rendered 'motherly and sisterly' are mādarāna wa khwāharāna. On this same page occurs hindūāna; at 43b, nikāḥāna, and at 62a, pādshāhāna.
One day, when Shāhzāda Sult̤ānam had entertained the begam, the Shāh said to her: ‘When (next) you offer hospitality, let it be arranged outside the city.’ It was on a beautiful plain, rather more than four miles out, that they pitched tents (khaima) and folding-tents (khirga) and an audience-tent (bārgā), and also set up chatr*(?) umbrella-shaped tents. and t̤āq.*round-topped tents or balconies, or arched erections.
In Khurāsān and those parts they use enclosing screens (sarāparda), but they do not put them at the back. The Emperor set up an all-round screen after the Hindū fashion (hindūāna). Having pitched the tents, the Shāh's people put coloured chicks (cheghhā) all round. His kinswomen and his paternal aunt were there, and his sisters and the ladies of his ḥaram, and the wives of the khāns and Sult̤āns and amīrs, about 1,000 women in all splendour and adornment.
That day Shāhzāda Sult̤ānam asked Ḥamīda-bānū Begam: (59a) ‘Are such chatr and t̤āq met with in Hindū-stan?’ The begam answered: ‘They say two dāng*or dānak. Hazarding a guess, the meaning ' quarter of the world 'seems fittest to select from the several of dāng or dānak. Others conceivably applicable are 'a small grain' (anglice, peppercorn in this connection), and the sixth of anything (anglice, the colloquial 'fraction '). Doubtless my difficulty is none to those experienced in colloquial Persian. Ḥamīda's ready use of a colloquial phrase to express that the reputedly greater contains the less is neat and diplomatic. with respect to Khurāsān, and four dāng with respect to Hindūstān. When a thing is found in two dāng, it is clear it will be found better in four.’
Shāh Sult̤ānam said also, in reply to her own paternal aunt, and in confirmation of the begam's words: ‘Aunt, it is strange that you ask, “Where are two dāng? where are four dāng?” It is clear anything would be found better and more wonderful (in four than in two).’
They passed the whole day very well in sociable festivity. At the time of eating, all the amīrs' wives stood and served, and the Shāh's ladies placed*māndand, used transitively ; also at 4a. food before Shāhzāda Sult̤ānam.
Moreover, they were hospitable*mihmānī kardand. (?) In the way of gifts, or perhaps by lavish decoration. with all sorts of stuffs, embroidered and others, to Ḥamīda-bānū Begam, as was incumbent and fitting. The Shāh went on in advance*i.e., from the place of entertainment to the town. and was in his Majesty's quarters till the prayer before sleep. (59b) When he heard that Ḥamīda-bānū Begam had arrived, he rose from the presence and went home. To such a height of pleasantness and kindness was he amiable!
Raushan kūka, spite of his former fidelity and services, was now faithless, in that foreign and perilous country, about some valuable rubies. These used to be kept in the Emperor's amulet-case (t̤umār),*Also t̤ūmār, an amulet-case of gold or silver suspended on the neck. and of this he and the begam knew and no one else. If he went away anywhere, he used to give the amulet-case into her charge. One day she was going to wash her head, so she bundled the case up in a handkerchief, and put it on the Emperor's bed. Raushan kūka thought this a good chance to steal five rubies. Then he agreed with Khwāja Ghāzī, and trusted them to him, meaning by-and-by to barter them away.
When the begam came back from washing her head, the Emperor gave her the amulet-case, and she at once knew from its lightness in her hand that it had lost weight, and said so. (60a) The Emperor asked: ‘How is this? Except you and me, no one knows about them. What can have happened? Who has taken them?’ He was astonished.
The begam said to her brother, Khwāja Mu'az̤z̤am: ‘So and so has happened. If at this pinch you will act the brother to me and will make inquiry in some way quietly, you will save me from what one may call disgrace. Otherwise, as long as I live, I shall be ashamed in the royal presence.’
Khwāja Mu'az̤z̤am said: ‘One thing occurs to me! I, who am so closely connected with his Majesty, have not the means to buy even a poor pony,*Text, tātū. but Khwāja Ghāzī and Raushan kūka*Jauhar states that amongst other disaffected persons these two men, and a third, Sult̤ān Muḥammad, the spearman (nazabāz), had just returned from Makka, and were of Kāmrān's party. Gul-badan makes it seem probable that Jauhar' s statements apply only to Sult̤ān Muḥammad. (Cf. list of companions of Humāyūn on his journey, 55b.) have each bought themselves a tipūchāq horse. They have not paid the money for them yet. This purchase is not without a ray of hope.’
The begam answered: ‘O brother! now is the time for brotherliness! That transaction must certainly be looked into.’ Khwāja Mu'az̤z̤am answered: ‘O elder moon-sister!*māh chīcham. Cf. 18b n.. tell no one about it. Heaven willing, I have hope that the right will be righted.’ (60b)
He went out, and inquired at the house of the horse-dealers: ‘For what price did you sell those horses? When is the money promised? What security has been given for the payment?’ The dealers answered: ‘Both men promised us rubies, and took the horses.’
From them he went to the khwāja's servant, and said: ‘Where is the khwāja's wallet, with his honorary dress and his clothes?*nārī wa parī. Where does he keep it?’ The servant answered: ‘My khwāja has no wallet and no clothes. He has one high cap which, when he goes to sleep, he puts under his head or his arm.’ Khwāja Mu'az̤z̤am saw the meaning of this, and made up his mind for certain that the rubies were with Khwāja Ghāzī, and were kept in his high cap. He came and represented to his Majesty: ‘I have found trace of those rubies in Khwāja Ghāzī's high cap. In some way I will steal them from him. (61a) If he should come to your Majesty and seek redress against me, let your Majesty say nothing to me.’ The Emperor listened, and smiled.
Khwāja Mu'az̤z̤am then repeatedly played off tricks and little jokes and pleasantries on Khwāja Ghāzī, who came and set it forth to the Emperor. ‘I am a lowly man,’ said he, ‘(? but) I have a name and a position. What does the boy Khwāja Mu'az̤z̤am mean by playing off these tricks and jokes, and making fun of me in this foreign land, and insulting me?’ His Majesty said: ‘On whom does he not? He is young. It often comes into his head to do terrifying and ill-bred things. Do not take it to heart. He is only a boy.’
Another day, when Khwāja Ghāzī was seated in the reception-room, Khwāja Mu'az̤z̤am, pretending an accident, filched his cap from his head. Then he took out the matchless rubies, and laid them before his Majesty and Ḥamīda-bānū Begam. His Majesty smiled, and the begam was delighted, and said, ‘Bravo!’ and ‘Mercy be upon you.’ (61b)
Khwāja Ghāzī and Raushan kūka, in shame at their deed, made secret communications to the Shāh, and carried their talk so far that his heart was troubled. His Majesty saw that the Shāh's intimacy and confidence were not what they had been, and at once sent some of whatever rubies and other jewels*It was now that Humāyūn gave to the Shāah the 'diamond which had been obtained from Sult̤ān Ibrāhīm's treasury,' i.e. the Koh-i-nūr. (Asiatic Quarterly Review, April, 1899, art. 'Babar's Diamond,' H. Beveridge.) he possessed as a gift to him, who then said: ‘Khwāja Ghāzī and Raushan kūka are in fault; they turned my heart from you, and truly I used to regard you as a brother.’ Then the two sovereigns again became of one mind, and made clean heart to one another.
The two wrong-doers were excluded from the presence, and were made over to the Shāh, who, when opportunity occurred, got possession of those rubies,*(?) those already bartered away. and, as to the men, ordered: ‘Let them be kept in custody.’*They were, it would seem, let down by tent-ropes into the celebrated underground prison of Sulaimān's Diwān. (Jauhar, Stewart, 72.)
His Majesty's time in 'Irāq was (now) spent happily. In various ways the Shāh showed good feeling, and every day sent presents of rare and strange things. (62a)
At length the Shāh despatched his own son and khāns and Sult̤āns and amīrs with his Majesty to help him, together with good arms and tents, folding and audience tents; and chatr and t̤āq and shamiāna, excellently wrought, and all sorts of the things necessary and fit for a king, from the mattress-warehouse and the treasury and the workshops and kitchen and buttery. In a propitious hour those two mighty sovereigns bade one another farewell, and his Majesty left that country for Qandahār.*Humāyūn again indulged his love of travel and sights, and delayed so long in Persian territory that the Shāh, coming unexpectedly upon him, angrily turned him off without ceremony.
At the time of his departure, he asked pardon from the Shāh for the offence of those two faithless ones (Khwāja Ghāzī and Raushan kūka), and, having himself forgiven them, took them with him to Qandahār.
When Mīrzā 'Askarī heard (1545) that he was on his way from Khurāsān and approaching Qandahār, he sent the Emperor Jalālu-d-dīn Muḥammad Akbar to Mīrzā Kāmrān in Kābul, who gave him into the care of Dearest Lady, Khānzāda Begam, and our paternal aunt. (62b) He was two and a half years old when she received him into her charge. She was very fond of him, and used to kiss his hands and feet, and say: ‘They are the very hands and feet of my brother the Emperor Bābar, and he is like him altogether.’*The child was just over three. It was now that he and Bakhshī-banu travelled together to Kābul in the snow.
When Mīrzā Kāmrān was sure that the Emperor was approaching Qandahār, he went to Dearest Lady and cried, and was very humble, and said with countless pains:*of persuasion. ‘Go you (May your journey be safe!) to Qandahār to the Emperor and make peace between us.’
When she left (Kābul) she made over the Emperor Akbar to Mīrzā Kāmrān, who gave him into the care of (Muḥtarīma) Khānam. Then she travelled as fast as possible to Qandahār. The Emperor besieged Mīrzā Kāmrān*The context shows that this is wrong, and so do the histories. and Mīrzā 'Askarī for forty days in the city, and he sent Bairām Khān on an embassy to Mīrzā Kāmrān.*Bairām saw Akbar in Kābul, and also Hindāl, Sulaimān, Ḥaram, Ibrāhīm and Yādgār-nāṣir, all under surveillance. The embassy reached Kābul before Khānzādā left, and she travelled with Bairām on his return to Humāyūn. (63a) Mīrzā 'Askarī grew dejected and humble, admitted his offences, and came out and paid his duty to the Emperor, who then took possession of Qandahār (September 4th, 1545). He bestowed it upon the son of the Shāh, who in a few days fell ill and died.*He was an infant. When Bairām Khān*The begam's chronology is faulty here. Bairām had returned before the capitulation. arrived, it was given into his charge.
The Emperor left Ḥamīda-bānū Begam in Qandahār and set out after Mīrzā Kāmrān. Dearest Lady, Khānzāda Begam, went with him, and at Qabal-chak*For location of this place Cf. Akbarnāma H. B., I. 477 n.. It seems to have been in the mountain district of Tīrī, between the basins of the Halmand and the Arghand-āb. she had three days of fever. The doctors' remedies were of no avail, and on the fourth day of her illness she passed to the mercy of God. At first she was buried at Qabal-chak, but three months later her body was brought to Kābul and laid in the burial-place of my royal father.*Khānzāda, Mahdī (her husband) and Abū'l-ma'ālī are buried in the same spot.
During several years that Mīrzā Kāmrān was in Kābul, he had never made a hostile raid, *tākht raftan. I do not know what the begam wishes to say. Kāmrān had made hostile raids to Badakhshān and against the Hazāras. One might read 'hunting expedition.' and now, all at once, when he heard of his Majesty's approach, desire to break forth (? hunt) seized him, and he went into the Hazāra country. *He had a Hazāra wife. Perhaps the passage about Kāmrān's hostile raid or hunting is merely an introduction to Hindal's plan of scape. (Cf. B. & H., II. 314, 315, for this story.)(63b)
Mīrzā Hindāl, who had chosen the darvish's corner (in Kābul), now heard of the Emperor's return from 'Irāq and Khurāsān, and of his success in Qandahār. He saw his chance, and sent for Mīrzā Yādgār-nāṣir, and said: ‘The Emperor has come to Qandahār, and has been victorious. Mīrzā Kāmrān sent Khānzāda Begam to sue for peace, but the Emperor did not agree to his sort of peace. The Emperor sent Bairām Khān as his envoy, and Mīrzā Kāmrān did not agree to what he proposed. Now the Emperor has given Qandahār to Bairām Khān and has set out for Kābul. Come now, let us, you and I, plan and agree together, and scheme how to betake ourselves to his Majesty.’ Mīrzā Yādgār-nāṣir agreed, and the two made their plan and compact. Mīrzā Hindāl said: ‘You make up your mind to run away and when Mīrzā Kāmrān hears of it, he will certainly say to me: “Mīrzā Yādgār-nāṣir has gone off; go and persuade him to come back with you.” (64a) You go slowly, slowly on till I come. Then we will go as quickly as we can and pay our respects to the Emperor.’
Having so settled it, Mīrzā Yādgār-nāṣir ran away. The news went to Mīrzā Kāmrān, who came back at once to Kābul and sent for Mīrzā Hindāl and said: ‘Go and persuade Mīrzā Yādgār-nāṣir to come back.’ Mīrzā Hindāl mounted at once, and joined Mīrzā Yādgār-nāṣir with all speed. Then they travelled post-haste for five or six days, when they were honoured by paying their duty to the Emperor.
They advised the Khimār*(?) himār, the Ass's Pass. Pass as the best route. On Ramẓān 9th, 951H. (the third week of October, 1545), his Majesty ordered a halt in that pass. News of this went to Mīrzā Kāmrān on the same day and disturbed him greatly. He had his tents taken out very quickly and encamped in front of the Guẕar-gāh.*(?) The Ferry Garden, or perhaps Bābar's burial-place. (64b)
On the 11th of the same month, the Emperor ordered a halt in the valley of (?) Tīpa, and Mīrzā Kāmrān*Not in person, I believe. His troops were under Qāsim Barlās. also came and drew up opposite to fight. Then all his amīrs deserted and were exalted by kissing the royal feet. Even Bāpūs*Governor (ātalīq) of Yasīn-daulat (Āq Sult̤ān), the betrothed husband of Ḥabība. who was one of his well-known officers, deserted him with all his following and was exalted by kissing the royal feet. The mīrzā was left solitary and alone. ‘No one remains near me,’ he thought, so he threw down and destroyed the door and the wall of the house of Bāpūs*Mr. Erskine says that Kāmrān escaped by a breach opened in a wall. He went by way of Bīnī-ḥiṣār to Ghaznī, where 'Askarī still was. which was near, and went softly, softly past the New Year's Garden and the tomb of Gul-rukh Begam,*(?) His mother. dismissed his 12,000 troopers, and went off.
When it was dark, he went on in the same direction to Bābā Dashtī,*The Desert Father; perhaps a shrine in a lonely spot. (Cf. Khwāja Khiẓr, infra, 706.) and halted near a piece of water, and sent back Dostī kūka and Jūkī kūka to fetch his eldest daughter Ḥabība, and his son Ibrāhīm Sult̤ān Mīrzā, and Hazāra Begam*A wife. who was the brother's child of Khiẓr Khān Hazāra), and Māh Begam*Probably a wife. who was sister of Ḥaram (Khurram) Begam, and Māh-afroz, mother of Ḥājī Begam,*Brevet rank at this time. She made one pilgrimage in 983H. (1576). She may, however, have gone earlier with her blinded father, but not so early as 1545. and Bāqī kūka*(?) The elder brother of Adham and son of Māham anaga. Māham anaga would be in Kabul now. (65a) This party went with the mīrzā, who planned to go to Tatta and Bhakkar. In Khiẓr Khān Hazāra's country, which lies on the way to Bhakkar, he married Ḥabība Begam to Āq Sult̤ān and entrusted her to him, while he himself went on.
The victorious Emperor dismounted in triumph in the Bālā-i-ḥisār when five hours of the night of Ramẓān 12th had passed,—prosperously and with safety and good luck.*The hour was probably fixed by astrological counsel. Abū'l-faẓl, who may follow the begam's statement, says that the entry took place on the 12th ; other writers name the 10th. The only reason "for dwelling on the point is the agreement of Abū'l-faẓl and Gul-badan. All those followers of Mīrzā Kāmrān who had been promoted to the royal service, entered Kābul with drums beating (November, 1545).
On the 12th of the same month, her Highness my mother, Dil-dār Begam, and Gul-chihra Begam, and this lowly person paid our duty to the Emperor. For five years we had been shut out and cut off from this pleasure, so now when we were freed from the moil and pain of separation, we were lifted up by our happiness in meeting this Lord of beneficence again. Merely to look at him eased the sorrow-stricken heart and purged the blear-eyed vision. (65b) Again and again we joyfully made the prostration of thanks. There were many festive gatherings, and people sat from evening to dawn, and players and singers made continuous music. Many amusing games, full of fun, were played. Amongst them was this: Twelve players had each twenty cards and twenty shāhrukhīs. Whoever lost, lost those twenty shāhrukhīs, which would make five miṣqāls.*One shāhrukhī was about ten pence. Four shāhrukhīs made one miṣqāl. Each player gave the winner his twenty shāhrukhīs to add to his own.*Mr. Erskine says that the earliest mention of cards as made known to him by an Oriental writer is when Bābar sends some to Shah Ḥusain Arghūn who was 'very fond' of them, by Mīr 'Alī, the armour-bearer, in 933H. (1526-27). No doubt such an easy means of speeding the hours was known to the ladies of Bābar's family as early as to anyone else, and Gul-badan is perhaps merely describing a new game.
To widows and orphans, and kinsfolk of men who had been wounded and killed at Chausa and Kanauj, or Bhakkar, or who were in the royal service during those intermissions,*Text, fat̤rathā. The begam writes this word sometimes with a tā and sometimes with a t̤o'e. he gave pension, and rations, and water, and land, and servants. In the days of his Majesty's good fortune, great tranquillity and happiness befell soldiers and peasants. They lived without care, and put up many an ardent prayer for his long life. (66a)
A few days later he sent persons to bring Ḥamīda-bānū Begam from Qandahār. When she arrived, they celebrated the feast of the circumcision of the Emperor Jalālu-d-dīn Muḥammad Akbar. Preparations were made, and after the New Year *i.e., Persian era. Niz̤āmu-d-dīn Aḥmad places the date of entry into Kābul by Humāyūn on Ramz̤ān 10th, 953H., and says Akbar was then four years, two months and live days old. 'Some place the event in the year 952H , but God knows the truth.' It is strange that there should be doubt about a historical event occurring not more than fifty years before this resigned statement was made. Abū'l-faẓl gives Ramz̤ān 12th, 952H. (November 17th, 1545 . as the date of entry, which would fix the feast for March, 1546, when Akbar was three years and five months old. (Born October 15th. 1542.) they kept splendid festivity for seventeen days. People dressed in green,*Probably in honour of the spring season. and thirty or forty girls were ordered to wear green and come out to the hills. On the first day of the New Year they went out to the Hill of the Seven Brothers and there passed many days in ease and enjoyment and happiness. The Emperor Muḥammad Akbar was five years old when they made the circumcision feast in Kābul.*This is the garden where the ladies rejoiced after the victory at Pānīpat. (10b) Hence, perhaps, the use of the word ' same.' They decorated all the bāzārs. Mīrzā Hindāl and Mīrzā Yādgār-nāṣir, and the Sult̤āns and amīrs, decorated their quarters beautifully, and in Bega Begam's garden the begams and ladies made theirs quite wonderful in a new fashion.
All the Sult̤āns and amīrs brought gifts to the Audience Hall Garden. (66b) There were many elegant festivities and grand entertainments, and costly khi'lats and head-to-foot*Perhaps there is expressed here a difference of degree of honour in the khi'lat and sar-u-pāī. dresses were bestowed. Peasants and preachers, the pious, the poor and the needy, noble and plebeian, low and high,—everybody lived in peace and comfort, passing the days in amusement and the nights in talk.
Then the Emperor went to Fort Victory (Qila'-i-z̤afar).*Sulaimān had not made submission to Humāyūn, hence this expedition to Badakhshān. In it was Mīrzā Sulaimān, who came out to fight but could not stand face to face with his Majesty and so decided to run away. The Emperor then entered the fort safe and sound. Then he went to Kishm, where, after a little while, an illness attacked his blessed frame and he slept day and night.*He is said to have been insensible for four days. He was nursed by Māh-chūchak and Bībī Fāt̤ima, an armed woman (ordu-begi) of the ḥaram. She was, it would seem, mother of Zuhra āghā, the wife of Khwāja Mu'az̤z̤am, and to save whose life Akbar nearly lost his own. (Elliot, V. 292; B. & H., II. 330 et seq..) When he came to his senses, he sent Mun'im Khān's brother, Faẓā'il Beg, to Kābul, and said: ‘Go! comfort and reassure the people of Kābul. Set them at ease in various ways.*(?) As to his health, and their own safety from Kāmrān' s return, and the continuance of the situation as he had left it. The illness and convalescence lasted at least two months. He fell ill in Shāhdān, between Khishm and Qila'-i-z̤afar, and Qarācha Khān, his vazīr, behaved with decision and good sense, so that Humāyūn's authority was upheld. Let them not quarrel. Say: “It began ill, but has ended well.”’ (67a)
When Faẓā'il Beg had gone, he (Humāyūn) went one day nearer Kābul.*Doubtful translation. Humāyūn is elsewhere said to have gone to Qila'-i-z̤afar to recruit, and Faẓā'il to have arrived in Kābul a few hours after the first news there of the illness. Perhaps one of these occurrences is behind this obscure statement.
False news having been sent to Mīrzā Kāmrān in Bhakkar, he set out post-haste for Kābul. In Ghaznī he killed Zāhid Beg*Husband of Bega Begam's sister. and then came on. It was morning; the Kābulīs were off their guard; the gates had been opened in the old way, and water-carriers and grass-cuts were going in and out, and the mīrzā passed into the fort with all these common people. He at once killed Uncle Muḥammad Alī*Brother of Māham Begain. who was in the hot bath. He alighted at the college of Mullā 'Abdu-l-khāliq.
When the Emperor was starting for Qila'-i-z̤afar, he placed Naukār*Probably the servant sent with gifts by Bābar from Āgra to Kābul. The name looks like that of an Abyssinian. Is it 'new in work,' and a sobriquet given in youth and retained? at the door of the ḥaram. Mīrzā Kāmrān must have asked: ‘Who is in the Bālā-i-ḥiṣār?’ and someone must have said: ‘It is Naukār.’ Naukār heard of this and at once put on a woman's dress and went out. The mīrzā's people laid hands on the doorkeeper of the fort, and took him to Mīrzā Kāmrān, who ordered him to be imprisoned. (67b) The mīrzā's people went into the Bālā-i-ḥiṣār, and plundered and destroyed innumerable things belonging to the ḥaram, and they made settlement*zabt̤ wa rabt̤. Is this an indication of Gul-badan's opinion that Kāmrān profited by the robbery of his relations? His cruelties at this time make theft look innocent. (B. & H., II. 33b et seq..) for them in Mīrzā Kāmrān's court (sarkār). He put the great begams into Mīrzā 'Askarī's house and there he shut up a room with bricks and plaster and (?) dung-cakes, and they used to give the ladies water and food from over the four walls.*The translation of this passage is doubtful.
In what was once Mīrzā Yādgār-nāṣir's house he put Khwāja Mu'az̤z̤am*An undue honour, perhaps prompted by the khwāja's disgrace with Humāyūn. and ordered his own wives and family to stay in the palace where the royal ḥaram and the begams once lived. He behaved very ill indeed to the wives and families of the officers who had left him for the Emperor, ransacking and plundering all their houses and putting each family into somebody's custody.*Probably for the exploitation so often named in the histories.
When the Emperor heard that Mīrzā Kāmrān had come from Bhakkar and was acting in this way, he returned from Qila'-i-z̤afar and Andar-āb safe and sound to Kābul. Qila'-i-z̤afar he gave to Mīrzā Sulaimān. (68a)
When he came near to Kābul, Mīrzā Kāmrān sent for her Highness my mother and for me from the house,*Presumably the brick and mud quarters of the ladies. and gave my mother orders to reside in the armourer's house. To me he said: ‘This is your house as well as mine. You stay here.’ ‘Why,’ I asked, ‘should I stay here? I will stay with my mother.’ He then went on: ‘Moreover, write to Khiẓr Khwāja Khān and tell him to come and join me and to keep an easy mind, for just as Mīrzā 'Askarī and Mīrzā Hindāl are my brothers, so is he. Now is the time to help.’ I answered: ‘Khiẓr Khwāja Khān has no way of recognising a letter*Suād na dārad ki khat̤-i-marā shinasad. I understand that he had not seen her handwriting, and would not know whether a letter purporting to be hers was a forgery. Gul-badan names one son only, Sa'ādat-yār, as being her own. She is now about twenty-five from me. I have never written to him myself. He writes to me when he is away, by the tongue of his sons. Write yourself what is in your mind.’ At last he sent Mahdī Sult̤ān*Brother of Khiẓr and of Yasīn-daulat (Āq Sult̤ān). and Shīr 'Alī to fetch the khān. From the first I had said to the khān: ‘Your brothers may be with Mīrzā Kāmrān, (but) God forbid that you should have the thought of going to him and joining them. (68b) Beware, a thousand times beware of thinking of separating yourself from the Emperor.’ Praise be to God! the khān kept to what I said.
When the Emperor heard that Mīrzā Kāmrān had sent Mahdī Sult̤ān*Brother of Khiẓr and of Yasīn-daulat (Āq Sult̤ān). and Shīr 'Alī to fetch Khiẓr Khwāja Khān, he himself despatched Qambar Beg, the son of Mīrzā Ḥājī, to the khān, who was then in his own jāgīr, and said: ‘Beware, a thousand times beware! Let there be no joining Mīrzā Kāmrān. Come and wait on me.’ The result of this auspicious message was that the khān set out at once for court, and came to the 'Uqābain (Hill of the two eagles) and paid his respects.
When the Emperor passed Minār Hill, Mīrzā Kāmrān sent forward all his well-ordered soldiers under Shīr Afkan,*Son of Quch Beg, an amīr who lost his life in trying to protect Bega Begam at Chausa. the father of Shīroya, so that they might go out and fight. We saw from above*From the citadel where the ladies were. how he went out with his drums beating, out beyond Bābā Dashtī, and we said, ‘God forbid you should fight,’ and we wept. (69a) When he reached the Afghāns' village (Dih-i-Afghānān), the two vanguards came face to face. The royal advance-guard at once drove off the mīrzā's*The begam underrates Humāyūn's victory. The struggle was fierce, renewed and stubborn. and, having taken many prisoners, brought them to the Emperor. He ordered the Mughals to be cut to pieces.*Doubtful translation. Many of the mīrzā's men who had gone out to fight were captured and some of them were killed and some were kept prisoners. Amongst them was Jūkī Khān, one of Mīrzā Kāmrān's amīrs.
In triumph and glory and to the sound of music, the Emperor entered the 'Uqābain, with Mīrzā Hindāl in attendance and a splendid cavalcade. He set up for himself tents and pavilions and an audience hall.*I think she merely wishes to say that Humāyūn camped out on the 'Uqābain, and did not take up quarters under a roof. He gave Mīrzā Hindāl charge of the Mastān bridge,*Under it flows the stream which issues from the defile of Dih-i-ya'qūb. Cf. Āin, Jarrett, I. 404. and stationed the amīrs one after another. For seven months he kept up the blockade.*Of the Bālā-i-ḥiṣar, the actual citadel. (69b)
It happened one day that Mīrzā Kāmrān went from his own quarters to the roof (? of the citadel), and that someone fired a gun from the 'Uqābain. He ran and took himself off. Then he gave this order about the Emperor Akbar: ‘Bring him and put him in front.’*Gul-badan's narrative does not support the story that Māham anaga exposed herself to save Akbar. This person, who later on became so important, is nowhere named by the begam as in charge of Akbar. Her husband, Nadīm kūka, is so named. Someone let his august Majesty (Humāyūn) know that Mīrzā Muḥam-mad Akbar was being kept on the front, so he forbade the guns to be fired and after that none were aimed at the Bālā-i-ḥiṣār. Mīrzā Kāmrān's men used to fire from the town upon the Emperor on the 'Uqābain. The royal soldiers put Mīrzā 'Askarī to stand right in front and made fun of him.
Mīrzā Kāmrān's men also used to make sallies from the fort, and on both sides many were killed. The royal troops were often the victors and then the others had not courage to come out. For the sake of his wives and children and the begams and the household, etc., the Emperor did not have the cannon fired nor did he place the large houses in difficulty. (70a)
When the long siege was ended, they (i.e., the ladies) sent Khwāja Dost Khāwand madārchī*Follower of the Musalmān saint Madār. to his Majesty to say: ‘For God's sake, do whatever Mīrzā Kāmrān asks, and save the servants of God from molestation.’*This message seems one from the imprisoned ladies. The khwāja to whom it was entrusted may now, as in the earlier siege of Kābul, have been Kāmrān's envoy to Humāyūn.
The Emperor sent for their use from outside nine sheep, seven flasks of rose-water, one of lemonade, and seven sets of nine dress-lengths*pārcha and nīmcha dokhta. There seems between these words an apposition which I render by the Englishwoman's colloquial terms. and some made-up jackets.*pārcha and nīmcha dokhta. There seems between these words an apposition which I render by the Englishwoman's colloquial terms. He wrote:*Presumably to some kinsman or official to whom the gifts were consigned. ‘For their sakes, I could not use force against the citadel, lest I should give an advantage to their enemies.’*i.e., by injuring the royal household.
During the siege Jahān Sult̤ān Begam who was two years old, died. His Majesty wrote: ‘Some time or other, if we had used force against the citadel, Mīrzā Muḥammad Akbar would have disappeared.’
To finish the story: There were always people in the Bālā-i-ḥiṣār from evening prayer till dawn, and there was a continuous uproar. The night Mīrzā Kāmrān went away,*April 27th, 1547 (Rabī' I. 7th, 954H.). prayer-time passed and indeed bedtime came, and there was no noise at all. (70b)
There was a steep stair by which people came up from below. When all the city was asleep, there suddenly sounded (on the stair) a clashing and clinking of armour, so that we said to one another: ‘What a noise!’ Perhaps a thousand people were standing in front (of the fort). We were afraid, but all at once, without warning, off they went. Qarācha Khān's son Bahādur brought us word that the mīrzā had fled.*Niz̤āmu-d-dīn Aḥmad says that Kāmrān escaped by a hole fashioned for the purpose in the wall 'on Khiẓr Khwāja's' side. This suggests that Gul-badan's husband connived at the evasion, unless one remembers that Khiẓr Khwāja is a place outside Kābul.
Having thrown a rope, they (or he) brought up Khwāja Mu'az̤z̤am by way of the wall.*I do not understand this sentence. Either the followers of Kāmrān drew the khwāja up into the fort-precincts to take him with them, he having displeased Humāyūn and being nearly connected with him, or the ladies had him drawn up. He was, it seems, not a prisoner. (67b)
Our people and the begam's people and the rest who were outside, took away the door which had kept us fastened in. Bega Begam urged: ‘Let us go to our own houses.’ I said: ‘Have a little patience. We should have to go by the lane and perhaps too someone will come from the Emperor.’ At that moment 'Ambar Nāz̤ir came and said: ‘This is the royal order: “They are not to leave that place till I come.”’ In a little while the Emperor came and embraced Dil-dār Begam and me, and then Bega Begam and Ḥamīda-bānū Begam, and said: ‘Come quickly out of this place. (71a) God preserve His friends from such a house, and let such be the portion of His foes.’ He said to Nāz̤ir: ‘Guard one side,’ and to Tardī Beg Khān: ‘Guard the other, and let the begams pass out.’ All came out, and we spent the evening of that day with the Emperor in perfect content till night became morning. We embraced Māh-chūchak Begam and Khānīsh āghā and those of the ḥaram who had been with the Emperor on the campaign.
In Badakhshān Māh-chūchak had a daughter born. On the same night the Emperor had this dream: ‘Fakhru-n-nisā', my māmā,*Fakhru-n-nisā', the mother of Nadim kūka, would seem from this to have been Humāyūn's own attendant in childhood. and Daulat-bakht came in by the door, and brought something or other, and then left me alone.’ Consider it as he might, he could only ask: ‘What does this dream mean?’ Then it occurred to him that, as a daughter had just been born, he would call her after the two, and taking nisā' from one, and bakht from the other, would run them together into Bakht-nisā'.
Māh-chūchak had four daughters*Gul-badan does not name Fakhru-n-nisā' who became the wife of Shāh 'Abā'l-ma'āli and of Khwāja Ḥasan Naqshbandī. Perhaps she is Bakht-nisa'. and two sons,—Bakht-nisā' Begam, and Sakīna-bānū Begam, and Amīna-bānū Begam, and Muḥammad Hakīm Mīrzā, and Farrukh-fāl Mīrzā. (71b) She was with child when the Emperor went to Hindūstān (1554), and bore a son, in Kābul, whom they named Farrukh-fāl Mīrzā. A little later Khānish āghā had a son whom they named Ibrāhīm Sult̤ān Mīrzā.
The Emperor spent a full year and a half in Kābul, prosperously and happily, and in comfort and sociability.*From 1547; but a term of one and a half years does not quite fit the facts. Humāyūn started for the north on June 12th, 1548. (B & H., II. 352.)
After taking flight from Kābul, Mīrzā Kāmrān went to Badakhshān, and there stayed in Tāliqān. One day the Emperor was in the Inner Garden,*ōrta-bāgh. and when he rose at dawn for prayers, news came that many of the amīrs who formerly were with the mīrzā, had gone to him again. Amongst them were Qarācha Khān and Muṣāḥib Khān, and Mubāriz Khān and Bāpūs.*Perhaps it may be taken as an indication of the degradation of 'home life' that Qarācha and Bāpūs again joined Kāmrān, although the latter had exposed Qarācha's son and a wife of Bāpūs on the battlements, with the utmost dishonour, and had killed three of the latter's children and flung their bodies from the ramparts. Many wretches fled by night and went to join the mīrzā in Badakhshān.
In a propitious hour the Emperor also started for Badakhshān. He besieged the mīrzā in Tāliqān, and after a time made him agree to submit and become obedient (72a) when he waited on the Emperor, who bestowed Kulāb on him, and gave Qila'-i-z̤afar to Mīrzā Sulaimān, Qandahār (sic; (?) Kunduz) to Mīrzā Hindāl, and Tāliqān to Mīrzā 'Askarī.
One day at Kishm*Abū'l-faẓl says the meeting was at Ishkāmish, and this seems to agree with the movements of Humāyūn better than Kishm. they had set up*khirgaā dokhta budand. Certain tents are termed dokhta, sewed. They seem to have been large, and were laced together, whence, perhaps, dokhta. For an interesting account of this historic family gathering see B. & H., II. 358 et seq.. the tents and there was an assembly of the brothers, his Majesty the Emperor Humāyūn, and Mīrzā Kāmrān, and Mīrzā 'Askārī, and Mīrzā Hindāl, and Mīrzā Sulaimān.*'Brother' by courtesy and custom; anglice, 'cousin.'
His Majesty enjoined certain regulations*Tūrā, the Institutes of Chingiz Khān of which the begam makes other mention. which are fixed for interviews with kings, and said: ‘Bring ewer and basin so that we may wash our hands and eat together.’ He washed his hands and Mīrzā Kāmrān washed his. By years Mīrzā Sulaimān (b. 920H.) had precedence of Mīrzā 'Askarī (b. 922H.) and Mīrzā Hindāl (b. 925H.). So, to show him respect, the two brothers set the ewer and basin first before him.
After washing his hands Mīrzā Sulaimān did something improper with his nose. Mīrzā 'Askarī and Mīrzā Hindāl were much put out, and said: ‘What rusticity is this? (72b) First of all, what right have we to wash our hands in his Majesty's presence? but when he bestows the favour and gives the order, we cannot change it. What sense is there in these nose-wagging performances?’ Then the two mīrzās went and washed their hands outside and came back and sat down. Mīrzā Sulaimān was very much ashamed. They all ate at one tablecloth.
At this gathering his Majesty graciously remembered this lowly person, and said to his brothers: ‘Gul-badan Begam used to say in Lāhōr: “I wish I could see all my brothers together!” As we have been seated together since early morning, her words have occurred to my mind. If it be the will of the most high God, may our assembly be kept in His own place! He knows without shadow that it lies not in my heart's depths to seek any Musalmān's ill; how then, should I seek the hurt of my brothers? May God grant to you all the same divine and beneficent guidance, so that our agreement and concord may endure!’ (73a)
There was wonderful cheerfulness and happiness because many officers and their followers met their relations again, for they too had been sundered because of their masters' quarrels. Nay! one might rather say they had thirsted for one another's blood. Now they passed their time in complete happiness.
On his return from Badakhshān the Emperor spent a year and a half in Kābul and then resolved to go to Balkh. He took up his quarters in the Heart-expanding Garden,*i.e., moved out of the city as a preliminary to marching. and his own residence was over against the lower part of the garden, and the begams were in Qulī Beg's house because it was close by.
The begams said to the Emperor over and over again: ‘Oh, how the rīwāj*The following account of this plant is taken from Conolly's Travels, I., 213 n. . It is translated by him from the Makāzinu-l-adwiya (Treasury of Medicines). 'Rībās, rīvās, rīwāj or jigarī (so named from a person of Nishāpūur who first discovered it) is a shrub two or three feet high, in appearance like beet (salq). In the middle are one or two short stems of little thickness; the leaves, which separate lengthwise like those of a lettuce, are downy and green, but towards the root, of a violet or whitish colour. The heart is white, delicate, juicy, acidulous and slightly astringent. Altogether the stalk is the size of a man's arm and when the plant is large every leaf has the size of a man's hand. Ārd-shīr was named Rāwand-dast (rhubarb-hand) from the length of his hands. The root is called rāwand (rhubarb). The top is like the claw of a fowl. The flower is red, and the taste is subacid with a little sweetness. The seed is formed at the top of a long slender stalk which springs up annually in the centre of the plant. It grows where snow lies and in mountainous countries. The best grows in Persia. It is medicinally attenuating and astringent, gives tone to the stomach, and improves the appetite. A collyrium of the juice strengthens the eye and prevents opacity, and a poultice of it with barley-meal is a useful application to sores and boils. The juice of the rīvās is harsher than that of unripe grapes.' For mention of the name rīwāj see T̤abaqāt-i-akbarī,, Lucknow lith. ed., 215 ; Tūzūk-i-jahāngīrī, 47. Vullers, s.v., etc. . Mr. Erskine writes (Mems., 138 n..): 'It is described as somewhat like beetroot, but much larger, red and white in colour, with large leaves that rise little from the ground. It is a pleasant mixture of sweet and acid. It may be the rhubarb, rāwand.' will be coming up!’ He replied: ‘When I join the army, I shall travel by the Koh-dāman, so that you may come out and see the rīwāj growing.’ It was at afternoon prayer-time that he rode out*Presumably from Kābul, and on the day of starting for Balkh viâ the Koh-dāman. (of Kābul) to the garden. Qulī Beg's house where the begams were, was close by and overlooked it, and his Majesty pulled up as he passed, and all the begams saw him, and rose and made the kōrnish. (73b) Directly they had made this salutation, he beckoned with his own blessed hand, to say: ‘Come.’*The ladies seem to have been waiting for this signal to start.
Fakhru-n-nisā' māmā and Afghānī āghācha went on a little ahead. There was a stream in the lower part of the garden which Afghānī āghācha could not cross, and she fell off her horse. For this reason there was an hour's delay.*Probably to allow for the coming of a less unpropitious hour. This expedition to Balkh ended in a way calculated to attract notice to ill-omens such as the begam's misadventures would seem. At last we set out with his Majesty. Māh-chūchak Begam not knowing, her horse went up a little.*andak buland raft. Perhaps the horse reared, the begam not knowing how to manage it; but the later and otherwise irrelevant sentence about the unfinished wall suggests that the begam went too high up the hill. The party is now on its way to see the rīwāj growing, and Humāyūn's temper is tried by the various contretemps of the ladies' cavalcade. His Majesty was very much annoyed about this. The garden was on a height and the walls were not yet made. Some vexation now showed itself in his blessed countenance and he was pleased to say: ‘All of you go on, and I will follow when I have taken some opium and got over my annoyance.’ He joined us when we had, as he ordered, gone on a little. The look of vexation was entirely laid aside and he came with a happy and beautiful look in his face.
It was a moonlight night. (83a) We talked and told stories,*A folio of the MS. is, I believe, misplaced, and folio 83 should come in here. In the MS. volume this is the last folio. and Mīr (fault) and Khānish āghācha and Z̤arīf the reciter and Sarū-sahī and Shāham āghā sang softly, softly.
Up to the time of our reaching Laghmān, neither the royal tents nor the pavilions of the begams had arrived, but the mihr-amez*Perhaps a tent of Humāyūn's invention, in the name of which mihr means sun. Cf. 'another of his (Humāyūn's) inventions was a tent which had twelve divisions, corresponding to the signs of the Zodiac. Every sign had a lattice through which the lights of the stars of dominion shone.' (Akbar-nāma, H. Beveridge I. 361.) tent had come. We all, his Majesty and all of us, and Ḥamīda-bānū Begam sat in that tent till three hours past midnight and then we went to sleep where we were, in company with that altar of truth (Humāyūn).
Early next morning he wished to go and see the rīwāj on the Kōh. The begams' horses were in the village, so the starting-time passed before they came up. The Emperor ordered that the horses of everyone who was outside should be brought. When they came he gave the order: ‘Mount.’
Bega Begam and Māh-chūchak Begam were still putting on their head-to-foot dresses, and I said to the Emperor: ‘If you think well, I will go and fetch them.’ ‘Go,’ he answered, ‘and bring them quickly.’ I said to the begams and to Māh-chūchak Begam and the rest of the ladies: ‘I have become the slave of his Majesty's wishes. What trouble waiting gives!’ I was gathering them all together and bringing them when he came to meet me and said: ‘Gul-badan! the proper hour for starting has gone by. (83b) It would be hot the whole way. God willing, we will go after offering the afternoon prayer.’ He seated himself in a tent with Ḥamīda-bānū Begam.*Perhaps, a tent of Hamīda having come, he seated himself in it. After afternoon prayers, there was the interval between two prayers before the horses arrived. In this interval he went away.*(?) the start was made to see the rīwāj.
Everywhere in the Dāman-i-kōh the rīwāj had put up its leaves. We went to the skirts of the hills and when it was evening, we walked about. Tents and pavilions were pitched on the spot and there his Majesty came and stayed. Here too we passed the nights together in sociable talk, and were all in company of that altar of truth.
In the morning at prayer-time, he went away to a distance (bīrūn), and from there wrote separate letters to Bega Begam and to Ḥamīda-bānū Begam and to Māh-chūchak Begam and to me and to all the begams,*Humāyūn's comprehensive displeasure looks like a fit of temper directed against every and any one. It is possible, however, that a page which might describe other untoward matters besides unpunctuality, has been altogether lost. The sentence which now continues the story, places all the ladies, deprived of their evening of talk and amusement, in chastened solitude. saying: ‘Becoming spokeswoman of your own fault, write apologizing for the trouble you have given. God willing, I shall say farewell and go to join the army either at Farẓa or Istālīf, and if not we shall travel apart.’ (74a)
Then everyone wrote to apologize for having given trouble, and sent the letter for his holy and elevating service.
In the end his Majesty and all the begams mounted and rode by Lamghān to Bihzādī. At night each one went to her own quarters, and in the morning they ate (? alone), and at mid-day prayer-time rode to Farẓa.
Ḥamīda-bānū Begam sent nine sheep to the quarters of each one of us. Bībī Daulat-bakht had come one day earlier to Farẓa and had got ready plenty of provisions and milk and curds and syrup and sherbet and so on. We spent that evening in amusement. In the early morning (we went) above Farẓa to where there is a beautiful waterfall. Then his Majesty went to Istālīf and passed three days, and then in 958H.*B. & H., II. 368, has 956H. (1549), and other differences of detail. marched towards Balkh.
When he crossed the pass, he sent farmāns to summon Mīrzā Kāmrān and Mīrzā Sulaimān and Mīrzā 'Askarī, and said: ‘We are on the march to fight the Uzbegs; now is the time for union and brotherliness. You ought to come as quickly as possible.’ Mīrzā Sulaimān and Mīrzā 'Askarī came and joined him. (74b) Then march by march they came to Balkh.
In Balkh was Pīr Muḥammad Khān,*Son of Jānī Beg, and uncle of the famous 'Abdu-l-lāh Khan Uzbeg. He ruled till 974H. (1566-67). and on the first day his men sallied out and drew up in battle array. The royal army carried off the victory, and Pīr Muḥammad's men tasted defeat and returned to the city. By the next morning the khān had come to think: ‘The Chaghatāī are strong; I cannot fight them. It would be better to get out and away.’ Just then the royal officers joined in representing that the camp had become filthy, and that it would be well to move to a desert place (dasht). His Majesty ordered them to do so.
No sooner were hands laid on the baggage and packsaddles, than others raised a clamour and some cried out: ‘We are not strong enough.’ Since such was the Divine will, the royal army took the road without cause from a foe, without reason or motive.*From other sources we learn that the royalists were anxious on two grounds; (1) as to the threatened arrival of an overwhelming Uzbeg force from Bukhārā, and (2) lest Kāmrān should again take Kābul and have their families at his mercy. The last was perhaps the dominant motive for the flight without a pursuer. The news of their march reached the Uzbegs and amazed them. Try as the royal officers would, they produced not a scrap of effect. It could not be hindered: the royal army ran away. (75a)
The Emperor waited a little, and when he saw that no one was left, he too had to go. Mīrzā 'Āskarī and Mīrzā Hindāl, not having heard of the confusion, rode up to the camp. They found no one and saw that the Uzbegs had gone in pursuit, so they too took the road and made for Kunduz. After riding a little way, his Majesty stopped and said: ‘My brothers are not here yet: how can I go on?’ He asked the officers and attendants whether anyone would bring him news of the princes. No one answered or went. Later on word came from the Mīrzā's people in Kunduz that they had heard of the disaster and did not know where the princes had gone. This letter upset the Emperor very much. Khiẓr Khwāja Khān said: ‘If you approve, I will bring news.’ ‘God's mercy on you!’ rejoined his Majesty. ‘May they have gone to Kunduz!’ (75b)
Two days afterwards the khwāja, to the Emperor's great delight, brought word that Mīrzā Hindāl had arrived at Kunduz safe and sound. His Majesty gave Mīrzā Sulaimān leave to go to his own place, Qila'-i-z̤afar, and came himself to Kābul (1550, 957H.).
While Mīrzā Kāmrān was in Kūlāb, a woman named Tarkhān*This title indicates rank. A 'Tarkhān Begam' was wife of Sult̤ān Aḥmad Mīrzā. (Merns., 22..) Bega, who was a thorough cheat, showed him the way by saying: ‘Make a declaration of love to Ḥaram Begam.*or Khurram. One of her sisters was a wife of Kāmrān. Good will come of it.’ Acting on these words of an ill-judging adviser, he actually sent a letter and a kerchief*What fascination may lurk in an embroidered kerchief can be guessed by inspecting the dainty examples in the South Kensington Oriental Section. to Ḥaram Begam by the hand of Begī āghā. This woman laid the letter and the kerchief before the begam and then set forth the mīrzā's devotion and passion. Ḥaram Begam said: ‘Keep that letter and that kerchief now and bring them again when the mīrzās come home.’ Begī āghā then wept, and moaned, and coaxed, and said: ‘Mīrzā Kāmrān has sent you this letter and this kerchief; he has loved you a long time, and you have no pity for him.’ (76a) Ḥaram Begam began to show her disgust and violent anger, and at once sent off for her husband, Mīrzā Sulaimān, and her son, Mīrzā Ibrāhīm. She said to them: ‘Mīrzā Kāmrān must have come to think you are cowards, since he sends me a letter like this. Have I deserved to be written to in this way? He is as your elder brother, and I am to him as a younger brother's wife.*kīlīn. Both here and at 77b this word seems to have wider meaning than is given by the Turkī and Persian dictionaries. Send off a letter for me about it and rebuke him. As for this wretch of a woman, tear her piece by piece. Let her be a warning to others that no man may cast the evil eye of sinful thought upon another man's womanfolk. What does such a man deserve who, the son of a mother, yet does such monstrous things, and who fears neither me*The begam's martial character spices this story, since her husband did not dare even to make war without her consent. Perhaps Kāmrān' s devotion extended to the armed force she disposed of. It was clearly in Tarkhān Bega's eye. nor my son?’
Instantly hands were laid on Begī āghā Bībī, condemned of fate to die, and she was torn in pieces. In consequence of this affair, Mīrzā Sulaimān and Mīrzā Ibrāhīm were displeased with Mīrzā Kāmrān, or rather they became his enemies. (76b) They wrote to the Emperor that Mīrzā Kāmrān wished to thwart him and that this could not be better seen than in his failure to go to Balkh with him.
After this the mīrzā, in Kūlāb,*In Kūlāb were the kinsfolk of his wife, Māh Begam, sister of Haram Begam, daughter of Sult̤ān Wais Qibchāq, and sister of Chakr 'Alī Khān. could not find, in his terror-stricken thoughts, any better remedy than to become a darvish. He sent his son, Abū'l-qāsim (Ibrāhīm) to Mīrzā 'Askarī, and betook himself to Tāliqān with his daughter 'Āyisha (Sult̤ān Begam), and said to his wife (Muḥtarīma Khānam): ‘Do you and your daughter follow me later. I will send for you to whatever place I settle on. Till then go and stay in Khost and Andar-āb.’ The khānam was related to the Uzbeg khāns, and some of her kinsfolk let the Uzbegs*i.e., across whose country she had to travel. know: ‘If you want booty, there are goods and men and women servants; take these, and let the lady go free, for if 'Āyisha Sult̤ān Khānam's*(?) Mughal Khānam. nephew hears to-morrow (that she has been hurt), he will certainly be very angry with you.’ By a hundred plans and wiles, and with a hundred anxieties, and without her goods, she got free from the Uzbeg bondage, and reached Khost and Andar-āb. Here she stayed.
When Mīrzā Kāmrān heard of the royal disaster in Balkh, he said: ‘The Emperor is not so friendly to me as he was.’ (77a) So he left Kūlāb, and went hither and thither.
At this time (1550) his Majesty came out from Kābul. When he reached the Qibchāq defile, he incautiously halted in a low-lying place, and Mīrzā Kāmrān, coming from higher ground, armed and equipped, poured down foes upon him. Since such was the Divine will, a barbarian,—inwardly blind, an ill-fated oppressor and ill-omened tyrant,—inflicted a wound on the Emperor. The blow reached his bleassed head, and all his forehead and his dear eyes were stained with blood.
It was just like it was in the Mughal war when the blessed head of his Majesty Firdaus-makānī, the Emperor Bābar, was wounded by a Mughal, and his high cap and the turban wrapped round it were not cut, but his blessed head was badly hurt. His Majesty Humāyūn used to say with surprise: ‘I wondered at it, for cap and cloth were whole, and yet the head was cut.’*'Tambol let fall a heavy sword-blow on my head. It is a singular fact that, though not a thread of my cap of mail was injured, yet my head was severely wounded.' (Mems., 266. Also 111.) The very same thing happened now to his own head.
After the rout in the Qibchāq defile, his Majesty went to Badakhshān, and Mīrzā Hindal, and Mīrzā Sulaimān, and Mīrzā Ibrāhīm came and waited on him. (77b) He went*Niz̤āmu-d-dīn Aḥmad, 'after forty days.' to Kābul and the mīrzās were in attendance, friendly and united and at peace together, when Mīrzā Kāmrān approached. His Majesty sent a message to Ḥaram Begam: ‘Ask my kīlīn*Cf. 77a n.. This story bears out Ḥaram's military reputation. Kāmraān's power of attraction and Humāyūn's present risk can be gauged by the fact that even after the defeat at Chārīkārān some 1,500 horse were with the former, and many amīrs again went over to him. It was now that the remarkable compact which effected Kāmrān's downfall was made between Humāyūn and his amīrs. (B. & H., II. 338.) These swore fidelity by whatever oath would bind them and then, at the instance of Ḥajī Muḥammad Khān kūka, Humāyūn bound himself to, do as he was told. The compact was effective. The amīrs were the long-suffering victims of Humāyūn's folly and their present turning was, he admitted, justifiable. to send me the army of Badakhshān as quickly as possible and ready for service.’ In a few days, —a very short time,—the begam had given horses and arms to some thousands of men. She herself superintended and took thought and she came with the troops as far as the pass. From here she sent them forward, and while she went back they went on and joined the Emperor.
Either at Chārkārān or Qarā-bāgh there was fighting with Mīrzā Kāmrān and his Majesty's army was successful. The mīrzā fled to the mountain passes (tangayhā) and Lamghānāt.*Niz̤āmu-d-dīn Aḥmad, 'mountains of Mandrūd.' B. &H.;, II. 393, 'by the Pass of Bādpaj towards the Afghān country.'
Āq Sult̤ān (Yasīn-daulat) who was the mīrzā's son-in law, said in effect to him (gufta bāshad): ‘You are continually thwarting the Emperor. What is the meaning of it? It is not what should be. (78a) Either make your submission and obeisance to the Emperor or give me leave to go, so that men may distinguish between us.’ Mīrzā Kāmrān said fiercely: ‘Have my affairs come to such a pass that you offer me advice?’ Āq Sult̤ān also spoke angrily, ‘If I stay with you, my position will be unlawful,’ and left him at once, and went with his wife Ḥabība) to Bhakkar. The mīrzā wrote to Mīrzā Shāh Ḥusain, and said: ‘Āq Sult̤ān has displeased me and has gone away. If he comes to Bhakkar, do not let his wife be with him. Part them and tell him to go where he likes.’ Shāh Ḥusain Mīrzā at once, on receiving the letter, deprived Ḥabība Sult̤ān Begam of the company of Āq Sult̤ān and let him depart for the blessed Makka.*Kāmrān was the son-in-law of Mīr Shāh Ḥusain Arghūn, and was therefore able to secure this interference with Āq Sult̤ān's domestic affairs.
In the fight at Chārīkārān, Qarācha Khān*Cf. Elliot, V. 233. and many of Mīrzā Kāmrān's well-known officers were killed.
' Āyisha Sult̤ān Begam*Kāmrān's daughter. and Daulat-bakht āghācha were in flight for Qandahār, and were captured at the Khimār Pass, and brought in by the Emperor's people. Mīrzā Kāmrān went to the Afghāns,*i.e., Lamghān. and stayed amongst them. (78b)
From time to time his Majesty used to visit the orange-gardens. That year also, according to his old habit, he went to the mountain passes (tangayhā) to see the oranges. Mīrzā Hindāl was in attendance, and of the ladies (ḥaramān), there went Bega Begam, Ḥamīda-bānū Begam, Māh-chūchak Begam and many others. I could not go because my son, Sa'ādat-yār, was ill at the time. One day his Majesty, attended by Mīrzā Hindāl, was hunting near the mountain passes. They had very good sport. The Emperor went towards where the mīrzā was hunting and had made a very good bag. Following the rules of Chingīz Khān, the mīrzā proffered his game to the Emperor, for it is a rule of Chingīz Khān that inferiors should so act towards their superiors. In short, he gave the Emperor all his game. Then it occurred to him: ‘There is still my sisters' portion. (79a) They shall not complain again. I will hunt once more and get them a share.’ Again he busied himself in hunting, and had taken one head of game, and was returning, when someone sent by Mīrzā Kāmrān blocked the road, and shot an arrow at the unwitting mīrzā which struck his blessed shoulder. Acting on the thought ‘God forbid my sisters and womenfolk should be upset by news of this,’ he wrote off at once to say: ‘Ill begun has ended well!*Repetition of a proverb already quoted. Do not be anxious, for I am getting better.’ To finish the story: as it was hot, his Majesty went back to Kābul, and in the course of a year the arrow-wound got better.
A year later word was brought that Mīrzā Kāmrān had collected troops and was preparing for war. His Majesty also, taking military appurtenances, set out for the mountain passes (tangayhā) with Mīrzā Hindāl. He went safe and well, and made his honouring halt in the passes. Hour by hour, and all the time, spies kept bringing news: ‘Mīrzā Kāmrān has decided that an attack must be made to-night.’ (79b) Mīrzā Hindāl went to the Emperor and submitted his advice: ‘Let your Majesty stay on this high ground, and let my brother (nephew) Jalālu-d-dīn Muḥammad Akbar pādshāh stay with you, so that careful watch may be kept on this height.’ Then he called up his own men, and encouraged and cheered them one by one, and said: ‘Put earlier services in one scale and the service of this night in the other. God willing! whatever claim you can make, you shall be exalted to its degree.’*Perhaps the notion of this sentence is, 'To-night's service will equal or outweigh previous services, and the lower tonight's scale is forced, the greater will be my largesse.' One by one he allotted their posts, and then called for his own cuirass and surtout, and high cap and helmet.
His wardrobe-keeper had lifted up the wallet when someone sneezed,*It is hardly necessary to say that sneezing is by many nations regarded as an omen of other things than catarrh. and he set it down for a while. Because of this delay, the mīrzā sent to hurry him. Then the things were brought quickly, and he asked: ‘Why were you so long?’ The man replied: ‘I had lifted the wallet when someone sneezed, and I therefore put it down. So there was a delay.’ (80a)
The mīrzā replied: ‘You were wrong. (You should have) said rather: “May there be a blessed martyrdom.”’ Then he went on: ‘Friends all! be my witness that I abjure all forbidden things and all indecorous acts.’ Those present recited the fātḥiha and prayed: ‘May there be benediction.’ He said: ‘Bring my vest and cuirass and surtout.’ He put them on and went out to the trenches to encourage and solace his men. Just then his t̤abaqchī,*Clerk of the scullery who has charge of plates and dishes, utensils which are often of value by material and by workmanship. hearing his voice, cried: ‘They are attacking me.’ The mīrzā, hearing this, dismounted and said: ‘Friends, it is far from brave to give no help when my servant is at the point of the sword.’ He himself went down into the trench but not one of his followers dismounted. Twice he sallied from the trenches, and in this endeavour became a martyr.
I do not know what pitiless oppressor slew that harmless youth*Hindāl was killed on Ẕī'l-qa'dā 21st, 958H. (November 20th, 1551). He was born before March 4th, 1519 (Mems., 258.), and was therefore in his thirty-third year. Gul-badan always speaks of her brother with affection, and her story shows that she mourned his loss many years. Her book lets us see a group of living and feeling men and women. with his tyrant sword! Would to Heaven that merciless sword had touched my heart and eyes, or Sa ādat-yār, my son's, or Khiẓr Khwāja Khān's! Alas! a hundred regrets! Alas! a thousand times alas! (80b)
O well-a-day! O well-a-day! O well-a-day!
My sun is sunk behind a cloud.
All may be said in a word: Mīrzā Hindāl gave his life freely for his sovereign.
Mīr Bābā Dost lifted him up and carried him to his quarters. He told no one, and fetched servants and placed them at the entrance and gave orders: ‘Tell everyone who asks, that the mīrzā is badly wounded and that the Emperor forbids anyone to enter.’
Then he went and said to his Majesty: ‘Mīrzā Hindāl is wounded.’ The Emperor called for a horse; ‘I will go and see him.’ Mīr 'Abdu-l-ḥaī said: ‘He is badly hurt. It is not desirable that you should go.’ He understood, and however much he tried,*ḥafz̤ kardand. Perhaps as a matter of etiquette which demands composure in public. he could not help it, he broke down.
Jūī-shāhī*Text, Jūsāhī, the modern Jalalabad, on the road to Kabul. was Khiẓr Khwāja Khān's jāgīr. The Emperor sent for him and said: ‘Take Mīrzā Hindāl to Jūī-shāhī and care for his burial.’ The khān took the camel's bridle,*i.e., that of the camel which bore the corpse. and when he was going away with weeping and lament and voice uplifted in grief, (81a) his Majesty heard of the mourning and sent him word: ‘We must have patience! This sorrow touches my heart more closely than yours, but I do not give way because I think of our bloodthirsty, tyrannical foe. With him at hand, there is no help but patience.’ Then the khān with a hundred regrets, miserable and stricken, conveyed the body to Jūī-shāhī, and there laid and left it.
If that slayer of a brother, that stranger's friend, the monster, Mīrzā Kāmrān had not come that night, this calamity would not have descended from the heavens.
His Majesty sent letters to his sisters in Kābul, and the city at once became like one house of mourning. Doors and walls wept and bewailed the death of the happy, martyred mīrzā.
Gul-chihra Begam had gone to Qarā Khān's house. When she came back, it was like the day of resurrection.*Khwānd-amīr compares a hustle of people to the day of resurrection. Through weeping and sorrow she fell quite ill and went out of her mind.
It was by Mīrzā Kāmrān's evil fate that Mīrza Hindāl became a martyr. From that time forth we never heard that his affairs prospered. On the contrary, they waned day by day and came to naught and perished. (81b) He set his face to evil in such fashion that fortune never befriended him again nor gave him happiness. It was as though Mīrzā Hindāl had been the life, or rather the light-giving eye of Mīrzā Kāmrān, for after that same defeat he fled straight away to Salīm Shāh, the son of Shīr Khān. Salīm Shāh gave him a thousand rupīs.*A scornful measure of Kāmrān's fall. The date is the end both of 1552 and of 959H. Then the mīrzā told in what position he was, and asked help. Salīm Shāh said nothing openly in reply, but in private he remarked: ‘How can a man be helped who killed his own brother, Mīrzā Hindāl? It is best to destroy him and bring him to naught.’ Mīrzā Kāmrān heard of this opinion and one night, without even consulting his people, he resolved on flight and got away, and his own men had not even a word of it. They stayed behind and when news of the flight reached Salīm Shāh, he imprisoned many of them.
Mīrzā Kāmrān had gone as far as Bhīra and Khūsh-āb when Adam Ghakkar, by plot and stratagems, captured him and brought him to the Emperor. (82a)
To be brief, all the assembled khāns and Sult̤āns, and high and low, and plebeian and noble, and soldiers and the rest who all bore the mark of Mīrzā Kāmrān's hand, with one voice represented to his Majesty: ‘Brotherly custom has nothing to do with ruling and reigning. If you wish to act as a brother, abandon the throne. If you wish to be king, put aside brotherly sentiment. What kind of wound was it that befell your blessed head in the Qibchāq defile through this same Mīrzā Kāmrān? He it was whose traitorous and crafty conspiracy with the Afghāns killed Mīrzā Hindāl. Many a Chaghatāī has perished through him; women and children have been made captive and lost honour. It is impossible that our wives and children should suffer in the future the thrall and torture of captivity. (82b) With the fear of hell before our eyes*bar jahannum, which I take as an oath. Cf. bar haq. (we say that) our lives, our goods, our wives, our children are all a sacrifice for a single hair of your Majesty's head. This is no brother! This is your Majesty's foe!’
To make an end of words, one and all urgently set forth: ‘It is well to lower the head of the breacher of a kingdom.’
His Majesty answered: ‘Though my head inclines to your words, my heart does not.’ All cried out: ‘What has been set before your Majesty is the really advisable course.’ At last the Emperor said: ‘If you all counsel this and agree to it, gather together and attest it in writing.’ All the amīrs both of the right and left assembled. They wrote down and gave in that same line (miṣra'): ‘It is well to lower the head of the breacher of the kingdom.’ Even his Majesty was compelled to agree.
When he drew near to Rohtās, the Emperor gave an order to Sayyid Muḥammad: ‘Blind Mīrzā Kāmrān in both eyes.’ The sayyid went at once and did so.
After the blinding, his Majesty the Emperor*Here in the MS. volume follows folio 83, which I have conjectured should follow folio 736, and have placed there. …
The History of Humayun: Humayun-nama by Gul-badan Begum. Translated by Annette S. Beveridge with introduction, notes, illustrations and biographical appendix and reproduced in the Persian from the only known MS of the British Museum. London: Royal Asiatic Society , 1902. pp. 83-201.
Annotated by Murari Jha
The Habits and Manners of the Emperor Aurangzeb, 1666
Bakhtawar Khan
Be it known to the readers of this work that this humble slave of the Almighty is going to describe in a correct manner the excellent character, the worthy habits and the refined morals of this most virtuous monarch, Abú-l Muzaffar Muhiu-d dín Muhammad Aurangzeb 'Álamgír, according as he has witnessed them with his own eyes. The Emperor, a great worshipper of God by natural propensity, is remarkable for his rigid attachment to religion. He is a follower of the doctrines of the Imám Abú Hanífa (may God be pleased with him!), and establishes the five fundamental doctrines of the Kanz. Having made his ablutions, he always occupies a great part of his time in adoration of the Deity, and says the usual prayers, first in the masjid and then at home, both in congregation and in private, with the most heartfelt devotion. He keeps the appointed fasts on Fridays and other sacred days, and he reads the Friday prayers in the Jámi' masjid with the common people of the Muhammadan faith. He keeps vigils during the whole of the sacred nights, and with the light of the favour of God illumines the lamps of religion and prosperity. From his great piety, he passes whole nights in the Mosque which is in his palace, and keeps company with men of devotion. In privacy he never sits on a throne. He gave away in alms before his accession a portion of his allowance of lawful food and clothing, and now devotes to the same purpose the income of a few villages in the district of Dehlí, and the proceeds of two or three salt-producing tracts, which are appropriated to his privy purse. The Princes also follow the same example. During the whole month of Ramazán he keeps fast, says the prayers appointed for that month, and reads the holy Kurán in the assembly of religious and learned men, with whom he sits for that purpose during six, and sometimes nine hours of the night. During the last ten days of the month, he performs worship in the mosque, and although, on account of several obstacles, he is unable to proceed on a pilgrimage to Mecca, yet the care which he takes to promote facilities for pilgrims to that holy place may be considered equivalent to the pilgrimage.
From the dawn of his understanding he has always refrained from prohibited meats and practices, and from his great holiness has adopted nothing but that which is pure and lawful. Though he has collected at the foot of his throne those who inspire ravishment in joyous assemblies of pleasure, in the shape of singers who possess lovely voices and clever instrumental performers, and in the commencement of his reign sometimes used to hear them sing and play, and though he himself understands music well, yet now for several years past, on account of his great restraint and self-denial, and observance of the tenets of the great Imám (Sháfi'í), (may God's mercy be on him!), he entirely abstains from this amusement. If any of the singers and musicians becomes ashamed of his calling, he makes an allowance for him or grants him land for his maintenance.
He never puts on the clothes prohibited by religion, nor does he ever use vessels of silver or gold. In his sacred Court no improper conversation, no word of backbiting or falsehood, is allowed. His courtiers, on whom his light is reflected, are cautioned that if they have to say anything which might injure the character of an absent man, they should express themselves in decorous language and at full detail. He appears two or three times every day in his court of audience with a pleasing countenance and mild look, to dispense justice to complainants who come in numbers without any hindrance, and as he listens to them with great attention, they make their representations without any fear or hesitation, and obtain redress from his impartiality. If any person talks too much, or acts in an improper manner, he is never displeased, and he never knits his brows. His courtiers have often desired to prohibit people from showing so much boldness, but he remarks that by hearing their very words, and seeing their gestures, he acquires a habit of forbearance and tolerance. All bad characters are expelled from the city of Dehlí, and the same is ordered to be done in all places throughout the whole empire. The duties of preserving order and regularity among the people are very efficiently attended to, and throughout the empire, notwithstanding its great extent, nothing can be done without meeting with the due punishment enjoined by the Muhammadan law. Under the dictates of anger and passion he never issues orders of death. In consideration of their rank and merit, he shows much honour and respect to the Saiyids, saints and learned men, and through his cordial and liberal exertions, the sublime doctrines of Hanífa and of our pure religion have obtained such prevalence throughout the wide territories of Hindústán as they never had in the reign of any former king.
Hindú writers have been entirely excluded from holding public offices, and all the worshipping places of the infidels and the great temples of these infamous people have been thrown down and destroyed in a manner which excites astonishment at the successful completion of so difficult a task. His Majesty personally teaches the sacred kalima to many infidels with success, and invests them with khil'ats and other favours. Alms and donations are given by this fountain of generosity in such abundance, that the emperors of past ages did not give even a hundredth part of the amount. In the sacred month of Ramazán sixty thousand rupees, and in the other months less than that amount, are distributed among the poor. Several eating houses have been established in the capital and other cities, at which food is served out to the helpless and poor, and in places where there were no caravanserais for the lodging of the travellers, they have been built by the Emperor. All the mosques in the empire are repaired at the public expense. Imáms, criers to the daily prayers, and readers of the khutba, have been appointed to each of them, so that a large sum of money has been and is still laid out in these disbursements. In all the cities and towns of this extensive country pensions and allowances and lands have been given to learned men and professors, and stipends have been fixed for scholars according to their abilities and qualifications.
As it is a great object with this Emperor that all Muham-madans should follow the principles of the religion as expounded by the most competent law officers and the followers of the Hanífí persuasion, and as these principles, in consequence of the different opinions of the kázis and muftís which have been delivered without any authority, could not be distinctly and clearly learnt, and as there was no book which embodied them all, and as until many books had been collected and a man had obtained sufficient leisure, means and knowledge of theological subjects, he could not satisfy his inquiries on any disputed point, therefore His Majesty, the protector of the faith, determined that a body of eminently learned and able men of Hindústán should take up the voluminous and most trustworthy works which were collected in the royal library, and having made a digest of them, compose a book which might form a standard canon of the law, and afford to all an easy and available means of ascertaining the proper and authoritative interpretation. The chief conductor of this difficult undertaking was the most learned man of the time, Shaikh Nizám, and all the members of the society were very handsomely and liberally paid, so that up to the present time a sum of about two hundred thousand rupees has been expended in this valuable compilation, which contains more than one hundred thousand lines. When the work, with God's pleasure, is completed, it will be for all the world the standard exposition of the law, and render every one independent of Muhammadan doctors. Another excellence attending this design is, that, with a view to afford facility to all, the possessor of perfections, Chulpí 'Abdu-llah, son of the great and the most celebrated Mauláná 'Abdu-l Hakím of Síalkot, and his several pupils have been ordered to translate the work into Persian.
Among the greatest liberalities of this king of the faithful is this, that he has ordered a remission of the transit duties upon all sorts of grain, cloth, and other goods, as well as on tobacco, the duties on which alone amounted to an immense sum, and to prevent the smuggling of which the Government officers committed many outrages, especially in regard to the exposure of females. He exempted the Muhammadans from taxes, and all people from certain public demands, the income of which exceeded thirty lacs of rupees every year. He relinquished the Government claims against the ancestors of the officers of the State, which used to be paid by deductions from their salaries. This money every year formed a very large income paid into the public treasury. He also abolished the practice of confiscating the estates of deceased persons against whom there was no Government claim, which was very strictly observed by the accountants of his predecessors, and which was felt as a very grievous oppression by their sorrowful heirs. The Royal orders were also issued to collect the revenues of each province according to the Muhammadan law.
Some account of the battles which the Emperor fought before his accession, as well as after that period, has been given above, and we shall now write a few instances of his fortitude. At the time when the Royal army arrived at Balkh, 'Abdu-l 'Azíz Khán, with a large force which equalled the swarms of locusts and ants, came and arranged his men in order of battle, and surrounded the Royal camp. While the conflict was being carried on with great fury, the time of reading the evening prayers came on, when His Majesty, though dissuaded by some worldly officers, alighted from his horse and said the prayers, etc., in a congregation, with the utmost indifference and presence of mind. 'Abdu-l 'Azíz, on hearing of this, was much astonished at the intrepidity of the Emperor, who was assisted by God, and put an end to the battle, saying that to fight with such a man is to destroy oneself.
The Emperor is perfectly acquainted with the commentaries, traditions and law. He always studies the compilations of the great Imám Muhammad Ghizálí (may God's mercy be on him!), the extracts from the writings of Shaikh Sharaf Yahyá Munírí (may his tomb be sanctified!), and the works of Muhí Shírazí, and other similar books. One of the greatest excellences of this virtuous monarch is, that he has learnt the Kurán by heart. Though in his early youth he had committed to memory some chapters of that sacred book, yet he learnt the whole by heart after ascending the throne. He took great pains and showed much perseverance in impressing it upon his mind. He writes a very elegant Naskh hand, and has acquired perfection in this art. He has written two copies of the holy book with his own hand, and having finished and adorned them with ornaments and marginal lines, at the expense of seven thousand rupees, he sent them to the holy cities of Mecca and Medína. He also wrote an excellent Nasta'lík and Shikastah hand. He is a very elegant writer in prose, and has acquired proficiency in versification, but agreeably to the words of God, “Poets deal in falsehoods,” he abstains from practising it. He does not like to hear verses except those which contain a moral. “To please Almighty God he never turned his eye towards a flatterer, nor gave his ear to a poet.”
The Emperor has given a very liberal education to his fortunate and noble children, who, by virtue of his attention and care, have reached to the summit of perfection, and made great advances in rectitude, devotion, and piety, and in learning the manners and customs of princes and great men. Through his instruction they have learnt the Book of God by heart, obtained proficiency in the sciences and polite literature, writing the various hands, and in learning the Turkí and the Persian languages.
In like manner, the ladies of the household also, according to his orders, have learnt the fundamental and necessary tenets of religion, and all devote their time to the adoration and worship of the Deity, to reading the sacred Kurán, and performing virtuous and pious acts. The excellence of character and the purity of morals of this holy monarch are beyond all expression. As long as nature nourishes the tree of existence, and keeps the garden of the world fresh, may the plant of the prosperity of this preserver of the garden of dignity and honour continue fruitful!
Elliot Henry M. and Dowson, John, eds. The History of India as Told by Its Own Historians, Vol. 7. London: Truebner, 1867-1877. pp. 157-162.
Thailand
Annotation
By mid-19th century, European commercial as well as territorial ambition, backed by modern military power, was increasingly able to impose itself upon indigenous rulers in Asia. This was increasingly recognised by Siam, especially after the British defeated both Qing China, the premier power of the region, in the First Opium War, and Burma, in the First Anglo-Burmese War. The Bowring Treaty was was signed between Siam and the United Kingdom in this wider international context.
The Treaty of Friendship and Commerce or, more commonly, the Bowring Treaty of 1855 was the first of many treaties signed between Siam and European powers over the course of the long 19th century, leading the gradual opening up and modernisation of Siam. The treaty granted British subjects the right to trade in Siam, extraterritoriality as well as the implementation of fixed tariffs for the import as well as export of goods alongside a most-favoured-nation clause; all this led to a wider range of commercial as well as diplomatic interactions between Siam and Britain. The treaty was also the basis of later treaties signed with France and the United States in 1856.
King Mongkut and Siam’s political elite were increasingly cognisant of Siam’s relative military and physical inferiority and realized that isolationism as a policy was not sustainable in the long-run. King Mongkut’s willingness to conclude an unequal treaty illustrated a forward thinking monarch who recognised the fact that in order to retain its independence in the face of European imperialism, Siam must make certain trade-offs with regards to its concept of power, diplomacy and commercial interactions. Mongkut’s appreciation and understanding of western culture played a role in the successful conclusion of the treaty. This is best exemplified by Article Two of the treaty whereby Siam granted extraterritoriality to British subjects in Siam, a key point of dispute in many ‘unequal treaties’ signed between Western powers and Asian rulers during the 19th century.
The signing of the treaty resulted in the economic transformation of Siam and in particular Bangkok, as an influx of Western traders and ships helped transform Bangkok into a key commercial hub of the region, linked to regionals ports of call such as Singapore and the larger China trade. This also influenced changes to the monetary policies of Siam.
The immediate economic impact notwithstanding, the treaty represented a willingness on the part of Siam to conform to a new international order based on Western-centric notions of diplomatic, political as well as commercial interactions. The Bowring Treaty illustrated Siam’s appreciation of the changed international context in which it now had to operate, and the increasing realisation among the traditional elites that Siam must adapt to changed circumstances in order to preserve independence and sovereignty. Events in the previous year, including encounters with Sir James Brooke of Sarawak who advocated the use of gunboat diplomacy, impressed upon Siamese officials the futility of a military confrontation and the awkward realisation of Siamese military weaknesses.
Thus it can be argued that the treaty was the clearest indication of Siam’s recognition of its physical weakness vis-à-vis the Western powers, who were expanding their influence in the region in ways that increasingly made traditional local practices of governance and power appear outmoded and inefficient.
Treaty of Friendship and Commerce between Siam and Great Britain Signed at Bangkok, April 18, 1855
John Bowring
[Ratifications exchanged at Bangkok, April 5, 1856]
Their Majesties Phra Bard Somdetch Phra Paramendr Maha Mongkut Phra Chom Klau Chau Yu Hua, the First King of Siam, and Phra Bard Somdetch Phra Pawarendr Ramesr Mahiswaresr Phra Pin Klau Chau Yu Hua, the Second King of Siam, and Her Majesty the Queen of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, and all its dependencies, desiring to establish upon firm and lasting foundations the relations of peace and friendship existing between the two countries, and to secure the best interests of their respective subjects by encouraging, facilitating, and regulating their industry and trade, have resolved to conclude a Treaty of Amity and Commerce for this purpose, and have, therefore, named as their Plenipotentiaries, that is to say:
Their Majesties the First and Second Kings of Siam, His Royal Highness Krom Hluang Wongsa Dhiraj Snidh; his Excellency Somdetch Chau Phaya Param Maha Payurawongse; his Excellency Somdetch Chau Phaya Param Maha Bijai-neate; his Excellency Chau Phaya Sri Suriwongse Samuha Phra Kalahome; and his Excellency Chau Phaya, Acting Phra-Klang;
Her Majesty the Queen of Great Britain and Ireland, Sir John Bowing, Knight, Doctor of Laws, &c.;
Who, after having communicated to each other their respective full powers, and found them to be in good and due form, have agreed upon and concluded the following Articles:
Article I
There shall henceforward be perpetual peace and friendship between Their Majesties the First and Second Kings of Siam and their successors, and Her Majesty the Queen of Great Britain and Ireland, and her successors. All British subjects coming to Siam shall receive from the Siamese Government full protection and assistance to enable them to reside in Siam in all security, and trade with every facility, free from oppression or injury on the part of the Siamese; and all Siamese subjects going to an English country shall receive from the British Government the same complete protection and assistance that shall be granted to British subjects by the Government of Siam.
Article II
The interests of all British subjects coming to Siam shall be placed under the regulation and control of a Consul, who will be appointed to reside at Bangkok. He will himself conform to, and will enforce the observance by British subjects of all the provisions of this Treaty, and such of the former Treaty negotiated by Captain Burney in 1826 as shall still remain in operation. He shall also give effect to all rules or regulations that are now or may hereafter be enacted for the government of British subjects in Siam, the conduct of their trade, and for the prevention of violations of the laws of Siam. Any disputes arising between Siamese and British subjects shall be heard and determined by the Consul, in conjunction with the proper Siamese officers; and criminal offences will be punished, in the case of English offenders, by the Consul, according to English laws, and in the case of Siamese offenders, by their own laws, through the Siamese authorities. But the Consul shall not interfere in any matters referring solely to Siamese, neither will the Siamese authorities interfere in questions which only concern the subjects of Her Britannic Majesty.
It is understood, however, that the arrival of the British Consul at Bangkok shall not take place before the ratification of this Treaty, nor until 10 vessels owned by British subjects, sailing under British colours, and with British papers, shall have entered the port of Bangkok for purposes of trade, subsequent to the signing of this Treaty.
Article III
If Siamese, in the employ of British subjects, offend against the laws of their country, or if any Siamese having so offended or desiring to desert, take refuge with a British subject in Siam, they shall be searched for, and, upon proof of their guilt or desertion, shall be delivered up by the Consul to the Siamese authorities. In like manner, any British offenders resident or trading in Siam, who may desert, escape to or hide themselves in Siamese territory, shall be apprehended and delivered over to the British Consul on his requisition. Chinese, not able to prove themselves to be British subjects, shall not be considered as such by the British Consul, nor be entitled to his protection.
Article IV
British subjects are permitted to trade freely in all the seaports of Siam, but may reside permanently only at Bangkok, or within the limits assigned by this Treaty. British subjects coming to reside at Bangkok may rent land, and buy or build houses, but cannot purchase lands within a circuit of 200 sen (not more than 4 miles English) from the city walls, until they shall have lived in Siam for 10 years, or shall obtain special authority from the Siamese Government to enable them to do so. But with the exception of this limitation, British residents in Siam may at any time buy or rent houses, lands, or plantations situated anywhere within a distance of 24 hours' journey from the city of Bangkok, to be computed by the rate at which boats of the country can travel. In order to obtain possession of such lands or houses, it will be necessary that the British subjects shall, in the first place, make application through the Consul to the proper Siamese officer; and the Siamese officer and the Consul having satisfied themselves of the honest intentions of the applicant, will assist him in settling, upon equitable terms, the amount of the purchase-money, will mark out and fix the boundaries of the property, and will convey the same to the British purchaser under sealed deeds. Whereupon, he and his property shall be placed under the protection of the Governor of the district and that of the particular local authorities; he shall conform, in ordinary matters, to any just directions given him by them, and will be subject to the same taxation that is levied on Siamese subjects. But if through negligence, the want of capital, or other cause, a British subject should fail to commence the cultivation or improvement of the lands so acquired within a term of three years from the date of receiving possession thereof, the Siamese Government shall have the power of resuming the property, upon returning to the British subject the purchase-money paid by him for the same.
Article V
All British subjects intending to reside in Siam shall be registered at the British Consulate. They shall not go out to sea, nor proceed beyond the limits assigned by this Treaty for the residence of British subjects, without passport from the Siamese authorities, to be applied for by the British Consul; nor shall they leave Siam if the Siamese authorities show to the British Consul that legitimate objections exist to their quitting the country. But within the limits appointed under the preceding Article, British subjects are at liberty to travel to and fro under the protection of a pass, to be furnished them by the British Consul, and counter-sealed by the proper Siamese officer, stating, in the Siamese character, their names, calling, and description. The Siamese officers at the Government stations in the interior may at any time, call for the production of this pass, and immediately on its being exhibited, they must allow the parties to proceed; but it will be their duty to detain those persons who, by travelling without a pass from the Consul, render themselves liable to the suspicion of their being deserters; and such detention shall be immediately reported to the Consul.
Article VI
All British subjects visiting or residing in Siam shall be allowed the free exercise of the Christian religion, and liberty to build churches in such localities as shall be consented by the Siamese authorities. The Siamese Government will place no restrictions upon the employment by the English or Siamese subjects as servants, or in any other capacity. But wherever a Siamese subject belongs or owes service to some particular master, the servant who engages himself to a British subject, without the consent of his master, may be reclaimed by him; and the Siamese Government will not enforce an agreement between a British subject and any Siamese in his employ, unless made with the knowledge and consent of the master, who has a right to dispose of the services of the person engaged.
Article VII
British ships of war may enter the river, and anchor at Paknam, but they shall not proceed above Paknam, unless with the consent of the Siamese authorities, which shall be given where it is necessary that a ship shall go into dock for repairs. Any British ship of war conveying to Siam a public functionary accredited by Her Majesty's Government to the Court of Bangkok, shall be allowed to come up to Bangkok, but shall not pass the forts called Pong Phrachamit and Pit-patch-nuck, unless expressly permitted to do so by the Siamese Government; but in the absence of a British ship of war, the Siamese authorities engage to furnish the Consul with a force sufficient to enable him to give effect to his authority over British subjects, and to enforce discipline among British shipping.
Article VIII
The measurement duty hitherto paid by British vessels trading to Bangkok, under the treaty of 1826, shall be abolished from the date of this Treaty coming into operation, and British shipping and trade will thenceforth be only subject to the payment of import and export duties on the goods landed or shipped. On all articles of import the duties shall be 3 per cent, payable at the option of the importer, either in kind or money, calculated upon the market value of the goods. Drawback of the full amount of duty shall be allowed upon goods found unsealeable and re-exported. Should the British merchant and the Custom-House officers disagree as to the value to be set upon imported articles, such disputes shall be referred to the Consul and proper Siamese officer, shall each have the power to call in an equal number of merchants as assessors, not exceeding two on either side, to assist them in coming to an equitable decision.
Opium shall be imported free of duty, but can only be sold to the opium farmer or his agents. In the event of no arrangement being effected with them for the sale of the opium, it shall be re-exported, and no import or duty shall be levied thereon. Any infringement of this regulation shall subject the opium to seizure and confiscation.
Articles of export, from the time of production to the date of shipment shall payment impost only, whether this be levied under the name of inland tax, transit duty, or duty on exportation. The tax or duty to be paid on each article of Siamese produce previous to or upon exportation, is specified in the Tariff attached to this Treaty; and it is distinctly agreed that goods or produce which pay any description of tax in the interipr, shall be exempted from any further payment of duty on exportation.
English merchants are to be allowed to purchase directly from the producer the articles in which they trade, and in like manner to sell their goods directly to the parties wishing to purchase the same, without the interference, in either case, of any other person.
The rates of duty laid down in the Tariff attached to this Treaty, are those that are now paid upon goods or produce shipped in Siamese or Chinese vessels or junks; and it is agrees that British shipping shall enjoy all the privileges now exercised by, or which hereafter may be granted to, Siamese or Chinese vessels or junks.
British subjects will be allowed to build ships in Siam on obtaining permission to do so from the Siamese authorities.
Whenever a scarcity may be apprehended, of salt, rice and fish, the Siamese Government reserve to themselves the right of prohibiting, by public proclamation, the exportation of these articles.
Bullion, or personal effects, may be imported or exported free of charge.
Article IX
The Code of Regulations apprehended to this Treaty shall be enforced by the Consul, with the co-operation of the Siamese authorities; and they, the said authorities and Consul, shall be enabled to introduce any further regulations which may be found necessary, in order to give effect to the objects of this Treaty.
All fines and penalties inflicted for infraction of the provisions and regulations of this Treaty shall be paid to the Siamese Government.
Until the British Consul shall arrive at Bangkok, and enter upon his functions, the consignees of British vessels shall be at liberty to settle with the Siamese authorities all questions relating to their trade.
Article X
The British Government and its subjects will be allowed free and equal participation in any privileges that may have been, or may hereafter be, granted by the Siamese Government to the Government or subjects of any other nation.
Article XI
After the lapse of 10 years from the date of the ratification of this Treaty, upon the desire of either the Siamese or British Governments, and on 12 months' notice given by either party, the present and such portions of the Treaty of 1826 as remain unrevoked by this Treaty, together with the Tariff and Regulations hereunto annexed, or those that may hereafter be introduced, shall be subject to revision by Commissioners appointed on both sides for this purpose, who will be empowered to decide on and insert therein such amendments as experience shall prove to be desirable.
Article XII
This Treaty, executed in Siamese and English, both versions having the same meaning and intention, and the ratifications thereof having been previously exchanged, shall take effect from the 6th day of April, in the year 1856 of the Christian era, corresponding to the 1st day of the 5th month of the 1218th year of the Siamese Civil era.
In witness whereof, the above-named Plenipotentiaries have signed and sealed the present Treaty, in quadruplicate, at Bangkok, on the 18th day of April, in the year 1855 of the Christian era, corresponding to the 2nd day of the 6th month of the 1217th year of the Siamese Civil era.
(Signatures and Seals of the 5 Siamese Plenipotentiaries)
(L.S.) John Bowring
Regulations under Article IX of the Treaty
General Regulations under which British Trade is to be conducted in Siam
Regulation I
The master of every English ship coming to Bangkok to trade, must either before or after entering the river, as may be found convenient, report the arrival of his vessel at the Custom-House at Paknam, together with the number of his crew and guns, and the port from whence he comes. Upon anchoring his vessel at Paknam, he will deliver into the custody of the Custom-House officers all his guns and ammunitions and a Custom-House officer will then be appointed to the vessel, and will proceed in her to Bangkok.
Regulation II
A vessel passing Paknam without discharging her guns and ammunitions as directed in the foregoing regulation, will be sent back to Paknam to comply with its provisions, and will be fined 800 ticals for having so disobeyed. After delivery of her guns and ammunitions she will be permitted to return to Bangkok to trade.
Regulation III
When a British vessel shall have cast anchor at Bangkok, the master, unless a Sunday should intervene, will, within 24 hours after arrival, proceed to the British Consulate, and deposit there his ships's papers, bills og lading &c., together with a true manifest of his import cargo; and upon the Consul's reporting these particulars to the Custom-House, permission to break bulk will at once be given by the latter.
For neglecting so to report his arrival, or for presenting a false manifest, the master will subject himself, in each instance, to a penalty of 400 ticals; but he will be allowed to correct, within 24 hours after delivery of it to the Consul, any mistake he may discover in his manifest, without incurring the above-mentioned penalty.
Regulation IV
A British vessel breaking bulk and commencing to discharge before due permission shall be obtained, or smuggling, either when in the river or outside the bar, shall be subject to the penalty of 800 ticals, and confiscation of the goods so smuggled or discharged.
Regulation V
As soon as a British vessel shall have discharged her cargo, and completed her outward lading, paid all her duties, and delivered a true manifest of her outward cargo to the British Consul, a Siamese port-clearance shall be granted her on application from the Consul, who, in the absence of any legal impediment to her departure, will then return to the master his ship's papers, and allow the vessel to leave. A Custom-House officer will accompany the vessel to Paknam; and on arriving there she will be inspected by the Custom-House officers of that station, and will receive from them the guns and ammunition previously delivered into their charge
Regulation VI
Her Britannic Majesty's Plenipotentiary having no knowledge of the Siamese language, the Siamese Government have agreed that the English text of these Regulations, together with the Treaty of which they form a portion, and the Tariff hereunto annexed, shall be accepted as conveying in every respect their true meaning and intention.
(Signatures and Seals of the 5 Siamese Plenipotentiaries)
(L.S.) John Bowring
Tariff under Article VIII of the Treaty
Tariff of Export and Inland Duties to be levied on Articles of Trade
Section I
The undermentioned Articles shall be entirely free from Inland or other Taxes, on production or transit, and shall pay Export Duty as follows:
Section II
The undermentioned Articles being subject to the Inland or Transit Duties herein named, and which shall not be increased, shall be exempt from Export Duty:
Section III
All goods or produce unenumerated in this Tariff shall be free of Export Duty, and shall only be subject to one Inland or Transit Duty, not exceeding the rate now paid.
(Signatures and Seals of the 5 Siamese Plenipotentiaries)
(L.S.) John Bowring
Annotated by Aloysius Ng
Malacca
The Comentáriosdo grandeAfonso de Albuquerque (Commentaries of the Great Afonso de Albuquerque), 1557
Afonso de Albuquerque; Tun Sri Lanang
The great Afonso Dalboquerque was so devoted to the Apostle St. James, that after it had been agreed by all that the city should be attacked, he delayed the completion of his preparations for some days, with the object of putting his hands to this work on that saint's day, for he trusted that through the prayers and merits of the saint, Our Lord would give them victory over it, as He had done in the capture of Goa. And when the time was come, he summoned the captains and declared to them that he was determined to attack the city upon the following day, which was the day of the Apostle Saint James, and it was necessary, before doing so, to discuss where and in what order they must disembark, in order that every one should know what duty was assigned to him.
The captains began to give their opinions, but as there were various opinions among them, so that some said the attack should be made on one side and others on the other, Afonso Dalboquerque desired, before any final decision should be made, that Ruy de Araújo, who had consider able experience concerning the land, should give his opinion.
Ruy de Araújo declared that in his opinion they ought first to attack the bridge before anything else, for if they took that and made themselves strong in it, our people would be placed just between the city and the inhabitants of Upe, and the power of the king divided into two parts ; for one could not render any assistance to the other except by means of the bridge, which one hundred men, with small barricades that they could set up in it, could defend against every forcible attempt of the Moors that might be made ; but if the attack upon the city were made at any other parts, as some of the Lords who were there present advised, Malaca was of such a size and possessed so many fighting men in her population, that he, for his part, held the matter as very doubtful of success, and all would run a risk of being lost.
Without listening to any further advice, as soon as Afonso Dalboquerque had heard Buy de Araujo's words, he agreed with the opinion he gave, and immediately gave orders that the captains, with their men in two battalions, should proceed to attack the bridge. D. João de Lima, Gaspar de Paiva, Fernão Perez Dandrade, Sebastião de Miranda, Fernão Gomez de Lemos, Vasco Fernandez Coutinho, and James Teixeira, with other fidalgos and soldiers of the fleet, to disembark on the side of the mosque ; while he himself, with Duarte da Silva, Jorge Nunes de Lião, Simão Dandrade, Aires Pereira, João de Sousa, Antonio Dabreu, Pêro Dalpoem, Dinis Fernandez de Melo, Simão Martinz, Simão Afonso, and Nuno Vaz de Castelo-branco, with all the rest of the armed foroes, would disembark on the city side; and after an entry had been effected through the stockades, one and all were to rush on towards the middle of the bridge, until they could estimate the strength of the enemy and in what direction their spirit led them, for in an affair of which they had not yet seen the result, he could not come to any other determination than ordering this only, that where they saw his flag flying, there all should concentrate themselves.
Having given these orders, he dismissed the captains to go and get ready, and on the following day, when they heard a trumpet sounded, come on board his ship so as to set forth therefrom.
Two hours before the break of day Afonso Dalboquerque ordered the trumpet to be blown, in order to awaken them, and they embarked immediately with all the rest of the men-at-arms and went on board his ship, and when a general confession had been made, all set out together and came to the mouth of the river just as morning broke, and attacked the bridge, each battalion in the order which had been assigned to it.
Then the Moors began to fire upon them with their artillery, which was posted in the stockades, and with their large matchlocks wounded some of our men.
As soon as the first fury of their artillery was spent, the great Afonso Dalboquerque gave order for the trumpets to be blown, and with a war-cry of "Sanctiago", i.e., " Saint James", they all, with one accord, fell upon the stockades of the bridge, each battalion in its proper place, and from on this side and on that an infinite number of Moors rushed up, some with bows and arrows, and others with long lances, and shields like those of Biscay, blowing their horns and trumpets, and for a good space of time they fought very bravely, and defended the stockades; but our men, who had disembarked on the side of the mosque, by dint of arms forced their way through them ; and at this very moment the king of Malaca came up mounted upon an elephant, and his son upon another, with a body of armed men, and elephants armed with wooden castles, containing many war-like engines, and compelled the Moors to return to the stockades which they had deserted.
D. João de Lima, Fernão Perez Dandrade, and all the others who were in that company were inspired with fresh vigour at the sight of the king, and without any fear of his elephants attacked the Moors in so spirited a manner, that they got possession of the mosque immediately. Afonso Dalboquerque, who remained on the side nearest to the city with all the other captains and men, attacked the bridge on that side, and although his division met with great resistance by reason of the presence there of a large part of the force which had accompanied the king, very well armed, many of them with bows, others carrying blowing tubes with poisoned arrows, wherewith they wounded a great many of his men, nevertheless anxiously emulating the captains of the other battalion who had by this time become masters of the mosque and the head of the bridge, they fell upon the Moors so bravely that they got into their stockades by force of arms, and killed many of them, and put them to flight. On our side many were wounded, and some died of the poisoned arrows.
No sooner did Tuáo Bandão, captain of the king of Malaca, who held a stockade on the bridge, bedecked with flags of his colours, perceive the discomfiture of the Moors, than he sallied out with seven hundred Javanese, and other two captains with him, and went to reinforce the bridge on the city side, with the intention of falling on our men in the rear. When Afonso Dalboquerque caught sight of them coming along one of the principal streets of the city, he dispatched from his company João de Sousa, Antonio Dabreu, and Aires Pereira in command of their men, with orders to fail upon the advancing body, and this they did so rapidly, that before the Moors could get up as far as the stockades, they fell upon them with the lance with such impetuosity that they made them turn and fly.
D. João de Lima, and other captains who were on the side of the mosque, when they saw these Moors, ran up to attack them in front, and there and then killed several of the body. The others, perceiving themselves cut off in front and in rear, all threw themselves into the sea. And the mariners, who were in the boats, came up without a moment's delay and put them all to death, so that not a single man was left, their captain, Tuáo Bandão, being already dead, as well as the two captains who had set out with him ; and when they had accomplished this business they went back to the stockades.
D. João de Lima, and the others who formed his company, seeing, after they had established themselves in the stockades, that the king was retiring by a side path up the hill, set out in pursuit after him, fighting with the Moors at every step. The king and his son, who were mounted upon their elephants, saw that they were pursued by our men, turned back again with two thousand men whom they carried in their company. The Portuguese captains awaited their coming at the head of a street, and with great efforts and brave determination fell upon the elephants with their lances, as they were coming on in the vanguard, and it is related that Fernão Gomez de Lemos was the foremost in this action ; and whereas elephants will not bear with being wounded, they turned tail and charged the Moors behind them and put them to rout. The elephant on which the king was riding, mad with the mortal wound which it had received, seized the black man who was guiding it with its trunk, and roaring loudly, dashed him in pieces, and the king being already wounded in the hand, sprang out of the castle, but escaped because he was not recognised; and thus he and his son, and the king of Pão, his son-in-law, who had come to Malaca but a few days before to marry one of the king's daughters, retreated to the back of the city.
Afonso Dalboquerque, with the rest of his men, — having forced an entrance through the stockades, — followed up after the Moors along a street which led to the bridge, and killed many of them ; but because the men of the city, who were fighting in the streets with our forces, were very numerous, Afonso Dalboquerque, fearing lest his party should begin to straggle, made them rally towards the bridge, and ordered them to erect a palisade on the city side ; and gave charge over it to Jorge Nunez de Lião and Nuno Vaz de Castelo-branco, with orders for them to command one of the principal streets leading to the bridge with their artillery.
When the Moors saw this they gathered themselves together in the other streets of the city, and Afonso Dalboquerque feeling himself at length free of them, gave orders that another palisading should be erected on the side towards the mosque, starting from the river to reach up to the mosque, in such a manner that the bridge remained in the middle [between this palisade and the one mentioned above]. And while these palisadings were in progress of formation, he sent Gaspar de Paiva with a hundred men to set fire to the city from that side as soon as the sea-breeze should begin to blow, and Sim&o Martinz with another party of a hundred men, to set fire to the king's houses which stood at the side of the mosque. When the fire gained possession of one part and the other, it raged so fiercely that it destroyed a great part of the city. As soon as the Moors beheld the flames, they retired a long way off from our men.
Here was burnt a wooden house, of very large size and very well built with joiners' work, about thirty palms breadth solid timber, all inlaid with gold, built up on thirty wheels, every one of which was as large as a hogshead, and it had a spire, which was the finishing-point of the building, of great height, covered with silken flags, and the whole of it hung with very rich silken stuffs, for it had been prepared for the reception of the king of Pão and his bride, the daughter of the king of Malaca, who were to make their entry through the city with great blowings of trumpets and festivities ; and in the houses of the king, and the other houses round about, which were burned, there was consumed by fire a great store of merchandise and other things of great price, which the king had in his palace. And when this was completed, they returned again to the bridge where our men were stationed; and it was about two hours after midday, and as yet the men had not eaten anything.
The captains, to whom Afonso Dalboquerque had entrusted the duty of constructing the stockades, went to him and told him that the men, being tired, and suffering from the great heat, were by this time quite out of heart with their work, and they recommended that they should withdraw and take some rest. Afonso Dalboquerque put them off, for he hoped to get the barricades completed, and so pass the night there; but because they came again with more earnestness to press this, he made a virtue of the necessity ; and, the sun being now gone down, he began to draw off his men to the boats. When the Moors perceived that they were withdrawing, they began to open fire with large matchlocks, arrows, and blowing-tubes, and wounded some of our men, yet with all the haste they made Afonso Dalboquerque ordered the men to carry off with them fifty large bombards that had been captured in the stockades upon the bridge ; and when the men had returned to the ships, he ordered the wounded to be attended to — about seventy in number — but of those who were struck with the poisoned arrows, none escaped but one, Fernão Gomez de Lemos, who was burned with a red-hot iron directly he was struck, so that ultimately God spared his life.
Directly that all had retired into the ships, the king ordered that the stockades should be reconstructed, and made stronger than they had been before, and placed in them double the quantity of artillery, of which there was a great supply in Malaca, as will be related hereafter, and ordered the bridge to be divided into sections with very strong palisades, and erect others in one of the principal streets leading from the city to the bridge, and in them he placed much artillery, and on the other side of the mosque he did just the same, and on the shore side, where the landing-place was situate, he ordered his men to throw down many chevaux-de-frise, full of poison, to prick our men when they made their landing. And because the Javanese, who composed the principal soldiery under his command, were discontented at not receiving their pay, in order to content them, he ordered that they should be paid all that was due to them of their pay, and three months in advance as well, for he was in great dread lest Afonso Dalboquerque should return again to attack the city [...]
When the great Afonso Dalboquerque had all things ready that were necessary for attacking the city again, it was reported to him that there were some among the Captains who were in the habit of saying that they did not think it of service to the King for them to maintain the city nor to build a fortress within it. On being apprised of this he ordered them to be called to his ship, with all the Fidalgos and Cavaliers of the Fleet, and said to them : —
"Sirs, you will have no difficulty in remembering that when we decided upon attacking this city, it was with the determination of building a fortress within it, for so it appeared to all to be necessary, and after having captured it I was unwilling to let slip the possession of it, yet, because ye all advised me to do so, I left it, and withdrew ; but being ready, as you see, to put my hands upon it again once more, I learned that you had already changed your opinion : now this cannot be because the Moors have destroyed the best part of us, but on account of my sins, which merit the failure of accomplishing this undertaking in the way that I had desired. And, inasmuch as my will and determination is, as long as I am Governor of India, neither to fight nor to hazard men on land, except in those parts wherein I must build a fortress to maintain them, as I have already told you before this, I desire you earnestly, of your goodness, although you all have already agreed upon what is to be done, to freely give me again your opinions in writing as to what I ought to do ; for inasmuch as I have to give an account of these matters and a justification of my proceedings to the King D. Manuel, our Lord, I am unwilling to be left alone to bear the blame of them; and although there be many reasons which I could allege in favour of our taking this city and building a fortress therein to maintain possession of it, two only will I mention to you, on this occasion, as tending to point out wherefore you ought not to turn back from what you have agreed upon.
"The first is the great service which we shall perform to Our Lord in casting the Moors out of this country, and quenching the fire of this sect of Mafamede so that it may never burst out again hereafter; and I am so sanguine as to hope for this from our undertaking, that if we can only achieve the task before us, it will result in the Moors resigning India altogether to our rule, for the greater part of them — or perhaps all of them — live upon the trade of this country and are become great and rich, and lords of extensive treasures. It is, too, well worthy of belief that as the King of Malaca, who has already once been discomfited and had proof of our strength, with no hope of obtaining any succour from any other quarter — sixteen days having already elapsed since this took place — makes no endeavour to negotiate with us for the security of his estate, Our Lord is blinding his judgment and hardening his heart, and desires the completion of this affair of Malaca : for when we were committing ourselves to the business of cruising in the Straits [of the Red Sea] where the King of Portugal had often ordered me to go (for it was there that His Highness considered we could cut down the commerce which the Moors of Cairo, of Méca, and of Judá, carry on with these parts), Our Lord for his service thought right to lead us hither, for when Malaca is taken the places on the Straits must be shut up, and they will never more be able to introduce their spiceries into those places.
"And the other reason is the additional service which we shall render to the King D. Manuel in taking this city, because it is the headquarters of all the spiceries and drugs which the Moors carry every year hence to the Straits without our being able to prevent them from so doing ; but if we deprive them of this their ancient market there, there does not remain for them a single port, nor a single situation, so commodious in the whole of these parts, where they can carry on their trade in these things. For after we were in possession of the pepper of Malabar, never more did any reach Cairo, except that which the Moors carried thither from these parts, and forty or fifty ships, which sail hence every year laden with all sorts of spiceries bound to Méca, cannot be stopped without great expense and large fleets, which must necessarily cruise about continually in the offing of Cape Comorim; and the pepper of Malabar, of which they may hope to get some portion because they have the King of Calicut on their side, is in our hands, under the eyes of the Governor of India, from whom the Moors cannot carry off so much with impunity as they hope to do ; and I hold it as very certain that if we take this trade of Malaca away out of their hands, Cairo and Méca are entirely ruined, and to Venice will no spiceries be conveyed except that which her merchants go and buy in Portugal.
"But if you are of opinion that, because Malaca is a large city and very populous, it will give us much trouble to maintain our possession of it, no such doubts as these ought to arise, for when once the city is gained, all the rest of the Kingdom is of so little account that the King has not a single place left where he can rally his forces ; and if you dread lest by taking the city we be involved in great expenses, and on account of the season of the year there be no place where our men and our Fleet can be recruited, I trust in God's mercy that when Malaca is held in subjection to our dominion by a strong fortress, provided that the Kings of Portugal appoint thereto those who are well experienced as Governors and Managers of the Revenues, the taxes of the land will pay all the expenses which may arise in the administration of the city; and if the merchants who are wont to resort thither — accustomed as they are to live under the tyrannical yoke of the Malays — experience a taste of our just dealing, truthfulness, frankness, and mildness, and come to know of the instructions of the King D. Manuel, our Lord, wherein he commands that all his subjects in these parts be very well treated, I venture to affirm that they will all return and take up their abode in the city again, yea, and build the walls of their houses with gold ; and all these matters which here I lay before you may be secured to us by this half-turn of the key, which is that we build a fortress in this city of Malaca and sustain it, and that this land be brought under the dominion of the Portuguese, and the King D. Manuel be styled true king thereof, and therefore I desire you of your kindness to consider seriously the enterprise that ye have in hand, and not to leave it to fall to the ground."
When the great Afonso Dalboquerque had brought his harangue to an end in the words which I have recounted, the Members of the council held among themselves diverse opinions, some leaning to this, and others to that side, and the result of the meeting was that the majority again declared that it would be of service to the King to take the city of Malaca and cast the Moors out of it, and build a fortress therein. The others were of a contrary opinion, and declared that the city ought not to be again attacked, for it was very doubtful if the undertaking could be accomplished, and that the vengeance which had been meted out to the Moors for their treatment of Diogo Lopez de Sequeira and his men was sufficiently severe, and even if they had all things necessary for the construction of the fortress there was not time enough for its completion, for they were already at the beginning of the monsoon, and it was absolutely necessary to support India, for no one could tell how affairs at Goa had gone on since they had set out from that city.
Afonso Dalboquerque, perceiving these differences of opinion which were held in the council, yielded to the majority and resolved to attack the city and fortify himself in it, and as for all other doubts which were raised by the opposite party, to put them into the hands of Our Lord Jesus Christ that He might order them all as best to his service, and he commanded that a formal resolution should be drawn up by the Secretary, whereunto he put his signature, as did also all the Captains, Fidalgos, and Cavaliers who were there.
Having taken the opinions of the Captains, Fidalgos, and Cavaliers of the Fleet, under their signatures, as I have related, the great Afonso Dalboquerque made up his mind to attack the city, and taking it, by the aid of our Lord, to fortify himself therein. And because the Moors were in an advanced state of preparation, and had arranged a better system of defence than they had on the first occasion when our men made an entry into the city, he decided with all the Captains to attack the bridge with his whole force in one company.
Having agreed upon this method of attack, all went away to their respective ships to get ready, waiting for the day when it would be high water in the spring tides, so that the junk could get up to the bridge ; and when the time was come — on a Friday, two hours before morning — Afonso Dalboquerque gave orders for the signal which he had agreed upon, to wake them, and they, as they were already prepared, came on board his ship, and from it set forth all together in their boats ; and when Antonio Dabreu in he junk had now arrived within a crossbow-shot from the bridge, the Moors began to open fire upon him from one side and the other with large matchlocks, blowing tubes, and poisoned arrows; and with bombards which threw leaden shot as large as an espera they swept the decks of the junk from one side and the other, and as Antonio Dabreu did not seek therein any place of safety where he could avoid the shots which they kept on pouring into the junk, he was the first who was hit with a bullet from a large matchlock, which struck him on the jaw and carried away many of his teeth and part of his tongue.
Afonso Dalboquerque, who was in his boat close by the junk, seeing Antonio Dabreu wounded, ordered him, more by force than by his own wish, to be taken to the ship to have his wounds dressed, and appointed Pero Dalpoem to go on board the junk and act as Captain of it until Antonio Dabreu was well again. When the delay that had thus arisen had passed away — not much time having been wasted — they went on again a second time with the junk leading the way, in the order which they had appointed, and when the junk drew up alongside, as it was very lofty and quite overhung the bridge, as I have already said, the Moors, not being able to bear the severe handling which our men gave them from the round top of the mainmast with many canisters of gunpowder, and darts, and matchlocks, fled, deserting the bridge, and withdrew to the stockades which they had on the bridge, on this side and that.
Afonso Dalboquerque, perceiving that the Moors were beginning to fall into confusion, ordered the Captains to press on more quickly at the oars, and all united in a body set to work to fall upon the stockades, according to the preconcerted arrangement. And although they found behind them a great force of Moors, who defended them for a considerable space of time with signal bravery, nevertheless our men got into the stockades and routed those who held them. In this affair of entering, many of our men were wounded and two or three killed, but it was at the cost of many Moors, who there lost their lives ; and Afonso Dalboquerque, seeing himself now master of the bridge, remained where he was quietly with his flag and a part of his force, and gave orders to certain of the Captains to go and take the mosque, and to others to attack some palisades which the Moors had set up at the mouth of a street which led to the bridge, and that neither the one party or the other should leave their stations without his express orders.
When the Captains arrived at the palisades, although they met with some amount of resistance, yet they bore themselves so valiantly that they discomfited the Moors and got possession of the works. The others, however, to whose lot it fell to assault the mosque, found they had a heavy and troublesome task before them, for in that place of defence there was the King with a large body of men and elephants, and the defence was maintained so vigorously that a considerable space of time elapsed without our men being able to get in. Afonso Dalboquerque, seeing from the bridge the circumstances in which our men were situated, made his way with all haste at the head of all his forces to succour them, and because at the mouth of a large street which led to the mosque, where he was, there were many Moors pressing on the flanks of certain Captains that were following the King, who was in flight with three thousand men armed with shields, he stayed himself there with his flag and his men, and sent the Captains word to remain quiet and rally towards the position he had taken up, for there were yet many Moors on their flanks, and then they withdrew at once ; and as soon as the junction of these forces had been carried out, Afonso Dalboquerque left in charge over the mosque and stockades Jorge Nunez de Lião, Nuno Vaz de Castelo-branco, James Teixeira, and Dinis Fernandez de Melo, with some of the men, while he himself, with the rest that remained, returned towards the bridge; and he ordered the Captains who were stationed on one side and on the other to stay where they were and not fight with the Moors, even if they came on and attacked them, until he had fortified the bridge; and ordered four large barques which he had, with great bombards, to pass over to the other side and sweep the field on one side and on the other, and cause the Moors to keep off so that the men could more securely work at the stockades ; and having arranged this he ordered them to take out of the junk all the munitions which he had brought, and began upon the stockades ; and as all went to work with willing hands, in a short space of time he had made two very strong palisades, one on the side of the city, the other on the side of the mosque, with barrels filled with earth, and wood, and he arranged in them many guns : and ordered that the bridge and the junk should be covered with palm leaves, for the benefit of the men, for the sun was very strong and he was fearful lest they should all fall ill from the hard work they had to perform.
While the great Afonso Dalboquerque was thus occupied in this eagerness to complete the fortification of the stockades which he was making upon the bridge, he saw that the Captains whom he had ordered to take up positions at the mouths of the streets were undergoing, rather than disobey his commands, much discomfort from the attacks made upon them by the Moors with bombards which they had placed upon the terraces of their houses, and with matchlocks with which they were firing upon them, so he dispatched with great haste Gaspar de Paiva, Fernão Perez Dandrade, Pêro Dalpoem, Antonio Dabreu, who was now by this time well of his wound in the jaw, to go and succour them with their men, along one of the streets of the city, and D. João de Lima, Aires Pereira, Simão Dandrade, Simão Martinz, and Simão Afonso, along another street which led up to a place where the Moors where at lance-thrusts with our men, and to patrol through all the city and not to give quarter to a single person they met, while he himself would come on behind them in support, with his royal standard; and although the Moors were very numerous, the Captains fell upon them so valiantly that, not being able to resist the fury of the onset with which they were attacked, they turned their backs and threw themselves into flight, and some, indeed, among them, who were nearest to our men, cast themselves into the sea, thinking that thereby they ensured their safety.
The mariners, whom Afonso Dalboquerque had ordered to man the skiffs and row up and down the river, came up at once and put to death every one whom they could get at; and when it was sundown the Captains withdrew to the bridge, where they now had their stockades very strongly built on one side and on the other, and Afonso Dalboquerque took up his quarters in the middle, and they passed the whole of the night on the watch. And he ordered the Captains of the barques that were stationed in the river to keep up a continual fire upon the city all through the night with their bombards, and Pêro Gonçalvez, chief pilot, to take all the seamen to the ships to sleep there, and carry out the same instructions regarding the cannonade, and in this manner they remained all night. And it was a terrible thing to look at the city, for on account of the constant firing it seemed as if it were all on fire.
When morning came, the Moors, terrified at the unexpected misfortune which they witnessed, dared not appear in the streets, and this went on for a period of ten days running without any cessation by night or by day, and during this time our men were continually spilling the blood of the Moors, for inasmuch as the hunger they suffered was extreme, they risked their lives to go and look for food in the city, and there they lost their lives. And when they perceived the troubles that had fallen upon them, and the great peril they were in of losing their lives, and the hopelessness of their case, some began to come to Afonso Dalboquerque and beg for mercy; and the first who came were the Pégus, and these he received very kindly and gave them a safeguard to enable them to prosecute their voyage, and permission to carry with them their property, and in like manner he allowed all the merchants who came from Cape Comorim to the eastwards, who had no ships there, free exportation of their merchandize, and they began to start their trade again, and revive the navigation from their lands to Malaca, and this was the principal reason why he did so.
Utemutaraja, as I have already said, who had a safe conduct from Afonso Dalboquerque, seeing the destruction of the city, and fearing that he should incur displeasure because his son had gone over to the assistance of the King against our men — although indeed he was well rewarded for it, for he was severely wounded and many of his men were killed — came and made excuses for the behaviour of his son, making a show of being highly delighted at the ruin which had fallen upon the King. He received him with benignity, but nevertheless gave orders to the Captains to go always armed with all their men, and keep a good look out, for there could be no reliance placed upon him. Euy de Araújo, remembering the kindnesses which he and the other christians had received at the hands of Ninachatu, a Hindoo by nation, during their captivity, brought him to Afonso Dalboquerque, begging that he would show him favour and honour him, for he could not repay him in any other way for the kindness of the treatment he had experienced. Afonso Dalboquerque entertained him, and told him that he would promise, before he left for India, he should be rewarded in accordance with what Euy de Araújo had said of him.
And when Afonso Dalboquerque found himself less troubled by the uproars which the Moors caused by day and night, and that there was no longer in the city any force which could resist them, and as a recompense for past labours, he gave permission to everyone to sack the city, and free power to keep or dispose of everything they took, only warning them not to touch the houses or the subterranean storehouses of Ninachatu. When the city had been sacked, certain merchants, who had fled away to their country houses, seeing the kind way in which Ninachatu had been treated, sent and begged a safe-conduct from Afonso Dalboquerque that they might come to the city; and he granted this to all, except the Malays, who were natives of the country, for as to these he gave orders that all should be put to death wheresoever they were found.
In this second time of taking the city, many of our men were wounded, and some of those who were wounded with poison died, but all the others were cured, because Afonso Dalboquerque took very good care to give orders for their cure, and of the Moors, women and children, there died by the sword an infinite number, for no quarter was given to any of them. Three thousand pieces of artillery were taken, and among them there were about two thousand in bronze, and one very large gun which the King of Calicut had sent to the King of Malaca. The rest were of iron, of the fashion of our beiços, and all this artillery had its proper complement of carriages, which could not be rivalled even by that of Portugal. Large matchlocks, poisoned blowing tubes, bows, arrows, armour-plated dresses, Javanese lances, and other sorts of weapons, it was marvellous what was taken, besides much merchandize of every kind.
All this, and more which I leave, not to be prolix, Afonso Dalboquerque ordered to be divided among the Captains and among all the people of the Fleet, without taking anything for himself, except six large lions in bronze which he took for his tomb, and the bracelet, which I have already described, and young girls of all the races of that country, and some toys, all which he took to send them to the King D. Manuel and to the Queen D. Maria, but they were lost in the ship Flor de la Mar, on the voyage back to India, as I shall narrate hereafter.
Let not those who read this writing be astonished when I say that in Malaca were taken three thousand guns, for Buy de Araújo and Ninachatu declared to Afonso Dalboquerque that there were eight thousand in Malaca, and this may well be believed, for in Malaca were much copper and much tin, and the gun founders were as good as those of Germany; on the other hand, the city was a league in length, and when Afonso Dalboquerque disembarked they aimed at him from on all sides, whence it appears that even this number was insignificant in comparison to what was required for the defence.
The great Afonso Dalboquerque, being desirous of setting the affairs of Malaca in order, determined to appoint Ninachatu, because he was a Hindoo, Governor of the Quilins and Chetins ; and in order to make the Moors more secure he made Utemutaraja their principal- chief, and with these two men, as they were prominent persons, the people began to settle down quietly, and merchants, a few at a time, returned to the city ; but with all this Afonso Dalboquerque did not put too much confidence in them, especially in Utemutaraja, and in order to get rid of this suspicion which he had, he tried all he could to get the king into his hands, and with this end in view he sent many boats up the river and along the coast to see if they could take him.
The king, owing to the constant alarms which arose every day, and knowing the desire which Afonso Dalboquerque had of getting possession of him, fearing lest his own people should deliver him up, drew himself off from the city, a day's journey, taking with him some Malay merchants and his captains and governors of the land, with the intention of keeping in that neighbourhood, waiting for his Lassamane, the Admiral of the Sea, whom he had sent to the Island of Lingá, to convey to them a numerous fleet with many men, and in their company the King of that Island who was called Rajalingá, who was subject to him, with determination of returning against the city; but this did not come to pass, for the Rajalingá, knowing that Afonso Dalboquerque was in possession of the city, did not dare to come; and the King of Malaca, being of the opinion that Afonso Dalboquerque simply meant to rob the city and then leave it and sail away with the spoil he might get out of it, kept about that place for a space of ten days, in expectation of the issue of these events. But when he was informed that Afonso Dalboquerque was beginning to establish a fortress of timber 4 wherein to shelter himself, and so acting as to shew his wish to make a settlement in Malaca with the intention of maintaining possession of it, terrified at this news, and not deeming himself safe in the locality where he then was, he went further off into the interior country, a distance of two days' march ; and because the party was sharply pressed for want of provisions the Prince separated himself from his father and set] out to pitch his settlement close to the river, and there he marked out some very strong stockades, and barred the river with a quantity of timber, so that our boats might not pass up to the place.
As soon as Afonso Dalboquerque was informed that the Prince of Malaca was fortifying his position on the river, he despatched Fernão Perez Dandrade, Simão Dandrade, his brother, Gaspar de Paiva, Francisco Sarram, Aires Pereira, Ruy de Araújo, and Jorge Nunez de Lião, with four hundred Portuguese soldiers, and six hundred Javanese who were given for the purpose by XJtemutaraja, and the Pégu Captains with three hundred of their men, to take boats and launches up the river and put to rout that nest of robbers which was beginning to form itself there, and they did so ; and when the expedition reached the stockade which the Prince had constructed, they began to root it up with machines which they took with them for this purpose, and when they had rooted it up, they pressed on to attack the enemy at their fortifications.
The Prince, when he saw the fleet and the determined spirit with which the men came on, struck his camp, without making the least show of resistance, and fled away to the place where the King was, which was about a day's journey distant, and our men entered in pell-mell into their buildings, and captured all that had been stored there which the Prince had been unable to remove ; among their spoil his palanquins, very rich and gilded, and painted, and seven elephants, with their castles and housings ; and having obtained this victory the force returned to the city.
When the Prince reached the place where the King his father was, there arose differences between them concerning the loss of Malaca, each one seeking to put off the fault from his own to the other's shoulders, and this dissension ran so high, that being thus divided in plans, and suffering also from the discomforts of famine, they departed and shaped their journey for the kingdom of Pão, through a region desert and marshy, mounted upon their elephants with their wives and children, taking with them fifty men whom they forced to accompany them in their flight [...]
As disasters kept following this ill-fated King of Malaca, Fortune not being content with placing him in the position of losing his city, wife, children and people, disheartened and deeply chagrined at his losses, after he had arrived but a few days at the kingdom of Pão, he died. When the King was dead, all the Moors of honourable estate, who had followed his fortune, scattered themselves through the forests there, and after the lapse of some days came down, seeking to get to the sea coast, and sent to beg permission from Afonso Dalboquerque that they might return to their city ; and to some of them, who were men of principal power, he granted permission, for he considered it was more prudent to have such men as these within the city, than that they should be going about outside, stirring up assemblies and inciting the merchants not to come to the port ; he therefore commanded the Javanese to band themselves together and scour the land, and bring back captive all the Malays found in the woods there, to work at the building of the fortress which he was anxious to begin ; and if among these captives any one should chance to be found who could be recognised as having taken a guilty part in the massacre of the men forming the company of Diogo Lopez de Sequeira, Afonso Dalboquerque commanded that proper punishment be meted out to him, and that the others, with iron chains upon them, should serve at the work.
And in company with them there were brought to him one thousand five hundred slaves who had belonged to the king, with their women and children, and he took them all as captives of the King D. Manuel, just as they had been of the King of Malaca, and ordered that they should be supplied with wages and provisions when they worked at the building, in accordance with the native custom; and when they were not thus required to serve they worked for their own advantage, for after this manner they had been compelled to serve the King of Malaca ; and when he had thus arranged these matters, he ordered them to take off from the fortress the timber and woodwork which it carried for the protection of the men who were employed on the work, and to make ready lime, stone, and masonry for a beginning; and although Euy de Araújo never expected to be able to find sufficient stone to build the fortress, yet as it was the will of our Lord that the Portuguese should make good their settlement in that city, and that His name should there be worshipped, so great a quantity of stone and masonry was discovered in some ancient sepulchres of bygone kings, which were situated on the land beneath the surface of the ground, and in the mosques that were thrown down, that two fortresses might well have been constructed ; and now, as there were plenty of helping hands to begin the work, and many labourers, Afonso Dalboquerque gave orders to open out the foundations, and he founded a very strong fortress, the foundation filled in to the depth of a war lance, for the position of the ground required it to be so, with two wells of very good water within the precincts for drinking purposes, that were there already built with worked stone masonry.
And in order that our men, who were within the fortress, might be able to rally together for defence, if it were necessary, whenever they so desired, without the enemy being able to cut them off, he laid the foundation of a keep of four storey's height along the sea, so that also from its height they might with their artillery defend a hill which the fortress has over against it, which commands its position.
Now because it may be that some who read this history may find fault with building a fortress in an enemy's country with such a weak point, the answer is that Afonso Dalboquerque put up with the commanding position of this hill because there was not in the whole of the city a more commodious place for the security of the captain and the forces that might be placed therein, for alongside of this tower one of our ships of two hundred tons burden could come whenever it was desired. And they called the fortress "A Famosa", i.e., " The Famous." And as I have been told by many persons who nave seen it, it seems to have been very appropriately so called ; but I do not give a special account of its details of construction because it is very much frequented by our Portuguese. And because Afonso Dalboquerque was very much devoted to Our Lady he ordered the men to build a church, to which he gave the name of "Nossa Senhora da Annunciada", i.e., "Our Lady of the Annunciation." And in order that the memory of the persons who had taken part in the conquest of this kingdom and foundation of the fortress might remain for ever, he ordered them to make a very large stone slab, upon which were inscribed the names of all the principal men. But, the Portuguese are by nature envious of honour, they would not, therefore, suffer Afonso Dalboquerque to make more account of one than of another, seeing that all were equally meritorious in the work, and in the conquest of that city ; and he, in order not to give them cause for displeasure, and yet not to abandon that which he had done, gave orders that the stone should be set up over the gateway with the inscribed names turned to the wall, and on the back of the slab that verse of David, which says : "LAFIDEM QUEM REPROBRAVERUNT EDIFICANTES," that is, "The stone which the builders refused."
Birch, Walter de Gray, trans. The Commentaries of the Great Afonso Dalboquerque, Second Viceroy of India, Vol. III. London: Cambridge University Press for The Hakluyt Society, 1880. pp.101-108; 114-131;134-137.
The Sejarah Melayu (Malay Annals), c. 1612
The grand vizier of Goa, Alphonso Al-buquerco, after resigning his viziership, proceeded to Portugal, where he requested an armada. The King of Portugal gave him four great ships, five large caracks, four galleons, and Alphonso Albuquerco returned to Goa, where he again fitted out three ships, eight galleasses and four galleons, and four fasta, in all being forty-three sail, and proceeded to Malaca.
When he reached Malaca, all the Malaca men were greatly alarmed at the sight of so numerous a fleet approaching the port, and they gave information to Sultan Ahmed, that a very numerous fleet was entering the harbour of Malaca. Sultan Ahmed quickly collected all his champions and subjects, and prepared for war. When they were all prepared, the Malaca men came forth, and the Frangis from their ships began to cannonnade, and balls fell like a thick falling shower of rain, and the sound of their cannon was like the thunder of Heaven, and the sound of their muskets like the rattling of dried pease, and the Malaca men could not maintain themselves on the sea-shore, on account of the severe shower of balls that rained on them. Then all the fleet of Malaca retreated, and as soon as the enemy observed their retreat, all the galleons and the fasta and galleasses made for the shore, and the enemy landed. As soon as the Malaca men saw this, they advanced to engage them in a great mass, and the sound of the weapons of the two hosts was like the day of judgment.
Sultan Ahmed mounted his elephant, Jinaia, and marched out with Sri Audana, on the neck of the elephant, and Tun Ali on the croup. The Prince also carried Mukhdum with him, on the howder, for Mukhdam was the Prince's guru. The raja advanced towards the quay, attended with a strong band of champions, and set upon the Frangis, who were very numerous, and the Frangis were broken, and were furiously amoked by the Malaca men till they fell back on the seashore, and retreated to their ships. As soon as they reached their ships, they rained away with their cannon like thunder-bolts, whizzing from the sky, and Sultan Ahmed moved a little way back from the quay, and multitudes run searching for a place to shelter themselves from the bullets.
Then said Mukhdum to the Prince, "Sultan, this is noplace for the enjoyment of the divine union, let us return,"and he laid hold of the stay ropes of the howder with both his hands. Then the Frangis shouted from their prahus, "Haloo! you Malaca men, take notice, we will all of us land tomorrow, by God, (Demi Devasa,) therefore keep a good lookout." "Very well," said the Malaca men. That night he ordered a steady watch to be kept by all the mantris and hulubalangs, in their arms and armour. All the mantris and hulubalangs, and young nobles accordingly kept watch in the public hall, and they began to say to each other, "What is the use of sitting idly here? let us read a tale of war, which may be profitable to us."
Then said Tun Muhammed Unta, "That is very true; let us therefore send Tun Indra Sagara to beg from the Prince the history of Muhammed Hanefiah, which he has sometimes favoured us with, for the Frangis are to make their attack tomorrow. Then Tun Indra Sagara entered to the Prince, and related to him the request of the young warriors. Then the Prince gave the Hikayat Hamdah, and said to Tun Indra Sagara, "Tell the young lads I will give them the story of Muhammed Hanefiah, but I fear they will not be so courageous as him, but if they will demean themselves like Hamdah, it will be very well. Therefore I give them the story of Hamda.
Then Tun Indra Sagara brought out the history of Hamda, and told them what the raja said. Then all the young men were silent, till Tun Isup said to Tun Indra Sagara, "The raja has spoken amiss, go back, and tell him, that he has only to desire the young lads to show their valour like that of Benyar, since they wish to deprive us of our own country." Then Indra Sagara returned to represent this to His Majesty. Then the Prince smiled: "it is very just, said he, that Tun Isup observes, and he gave him the history of Muhammed Hanefiah.
When the day was lighted, the Frangis landed thousands on thousands, with their whole host and weapons of war. Sultan Muhammed quickly collected his hulubalangs, and marched out to encounter the Frangis. The Prince mounted the elephant named Juru Damang, with Sri Audana on the neck of the elephant, and Tun Ali on the croup. The two armies met, and the battle began, the Malaca men closing up stoutly, playing their creeses and spears, and the Frangis again fell back. When Alfonso de Albuquerco perceived his men giving way, he quickly supported them with a thousand soldiers with their musquetry, and set upon the Malaca men, and the sound of the musquetry was like thunder, and their balls fell like pease on a sieve (bidi). This was a severe attack, and the whole array of the Malaca men was broken, and all the champions of the Prince gave way, and the Prince stood all alone on his elephant.
As soon as Alphonso de Albuquerco saw the Prince left alone, he enclosed him quickly round with soldiery, and the Prince singly contended with a long lance, against all these Frangis, — curse them — and the Prince was slightly wounded in the hand, and lifted up his hand which was wounded, and cried, "You race of the Malays, are you not all ashamed to see me wounded here, take courage and stand by me." When the champions who had fled, heard this, they all returned, and again made a furious onset, and amoked the Frangis with their whole soul. When Tun Saleh saw the blood of the raja's wound, he plunged singly into the Frangis host, pushing them vigorously with his lance; but they run him through the breast with a spear, and he fell dead. This day, in the amok attack on the Frangis, five-and-twenty chosen hulubalangs perished, and Sri Audana was also wounded through the groin, being pierced with a long lance. Then they made the raja's elephant kneel down, and the Prince descending, returned to his palace, whither they also conveyed Sri Audana; and the raja ordered his physician to attend him, and he examined the wound, with the sharp point of a betel-leaf, and said, that it was of no consequence, and would easily be cured, though if the weapon had penetrated a barley-corn farther, he had been a dead man.
By this time the Frangis had approached the exterior hall of the Prince's palace, and all the Malaca men were flying. The Prince saw that all had fled, and then Sultan Ahmed himself had recourse to flight, and the bandahara, who was lame, was seized on by Si Sa-la-mat, and compelled to fly. Then the Frangis entered the fortress, and they saw that there was nobody in the fortress, and then they continued the pursuit. Then said the lame bandahara to Sa-la-mat, "Bear up, and bring me up with these accursed Frangis, that I may amok with them;" but his family would not permit him. He said "Fy, cowards I what a pity it is that I am lame. Were it not so, I would certainly die on Malaca ground; but now I see that all the young lads of the present day are not in the least sensible of shame, and in a crisis like this, there is not one of them to devote himself and amok."
Than Sultan Ahmed retreated up to Moar, a place above, named Pagoh. As for Sultan Mahmud, he remained in Batu hampar, (spread stones,) and he founded a fort at Bentayen. In a short time, the Frangis appeared before Pagar, and prepared to attack it. In a few days Sang Satia died, and Pagoh was taken, and Sultan Ahmed made his retreat, and went up the river to Panarigan. The lame bandahara died, and was buried at Lubu Batu, (the stone-plumbs,) which is generally termed Bender-Lubu-batu. After this, Sultan Ahmed, with Sultan Mahmud, retired to Pahang, and Sultan Abdal Jamil received them with great kindness, and conducted him into the city, with a thousand testimonies of respect and honour.
Sultan Mahmud gave his daughter, who was born of the Princess of Calantan, in marriage to the raja of Pahang, named Sultan Mansur Shah. Without remaining long in Pahang, he proceeded to Bentan, and Sultan Ahmed founded a city at Kopeh. This Sultan Ahmed was extremely proper in all his conduct, and kind to all his subjects. In one respect, however, he was not good, that he had no affection for his mantris and hulubalangs and great men, and was greatly attached to all the young lads, and his personal servants, and all his people eat and drank pleasantly, feasting on rice with turmeric, and roasfowls, all of them.
Then the great men all came to wait on Sultan Ahmed, and they were hooted by all the young lads, saying, "Where are the fragments and leaving of our rice prepared with turmeric, and our roasted fowls, with the picked bones, to give to those old people, who are come from abroad, for such is the raja's wish?" Sultan Mahmud heard of these proceedings, and was displeased at it, and by the power of God Almighty, the heart of Sultan Mahmud was expanded, and he sent a hulubalang, who killed him privately, so that few persons were acquainted with it, and the proceeding of the person respecting Sultan Ahmed was left in darkness. Thus died Sultan Ahmed, and was buried at Bukit-batu, (stone-hill,) and he is therefore called Merhum Bukit Batu, the deceased of the stone-hill.
After the death of Sultan Ahmed, Sultan Mahmud placed on the throne his son, raja Mudhafer, to reign in his stead, and ordered him to be put under the tuition of a learned man, named Sham Selim, along with the sons of many other nobles. When Raja Mudhafer grew up, he married Tun Trang, the daughter of Tun Fatima, and begot a son, named Raja Mansur. The laksamana Khwajeh Hasan died with grief, and was buried at Gunung-pantei, (shore-hill,) and Hang Nadim succeeded him in the office of laksamana, who became so famous in war for fighting, till the earth was drenched in blood.
This Hang Nadim was two descents from the laksamana Hang Tuah, and the bandahara Lubu Batu was also two descents from the same hero. Tun Fatimah, the Queen of Sultan Mahmud, bore a son, who was named Ala-eddin Gheyas Shah; who was commonly denominated Sultan Muda. Sultan Mudhafer, the sovereign, married Tun Trang, the daughter of Tun Fatimah, and he had also by Tun Ali, a son, named Raja Mansur. After the death of Sultan Ahmed, all the young nobles and the King's servants were assembled by Sultan Mahmud, and said to them, "Do not be concerned about your situation, it shall be continued precisely as under Si Ahmed." They replied, "We will submit to the authority of Your Majesty, as we formerly submitted to that of your son, and we now all return to your allegiance.
All of them submitted themselves in this manner, except Tun Ali, who refused to pay allegiance to him, and whatever in-stance the Sultan made to satisfy him, he still refused, saying, "I never wish to look another raja in the face after that of His Majesty, your son, for His Majesty died not of disease, nor in war, but only by foul treason. Therefore, I request that Your Majesty would throw me where he lies; for what purpose do I survive?" By how many means did Sultan Ahmed endeavour to allure him, presenting him with gold and silver, and how many dresses! but not one of them would he receive, desiring only that the Prince would put him to death, which was at last done by Sultan Mahmud.
Leyden, John (trans.) Malay Annals : translated from the Malay Language, by the late Dr. John Leyden. With an Introduction, by Sir Thomas Stamford Raffles, F.R.S., &c. London: Longman, Hurst, Rees, Orme and Brown, 1821. pp. 351-61.
Perak
Annotation
The Pangkor Engagement of 1874 was a significant, if not watershed event that had far reaching consequences/ramifications for the governance of the Malay states, as well as the nature of British intervention in the peninsular in the late 19th century. The treaty led to the establishment of the ‘Resident system’ in Perak and acted as a precedent for further British intervention in other Malay States.
The treaty came as a response to the Larut wars in Perak, a series of conflicts between rival Chinese secret societies allied to local rulers vying for control over tin mines and the throne of Perak, complicated by the increasing threat of piracy along the coast of Perak, which threatened the commercial as well as physical security of the Straits Settlements of Singapore and Penang respectively. The Larut wars were highly disruptive to tin-mining operations in Perak. Constant attacks by rival secret societies rendered most of the mines inoperable as miners fled the violence, shaking investor confidence in London and Singapore.
The instability and violence stemming from the conflicts were increasingly unacceptable to the British government, which was keen to prevent rival Western powers from staking a claim in the region, as well as ensure the continued commercial success of the Straits Settlements. This led to active British military and political intervention, combining recognizing the claims of Sultan Abdullah as the lawful ruler of Perak with imposing the ‘Resident system’ whereby a British Resident was attached to the Sultan’s court. It was understood the Sultan would consult this Resident, and accept his advice, on all matters except those concerning Malay religion and customs. This system was adapted from a model already in use in British India, and was eventually imposed on the rest of the Malay States.
The treaty also highlighted the importance of the Chinese community in the economic as well as political life of 19th century Malaya. Especially telling was the role of the Straits Chinese community in lobbying for British intervention, to protect their investments in the tin mines. For example, Tan Kim Cheng, a successful Straits Chinese merchant, was one of the key personalities pushing for the successful conclusion of the treaty, after one of the claimants of the Perak throne, Sultan Abdullah, appealed to Tan to seek assistance from the British to restore him to his throne, as well as ensure security for the smooth operations of the tin mines. This local convergence of interest provided an active and important pull to entice more systematic British intervention, constituting yet another example of how interactive the wider process of imperialism was in 19th century Asia.
An immediate effect of this treaty was that the British were able to exert effective political control upon Perak, by suppressing the violence and piracy that plagued the state and hobbled its governance, while resolving the thorny issue of succession. However what is more important is that the treaty served as a model for future political intervention in the Malay states in the long 19th century, culminating in British ascendancy throughout the peninsular.
Pangkor Treaty — January 20, 1874
Whereas, a state of anarchy exists in the Kingdom of Perak owing to the want of settled government in the Country, and no efficient power exists for the protection of the people and for securing to them the fruits of their industry, and,
Whereas, large numbers of Chinese are employed and large sums of money invested in Tin mining in Perak by British subjects and others residing in Her Majesty's Possessions, and the said mines and property are not adequately protected, and piracy, murder and arson are rife in the said country, whereby British trade and interests greatly suffer, and the peace and good order of the neighbouring British Settlements are sometimes menaced, and,
Whereas, certain Chiefs for the time being of the said Kingdom of Perak have stated their inability to cope with the present difficulties, and together with those interested in the industry of the country have requested assistance, and,
Whereas, Her Majesty's Government is bound by Treaty Stipulations to protect the said Kingdom and to assist its rulers, now,
His Excellency Sir Andrew Clarke, K.C.M.G., C.B., Governor of the Colony of the Straits Settlements, in compliance with the said request, and with a view of assisting the said rulers and of effecting a permanent settlement of affairs in Perak, has proposed the following Articles of arrangements as mutually beneficial to the Independent Rulers of Perak, their subjects, the subjects of Her Majesty, and others residing in or trading with Perak, that is to say:-
I. First – That the Rajah Muda Abdullah be recognised as the Sultan of Perak.
II. Second – That the Rajah Bandahara Ismail, now Acting Sultan, be allowed to retain the title of Sultan Muda with a pension and a certain small Territory assigned to him.
III. Third – That all the other nominations of great Officers made at the time the Rajah Bandahara Ismail received the regalia be confirmed.
IV. Fourth – That the power given to the Orang Kayah Mantri over Larut by the late Sultan be confirmed.
V. Fifth – That all Revenues be collected and all appointments made in the name of the Sultan.
VI. Sixth – That the Sultan receive and provide a suitable residence for a British Officer to be called Resident, who shall be accredited to his Court, and whose advice must be asked and acted upon on all questions other than those touching Malay Religion and Custom.
VII. Seventh – That the Governor of Larut shall have attached to him as Assistant Resident, a British Officer acting uner the Resident of Perak, with similar power and subordinate only to the said Resident.
VIII. Eight – That the cost of these Residents with their Establishments be determined by the Government of the Straits Settlements and be a first charge on the Revenues of Perak.
IX. Ninth – That a Civil List regulating the income to be received by the Sultan, by the Bandahara, by the Mantri, and by the other Officers be the next charge on the said Revenue.
X. Tenth – That the collection and control of all Revenues and the general administration of the country be regulated under the advice of these Residents.
XI. Eleventh – That the Treaty under which the Pulo Dinding and the islands of Pangkor were ceded to Great Britain having been misunderstood and it being desirable to readjust the same, so as to carry into effect the intention of the Framers thereof, it is hereby declared that the Boundaries of the said Territory so ceded shall be rectified as follows, that is to say:-
From Bukit Sigari, as laid down in the Chart Sheet No. 1 Straits of Malacca, a tracing of which is annexed1, marked A, in a straight line to the sea, thence along the sea coast to the South, to Pulo Katta on the West, and from Pulo Katta a line running North East about five miles, and thence North to Bukit Sigari.
XII. Twelfth – That the Southern watershed of the Krean River, that is to say, the portion of land draining into that River from the South be declared British Territory, as a rectification of the Southern Boundary of Province Wellesley. Such Boundary to be marked out by Commissioners; one named by the Government of the Straits Settlements, and the other by the Sultan of Perak.
XIII. Thirteenth – That on the cessation of the present disturbances in Perak and the re-establishment of peace and amity among the contending factions in that Country, immediate measures under the control and supervision of one or more British Officers shall be taken for restoring as far as practicable the occupation of the Mines, and the possession of Machinery, &c., as held previous to the commencement of these disturbances, and for the payment of compensation for damages, the decision of such officers shall be final in such case.
XIV. Fourteenth – The Mantri of Larut engages to acknowledge as a debt due by him to the Government of the Straits Settlements, the charges and expenses incurred by this investigation, as well as charges and expenses to which the Colony of the Straits Settlements and Great Britain have been put or may be put by their efforts to secure the tranquility of Perak and the safety of trade.
The above Articles having been severally read and explained to the undersigned who having understood the same, have severally agreed to and accepted them as binding on them and their Heirs and Successors.
This done and concluded at Pulo Pangkor in the British Possessions, this Twentieth day of January, in the year of the Christian Era, one thousand eight hundred and seventy-four.
Executed before me,
ANDREW CLARKE,
Governor, Commander-in-Chief, and
Vice-Admiral of the Straits Settlements.
Chop of the Sultan of Perak.
“ “ Bandahara of Perak.
“ “ Tumongong of Perak.
“ “ Mantri of Perak.
“ “ Shahbander of Perak.
“ “ Rajah Mahkota of Perak.
“ “ Laxamana of Perak.
“ “ Datoh Sa'gor.
Allen, J. De V., A. J. Stockwell, and L. R. Wright. A Collection of Treaties and Other Documents Affecting the States of Malaysia, 1761-1963. No ed. Vol. I. London: Oceana Publications, 1981. 390-392.
1 See Clarke to Kimberley, 26 Jan. 1874, enclosure 9, P.P., C.1111.
Annotated by Aloysius Ng
China
Annotation
In December 1431 an impressive fleet of over a hundred seagoing ships anchored in the harbor of Changle, Fujian, awaiting the northern wind that enabled the first leg of an expedition through Southeast Asia into the Indian Ocean. The principal imperial envoys, Zheng He and Wang Jinghong, took this opportunity to erect a stele in commemoration of six similar voyages during the Yongle reign (1402-1424).
The Yongle emperor took the throne from his nephew, the Jianwen emperor (r. 1398-1402), in a civil war that had long lasting effects on the relationship between the new emperor and the literate elite that staffed the bureaucratic system. The Yongle emperor relied on personal relations with castrated palace servants to circumvent bureaucracy, and in the process he allowed them to become a powerful faction at court. It is telling that the Changle stele was signed by Grand Directors and Regional Military Commissioners, in other words, eunuchs and military men, but not civil officials. According to Dreyer 70 eunuchs were in charge of the fleet that carried 302 military officers and 26,803 soldiers. 180 of the 190 civil officials were medical doctors, which leaves only 10 civil officials. (Dreyer. 2007: 127-8) The maritime expeditions to the Indian Ocean illustrated the personal influence of the Chinese emperor, which goes a long way to explain why six expeditions occurred during the Yongle reign, and one last expedition took place during the Xuande reign (1425-35).
The stele states that the emperor delighted in tribute envoys from foreign lands and so he commanded Zheng He and others to “go to their countries and confer presents on them, so as to transform them by displaying our power while treating distant peoples with kindness.” (Dreyer. 2007: 195) Imperial envoys travelled with foreign ambassadors on detached squadrons to numerous larger and smaller courts in Southeast Asia and the Indian Ocean littoral. In general they received a warm welcome, not in the least because tribute exchange profited foreign parties. On occasion the fleet met with hostility, or was drawn into local conflict by one or both parties. In the case of Chen Zuyi, a Palembang-based pirate from Guangdong, the detached squadrons reassembled before Chinese troops attacked and captured Chen. The Chinese envoys relied on a display of power, but when push came to shove they used military force to remove those who preyed on economic and diplomatic traffic along the maritime Silk Road.
The maritime expeditions grew out of an expansive policy during the Yongle reign. The emperor sent his eunuchs to known destinations to inform the people of the world that he ascended the throne. As eunuchs traveled they encountered people from more distant regions, usually maritime merchants. They brought them back to China and presented them to the emperor as ambassadors. The emperor received their tribute and then ordered the eunuchs to accompany them back to their home countries. The eunuchs thus expanded the known world for Ming China. The Ming emperor made the universal claim to rule all under heaven and his eunuchs left steles at home and abroad to reinforce this worldview. Eunuch led missions reached as far north as Sakhalin Island opposite the Amur River mouth where a stele was erected to celebrate the official title that the Ming emperor bestowed on a local chieftain. Other eunuchs traveled into central Asia as far as Samarkand and Herat. Numerous maritime voyages carried eunuchs to countries in south and southeast Asia, though the seven large scale expeditions into the Indian Ocean tend to overshadow the shorter voyages.
The Changle stele and a near identical stele at Liujiagang, where the fleet left the Yangzi River to enter the East China Sea, recorded the maritime expeditions in greater detail than most official sources, e.g. Ming Veritable Records, Ming History, perhaps because the civil officials responsible for official record keeping frowned upon the expensive voyages of their bitter rivals, the eunuchs. Furthermore, the inscriptions were commissioned by Zheng He and thus present the viewpoint of someone closely involved in the organization of the maritime expeditions. The inscriptions are therefore essential to a balanced understanding of the maritime expeditions. The two steles were erected near temples of Tianfei, a goddess associated with sailors, fishermen, and maritime merchants. The inscriptions praised her benevolence and at the same time they conveyed to temple visitors the extensive reach of Ming imperial power. A third stele at Galle, Sri Lanka, served a similar purpose. In Tamil, Persian, and Chinese it recorded the gifts that Zheng He bestowed on local temples in the name of the Yongle emperor. The steles are physical expressions of imperial power that remind the people at home and abroad of the extensive reach of the Ming emperor, even when the pious inscriptions give most of the credit to Tianfei and other deities.
Bibliography
Dreyer, Edward L. Zheng He: China and the Oceans in the Early Ming Dynasty, 1405-1433. New York: Pearson Longman, 2007.
Changle Stele (Zheng He, 1431)
This inscription was carved on a stele erected at a temple to the goddess the Celestial Spouse at Changle in Fujian province in 1431.
Record of the miraculous answer (to prayer) of the goddess the Celestial Spouse.
The Imperial Ming Dynasty unifying seas and continents, surpassing the three dynasties even goes beyond the Han and Tang dynasties. The countries beyond the horizon and from the ends of the earth have all become subjects and to the most western of the western or the most northern of the northern countries, however far they may be, the distance and the routes may be calculated. Thus the barbarians from beyond the seas, though their countries are truly distant, "with double translation" have come to audience bearing precious objects and presents.
The Emperor, approving of their loyalty and sincerity, has ordered us (Zheng) He and others at the head of several tens of thousands of officers and flag-troops to ascend more than one hundred large ships to go and confer presents on them in order to make manifest the transforming power of the (imperial) virtue and to treat distant people with kindness. From the third year of Yongle (1405) till now we have seven times received the commission of ambassadors to countries of the western ocean. The barbarian countries which we have visited are: by way of Zhancheng (Champa), Zhaowa (Java), Sanfoqi (Palembang) and Xianlo (Siam) crossing straight over to Xilanshan (Ceylon) in South India, Guli (Calicut), and Kezhi (Cochin), we have gone to the western regions Hulumosi (Hormuz), Adan (Aden), Mugudushu (Mogadishu), altogether more than thirty countries large and small. We have traversed more than one hundred thousand li of immense water spaces and have beheld in the ocean huge waves like mountains rising sky-high, and we have set eyes on barbarian regions far away hidden in a blue transparency of light vapours, while our sails loftily unfurled like clouds day and night continued their course (rapid like that) of a star, traversing those savage waves as if we were treading a public thoroughfare. Truly this was due to the majesty and the good fortune of the Court and moreover we owe it to the protecting virtue of the divine Celestial Spouse.
The power of the goddess having indeed been manifested in previous times has been abundantly revealed in the present generation. In the midst of the rushing waters it happened that, when there was a hurricane, suddenly there was a divine lantern shining in the mast, and as soon as this miraculous light appeared the danger was appeased, so that even in the danger of capsizing one felt reassured that there was no cause for fear. When we arrived in the distant countries we captured alive those of the native kings who were not respectful and exterminated those barbarian robbers who were engaged in piracy, so that consequently the sea route was cleansed and pacified and the natives put their trust in it. All this is due to the favours of the goddess.
It is not easy to enumerate completely all the cases where the goddess has answered (prayers). Previously in a memorial to the Court we have requested that her virtue be registered in the Court of Sacrificial Worship and a temple be built at Nanking on the bank of the dragon river where regular sacrifices should be transmitted for ever. We have respectfully received an Imperial commemorative composition exalting the miraculous favours, which is the highest recompense and praise indeed. However, the miraculous power of the goddess resides wherever one goes. As for the temporary palace on the southern mountain at Changle, I have, at the head of the fleet, frequently resided there awaiting the (favorable) wind to set sail for the ocean.
We, Zheng He and others, on the one hand have received the high favour of a gracious commission of our Sacred Lord, and on the other hand carry to the distant barbarians the benefits of respect and good faith (on their part). Commanding the multitudes on the fleet and (being responsible for) a quantity of money and valuables in the face of the violence of the winds and the nights our one fear is not to be able to succeed; how should we then dare not to serve our dynasty with exertion of all our loyalty and the gods with the utmost sincerity? How would it be possible not to realize what is the source of the tranquillity of the fleet and the troops and the salvation on the voyage both going and returning? Therefore we have made manifest the virtue of the goddess on stone and have moreover recorded the years and months of the voyages to the barbarian countries and the return in order to leave (the memory) for ever.
I. In the third year of Yongle (1405) commanding the fleet we went to Guli (Calicut) and other countries. At that time the pirate Chen Zuyi had gathered his followers in the country of Sanfoqi (Palembang), where he plundered the native merchants. When he also advanced to resist our fleet, supernatural soldiers secretly came to the rescue so that after one beating of the drum he was annihilated. In the fifth year (1407) we returned.
II. In the fifth year of Yongle (1407) commanding the fleet we went to Zhaowa (Java), Guli (Calicut), Kezhi (Cochin) and Xianle (Siam). The kings of these countries all sent as tribute precious objects, precious birds and rare animals. In the seventh year (1409) we returned.
III. In the seventh year of Yongle (1409) commanding the fleet we went to the countries (visited) before and took our route by the country of Xilanshan (Ceylon). Its king Yaliekunaier (Alagakkonara) was guilty of a gross lack of respect and plotted against the fleet. Owing to the manifest answer to prayer of the goddess (the plot) was discovered and thereupon that king was captured alive. In the ninth year (1411) on our return the king was presented (to the throne) (as a prisoner); subsequently he received the Imperial favour of returning to his own country.
IV. In the eleventh year of Yongle (1413) commanding the fleet we went to Hulumosi (Ormuz) and other countries. In the country of Sumendala (Samudra) there was a false king Suganla (Sekandar) who was marauding and invading his country. Its king Cainu-liabiding (Zaynu-'l-Abidin) had sent an envoy to the Palace Gates in order to lodge a complaint. We went thither with the official troups under our command and exterminated some and arrested (other rebels), and owing to the silent aid of the goddess we captured the false king alive. In the thirteenth year (1415) on our return he was presented (to the Emperor as a prisoner). In that year the king of the country of Manlajia (Malacca) came in person with his wife and son to present tribute.
V. In the fifteenth year of Yongle (1417) commanding the fleet we visited the western regions. The country of Hulumosi (Ormuz) presented lions, leopards with gold spots and large western horses. The country of Adan (Aden) presented qilin of which the native name is culafa (giraffe), as well as the long-horned animal maha (oryx). The country of Mugudushu (Mogadishu) presented huafu lu ("striped" zebras) as well as lions. The country of Bulawa (Brava) presented camels which run one thousand li as well as camel-birds (ostriches). The countries of Zhaowa (Java) and Guli (Calicut) presented the animal miligao. They all vied in presenting the marvellous objects preserved in the mountains or hidden in the seas and the beautiful treasures buried in the sand or deposited on the shores. Some sent a maternal uncle of the king, others a paternal uncle or a younger brother of the king in order to present a letter of homage written on gold leaf as well as tribute.
VI. In the nineteenth year of Yongle (1421) commanding the fleet we conducted the ambassadors from Hulumosi (Ormuz) and the other countries who had been in attendance at the capital for a long time back to their countries. The kings of all these countries prepared even more tribute than previously.
VII. In the sixth year of Xuande (1431) once more commanding the fleet we have left for the barbarian countries in order to read to them (an Imperial edict) and to confer presents.
We have anchored in this port awaiting a north wind to take the sea, and recalling how previously we have on several occasions received the benefits of the protection of the divine intelligence we have thus recorded an inscription in stone.
Teobaldo Filesi. David Morison trans. China and Africa in the Middle Ages. (London: Frank Cass, 1972). 57-61.
Annotated by Sander M. Molenaar
Annotation
In the early seventeenth century Matteo Ricci (1552-1610) successfully established a Jesuit presence in the Forbidden City, while European merchants were still stuck at the border. Ricci and colleagues utilized mathematical, geographical, and especially astronomical knowledge to interact on an intellectual level with the educated elite and forge personal relations. Posing as literati, as the Jesuits did, then allowed them to discuss religious and moral matters as well.
Xu Guangqi (1562-1633) heard of Ricci’s world map and in the spring of 1600 the two men briefly met in Najing. Three years later Xu returned to Nanjing. There he studied with the Jesuit Joao da Rocha, and within ten days he was baptized as Paolo. He passed the metropolitan exams in the following year and started his official career at the Hanlin Academy in Beijing, which allowed him to spend his leisure time in the company of Matteo Ricci. In 1606-07 Ricci and Xu worked on translating Euclid’s Geometry.
The Jesuit mission suffered a serious setback in 1615, five years after Ricci passed away. Valentim Carvalho (1559-1630) moved from Japan to Macao and instructed the Jesuit missionaries in China to stop teaching mathematics and to cease involvement in the official reform of the Ming calendar. In the same year Shen Que (d. 1624) became vice-minister of rites at Nanjing. He submitted a series of memorials to the throne in which he proposed expulsion of all Jesuit missionaries, suppression of their teachings, and punishment of Chinese converts. According to Shen Jesuit terminology, such as the ‘Teaching of the Lord of Heaven’ (Tianzhu jiao) or the ‘Great West Ocean’ (da Xiyang), challenged the imperial order of the Great Ming (da Ming) under the leadership of the Son of Heaven (tianzi). Furthermore, the Jesuits drew crowds of common people and their teachings even attracted literate men. Shen suspected rebellious intent behind the Jesuit organization.
In 1617 Xu responded to the accusations of Shen Que, even though Shen had not mentioned Chinese converts by name. In a memorial to the throne Xu asked for a fair investigation. He argued that he was skeptical at first, but after thorough investigation he came to believe in the advantages of European mathematics and astronomy, and the purity of the Jesuit missionaries. A fair investigation would prove them innocent of all accusations, but Xu feared, correctly, that the Jesuits would not receive a fair trial. In his memorial Xu claims that the Jesuits came to China because they heard that ancient Chinese philosophers served Heaven by practicing self-cultivation, just as the Jesuits served the Lord of Heaven through the cultivation of personal virtue. Xu justified the presence of Jesuits on the basis of ‘corresponding principles’ between the worldviews of Jesuits and late Ming intellectuals. He also accused Buddhists and Daoists of spreading deceptive and unreasonable doctrines. In close to two millennia they had failed to bring order and stability to China. European countries, however, had been kind to each other for well over a millennium. Not only did these countries lack revolt and anarchy, but even these terms were non-existent.
Xu needed to tread carefully in this confrontation with vice-minister Shen. Rather than subversive elements from abroad, the Jesuits could be useful tools in the cultivation of peaceful and morally upright imperial subjects, more useful at least than established religious and philosophical traditions. Xu tried to draw the emperor’s attention to the witch-hunt Shen proposed, but his memorial failed to achieve this result and the Jesuits were ordered to leave China. Some Jesuits moved to Macao, others sheltered with Chinese converts, until the political climate changed. Xu Guangqi resigned on a plea of illness, but returned to office in the Ministry of Rites in 1628, one year after the Chongzhen emperor (r. 1627-1644) ascended the throne. In 1629 Xu submitted an eclipse prediction that was more accurate than that of the Directorate of Astronomy. This led to the establishment of an office for calendar reform, which allowed Xu to bring the Jesuits back into the Forbidden City where they stayed even after the Manchus conquered the Ming capital.
Hsu Kuang-chi's memorial to the Wanli Emperor (1617)
Xu Guangqi
Su Kwangki, guardian and tutor of the sons of the Imperial house, and Chancellor of the National Institute, respectfully presents this memorial:
Knowing full well that the arts and sciences of the foreigners are in a high degree correct, your majesty's humble servant earnestly begs of his sacred Intelligence, the illustrious honor of issuing a manifesto in their behalf, so as to render his own felicity eternal, and give great tranquility to ten thousand generations. Your majesty's servant has seen, in the Governmental Gazette, the report of the Board of Rites, impeaching Pantoya and others, your majesty's European courtiers. In that Report it is said, "Their doctrines are penetrating deep, and spreading wide, so that even men of eminence are believing in them;" and, "although their discourses about astronomy are absurd, yet even scholars are falling into their cloudy visions." By thus specifying "men of eminence" and "scholars," ministers of the Board seem to fear that trunk and branches are being alike involved. Still they have failed to give the names of individuals. Now your servant is one of the ministers of the Imperial Court, who has been accustomed to discourse with your majesty's courtiers on religious subjects; and he is one who believes in the many books they have published. With them also he has been accustomed to investigate the laws of mathematics; his earlier and later reports thereon have all been laid before the Imperial presence; and thus also your servant is among those who have "discoursed about astronomy." If, therefore, your majesty's courtiers are to be found guilty, how can your servant hope to be so fortunate as to escape uncondemned by the ministers of the Board?
As your servant for years past has been thus accustomed to engage in discussions and investigations with these courtiers, he has become well acquainted with them, and knows that they are not only in deportment and in heart wholly free from aught which can excite suspicion, but that they are indeed worthies and sages; that their doctrines are most correct; their regimen most strict; their learning most extensive; their knowledge most refined; their hearts most true; their views most steady; and that among the people of their own nations, there is not one in a thousand so accomplished, or one in ten thousand so talented as these men. Now the reason of their coming thousands of miles eastward, is because hearing that the teachers, the sages and worthies of China, served Heaven by the cultivation of personal virtue, just as the teachers in their respective nations by the cultivation of personal virtue, served the Lord of Heaven, and knowing that there was this correspondence in principles, they desired, notwithstanding the difficulties and dangers by land and by sea, to give their seal to the truth, in order that men might become good, and so realize high Heaven's love to man.
According to their sayings, the service of the High Ruler is a prime duty; the protection of the body and the salvation of the soul are grand essentials; fidelity, filial piety, compassion, and love are to be universally exercised; the reformation of errors and the practice of virtue are initiatory steps; repentance and purification are the requisites for personal improvement; the true fecilicity of life celestial is the glorious reward of doing good; and the eternal misery of earth's prison is the bitter recompense of doing evil. All their commands and injunctions are in the highest degree compatible with the principles of Heaven and the feelings of men. Their laws can cause men to do good most truly, and to depart from evil most completely, for that which they say of the favor of the Lord of heaven's producing, nourishing and saving, and of his principles of rewarding the good and punishing the evil, is perfectly plain and most strictly true; sufficient to move the hearts of men and to excite in them the love and confidence, the fear and dread, which naturally spring from internal rectitude.
Your majesty's servant has always been accustomed to consider the rewards and punishments ordained by the ancient rulers and kings, and the distinctions hetween right and wrong laid down by our sages and worthies, as most luminous and most perfectly adapted to guide men to what is good, and deter them from evil. All these, however, can reach only his external conduct, and cannot touch his inward feelings. An example in point are the words of Sz'-ma Tsien, "Yen-hwui's untimely death, and Tau-chih's long life," which have led men to suspect that there is no future recompense of good and evil. Hence deceit and guile have increased in proportion as the restraints laid thereon have been multiplied. Where one law has been enacted, a hundred evil practices have sprung up, disappointing the heart's desire for stable government, and exciting deep regret on account of the inadequacy of means to secure that end. With a view of supplying this deficiency, recourse was had to the sayings of the Buddhists, which declare that there will be a recompense of good and evil after the body dies; and that for their conduct and feelings both Yenhwui and Tau-chih might seem to have had a recompense, which, it was supposed, would cause other men without delay to depart from evil and do good. Why then is it that during the eighteen hundred years since the Buddhistic religion came to the East, the ways of the world and the hearts of men have not been reformed, except it be because, though seeming to be true, that religion is false? The doctrine of Lau and Chwang, as they are set forth by the Contemplatists, are dark, farfetched, and unreliable. All the schemes and legerdemain practiced by the doctors of the black art, are strangely deceptive and unreasonable. Moreover, they wish to elevate Buddha above the high Ruler, and thus do they act in opposition to the doctrines of the rulers and kings, the sages and worthies of antiquity. When all this is done, on whom then shall men depend? Whom shall they follow?
If there be an absolute desire to have men do good in perfection, then the knowledge of serving Heaven, communicated by your majesty's courtiers, is truly competent to repair and augment the royal Institutes, to strengthen and maintain the arts of the literati, and to restore and correct the laws of Buddha. The proof of this is, that the nations of Europe which are contiguous to each other, and more than thirty in number, receiving and practicing this religion, during a thousand and some hundreds of years up to the present time, whether great or small, have alike been kind to each other; whether high or low, have alike enjoyed repose; their prescribed boundaries have required no guard; nor has their sovereignty been hereditary; throughout their whole domain, there have been no deceivers nor liars; the vices of lewdness and theft from of old have never existed; no one would venture to take up an article dropped upon the highway; and even gates and doors of cities and houses it was not necessary to have closed by night. As to revolt and anarchy, rebels and insurgents, not only were there no such things and no such persons, but even such terms and such names had no existence. Thus for a long time, have these nations enjoyed tranquillity, and their governments have been well regulated.All their inhabitants have been thus intensely watchful only lest they should, by falling into error, become guilty of sinning against the Lord of Heaven. Accordingly it is most clear and most manifest that their laws assuredly can cause men to do well.
Such is the religion and such are the manners and customs set forth by your majesty's courtiers; and having repeatedly, and in the most thorough manner, examined their discourses and investigated their books, your majesty's servant knows that they are all perfectly free from error.
Your majesty's servant has heard of Yu Yu, the ancient minister of Sijung, who gave support to the Tsin dynasty in its rise to greatness; and of Kinjihshin, the heir of Siyih, who became an illustrious statesman of the Han dynasty. If these men could be of essential service to the state, it was of no moment whether they came from far or not.
Moreover the temples and pagodas of the Buddhists are to be seen in all parts of the empire, and the lama priests are continually coming to China. The Mohammedans also, whose sacred books have never yet been translated, so as to be adduced as testimonies of their faith, dynasty after dynasty have been freely tolerated with all their errors, and everywhere they have been allowed to build their own places of worship. Our high Emperor commanded two of his ministers Li Chung and Wu Pehtsung, members of the Imperial Academy, with two of the principal leaders of the Mohammedans, to translate their astronomical books. The result was that they prepared the work called Kien Yuen Sien Shing. The doing of all this brings out to view the sacred purposes of the first monarch of our dynasty, their profound desire to renovate the people and perfect their customs. Hence we see why it was that they sought out and commended [worthy men], not excepting those of countries far remote.
Now with regard to all the writers of these two sects, the Buddhist and Rationalists, so imperfect are their doctrines and so incomplete their laws of instruction, that, during this long period of two hundred and fifty years (since the rise of our dynasty), they have not been able to realize the designs of our august sovereign in giving them his special countenance. Were the High Ruler worshiped as reverently as Buddha and Lao Zi, and were your majesty's courtiers received as indulgently as the priests of those two sects, their royal instruction would rise and flourish, and the principles of rectitude be carried to such a degree of perfection, as to transcend all that was witnessed in the times of Lao and Shun and their immediate successors.
During the seventeen years these courtiers have enjoyed your majesty's support, no course has been opened by which they could requite the favors so generously bestowed upon them. Though they have earnestly and heartily desired it, yet they have found no means by which they could display before your majesty the virtues they cherish, and the constancy they have maintained. But knowing these, as your majesty's servant has done, should he keep silence, he would be indeed guilty of an act of criminal concealment. Hence he has been so rash and so presumptuous as to come forward as their intercessor.
If his sacred Intelligence would deign graciously to receive our apology, grant a manifesto, and for a short space of time, and on perfect equality with the disciples of Buddha and doctors of the Tao sect, allow these courtiers to remain [in the empire] to promulgate their doctrines and urge on their reformation, it is humbly conceived that, ere many years have elapsed, the hearts of men and the ways of the world, will be seen to have undergone a steady and gradual change, progressing till at length there shall be one grand reformation, and perfect virtue become universal. Then every law enacted shall go into effect, and no command given shall be opposed. No unfaithful minister will then be in the capital or in the provinces. The manners of all the people without exception will be such as to render them worthy of being employed in the imperial service. The glorious felicity enjoyed by your majesty's sacred person will be infinite, and the peace of your blessed empire perpetuated to a myriad generations!
Now since it might be difficult to secure full confidence were your majesty's servant allowed a hearing, or suspicions might be entertained by those who are spectators, and thus cause much debate, your majesty's servant, therefore, would respectfully suggest three modes of examination to ascertain the truth regarding said these courtiers, and also three modes of surveillance, all which herewith he begs to submit for your majesty's consideration. The three modes of examination are:
1st. Let all the courtiers, whose names have been included in the memorials, be called to the capital; and let a selection be made of your majesty's ministers both in and out of the capital; let all these jointly translate the standard works that have been brought from the West; let subjects be taken up in detail--what is said on serving Heaven and loving man, what relates to natural and moral philosophy, to the systems of civil government, to astronomy, to mathematics, to physic and medicine, to agriculture and irrigation, to political economy, &c.; and let a distinct treatise be prepared on each of these; and then let his majesty command the ministers of his own palace, in general assembly, to decide whether they are correct or erroneous. And if indeed they be subversive of the cardinal virtues and opposed to the classics, involving wicked doctrines and sinister means, then let the said courtiers be immediately dismissed and expelled; and your majesty's servant will willingly abide the punishment appointed for those who aid and abet the deceivers of his majesty.
2d. The words of the courtiers agreeing with those of the literati, but being at variance with those of the Buddhists and Taoists; therefore all who are of those two sects, hate and detest them, and spread abroad slanderous reports, greatly to their injury. Needful it is, then, to decide which is right and which is wrong and to beg your majesty will please command that these courtiers and the most notable of the Buddhists and Taoists write in discussion, make the most thorough investigation, and strive and seek to come to an agreement. Then, as before, let his majesty direct that statesmen from among the literati, in general council, decide on the merits of the case; and if the courtiers are not preferred for what they have said, or if they have reasoned fallaciously, or have been non-plussed; then let them be immediately dismissed and expelled, and let your majesty's servant be punished with them.
3d. As it would be difficult in the translation of their books to know where to stop, and as the Buddhists and Taoists may perhaps not have the men [competent to take part in this], let your majesty's courtiers be instructed to draw up a compendium of their religion, in detail, stating its prohibitions and injunctions, with its requisitions and rewards. Let this, with some thirty of the volumes that have been already translated, and ten or more of the original volumes, be together submitted for your majesty's inspection, and if these be found contradictory, and opposed to the principles of reason, incompetent to urge men to do good, and to guard them from evil, to change and improve their manners and customs; then immediately let these courtiers be dismissed and expelled, and let your majestey's servant be punished with them.
These are the three modes of examination [which are here suggested in order] to ascertain the truth concerning said courtiers. The three modes of surveillance are these:
1st. Regarding the item of expenditure — which has specially subjected your majesty's courtiers to suspicion — both those who suspect they make silver and gold, and those who suspect they are supported by the barbarian merchants at Canton, are in error. Having voluntarily left their homes, and not engaging in any lucrative occupation, they are of course the recipients of what has been contributed. At present, however, their entire provision for food and clothing comes from contributors in Europe; and in its transmission, by exposure to winds and waves, to robbers and pirates, much fails to reach its destination, thus causing them great distress. Yet during these twenty years since their arrival, they have not received from the people a single thing, a single cash; and yet they fear that some, not being observant, will suspect they received it for nought, or had obtained it by deceit or fraud, thus adding iniquity to transgression, especially as large demands were made on them by their extensive and varied intercourse. By the present scheme, besides allowing to them a stipend as heretofore, from your majesty's Court of Banquets, let orders be given that these courtiers may receive a measured amount of contributions from the Chinese for food and clothing, and let them be allowed to follow their own convenience, since, in their dis-interestedness, they will never consent to receive aught beyond what is sufficient for their personal use. A sufficient support being thus provided, orders may be given that the barbarian merchants at Canton forward no more presents, and that the money, which is sent on from Europe, on its reaching the custom-house, may be intercepted and remanded. In this way all communication with Europe will be cut off, and every suspicion removed.
2d. As your majesty's courtiers, in whatever place they may reside, are competent in the most faithful manner to instruct both the scholars and the people, whether they be poor and mean, or rich and honorable henceforth, therefore, in whatever place they choose to reside, let them be allowed the exercise of their appropriate functions; and let the magistrate treat them with becoming courtesy, allowing them to influence and guide whomsoever they please. Should the magistrate, in any case, be unable to repose confidence in them, then let them command the scholars and people — selecting such as have character and property — to unite in companies of ten or twenty families, and give bonds of security to the magistrate for them. Should it indeed happen that any of the teachers, losing their virtue, conduct themselves in an irregular manner, harboring vain purposes, uttering wicked words, and displaying a want of principle, then let them, according to what has been proposed, be expelled and banished; and let those who gave bonds for them, share in their guilt. Such as are without any bonds for their security must not be allowed to remain in the country. Should any of the people, hearing rumors of their behaving in an irregular manner, bring accusations against them, then let the magistrates be required to investigate the facts, and search out the true circumstances of the case. Thus the practice of deceit will be impossible; and those who are true, and those who are hypocritical, will be brought out to view in their own characters.
3d. If the native securities unite to conceal and hide offenders so as to make it difficult to repose confidence, then again, let the magistrates be instructed at any time they please to make careful investigation. After having former offenders at once exposed, then let all such native scholars and people, as have maintained a pure and elevated course of conduct, be allowed to choose their own teachers; and let these teachers, each being furnished from the magistracy with a stamped and duly authenticated register in duplicate, be required, by means of these to make, at the magistrate's office, a continued report. At the year's end, let each magistrate carefully examine all those who have followed these teachers, and afterwards transfer into a separate register, the names of all such as either have not been accused, or if accused have not been found guilty. Once in three years let there be a general examination; and let the magistrates and teachers freely commend all those who, having followed this religion, are not only free from all error and crime, but have made many and commendable advances in well doing; let them also ascertain the number, and determine the degree of criminality of such as are guilty of wicked conduct; and let those who gave bonds for the same, in like manner receive due punishment. If there be those who have purposely offended, and who after having been warned and admonished by their associates and teachers, will not reform, then let these be reported to the magistrates that their names may be removed from the register. Should any be informed against by their own associates before their names are removed from the registers; or should the offenses of any one, committed before entering this religion be subsequently discovered; in all such cases, let the criminality be restricted to the offenders themselves, and let their associates be in no way implicated. By this means, officers of government will have reliable registers for reference, and all the people can clearly see that due examination has been made; and though the number of disciples be small, each in his own sphere will be useful. Moreover, if the Buddhists and Taoists should ever succeed in raising religious discussions, there will be no further necessity for any scheme that can produce excitement; since it will only be needful, carefully distinguishing between the people and the teachers, to have all cases examined, and rewards and punishments meted out by the methods now proposed: in no very long lapse of time it will be abundantly evident who is right and who wrong, which is useful and which injurious.
Your majesty's servant, with profoundest reverence, begs to lay the foregoing clauses before his sacred Intelligence, to scan and to select, and to cause to be carried into effect such as shall be deemed desirable. Being younger than the ministers of the Board of Rites, he would not presume to place himself in collision with them nor oppose their words. This only he does: after the most thorough and careful investigation he clearly sees, and testifies, that for perfecting the administration of the empire, and securing peace and good government, nothing can surpass this that is taught by your majesty's courtiers. If now the recommendation of the Board be granted, these men must at once return to their own countries. Knowing so much and having said so little in their behalf, your majesty's servant is filled with the deepest regret, and therefore, after having fasted and performed the requisite ablutions, he does not shrink from the responsibility of laying their case before the Throne.
As to the things which ministers of the Board say they have heard, they are only such as your servant himself heard in former days, and which then filled him with suspicion. But after years of careful examination and inquiry — when he had a sincere mind to see the truth in them, and was able to understand them most thoroughly — then his confidence became strong and undoubting. Were there indeed the smallest reason for entertaining suspicion regarding these men, then there might be some shadow of doubt in your servant's mind; and although free from the smallest fault, yet if these men were not truly sages and worthies, then too, they might not be of great advantage; and it would be to your servant of little moment, whether they were sent away or were retained.
As it regards the improvement of the imperial Calendar, that is also a matter of little importance. Being as he is, however, one of those ministers who are appointed to attend on his majesty, how can your servant dare rashly to plead in their behalf, insult and deceive his princely Father, and expose himself to condign punishment! If ministers of the Board would but examine and inquire thoroughly, as your servant has done, then he apprehends that they would not be behind him in advocating their cause.
Your servant in rashly presuming to approach the Heavenly Majesty, is overwhelmed with infinite fear and dread, while he earnestly awaits the imperial mandate in reply to this memorial.
The Chinese Repository, Vol. 19 (March 1850), pp. 118-126.
Annotated by Sander M. Molenaar
Treaty of Nerchinsk (Nibuchu), 1689
Fyodor Alexeyevich Golovin; Songgotu
Божиею милостию великих государей, царей и великих князей Иоанна Алексеевича, Петра Алексеевича, всеа Великия и Малыя и Белыя России самодержцев и многих государств и земель восточных и западных и северных отчичей и дедичей и наследников и государей и обладателей, их царского величества великие и полномочные послы ближней окольничей и наместник брянской Федор Алексеевич Головин, стольник и наместник елатомской Иван Остафьевич Власов, дияк Семен Корницкой, будучи на посольских съездах близ Нерчинска великих азиацких стран повелителя, монарха самовластнейшого меж премудрейшими вельможи богдойскими, закона управителя, дел общества народа китайского хранителя и славы, настоящаго богдойского и китайского бугдыханова высочества с великими послы Самгута, надворных войск с начальником и внутренния полаты с воеводою, царства советником, да с Тумке-Камом, внутренния ж полаты с воеводою, первого чину князем и ханского знамени с господином и ханским дядею Иламтом, одного ж знамени господином и протчими, постановили и сими договорными статьями утвердили:
1-я
Река, имянем Горбица, которая впадает, идучи вниз, в реку Шилку, с левые стороны, близ реки Черной, рубеж между обоими государствы постановить.
Такожде от вершины тоя реки Каменными горами, которые начинаются от той вершины реки и по самым тех гор вершинам, даже до моря протягненными, обоих государств державу тако разделить, яко всем рекам малым или великим, которые с полудневные стороны с их гор впадают в реку Амур, быти под владением Хинского государства.
Такожде всем рекам, которые с другие стороны тех гор идут, тем быти под державою царского величества Российского государства. Прочие ж реки, которые лежат в средине меж рекою Удью под Российского государства владением и меж ограниченными горами, которые содержатца близ Амура, владения Хинского государства, и впадают в море и веяния земли посреди сущие, меж тою вышепомянутою рекою Удью и меж горами, которые до границы надлежат не ограничены, ныне да пребывают, понеже на оные земли заграничение великие и полномочные послы, не имеюще указу царского величества, отлагают не ограничены до иного благополучного времени, в котором при возвращении с обоих сторон послов царское величество изволит и бугдыханово высочество похочет о том обослатися послы или посланники любительными пересылки, и тогда или через грамоты или чрез послов тые назначенные неограниченные земли покойными и пристойными случаи успокоити и разграничить могут.
2-я
Такожде река, реченная Аргун, которая в реку Амур впадает, границу постановить тако, яко всем землям, которые суть стороны левые, идучи тою рекою до самых вершин под владением Хинского хана да содержитца, правая сторона: такожде все земли да содержатца в стороне царского величества Российского государства и все строение с полудневные стороны той реки Аргуни снесть на другую сторону тоя ж реки.
3-я
Город Албазин, которой построен был с стороны царского величества, разорить до основания и тамо пребывающие люди со всеми при них будущими воинскими и иными припасы да изведены будут в сторону царского величества и ни малого убытку или каких малых вещей от них тамо оставлено будет.
4-я
Беглецы, которые до сего мирного постановления как с стороны царского величества, так и с стороны бугдыханова высочества были, и тем перебещикам быть в обоих сторонах безрозменно, а которые после сего постановленного миру перебегати будут и таких беглецов без всякаго умедления отсылати с обоих сторон без замедления к пограничным воеводам.
5-я
Каким-либо ни есть людем с проезжими грамотами из обоих сторон для нынешние начатые дружбы для своих дел в обоих сторонах приезжати и отъезжати до обоих государств добровольно и покупать и продавать, что им надобно, да повелено будет.
6-я
Прежде будущие какие ни есть ссоры меж порубежными жители до сего постановленного миру были, для каких промыслов обоих государств промышленные люди преходити будут и разбои или убивство учинят, и таких людей поймав присылати в те стороны, из которых они будут, в порубежные городы к воеводам, а им за то чинить казнь жестокую; будет же соединясь многолюдством и учинят такое вышеписанное воровство, и таких своевольников, переловя, отсылать к порубежным воеводам, а им за то чинить смертная казнь. А войны и кровопролития с обоих сторон для таких притчин и за самые пограничных людей преступки не всчинать, а о таких ссорах писать, из которые стороны то воровство будет, обоих сторон к государем и розрывати те ссоры любительными посольскими пересылки.
Против усих постановленных о границе посольскими договоры статей, естли похочет бугдыханово высочество поставить от себя при границах для памяти какие признаки, и подписать на них сии статьи, и то отдаем мы на волю бугдыханова высочества.
Дан при границах царского величества в Даурской земле, лета 7197-го августа 27-го дня.
Таково ж письмо руки Андрея Белобоцкого написано и на латинском языке.
Скрепа по листам секретаря Федора Протопова.
С подлинною копиею читал переводчик Фома Розанов.
Their Majesties the Grand Dukes Joann Alexeevitch and Peter Alexeevitch, by the Grace of God [Joint] Emperors, Czars, and Autocrats of all the Russias, Great, Small, and White; Emperors and Lords over, and successors from immediate and remote ancestors to the Crowns of, many Kingdoms and Countries, Eastern, Western, and Northern; having appointed as their Envoys and Plenipotentiaries Theodorus Alexeevitch Golovin, Minister of the Presence and Governor-General of Briansk; Ivan Astaffjevitch Vlasoff, Minister of the Household and Governor-General of Elatomsk; and Semën Kornitsky, Deacon [of the Orthodox Church];
And His Majesty the Bogdokhan (i.e., Heavenly-appointed Ruler) of China, Supreme Ruler of Great Asiatic Countries, the Most Powerful Monarch, Wisest Ruler, Exponent of Heaven’s Law, Most Enlightened Noble, entrusted by Heaven with the government of China for the welfare and glory of its people, having appointed as his Envoys Sag-mu-tu, Commander of the Imperial Body Guard, Grand Secretary, and Councillor of State; Tum-ke-kam, Grand Secretary, Prince of the First Rank, Commander of Banner Corps, and Member of the Imperial Clan; and Lam-tan, Commander of Banner Corps, etc.:
And the aforesaid Envoys having met near Nerchinsk, they have agreed upon the following Articles: —
Article I.
The river Gorbitza, which joins the Schilka from its left side near the river Tchernaya, is to form the boundary between the two Empires. The boundary from the source of that river to the sea will run along the top of the mountain chain [in which the river rises]. The jurisdiction of the two Empires will be divided in such a way that all the rivers or streams flowing from the southern slope of these mountains to join the Amur shall belong to the Empire of China [lit. of Han], while all the rivers flowing down from the other [or northern] side of these mountains shall be similarly under the rule of His Majesty the Czar of the Russian Empire. As to the the other rivers which lie between the Russian river Oud and the aforesaid mountains—running near the Amur and extending to the sea — which are now under Chinese rule, the question of the jurisdiction over them is to remain open. On this point the [Russian] Ambassadors are [at present] without explicit instructions from the Czar. Hereafter, when the Ambassadors on both sides shall have returned [? to their respective countries], the Czar and the Emperor of China [Han] will decide the question on terms of amity, either by sending Plenipotentiaries or by written correspondence.
Article II.
Similarly, the river Argun, which flows into the Amur, will form the frontier along its whole length. All territory on the left bank is to be under the rule of the Emperor of China [Khan of Han]; all on the right bank will be included in the Empire of the Czar. All habitations on the south side will be transferred to the other.
Article III.
The fortified town of Albazin, built by His Majesty the Czar, is to be completely demolished, and the people residing there, with all military and other stores and equipment, are to be moved into Russian territory. Those moved can take all their property with them, and they are not to be allowed to suffer loss [by detention of any of it].
Article IV.
Fugitives [lit. runaways] from either side who may have settled in the other’s country previous to the date of this Treaty may remain. No claims for their rendition will be made on either side. But those who may take refuge in either country after the date of this Treaty of Amity are to be sent without delay to the frontier and at once handed over to the chief local officials.
Article V.
It is to be understood by both Governments that from the time when this Treaty of Amity is made, the subjects of either nation, being provided with proper passports, may come and go [across the frontier] on their private business and may carry on commerce [lit. buy and sell].
Article VI.
All the differences [lit. quarrels] which may have occurred between the subjects [of each nation] on the frontier up to the date of this Treaty will be forgotten and [claims arising out of them will] not be entertained. But if hereafter any of the subjects [lit. traders or craftsmen] of either nationality pass the frontier [as if] for private [and legitimate] business, and [while in the foreign territory] commit crimes of violence to property and life, they are at once to be arrested and sent to the frontier of their own country and handed over to the chief local authority [military], who will inflict upon them the death penalty as a punishment for their crimes. Crimes and excesses committed by private people on the frontier must not be made the cause of war and bloodshed by either side. When cases of this kind arise, they are to be reported by [the officers of] the side on which they occur to the Sovereigns of both Powers, for settlement by diplomatic negotiation in an amicable manner.
If the Emperor of China desires to engrave [on stone] the Articles of the above Treaty agreed upon by the Envoys for the determination of the frontier, and to place the same [at certain positions] on the frontier as a record, he is at liberty to do so. Whether this is to be done or not is left entirely to the discretion of His Majesty the Emperor of China.
Sancti Sinarum Imperatoris mandate missi ad determinados limites Magnates.
Som Go Tu Praetorianorum militum praefectus interioris palatii Palatinus, Imperii consiliarius etc.
Tum Que Cam interioris palatii palatinus, primi ordinis comes, Imperialis vexilli dominus, Imperatoris avunculus etc.
Lam Tan vnius etiam vexilli dominus
Pam Tarcha item vnius vexilli dominus
Sap so circa Sagalien Via aliasque terras generalis exercituum praefectus
Ma La vnius vexilli praefectus
Wen Ta exterorum tribunalis alter praeses et caeteri una cum missis.
Dei gratia magnorum dominatorum Tzarum Magnorumque Ducum Ioannis Alexiewicz, Petri Alexiewicz totius magnae ac parvae, nec non albae Russiae Monarcharum, multorumque dominiorum ac terrarum Orientalium, Occidentalium ac Septemtrionalium, Prognatorum Haeredum, ac Successorum, dominatorum ac possessorum
Magnis ac plenipotentibus Suae Tzareae Majestatis Legatis Proximo Okolnitio ac locitenente Branski Theodoro Alexiewicz Golovin dapifero ac locitenente Iélatomski, Ioanne Eustahievicz Wlasoph Cancellario Simeone Cornitski
Anno Cam Hi 28-o crocei serpentis dicto 7-ae Lunae die 24 props oppidum Nipehou congregatitum ad coercendam et reprimendam insolentiam eorum inferioris notae venatorum hominum, qui extra proprios limites, sive venabundi, sive se mutuo occidentes, sive depraedantes, sive perturbationes aut tumultus quoscumque commoventes pro suo arbitrio excurrunt, turn ad limites inter utrumque Imperium Sinicum videlicet et Ruthenicum claré ac perspicué determinandos ac constituendos, turn denique ad pacem perpetuam stabiliendam aeternumque foedus percutiendum, sequentia puncta ex mutuo consensu statuimus ac determinavimus.
I.
Rivulus nomine Kerbichi, qui rivo Chorna Tartaricé Vrum dicto proximus adiacet et fiuvium Sagalien Via influit, limites inter utrumque Imperium constituet. Item a vertice rupis seu montis lapidei, qui est supra dicti rivuli Kerbichi fontem et originem et per ipsa huius montis cacumina usque ad mare, utriusque Imperii ditionem ita dividet, ut omnes terrae et fluvii sive parvi sive magni qui a meridionali huius montis parte in fiuvium Sagalien Via infiuunt sint sub Imperii Sinici dominio, omnes terrae vero et omnes rivi qui ex altera montis parte ad Borealem plagam vergunt sub Ruthenici Imperii dominio remaneant, ita tamen, ut quicunque fluvii in mare influunt et quaecumque terrae sunt intermediae inter fiuvium Vdi et seriem montium pro limitibus designatam prointerim indeterminatae rehnquantur. De his autem post uniuscuiusque Imperii legatorum in proprium regnum reditum rité examinatis et clare cognitis vel per legatos vel per Utteras postea determinabitur. Item fluvius nomine Ergon qui etiam supra dictum fiuvium Sagalien Via influit, limites ita constituet, ut omnes terrae quae sunt ex parte meridionali ad Sinicum, quae vero sunt ex parte boreali, ad Ruthenicum Imperium pertineant: et omnes aedes quae ex parte dicti fluminis meridionali in faucibus fluvii nomine Meyrelke extructae sunt ad littus boreale transferentur.
II.
Arx seu fortalitia in loco nomine Yagsa a Russis extructa funditus eruetur ac destruetur. Omnesque illam incolentes Rutheni Imperii subditi cum omnibus suis cuiuscumque generis rebus in Russi Imperii terras deducentur.
Atque extra hos limites determinatos nullam ob causam utriusque Imperii venatores transibunt.
Quod si unus aut duo inferioris notae homines extra hos statutos limites vel venabundi, vel latrocinaturi divagabuntur, statim in vincula coniecti ad illarum terrarum constitutos in utroque Imperio Praefectos deducentur, qui cognitam illorum culpam debitâ poenâ muletabunt : Si vero ad decem aut quindecim simul congregati et armis instructi, aut venabuntur, aut alterius Imperii homines Occident, aut depraedabuntur de hoc ad uniuscuiusque Imperii Imperatores referetur, omnesque huius criminis rei capitali poenâ mulctabuntur, nee bellum propter quoscumque particularium hominum excessus suscitabitur, aut sanguinis effusio procurabitur.
III.
Quaecumque prius acta sunt, cuiuscumque generis sint, aeternâ oblivione sopiantur. Ab eo die quo inter utrumque Imperium haec aeterna pax iurata fuerit, nulli in posterum ex altero Imperio transfugae in alteram Imperium admittentur : sed in vincula coniecti statim reducentur.
IV.
Quicumque veró Rutheni Imperii subditi in Sinico et quicumque Sinici Imperii in Ruthenico nunc sunt, in eodem statu relinquantur.
V.
Propter nunc contractam amicitiam atque aeternum foedus stabihtum, cuiuscumque generis homines litteras patentes iteneris sui afferentes, licité accedent ad regna utriusque dominii, ibique vendent et ement quaecumque ipsis videbuntur necessaria mutuo commercio.
VI.
Conciho inter utriusque Imperii legatos celebrato, et omnibus utriuisque Regni lihmitum contentionibus diremptis, paceque stabilitâ, et aeterno amicitiae foedere percusso, si hae omnes determinatae conditiones rité observabuntur, nullus erit amplius perturbationi locus.
Ex utraque parte hujus foederis conditiones scripto mandabuntur, duplexque exemplar huic conform e sigillo munitum sibi invicem tradent magni utriusque Imperii legati.
Demum et iuxta hoc idem exemplar eaedem conditiones Sinico Ruthenico et latino idiomate lapidibus incidentur, qui lapides in utriusque Imperii limitibus in perpetuum ac aeternum monumentum erigentur.
Datum apud Nipchou anno Cam Hi 28-o 7-ae Lunae die 24.
The Divine Emperor of China, having mandated these Lords sent to determine the border:
Som Go Tu, Commander of the Imperial Body Guard, Grand Secretary, and Councillor of State etc.;
Tum Que Cam, Grand Secretary, Prince of the First Rank, Banner Corps Commander, Uncle of the Emperor, etc.;
Lam Tan, Banner Corps Commander;
Pam Tarcha, Banner Corps Commander;
Sap So, Garrison Commander of the Sagalien;
Ma La, Captain-General of the Guards;
Wen Ta, Vice Minister of the Li-fan Yüan:
And the Grand Dukes Ioannis Alexiewicz and Petri Alexiewicz, by Grace of God Monarchs of all the Russias, Great, Small, and White, born heirs, successors, lords and possessors to many domains and lands, Eastern, Western, and Northern;
Their great and powerful Czarist Majesties having appointed the following as their envoys Theodoro Alexiewicz Golovin, Okolnichy and Governor-General of Branski; Ioanne Eustahievicz Wlasoph, steward and Governor-General of Iélatomski; and Simeone Cornitski, chancellor;
Having gathered on Monday the 24th, of the 7th month, 28th year of Kangxi (year of the Earth Snake) near the town of Nipchou to prevent and repress the insolence of worthless hunters, who, outside the proper limits, engage at pleasure in hunting, or mutual killings, or robbery, or disorders, disturbances, and agitations of all kinds; and to fix clearly the boundary between both empires of China and Russia, with a view to perpetuating peaceful relations between them; have agreed by mutual consent upon the following Articles: —
Article I.
The river Kerbichi, which joins the Sagalien from its left side near the river Chorna — or Vrum in the Tartar language — is to form the boundary between the two countries. The boundary from the source of that river to the sea will run along the top of the mountain chain: the land and all the rivers or streams flowing from the southern [slope] of these mountains to join the Sagalien shall be under the administration of China, while the land and all the rivers flowing from the northern side of these mountains shall be under the jurisdiction of Russia. As to the rivers and lands which lie between the river Vdi and the aforesaid mountains, the question of how to divide them is to remain undecided for now. When the Ambassadors of both sides have returned to their respective countries, and after detailed investigation, the question will be decided either by the sending of Envoys or by written correspondence. Also, the river Ergon, which flows into the Sagalien, will form the frontier along its whole length. All territory on the south bank belongs to China; all on the north bank to Russia. All habitations at the mouth of the Meyrelke river on the south side of the Ergon will be moved to the north side.
Article II.
The fortified town at Yagsa, built by the Russians, is to be completely demolished, and the people residing there, with all military and other stores and equipment are to be moved, unhindered, into Russian territory.
Those from hunting households of the two Empires, no matter for what reason, are not allowed to cross the fixed boundary at will.
If one or two worthless persons, for purposes of hunting or thievery, presumptuously cross the boundary, they are to be arrested and handed back to the domestic officials of their respective sides and, once their case has been clarified, immediately punished according to law. If ten or more [larger groups of] persons cross the boundary and assemble, whether armed for hunting or for killing people and plundering, this must be reported to the Emperors of the two countries and they must be punished with the death penalty for their crime. Crimes and excesses committed by a few [private] persons on the frontier must definitely not be permitted to become the cause for war, even less for bloodshed.
Article III.
All the issues which may have occurred prior to this Treaty will be forgotten. But, now that perpetual peace has been established between the two Empires, if in future there are fugitives, neither side will take them in, but must apprehend and return them.
Article IV.
Russians presently in China and Chinese presently in Russia, will be treated as in the past.
Article V.
From the date of this Peace Treaty, any subject of either nation carrying a passport may come and go across the frontier and may carry on commerce in both markets.
Article VI.
Now that peace has been established, the two countries will forever maintain friendly relations, and henceforward all frontier disagreements will be done away with, for if both sides seriously adhere to the treaty clauses, controversies cannot arise.
The Commissioners of the two countries have each signed and sealed the collated treaty texts, and each retains both an original and a copy.
This treaty will be engraved in the Chinese, Russian and Latin languages in stone, to be set up on the boundary between the two countries, to serve forever as boundary marker[s].
Done in Nipchou in the 28th year of Kangxi, 7th month, Monday the 24th.
The Divine Emperor of China, having appointed as Imperial Border-Defining Commissioners So-e-t'u, Commander of the Imperial Body Guard, Grand Secretary, and Councillor of State; Tung Kuo-kang, Grand Secretary, Prince of the First Rank, Banner Corps Commander, and Uncle of the Emperor; Lang-t'an, Banner Corps Commander; Pan-ta-li-sha, Banner Corps Commander; Sa-pu-su, Garrison Commander of Hei-lung-chiang etc.; Ma-la, Captain-General of the Guards; and Wen-ta, Vice Minister of the Li-fan Yüan, in conjunction with the envoys of the Russian Ch'ahan Khan E-kun-ni (Kornitski) etc., in public deliberation at this place of Nerchinsk, have agreed:
(1) Let the Kerbechi River near the Shorna River (Cho-er-na), i.e., the Urwin River (Wu-lung-mu) which flows northward into the Hei-lungchiang, serve as the natural demarcation line. Along the upper tributary of this said river in the desert region, let the Hsing-an Mountains (Shihta Hsing-an), which extend toward the sea, also serve as natural boundaries. South of the Hsing-an Mountains, the rivers and brooks flowing into the Hei-lung-chiang belong to China; north of the mountains the rivers and brooks belong to Russia.
(2) Let the Ergone River (E-er-ku-na), which flows into the Hei-lung- chiang, serve as another natural demarcation line. The south bank of this river belongs to China and the north bank belongs to Russia. At the mouth of the Meriken River (Mei-le-er-k'o) all Russian houses must be moved to the north bank.
(3) All of the cities (ostrogs) which Russia built in the area of Ya-k'o- sa shall be destroyed. The Russian people who dwell at Ya-k'o-sa should withdraw with all their belongings into the territory of the Ch'ahan Khan.
(4) Hunters and subjects of these two Empires are absolutely forbidden to cross the boundary. If they disobey, they should be seized immediately and sent to the local administrators who control them directly. They should be punished according to the degree of their crimes. If incidents occur where ten or fifteen armed persons gather to hunt, to kill or to plunder, they must be reported to the Throne. The violators must be executed. However, small accidents cannot hinder great affairs. Russia will still be friendly with China and will cause no conflict so that strife will be forgotten. All Russian subjects in China and all Chinese subjects in Russia shall remain where they are and do not need to be repatriated.
(5) From now on [the two empires] will be permanent friends; therefore, all travellers are allowed to trade, provided they have passports.
(6) After peace is made and an oath is sworn neither empire will be allowed to harbor fugitives. All fugitives should be repatriated immediately.
Bakradze, D.Z. Sbornik dogovorov Rossii s Kitaem, 1689-1881 gg. (Collection of Agreements of Russia with China, 1689-1881). Sankt Peterburg: Izdanie Ministerstva Inostrannykh Del. 1889. pp. 1-10. (Latin, Russian and Manchu texts)
China. Treaties, Conventions, etc., between China and Foreign States, misc. series no. 30. Shanghai: Statistical Department of the Inspectorate General of Customs, 1917. pp. 3-13. (English translation of Russian text)
Fu, Lo-shu. A Documentary Chronicle of Sino-Western Relations (1644-1820). Tuscon: University of Arizona Press, 1966. pp. 101. (English translation of Manchu text)
Qianlong’s Letter to George III, 1793
Hongli, the Qianlong Emperor
You, O King, live beyond the confines of many seas. Nevertheless, impelled by your humble desire to partake of the benefits of our civilisation, you have dispatched a mission respectfully bearing your memorial. Your Envoy has crossed the seas and paid his respects at my Court on the anniversary of my birthday. To show your devotion, you have also sent offerings of your country's produce.
I have perused your memorial: the earnest terms in which it is couched reveal a respectful humility on your part, which is highly praiseworthy. In consideration of the fact that your Ambassador and his deputy have come a long way with your memorial and tribute, I have shown them high favour and have allowed them to be introduced into my presence. To manifest my indulgence, I have entertained them at a banquet and made them numerous gifts. I have also caused presents to be forwarded to the Naval Commander and six hundred of his officers and men, although they did not come to Peking, so that they too may share in my all-embracing kindness.
As to your entreaty to send one of your nationals to be accredited to my Celestial Court and to be in control of your country's trade with China, this request is contrary to all usage of my dynasty and cannot possibly be entertained. It is true that Europeans, in the service of the dynasty, have been permitted to live at Peking, but they are compelled to adopt Chinese dress, they are strictly confined to their own precincts and are never permitted to return home. You are presumably familiar with our dynastic regulations. Your proposed Envoy to my Court could not be placed in a position similar to that of European officials in Peking who are forbidden to leave China, nor could he, on the other hand, be allowed liberty of movement and the privilege of corresponding with his own country; so that you would gain nothing by his residence in our midst.
Moreover, our Celestial dynasty possesses vast territories, and tribute missions from the dependencies are provided for by the Department for Tributary States, which ministers to their wants and exercises strict control over their movements. It would be quite impossible to leave them to their own devices. Supposing that your Envoy should come to our Court, his language and national dress differ from that of our people, and there would be no place in which to bestow him. It may be suggested that he might imitate the Europeans permanently resident in Peking and adopt the dress and customs of China, but, it has never been our dynasty's wish to force people to do things unseemly and inconvenient. Besides, supposing I sent an Ambassador to reside in your country, how could you possibly make for him the requisite arrangements? Europe consists of many other nations besides your own: if each and all demanded to be represented at our Court, how could we possibly consent? The thing is utterly impracticable. How can our dynasty alter its whole procedure and system of etiquette, established for more than a century, in order to meet your individual views? If it be said that your object is to exercise control over your country's trade, your nationals have had full liberty to trade at Canton for many a year, and have received the greatest consideration at our hands. Missions have been sent by Portugal and Italy, preferring similar requests. The Throne appreciated their sincerity and loaded them with favours, besides authorising measures to facilitate their trade with China. You are no doubt aware that, when my Canton merchant, Wu Chao-ping, who was in debt to foreign ships. I made the Viceroy advance the monies due, out of the provincial treasury, and ordered him to punish the culprit severely. Why then should foreign nations advance this utterly unreasonable request to be represented at my Court? Peking is nearly two thousand miles from Canton, and at such a distance what possible control could any British representative exercise?
If you assert that your reverence for Our Celestial dynasty fills you with a desire to acquire our civilisation, our ceremonies and code of laws differ so completely from your own that, even if your Envoy were able to acquire the rudiments of our civilisation, you could not possibly transplant our manners and customs to your alien soil. Therefore, however adept the Envoy might become, nothing would be gained thereby.
Swaying the wide world, I have but one aim in view, namely, to maintain a perfect governance and to fulfil the duties of the State: strange and costly objects do not interest me. If I have commanded that the tribute offerings sent by you, O King, are to be accepted, this was solely in consideration for the spirit which prompted you to dispatch them from afar. Our dynasty's majestic virtue has penetrated unto every country under Heaven, and Kings of all nations have offered their costly tribute by land and sea. As your Ambassador can see for himself, we possess all things. I set no value on objects strange or ingenious, and have no use for your country's manufactures. This then is my answer to your request to appoint a representative at my Court, a request contrary to our dynastic usage, which would only result in inconvenience to yourself. I have expounded my wishes in detail and have commanded your tribute Envoys to leave in peace on their homeward journey. It behoves you, O King, to respect my sentiments and to display even greater devotion and loyalty in future, so that, by perpetual submission to our Throne, you may secure peace and prosperity for your country hereafter. Besides making gifts (of which I enclose an inventory) to each member of your Mission, I confer upon you, O King, valuable presents in excess of the number usually bestowed on such occasions, including silks and curios-a list of which is likewise enclosed. Do you reverently receive them and take note of my tender goodwill towards you! A special mandate.
You, O King, from afar have yearned after the blessings of our civilisation, and in your eagerness to come into touch with our converting influence have sent an Embassy across the sea bearing a memorial. I have already taken note of your respectful spirit of submission, have treated your mission with extreme favour and loaded it with gifts, besides issuing a mandate to you, O King, and honouring you with the bestowal of valuable presents. Thus has my indulgence been manifested.
Yesterday your Ambassador petitioned my Ministers to memorialise me regarding your trade with China, but his proposal is not consistent with our dynastic usage and cannot be entertained. Hitherto, all European nations, including your own country's barbarian merchants, have carried on their trade with our Celestial Empire at Canton. Such has been the procedure for many years, although our Celestial Empire possesses all things in prolific abundance and lacks no product within its own borders. There was therefore no need to import the manufactures of outside barbarians in exchange for our own produce. But as the tea, silk and porcelain which the Celestial Empire produces, are absolute necessities to European nations and to yourselves, we have permitted, as a signal mark of favour, that foreign hongs [merchant firms] should be established at Canton, so that your wants might be supplied and your country thus participate in our beneficence. But your Ambassador has now put forward new requests which completely fail to recognise the Throne's principle to "treat strangers from afar with indulgence," and to exercise a pacifying control over barbarian tribes, the world over. Moreover, our dynasty, swaying the myriad races of the globe, extends the same benevolence towards all. Your England is not the only nation trading at Canton. If other nations, following your bad example, wrongfully importune my ear with further impossible requests, how will it be possible for me to treat them with easy indulgence? Nevertheless, I do not forget the lonely remoteness of your island, cut off from the world by intervening wastes of sea, nor do I overlook your excusable ignorance of the usages of our Celestial Empire. I have consequently commanded my Ministers to enlighten your Ambassador on the subject, and have ordered the departure of the mission. But I have doubts that, after your Envoy's return he may fail to acquaint you with my view in detail or that he may be lacking in lucidity, so that I shall now proceed . . . to issue my mandate on each question separately. In this way you will, I trust, comprehend my meaning....
(3) Your request for a small island near Chusan, where your merchants may reside and goods be warehoused, arises from your desire to develop trade. As there are neither foreign hongs nor interpreters in or near Chusan, where none of your ships have ever called, such an island would be utterly useless for your purposes. Every inch of the territory of our Empire is marked on the map and the strictest vigilance is exercised over it all: even tiny islets and farlying sandbanks are clearly defined as part of the provinces to which they belong. Consider, moreover, that England is not the only barbarian land which wishes to establish . . . trade with our Empire: supposing that other nations were all to imitate your evil example and beseech me to present them each and all with a site for trading purposes, how could I possibly comply? This also is a flagrant infringement of the usage of my Empire and cannot possibly be entertained.
(4) The next request, for a small site in the vicinity of Canton city, where your barbarian merchants may lodge or, alternatively, that there be no longer any restrictions over their movements at Aomen, has arisen from the following causes. Hitherto, the barbarian merchants of Europe have had a definite locality assigned to them at Aomen for residence and trade, and have been forbidden to encroach an inch beyond the limits assigned to that locality.... If these restrictions were withdrawn, friction would inevitably occur between the Chinese and your barbarian subjects, and the results would militate against the benevolent regard that I feel towards you. From every point of view, therefore, it is best that the regulations now in force should continue unchanged....
(7) Regarding your nation's worship of the Lord of Heaven, it is the same religion as that of other European nations. Ever since the beginning of history, sage Emperors and wise rulers have bestowed on China a moral system and inculcated a code, which from time immemorial has been religiously observed by the myriads of my subjects. There has been no hankering after heterodox doctrines. Even the European (missionary) officials in my capital are forbidden to hold intercourse with Chinese subjects; they are restricted within the limits of their appointed residences, and may not go about propagating their religion. The distinction between Chinese and barbarian is most strict, and your Ambassador's request that barbarians shall be given full liberty to disseminate their religion is utterly unreasonable.
It may be, O King, that the above proposals have been wantonly made by your Ambassador on his own responsibility, or peradventure you yourself are ignorant of our dynastic regulations and had no intention of transgressing them when you expressed these wild ideas and hopes.... If, after the receipt of this explicit decree, you lightly give ear to the representations of your subordinates and allow your barbarian merchants to proceed to Chêkiang and Tientsin, with the object of landing and trading there, the ordinances of my Celestial Empire are strict in the extreme, and the local officials, both civil and military, are bound reverently to obey the law of the land. Should your vessels touch the shore, your merchants will assuredly never be permitted to land or to reside there, but will be subject to instant expulsion. In that event your barbarian merchants will have had a long journey for nothing. Do not say that you were not warned in due time! Tremblingly obey and show no negligence! A special mandate!
Backhouse, E. and J. O. P. Bland, Annals and Memoirs of the Court of Peking. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1914. pp. 322-331.
Letter to the queen of England, from the high imperial commissioner Lin, and his colleagues, 1839
Lin Zexu
Lin, high imperial commissioner, a president of the Board of War, viceroy of the two Keäng provinces, &c., Tang, a president of the Board of War, viceroy of the two Kwang provinces, &c., and E., a vice-president of the Board of War, lieut.-governor of Kwangtung, &c., hereby conjointly address this public dispatch to the queen of England for the purpose of giving her clear and distinct information (on the state of affairs) &c.
It is only our high and mighty emperor, who alike supports and cherishes those of the Inner Land, and those from beyond the seas-who looks upon all mankind with equal benevolence — who, if a source of profit exists anywhere, diffuses it over the whole world — who, if the tree of evil takes root anywhere, plucks it up for the benefit of all nations :— who, in a word, hath implanted in his breast that heart (by which beneficent nature herself) governs the heavens and the earth! You, the queen of your honorable nation, sit upon a throne occupied through successive generations by predecessors, all of whom have been styled respectful and obedient. Looking over the public documents accompanying the tribute sent (by your predecessors) on various occasions, we find the following: "All the people of my country, arriving at the Central Land for purposes of trade, have to feel grateful to the great emperor for the most perfect justice, for the kindest treatment," and other words to that effect. Delighted did we feel that the kings of your honorable nation so clearly understood the great principles of propriety, and were so deeply grateful for the heavenly goodness (of our emperor) :— therefore, it was that we of the heavenly dynasty nourished and cherished your people from afar, and bestowed upon them redoubled proofs of our urbanity and kindness. It is merely from these circumstances, that your country — deriving immense advantage from its commercial intercourse with us, which has endured now two hundred years — has become the rich and flourishing kingdom that it is said to be!
But, during the commercial intercourse which has existed so long, among the numerous foreign merchants resorting hither, are wheat and tares, good and bad; and of these latter are some, who, by means of introducing opium by stealth, have seduced our Chinese people, and caused every province of the land to overflow with that poison. These then know merely to advantage themselves, they care not about injuring others! This is a principle which heaven's Providence repugnates; and which mankind conjointly look upon with abhorrence! Moreover, the great emperor hearing of it, actually quivered with indignation, and especially dispatched me, the commissioner, to Canton, that in conjunction with the viceroy and lieut.-governor of the province, means might be taken for its suppression!
Every native of the Inner Land who sells opium, as also all who smoke it, are alike adjudged to death. Were we then to go back and take up the crimes of the foreigners, who, by selling it for many years have induced dreadful calamity and robbed us of enormous wealth, and punish them with equal severity, our laws could not but award to them absolute annihilation! But, considering that these said foreigners did yet repent of their crime, and with a sincere heart beg for mercy; that they took 20,283 chests of opium piled up in their store-ships, and through Elliot, the superintendent of the trade of your said country, petitioned that they might be delivered up to us, when the same were all utterly destroyed, of which we, the imperial commissioner and colleagues, made a duly prepared memorial to his majesty; — considering these circumstances, we have happily received a fresh proof of the extraordinary goodness of the great emperor, inasmuch as he who voluntarily comes forward, may yet be deemed a fit subject for mercy, and his crimes be graciously remitted him. But as for him who again knowingly violates the laws, difficult indeed will it be thus to go on repeatedly pardoning! He or they shall alike be doomed to the penalties of the new statute. We presume that you, the sovereign of your honorable nation, on pouring out your heart before the altar of eternal justice, cannot but command all foreigners with the deepest respect to reverence our laws! If we only lay clearly before your eyes, what is profitable and what is destructive, you will then know that the statutes of the heavenly dynasty cannot but be obeyed with fear and trembling!
We find that your country is distant from us about sixty or seventy thousand miles, that your foreign ships come hither striving the one with the other for our trade, and for the simple reason of their strong desire to reap a profit. Now, out of the wealth of our Inner Land, if we take a part to bestow upon foreigners from afar, it follows, that the immense wealth which the said foreigners amass, ought properly speaking to be portion of our own native Chinese people. By what principle of reason then, should these foreigners send in return a poisonous drug, which involves in destruction those very natives of China? Without meaning to say that the foreigners harbor such destructive intentions in their hearts, we yet positively assert that from their inordinate thirst after gain, they are perfectly careless about the injuries they inflict upon us! And such being the case, we should like to ask what has become of that conscience which heaven has implanted in the breasts of all men?
We have heard that in your own country opium is prohibited with the utmost strictness and severity :— this is a strong proof that you know full well how hurtful it is to mankind. Since then you do not permit it to injure your own country, you ought not to have the injurious drug transferred to another country, and above all others, how much less to the Inner Land! Of the products which China exports to your foreign countries, there is not one which is not beneficial to mankind in some shape or other. There are those which serve for food, those which are useful, and those which are calculated for re-sale; but all are beneficial. Has China (we should like to ask) ever yet sent forth a noxious article from its soil? Not to speak of our tea and rhubarb, things which your foreign countries could not exist a single day without, if we of the Central Land were to grudge you what is beneficial, and not to compassionate your wants, then wherewithal could you foreigners manage to exist? And further, as regards your woolens, camlets, and longells, were it not that you get supplied with our native raw silk, you could not get these manufactured! If China were to grudge you those things which yield a profit, how could you foreigners scheme after any profit at all? Our other articles of food, such as sugar, ginger, cinnamon, &c., and our other articles for use, such as silk piece-goods, chinaware, &c., are all so many necessaries of life to you; how can we reckon up their number! On the other hand, the things that come from your foreign countries are only calculated to make presents of, or serve for mere amusement. It is quite the same to us if we have them, or if we have them not. If then these are of no material consequence to us of the Inner Land, what difficulty would there be in prohibiting and shutting our market against them? It is only that our heavenly dynasty most freely permits you to take off her tea, silk, and other commodities, and convey them for consumption everywhere, without the slightest stint or grudge, for no other reason, but that where a profit exists, we wish that it be diffused abroad for the benefit of all the earth!
Your honorable nation takes away the products of our central land, and not only do you thereby obtain food and support for yourselves, but moreover, by re-selling these products to other countries you reap a threefold profit. Now if you would only not sell opium, this threefold profit would be secured to you: how can you possibly consent to forgo it for a drug that is hurtful to men, and an unbridled craving after gain that seems to know no bounds! Let us suppose that foreigners came from another country, and brought opium into England, and seduced the people of your country to smoke it, would not you, the sovereign of the said country, look upon such a procedure with anger, and in your just indignation endeavor to get rid of it? Now we have always heard that your highness possesses a most kind and benevolent heart, surely then you are incapable of doing or causing to be done unto another, that which you should not wish another to do unto you! We have at the same time heard that your ships which come to Canton do each and every of them carry a document granted by your highness' self, on which are written these words "you shall not be permitted to carry contraband goods;" this shows that the laws of your highness are in their origin both distinct and severe, and we can only suppose that because the ships coming here have been very numerous, due attention has not been given to search and examine; and for this reason it is that we now address you this public document, that you may clearly know how stern and severe are the laws of the central dynasty, and most certainly you will cause that they be not again rashly violated!
Moreover, we have heard that in London the metropolis where you dwell, as also in Scotland, Ireland, and other such places, no opium whatever is produced. It is only in sundry parts of your colonial kingdom of Hindostan, such as Bengal, Madras, Bombay, Patna, Malwa, Benares, Malacca, and other places where the very hills are covered with the opium plant, where tanks are made for the preparing of the drug; month by month, and year by year, the volume of the poison increases, its unclean stench ascends upwards, until heaven itself grows angry, and the very gods thereat get indignant! You, the queen of the said honorable nation, ought immediately to have the plant in those parts plucked up by the very root! Cause the land there to be hoed up afresh, sow in its stead the five grains, and if any man dare again to plant in these grounds a single poppy, visit his crime with the most severe punishment. By a truly benevolent system of government such as this, will you indeed reap advantage, and do away with a source of evil. Heaven must support you, and the gods will crown you with felicity! This will get for yourself the blessing of long life, and from this will proceed the security and stability of your descendants!
In reference to the foreign merchants who come to this our central land, the food that they eat, and the dwellings that they abide in, proceed entirely from the goodness of our heavenly dynasty: the profits which they reap, and the fortunes which they amass, have their origin only in that portion of benefit which our heavenly dynasty kindly allots them: and as these pass but little of their time in your country, and the greater part of their time in our's, it is a generally received maxim of old and of modern times, that we should conjointly admonish, and clearly make known the punishment that awaits them.
Suppose the subject of another country were to come to England to trade, he would certainly be required to comply with the laws of England, then how much more does this apply to us of the celestial empire! Now it is a fixed statute of this empire, that any native Chinese who sells opium is punishable with death, and even he who merely smokes it, must not less die. Pause and reflect for a moment: if you foreigners did not bring the opium hither, where should our Chinese people get it to re-sell? It is you foreigners who involve our simple natives in the pit of death, and are they alone to be permitted to escape alive? If so much as one of those deprive one of our people of his life, he must forfeit his life in requital for that which he has taken: how much more does this apply to him who by means of opium destroys his fellow-men? Does the havoc which he commits stop with a single life? Therefore it is that those foreigners who now import opium into the Central Land are condemned to be beheaded and strangled by the new statute, and this explains what we said at the beginning about plucking up the tree of evil, wherever it takes root, for the benefit of all nations.
We further find that during the second month of this present year, the superintendent of your honorable country, Elliot, viewing the law in relation to the prohibiting of opium as excessively severe, duly petitioned us, begging for "an extension of the term already limited, say five months for Hindostan and the different parts of India, and ten for England, after which they would obey and act in conformity with the new statute," and other words to the same effect. Now we, the high commissioner and colleagues, upon making a duly prepared memorial to the great emperor, have to feel grateful for his extraordinary goodness, for his redoubled compassion. Any one who within the next year and a half may by mistake bring opium to this country, if he will but voluntarily come forward, and deliver up the entire quantity, he shall be absolved from all punishment for his crime. If, however, the appointed term shall have expired, and there are still persons who continue to bring it, then such shall be accounted as knowingly violating the laws, and shall most assuredly be put to death! On no account shall we show mercy or clemency! This then may be called truly the extreme of benevolence, and the very perfection of justice!
Our celestial empire rules over ten thousand kingdoms! Most surely do we possess a measure of godlike majesty which ye cannot fathom! Still we cannot bear to slay or exterminate without previous warning, and it is for this reason that we now clearly make known to you the fixed laws of our land. If the foreign merchants of your said honorable nation desire to continue their commercial intercourse, they then must tremblingly obey our recorded statutes, they must cut off for ever the source from which the opium flows, and on no account make an experiment of our laws in their own persons! Let then your highness punish those of your subjects who may be criminal, do not endeavor to screen or conceal them, and thus you will secure peace and quietness to your possessions, thus will you more than ever display a proper sense of respect and obedience, and thus may we unitedly enjoy the common blessings of peace and happiness. What greater joy! What more complete felicity than this!
Let your highness immediately, upon the receipt of this communication, inform us promptly of the state of matters, and of the measure you are pursuing utterly to put a stop to the opium evil. Please let your reply be speedy. Do not on any account make excuses or procrastinate. A most important communication.
P. S. We annex an abstract of the new law, now about to be put in force.
"Any foreigner or foreigners bringing opium to the Central Land, with design to sell the same, the principals shall most assuredly be decapitated, and the accessories strangled; and all property (found on board the same ship) shall be confiscated. The space of a year and a half is granted, within the which, if any one bringing opium by mistake, shall voluntarily step forward and deliver it up, he shall be absolved from all consequences of his crime."
This said imperial edict was received on the 9th day of the 6th month of the 19th year of Taoukwang, (19th July, 1839) at which the period of grace begins, and runs on to the 9th day of the 12th month of the 20th year of Taoukwang (15th January, 1841), when it is completed.
The Chinese Repository, Vol. 8 (February 1840), pp. 497-503.
Annotation
The Treaty of Nanking (Nanjing), proposed in 1842 and ratified in 1843, marked the conclusion of the conflict between Great Britain and Qing China commonly known as the 1st Opium War (1839-1842). Sir Henry Pottinger and High Commissioners Keying and Elepoo, the respective plenipotentiaries of Queen Victoria and Emperor Tao-kwang, brokered the treaty. It was the first conflict that pitted Qing Imperial forces against an industrial European power.
The causes and origins of the 1st Opium War remain the subject of lively study and debate. Most historians agree the conflict emerged from a number of pressures combining over time, the tipping point coming when Qing Imperial Commissioner Lin Zexu intentionally destroyed privately-owned chests of opium in 1839. Initially a solution to the drain of British silver through the lucrative Chinese tea trade, the astounding growth of Opium import and consumption within China in the 19th century contributed to the breakdown of moral and social order that the Court in Beijing desperately sought to address. This was a dangerous combination: the appointment of a zealous commissioner to tackle a pressing domestic problem, by a central authority unaware of, even disinterested in, the power and attitudes of the European forces arrayed behind the lucrative trade. A disorganized imperial China wound up fighting to defend its sovereign authority over trade against a divided but ruthless British power, pressed by commercial interests determined to open up this lucrative revenue flow.
The Treaty of Nanking was a significant milestone in the study of empires in Asia for a variety of reasons. It was the treaty that marked what became the reluctant but sustained Qing concession that other states had to be dealt with as equals in status, not just strength. This was reflected through Qing acquiescence to European concepts of international law regarding negotiating and formalizing a treaty. British representatives refused to start negotiations until a Qing official of sufficient rank and representative power was sent and accredited (i.e. Commissioner Keying). Also, Article II of the treaty effectively began the transformation of Asian maritime trade because it sparked what became the dismantling of the closed Canton trade system and opened up four other ports (Amoy, Foochow-fu, Ningpo, and Shanghai) for British trade, on British terms of access. Consequently, when the weakened Qing state proved unable to control its external trade any longer, other Western powers obtained the same concessions secured by the British, in subsequent treaties. Lastly, the Treaty of Nanking shed light on differences in attitudes towards economics, trade and commerce. Article V highlighted the perennial problem of the Hong merchants’ debt accrued through trade by noting “His Imperial Majesty further agrees to pay the British Government the sum of Three Millions of Dollars, on account of the debts due to the British Subjects by some of the said Hong Merchants (or Cohong), who have become insolvent, and who owe very large sums of money to Subjects of Her Britannic Majesty.” Insolvency as a consequence of unregulated Hong merchant trading underlined the indifference of the Qing court towards regulating international trade, which of course was the root cause of the dilemma the Chinese state found itself in, trapped by the unsupervised greed of regional private Chinese interests.
It is worth highlighting that the five ports of Canton, Amoy, Foochow-fu, Ningpo and Shanghai were not selected at random. British merchants had been surveying the Chinese coastline for some time, looking for suitably profitably ports from which to develop a lucrative China trade. These outlets were in fact what the 1793 Macartney Mission sought to obtain, as British interests strove for decades to break free of the restrictive conditions imposed on them at Canton.
Some studies still describe the Treaty of Nanking as the pact that bestowed upon the United Kingdom the infamous rights of extraterritoriality and the status of the “Most Favored Nation”, but these were in fact conceded in a supplementary treaty, commonly known as the Treaty of the Bogue (1843). Hence, the Treaty of Nanking must be seen I combination with this supplementary treaty.
Scholars interested in interactions between Western and indigenous Asian agendas during the long 19th century, particularly in contacts between two apparently quite different self-defined world systems, will find the Treaty of Nanking and its negotiation process an important event upon which to reflect. In addition, scholars interested in the early stages of British colonialism in Asia or the historical experience of Hong Kong must note that the Treaty’s Article III stipulated that the island of Hong Kong was to be ceded in perpetuity to the United Kingdom for the purpose of establishing a naval supply base in the region for British state and private interests. It also allowed the British to govern the island inhabitants as they saw fit, paving the way for Hong Kong’s rise to the status of a Crown Colony after both British and Asian merchants flocked to this new secure port resting under the Union Jack and connected to the British world-system, with all that that entailed.
Treaty of Nanking — 1842
HER. Majesty, the Queen of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, and His Majesty the Emperor of China, being desirous of putting an end to the misunderstandings and consequent hostilities which have arisen between the two countries, have resolved to conclude a treaty for that purpose, and have therefore named as their plenipotentiaries, that is to say: Her Majesty the Queen of Great Britain and Ireland, sir Henry Pottinger, bart., a major-general in the service of the East India Company, &c., &c. And his Imperial Majesty the Emperor of China, the high commissioners Kiying, a member of the Imperial House, a guardian of the Crown Prince, and general of the garrison of Canton; and I'lípú, of the Imperial Kindred, graciously permitted to wear the insignia of the first rank, and the distinction of a peacock's feather, lately minister and governor-general, &c., and now lieutenant-general commanding at Chápú :-- Who, after having communicated to each other their respective full powers, and found them to be in good and due form, have agreed upon and concluded the following Articles:
ART. I. There shall henceforward be peace and friendship between Her Majesty the Queen of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, and His Majesty the Emperor of China, and between their respective subjects, who shall enjoy full security and protection for their persons and property within the dominions of the other.
ART. II. His Majesty the Emperor of China agrees, that British subjects, with their families and establishments, shall be allowed to reside, for the purpose of carrying on their mercantile pursuit, without molestation or restraint, at the cities and towns of Canton, Amoy, Fuchau fú, Ningpo, and
Shanghai; and Her Majesty the Queen of Great Britain, &c., will appoint superintendents, or consular officers, to reside at each of the abovenamed cities or towns, to be the medium of communication between the Chinese authorities and the said merchants, and to see that the just duties and other dues of the Chinese government, as hereaftcr provided for, are duly discharged by Her Britannic Majesty's subjects.
ART. III. It being obviously necessary and desirable that British subjects should have some port whereat they may careen and refit their ships when required, and keep stores for that purpose, His Majesty the Emperor of China cedes to Her Majesty the Queen of Great Britain, &c., the island of Hongkong, to be possessed in perpetuity by Her Britannic Majesty, her heirs and successors, and to be governed by such laws and regulations as Her Majesty the Queen of Great Britain, &C., shall see fit to direct.
ART. IV. The Emperor of China agrees to pay the sum of six millions of dollars, as the value of the opium which was delivered up at Canton in the month of March 1839, as a ransom for the lives of Her Britannic Majesty's superintendent and subjects, who had been imprisoned and threatened with death by the Chinese high officers.
ART. V. The government of China having compelled the British merchants trading at Canton to deal exclusively with certain Chinese merchants, called hong-merchants (or co-hong), who had been licensed by the Chinese government for that purpose, thc Emperor of China agrees to abolish that practice in future at all ports where British merchants may reside, and to permit them to carry on their mercantile transactions with whatever pcrsons they please; and His Imperial Majesty further agrees to pay to the British government the sum of three millions of dollars, on account of debts due to British subjects by some of the said hong-merchants, or co-hong, who have become insolvent, and who owe very large sums of money to subjects of Her Britannic Majesty.
ART. VI. The government of Her Britannic Majesty having been obliged to send out an expedition to demand and obtain redress for the violent and unjust proceedings of the Chinese high authorities towards Her Britannic Majesty's officer and subjects, the Emperor of China agrees to pay the sum of twelve millions of dollars, on account of the expenses incurred; and Her Britannic Majesty's plenipotentiary voluntarily agrees, on behalf of Her Majesty, to deduct from the said amount of twelve millions of dollars, any sums which may have been received by Her Majesty's combined forces, as ransom for cities and towns in China, subsequent to the 1st day of August, 1841.
ART. VII. It is agreed, that the total amount of twenty-one millions of dollars, described in the three preceding Articles, shall be paid as follows:
Six millions immediately. Six millions in 1843; that is, three millions on or before the 30th of the month of June, and three millions on or before the 31st of December. Five millions in 1844; that is, two millions and half on or before the 30th of June, and two millions and a half on before the 3lst of December. Four millions in 1845; that is, two millions on or before the 30th of June, and two millions on or before the 31st of December.
And it is further stipulated, that interest, at the rate of 5 per cent. per annum, shall be paid by the government of China on any portion of the above sums that are not punctually discharged at the periods fixed.
ART. VIII. The Emperor of China agrees to release, unconditionally, all subjects of Her Britannic Majesty (whether natives of Europe or India), who may be in confinement at this moment in any part of the Chinese empire.
ART. IX. The Emperor of China agrees to publish and promulgate, under His Imperial Sign Manual and Seal, a full and entire amnesty and act of indemnity to all subjects of China, on account of their having resided under, or having had dealings and intercourse with, or having entered the service of, Her Britannic Majesty, or of Her Majesty's officers; and His Imperial Majesty further engages to release all Chinese subjects who may be at this moment in confinement for similar reasons.
ART. X. His Majesty the Emperor of China agrees to establish at all the ports which are, by the second article of this Treaty, to be thrown open for the resort of British merchants, a fair and regular tariff of export and import customs and other dues, which tariff shall be publicly notified and promulgated for general information; and the Emperor further engages, that when British merchandize shall have one paid at any of the said ports the regulated customs and dues, agreeable to the Tariff to be hereafter fixed, such merchandize may be conveyed by Chinese merchants to any province or city in the interior of the empire of China, on paying a further amount as transit duties, which shall not exceed per cent. on the tariff value of such goods.
ART. XL. It is agreed that Her Britannic Majesty's chief high officer in China shall correspond with the Chinese high officers, both at the capital and in the provinces, under the term "communication;” the subordinate British officers and Chinese high officers in the provinces, under the terms "statement," on the part of the former, and on the part of the latter, "declaration;" and the subordinates of both countries on a footing of perfect equality; merchants and others not holding official situations, and therefore not included in the above, on both sides, to use the term "representation" in all papers addressed to, or intended for the notice of the respective governments.
ART. XII. On the assent of the Emperor of China to this Treaty being received, and the discharge of the first instalment money, Her Britannic Majesty's forces will retire from Nanking and the Grand Canal, and will no longer molest or stop the trade of China. The military post at Chinhai will also be withdrawn; but the islands of Kúláng sú and that of Chusan will continue to be held by Her Majesty's forces until the money payments, and the arrangements for opening the ports to British merchants, be completed.
ART. XII. The ratification of this treaty by Her Majesty the Queen of Britain, &c., and His Majesty the Emperor of China, shall be exchanged as soon as the great distance which separates England from China will admit; but, in the meantime, counterpart copies of it, signed and sealed by the plenipotentiaries on behalf of their respective sovereigns, shall be mutually delivered, and all its provisions and arrangements shall take effect.
Done at Nanking, and signed and sealed by the plenipotentiaries on board Her Britannic Majesty's ship Cornwallis, this twenty-ninth day of August, 1842; corresponding with the Chinese date, twenty-fourth day of the seventh month, in the twenty-second year of Táukwáng.
(L.S.) HENRY POTTINGER.
(L.S.) Kiying (in Tartar)
(L.S.) I'lípú (in Tartar)
The Chinese Depository
Annotated by Wilfred Teo Weijie
Japan
Sakoku (Closed Country) Edict, 1636
Tokugawa Iemitsu
1. No Japanese ships may leave for foreign countries.
2. No Japanese may go abroad secretly. If anybody tries to do this, he will be killed, and the ship and owner/s will be placed under arrest whilst higher authority is informed.
3. Any Japanese now living abroad who tries to return to Japan will be put to death.
4. If any Kirishitan believer is discovered, you two (Nagasaki bugyo) will make a full investigation.
5. Any informer/ revealing the whereabouts of a bateren will be paid 200 or 300 pieces of silver. If any other categories of Kirishitans are discovered, the informer/s will be paid at your discretion as hitherto.
6. On the arrival of foreign ships, arrangements will be made to have them guarded by ships provided by the Omura clan whilst report is being made to Yedo, as hitherto.
7. Any foreigners who help the bateren or other criminal foreigners will be imprisoned at Omjra as hitherto.
8. Strict search will be made for bateren on all incoming ships.
9. No offspring of southern Barbarians will be allowed to remain. Anyone violating this order will be killed, and all relatives punished according to the gravity of the offence.
10. If any Japanese have adopted the offspring of southern Barbarians they deserve to die. Nevertheless, such adopted children and their foster-parents will be handed over to the Southern Barbarians for deportation.
11. If any deportees should try to return or to communicate with Japan by letter or otherwise, they will of course be killed if they are caught, whilst their relatives will be severely dealt with, according to the gravity of the offence.
12. Samurai are not allowed to have direct commercial dealings with either foreign or Chinese shipping at Nagasaki.
13. Nobody other than those of the five places (Yedo, Kyoto, Osaka, Sakai and Nagasaki) is allowed to participate in the allocation of ito-wappu.
14. Purchases can only be made after the ito-wappu is fixed. However, as the Chinese chips are small, you will not be too rigorous with them. Only twenty days are allowed for the sale.
15. The twentieth day of the ninth month is the deadline for the return of foreign ships, but latecomers will be allowed fifty days grace from the date of their arrival Chinese ships will be allowed to leave a little after the departure of the (Portuguese) galliots.
16. Unsold goods cannot be left in charge of Japanese for storage or safekeeping.
17. Representatives of the five (shogunal) cities should arrive at Nagasaki not later that the fifth day of the long month. Late arrivals will not be allowed to participate in the silk allocation and purchase.
18. Ships arriving at Hirado will not be allowed to transact business until after the nineteenth day of the fifth month of the thirteenth year of Kwanei (June 22, 1636)
Addressed to Sakakibara Hia-no-kami and Baba Saburozayemon, the joint bugyo of Nagasaki, and signed by Hotta Kaga-no-kami, Abe Bungo-no-kami, Sakai Sanuki-no-kami and Do Oi-no-suké, the four great councillors of Go-roju.
C.R. Boxer. The Christian Century in Japan: 1549-1650. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1951. pp. 439-440.
The Sino-Japanese Friendship, Commerce and Navigation Treaty, 1871
Li Hongzhang; Date Muneki
This was the first formal treaty signed between Japan and an Asian country in the modern era.1 It followed a series of treaties between Japan and Western Powers from 1854, the consequence of Japan being compelled by force majeure to open its ports for trade.2 The treaty with the Qing Empire was signed by Li Hongzhang and Date Munenari on September 13, 1871. It terms were to reinforce friendly relations, cooperation and the policy of mutual non-intervention in internal affairs, while also recognizing consular jurisdiction in both states. Besides the 18 main articles, the Treaty included special sections regulating Commerce and Maritime Customs Law. The Trade Regulation specified the ports to be open in both countries (8 ports in Japan and 15 in China),3 as well as the rules to be followed in the ports. The Maritime Customs Law described in detail goods, weight, measures and tariff rates to be charged. There were more than 89 items from Japan and also 55 from China with specific volume and tax to be applied, as well as goods described as duty-free. Trade between both countries was then conducted in terms of silver and the majority of the products were related to agricultural commodities. Yet there were also manufactured goods, especially textiles. However, unlike the Treaties conducted in the same period by Western Powers with Japan, well known as the “unequal treaties”, this document indicated Japanese willingness to accept a quite balanced treaty with China; Japan did not even claim the status of most-favored nation, a typical clause in a trade agreement between parties not really equal in economic power. That development only unfolded in 1895, after the First Sino-Japanese War. This document therefore indicates an early sense of parity between Meiji Japan and Qing China. The Treaty was written in Chinese and Japanese.
Treaty of Tientsin — September 13, 1871
一八七一年九月十三日,同治十年七月二十九日,明治四年七月二十九日,天津。
大清國、大日本國素敦友誼,歷有年所,茲欲同修舊好,益固邦交,是以
大清國欽差全權大臣辦理通商事務太子太保協辦大學士兵部尚書直隸總督部堂一等肅毅伯李;
大日本國欽差全權大臣從二位大藏兒兒卿伊達;
各遵所奉諭旨,公同會議訂立修好條規,以期彼此信守,歷久弗渝。所有議定各條開列於左:
第一條
嗣後大清國、大日本國被敦和誼,與天壤無窮。即兩國所屬邦土,亦各以禮相待,不可稍有侵越,俾獲永久安全。
第二條
兩國既經通好,自必互相關切。若他國偶有不公及輕藐之事,一經知照,必須彼此相助,或從中善為調處,以敦友誼。
第三條
兩國政事禁令,各有異同,其政事應聽己國自主,彼此均不得代謀干預,強請開辦。其禁令亦應互相為助,各飭商民,不准誘惑土人稍有違犯。
第四條
兩國均可派秉權大臣,並攜帶眷屬隨員,駐紮京師。或長行居住,或隨時往來,經過內地各處,所有費用均係自備。其租賃地基房屋作為大臣等公館,並行李往來及專差送文等事,均須妥為照料。
第五條
兩國官員雖有定品,授職各異。如彼此執掌相等,會晤移文,均用平行之禮。職卑者與上官相見,則行客禮。遇有公務,則照會執掌相等之官轉申,無須徑達。如相拜會,則各用官位名帖。凡兩國派員初到任所,須將印文送驗,以杜假冒。
第六條
嗣後兩國往來公文,中國用漢文,日本國用日本文,須副以譯漢文,或只用漢文,亦從其便。
第七條
兩國既經通好,所有沿海各口岸,彼此均應指定處所,準聽商民來往貿易,並另立通商章程,以便兩國商民永遠遵守。
第八條
兩國指定各口,彼此均可設理事官,約束己國商民。凡交涉財產詞訟案件,皆歸審理,各按己國律例核辦。兩國商民彼此互相控訴,俱用禀呈。理事官應先為勸息,使不成訟。如或不能,則照會地方官會同公平訊段。其竊盜逋欠等案,兩國地方官只能查拿追辦,不能代償。
第九條
兩國指定各口倘未設理事官,其貿易人民均歸地方官約束照管。如犯罪名,準一面查拿,一面將案情知照附近各口理事官,按律科斷。
第十條
兩國官商在指定各口,均準僱傭本地民人服役工作,管理貿易等事,其雇主應隨時約束,勿任藉端欺人,猶不可偏聽私言,致令生事。如有犯案,準由各地方官查拿訊辦,雇主不得徇私。
第十一條
兩國商民在指定各口,彼此往來,各宜友愛,不得攜帶刀械,違者議罰,刀械入官。並須各安本分。無論居住久暫,均聽己國理事官管轄。不准改換衣冠,入籍考試,致滋冒混。
第十二條
此國人民因犯此國法禁,隱匿彼國公署商船行棧,及潛逃彼國各處者,一經此國官查明照會彼國官,即應設法查拿,不得徇縱。其拿獲解送時,沿途給予衣食,不可凌虐。
第十三條
兩國人民如有在指定口岸,勾結強徒為盜為匪,或潛入內地,防火殺人搶劫者,其在各口由地方官一面自行嚴捕,一面將案情飛知理事官,倘敢用凶器拒捕,均準格殺勿論。惟須將致殺情跡會同理事官查驗。如事發內地不及查驗者,即由地方官將實在情由照會理事官查照。其拿獲到案者,在各口由地方官會同理事官審辦。在內地即由地方官自行審辦,將案情照會理事官查照。倘此國人民在彼國聚眾滋擾,數在十人以外,及誘結通謀彼國人民作害地方情事,應聽彼國官徑行查拿。其在各口者知照理事官會審,其在內地者,由地方官審實,照會理事官查照,均在刑事地方正法。
第十四條
兩國兵船往來指定各口,係為保護己國商民起見。凡沿海未經指定口岸,以及內地河湖支港,概不准駛入,違者截留議罰,惟因遭風避險收口者,不在此例。
第十五條
嗣後兩國倘有與別國用兵事情事,應防各口岸,一經不知,便應暫停貿易及船隻出入,免致誤有傷損,其平時日本人在中國指定口岸及附近洋面,中國人在日本指定口岸及附近洋面,均不准與不和之國互相爭鬥搶劫。
第十六條
兩國理事官均不得兼作貿易,亦不准兼攝無約各國理事。如辦事不和眾心,確有實據,彼此均可行文知照秉權大臣,查明撤回,免因一人僨事,致傷兩國友誼。
第十七條
兩國船隻旗號,各有定式,倘彼國船隻假冒此國旗號,私作不法情事,貨船均罰入官,如查系官為發給,即行參撤。至兩國書籍,彼此如願誦習,應準互相採買。
第十八條
兩國議定條規,均係預為防範,俾免歐生嫌隙,以盡講信修好之道。為此兩國欽差全權大臣先行畫押蓋印,用昭憑信,俟兩國御筆批准互換後,即刊刻通行各處,使彼此官民咸知遵守,永以為好。
同治十年辛未七月二十九日
明治四年七月二十九日
明治4年(1871)7月29日調印
大日本国と大清国は、古来友誼敦厚なるを以て、
今般一同旧交を修め、益邦交を固くせんと欲し、
大日本国 欽差全権大臣従二位大蔵卿伊達(宗城)
大清国 欽差全権大臣弁理通商事務太子太保協弁大学士兵部尚書直隷総督部堂一等肅毅伯李(鴻章)
各奉じたる上諭の旨に遵い、公同会議し修好条規を定め、以て双方信守し久遠替らざることを期す。其議定せし各条左の如し。
第一条
此後
大日本国と 大清国は、弥和誼を敦くし、天地と共に窮まり無るべし。又両国に属したる邦土も各礼を以て相待ち、聊侵越することなく、永久安全を得せしむべし。
第二条
両国、好みを通せし上は、必ず相関切す。若し他国より不公及び軽藐すること有る時、其知らせを為さば、何れも互に相助け、或は中に入り、程克く取扱い、交誼を敦くすべし。
第三条
両国の政事禁令各異なれば、其政事は己国自主の権に任すべし。彼此に於て、何れも代謀干預して禁じたることを取り行わんと請い願うことを得ず。其禁令は互に相助け、各其商民に諭し、土人を誘惑し聊か違犯有るを許さず。
第四条
両国、秉権大臣を差出し、其眷属随員を召具して京師に在留し、或は長く居留し、或は時々往来し、内地各所を通行することを得べし。其入費は何れも自分より払うべし。其地面家宅を賃借して大臣等の公館と為し、並に行李の往来及び飛脚の仕立書状を送る等のことは何れも不都合なき様世話いたすべし。
第五条
両国の官位何れも定品有りといえども、職を授ること各同からず。因て彼此の職掌相当する者は、応接及び文通とも均く対待の礼を用ゆ。職卑き者と上官と相見るには客礼を行い、公務を弁ずるに付ては職掌相当の官へ照会して其上官へ転申し、直達することを得ず。又、双方礼式の出会には各官位の名帖を用ゆ。凡、両国より差出したる官員初て任所に到着せば、印章ある書付を出し見せ、仮冐なき様の防ぎをなすべし。
第六条
此後両国往復する公文、大清は漢文を用い、大日本は日本文を用い、漢訳文を副うべし。或は只漢文のみを用い其便に従う。
第七条
両国、好みを通ぜし上は、海岸の各港に於て彼此共に場所を指定して商民の往来貿易を許すべし。猶別に通商章程を立て、両国の商民に永遠遵守せしむべし。
第八条
両国の開港場には彼此何れも理事官を差置き、自国章民の取締をなすべし。凡、家財、産業、公事、訴訟に干係せし事件は、都て其裁判に帰し、何れも自国の律例を按じて糺弁すべし。両国商民相互の訴訟には何れも願書体を用ゆ。理事官は先ず理解を加え、成る丈け訴訟に及ばざる様にすべし。其儀能わざる時は、地方官に掛合い、双方出会し、公平に裁断すべし。尤、盗賊、欠落等の事件は両国地方官より召捕り吟味取上げ方致す而已にして、官より償うことはなさゞるべし。
第九条
両国の開港場に、若し未だ理事官を置ざる時は、其人民貿易何れも地方官より取締り世話すべし。若し罪科を犯さば本人を捕えて吟味を遂げ、其事情を最寄開港場の理事官へ掛合い、律を照して裁断すべし。
第十条
両国の官吏商人は諸開港場に於て何れも其地の民人を雇い、雑役手代等に用ること勝手に為べし。尤、其雇主より時々取締を為し、事に寄せ人を欺くことなからしめ、別して其私言を偏聴して事を生ぜしむべからず。若し犯罪の者有らば、其地方官より召捕り糺弁するに任せ、雇主より庇うことを得ず。
第十一条
両国の商民、諸開港場にて彼此往来するに付ては互に友愛すべし。刀剣類を携帯することを得ず。違う者は罰を行い、刀剣は官に取上ぐべし。又何れも其本文を守り、永住暫居の差別無く必ず自国理事官の支配に従うべし。衣冠を替え改め、其他の人別に入り、官途に就き、紛わしき儀有ることを許さず。
第十二条
此国の人民、此国の法度を犯せんこと有て、彼国の役所、商船、会社等の内に隠し忍び、或は彼国各処に遁げ潜み居る者を、此国の官より査明して掛合越さば、彼国の官にて早速召捕りらえ見遁すことを得ず。囚人を引送る時の途中、衣食を与え凌虐すべからず。
第十三条
両国の人民、若し開港場に於て兇徒を語合い盗賊悪事をなし、或は内地に潜み入り、火を付け、人を殺し、劫奪を為す者有らば、各港にては地方官より厳く捕え直に其次第を理事官に知らすべし。若し兇器を用て手向いせば、何れに於ても格殺して論なかるべし。併し之を殺せし事情は、理事官と出会して、一同に査験すべし。若し其事内地に発りて理事官自ら赴き査験すること届きかぬる時は、其地方官より実在の情由を理事官に照会して査照せしむべし。尤、縛して取るたる罪人は、各港にては地方官と理事官と会合して吟味し、内地にては地方官一手にて吟味し、其事情を理事官に照会して査照せしむべし。若し此国の人民、彼国に在て一揆徒党を企て、十人以上の数に及び、並に彼国人民を誘結通謀し、害を地方に作すの事有らば、彼国の官より早速査拏し、各港にては理事官に掛合い会審し、内地にては地方官より理事官に照会せしめ、何れも事を犯せし地方に於て法を正すべし。
第十四条
両国の兵船、開港場に往来することは自国の商民を保護するためなれば、都て未開港場及び内地の河湖支港へ乗入ることを許さず。違う者は引留て罰を行うべし。尤、風に遇い難を避るために乗入りたる者は此例に在らず。
第十五条
此後両国、若し別国と兵を用ゆる事有るに付、防禦いたすべき各港に於て布告をなさば、暫く貿易並に船隻の出入を差止め、誤て傷損を受けざらしむべし。又平時に於て大日本人は大清の開港場及び最寄海上にて、何れも不和の国と互に争闘搶刼することを許さず。
第十六条
両国の理事官は、何れも貿易を為すことを得ず。亦条約なき国の理事官を兼勤することを許さず。若し事務の計い方、衆人の心に叶わざる実拠有らば、彼此何れも書面を以て秉権大臣に掛合い、査明して引取らしむべし。一人事を破るに因て両国の友誼を損傷するに至らしめず。
第十七条
両国の船印は各定式あり。万一彼国に船、此国の船印を仮冐して私に不法の事を為さば、其船並に荷物とも取上ぐべし。若し其船印、官員より渡したる者ならば其筋に申立、官を罷めしむべし。又両国の書籍は彼此誦習わんと願わば、互に売買することを許す。
第十八条
両国議定せし条規は、何れも預め防範を為し、偶嫌隙を生ずるを免れしめ、以て講信修好の道を尽す所なり。是に因て両国欽差全権大臣、証拠のため先ず花押を調印をなし置き、両国御筆の批准相済に互に取替わせし後ち、版刻して各処に通行し、彼民に普く遵守せしを永く以て好を為すべし。
Having examined all the Articles mentioned in the Treaty of Friendship and Trade Regulations concluded between the Empire of Japan and the Empire of China by Date Muneki, Minister of Finance, who had been directed to proceed to China, and having sanctioned their maintenance in force during perpetuity, for the promotion of friendship between both countries, We hereby command it to be notified to all the high authorities of the fu and ken within the Empire, that they may know and observe in the transactions of business everything necessary for the observance of this Treaty, after the exchange of its ratification.
Signed by Soyeshima Tanewomi, Minister for Foreign Affairs, the 9th day, 3rd month, in the 6th year of Meiji, and two thousand five hundred and thirty-three years since the accession of Gimmu Tenno.
By Imperial Order,
(Signed) Soyeshima Tanewomi,
Minister for Foreign Affairs
Seal.
The Empire of China and the Empire of Japan having been on good terms of friendship for a long period of years, now desire by common action to cement their ancient relations and to make the intercourse subsisting between the two countries more close.
To this end, Li, by Imperial appointment Plenipotentiary Minister of the Empire of China for the management of commercial affairs, Senior Guardian of the Heir Apparent, Assistant Grand Secretary, President of the Board of War, Governor General of the province of Chihli, and invested with the first degree of the third order of nobility; and Date, Minister Plenipotentiary of the Empire of Japan, etc., etc.; each acting in obedience to the decrees of their respective Sovereigns, have conferred together and have agreed to articles for the reconstruction of relations, to the end that they may be observed with good faith on both sides in perpetuity.
The Articles agreed upon are as follows: —
Article I.
Relations of amity shall henceforth be maintained in redoubled force between China and Japan, in measure as boundless as the heaven and the earth. In all that regards the territorial possessions of either country the two Governments shall treat each the other with proper courtesy, without the slightest infringement or encroachment on either side, to the end that there may be for evermore peace between them undisturbed.
Article II.
Friendly intercourse thus existing between the two Governments, it is the duty of each to sympathise with the other, and in the event of any other nation acting unjustly or treating either of the two Powers with contempt, on notice being given [by the one to the other], mutual assistance shall be rendered or mediation offered for the arrangement of the difficulty, in fulfilment of the duty imposed by relations of friendship.
Article III.
The system of government and the penal enactments of the two Governments being different from each other each shall be allowed to act in entire independence. There shall be no interference offered, nor shall requests for innovations be obtruded. Each shall aid the other in enforcement of the laws, nor shall either allow its subjects to entice the people of the other country to commit acts in violation of the laws.
Article IV.
It will be competent for either Government to send Plenipotentiary Ministers, with their families and suites, to reside in the capital of the other, either permanently or from time to time. Their travelling expenses as they pass through the country will be defrayed by themselves. In the matter of their hiring ground or buildings to serve as Legations, of the passage of their baggage to and fro, of the conveyance of their correspondence by special couriers, and the like, due assistance shall be rendered on either side.
Article V.
Although the functionaries of the two Governments have fixed grades, the nature of the offices conferred are different on either side. Officers of equivalent rank will meet and correspond with each other on a footing of equality. When an officer visits a superior, the intercourse between them will be such as is prescribed by the rites of hospitality. For the transaction of public business, the officials of the two countries will address communications to officers of their own rank, who will report in turn to their respective superiors; they will not address the superior officer directly. In visits, cards with the official title of the visitor shall be sent on either side. All officials sent on the part of either Government to the other shall present for inspection a letter bearing an official stamp, in order to guard against false personation.
Article VI.
In official correspondence, China will use the Chinese language, and Japan will use either the Japanese language accompanied by a Chinese version, or a Chinese version alone, as may be found on her side preferable.
Article VII.
Friendly intercourse having been established between the two Governments, it will behove them both to appoint certain ports on the seaboard which their merchants will be authorised to frequent for purposes of trade, and to lay down, separately, Regulations of Trade that their respective mercantile communities may abide by in perpetuity.
Article VIII.
At the ports appointed in the territory of either Government it will be competent for the other to station Consuls for the control of its own merchant community. All suits in which they (the Consul’s nationals) are the only parties, the matter in dispute being money or property, it will fall to the Consul to adjudicate according to the law of his own State. In mixed suits, the plaint having been laid before the Consul, he will endeavour in the first instance to prevent litigation by friendly counsel; if this be not possible, he will write officially to the local authority, and in concert with him will fairly try the case and decide it. Where acts of theft or robbery are committed, and where debtors abscond, the local authorities can do no more than search for and apprehend the guilty parties; they shall not be held liable to make compensation.
Article IX.
At any of the ports appointed at which no Consul shall have been stationed, the control and care of the traders resorting thither shall devolve on the local authorities. In case of the commission of any act of crime, the guilty party shall be apprehended, and the particulars of his offence communicated to the Consul at the nearest port, by whom he shall be tried and punished according to law.
Article X.
At the ports named in either country the officials and people of the other shall be at liberty to engage natives for service, or as artizans, or to attend to commercial business. The persons so engaged shall be kept in order by the persons so engaging them, who shall not allow them to perpetrate acts of fraud under any pretext; still less shall they give rise to cause of complaint by giving ear to statements advanced from illicit motives. In the case of any offence being committed by any person employed in the manner above mentioned, the local authority shall be at liberty to apprehend and punish the delinquent; the employer shall not favour or protect him.
Article XI.
Whereas it is the duty of the subjects of either Power residing at the ports declared open in either country to live on friendly terms with the native inhabitants, it is provided that they shall not be allowed to wear arms; infraction of this rule will be punishable by a fine, accompanied by the confiscation of the arms. Residents as aforesaid shall attend peaceably to their own avocations, and whether residing permanently or for the time being at a port, they shall submit to the authority of their Consul. They shall not be allowed to adopt the costume of the country in which they may reside, nor to obtain local registration and compete at the literary examinations, lest disorder and confusion be produced.
Article XII.
If any subject of either Power, having violated the law of his own country, secrete himself in any official building, merchant vessel, or warehouse of the other State, or escape to any place in the territory of the other, on official application being made by the authority of the State of which such offender is a subject to the authority of the other, the latter shall immediately take steps for the arrest of the offender, without show of favour. Whilst in custody he shall be provided with food and clothing, and shall not be subjected to ill-usage.
Article XIII.
If any subject of either Power connect himself at any of the open ports with lawless offenders for purposes of robbery or other wrongdoing, or if any work his way into the interior and commit acts of incendiarism, murder, or robbery, active measures for his apprehension shall be taken by the proper authority, and notice shall at the same time be given without delay to the Consul of the offender’s nationality. Any offender who shall venture with weapons of a murderous nature to resist capture may be slain in the act without further consequences, but the circumstances which have led to his life being thus taken shall be investigated at an inquest which will be held by the Consul and the local authority together. In the event of the occurrence taking place in the interior, so far from the port that the Consul cannot arrive in time for the inquest, the local authority shall communicate a report of the facts of the case to the Consul.
When arrested and brought up for trial, the offender, if at a port, shall be tried by the local authority and the Consul together; in the interior, he shall be tried and dealt with by the local authority, who will officially communicate the facts of the case to the Consul.
If subjects of either Power shall assemble to the number of ten or more to foment disorder and commit excesses in the dominions of the other, or shall induce subjects of the other therein to conspire with them for the doing of injury to the other Power, the authorities of the latter shall be free at once to arrest them. If at a port, their Consul shall be informed, in order that he may take part in their trial; if in the interior, the local authority shall duly try them, and shall officially communicate particulars to the Consul. In either case capital punishment shall be inflicted at the scene of the commission of the offence.
Article XIV.
Vessels of war of either Power shall be at liberty to frequent the ports of the other for the protection of the subjects of their own country, but they shall in no case enter ports not declared open by Treaty, nor rivers, lakes, and streams in the interior. Any vessels infringing this rule shall be placed under embargo and fined. This stipulation shall not, however, apply to vessels driven into port by stress of weather.
Article XV.
If either State of the two should be involved in war with any other Power, measures for the defence of the coast being thereby entailed, on notice being given, trade shall be suspended for the time being, together with the entry and departure of ships, lest injury befall them. Japanese subjects ordinarily established in the appointed ports of China, or being in the seas adjoining China, and Chinese subjects ordinarily established at the open ports of Japan, or being in the seas adjoining thereunto, shall not be permitted to engage in collisions with subjects of a hostile Power, or to attack and plunder them.
Article XVI.
No Consul of either Power shall be allowed to trade or to act as Consul for a Power not in Treaty relations with the other. In the case of any Consul so acting as to render himself generally unacceptable, on substantial proof to this effect being produced, it shall be competent for the Government interested to communicate officially with the Minister Plenipotentiary, who, when he shall have ascertained the truth, shall remove the Consul, in order that the friendly relations of the two Governments may not suffer detriment through the misconduct of a single individual.
Article XVII.
The flags carried by the vessels of either country are of a fixed design. If a vessel of either, having falsely assumed the colours of the other, shall do that which is contrary to law, the vessel and goods shall be confiscated; and if it appear that the false colours were given by an official, he shall be denounced and removed from his post.
The subjects of either country shall be at liberty to purchase the books of the other, if desirous of studying its literature.
Article XVIII.
The foregoing Articles are agreed to by the two Contracting Powers in order to the prevention of misunderstanding, to the end that perfect confidence and improved relations may subsist between them. In testimony whereof the Ministers Plenipotentiary of the two Contracting Powers do now accordingly sign and affix their seals hereto. So soon as the Present Treaty shall have been ratified by their respective Sovereigns, and ratified copies of it exchanged, it shall be printed and published, and circulated throughout the dominions of either Power, for the information of the subjects of both countries, to the end that there may be a good understanding between them for evermore.
Dated the 29th day of the 7th moon of the 10th year of T’ung Chih, corresponding to the 29th day of the 7th month in the 4th year of Meiji.
[L.S.] (Signed) LI HUNG-CHANG.
[L.S.] (Signed) DATE MUNEKI.
China. Treaties, Conventions, etc., between China and Foreign States, misc. series no. 30. Shanghai: Statistical Department of the Inspectorate General of Customs, 1917. pp. 507-584.
1 Japanese and Chinese merchants were already developing private business during the Tokugawa-Bakufu regime that was well known for the state of seclusion (sakoku) regarding foreigners. Yet, both countries had no formal institutionalized diplomatic relationship. Besides China, Japan maintained relationships with Korea (formal diplomatic), the Ryukyus and the Netherlands during the same period. T. Kazui, S.D. Videen, ‘Foreign Relations during the Edo Period: Sakoku Reexamined,’ Journal of Japanese Studies, 8, 2, 1982, 283-306
2 *For further details on treaties signed by Japan, see M.R. Auslin, Negotiating with Imperialism: the unequal treaties and the culture of Japanese diplomacy, (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2004).
3 The ports in Japan: Yokohama, Hakodate, Osaka, Kobe, two ports in Niigata, Nagasaki, and Tsukiji. The ports in China: Shanghai, Zhenjiang, Ningbo, Jiujiang, Hnakou, Tianjin, Yingkou, Zhifu, Guangzhou, Shantou, Qiongzhou, Fuzhou, Xiamen, Taiwan, and Danshui.
Annotated by Miriam Kaminishi
The Tientsin Convention, 1885
Li Hongzhang; Itō Hirobumi
The Convention was an attempt to reduce tension in Korea after the Gapsin Coup occurred, pitting the pro-Chinese conservative party against the pro-Japanese Korean progressive clique, in 1884. Given that China and Japan maintained considerable influence over Korea, this stirred serious political and military tension. The main content of the Convention was to ensure the withdrawal of both Chinese and Japanese troops from the Korean domain within four months, and also assure that the two countries would not dispatch military advisers to assist the Korean national army’s modernization. In addition, it was agreed that each country would previously notify the other if it sent troops back into Korea. The document indicates the real beginning of deteriorating relations and strategic competition between Qing China and Meiji Japan, as the latter steadily increased in power and ambition.
Convention of Tientsin — April 18, 1885
大清國特派全權大臣太子太傅文華殿大學士北洋通商大臣兵部尚書直隸總督一等肅毅伯爵李;
大日本國特派全權大使參議兼宮內卿勳一等伯爵伊藤;
各遵所奉諭旨,公同會議,訂立專條,以敦和誼。所有約款臚列於左:
一、議定中國撤駐紮朝鮮之兵,日本國撤在朝鮮護衛使館之兵弁,自畫押蓋印之日起,以四個月為期,限內各行盡數撤回,以免兩國有滋端之虞。中國兵由馬山浦撤去、日本國兵由仁川港撤去。
一、兩國均允勸朝鮮國王教練兵士,足以自護治安。又由朝鮮國王選僱他外國武弁一人或數人,委以教演之事。嗣後中日兩國均無派員在朝鮮教練。
一、將來朝鮮國若有變亂重大事件,中、日兩國或一國要派兵,應先互行文執照,及其事定,仍即撤回,不再留防。
大清光緒十一年三月初四日
大日本國明治十八年四月十八日
大日本国特派全権大使参議兼宮内卿勲一等伯爵伊藤
大清国特派全権大臣太子太伝文華殿大学士北洋通商大臣 兵部尚書直隷総督一等粛毅伯爵李
各々奉ずる所の諭旨に遵び公同会議し専条を訂立し以て和誼を敦くす有る所の約款左に臚列す。
一.議定す。
中国、朝鮮に駐紮するの兵を撤し、日本国、朝鮮に在りて使館を護衛するの兵弁を撤す。
画押蓋印の日より起り4箇月を以て期とし、 限内に各々数を尽して撤回するを行い、以て両国滋端の虞あることを免る。
中国の兵は馬山浦より撤去し、日本国の兵は仁川港より撤去す。
一.両国均しく允す。
朝鮮国王に勧め兵士を教練し、以て自ら治安を護するに足らしむ。
又朝鮮国王に由り他の外国の武弁1人或いは数人を選傭し、委ぬるに教演の事を以てす。
嗣後日中両国均しく員を派し、朝鮮に在りて教練する事勿らん。
一.将来、朝鮮国若し変乱重大の事件ありて、日中両国或いは一国兵を派するを要するときは、応に先ず互いに行文知照すべし。
其の事定まるに及んでは、仍即ち撤回し再び留防せず。
大日本国明治18年4月18日
大日本国特派全権大使参議兼宮内卿勲一等伯爵伊藤
大清国光緒11年3月初4日
大清国特派全権大臣太子太伝文華殿大学士北洋通商大臣 兵部尚書直隷総督一等粛毅伯爵李
Ito, Ambassador Extraordinary of the Great Empire of Japan, Minister of State and of the Imperial Household, First Class of the Order of the Rising Sun, and Count of the Empire;
Li, Special Plenipotentiary of the Great Empire of China, Grand Guardian of the Heir Apparent, Senior Grand Secretary of State, Superintendent of the North Sea Trade, President of the Board of War, Viceroy of Chihli, and Count Shinu-ki [Su-i] of the First Rank;
In obedience to the decrees which each of them respectively is bound to obey, after conference held, have agreed upon a Convention with a view to preserving and promoting friendly relations (between the two Great Empires), the articles of which are set down in order as follows: —
It is hereby agreed that China shall withdraw her troops now stationed in Corea, and that Japan shall withdraw hers stationed therein for the protection of her Legation. The specific term for effecting the same shall be four months, commencing from the date of the signing and sealing of this Convention, within which terms they shall respectively accomplish the withdrawal of the whole number of each of their troops, in order to avoid effectively any complications between the respective countries: the Chinese troops shall embark from Masan-po, and the Japanese from the port of Ninsen.
The said respective Powers mutually agree to invite the King of Corea to instruct and drill a sufficient armed force, that she may herself assure her public security, and to invite him to engage into his service an officer or officers from amongst those of a third Power, who shall be entrusted with the instruction of the said force. The respective Powers also bind themselves, each to the other, henceforth not to send any of their own officers to Corea for the purpose of giving said instruction.
In case [of] any disturbances of a grave nature occurring in Corea which necessitates the respective countries, or either of them, to send troops to Corea, it is hereby understood that they shall give, each to the other, previous notice in writing of their intention so to do, and that after the matter is settled they shall withdraw their troops and not further station them there.
Signed and sealed this 18th day of the 4th month of the 18th year of Meiji (Japanese calendar).
The 4th day of the 3rd moon of the 11th year of Kocho [Kuang Hsü] (Chinese calendar).
(Signed and sealed) ITO,
Ambassador Extraordinary of the Great Empire of Japan, etc., etc., etc.
(Signed and sealed) LI,
Special Plenipotentiary of the Great Empire of China, etc., etc., etc.
United States Department of State. Index to the executive documents of the House of Representatives for the first session of the forty-ninth Congress, 1885-1886. Washington: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1885-1886. pp. 563-564
A complete and original version of the Tientsin Convention, written in Chinese and Japanese, is available here.
Annotated by Miriam Kaminishi
The Treaty of Shimonoseki, 1895
Li Hongzhang; Li Jingfang; Itō Hirobumi; Mutsu Munemitsu
This Treaty ended the First Sino-Japanese War on April 17, 1895, after some nine months of fighting. The Treaty replaced the Sino-Japanese Friendship, Commerce and Navigation Treaty, signed in 1871, and granted Japan terms that the first agreement did not consider. The main terms recognized the independence of Korea, Japanese control over Taiwan and the Penghu Islands (Pescadores Islands), as well as the opening of four more Chinese ports (Shashi, Chongqing, Suzhou, and Hangzhou)1 in addition to those opened by the 1871 treaty. It also required China to pay a war indemnity in a total amount of 200 million Kuping taels, which corresponded to approximately 350 million yen, or around 70% of the GNP of Japan at that time.2 Japan, in turn, spent a total amount of 233,400 million yen to wage war.3
According to Matsukata Masayoshi, China paid this amount in pounds sterling, which corresponded to £37,836,127, divided into eight installments. The first and second installments of 50 million taels each were deposited in London. The first installment was paid within six months after the ratification of the Treaty, the second within twelve months.4 Japan also claimed the southern part of the Liaodong Peninsula (see the map attached to the Treaty), but this was rescinded after the Triple Intervention of France, Germany and Russia, who compelled Japan to withdrawal in return for an additional indemnity of 30 million Kuping taels.
Liaodong Peninsula was a key position in China that, once established, would facilitate access to other ports and also Beijing. A concession in the Peninsula would raise Japan to the rank of a European financial interests in an almost unopened market like China. The Intervention crudely swung further advantage to Western Great Powers.5 France secured its sphere of influence in southwest China along the border with northern Vietnam in 1895, and, from 1896 to 1898, gained additional benefits in the same region. Germany strengthened its geo-political and economic interests in Hankou and Tianjin in 1895, as well as in Shandong province from 1897. As for Russia, it acquired China’s permission to construct a “shortcut” of the Trans-Siberian Railway through the Chinese domain in northern Manchuria.6 In addition, China and Russia created the Chinese Eastern Railway (CER) Company, a joint venture was carried out by the Russo-Chinese Bank, established in 1895. A supplementary agreement was added in 1898, which gave Russia permission to construct the southern part of the CER from Harbin to Port Arthur, and the right to lease the Port Arthur and the Liaodong Peninsula for a period of 25 years.7
Russia took a leading role by ‘mediating’ negotiations between China and Japan, and offered assistance in arranging the amount of indemnity from China, which, at that time, had no credit with foreign banks to contract loans. Sergei Witte, Russian Finance Minister, compromised resources to secure loans to China from French banks.8 Part of the indemnity was settled by the Russo-Chinese Bank, which was composed by 62.5% of French capital,9 and partly assisted by the British-owned Hong Kong and Shanghai Banking Corporation (HSBC).10 Germany and France also invested in the construction of the Trans-Siberian Railway whose construction started in 1891.11 Britain, on the other hand, did not take part in the Intervention because, according to S.C.M. Paine, it saw Japan as a putative regional partner in East Asia.12 This document reflected the serious increase in international tensions surrounding China, and its place in the international system, that led directly to conflict both within and about China. Successive concessions made by China to foreign powers helped provoke the Boxer Uprising in 1900. But Japanese resentment at the Triple Intervention soured Japanese relations with the European Great Powers involved, particularly Russia. This clearly framed a clash of interests between Japan and Russia over their relative positions in a volatile Northeast Asia. The Treaty is in Chinese and Japanese, and an English translation is also provided.
Treaty of Peace — April 17, 1895
大清帝國大皇帝陛下及大日本帝國大皇帝陛下為訂立和約,俾兩國及其臣民重修平和,共享幸福,且杜絕將來紛紜之端,大清帝國大皇帝陛下特簡大清帝國欽 差頭等全權大臣太子太傅文華殿大學士北洋通商大臣直隸總督一等肅毅伯爵李鴻章、大清帝國欽差全權大臣二品頂戴前出使大臣李經方、大日本帝國大皇帝陛下特簡 大日本帝國全權辦理大臣內閣總理大臣從二位勳一等伯爵伊藤博文、大日本帝國全權辦理大臣外務大臣從二位勳一等子爵陸奧宗光為全權大臣,彼此校閱所奉諭旨, 認明均屬妥善無闕。會同議定各條款,開列於左:
第一款
中國認明朝鮮國確為完全無缺之獨立自主。故凡有虧損獨立自主體制,即如該國向中國所修貢獻典禮等,嗣後全行廢絕。
第二款
中國將管理下開地方之權併將該地方所有堡壘、軍器、工廠及一切屬公物件,永遠讓與日本。
一、下開劃界以內之奉天省南邊地方。從鴨綠江口溯該江以抵安平河口,又從該河口劃至鳳凰城、海城及營口而止,畫成折線以南地方;所有前開各城市邑, 皆包括在劃界線內。該線抵營口之遼河後,即順流至海口止,彼此以河中心為分界。遼東灣東岸及黃海北岸在奉天省所屬諸島嶼,亦一併在所讓境內。
二、臺灣全島及所有附屬各島嶼。
三、澎湖列島。即英國格林尼次東經百十九度起、至百二十度止及北緯二十三度起、至二十四度之間諸島嶼。
第三款
前款所載及黏附本約之地圖所劃疆界,俟本約批准互換之後,兩國應各選派官員二名以上為公同劃定疆界委員,就地踏勘確定劃界。若遇本約所訂疆界於地形或治理所關有礙難不便等情,各該委員等當妥為參酌更定。
各該委員等當從速辦理界務,以期奉委之後限一年竣事。但遇各該委員等有所更定劃界,兩國政府未經認准以前,應據本約所定劃界為正。
第四款
中國約將庫平銀二萬萬兩交與日本,作為賠償軍費。該款分作八次交完:第一次伍千萬兩,應在本約批准互換後六個月內交清;第二次五千萬兩,應在本約批 准互換後十二個月內交清;餘款平分六次,遞年交納;其法列下:第一次平分遞年之款於兩年內交清,第二次於三年內交清,第三次於四年內交清,第四次於五年內 交清,第五次於六年內交清,第六次於七年內交清;其年分均以本約批准互換之後起算。又第一次賠款交清後,未經交完之款應按年加每百抽五之息;但無論何時將 應賠之款或全數或幾分先期交清,均聽中國之便。如從條約批准互換之日起三年之內能全數清還,除將已付利息或兩年半或不及兩年半於應付本銀扣還外,餘仍全數 免息。
第五款
本約批准互換之後限二年之內,日本准中國讓與地方人民願遷居讓與地方之外者,任便變賣所有產業,退去界外。但限滿之後尚未遷徙者,酌宜視為日本臣民。
又臺灣一省應於本約批准互換後,兩國立即各派大員至臺灣限於本約批准互換後兩個月內交接清楚。
第六款
中日兩國所有約章,因此次失和自屬廢絕。中國約俟本約批准互換之後,速派全權大臣與日本所派全權大臣會同訂立通商行船條約及陸路通商章程;其兩國新 訂約章,應以中國與泰西各國現行約章為本。又本約批准互換之日起、新訂約章未經實行之前,所有日本政府官吏臣民及商業、工藝、行船船隻、陸路通商等,與中 國最為優待之國禮遇護視一律無異。
中國約將下開讓與各款,從兩國全權大臣畫押蓋印日起,六個月後方可照辦。
第一、現今中國已開通商口岸之外,應准添設下開各處,立為通商口岸;以便日本臣民往來僑寓、從事商業、工藝製作。所有添設口岸,均照向開通商海口或向開內地鎮市章程一體辦理;應得優例及利益等,亦當一律享受:
一、湖北省荊州府沙市,
二、四川省重慶府,
三、江蘇省蘇州府,
四、浙江省杭州府。
日本政府得派遣領事官於前開各口駐紮。
第二、日本輪船得駛入下開各口附搭行客、裝運貨物:
一、從湖北省宜昌溯長江以至四川省重慶府,
二、從上海駛進吳淞江及運河以至蘇州府、杭州府。
中日兩國未經商定行船章程以前,上開各口行船務依外國船隻駛入中國內地水路現行章程照行。
第三、日本臣民在中國內地購買經工貨件若自生之物、或將進口商貨運往內地之時欲暫行存棧,除勿庸輸納稅鈔、派徵一切諸費外,得暫租棧房存貨。
第四、日本臣民得在中國通商口岸、城邑任便從事各項工藝製造;又得將各項機器任便裝運進口,只交所訂進口稅。
日本臣民在中國製造一切貨物,其於內地運送稅、內地稅鈔課雜派以及在中國內地沾及寄存棧房之益,即照日本臣民運入中國之貨物一體辦理;至應享優例豁除,亦莫不相同。
嗣後如有因以上加讓之事應增章程規條,即載入本款所稱之行船通商條約內。
第七款
日本軍隊現駐中國境內者,應於本約批准互換之後三個月內撤回;但須照次款所定辦理。
第八款
中國為保明認真實行約內所訂條款,聽允日本軍隊暫行佔守山東省威海衛。又,於中國將本約所訂第一、第二兩次賠款交清、通商行船約章亦經批准互換之 後,中國政府與日本政府確定周全妥善辦法,將通商口岸關稅作為剩款並息之抵押,日本可允撤回軍隊。倘中國政府不即確定抵押辦法,則未經交清末次賠款之前, 日本應不允撤回軍隊;但通商行船約章未經批准互換以前,雖交清賠款,日本仍不撤回軍隊。
第九款
本約批准互換之後,兩國應將是時所有俘虜盡數交還。中國約將由日本所還俘虜並不加以虐待若或置於罪戾。
中國約將認為軍事間諜或被嫌逮繫之日本臣民,即行釋放。併約此次交仗之間所有關涉日本軍隊之中國臣民,概予寬貸;併飭有司,不得擅為逮繫。
第十款
本約批准互換日起,應按兵息戰。
第十一款
本約奉大清帝國大皇帝陛下及大日本帝國大皇帝陛下批准之後,定於光緒二十一年四月十四日,即明治二十八年五月初八日在煙台互換。為此,兩國全權大臣署名蓋印,以昭信守。
大清帝國欽差頭等全權大臣太子太傅文華殿大學士北洋通商大臣直隸總督一等肅毅伯爵李鴻章押。
大清帝國欽差全權大臣二品頂戴前出使大臣李經方押。
大日本帝國全權辦理大臣內閣總理大臣從二位勳一等伯爵伊藤博文押。
大日本帝國全權辦理大臣外務大臣從二位勳一等子爵陸奧宗光押。
光緒二十一年三月二十三日
明治二十八年四月十七日
訂於下之關,繕寫兩分
第一款
遵和約第八款所訂暫為駐守威海衛之日本國軍隊,應不越一旅團之多,所有暫行駐守需費,中國自本約批准互換之日起,每一周年屆滿,貼交四分之一,庫平銀五十萬兩。
第二款
在威海衛應將劉公島及威海衛口灣沿岸,照日本國里法五里以內地方,約合中國四十里以內,為日本國軍隊駐守之區。
在距上開劃界,照日本國里法五里以內地方,無論其為何處,中國軍隊不宜偪近或紮駐,以杜生衅之端。
第三款
日本國軍隊所駐地方治理之務,仍歸中國官員管理。但遇有日本國軍隊司令官為軍隊衛養、安寧、軍紀及分布、管理等事必須施行之處,一經出示頒行,則於中國官員亦當責守。
在日本國軍隊駐守之地,凡有犯關涉軍務之罪,均歸日本國軍務官審斷辦理。
此另約所定條款,與載入和約其效悉為相同。為此兩國全權大臣署名蓋印,以昭信守。
光緒二十一年三月二十三日
明治二十八年四月十七日
訂於下之關,繕寫兩分
大日本國皇帝陛下及大淸國皇帝陛下ハ兩國及其ノ臣民ニ平和ノ幸福ヲ囘復シ且將來紛議ノ端ヲ除クコトヲ欲シ媾和條約ヲ訂結スル爲メニ大日本國皇帝陛下ハ内閣總理大臣從二位勳一等伯爵伊藤博文外務大臣從二位勳一等子爵陸奧宗光ヲ大淸國皇帝陛下ハ太子太傅文華殿大學士北洋大臣直隸總督一等肅毅伯李鴻章二品頂戴前出使大臣李經方ヲ各其ノ全權大臣ニ任命セリ因テ各全權大臣ハ互ニ其ノ委任状ヲ示シ其ノ良好妥當ナルヲ認メ以テ左ノ諸條款ヲ協議決定セリ
第一條
淸國ハ朝鮮國ノ完全無缺ナル獨立自主ノ國タルコトヲ確認ス因テ右獨立自主ヲ損害スヘキ朝鮮國ヨリ淸國ニ對スル貢獻典禮等ハ將來全ク之ヲ廢止スヘシ
第二條
淸國ハ左記ノ土地ノ主權竝ニ該地方ニ在ル城壘兵器製造所及官有物ヲ永遠日本國ニ割與ス
一 左ノ經界内ニ在ル奉天省南部ノ地
鴨緑江口ヨリ該江ヲ溯リ安平河口ニ至リ該河口ヨリ鳳凰城海城營口ニ亘リ遼河口ニ至ル折線以南ノ地併セテ前記ノ各城市ヲ包含ス而シテ遼河ヲ以テ界トスル處ハ該河ノ中央ヲ以テ經界トスルコトト知ルヘシ
遼東灣東岸及黄海北岸ニ在テ奉天省ニ屬スル諸島嶼
二 臺灣全島及其ノ附屬諸島嶼
三 澎湖列島即英國「グリーンウィチ」東經百十九度乃至百二十度及北緯二十三度乃至二十四度ノ間ニ在ル諸島嶼
第三條
前條ニ掲載シ附屬地圖ニ示ス所ノ經界線ハ本約批准交換後直チニ日淸兩國ヨリ各二名以上ノ境界共同劃定委員ヲ任命シ實地ニ就テ確定スル所アルヘキモノトス而シテ若本約ニ掲記スル所ノ境界ニシテ地形上又ハ施政上ノ點ニ付完全ナラサルニ於テハ該境界劃定委員ハ之ヲ更正スルコトニ任スヘシ
該境界劃定委員ハ成ルヘク速ニ其ノ任務ニ從事シ其ノ任命後一箇年以内ニ之ヲ終了スヘシ
但シ該境界劃定委員ニ於テ更定スル所アルニ當リテ其ノ更定シタル所ニ對シ日淸兩國政府ニ於テ可認スル迄ハ本約ニ掲記スル所ノ經界線ヲ維持スヘシ
第四條
淸國ハ軍費賠償金トシテ庫平銀貳億兩ヲ日本國ニ支拂フヘキコトヲ約ス右金額ハ都合八囘ニ分チ初囘及次囘ニハ毎囘五千萬兩ヲ支拂フヘシ而シテ初囘ノ拂込ハ本約批准交換後六箇月以内ニ次囘ノ拂込ハ本約批准交換後十二箇月以内ニ於テスヘシ殘リノ金額ハ六箇年賦ニ分チ其ノ第一次ハ本約批准交換後二箇年以内ニ其ノ第二次ハ本約批准交換後三箇年以内ニ其ノ第三次ハ本約批准交換後四箇年以内ニ其ノ第四次ハ本約批准交換後五箇年以内ニ其ノ第五次ハ本約批准交換後六箇年以内ニ其ノ第六次ハ本約批准交換後七箇年以内ニ支拂フヘシ又初囘拂込ノ期日ヨリ以後未タ拂込ヲ了ラサル額ニ對シテハ毎年百分ノ五ノ利子ヲ支拂フヘキモノトス
但シ淸國ハ何時タリトモ該賠償金ノ全額或ハ其ノ幾分ヲ前以テ一時ニ支拂フコトヲ得ヘシ如シ本約批准交換後三箇年以内ニ該賠償金ノ總額ヲ皆濟スルトキハ總テ利子ヲ免除スヘシ若夫迄ニ二箇年半若ハ更ニ短期ノ利子ヲ拂込ミタルモノアルトキハ之ヲ元金ニ編入スヘシ
第五條
日本國ヘ割與セラレタル地方ノ住民ニシテ右割與セラレタル地方ノ外ニ住居セムト欲スル者ハ自由ニ其ノ所有不動産ヲ賣却シテ退去スルコトヲ得ヘシ其ノ爲メ本約批准交換ノ日ヨリ二箇年間ヲ猶豫スヘシ但シ右年限ノ滿チタルトキハ未タ該地方ヲ去ラサル住民ヲ日本國ノ都合ニヨリ日本國臣民ト視爲スコトアルヘシ
日淸兩國政府ハ本約批准交換後直チニ各一名以上ノ委員ヲ臺灣省ヘ派遣シ該省ノ受渡ヲ爲スヘシ而シテ本約批准交換後二箇月以内ニ右受渡ヲ完了スヘシ
第六條
日淸兩國間ノ一切ノ條約ハ交戰ノ爲メ消滅シタレハ淸國ハ本約批准交換ノ後速ニ全權委員ヲ任命シ日本國全權委員ト通商航海條約及陸路交通貿易ニ關スル約定ヲ締結スヘキコトヲ約ス而シテ現ニ淸國ト歐洲各國トノ間ニ存在スル諸條約章程ヲ以テ該日淸兩國間諸條約ノ基礎ト爲スヘシ又本約批准交換ノ日ヨリ該諸條約ノ實施ニ至ル迄ハ淸國ハ日本國政府官吏商業航海陸路交通貿易工業船舶及臣民ニ對シ總テ最惠國待遇ヲ與フヘシ
淸國ハ右ノ外左ノ讓與ヲ爲シ而シテ該讓與ハ本約調印ノ日ヨリ六箇月ノ後有效ノモノトス
第一 淸國ニ於テ現ニ各外國ニ向テ開キ居ル所ノ各市港ノ外ニ日本國臣民ノ商業住居工業及製造業ノ爲メニ左ノ市港ヲ開クヘシ但シ現ニ淸國ノ開市場開港場ニ行ハルル所ト同一ノ條件ニ於テ同一ノ特典及便益ヲ享有スヘキモノトス
一 湖北省荊州府沙市
二 四川省重慶府
三 江蘇省蘇州府
四 浙江省杭州府
日本國政府ハ以上列記スル所ノ市港中何レノ處ニモ領事官ヲ置クノ權利アルモノトス
第二 旅客及貨物運送ノ爲メ日本國汽舩ノ航路ヲ左記ノ場所ニ迄擴張スヘシ
一 楊子江上流湖北省宜昌ヨリ四川省重慶ニ至ル
二 上海ヨリ呉淞江及運河ニ入リ蘇州杭州ニ至ル
日淸兩國ニ於テ新章程ヲ妥定スル迄ハ前記航路ニ關シ適用シ得ヘキ限ハ外國船舶淸國内地水路航行ニ關スル現行章程ヲ施行スヘシ
第三 日本國臣民カ淸國内地ニ於テ貨品及生産物ヲ購買シ又ハ其ノ輸入シタル商品ヲ淸國内地ヘ運送スルニハ右購買品又ハ運送品ヲ倉入スル爲メ何等ノ税金取立金ヲモ納ムルコトナク一時倉庫ヲ借入ルルノ權利ヲ有スヘシ
第四 日本國臣民ハ淸國各開市場開港場ニ於テ自由ニ各種ノ製造業ニ從事スルコトヲ得ヘク又所定ノ輸入税ヲ拂フノミニテ自由ニ各種ノ器械類ヲ淸國ヘ輸入スルコトヲ得ヘシ
淸國ニ於ケル日本臣民ノ製造ニ係ル一切ノ貨品ハ各種ノ内國運送税内地税賦課金取立金ニ關シ又淸國内地ニ於ケル倉入上ノ便益ニ關シ日本國臣民カ淸國ヘ輸入シタル商品ト同一ノ取扱ヲ受ケ且同一ノ特典免除ヲ享有スヘキモノトス
此等ノ讓與ニ關シ更ニ章程ヲ規定スルコトヲ要スル場合ニハ之ヲ本條ニ規定スル所ノ通商航海條約中ニ具載スヘキモノトス
第七條
現ニ淸國版圖内ニ在ル日本國軍隊ノ撤囘ハ本約批准交換後三箇月内ニ於テスヘシ但シ次條ニ載スル所ノ規定ニ從フヘキモノトス
第八條
淸國ハ本約ノ規定ヲ誠實ニ施行スヘキ擔保トシテ日本國軍隊ノ一時山東省威海衞ヲ占領スルコトヲ承諾ス而シテ本約ニ規定シタル軍費賠償金ノ初囘次囘ノ拂込ヲ了リ通商航海條約ノ批准交換ヲ了リタル時ニ當リテ淸國政府ニテ右賠償金ノ殘額ノ元利ニ對シ充分適當ナル取極ヲ立テ淸國海關税ヲ以テ抵當ト爲スコトヲ承諾スルニ於テハ日本國ハ其ノ軍隊ヲ前記ノ場所ヨリ撤囘スヘシ若又之ニ關シ充分適當ナル取極立タサル場合ニハ該賠償金ノ最終囘ノ拂込ヲ了リタル時ニ非サレハ撤囘セサルヘシ尤通商航海條約ノ批准交換ヲ了リタル後ニ非サレハ軍隊ノ撤囘ヲ行ハサルモノト承知スヘシ
第九條
本約批准交換ノ上ハ直チニ其ノ時現ニ有ル所ノ俘虜ヲ還附スヘシ而シテ淸國ハ日本國ヨリ斯ク還附セラレタル所ノ俘虜ヲ虐待若ハ處刑セサルヘキコトヲ約ス
日本國臣民ニシテ軍事上ノ間諜若ハ犯罪者ト認メラレタルモノハ淸國ニ於テ直チニ解放スヘキコトヲ約シ淸國ハ又交戰中日本國軍隊ト種種ノ關係ヲ有シタル淸國臣民ニ對シ如何ナル處刑ヲモ爲サス又之ヲ爲サシメサルコトヲ約ス
第十條
本約批准交換ノ日ヨリ攻戰ヲ止息スヘシ
第十一條
本約ハ大日本國皇帝陛下及大淸國皇帝陛下ニ於テ批准セラルヘク而シテ右批准ハ芝罘ニ於テ明治二十八年五月八日即光緒二十一年四月十四日ニ交換セラルヘシ
右證據トシテ兩帝國全權大臣ハ茲ニ記名調印スルモノナリ
明治二十八年四月十七日即光緒二十一年三月二十三日下ノ關ニ於テ二通ヲ作ル
大日本帝國全權辨理大臣 内閣總理大臣從二位勳一等伯爵 伊藤博文 印
大日本帝國全權辨理大臣 外務大臣 從二位勳一等子爵 陸奧宗光 印
大淸帝國欽差頭等全權大臣太子太傅文華殿大學士北洋大臣直隸總督一等肅毅伯 李鴻章 印
大淸帝國欽差全權大臣 二品頂戴前出使大臣 李經方 印
第一條
本日調印シタル媾和條約第八條ノ規定ニ依リテ一時威海衛ヲ占領スヘキ日本國軍隊ハ一旅團ヲ超過セサルヘシ而シテ該條約批准交換ノ日ヨリ清國ハ毎年右一時占領ニ關スル費用ノ四分ノ一庫平銀五十萬兩ヲ支拂フヘシ
第二條
威海衛ニ於ケル一時占領地ハ劉公嶋及威海衛灣ノ全沿岸ヨリ日本里數五里ヲ以テ其ノ區域ト爲スヘシ
右一時占領地ノ經界線ヲ距ルコト日本里數五里ノ地内ニ在リテハ何レノ所タリトモ清國軍隊ノ之ニ近ツキ若ハ之ヲ占領スルコトヲ許ササルヘシ
第三條
一時占領地ノ行政事務ハ仍ホ清國官吏ノ管理ニ歸スルモノトス但シ清國官吏ハ常ニ日本國占領軍司令官カ其ノ軍隊ノ健康安全紀律ニ關シ又ハ之カ維持配置上ニ付必要ト認メ發スル所ノ命令ニ服從スヘキ義務アルモノトス
一時占領地内ニ於テ犯シタル一切ノ軍事上ノ罪科ハ日本國軍務官ノ裁判管轄ニ屬スルモノトス
此ノ別約ハ本日調印シタル媾和條約中ニ悉ク記入シタルト同一效力ヲ有スルモノトス
右證據トシテ兩帝国全權大臣ハ之ニ記名調印スルモノナリ
明治二十八年四月十七日即光緒二十一年三月二十三日下ノ關ニ於テ二通ヲ作ル
大日本帝國全權辨理大臣 内閣總理大臣從二位勳一等伯爵 伊藤博文 印
大日本帝國全權辨理大臣 外務大臣 從二位勳一等子爵 陸奧宗光 印
大淸帝國欽差頭等全權大臣太子太傅文華殿大學士北洋大臣直隸總督一等肅毅伯 李鴻章 印
大淸帝國欽差全權大臣 二品頂戴前出使大臣 李經方 印
His Majesty the Emperor of Japan and His Majesty the Emperor of China, desiring to restore the blessings of peace to their countries and subjects and to remove all cause for future complications, have named as their Plenipotentiaries for the purpose of concluding a Treaty of Peace, that is to say:
His Majesty the Emperor of Japan, Count Ito Hirobumi, Junii, Grand Cross of the Imperial Order of Paullownia, Minister President of State; and Viscount Munemitsu, Junii, First Class of the Imperial Order of the Sacred Treasure, Minister of State for Foreign Affairs;
And His Majesty the Emperor of China, Li Hung-chang, Senior Tutor to the Heir Apparent, Senior Grand Secretary of State, Minister Superintendent of Trade for the Northern Ports of China, Viceroy of the province of Chihli, and Earl of the First Rank; and Li Ching-fong, Ex-Minister of the Diplomatic Service, of the Second Official Rank:
Who, after having exchanged their full powers, which were found to be in good and proper form, have agreed to the following Articles: —
Article I.
China recognises definitively the full and complete independence and autonomy of Corea, and, in consequence, the payment of tribute and the performance of ceremonies and formalities by Corea to China, in derogation of such independence and autonomy, shall wholly cease for the future.
Article II.
China cedes to Japan in perpetuity and full sovereignty the following territories, together with all fortifications, arsenals, and public property thereon: —
(a.) The southern portion of the province of Feng-tien within the following boundaries:
The line of demarcation begins at the mouth of the River Yalu and ascends that stream to the mouth of the River An-ping, from thence the line runs to Feng-huang, from thence to Hai-cheng, from thence to Ying-kow, forming a line which describes the southern portion of the territory. The places above named are included in the ceded territory. When the line reaches the River Liao at Ying-kow, it follows the course of that stream to its mouth, where it terminates. The mid-channel of the River Liao shall be taken as the line of demarcation.
This cession also includes all islands appertaining or belonging to the said province of Feng-tien situated in the eastern portion of the Bay of Liao-tung and in the northern part of the Yellow Sea.
(b.) The island of Formosa, together with all islands appertaining or belonging to the said island of Formosa.
(c.) The Pescadores Group, that is to say, all islands lying between the 119th and 120th degrees of longitude east of Greenwich and the 23rd and 24th degrees of north latitude.
Article III.
The alignment of the frontiers described in the preceding Article, and shown on the annexed map, shall be subject to verification and demarcation on the spot by a Joint Commission of Delimitation, consisting of two or more Japanese and two or more Chinese delegates, to be appointed immediately after the exchange of the ratifications of this Act. In case the boundaries laid down in this Act are found to be defective at any point, either on account of topography or in consideration of good administration, it shall also be the duty of the Delimitation Commission to rectify the same.
The Delimitation Commission will enter upon its duties as soon as possible, and will bring its labours to a conclusion within the period of one year after appointment.
The alignments laid down in this Act shall, however, be maintained until the rectifications of the Delimitation Commission, if any are made, shall have received the approval of the Governments of Japan and China.
Article IV.
China agrees to pay to Japan as a war indemnity the sum of 200,000,000 Kuping taels; the said sum to be paid in eight instalments. The first instalment of 50,000,000 taels to be paid within six months, and the second instalment of 50,000,000 taels to be paid within twelve months, after the exchange of the ratifications of this Act. The remaining sum to be paid in six equal annual instalments, as follows: the first of such equal annual instalments to be paid within two years, the second within three years, the third within four years, the fourth within five years, the fifth within six years, and the sixth within seven years, after the exchange of the ratifications of this Act. Interest at the rate of 5 per centum per annum shall begin to run on all unpaid portions of the said indemnity from the date the first instalment falls due.
China shall, however, have the right to pay by anticipation at any time any or all of said instalments. In case the whole amount of the said indemnity is paid within three years after the exchange of the ratifications of the present Act, all interest shall be waived, and the interest for two years and a half or for any less period, if then already paid, shall be included as a part of the principal amount of the indemnity.
Article V.
The inhabitants of the territories ceded to Japan who wish to take up their residence outside the ceded districts shall be at liberty to sell their real property and retire. For this purpose a period of two years from the date of the exchange of the ratifications of the present Act shall be granted. At the expiration of that period those of the inhabitants who shall not have left such territories shall, at the option of Japan, be deemed to be Japanese subjects.
Each of the two Governments shall, immediately upon the exchange of the ratifications of the present Act, send one or more Commissioners to Formosa to effect a final transfer of that province, and within the space of two months after the exchange of the ratifications of this Act such transfer shall be completed.
Article VI.
All Treaties between Japan and China having come to an end in consequence of war, China engages immediately upon the exchange of the ratifications of this Act, to appoint Plenipotentiaries to conclude, with the Japanese Plenipotentiaries, a Treaty of Commerce and Navigation and a Convention to regulate Frontier Intercourse and Trade. The Treaties, Conventions, and Regulations now subsisting between China and European Powers shall serve as a basis for the said Treaty and Convention between Japan and China. From the date of the exchange of the ratifications of this Act until the said Treaty and Convention are brought into actual operation, the Japanese Government, its officials, commerce, navigation, frontier intercourse and trade, industries, ships, and subjects, shall in every respect be accorded by China most favoured nation treatment.
China makes, in addition, the following concessions, to take effect six months after the date of the present Act: —
1st. — The following cities, towns, and ports, in addition to those already opened, shall be opened to the trade, residence, industries, and manufactures of Japanese subjects, under the same conditions and with the same privileges and facilities as exist at the present open cities, towns, and ports of China:
1. Shashih, in the province of Hupeh.
2. Chungking, in the province of Szechwan.
3. Suchow, in the province of Kiangsu.
4. Hangchow, in the province of Chekiang.
The Japanese Government shall have the right to station Consuls at any or all of the above-named places.
2nd. — Steam navigation for vessels under the Japanese flag, for the conveyance of passengers and cargo, shall be extended to the following places:
1. On the Upper Yangtze River, from Ichang to Chungking.
2. On the Woosung River and the Canal, from Shanghai to Suchow and Hangchow.
The rules and regulations which now govern the navigation of the inland waters of China by Foreign vessels shall, so far as applicable, be enforced, in respect of the above-named routes, until new rules and regulations are conjointly agreed to.
3rd. — Japanese subjects purchasing goods or produce in the interior of China, or transporting imported merchandise into the interior of China, shall have the right temporarily to rent or hire warehouses for the storage of the articles so purchased or transported without the payment of any taxes or exactions whatever.
4th. — Japanese subjects shall be free to engage in all kinds of manufacturing industries in all the open cities, towns, and ports of China, and shall be at liberty to import into China all kinds of machinery, paying only the stipulated import duties thereon.
All articles manufactured by Japanese subjects in China shall, in respect of inland transit and internal taxes, duties, charges, and exactions of all kinds, and also in respect of warehousing and storage facilities in the interior of China, stand upon the same footing and enjoy the same privileges and exemptions as merchandise imported by Japanese subjects into China.
In the event additional rules and regulations are necessary in connexion with these concessions, they shall be embodied in the Treaty of Commerce and Navigation provided for in this Article.
Article VII.
Subject to the provisions of the next succeeding Article, the evacuation of China by the armies of Japan shall be completely effected within three months after the exchange of the ratifications of the present Act.
Article VIII.
As a guarantee of the faithful performance of the stipulations of this Act, China consents to the temporary occupation by the military forces of Japan of Weihaiwei, in the province of Shantung.
Upon the payment of the first two instalments of the war indemnity herein stipulated for and the exchange of the ratifications of the Treaty of Commerce and Navigation, the said place shall be evacuated by the Japanese forces, provided the Chinese Government consents to pledge, under suitable and sufficient arrangements, the Customs revenue of China as security for the payment of the principal and interest of the remaining instalments of said indemnity. In the event no such arrangements are concluded, such evacuation shall only take place upon the payment of the final instalment of said indemnity.
It is, however, expressly understood that no such evacuation shall take place until after the exchange of the ratifications of the Treaty of Commerce and Navigation.
Article IX.
Immediately upon the exchange of the ratifications of this Act, all prisoners of war then held shall be restored, and China undertakes not to ill-treat or punish prisoners of war restored to her by Japan. China also engages to at once release all Japanese subjects accused of being military spies or charged with any other military offences. China further engages not to punish in any manner, nor to allow to be punished, those Chinese subjects who have in any manner been compromised in their relations with the Japanese army during the war.
Article X.
All offensive military operations shall cease upon the exchange of the ratifications of this Act.
Article XI.
The present Act shall be ratified by Their Majesties the Emperor of Japan and the Emperor of China, and the ratifications shall be exchanged at Chefoo on the 8th day of the 5th month of the 28th year of Meiji, corresponding to 14th day of the 4th month of the 21st year of Kuang Hsü.
In witness whereof the respective Plenipotentiaries have signed the same and have affixed thereto the seal of their arms.
Done at Shimonoseki, in duplicate, this 17th day of the 4th month of the 28th year of Meiji, corresponding to 23rd day of the 3rd month of the 21st year of Kuang Hsü.
Count ITO HIROBUMI, [L.S.]
Junii, Grand Cross of the Imperial Order of Paullownia, Minister President of State, Plenipotentiary of His Majesty the Emperor of Japan.
Viscount MUTSU MUNEMITSU, [L.S.]
Junii, First Class of the Imperial Order of the Sacred Treasure, Minister of State for Foreign Affairs, Plenipotentiary of His Majesty the Emperor of Japan.
LI HUNG-CHANG, [L.S.]
Plenipotentiary of His Majesty the Emperor of China, Senior Tutor to the Heir Apparent, Senior Grand Secretary of State, Minister Superintendent of Trade for the Northern Ports of China, Viceroy of the province of Chihli, and Earl of the First Rank.
LI CHING-FONG,
Plenipotentiary of His Majesty the Emperor of China, Ex-Minister of the Diplomatic Service, of the Second Official Rank.
Article I.
The Japanese military forces which are, under Article VIII of the Treaty of Peace signed this day, to temporarily occupy Weihaiwei shall not exceed one brigade, and from the date of the exchange of the ratifications of the said Treaty of Peace China shall pay annually one-fourth of the amount of the expenses of such temporary occupation, that is to say, at the rate of 500,000 Kuping taels per annum.
Article II.
The territory temporarily occupied at Weihaiwei shall comprise the island of Liu-kung and a belt of land 5 Japanese ri wide along the entire coast-line of the Bay of Weihaiwei.
No Chinese troops shall be permitted to approach or occupy any places within a zone 5 Japanese ri wide beyond the boundaries of the occupied territory.
Article III.
The civil administration of the occupied territory shall remain in the hands of the Chinese authorities. But such authorities shall at all times be obliged to conform to the orders which the Commander of the Japanese army of occupation may deem it necessary to give in the interest of the health, maintenance, safety, distribution, or discipline of the troops.
All military offences committed within the occupied territory shall be subject to the jurisdiction of the Japanese military authorities.
The foregoing Separate Articles shall have the same force, value, and effect as if they had been word for word inserted in the Treaty of Peace signed this day.
In witness whereof the respective Plenipotentiaries have signed the same and affixed thereto the seal of their arms.
Done at Shimonoseki, in duplicate, this 17th day of the 4th month of the 28th year of Meiji, corresponding to the 23rd day of the 3rd month of the 21st year of Kuang Hsü.
Count ITO HIROBUMI, [L.S.]
Junii, Grand Cross of the Imperial Order of Paullownia, Minister President of State, Plenipotentiary of His Majesty the Emperor of Japan.
Viscount MUTSU MUNEMITSU, [L.S.]
Junii, First Class of the Imperial Order of the Sacred Treasure, Minister of State for Foreign Affairs, Plenipotentiary of His Majesty the Emperor of Japan.
LI HUNG-CHANG, [L.S.]
Plenipotentiary of His Majesty the Emperor of China, Senior Tutor to the Heir Apparent, Senior Grand Secretary of State, Minister Superintendent of Trade for the Northern Ports of China, Viceroy of the province of Chihli, and Earl of the First Rank.
LI CHING-FONG,
Plenipotentiary of His Majesty the Emperor of China, Ex-Minister of the Diplomatic Service, of the Second Official Rank.
Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, Division of International Law. Korea: Treaties and Agreements. Washington: Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, 1921. pp. 11-19.
1 It is worth remembering that Shashi and Chongqing were strategically located in the interior of China but reached through the Yangtze River. This was a market Western Powers, especially Great Britain, had previously penetrated.
2 Iwamura, M. Gendai Chugokuno rekishi. Dai 2kan. Naisen kara konichihe. Tokyo: Tokumashoten, 1966.
3 Showa kokusei soran. Gekan. Tokyo: Toyo keizai shinposha, 1980.
4 The payment of the indemnity favoured the adoption of the Gold Standard by Japan, in 1897, a monetary system dominated by European capitalist countries. Matsukata Masayoshi, Report on the adoption of the gold standard in Japan, (New York: Arno Press, 1979).
5 For further details on the Triple Intervention, see S.C.M. Paine, ‘The Triple Intervention and the Termination of the First Sino-Japanese War,’ in B.A. Elleman, S.C.M. Paine (eds.), Naval coalition warfare: from the Napoleonic War to Operation Iraqi Freedom, (London: Routledge, 2008).
6 The Trans-Siberian Railway, which linked Moscow to Vladivostok, originally ran north of the Manchurian border on the Russian side, but the section near the Amur River, around 1,300 miles, was the toughest region to access due to dense forest, numerous rivers, low population density and harsh weather. The route that offered the fewest obstacles to construction was through Chinese territory in northern Manchuria, which would save a distance of approximately 550 kilometres. Sergei Witte, The Memoirs of Count Witte, (London: William Heinemann, 1921).
7 Asakawa, Kanichi, The Russo-Japanese conflict: its causes and issues, (London: A. Constable, 1905).
8 Participating banks included the Banque de Paris, Banque des Pays Bas, Crédit Lyonnais, and MM. Hottinger et Cie; Witte, Memoirs.
9 O. Crisp, ‘The Russo-Chinese Bank: an episode in Franco-Russian relations,’ in The Slavonic and East European Review, 52, 127, 1974.
10 H. Feis, Europe: The World's Banker, 1870-1914, (New Haven: Yale University Press, 1930).
11 S.G. Marks, Road to Power: the Trans-Siberian railroad and the colonization of Asian Russia 1850-1917, (Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1991).
12 Paine, The Triple Intervention.
Annotated by Miriam Kaminishi
The Treaty of Portsmouth, 1905
Sergei Witte; Roman Rosen; Komura Jutarō; Takahira Kogorō
This is a complete version of the Treaty of Portsmouth, also known as the Portsmouth Peace Treaty, signed by Japanese Minister for Foreign Affairs Baron Komura Juntaro and Minister to the United States Takahira Kogoro, and Russian Plenipotentiary Minister Sergei Witte and the Russian Ambassador to the United States Baron Roman Rosen, in Portsmouth, New Hampshire, USA. The Agreement terminated the Russo-Japanese War on September 5, 1905. That conflict broke out mainly because of the dispute between both countries concerning their spheres of influence over Northeastern China and Korea. After the Treaty of Shimonoseki, Russia acquired privileges from and influence over the Chinese government, starting with the construction of the Chinese Eastern Railway (CER) in northern Manchuria, in 1896, and then further south, in 1898, as well as the right to lease Port Arthur and the Liaodong Peninsula, after the Triple Intervention compelled Japan to withdraw from the Peninsula. In 1902, after the Boxer Rebellion, Russian deployed troops in different points in Manchuria, including the treaty port of Yingkou (Newchwang), opened via the Treaty of Tianjin in 1858. These actions provoked protests from many countries, and especially from Japan, which saw them as a direct threat to its interests in Korea. The ensuing conflict marked the first major clash between a modernizing Japan and an acknowledged Western Great Power. Japanese military and naval success shocked Western public opinion in general, galvanized feelings of nationalism all over Asia, helped provoke a revolution in Russia in 1905—but also financially exhausted Japan.
The Treaty of Portsmouth was mediated by US President Theodore Roosevelt, who, as a result, was awarded the Nobel Peace Prize in 1906. Japan presented a list of twelve demands but Russia rejected four, including a war indemnity (Demand IX). Japan did not specify its total amount of war expenditure during the negotiations, but this was later reported by the Japanese government to amount to 1,826,290 billion yen.1 Japan and Russia agreed to withdraw their troops from Manchuria, with the important exception of the Liaodong Peninsula, which was transferred to Japan, replacing Russia as the leaseholder (until 1923). This was extended in 1915 to 99 years, during the negotiations related to the Twenty-One Demands. Russia also transferred to Japan the southern part of the CER from Changchun to Dalian, which was later renamed as South Manchuria Railway (SMR), as well as coal mines used for the benefit of the railway. The Treaty assured rights of property for Russian residents in the ceded territory in Manchuria, and the return of prisoners of war kept by both countries. The document includes the Protocols and Annexes describing details of the negotiations, which began on August 23, 1905.
This Treaty was the first step to establish a new status quo between Japan and Russia in Northeast Asia that markedly favoured Japan. The agreement reflected the coming of age of Japan as a Great Power of international stature, with an imperial agenda in Asia. It helped weaken Tsarist Russia, while also sparking a shift of Russian focus away from Asia and back towards Europe. It also indicated increasing American interest in international relations in East Asia, and a more assertive American policy; it was no coincidence that both the American and Japanese navies began assuming each other would one day be an enemy from 1907 onwards. In order to maintain the new status quo, the parties concluded three supplemental and secret agreements, in 1907, 1910 and 1912. Japan and Russia delimitated zones of “special interests” in Manchuria: Russia in the north, Japan in the south. But these agreements were all renounced after the Russian Revolution in 1917. Despite the fact the agreement was concluded between Russia and Japan, there was no Japanese version. It was written mainly in French and English followed by Russian language.
The Conclusion of the Russo-Japanese War, signed at Portsmouth, New Hampshire — September 5, 1905
The Emperor of Japan on the one part, and the Emperor of all the Russias, on the other part, animated by a desire to restore the blessings of peace, have resolved to conclude a treaty of peace, and have for this purpose named their plenipotentiaries, that is to say, for his Majesty the Emperor of Japan, Baron Komura Jutaro, Jusami, Grand Cordon of the Imperial Order of the Rising Sun, his Minister for Foreign Affairs, and his Excellency Takahira Kogoro, Imperial Order of the Sacred Treasure, his Minister to the United States, and his Majesty the Emperor of all the Russias, his Excellency Sergius Witte, his Secretary of State and President of the Committee of Ministers of the Empire of Russia, and his Excellency Baron Roman Rosen, Master of the Imperial Court of Russia, his Majesty's Ambassador to the United States, who, after having exchanged their full powers, which were found to be in good and due form, and concluded the following articles:
ARTICLE I.
There shall henceforth be peace and amity between their Majesties the Emperor of Japan and the Emperor of all the Russias, and between their respective States and subjects.
ARTICLE II.
The Imperial Russian Government, acknowledging that Japan possesses in Korea paramount political, military and economical interests engages neither to obstruct nor interfere with measures for guidance, protection and control which the Imperial Government of Japan may find necessary to take in Korea. It is understood that Russian subjects in Korea shall be treated in exactly the same manner as the subjects and citizens of other foreign Powers; that is to say, they shall be placed on the same footing as the subjects and citizens of the most favored nation. It is also agreed that, in order to avoid causes of misunderstanding, the two high contracting parties will abstain on the Russian-Korean frontier from taking any military measure which may menace the security of Russian or Korean territory.
ARTICLE III.
Japan and Russia mutually engage:
First. -- To evacuate completely and simultaneously Manchuria, except the territory affected by the lease of the Liaotung Peninsula, in conformity with the provisions of the additional article I annexed to this treaty, and,
Second.--To restore entirely and completely to the exclusive administration of China all portions of Manchuria now in occupation, or under the control of the Japanese or Russian troops, with the exception of the territory above mentioned.
The Imperial Government of Russia declares that it has not in Manchuria any territorial advantages or preferential or exclusive concessions in the impairment of Chinese sovereignty, or inconsistent with the principle of equal opportunity.
ARTICLE IV.
Japan and Russia reciprocally engage not to obstruct any general measures common to all countries which China may take for the development of the commerce or industry of Manchuria.
ARTICLE V.
The Imperial Russian Government transfers and assigns to the Imperial Government of Japan, with the consent of the Government of China, the lease of Port Arthur, Talien and the adjacent territorial waters, and all rights, privileges and concessions connected with or forming part of such lease, and it also transfers and assigns to the Imperial government of Japan all public works and properties in the territory affected by the above-mentioned lease.
The two contracting parties mutually engage to obtain the consent of the Chinese Government mentioned in the foregoing stipulation.
The Imperial Government of Japan, on its part, undertakes that the proprietary rights of Russian subjects in the territory above referred to shall be perfectly respected.
ARTICLE VI.
The Imperial Russian Government engages to transfer and assign to the Imperial Government of Japan, without compensation and with the consent of the Chinese Government, the railway between Chang-chunfu and Kuanchangtsu and Port Arthur, and all the branches, together with all the rights, privileges and properties appertaining thereto in that region, as well as all the coal mines in said region belonging to or worked for the benefit of the railway. The two high contracting parties mutually engage to obtain the consent of the Government of China mentioned in the foregoing stipulation.
ARTICLE VII.
Japan and Russia engage to exploit their respective railways in Manchuria exclusively for commercial and industrial purposes and nowise for strategic purposes. It is understood that this restrictiction does not apply to the railway in the territory affected by the lease of the Liaotung Peninsula.
ARTICLE VIII.
The imperial Governments of Japan and Russia with the view to promote and facilitate intercourse and traffic will as soon as possible conclude a separate convention for the regulation of their connecting railway services in Manchuria.
ARTICLE IX.
The Imperial Russian Government cedes to the Imperial Government of Japan in perpetuity and full sovereignty the southern portion of the Island of Saghalin and all the islands adjacent thereto and the public works and properties thereon. The fiftieth degree of north latitude is adopted as the northern boundary of the ceded territory. The exact alignment of such territory shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of the additional article II annexed to this treaty.
Japan and Russia mutually agree not to construct in their respective possessions on the Island of Saghalin or the adjacent islands any fortification or other similar military works. They also respectively engage not to take any military measures which may impede the free navigation of the Strait of La Perouse and the Strait of Tartary.
ARTICLE X.
It is reserved to Russian subjects, inhabitants of the territory ceded to Japan, to sell their real property and retire to their country, but if they prefer to remain in the ceded territory they will be maintained protected in the full exercise of their industries and rights of propperty on condition of of submitting to the Japanese laws and jurdisdiction. Japan shall have full liberty to withdraw the right of residence in or to deport from such territory of any inhabitants who labor under political or administrative disability. She engages, however, that the proprietary rights of such inhabitants shall be fully respected.
ARTICLE XI.
Russia engages to arrange with Japan for granting to Japanese subjects rights of fishery along the coasts of the Russian possession in the Japan, Okhotsk and Bering Seas.
It is agreed that the foregoing engagement shall not affect rights already belonging to Russian or foreign subjects in those regions.
ARTICLE XII.
The treaty of commerce and navigation between Japan and Russia having been annulled by the war the Imperial Governments of Japan and Russia engage to adopt as a basis for their commercial relations pending the conclusion of a new treaty of commerce and navigation the basis of the treaty which was in force previous to the present war, the system of reciprocal treatment on the footing of the most favored nation, in which are included import and export duties, customs formalities, transit and tonnage dues and the admission and treatment of agents, subjects and vessels of one country in the territories of the other.
ARTICLE XIII.
As soon as possible after the present treaty comes in force all prisoners of war shall be reciprocally restored. The Imperial Governments of Japan and Russia shall each appoint a special commissioner to take charge of the prisoners. All prisoners in the hands of one Government shall be delivered to and be received by the commissioner of the other Government or by his duly authorized representative in such convenient numbers and at such convenient ports of the delivering State as such delivering State shall notify in advance to the commissioner of the receiving State.
The Governments of Japan and Russia shall present each other as soon as possible after the delivery of the prisoners is completed with a statement of the direct expenditures respectively incurred by them for the care and maintenance of the prisoner from the date of capture or surrender and up to the time of death or delivery. Russia engages to repay as soon as possible after the exchange of statement as above provided the difference between the actual amount so expended by Japan and the actual amount similarly disbursed by Russia.
ARTICLE XIV.
The present treaty shall be ratified by their Majesties the Emperor of Japan and the Emperor of all the Russias. Such ratification shall be with as little delay as possible, and in any case no later than fifty days from the date of the signature of the treaty, to be announced to the Imperial Governments of Japan and Russia respectively through the French Minister at Tokio and the Ambassador of the United States at St. Petersburg, and from the date of the latter of such announcements shall in all its parts come into full force. The formal exchange of ratifications shall take place at Washington as soon as possible.
ARTICLE XV.
The present treaty shall be signed in duplicate in both the English and French languages. The texts are in absolute conformity, but in case of a discrepancy in the interpretation the French text shall prevail.
SUB-ARTICLES
In conformity with the provisions of articles 3 and 9 of the treaty of the peace between Japan and Russia of this date the undersigned plenipotentiaries have concluded the following additional articles:
SUB-ARTICLE TO ARTICLE III.
The Imperial Governments of Japan and Russia mutually engage to commence the withdrawal of their military forces from the territory of Manchuria simultaneously and immediately after the treaty of peace comes into operation, and within a period of eighteen months after that date the armies of the two countries shall be completely withdrawn from Manchuria, except from the leased territory of the Liaotung Peninsula. The forces of the two countries occupying the front positions shall first be withdrawn.
The high contracting parties reserve to themselves the right to maintain guards to protect their respective railway lines in Manchuria. The number of such guards shall not exceed fifteen per kilometre and within that maximum number the commanders of the Japanese and Russian armies shall by common accord fix the number of such guards to be mployed as small as possible while having in view the actual requirements.
The commanders of the Japanese and Russian forces in Manchuria shall agree upon the details of the evacuation in conformity with the above principles and shall take by common accord the measures necessary to carry out the evacuation as soon as possible, and in any case not later than the period of eighteen months.
SUB-ARTICLE TO ARTICLE IX.
As soon as possible after the present treaty comes into force a committee of delimitation composed of an equal number of members is to be appointed by the two high contracting parties which shall on the spot mark in a permanent manner the exact boundary between the Japanese and Russian possessions on the Island of Saghalin. The commission shall be bound so far as topographical considerations permit to follow the fiftieth parallel of north latitude as the boundary line, and in case any deflections from that line at any points are found to be necessary compensation will be made by correlative deflections at other points. It shall also be the duty of the said commission to prepare a list and a description of the adjacent islands included in the cession, and finally the commission shall prepare and sign maps showing the boundaries of the ceded territory. The work of the commission shall be subject to the approval of the high contracting parties.
The foregoing additional articles are to be considered ratified with the ratification of the treaty of peace to which they are annexed.
In witness whereof the respective plenipotentiaries have signed and affixed seals to the present treaty of peace.
Done at Portsmouth, New Hampshire, this fifth day of the ninth month of the thirty-eighth year of the Meijei, corresponding to the twenty-third day of August, one thousand nine hundred and five, (September 5, 1905.)
Tyler, Sydney. The Japan-Russia War. Harrisburg: The Minter Company, 1905. pp 564-568.
1 Showa kokusei soran, (Gekan: Tokyo, Toyo keizai shinposha, 1980)
Additional documents related to the Russo-Japanese War are available at the website of the Japan Center for Asian Historical Records:
http://www.jacar.go.jp/english/nichiro/frame1.htm
And in the website of the Portsmouth Peace Treaty 1905-2005:
http://www.portsmouthpeacetreaty.com/process/
Annotated by Miriam Kaminishi
Treaty related to Manchuria, 1905
Komura Jutarō; Uchida Yasuya; Prince Qing; Chu Hung-chi; Yuan Shikai
To certify the rights acquired from Russia through the Treaty of Portsmouth, Japan reinforced with China its interests over Manchuria. With China, Japan added 12 new conditions that favoured its increased establishment in Manchuria. The main new conditions included a) the opening of 15 cities in the provinces of Liaoning, Jilin and Heilongjiang for international residence and trade, b) to assure resident rights for Japanese settlers in Yingkou, Andong and Shenyang, c) to assure the conservation of graves of Japanese soldiers who died in Manchuria, d) the construction and administration of the railway line from Andong to Shenyang (Antung-Mukden line) for a period of 49 years, e) to assure the rights of a Sino-Japanese company (to be formed) to explore timber concessions in the area of the Yalu River, f) to assure reciprocal treatment in trade tariffs in the border area of Korea and Manchuria, g) to prevent the construction of any railway line parallel to the Japanese railway company right of way. This document indicated Japan’s increasing power over and ambitions in China, especially in Manchuria. This Treaty was written in Chinese and Japanese.
Treaty and Additional Agreement between Japan and China Relating to Manchuria — December 22, 1905
大清國大皇帝陛下、大日本國大皇帝陛下均願妥定光緒三十一年八月初七日,即明治三十八年九月初五日,日俄兩國簽定和約內所列共同關涉各項事宜,茲照上開宗旨訂立條約。為此,大清國大皇帝陛下簡授欽差全權大臣軍機大臣總理外務部事務和碩親王、簡授欽差全權大臣軍機大臣外務部尚書會辦大臣翟鴻機、簡授欽差全權大臣北洋大臣太子少保直隸總督袁世凱;大日本國大皇帝陛下簡授特派全權大使外務大臣從三位勳一等男爵小村、壽太郎、特命全權公使從四位勳二等內田康哉為全權大臣,各將所奉全權文憑校閱,認明俱屬妥善,會商訂定各條款,開列於左:
第一款
中國政府將俄國按照日俄和約第五款及第六款允讓日本國之一切概行允諾。
第二款
日本國政府承允,按照中俄兩國所訂借地及造路原約實力遵行。嗣後遇事,隨時與中國政府妥商釐定。
第三款
本條約由簽字蓋印之時起即當施行,並由大清國大皇帝陛下、大日本國大皇帝陛下御筆批准,由本約蓋印之日起兩個月以內,應從速將批准約本在北京互換。
為此,兩國全權大臣繕備漢文、日本文各二本,即於此約內簽名蓋印,以昭信守。
大清國欽差全權大臣軍機大臣總理外務部事務慶親王押、欽差全權大臣軍機大臣外務部尚書會辦大臣瞿鴻?押、欽差全權大臣北洋大臣太子少保直隸總督袁世凱押
大日本國特派全權大使外務大臣從三位勳一等男爵小村壽太郎押、特命全權公使從四位勳二等內田康哉押
光緒三十一年十一月二十六日明治三十八年十二月二十二日立於北京
大清國政府、大日本國政府為在東三省地方彼此另有關涉事宜應行定明,以便遵守起見,商定各條款,開列於左:
第一款
中國政府應允,俟日俄兩國軍隊撤退後,從速將下開各地方中國自行開埠通商:
- 奉夫省內之鳳凰城、遼陽、新民屯、鐵嶺、通江子、法庫門;
- 吉林省內之長春(即寬城子)、吉林省城、哈爾濱、寧古塔、琿春、三姓;
- 黑龍江省內之齊齊哈爾、海拉爾、璦琿、滿洲里。
第二款
因中國政府聲明,極盼日俄兩國將駐紮東三省軍隊暨護路兵隊從速撤退,日本國政府願副中國期望,如俄國允將護路兵撤退,或中俄兩國另有商訂妥善辦法,日本國政府允即一律照辦。又,如滿洲地方平靖,外國人命、產業中國均能保護周密,日本國亦可與俄國將護路兵同時撤退。
第三款
日本國軍隊一經由東三省某地方撤退,日本國政府應隨即將該地名知會中國政府,雖在日俄和約續加條款所訂之撤兵限期以內,即如上段所開,一準知會日本軍隊撤畢,則中國政府可得在各地方酌派軍隊,以維地方治安。日本軍隊未撤地方,倘有土匪擾害閭閻,中國地方官亦得以派相當兵隊前往剿捕,但不得進距日本駐兵界限二十華里以內。
第四款
日本國政府允因軍務上所必需,曾經在滿洲地方佔領或占用之中國公私各產業,在撤兵時悉還中國官民接受。其屬無須備用者,即在撤兵以前,亦可交還。
第五款
中國政府為妥行保全東三省各地方陣亡之日本軍隊將兵墳塋、以及立有忠魂碑之地,務須竭力設法辦理。
第六款
中國政府允將由安東縣至奉天省城所築造之行軍鐵路仍由日本國政府接續經管,改為轉運各國工商貨物。自此路改良竣工之日起(除因運兵回國耽延十二個月不計外,限以二年為改良竣工之期),以十五年為限,即至光緒四十九年止。屆期彼此公請一他國公估人,按該路建置各物件估價售與中國。未售以前,準由中國政府運送兵丁、餉械,可按東省鐵路章程辦理。至該路改良辦法,應由日本承辦人員與中國特派人員妥實商議。所有辦理該路事務,中國政府援照東省鐵路合同,派員查察經理。至該路運轉中國官商貨物價值,應另訂詳章。
第七款
中日兩國政府為圖來往輸運均臻興旺便捷起見,妥訂南滿洲鐵路與中國各鐵路接聯營業章程,務須從速另訂別約。
第八款
中國政府允南滿洲鐵路所需各項材料,應豁免一切稅捐、釐金。
第九款
所有奉省已開辦商埠之營口暨雖允開埠尚未開辦之安東縣、奉天府各地方,其劃定日本租界之辦法,應由中日兩國官員另行妥商釐定。
第十款
中國政府允許設一中日木植公司,在鴨綠江右岸採伐木植。至該地段廣狹、年限多寡暨公司如何設立,並一切合辦章程,應另訂詳細合同,總期中日股東利權均攤。
第十一款
滿、韓交界陸路通商,彼此應按照相待最優國之例辦理。
第十二款
中日兩國政府允,凡本日簽名蓋印之正約暨附約所載各款,遇事均以彼此相待最優之處施行。
本約由本日簽名蓋印之日起即當施行,並本日簽定之正約一經批准,本約亦視同一律批准。
為此,兩國全權大臣各奉本國政府合宜委任,繕備漢文、日本文各二本,即於此約內簽名蓋印,以昭信守。大清國欽差全權大臣軍機大臣總理外務部事務慶親王押、欽差全權大臣軍機大臣外務部尚書會辦大臣翟鴻禨押、欽差全權大臣北洋大臣太子少保直隸總督袁世凱押
大日本國特派全權大使外務大臣從三位勳一等男爵小村壽太郎印、特命全權公使從四位勳二等內田康哉印
光緒三十一年十一月二十六日明治三十八年十二月二十二日立於北京
大日本國皇帝陛下及大清國皇帝陛下ハ均シク明治三十八年九月五日即光緒三十一年八月七日調印セラレタル日露兩國講和條約ヨリ生スル共同關係ノ事項ヲ 協定セムコトヲ欲シ右ノ目的ヲ以テ條約ヲ締結スルコトニ決シ之カ爲メニ大日本國皇帝陛下ハ特派全權大使外務大臣從三位勳一等男爵小村壽太郎及特命全權公使 從四位勳二等内田康哉ヲ大清國皇帝陛下ハ欽差全權大臣軍機大臣總理外務部事務和碩慶親王欽差全權大臣軍機大臣外務部尚書會辧大臣瞿鴻禨及欽差全權大臣北洋 大臣太子少保直隷總督袁世凱ヲ各其ノ全權委員ニ任命セリ因テ各全權委員ハ互ニ其ノ全權委任状ヲ示シ其ノ良好妥當ナルヲ認メ以テ左ノ條項ヲ協議決定セリ
第一條
清國政府ハ露國カ日露講和條約第五條及第六條ニヨリ日本國ニ對シテ爲シタル一切ノ讓渡ヲ承諾ス
第二條
日本國政府ハ清露兩國間ニ締結セラレタル租借地竝鐵道敷設ニ關スル原條約ニ照シ努メテ遵行スヘキコトヲ承諾ス將來何等案件ノ生シタル場合ニハ隨時清國政府ト協議ノ上之ヲ定ムヘシ
第三條
本條約ハ調印ノ日ヨリ効力ヲ生スヘク且大日本國皇帝陛下及大淸國皇帝陛下ニ於テ之ヲ批准セラルヘシ該批准書ハ本條約調印ノ日ヨリ二箇月以内ニ成ルヘク速ニ北京ニ於テ之ヲ交換スヘシ
右證據トシテ兩國全權委員ハ日本文及漢文ヲ以テ作ラレタル各二通ノ本條約ニ署名調印スルモノナリ
明治三十八年十二月二十二日即光緒三十一年十一月二十六日北京ニ於テ之ヲ作ル
大日本帝國特派全權大使外務大臣從三位勳一等男爵 小村壽太郎(記名)印
大日本帝國特命全權公使從四位勳二等 内田康哉(記名)印
大淸國欽差全權大臣軍機大臣總理外務部事務 慶親王(記名)印
大淸國欽差全權大臣軍機大臣外務部尚書會辦大臣 瞿鴻禨(記名)印
大淸國欽差全權大臣北洋大臣太子少保直隷總督 袁世凱(記名)印
日淸兩國政府ハ滿洲ニ於テ双方共ニ關係ヲ有スル他ノ事項ヲ決定シ以テ遵守 ニ便ナラシムル爲メ左ノ條項ヲ協定セリ
第一條
淸國政府ハ日露軍隊撤退ノ後成ルヘク速ニ外國人ノ居住及貿易ノ爲ノ自ラ進ミテ滿洲ニ於ケル左ノ都市ヲ開クヘキコトヲ約ス
盛京省 鳳凰城 遼陽 新民屯 鐵嶺 通江子 法庫門
吉林省 長春(寛城子) 吉林 哈爾賓 寧古塔 琿春 三姓
黒龍江省 齊齊哈爾 海拉爾 愛琿 滿洲里
第二條
淸國政府ハ滿洲ニ於ケル日露兩國軍隊竝ニ鐵道守備兵ノ成ルヘク速ニ撤退セラレムコトヲ切望スル旨ヲ言明シタルニ因リ日本國政府ハ淸國政府ノ希望ニ應 セムコトヲ欲シ若シ露國ニ於テ其ノ鐵道守備兵ノ撤退ヲ承諾スルカ或ハ淸露兩國間ニ別ニ適當ノ方法ヲ協定シタル時ハ日本國政府モ同樣ニ照辦スヘキコトヲ承諾 ス若シ滿洲地方平靖ニ歸シ外國人ノ生命財産ヲ淸國自ラ完全ニ保護シ得ルニ至リタル時ハ日本國モ亦露國ト同時ニ鐵道守備兵ヲ撤退スヘシ
第三條
日本國政府ハ滿洲ニ於テ撤兵ヲ了シタル地方ハ直チニ之ヲ淸國政府ニ通知スヘク淸國政府ハ日露講和條約追加約款ニ規定セル撤兵期限内ト雖既ニ上記ノ如 ク撤兵完了ノ通知ヲ得タル各地方ニハ自ラ其ノ安寧秩序ヲ維持スル爲メ必要ノ軍隊ヲ派遣スルコトヲ得ルモノトス日本國軍隊ノ未タ撤退セサル地方ニ於テ若シ土 匪ノ村落ヲ擾害スルコトアル時ハ淸國地方官モ亦相當ノ兵隊ヲ派遣シ之ヲ勦捕スルコトヲ得但シ日本國軍隊駐屯地界ヨリ二十淸里以内ニ進入スルコトヲ得サルモ ノトス
第四條
日本國政府ハ軍事上ノ必要ニヨリ滿洲ニ於テ占領又ハ收用セル淸國公私財産ハ撤兵ノ際悉ク淸國官民ニ還附シ又不用ニ歸スルモノハ撤兵前ト雖之ヲ還附スルコトヲ承諾ス
第五條
淸國政府ハ滿洲ニ於ケル日本軍戰死者ノ墳墓及忠魂碑所在地ヲ完全ニ保護スル爲メ總テ必要ノ處置ヲ執ルヘキコトヲ約ス
第六條
淸國政府ハ安東縣奉天間ニ敷設セル軍用鐵道ヲ日本國政府ニ於テ各國商工業ノ貨物運搬用ニ改メ引續キ經營スルコトヲ承諾ス該鐵道ハ改良工事完成ノ日ヨ リ起算シ(但シ軍隊送還ノ爲メ遲延スヘキ期間十二箇月ヲ除キ二箇年ヲ以テ改良工事完成ノ期限トス)十五箇年ヲ以テ期限ト爲シ即光緒四十九年ニ至リテ止ム右 期限ニ至ラハ双方ニ於テ他國ノ評價人一名ヲ選ミ該鐵道ノ各物件ヲ評價セシメテ淸國ニ賣渡スヘシ其ノ賣渡前ニ在リテ淸國政府ノ軍隊並兵器糧食ヲ輸送スル場合 ニハ東淸鐵道條約ニ準據シテ取扱フヘク又該鐵道改良ノ方法ニ至テハ日本國ノ經營擔當者ニ於テ淸國ヨリ特派スル委員ト切實ニ商議スヘキモノトス該鐵道ニ關ス ル事務ハ東淸鐵道條約ニ準シ淸國政府ヨリ委員ヲ派シ査察經理セシムヘク又該鐵道ニ由リ淸國公私貨物ヲ運搬スル運賃ニ關シテハ別ニ詳細ナル規程ヲ設クヘキモ ノトス
第七條
日淸兩國政府ハ交通及運輸ヲ増進シ且之ヲ便易ナラシムルノ目的ヲ以テ南滿洲鐵道ト淸國各鐵道トノ接續業務ヲ規定セムカ爲メ成ルヘク速ニ別約ヲ締結スヘシ
第八條
淸國政府ハ南滿洲鐵道ニ要スル諸般ノ材料ニ對シ各種ノ税金及釐金ヲ免スヘキコトヲ承諾ス
第九條
盛京省内ニ於テ既ニ通商場ヲ開設シタル營口及通商場トナスヘク約定シアルモ未タ開カレサル安東縣並奉天府各地方ニ於テ日本居留地ヲ劃定スル方法ハ日淸兩國官吏ニ於テ別ニ協議決定スヘシ
第十條
淸國政府ハ日淸合同材木會社ヲ設立シ鴨緑江右岸地方ニ於テ森林截伐ニ從事スルコト其ノ地區ノ廣狭年限ノ長短及會社設立ノ方法並合同經營ニ關スル一切ノ章程ハ別ニ詳細ナル約束ヲ取極ムヘキコトヲ承諾ス日淸兩國株主ノ利權ハ均等分配ヲ期スヘシ
第十一條
滿韓國境貿易ニ關シテハ相互ニ最惠國ノ待遇ヲ與フヘキモノトス
第十二條
日淸兩國政府ハ本日調印シタル條約及附屬協約ノ各條ニ記載セル一切ノ事項ニ關シ相互ニ最優ノ待遇ヲ與フルコトヲ承諾ス
本協約ハ調印ノ日ヨリ効力ヲ生スヘク且本日調印ノ條約批准セラレタル時ハ本協約モ亦同時ニ批准セラレタルモノト看做スヘシ
右證據トシテ下名ハ各其本國政府ヨリ相當ノ委任ヲ受ケ日本文及漢文ヲ以テ作ラレタル各二通ノ本協約ニ記名調印スルモノナリ
明治三十八年十二月二十二日即光緒三十一年十一月二十六日北京ニ於テ之ヲ作ル
大日本帝國特派全權大使外務大臣從三位勳一等男爵 小村壽太郎(記名)印
大日本帝國特派全權行使從四位勳二等 内田康哉(記名)印
大淸國欽差全權大臣軍機大臣總理外務部事務 慶親王(記名)印
大淸國欽差全權大臣軍機大臣外務部尚書會辦大臣 瞿鴻禨(記名)印
大淸國欽差全權大臣北洋大臣太子少保直隷總督 袁世凱(記名)印
His Majesty the Emperor of Japan and His Majesty the Emperor of China, desiring to adjust certain matters of common concern growing out of the Treaty of Peace between Japan and Russia of September 5th, 1905, have resolved to conclude a Treaty with that object in view and have for that purpose named Their Plenipotentiaries, that is to say:
His Majesty the Emperor of Japan:
Baron Komura Jutaro, Jusammi, Grand Cordon of the Imperial Order of the Rising Sun, Minister for Foreign Affairs and Special Ambassador of His Majesty, and
Uchida Yasuya, Jushii, Second Class of the Imperial Order of the Rising Sun, His Majesty’s Envoy Extraordinary and Minister Plenipotentiary; and
His Majesty the Emperor of China:
Prince Ching, Presiding Minister for Foreign Affairs, Councillor of State and Plenipotentiary of His Majesty,
Chu Hung-chi, Minister for Foreign Affairs, Councillor of State and Plenipotentiary of His Majesty, and
Yuan Shih-kai, Viceroy of the Province of Chihli, Junior Guardian of the Heir-Apparent, Minister Superintendent of Trade for the Northern Ports and Plenipotentiary of His Majesty;
Who, after having exchanged their full powers which were found to be in good and due form, have agreed upon and concluded the following Articles:
Article I.
The Imperial Chinese Government consent to all the transfers and assignments made by Russia to Japan by Articles V and VI of the Treaty of Peace above mentioned.
Article II.
The Imperial Japanese Government engage that in regard to the leased territory as well as in the matter of railway construction and exploitation, they-will, so far as circumstances permit, conform to the original agreements concluded between China and Russia. In case any question arises in the future on these subjects, the Japanese Government will decide it in consultation with the Chinese Government.
Article III.
The present Treaty shall come into full force from the date of signature. It shall be ratified by Their Majesties the Emperor of Japan and the Emperor of China and the ratifications shall be exchanged at Peking as soon as possible, and not later than two months from the present date.
In witness whereof, the respective Plenipotentiaries have signed this Treaty in duplicate in the Japanese and Chinese languages and have thereto affixed their seals.
Done at Peking, this twenty-second day of the twelfth month of the thirty-eighth year of Meiji, corresponding to the twenty-sixth day of the eleventh moon of the thirty-first year of Kuang Hsü.
(Signed) BARON KOMURA JUTARO, [L. S.]
Jusammi, Grand Cordon of the Imperial Order of the Rising Sun, Minister f or Foreign Affairs and Special Ambassador of His Majesty the Emperor of Japan.
(Signed) UCHIDA YASUYA, [L. S.]
Jushii, Second Class of the Imperial Order of the Rising Sun, Envoy Extraordinary and Minister Plenipotentiary of His Majesty the Emperor of Japan.
(Signed) PRINCE CHING, [L. S.]
Presiding Minister for Foreign Affairs, Councillor of State and Plenipotentiary of His Majesty the Emperor of China.
(Signed) CHU HUNG-CHI, [L. S.]
Minister for Foreign Affairs, Councillor of State and Plenipotentiary of His Majesty the Emperor of China.
(Signed) YUAN SHIH-KAI, [L. S.]
Viceroy of the Province of Chihli, Junior Guardian of the Heir-Apparent, Minister Superintendent of Trade for the Northern Ports and Plenipotentiary of His Majesty the Emperor of China.
The Governments of Japan and China, with a view to regulate, for their guidance, certain questions in which they are both interested in Manchuria, in addition to those provided for in the Treaty signed this day, have agreed as follows:
Article I.
The Imperial Chinese Government agree that as soon as possible after the evacuation of Manchuria by the Japanese and Russian forces, the following cities and towns in Manchuria will be opened by China herself as places of international residence and trade:
In the Province of Shengking:
Fenghwangcheng; Liaoyang; Hsinmintun; Tiehling; Tungkiangtzu and Fakumen.
In the Province of Kirin:
Changchun (Kuanchengtzu); Kirin; Harbin; Ninguta; Hunchun and Sanhsing.
In the Province of Heilungkiang:
Tsitsihar; Hailar; Aihun and Manchuli.
Article II.
In view of the earnest desire expressed by the Imperial Chinese Government to have the.Japanese and Russian troops and railway guards in Manchuria withdrawn as soon as possible, and in order to meet this desire, the Imperial Japanese Government, in the event of Russia agreeing to the withdrawal of her railway guards, or in case other proper measures are agreed to between China and Russia, consent to take similar steps accordingly. When tranquillity shall have been reestablished in Manchuria and China shall have become herself capable of affording full protection to the lives and property of foreigners, Japan will withdraw her railway guards simultaneously with Russia.
Article III.
The Imperial Japanese Government, immediately upon the withdrawal of their troops from any regions in Manchuria, shall notify the Imperial Chinese Government of the regions thus evacuated, and even within the period stipulated for the withdrawal of troops in the Additional Articles of the Treaty of Peace between Japan and Russia, the Chinese Government may send necessary troops to the evacuated regions of which they have been already notified as above mentioned, for the purpose of maintaining order and tranquillity in those regions. If, in the regions from which Japanese troops have not yet been withdrawn, any villages are disturbed or damaged by native bandits, the Chinese local authorities may also dispatch a suitable military force for the purpose of capturing or dispersing those bandits. Such troops, however, shall not proceed within twenty Chinese li from the boundary of the territory where Japanese troops are stationed.
Article IV.
The Imperial Government of Japan engage that Chinese public and private property in Manchuria, which they have occupied or expropriated on account of military necessity, shall be restored at the time the Japanese troops are withdrawn from Manchuria and that such property as is no longer required for military purposes shall be restored even before such withdrawal.§
Article V.
The Imperial Chinese Government engage to take all necessary measures to protect fully and completely the grounds in Manchuria in which the tombs and monuments of the Japanese officers and soldiers who were killed in war are located.
Article VI.
The Imperial Chinese Government agree that Japan has the right to maintain and work the military railway line constructed between Antung and Mukden and to improve the said line so as to make it fit for the conveyance of commercial and industrial goods of all nations. The term for which such right is conceded is fifteen years from the date of the completion of the improvements above provided for. The work of such improvements is to be completed within two years, exclusive of a period of twelve months during which it will have to be delayed owing to the necessity of using the existing line for the withdrawal of troops. The term of the concession above mentioned is therefore to expire in the 49th year of Kuang Hsü. At the expiration of that term, the said railway shall be sold to China at a price to be determined by appraisement of all its properties by a foreign expert who will be selected by both parties. The conveyance by the railway of the troops and munitions of war of the Chinese Government prior to such sale shall be dealt with in accordance with the regulations of the Eastern Chinese Railway. Regarding the manner in which the improvements of the railway are to be effected, it is agreed that the person undertaking the work on behalf of Japan shall consult with the Commissioner dispatched for the purpose by China. The Chinese Government will also appoint a Commissioner to look after the business relating to the railway as is provided in the Agreement relating to the Eastern Chinese Railway. It is further agreed that detailed regulations shall be concluded regarding the tariffs for the carriage by the railway of the public and private goods of China.
Article VII.
The Governments of Japan and China, with a view to promote and facilitate intercourse and traffic, will conclude, as soon as possible, a separate convention for the regulation of connecting services between the railway lines in South Manchuria and all the other railway lines in China.
Article VIII.
The Imperial Chinese Government engage that all materials required for the railways in South Manchuria shall be exempt from all duties, taxes and likin.
Article IX.
The methods of laying out the Japanese Settlement at Yingkou in the Province of Shengking, which has already been opened to trade, and at Antung and Mukden in the same Province, which are still unopen although stipulated to be opened, shall be separately arranged and determined by officials of Japan and China.
Article X.
The Imperial Chinese Government agree that a joint-stock company of forestry composed of Japanese.and Chinese capitalists shall be organized for the exploitation of the forests in the regions on the right bank of the River Yalu and that a detailed agreement shall be concluded in which the area and term of the concession as well as the organization of the company and all regulations concerning the joint work of exploitation shall be provided for. The Japanese and Chinese shareholders shall share equally in the profits of the undertaking.
Article XI.
The Governments of Japan and China engage that in all that relates to frontier trade between Manchuria and Corea most favoured nation treatment shall be reciprocally extended.
Article XII.
The Governments of Japan and China engage that in all matters dealt with in the Treaty signed this day or in the present Agreement the most favourable treatment shall be reciprocally extended.
The present Agreement shall take effect from the date of signature. When the Treaty signed this day is ratified, this Agreement shall also be considered as approved
In witness whereof, the Undersigned, duly authorized by their respective Governments, have signed the present Agreement in duplicate in the Japanese and Chinese languages and have thereto affixed their seals.
Done at Peking, this 22nd day of the 12th month of the 38th year of Meiji, corresponding to the 26th day of the 11th moon of the 31st year of Kuang Hsü.
(Signed) BARON KOMURA JUTARO, [L. S.]
Jusammi, Grand Cordon of the Imperial Order of the Rising Sun, Minister f or Foreign Affairs and Special Ambassador of His Majesty the Emperor of Japan.
(Signed) UCHIDA YASUYA, [L. S.]
Jushii, Second Class of the Imperial Order of the Rising Sun, Envoy Extraordinary and Minister Plenipotentiary of His Majesty the Emperor of Japan.
(Signed) PRINCE CHING, [L. S.]
Presiding Minister for Foreign Affairs, Councillor of State and Plenipotentiary of His Majesty the Emperor of China.
(Signed) CHU HUNG-CHI, [L. S.]
Minister for Foreign Affairs, Councillor of State and Plenipotentiary of His Majesty the Emperor of China.
(Signed) YUAN SHIH-KAI, [L. S.]
Viceroy of the Province of Chihli, Junior Guardian of the Heir-Apparent, Minister Superintendent of Trade for the Northern Ports and Plenipotentiary of His Majesty the Emperor of China.
American Society of International Law. "Treaty and Additional Agreement between Japan and China Relating to Manchuria." The American Journal of International Law, vol. 4, no. 4, Supplement: Official Documents (Oct., 1910). pp. 307-312. (English text)
本正约及附约均見 《海关中外条约》,卷2,頁636-641,734-739。本正约及附约于一九○六年一月二十三日在北京交换批准。 (Chinese and Japanese texts)
Annotated by Miriam Kaminishi
The Lansing-Ishii Agreement, 1917
Robert Lansing; Ishii Kikujirō
The divergence between President Woodrow Wilson’s Open Door policy towards China, and the Japanese policy of carving out a sphere of “special interest” that emphasized its hegemony in East Asia, became open and serious during the course of the First World War. The result was this formal diplomatic understanding, concluded as an attempt to amend and reconcile Japanese and American policies concerning China.
Since the end of the Russo-Japanese War, Japan tried, without success, to extend its rights in the leased territory in the Liaodong Peninsula and in the South Manchuria Railway (SMR) zone, which it took over from Russia, rights set to expire in 1923. At the same time, Japan tried to persuade the United Kingdom to enlarge Japanese economic activity in China through “economic cooperation” in the British sphere of influence in the Yangtze Valley--again, without success.1 However, once the First World War broke out, Japan seized an opportunity to declare war on Germany and replace it as the main power in Shandong Province, exploiting European preoccupation with war at home. By seizing the German leased territory, an important economic and military position leased for 99 years, Japan hoped to settle its unsolved problem regarding Manchuria. It used the new position of advantage to get past the problem of expiring rights in Manchuria by presenting to Chinese authorities the Twenty-One Demands, in January 1915. In general, the demands were divided in five groups. They included negotiations regarding Shandong Provinces (Group I) and the Liaodong leased territory; the SMR zone (Group II); a joint-venture of the Hanyeping Company (Group III) in which Japan had already made substantial investments; a demand that China not cede or lease any concessions along the coastal area to any other power (Group IV), which referred to American interests; and (Group V) demands to reinforce the “Japanese protectorate over China”.2
The Demands would if granted have destroyed the American policy of the Open Door in China, which rested on its territorial integrity and political sovereignty. Consequently, they marked a turning point in Japanese-American relations, provoking an increasing American tendency to see Japanese policy as a threat in East Asia.3 To intensify the rivalry between Japan and the US, China declared war against Germany. China’s entry to the war was marked by numerous Japanese loans, known as Nishihara loans, which, in turn, secured to Japan greater influence in Chinese policy. Japan thus tried to steady her “special interests” in China through financial assistance.
On the other hand, China’s declaration of war against Germany also caused an intense confrontation between Chinese Premier Duan Qirui and President Li Yuanhong. To try to reduce the strain, and block further Japanese interference in Chinese domestic affairs, the US Minister to China, Paul Samuel Reinsch, proposed that “the nations at war with Germany would guarantee the independence of China and the integrity of Chinese territory,” a point clearly aimed at Japan.4 Japan agreed to negotiate the issue with the US, and talks ensued between Secretary of State Robert Lansing and Japanese Ambassador Kikujiro Ishii.
A confidential protocol and part of the diplomatic notes exchanged between the Lansing and Ishii during the 1917 are presented here. The protocol reveals corrections made and agreed by both parties. This was the result of an impasse lasting many weeks between Lansing and Ishii regarding the meaning of “special interests” in China. Two notes, both dated October 30, 1917, show a secret negotiation in which a Japanese warship replaced the American warship USS Saratoga in the Hawaiian Islands in mid-October which, in turn, joined US naval forces in the Atlantic.5 The Agreement was signed in November 2, 1917, but later cancelled, on April 14, 1923. The Agreement was published as The Imperial Japanese Mission 1917: a record of the reception throughout the United States of the special mission headed by Viscount Ishii, together with the exchange of notes embodying the Root-Takahira Understanding of 1908 and the Lansing-Ishii Agreement of 1917.6 Rather than being seen as a temporary wartime measure aimed at postponing an underlying dispute, it is better seen as reflecting a clear understanding between the American and Japanese governments that their long term visions regarding China were not compatible. Given how pivotal China was to the foreign policy of each power, the Agreement marked an important moment in the unfolding of enmity between Japan and the US.
The Lansing-Ishii Exchange of Notes, 1917
DEPARTMENT OF STATE,
Washington, NOV. 2, 1917.
Excellency:
I have the honor to communicate herein my understanding of the agreement reached by us in our recent conversations touching the questions of mutual interest to our governments relating to the republic of China.
In order to silence mischievous reports that have from time to time been circulated it is believed by us that a public announcement once more of the desires and intentions shared by our two governments with regard to China is advisable.
The governments of the United States and Japan recognize that territorial propinquity creates special relations between countries, and, consequently, the government of the United. States recognizes that Japan has special interests in China, particularly in the part to which her possessions are contiguous.
The territorial sovereignty of China, nevertheless, remains unimpaired, and the government of the United States has every confidence in the repeated assurances of the Imperial Japanese government that while geographical position gives Japan such special interests they have no desire to discriminate against the trade of other nations or to disregard the commercial rights heretofore granted by China in treaties with other powers.
The governments of the United States and Japan deny that they have any purpose to infringe in any way the independence or territorial integrity of China, and they declare, furthermore, that they always adhere to the principle of the so-called "open door" or equal opportunity for commerce and industry in China.
Moreover, they mutually declare that they are opposed to the acquisition by any government of any special rights or privileges that would affect the independence or territorial integrity of China or that would deny to the subjects or citizens of any country the full enjoyment of equal opportunity in the commerce and industry of China.
I shall be glad to have Your Excellency confirm this understanding of the agreement reached by us.
Accept, Excellency, the renewed assurance of my highest consideration.
(Signed) ROBERT LANSING.
His EXCELLENCY, VISCOUNT KIKUJIRO ISHII,
Ambassador Extraordinary and Plenipotentiary
of Japan, on Special Mission.
THE SPECIAL MISSION OF JAPAN,
Washington, Nov. 2, 1917
Sir:
I have the honor to acknowledge the receipt of your note today, communicating to me your understanding of the agreement reached by us in our recent conversations touching the questions of mutual interests to our governments relating to the republic of China.
I am happy to be able to confirm to you, under authorization of my government, the understanding in question set forth in the following terms:
[Here the special Ambassador repeats the language of the agreement as given in Secretary Lansing's note].
(Signed) K. ISHII,
Ambassador Extraordinary and Plenipotentiary
of Japan on Special Mission.
HONORABLE ROBERT LANSING.,
SECRETARY OF STATE.
Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, Division for Intercourse and Education. The Imperial Japanese Mission, 1917: A Record of the Reception Throughout the United States of the Special Mission headed by Viscount Ishii. Washington: Byron S. Adams, 1918. pp. 121-122.
1 R.J. Gowen, ‘Great Britain and the Twenty-One Demands of 1915: Cooperation versus Effacement,’ in The Journal of Modern History, 43, 1, 1971.
2 Ibid.
3 N. Kawamura, Turbulence in the Pacific – Japanese-U.S. relations during World War I, (Westport, CT: Praeger, 2000).
4 Ibid.
5 Also quoted in T.D. Saxon, ‘Anglo-Japanese Naval Cooperation, 1914-1918’, in Naval War College Review, 2000.
6 J.C. Vinson, ‘The Annulment of the Lansing-Ishii Agreement,’ in Pacific Historical Review, 27, 1, 1958.
Annotated by Miriam Kaminishi
England/ Great Britain
Charter granted by Queen Elizabeth to the East India Company, 1600
Elizabeth I of England
Charter granted by Queen Elizabeth, to the Governor and Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies,
Dated the 31st December, in the 43rd year of Her Reign. Anno Domini, 1600.
ELIZABETH, by the Grace of God, Queen of England, France, and Ireland, Defender of the Faith, &c. To all our Officers, Ministers, and Subjects, and to all other People, as well within this our Realm of England as elsewhere, under our Obedience and Jurisdiction, or otherwise, unto whom these our Letters Patents shall be seen, showed, or read, greeting. Whereas our most dear and loving Cousin, George, Earl of Cumberland, and our well-beloved Subjects,
Sir John Hart, of London, Knight, Sir John Spencer, of London, Knight, Sir Edward Michelborne, Knight, William Cavendish, Esq. : Paul Banning, Robert Lee, Leonard Hollyday, John Watts, John Moore, Edward Holmeden, Robert Hampson, Thomas Smith, and Thomas Campbell, Citizens and Aldermen of London ; Edward Barker, Esq. ; Thomas Marsh, Esq.; Samuel Backhouse, Esq. ; James Lancaster, Richard Staper, Thomas Cordell, William Garway, Oliver Stile, William Quarts, Bartholomew Barnes, William Offely, Robert Chamberlain, John Harvey, Richard Wiseman, William Stone, Francis Cherry, Thomas Allabaster, Richard Barrett, John Swinnarton the Younger, Thomas Garway, William Romney, James Bean, John Eldred, Andrew Banning, Edward Leaving, Thomas Juxon, Nicholas Leat, John Woollestenholm, Nicholas Pierd, William Chamber, Rowland Blackhouse, Humphrey Smith, Robert Sandye, Henry Robinson, Richard Pointell, John Heylord, William Harrison, Humphrey Stile, Humphrey Robinson, Nicholas Ferror, Thomas Farrington, John Comb, Robert Offely, Roger How, John Hewitt. James Turner, Morrice Abbott, Robert Carrell, Robert Brooke, Richard Cham berlaine, George Chamberlaine, Leonard White, John Cornelius, Ralph Busby, William Jenning, Giles Parslow, Robert Bell, Thomas White Nicholas Ling William Palmer, Ellis, Cripps, George Bowles, Nicholas Cripps, John Merrick, Humphrey Handford, Thomas Simmons, Robert Cocks, William Walstall, John Humphrey, Thomas Bostock, BartholomewHolland, Richard Cock, William Walton. William Freeman, Thomas Southake, John Frier, Francis Dent, Richard Ball, Richard Pears, Roger Henning, Robert Cobe, Robert Robinson, Francis Evington, Francis Taylor, Thomas Westrowe, John Middleton, Robert Gore, Ralph Gore, William Cater, George Cater, John Busbridge, Thomas Hauton, William Bond, Merchant Taylor of London, William Cotton, John Stockley, Roger Arfield, Ausgustine Skinner, Richard Wiche, Robert Towertson, Richard Tailby, Robert Middleton; Robert Bateman, Richard Costam, Robert Walldoe, Richard Wragge, John Wragge, William Dale, Lawrence Walldoe Henry Bridgman, Samuel Armitage, Edward Harrison, Edmund Nicholson, Clement Moseley, John Newman, Humphrey Wallcot, Thomas Richardson, Thomas Bothby, John Cowchman, Reginald Green, Richard Burrell, Robert Mildmay, William Hind, George Chandler, Edward Lutterford, William Burrell, Stephen Harvey,. Thomas Henshaw, William Ferris, William Addarlye, William Hewit, William Fisher, Joseph Talbanck, Nicholas Manley, Nichloas Salter, William Willaston, William Angell, Nicholas Barnsley, John Hawkins, Roger Dye, Richard Clarke, Thomas Hewit, George Whitemore, Henry Polstead, William Grenwell, Robert Johnson, Bartholomew Haggett, Humphrey Bass, Robert Buck, Ambrose Wheeler, William Hale, Richard Hall, jun., John Hodgson, Alphonsus Fowl, Edmud Spencer, Robert Dewsey, Riceard Piott, William Bonham, Edward Barkliam, George Coles, Ralph Haymor, James Cullymer, Samuel Hare, George Utley, Gregory Allen, Henry Archer, Jeffery Kubye, John Cason, Richard Beale, Thomas Shipton, John Fletcher, Thomas Talbot, Robert Pennington, Humphrey Milward, Richard Hearne, Ralph Allyn, John Brooke, Anthony Gibson, Robert Kayes, Hugh Crompton, Richard Washer, George Holman, Morrice, Luelling, Richard Parsons, Francis Barker, William Turner, John Greenwood, Richard Dean, Richard Ironside, George Smythe, James Dunkin, Edward Walter, Andrew Chamberlain, Robert Stratford, Anthony Startford, William Millett, Simon Laurence, Thomas Liddall, Stephen Hodson, Richard Wright, William Starkey, William Smith, John Ellecot, Robert Bailey, and Roger Cotton,
have of our certain knowledge been Petitioners unto us, for our Royal Assent and Licence to be granted unto them, that they, at their own Adventures, Costs, and Charges, as well for the Honour of this our Realm of England, as for the Increase of our Navigation, and Advancement of Trade of Merchandize, within our said Realms and the Dominions of the same, might adventure and set forth one or more Voyages, with convenient Number of Ships and Pinnaces, by way of Traffic and Merchandize to the East-Indies, in the Countries and Parts of Asia and Africa, and to as many of the Islands, Ports and Cities, Towns and Places, thereabouts, as where Trade and Traffic may by all likelihood be discovered, established or had ; divers of which Countries, and many of the Islands, Cities and Ports thereof, have long since been discovered by others of our Subjects, albeit not frequented in Trade of Merchandize. Know ye therefore, that we, greatly tendering the Honour of our Nation, the Wealth of our People. and the Encouragement of them, and others of our loving Subjects in their good Enterprizes, for the Increase of our Navigation, and the Advancement of lawful Traffick to the Benefit of our Common Wealth, have of our special Grace, certain Knowledge, and mere Motion, given and granted and by these Presents, for us, our Heirs and Successors, do give and grant unto our said loving Subjects, before in these Presents expressly named, that they and every of them from henceforth be, and shall be one Body Corporate and Politick, in Deed and in Name, by the Name of The Governor and Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, and them by the Name of The Governor and Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, one Body Corporate and Politick, in Deed and in Name, really and fully for us our Heirs and Successors, we do order, make, ordain, constitute, establish and declare, by these Presents, and that by the same Name of Governor and Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, they shall have Succession, and that they and their Successors, by the Name of The Governor and Company of Merchants of London Trading into the East-Indies,
be and shall be, at all Times hereafter, persons able and capable in Law, and a Body Corporate and Politick, and capable in Law to have, purchase, receive, possess, enjoy and retain lands. Rents, Privileges, Liberties, Jurisdictions, Franchises and Hereditaments of whatsoever Kind, Nature, and Quality so ever they be, to them and their Successors. And also to give, grant, demise, alien, assign and dispose Lands, Tenements and Hereditaments, and to do and execute all and singular other Things, by the same Name that to them shall or may appertain to do. And that they and their Successors, by the Name of The Governor and Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, may plead and be impleaded, answer and be answered, defend and be defended, in whatsoever Courts and Places, and before whatsoever Judges and Justices, and other Persons and Officers, in all and singular Actions, Pleas, Suits, Quarrels, Causes and Demands whatsoever, of whatsoever Kind, Nature or Sort, in such Manner and Form, as any other, our liege People of this our Realm of England, being Persons able and capable in Law, may or can have, purchase, receive, possess, enjoy, retain, give, grant, demise, alien, assign, dispose, plead and be impleaded, answer and be answered, defend and be defended, release and be released, do permit and execute.
And that the said Governor and Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, and their Successors, may have a common Seal, to serve for all the Causes and Business of them and their Successors. And that it shall and may be lawful to The Said Governor and Company, and their Successors, the same Seal, from Time to Time, at their Will and Pleasure, to break, change, and to make new or alter, as to them shall seem expedient. And further, we will, and by these presents, for us, our Heirs and Successors, we do ordain, that there shall be from henceforth one of the same Company to be elected and appointed, m such Form, as hereafter in these Presents is expressed, which shall be called The Governor of the said Company, and that there shall be from henceforth TwentyFour of the said. Company, to be elected and appointed in such Form, as hereafter in these presents is expressed, which shall be called The Committees of the said Company, who, together with the Governor of the said Company for the Time being, shall have the direction of the Voyages, of or for the said Company, and the Provision of the Shipping and Merchandizes thereto belonging, and also the sale of all Merchandizes returned in the Voyages, of or for the said Company, and the managing and handling of all other Things belonging to the said company
and for the better Execution of this our Will and Grant in this Behalf We have assigned, nominated, constituted and made, and by these Presents, for us, our Heirs and Successors, we do assign, nominate, constitute and make, the said Thomas Smith, Alderman of London, to be the First and present Governor of the said Company, to continue in the said Office, from the Date of these presents, until another of the said Company shall in due Manner be chosen and sworn unto the said Office, according to the Ordinances and Provisions hereafter in these Presents expressed and declared, if the said Thomas Smith shall so long live ; and also we have assigned, nominated and appointed, and by these Presents, for us, our Heirs and Successors, we do assign, nominate, constitute and make, the said Paul Banning, Leonard Hollyday, John Moore, Edward Holmeden, Richard Staper, Thomas Cordell, William Garway, Oliver Style, James Lancaster, Richard Wiseman, Francis Cherry, Thomas Allabaster, William Romney, Roger How, William Chambers, Robert Sandye, John Eldred, Richard Wiche, John Hylord, John Middleton, John Comb, William Harrison, Nicholas Ling and Robert Bell, to be the Twenty-Four First and Present Committees of the said Company, to continue in the said office of Committees of the said company from the Date of these Presents, for One whole year next following.
And further we will and grant, by these Presents, for us, our Heirs and Successors, unto The said Governor and Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, and their Successors, that it shall and may be lawful to and for The said Governor and Company, for the Time being, or the more part of them, present at any publick Assembly, commonly called the Court, holden for the said Company, the Governor of the said Company being always one, from Time to Time, to elect, nominate and appoint one of the said Company, to be Deputy to the said Governor, which Deputy shall take a Corporal Oath, before the Governor and Five or more of the Committees of the said Company for the Time being, well, faithfully and truly to execute his said Office of Deputy to the Governor of the said Company, and after his oath, so taken, shall and may from Time to Time, in the Absence of the said Governor, exercise and execute the Office of Governor of the said company, in such Sort as the said Governor ought to do : And further we will and grant, by these Presents, for us, our Heirs and Successors, unto the said Governor and Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, and their Successors, that they or the greater Part of them, whereof the Governor for the Time being or his Deputy to be one, from Time to Time, and at all Times hereafter shall and may have Authority and Power, yearly and every year, on the First Day of July, or at any Time within Six Days after that Day, to assemble and meet together, in some convenient Place, to be appointed from Time to Time by the Governor, or in his Absence by the Deputy of the said Governor for the Time being, and that they being so assembled, it shall and may be lawful to and for the said Governor, or Deputy of the said Governor, and the said Company for the Time being or the greater Part of them, which then shall happen to be present, whereof the Governor of the said Company or his Deputy for the Time being, to be one, to elect and nominate one of the said Company, which shall be Governor of the said Company for one whole Year, from thence next following, which Person, being so elected and nominated to be Governor of the said Company, as is aforesaid before he be admitted to the Execution of the said Office, shall take a Corporal Oath before the last Governor, being his Predecessor or his Deputy, and any Six or more of the Committees of the said Company for the Time being, that he shall, from Time to Time, well and truly execute the Office of Governor of the said Company, in all things concerning the same; and that immediately after the said Oath so taken, he shall and may execute and use the said office of Governor of the said Company, for one whole Year, from thence next following : And in like Sort we will and grant, that as .well every one above-named to be of the said Company fellowship as all others hereafter to be admitted, or free of the said Company, shall take a Corporal Oath before the Governor of the said Company, or his Deputy for the Time being, to such Effect, as by the said Governor and Company, or the more Part of them, in any publick Court to be held from the said Company, shall be in reasonable Manner set down and devised, before they shall be allowed, or admitted to trade or traffick, as a Freeman of the said Company. And further we will and grant, by these Presents, for us, our Heirs and successors, unto The said Governor and Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, and their Successors, that the said Governor, or the Deputy of the said Governor, and the Company and their Successors, for the Time being, or the greater Part of them, whereof the Governor, or the Deputy of the Governor, from Time to Time, to be one, shall and may, from Time to Time, and at all Times hereafter, have Authority and Power, yearly and every Year, on the first Day of July, or at any time within Six Diys after that Day, to assemble and meet together, in some convenient place, to be from Time to Time appointed, by the said Governor of the said Company, or in his Absence, by his Deputy : And that they being so assembled, it shall and may be lawful, to and for the said Governor or his Deputy, and the Company for the Time being, or the greater Part of them, which then shall happen to be present, whereof the Governor of the said Company, or his Deputy for the Time being, to be one, to elect and nominate Twenty-four of the said Company, which shall be Committee of the said Company, for Ones whole Year, from thence next ensuing which Person being or so elected and nominated to be Committees of the said Company, as aforesaid, before they be admitted to the Execution of their said Offices, shall take a Corporal Oath, before the Governor or his Deputy, and any Six or more of the said Committees of the said Company, being their last Predecessors for the Time being, that they and every of them shall well and faithfully perform their said Office of Committees, in all things concerning the same, and that immediately after the said Oath so taken, they shall and may execute and use their said Offices of Committees of the said Company, for One whole Year, from thence next following; and more over our Will and Pleasure is, and by these Presents, for us our Heirs and Successors, we do grant unto The said Governor and Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, and to their Successors, that when and as often as shall happen, the Governor of the said Company for the Time being, at any Time within One Year, after that he shall be nominated, elected and sworn to the office of Governor of the said Company, as is aforesaid, to die or to be removed from the said Office, which Governor, not demeaning himself well in his said Office, we will to be removeable at the Pleasure of the said Company, or the greater Part of them, which shall be present, at any of their publick Assemblies, commonly called their General Court, holden for the said Company, that then and so often it shall and may be lawful, to and for the Residue of the said Company for the Time being, or the greater Part of them, within convenient Time after the Death or removing of any such Governor, to assemble themselves in such convenient Place as they shall think fit, for the Election of the Governor of the said Company : and that the said Company, or the greater Part of them, being then and there present, shall and may, then and there, before their Departure from the said Place, elect and nominate one other of the said Company, to be Governor of the same Company, in the Place or Stead of him that so died or was so removed, which Person, being so elected, and nominated to the Office of Governor of the said Company, shall have and exercise the said Office for and during the Residue of the said Year, taking first a Corporal Oath as is aforesaid, for the due Execution thereof ; and this to be done from Time to Time, so often as the Case shall so require. And also our Will and Pleasure is, and by these Presents, for us, our Heirs and Successors, we do grant unto The said Governor and Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, and to their Successors, that when and as often as it shall happen, any of the Committees of the said Company for the Time being, at any Time within One Year, next after that they or any of them shall be nominated, elected, and sworn to the Office of Committees of the said Company, as is aforesaid, to die or be removed from the said Office, which Committees, not demeaning themselves well in their said Office, we will to be removable, at the Pleasure of The said Governor and Company or the greater Part of them, whereof the Governor of the said Company, for the Time being, or his Deputy for the Time being, to be one that then and so often, it shall and may be lawful, to and for The said Governor and Company for the Time being, or the greater Part of them, whereof the Governor for the Time being or his Deputy, to be one, within convenient Time, after the Death or removing of any of the said Committees, to assemble themselves in such convenient Place, as is or shall be usual and accustomed for the Election of The Governor of the said Company, or where else The Governor of the said Company for the Time being, or his Deputy, shall appoint ; and The said Governor and Company, or the greater Part of them, whereof the Governor for the Time being, his Deputy, to be one, being then and there present, shall and may then and there, before their Departure from the said Place elect and nominate one or more of the said Company, to be Committees of the same Company, in the Places and Steads^ Place or Stead, of him or them . that so died, or were or was so removed, which Person or Persons, so elected and nominated to the Office or Offices of Committee, or Committees, of the said Company, shall have and exercise the said Office and Offices, during the Residue of the said Year, taking first a Corporal Oath as is aforesaid, for the due Execution thereof, and this to be done from Time to Time, so often as the Case shall require. And further we do, by these Presents, for us, our Heirs and Successors, will and grant unto The said Governor and Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, and their Successors, that they, and all that are or shall be of The said Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, and every of them, and all the Sons of them, at their several Ages of One and Twenty Years or upwards : And further, all such the Apprentices, Factors or Servants of them, and of every of them, which hereafter shall be employed by The said Governor and Company, in the said Trade of Merchandize, of or to the East-Indies, beyond the Seas, or any other the Places aforesaid, in any part of the said East-Indies, or other the Places aforesaid, shall and may, by the Space of Fifteen Years, from the Feast of the Birth of our Lord God last past, before the Date hereof, freely traffick and use the Trade of Merchandize, by Seas, in and by such Ways and Passages already found out and discovered, or which hereafter shall be found out and discovered, as they shall esteem and take to be fittest, into and from the said East-Indies, in the Countries and Parts of Asia and Africa, and into and from all the Islands, Ports, Havens ; Cities, Creeks, Towns and Places of Asia and Africa, and America, or any of them, beyond the Cape of Bona Esperanza to the Straights of Magellan, where any Trade or Traffick of Merchandize may be used or had, and to and from every of them, in such Order, Manner, Form, Liberty and Condition, to all Intents and Purposes, as shall be, from Time to Time, at any publick Assembly or Court, held by or for The said Governor and Company, by or between them of the said Fellowship or Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, or the more Part of them, for the Time being, present at such Assembly or Court, the Governor, or his Deputy, being always present at such Court or Assembly, limited and agreed, and not otherwise, without any Molestation, Impeachment, or Disturbance, any Statute, Usage, Diversity of Religion or Faith or any other Cause or Matter whatsoever, to the contrary notwithstanding : So always the same Trade be not undertaken nor addressed to any Country, Island, Port, Haven, City, Creek, Town or Place, already in the lawful and actual Possession of any such Christian Prince or State, as at this present is, or at any Time hereafter shall be in League or Amity with us, our Heirs or Successors, and who doth not or will not accept of such Trade, but doth overtly declared and publish the same to be utterly against his or their Good Will and Liking.
And further our Will and Pleasure is, and by these Presents, for us our Heirs and Successors, we do grant unto The said Governor and Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, and to their Successors, that it shall and may be lawful, to and for The said Governor and Company, and their Successors, from Time to Time to assemble themselves for or about any the Matters, Causes, Affairs or Businesses of the said Trade, in any Place or Places, for the same convenient, during the said Term of Fifteen Years, within our Dominions or elsewhere, and there to hold Court for the said Company, and the Affairs thereof; and that also it shall and may be lawful, to and for them, or the more Part of them, being so assembled, and that shall then and there be present, in any such Place or Places, whereof the Governor or his Deputy for the Time being, to be one, to make, ordain, and constitute such, and so many reasonable Laws, Constitutions, Orders and Ordinances, as to them, or the greater Part of them, being then and there present, shall seem necessary and convenient, for the good Government of the same Company, and of all Factors, Masters, Mariners and other Officers, employed or to be employed in any of their Voyages, and for the better Advancement and Continuance of the said Trade and Traffick, and the same Laws, Constitutions, Orders and Ordinances, so made, to put in use and execute accordingly, and at their Pleasure to revoke or alter the same, or any of them as Octatian shall require; and that The said Governor and Company, so often as they shall make, ordain or establish any such Laws, Constitutions, Orders or Ordinances, in Form aforesaid, shall and may lawfully impose, ordain, limit and provide such Pains, Punishments and Penalties, by Imprisonment of Body, or by Fines and Amerciaments, or by all or any of them upon and against all Offenders, contrary to such Laws, Constitutions, Orders and Ordinances, or any of them as to The said Governor and Company for the Time being, or the greater Part of them, then and there being present, the said Governor, or his Deputy, being always one, shall seem necessary, requisite and convenient, for the Observation of the same Laws, Constitutions, Orders and Ordinances; and the same Fine and Amerciaments shall and may levy, take and have, to the Use of The said Governor and Company, and their Successors, without the Impediment of us, our Heirs or Successors, or of any the Officers or Ministers of us, our Heirs or Successors, and without any Account thereof, to us, our Heirs or Successors, to be rendered or made ; all and singular which Laws, Constitutions, Orders and Ordinances, so as aforesaid to be made, we will to be duly observed and kept, under the Pain and Penalties therein to be contained ; so always as the said Laws, Orders, Constitutions, Ordinances, Imprisonments, Fines and Amerciaments be reasonable, and not contrary or repugnant to the Laws, Statutes, or Customs of this our Realm.
And for as much as The said Governor and Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, have not yet experienced of the Kinds of Commodities and Merchandizes, which are or will be vendible, or to be uttered in the said Parts of the East-Indies, and therefore shall be driven to carry to those Parts, in their Voyages outward, divers and sundry Commodities, which are likely to be returned again to this our Realm: We therefore of our especial Grace, certain Knowledge and mere Motion, for the better encouraging of The said Governor and Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the said East-Indies, and for the Advancement of the said Trade, do grant unto The said Governor and Company, and to their Successors, that they and their Successors, during the Four First Voyages, which they shall make, or set forth, for or towards the said East-Indies, shall and may transport, and carry out of our Realm of England, and the Ports, Creeks and Havens thereof, all such and so much Goods and Merchandizes, being Goods and Merchandizes lawfully passable and transportable out of this Realm, and not prohibited to be transported by any Law or Statute of this Realm, as shall be by them, their Factors Assigns, shipped in any Ship or Ships, Vessel or Vessels, to be employed in any of the said Four First Voyages, free of Custom, Subsidy or Poundage, or any other Duties or Payments, to us or our Successors, due or belonging, for the shipping or transporting of the same, or any of them; and yet nevertheless our Will and Pleasure is and we do, by these Presents, straitly charge and command, that all and every such Goods and Merchandizes, so to be transported out of this realm, from Time to Time, during the said Four First Voyages, as is aforesaid, shall, from Time to Time, be duly entered by the Customer, Controller or other Officer of such Port, Creek or Place, where the same Goods and Merchandizes shall happen to be shipped and laden, before such Time as the same shall be shipped, or laden, to be transported as is aforesaid :
And also of our further especial Grace, certain Knowledge and mere Motion, we do, for us, our Heirs and Successors, grant to and with the said Governor and Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, and their successors, that when and as often, at any Time, during the said Time and space of Fifteen years, as any custom. Poundage, Subsidy, or other duties, shall be due and payable unto us, our Heirs, or Successors, for any goods, Wares, or Merchandizes whatsoever, to be returned out or from any the Islands, Ports, Havens, Cities, Towns or places aforesaid, unto our Port of London, or any of the Havens, Creeks, Members or Places to the same Port belonging, that the customers and all other Officers for the Time being, of us, our Heirs or Successors, for or concerning Receipts of Customs, Poundage, Subsidies or other Duties, unto whom it shall appertain, shall upon the Request of the Governor and Company of the said Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, or any their Agents, Factors or Assigns, give unto the said Governor and Company, their Agents, Factors or Assigns, Six Months' time, for payment of the one Half, and after those Six months ended, other Six Months' Time, for the payment of the other Half, of their said customs, Poundage, or other subsidy or duties, receiving good and sufficient bonds, with Surety, to the Use of us, our Heirs and Successors, for the true payment of the same accordingly ; and upon receipt of the said Bonds, with surety, from Time to Time, to give unto The said Governor and company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, for the Time being their Agents, Factors or Assigns, their cocket or other warrant, to take out and receive on land the same Goods, Wares, or Merchandizes, by virtue thereof, without any Disturbance ; and that also as often as at any time, during the said time of years, any Goods, Wares or Merchandizes of the said Governor and company, for the Time being, laden from our Port of London, or any the Creeks, Members or places to the same Port belonging, to be transported to or towards any the islands Ports, Havens, Cities, Towns or places aforesaid, shall happen to miscarry or be lost, before their safe Arrival or Discharge in the Ports, for and to which the same shall be sent, that then and so often so much custom Poundage, Subsidies, or other Duties, as they answered to us, for the same, before their going forth of our said Ports, Havens or Creeks, shall, after due Proof made, before the Treasurer of England, for the Time being, of the said Loss, and the just Quantity thereof, be, by Virtue hereof, allowed to The said Governor and Company, their Agents or Factors, by Warrant of the said Treasurer, to the said Customers or Officers, in the next Goods, Wares or Merchandizes, that The said Governor and company, or their Successors, shall or may ship, for or towards those Parts, according to the true Rates of the customs. Poundage or Subsidies, before paid for the Goods, Wares or Merchandizes, so lost or miscarrying, or any Part thereof.
And for that, The said Governor and company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, are like to bring to this our Realm, a much greater Quantity of foreign commodities, from the Parts of the said East-Indies, than can be spent for the necessary Use of the same our Realm, which of Necessity must be transported into other countries, and there vended, we, for us, our Heirs and Successors, of our especial Grace, certain Knowledge and mere Motion, do grant to and with The said Governor and company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, and their Successors, that at all Times, from Time to Time, during the Space of Thirteen Months, next after the Discharge of any the same foreign Commodities, so to be brought in, the Subsidies, Poundage, customs, and other Duties for the same, being first paid or compounded for as .aforesaid, it shall be lawful for The said Governor and Company, and their Successors, or any other the natural Subjects of this our Realm, which may or shall buy the same of them, to transport the same in English Bottoms, freely out of this Realm as well ungarbled as garbled, without Payment of any further custom, Poundage, or any further Subsidy, to us, our Heirs or Successors for the same ; whereof the Subsidy, Poundage, customs or other Duties, shall be so formerly paid or compounded for as aforesaid, and so proved ; and the said customer or other Officer or Officers, to whom it shall in that Behalf appertain, for the Time being, by Virtue hereof, shall, upon due and sufficient Proof thereof, made in the Custom-house of or belonging to the same Port of London, give them sufficient Cocket or Certificate for the safe passing out thereof accordingly: And to the End no Deceit be used herein, to us, our Heirs or Successors, Certificate shall be brought from the collector of the custom Subsidy, Poundage or other Duties, inwards, of us, our Heirs or Successors, to the Collector of the Custom, Subsidy, Poundage or other Duties, outward, of us, our Heirs and Successors, that the said Goods, Wares, and Merchandizes, have, within the Time limited, answered their due custom, Subsidy, Poundage or other duties, for the same inwards: And moreover, we of our further especial Grace, certain Knowledge and mere Motion, have granted, and by these Presents, for us, our Heirs and Successors, do grant unto The said Governor and Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, that it shall and may be lawful for them, their Factors or Assigns, in their First Voyage or Fleet, which is now in preparing for their First Adventure to the said East-Indies, to transport out of this our Realm of England, all such foreign Coin of Silver, either Spanish or other foreign Silver, as they have procured, prepared and gotten, or shall procure, prepare or get, as likewise all such other Coin of Silver, as they have procured, or shall procure, to be coined in our Mint, within our Tower of London, out of such Plate or Bullion, as is or shall be provided, by The said Governor and Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, their Factors or Assigns before the going forth of the same Fleet in this their First Voyage, so as the whole Quantity of Coin, or Monies to be transported, in this their said First Voyage, do not exceed the Value or Sum of £30,000 Sterling, and so as the Sum of £6,000, at the least, parcel of the said Sum of £30,000, be first coined in our Mint, within our Tower of London, before the same shall be transported as aforesaid, any Law, Statute, Restraint or prohibition, in that behalf not withstanding : And in like Manner, of our like especial Grace, certain Knowledge and mere Motion, we have granted, and by these Presents, do for us, our Heirs and Successors, grant unto the said, Governor and Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, and their Successors, that it shall and may be lawful, to and for The said Governor and Company, and their Successors, after the said First Voyage, set forth yearly, for and during the Residue of the said Term of Fifteen Years, to ship and transport out of this our Realm of England, or Dominions of the same, in any their other Voyages, to or towards any the Parts, aforesaid, in Form afore-mentioned, all such foreign Coin of Silver, Spanish or other foreign Silver, or Bullion of Silver, as they shall, during the said Term, bring or cause to be brought into this Realm of England, from the Parts beyond the Seas, either in the same Kind, Sort, Stamp or Fashion, which it shall have when they bring it in, or any other Form, Stamp or Fashion, to be coined within our Mint, within our Tower of London, at their Pleasure ; so as the whole Quantity of Coin or Monies, by them to be transported, in any their said Voyages, during the Residue of the said Terms, do not exceed the Value or Sum of £30,000 in any One Voyage ; and so as the Sum of £6,000 at the least. Parcel of the said Sum or Value of £30,000, so to be transported as aforesaid, be first coined, within our said Tower of London, before the same shall be transported in any of the said Voyages, any law, Statute, Restraint or Prohibition, in that Behalf in anywise notwithstanding : And further we of our ample and abundant Grace, mere Motion and certain knowledge, have granted, and by these Presents, for us, our Heirs and Successors, do grant unto The said Governor and Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, and their Successors, that they and their Successors, and their Factors, Servants and Assigns, in the Trade of Merchandise, for them and on their Behalf, and not otherwise, shall, for the said Term of Fifteen Years, have, use, and enjoy, the whole entire and only Trade and Traffick, and the whole entire and only Liberty, Use and Privilege of trading and Trafficking, and using Feat and Trade of Merchandize to and from the said East-Indies, and to and from all the Islands, Ports, Havens, Cities, Towns and Places aforesaid, in such Manner and Form as is above mentioned : and that they The said Governor and Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies and every particular and several Person, that now is or that hereafter shall be of that Company, or Incorporation, shall have full and free Authority, Liberty, Faculty, License and Power, in Form aforesaid, to trade and traffick to and from the said East-Indies, and all and every the Parts thereof, in Form aforesaid, according to the Orders, Ordinances and Agreements hereafter to be made and agreed upon, by The said Governor and Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, and their Successors, or the more Part of them, present at any Court or Publick Assembly, of or for the said Company, the Governor of the said Company, or his Deputy for the Time being, being always present, at such Court or Assembly, and not otherwise : And for that the Ships, sailing into the said East-Indies, must take their due and proper Times, to proceed in their Voyages, which otherwise, as we well perceive, cannot be performed in the Rest of the Year following: Therefore we of our especial Grace, certain Knowledge and mere Motion, for us, our Heirs and Successors, do grant, to and with The said Governor and Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, and their Successors, that, in any Time of Restraint, Six good Ships and Six good Pinnaces, well furnished with Ordnance, and other Munition for their Defence, and Five Hundred Mariners, English Men, to guide and sail in the same Six Ships and Six Pinnaces, at all Times, during the said Term of Fifteen Years, shall quietly be permitted and suffered to depart, and go in the said Voyages, according to the purport of these presents, without any Stay or Contradiction, by us, our Heirs or Successors, or by the Lord High Admiral, or any other Officer or Subject of us, our Heirs or Successors, for the Time being, in any wise, any Restraint, Law, Statute, Usage or Matter whatsoever, to the contrary notwithstanding. Provided nevertheless, that if we shall, at any Time within the said Term of Fifteen Years, have just Cause to arm our Navy in Warlike Manner, in Defence of our Realm, or for Offence of our Enemies, or that it shall be found needful to join to the Navy of us, our Heirs or Successors, the Ships of our Subjects, to be also armed for the Wars, to such a Number as cannot be supplied, if the said Six Ships and Six Pinnaces should be permitted to depart, as above is mentioned, then upon Knowledge given, by us, our Heirs or Successors, or by our Admiral to The said Governor and Company, about the 20th Day of the Month of July, or Three Months before The said Governor and Company shall begin to make ready the same Six Ships and Six Pinnaces, that we may not spare the said Six Ships and Six Pinnaces, and the Mariners requisite for them, to be out of our Realm during the Time that our Navy shall be upon the Seas, that then the said Governor and Company shall forbear to send Six such Ships and Six Pinnaces, for their Trade and Merchandize, until that we shall revoke or withdraw our said Navy from the said Service :
and we of our further Royal Favour, and of our especial Grace, certain Knowledge and mere Motion, have granted, and by these Presents, for us, our Heirs and Successors, do grant to The said Governor and Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, and to their Successors that the said East-Indies, nor the Islands, Havens, Ports, Cities, Towns or Places thereof nor any part thereof shall not be visited, frequented or haunted by any of the Subjects of us, our Heirs or Successors, during the same Term of Fifteen Years, contrary to the true Meaning of these Presents : And by Virtue of our Prerogative Royal, which we will not in that behalf have argued, or brought in Question we straitly charge, command and prohibit, for us, our Heirs and Successors, all the Subjects of us, our Heirs and Successors, of what Degree or Quality soever they be, that none of them, directly or indirectly do visit, haunt, frequent or trade, traffick or adventure, by way of merchandise into or from any of the said East-Indies, or into or from any the Islands, Ports, Havens, Cities, Towns or Places aforesaid, other than the said Governor and Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, and such particular Persons as now be, or hereafter shall be of that Company, their Agents, Factors and Assigns during the said Term of Fifteen Years, unless it be by and with such License and Agreement of the said Governor and Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, in writing first had and obtained, under their Common Seal to be granted, upon Pain that every such Person or Persons that shall trade or traffick into or from any of the said East-Indies, other than the said Governor and Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, and their Successors, shall incur our Indignation, and the Forfeiture and Loss of the Goods, Merchandizes, and other Things whatever, which so shall be brought into this Realm of England, or any the Dominions of the same, contrary to our said Prohibition, or the Purport or true Meaning of these Presents, as also the Ship and Ships with the Furniture thereof, wherein such Goods, Merchandizes, or Things shall be brought; the One Half of all the said Forfeitures to be to us, our Heirs and Successors, and the other Half of all and every the said Forfeitures, we do, by these Presents, of our especial Grace, certain Knowledge and mere Motion, clearly and wholly for us, our Heirs and Successors, give, and grant unto The said Governor and Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies : And further all and every the said Offenders, for their said Contempt, to suffer Imprisonment during our Pleasure, and such other Punishment, as to us, our Heirs or Successors, for so high a Contempt, shall seem meet and convenient, and not to be in anywise delivered, until they and every of them shall become bound unto the said Governor for the Time being in the sum of £1,000 at the least, at no Time then after, during this Present Grant, to sail or traffick into any of the said East-Indies, contrary to our express Commandment in that Behalf herein set down and published: And further, for the better Encouragement of Merchants,' Strangers or others, to bring in Commodities into our Realm, we for us, our Heirs and Successors, do grant unto The said Governor and Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, that they and their Successors, may, from Time to Time, for any Consideration or Benefit, to be taken to their own Use, grant or give License, to any the Person or Persons to sail, trade or Traffic into or from any the said East-Indies, so as such License be granted or given, before such Goods. Wares and Merchandizes be laid on Land, and so as such License be made by the said Governor and Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, for the Time being, under their Common Seal : And further of our especial Grace, certain Knowledge and mere Motion, we have condescended and granted, and by these Presents, for us, our Heirs and Successors, we do condescend and grant unto The said Governor and Company of merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, and their Successors that we, our Heirs and Successors, during the said Term of fifteen Years, will not grant Liberty, License or Power to any Person or Persons whatsoever, contrary to the Tenor of these our Letters Patents, to sail, pass, trade or traffick, to the said East-Indies, or into or from the Islands, Ports, Havens, Cities, Towns or Places aforesaid, or any of them, contrary to the true Meaning of these Presents, without the Consent of The said Governor and Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, or the most Part of them : And our Will and Pleasure is, and hereby we do also ordain, that it shall and may be lawful, to and for The said Governor and Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, or the more Part of them, whereof the Governor for the Time being, or his Deputy, to be one, to admit into and to be of the said Company, all such Apprentices, to any of The said Fellowship or Company, and all such Servants and Factors, of and for the said Company, and all such other, as to them, or the most Part of them, present at any Court, held for the said Company, the Governor, or his Deputy, being one, shall be thought fit and agreeable, with the Orders and Ordinances to be made for the Government of the said Company. Provided always, that if any of the Persons, before named and appointed, by these Presents, to be free of The said Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, shall not before the going forth of the Fleet, appointed for this First Voyage, from the port of London, bring in and deliver to the Treasurer or Treasurers appointed, or which, within the Space of Twenty Days next after the Date hereof, shall be appointed, by the said Governor and Company, or the more Part of them, to receive the Contributions and Adventures, set down by the several Adventurers, in this last and present Voyage, now in hand, to be set forth, such Sums of Money as have been, by any of the said Persons, by these presents, nominated to be of the said Company, expressed, set down and written in a Book for that Purpose, and left in the Hands of the said Thomas Smith, Governor of the said Company, or of the said Paul Banning, Alderman of London, and subscribed with the Names of the same Adventurers, under their Hands, and agreed upon to be adventured in the said First Voyage, that then, it shall be lawful for The said Governor and Company, or the more Part of them, whereof the said Governor or his Deputy, to be one, at any their General Court, or General Assembly, to remove, disfranchise and displace him or them at their Wills and Pleasures. And the said Governor and Company, of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, for them and their Successors, do, by these Presents, covenant, promise and grant, to and with us, our Heirs and Successors, that they The said Governor and Company, and their Successors, in all and every such Voyages, as they at any Time or Times hereafter, during the said Term, shall make out of this Realm, by Virtue of this our Grant and Letters Patents, the First Voyage only excepted, shall and will, upon every Return which shall be made back again into this Realm, or any of our Dominions, or within Six Months next after every such Return, bring into this our Realm of England, from the said East-Indies, or from some other Parts, beyond the Seas, out of our Dominions as great or greater Value in Bullion of Gold or Silver, or other foreign Coin of Gold or Silver, respectively, for every Voyage, the First Voyage only excepted, as shall be by Force of these Presents transported and carried out of this Realm, by them or any of them, in any Kind of Silver above said whatsoever, in any of the said Voyages ; and that all such Silver, as by Virtue of this our Grant and Letters Patents, shall be shipped or laden by The said Governor and Company, or their Successors, to be transported out of this Realm, in any of the said Voyages, shall from Time to Time, at the setting forth of every such particular Voyage, be shipped and laden at the Ports or Havens of London, Dartmouth, or Plymouth, or at some of the same Ports or Havens, and at no other Port or Haven whatsoever, within this our Realm, or the Dominions thereof ; and that all and every such Silver, as from Time to Time shall be shipped and laden in the said Ports of London, Dartmouth, or Plymouth, or any of them, to be by Force of these Presents transported out of this Realm, as is aforesaid shall from Time to Time be duly entered by the Customer, Controller, Collector or other Officer to whom it shall appertain, of every such Port or Haven, where the same shall happen to be shipped or laden, in the Custom-Book belonging to the said Port or Haven, before such Time as the same shall be shipped or laden, to be transported as is aforesaid, without any Custom or Subsidy, to be paid for the same ; and that in like Manner, all and all Manner of Gold and Silver whatsoever which shall be brought into this Realm, or any of our Dominions, by The said Governor and Company, or any of them, according to the true Meaning of these Presents, shall likewise be, from Time to Time, duly entered by the Customer, Controller, or other Officer of every such Port, Creek or Place, where the same Gold or Silver shall happen to de unshipped, or brought to Land, before such Time as the same Gold or Silver or any Part thereof, shall be unshipped or brought to Land, as is aforesaid. Provided always, nevertheless, and our Will and Pleasure is, that these our Letters Patents, or any Thing therein contained, shall not in any Sort extend to give or grant any License, Power or Authority unto The said Governor and Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, or to any of them to undertake or address any Trade unto any Country, Port, Island, Haven, City, Creek, Town or Place, being already in the lawful and actual Possession of any such Christian Prince or State, as at this present is, or at any Time hereafter shall be in League or Amity, with us, our Heirs or Successors, and which doth not, or will not accept of such Trade, but doth overtly declare and publish the same, to be utterly against his or their Good-Will and Liking, any Thing before in these presents contained, to the contrary thereof notwithstanding. Provided also, that if it shall, hereafter appear to us, our Heirs or Successors, that this Grant or the Continuance thereof, in the Whole or in any Part thereof, shall not be profitable to us, our Heirs and Successors, or to this our Realm, that then,' and from thenceforth, upon and after Two Years Warning, to be given to the said Company, by us, our Heirs or Successors, under our or their Privy Seal, or Sign Manual, this present Grant shall cease, be void and determined, to all Intents, Constructions and Purposes : And further of our especial Grace, certain Knowledge and mere Motion, we have condescended and granted, and by these Presents for us our Heirs and Successors, do condescend and grant to The said Governor and Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, and their Successors that if at the End of the said Term of Fifteen Years, it shall seem meet and Convenient unto The said Governor and Company, or any the Parties aforesaid, that this present Grant shall be continued, and if that also it shall appear unto us, our Heirs and Successors, that the Continuance thereof shall not be prejudicial or hurtful to this our Realm, but that we shall find the further Continuance thereof profitable for us, our Heirs and Successors, and for our Realm, with such Conditions as are herein mentioned, or with some Alteration or Qualification thereof, that then we, our Heirs or Successors, at the Instance and humble Petition of The said Governor and Company, or any of them, to be made unto us, our Heirs and Successors, will grant and make unto The said Governor and Company, or any of them, so suing for the same ; and such other Person and Persons, our Subjects, as they shall nominate and appoint, or shall be by us, our Heirs or Successors, newly nominated, not exceeding in Number Twenty-Four, new Letters Patents, under the Great Seal of England, in due Form of Law, with the like Covenants, Grants, Clauses and Articles, as in these Presents are contained, or with Addition of other necessary Articles, or changing of these into some other Pa4ts, for and during the full Term of Fifteen Years, then next following ; willing hereby and straitly charging and commanding all and singular our Admirals, Vice-Admirals Justices, Mayors, Sheriffs, Escheators, Constables, Bailiffs, and all and singular other our Officers, Ministers, Liege Men and Subjects whatsoever, to be aiding, favouring helping and assisting unto The said Governor and Company, and to their Successors, and to their Deputies, Officers, Factors, Servants Assigns and Ministers and every of them, in executing and enjoying the Premises, as well on Land as on Sea, from Time to Time, when you or any of you shall thereunto be required, any Statue, Act, Ordinance, Proviso, Proclamation or Restraint, heretofore had, made, set forth, ordained, or provided, or any other Matter, Cause or Thing whatsoever, to the contrary in any way notwithstanding ; although express Mention of the true yearly Value or Certainty of the Premises, or of any of them, or of any other Gifts or Grants, by us, or any of our Progenitors, to the said Governor and. Company of Merchants of London, Trading into the East-Indies, or to any of them, before this Time made, in these Presents is not made, or any Statute, Act, Ordinance, Provision Proclamation or Restraint, to the contrary heretofore had made, ordained or provided, or any other Thing, Cause or Matter whatsoever, in any wise notwithstanding. In Witness whereof, we have caused these our Letters to be made Patents: Witness Ourself, at Westminster, the Thirty-first Day of December, in the Three and Fortieth Year of our Reign.
Shaw, John. Charters relating to the East India Company from 1600-1761. Madras: Madras Government Press, 1887. pp. 1-15.
Colonel Clive to the Secret Committee of the Directors, 26 July 1757
Robert Clive, 1st Baron Clive
I gave you an account of the taking of Chandernagore; the subject of this address is an event of much higher importance, no less than the entire overthrow of Nabob Suraj-u-Dowlah, and the placing of Meer Jaffier on the throne. I intimated, in my last, how dilatory Suraj-u-Dowlah appeared in fulfilling the articles of the treaty. This disposition not only continued but increased, and we discovered that he was designing our ruin, by a conjunction with the French. To this end Monsieur Bussy was pressingly invited to come into this province, and Monsieur Law of Cossimbazar (who before had been privately entertained in his service) was ordered to return from Patna.
About this time some of his principal officers made overtures to us for dethroning him. At the head of these was Meer Jaffier, then Bukhshee to the army, a man as generally esteemed as the other was detested. As we had reason to believe this disaffection pretty general, we soon entered into engagements with Meer Jaffier to put the crown on his head. All necessary preparations being completed with the utmost secrecy, the army, consisting of about one thousand Europeans, and two thousand sepoys, with eight pieces of cannon, marched from Chandernagore on the 13th, and arrived on the 18th at Cutwa Fort, which was taken without opposition. The 22nd, in the evening, we crossed the river, and landing on the island, marched straight for Plassey Grove, Where we arrived by one in the morning. At daybreak, we discovered the Nabob's army moving towards us, consisting, as we since found, of about fifteen thousand horse, and thirty-five thousand foot, with upwards of forty pieces of cannon. They approached apace, and by six began to attack with a number of heavy cannon, supported by the whole army, and continued to play on us very briskly for several hours, during which our situation was of the utmost service to us, being lodged in a large grove, with good mud banks. To succeed in an attempt on their cannon was next to impossible, as they were planted in a manner round us, and at considerable distances from each other. We therefore remained quiet in our post, in expectation of a successful attack upon their camp at night. About noon, the enemy drew off their artillery, and retired to their camp, being the same which Roy Dullub had left but a few days before, and which be had fortified with a good ditch and breastwork. We immediately sent a detachment, accompanied with two field-pieces, to take possession of a tank with high banks, which was advanced about three hundred yards above our grove, and from whence the enemy had considerably annoyed us with some cannon managed by Frenchmen. This motion brought them out a second time; but on finding them make no great effort to dislodge us, we proceeded to take possession of one or two more eminences lying very near an angle of their camp, from whence, and an adjacent eminence in their, possession, they kept a smart fire of musketry upon us. They made several attempts to bring out their cannon, but our advanced field-pieces played so warmly and so well upon them, that they were always drove back. Their horse exposing themselves a good deal on this occasion, many of them were killed, and among the rest four or five officers of the first distinction, by which the whole army being visibly dispirited and thrown into some confusion, we were encouraged to storm both the eminence and the angle of their camp, which were carried at the same instant, with little or no loss; though the latter was defended (exclusive of blacks) by forty French and two pieces of cannon; and the former by a large body of blacks, both foot and horse. On this, a general rout ensued, and we pursued the enemy six miles, passing upwards of forty pieces of cannon they had abandoned, with an infinite number of hackeries, and carriages filled with baggage of all kinds. Suraj-u-Dowlah escaped on a camel, and reaching Moorshedabad early next morning, dispatched away what jewels and treasure he conveniently could, and he himself followed at midnight, with only two or three attendants.
It is computed there are killed of the enemy about five hundred. Our loss amounted to only twenty-two killed, and fifty wounded, and those chiefly blacks. During the warmest part of the action we observed a large body of troops hovering on our right, which proved to be our friends; but as they never discovered themselves by any signal whatsoever, we frequently fired on them to make them keep their distance. When the battle was over, they sent a congratulatory message, and encamped in our neighbourhood that night. The next morning Meer Jaffier paid me a visit, and expressed much gratitude at the service done him, assuring me, in the most solemn manner, that he would faithfully perform his engagement to the English. He then proceeded to the city, which he reached some hours before Suraj-u-Dowlah left it.
As, immediately on Suraj-u-Dowlah's flight, Meer Jaffier found himself in peaceable possession of the palace and. city, I encamped without, to prevent the inhabitants from being plundered or disturbed; first at Maudipoor, and afterwards at the French factory at Sydabad. However, I sent forward Messrs. Watts, and Walsh to inquire into the state of the treasury, and inform me what was transacted at the palace. By their representations I soon found it necessary for me to be present, on many accounts; accordingly, I entered the city on the 29th, with a guard of two hundred Europeans and three hundred sepoys, and, took up my quarters in a spacious house and garden near the palace. The same evening I waited on Meer Jaffier, who refused seating himself on the musnud till placed on it by me; which done, he received homage as Nabob from all his courtiers. The next morning he returned my visit; when, after a good deal of discourse on the situation of his affairs, I recommended him to consult Jugget Seit on all occasions, who being a man of sense, and having by far the greatest property among all his subjects, would give him the best advice for settling the kingdom in peace and security.
On this, he proposed that we should immediately set out together to visit him, which being complied with, solemn engagements were entered into by the three parties, for a strict union and mutual support of each other's interests. Jugget Seit then undertook to use his whole interest at Delhi (which is certainly very great), to get the Nabob acknowledged by the Mogul, and our late grants confirmed; likewise to procure for us any firmans we might have occasion for.
The substance of the treaty with the present Nabob is as follows:
1st. Confirmation of the mint, and all other grants and privileges in the treaty with the late Nabob.
2ndly. An alliance, offensive and defensive, against all enemies whatever.
3rdly. The French factories and effects to be delivered up, and they never permitted to resettle in any of the three provinces.
4thly. 100 lacs of rupees to be paid to the Company, in consideration of their losses at Calcutta and the expenses of the campaign.
5thly. 50 lacs to be given to the English sufferers at the loss of Calcutta.
6thly. 20 lacs to Gentoos, Moors, &c., black sufferers at the loss of Calcutta.
7thly. 7 lacs to the Armenian sufferers. These three last donations to be distributed at the pleasure of the Admiral and gentlemen of Council, including me.
8thly. The entire property of all lands within the Mahratta ditch, which runs round Calcutta, to be vested in the Company: also, six hundred yards, all round, without, the said ditch.
9thly. The Company to have the zemindary of the country to the south of Calcutta, lying between the lake and river, and reaching as far as Culpee, they paying the customary rents paid by the former zemindars to the government.
10thly. Whenever the assistance of the English troops shall be wanted, their extraordinary charges to be paid by the Nabob.
11thly. No forts to be erected by the government on the river side, from Hooghley downwards.
12thly. The foregoing articles to be performed without delay, as soon as Meer Jaffier becomes Subadar.
On examining the treasury, there were found about 150 lacs of rupees, which being too little to answer our demands, much less leave a sufficiency for the Nabob's necessary
disbursements, it was referred to Jugget Seit, as a mutual friend, to settle what payment should be made to us; who accordingly determined, that we should immediately receive one half of our demand, two thirds in money and one third in gold and silver plate, jewels, and goods; and that the other half should be discharged in three years, at three equal and annual payments. The part to be paid in ready money, is received and safely arrived at Calcutta; and the goods, jewels, &c., are now delivered over to us; the major part of which will be bought back by the Nabob for ready money, and on the remaining there will be little or no loss. A large proportion was proposed to have been paid us in jewels; but as they are not a very saleable article, we got the amount reduced one half, and the difference to be made up in. money.
It is impossible as yet to form a judgement how much the granted lands will produce you, as the Europeans are quite ignorant of the extent of the country between the river and lake; but, in order to give you some idea of the value, I'll venture to estimate it at ten lacs per annum. An officer on the part of the Nabob is already dispatched to Calcutta to begin the survey, in company with one of ours.
Suraj-u-Dowlah was not discovered till some days after his flight; however, he was at last taken in the neighbourhood of Rajahmahul, and brought to Moorshedabad on the 2nd inst., late at night. He was immediately cut off by order of the Nabob's son, and (as it is said) without the father's knowledge. Next morning the Nabob paid me a visit, and thought it necessary to palliate the matter on motives of policy; for that Suraj-u-Dowlah had wrote letters on the road to many of the zemindars of the army, and occasioned some commotions, among them in his favour.
Monsieur Law and his party came as far as Rajahmah-ul to Suraj-u-Dowlah's assistance, and were within three hours' march of him when he was taken. As soon as they heard of his misfortunes, they returned by forced marches; and, by the last advices, had passed, by Patna, on the other side of the river. A party of Europeans and sepoys were quickly dispatched after them; but I am doubtful if we shall be able to overtake them before they get out of the Nabob's dominions. Strong letters have been wrote from the Nabob to the Naib of Patna, to distress them all in his power, and to take them prisoners if possible. A compliance with which I am in anxious expectation of.
I ought to observe, that the French I spoke of in the action were some fugitives from Chandernagore, who had assembled at Sydabad. It was by their advice, and indeed by their hands, that the English factory at Cossimbazar was burned and destroyed, after our gentlemen had quitted it on the renewal of the troubles.
The present Nabob has every appearance of being firmly and durably seated on the throne. The whole country has quietly submitted to him, and even the apprehension of an inroad from the side of Delhi is vanished; so that this great revolution, so happily brought about, seems complete in every respect. I persuade myself the importance of your possessions now in Bengal will determine you to send out, not only a large and early supply of troops and good officers, but of capable young gentlemen for the civil branches of your business.
Keith, Arthur B. Speeches & Documents on Indian Policy, 1750-1921. London: Oxford University Press, 1922. pp. 6-13.
Minute on Education by Thomas Babington Macaulay, 1835
Thomas Babington Macaulay, 1st Baron Macaulay
Thomas Babbington Macaulay's “Minute on Education” (2 February 1835) is a powerful illustration of notions of Western (white superiority) over colonial subjects. It also reflects the belief in Western, and moreover Christian, responsibility to bring ‘improvement’ to native peoples; best known as the Civilizing Mission. Renowned for his literary and rhetorical skills and speaking from experience after having served on the East India Company’s supreme council (1834-8), in this Minute Macaulay challenges the allocation of money for native students in higher education. At the time, controversy existed between the orientalists (favoring Sanskrit and Arabic) and those who advocated the Anglicization of Indian students. Macaulay dismissed the value of Indian vernacular languages such as Sanskrit and Arabic as being inadequate in both conveying fine literature and more importantly, modern scientific thought. He also argued that these languages, apart from being regressive, weren’t held in esteem among the Indian people.
In this Minute Macaulay argues the superiority of English language as both a means of education and for the general improvement of Indian society. Macaulay wrote, “We must at present do our best to form a class who may be interpreters between us and the millions whom we govern; a class of persons, Indian in blood and colour, but English in taste, in opinions, in morals, and in intellect.” According to Macaulay, this educated class could then be tasked with helping to refine and enrich the Indian vernacular.
Macaulay spoke neither Sanskrit nor Arabic but did spend four years Calcutta. It was during this ‘exile’ in India that Macaulay made the greatest impact on the British administration of India, in relation to education and legal reforms.
Scholars of imperial and/or South Asian history view this Minute as significant as it signifies the consolidation of the use of the English as the language of the British Empire.
Minute by the Hon'ble T. B. Macaulay, dated the 2nd February 1835
[1] As it seems to be the opinion of some of the gentlemen who compose the Committee of Public Instruction that the course which they have hitherto pursued was strictly prescribed by the British Parliament in 1813 and as, if that opinion be correct, a legislative act will be necessary to warrant a change, I have thought it right to refrain from taking any part in the preparation of the adverse statements which are.now before us, and to reserve what I had to say on the subject till it should come before me as a Member of the Council of India.
[2] It does not appear to me that the Act of Parliament can by any art of contraction be made to bear the meaning which has been assigned to it. It contains nothing about the particular languages or sciences which are to be studied. A sum is set apart "for the revival and promotion of literature, and the encouragement of the learned natives of India, and for the introduction and promotion of a knowledge of the sciences among the inhabitants of the British territories." It is argued, or rather taken for granted, that by literature the Parliament can have meant only Arabic and Sanscrit literature; that they never would have given the honourable appellation of "a learned native" to a native who was familiar with the poetry of Milton, the metaphysics of Locke, and the physics of Newton; but that they meant to designate by that name only such persons as might have studied in the sacred books of the Hindoos all the uses of cusa-grass, and all the mysteries of absorption into the Deity. This does not appear to be a very satisfactory interpretation. To take a parallel case: Suppose that the Pacha of Egypt, a country once superior in knowledge to the nations of Europe, but now sunk far below them, were to appropriate a sum for the purpose "of reviving and promoting literature, and encouraging learned natives of Egypt," would any body infer that he meant the youth of his Pachalik to give years to the study of hieroglyphics, to search into all the doctrines disguised under the fable of Osiris, and to ascertain with all possible accuracy the ritual with which cats and onions were anciently adored? Would he be justly charged with inconsistency if, instead of employing his young subjects in deciphering obelisks, he were to order them to be instructed in the English and French languages, and in all the sciences to which those languages are the chief keys?
[3] The words on which the supporters of the old system rely do not bear them out, and other words follow which seem to be quite decisive on the other side. This lakh of rupees is set apart not only for "reviving literature in India," the phrase on which their whole interpretation is founded, but also "for the introduction and promotion of a knowledge of the sciences among the inhabitants of the British territories"-- words which are alone sufficient to authorize all the changes for which I contend.
[4] If the Council agree in my construction no legislative act will be necessary. If they differ from me, I will propose a short act rescinding that I clause of the Charter of 1813 from which the difficulty arises.
[5] The argument which I have been considering affects only the form of proceeding. But the admirers of the oriental system of education have used another argument, which, if we admit it to be valid, is decisive against all change. They conceive that the public faith is pledged to the present system, and that to alter the appropriation of any of the funds which have hitherto been spent in encouraging the study of Arabic and Sanscrit would be downright spoliation. It is not easy to understand by what process of reasoning they can have arrived at this conclusion. The grants which are made from the public purse for the encouragement of literature differ in no respect from the grants which are made from the same purse for other objects of real or supposed utility. We found a sanitarium on a spot which we suppose to be healthy. Do we thereby pledge ourselves to keep a sanitarium there if the result should not answer our expectations? We commence the erection of a pier. Is it a violation of the public faith to stop the works, if we afterwards see reason to believe that the building will be useless? The rights of property are undoubtedly sacred. But nothing endangers those rights so much as the practice, now unhappily too common, of attributing them to things to which they do not belong. Those who would impart to abuses the sanctity of property are in truth imparting to the institution of property the unpopularity and the fragility of abuses. If the Government has given to any person a formal assurance-- nay, if the Government has excited in any person's mind a reasonable expectation-- that he shall receive a certain income as a teacher or a learner of Sanscrit or Arabic, I would respect that person's pecuniary interests. I would rather err on the side of liberality to individuals than suffer the public faith to be called in question. But to talk of a Government pledging itself to teach certain languages and certain sciences, though those languages may become useless, though those sciences may be exploded, seems to me quite unmeaning. There is not a single word in any public instrument from which it can be inferred that the Indian Government ever intended to give any pledge on this subject, or ever considered the destination of these funds as unalterably fixed. But, had it been otherwise, I should have denied the competence of our predecessors to bind us by any pledge on such a subject. Suppose that a Government had in the last century enacted in the most solemn manner that all its subjects should, to the end of time, be inoculated for the small-pox, would that Government be bound to persist in the practice after Jenner's discovery? These promises of which nobody claims the performance, and from which nobody can grant a release, these vested rights which vest in nobody, this property without proprietors, this robbery which makes nobody poorer, may be comprehended by persons of higher faculties than mine. I consider this plea merely as a set form of words, regularly used both in England and in India, in defence of every abuse for which no other plea can be set up.
[6] I hold this lakh of rupees to be quite at the disposal of the Governor-General in Council for the purpose of promoting learning in India in any way which may be thought most advisable. I hold his Lordship to be quite as free to direct that it shall no longer be employed in encouraging Arabic and Sanscrit, as he is to direct that the reward for killing tigers in Mysore shall be diminished, or that no more public money shall be expended on the chaunting at the cathedral.
[7] We now come to the gist of the matter. We have a fund to be employed as Government shall direct for the intellectual improvement of the people of this country. The simple question is, what is the most useful way of employing it?
[8] All parties seem to be agreed on one point, that the dialects commonly spoken among the natives of this part of India contain neither literary nor scientific information, and are moreover so poor and rude that, until they are enriched from some other quarter, it will not be easy to translate any valuable work into them. It seems to be admitted on all sides, that the intellectual improvement of those classes of the people who have the means of pursuing higher studies can at present be affected only by means of some language not vernacular amongst them.
[9] What then shall that language be? One-half of the committee maintain that it should be the English. The other half strongly recommend the Arabic and Sanscrit. The whole question seems to me to be-- which language is the best worth knowing?
[10] I have no knowledge of either Sanscrit or Arabic. But I have done what I could to form a correct estimate of their value. I have read translations of the most celebrated Arabic and Sanscrit works. I have conversed, both here and at home, with men distinguished by their proficiency in the Eastern tongues. I am quite ready to take the oriental learning at the valuation of the orientalists themselves. I have never found one among them who could deny that a single shelf of a good European library was worth the whole native literature of India and Arabia. The intrinsic superiority of the Western literature is indeed fully admitted by those members of the committee who support the oriental plan of education.
[11] It will hardly be disputed, I suppose, that the department of literature in which the Eastern writers stand highest is poetry. And I certainly never met with any orientalist who ventured to maintain that the Arabic and Sanscrit poetry could be compared to that of the great European nations. But when we pass from works of imagination to works in which facts are recorded and general principles investigated, the superiority of the Europeans becomes absolutely immeasurable. It is, I believe, no exaggeration to say that all the historical information which has been collected from all the books written in the Sanscrit language is less valuable than what may be found in the most paltry abridgments used at preparatory schools in England. In every branch of physical or moral philosophy, the relative position of the two nations is nearly the same.
[12] How then stands the case? We have to educate a people who cannot at present be educated by means of their mother-tongue. We must teach them some foreign language. The claims of our own language it is hardly necessary to recapitulate. It stands pre-eminent even among the languages of the West. It abounds with works of imagination not inferior to the noblest which Greece has bequeathed to us, --with models of every species of eloquence, --with historical composition, which, considered merely as narratives, have seldom been surpassed, and which, considered as vehicles of ethical and political instruction, have never been equaled-- with just and lively representations of human life and human nature, --with the most profound speculations on metaphysics, morals, government, jurisprudence, trade, --with full and correct information respecting every experimental science which tends to preserve the health, to increase the comfort, or to expand the intellect of man. Whoever knows that language has ready access to all the vast intellectual wealth which all the wisest nations of the earth have created and hoarded in the course of ninety generations. It may safely be said that the literature now extant in that language is of greater value than all the literature which three hundred years ago was extant in all the languages of the world together. Nor is this all. In India, English is the language spoken by the ruling class. It is spoken by the higher class of natives at the seats of Government. It is likely to become the language of commerce throughout the seas of the East. It is the language of two great European communities which are rising, the one in the south of Africa, the other in Australia, --communities which are every year becoming more important and more closely connected with our Indian empire. Whether we look at the intrinsic value of our literature, or at the particular situation of this country, we shall see the strongest reason to think that, of all foreign tongues, the English tongue is that which would be the most useful to our native subjects.
[13] The question now before us is simply whether, when it is in our power to teach this language, we shall teach languages in which, by universal confession, there are no books on any subject which deserve to be compared to our own, whether, when we can teach European science, we shall teach systems which, by universal confession, wherever they differ from those of Europe differ for the worse, and whether, when we can patronize sound philosophy and true history, we shall countenance, at the public expense, medical doctrines which would disgrace an English farrier, astronomy which would move laughter in girls at an English boarding school, history abounding with kings thirty feet high and reigns thirty thousand years long, and geography made of seas of treacle and seas of butter.
[14] We are not without experience to guide us. History furnishes several analogous cases, and they all teach the same lesson. There are, in modern times, to go no further, two memorable instances of a great impulse given to the mind of a whole society, of prejudices overthrown, of knowledge diffused, of taste purified, of arts and sciences planted in countries which had recently been ignorant and barbarous.
[15] The first instance to which I refer is the great revival of letters among the Western nations at the close of the fifteenth and the beginning of the sixteenth century. At that time almost everything that was worth reading was contained in the writings of the ancient Greeks and Romans. Had our ancestors acted as the Committee of Public Instruction has hitherto noted, had they neglected the language of Thucydides and Plato, and the language of Cicero and Tacitus, had they confined their attention to the old dialects of our own island, had they printed nothing and taught nothing at the universities but chronicles in Anglo-Saxon and romances in Norman French, --would England ever have been what she now is? What the Greek and Latin were to the contemporaries of More and Ascham, our tongue is to the people of India. The literature of England is now more valuable than that of classical antiquity. I doubt whether the Sanscrit literature be as valuable as that of our Saxon and Norman progenitors. In some departments-- in history for example-- I am certain that it is much less so.
[16] Another instance may be said to be still before our eyes. Within the last hundred and twenty years, a nation which had previously been in a state as barbarous as that in which our ancestors were before the Crusades has gradually emerged from the ignorance in which it was sunk, and has taken its place among civilized communities. I speak of Russia. There is now in that country a large educated class abounding with persons fit to serve the State in the highest functions, and in nowise inferior to the most accomplished men who adorn the best circles of Paris and London. There is reason to hope that this vast empire which, in the time of our grandfathers, was probably behind the Punjab, may in the time of our grandchildren, be pressing close on France and Britain in the career of improvement. And how was this change effected? Not by flattering national prejudices; not by feeding the mind of the young Muscovite with the old women's stories which his rude fathers had believed; not by filling his head with lying legends about St. Nicholas; not by encouraging him to study the great question, whether the world was or not created on the 13th of September; not by calling him "a learned native" when he had mastered all these points of knowledge; but by teaching him those foreign languages in which the greatest mass of information had been laid up, and thus putting all that information within his reach. The languages of western Europe civilised Russia. I cannot doubt that they will do for the Hindoo what they have done for the Tartar.
[17] And what are the arguments against that course which seems to be alike recommended by theory and by experience? It is said that we ought to secure the co-operation of the native public, and that we can do this only by teaching Sanscrit and Arabic.
[18] I can by no means admit that, when a nation of high intellectual attainments undertakes to superintend the education of a nation comparatively ignorant, the learners are absolutely to prescribe the course which is to be taken by the teachers. It is not necessary however to say anything on this subject. For it is proved by unanswerable evidence, that we are not at present securing the co-operation of the natives. It would be bad enough to consult their intellectual taste at the expense of their intellectual health. But we are consulting neither. We are withholding from them the learning which is palatable to them. We are forcing on them the mock learning which they nauseate.
[19] This is proved by the fact that we are forced to pay our Arabic and Sanscrit students while those who learn English are willing to pay us. All the declamations in the world about the love and reverence of the natives for their sacred dialects will never, in the mind of any impartial person, outweigh this undisputed fact, that we cannot find in all our vast empire a single student who will let us teach him those dialects, unless we will pay him.
[20] I have now before me the accounts of the Mudrassa for one month, the month of December, 1833. The Arabic students appear to have been seventy-seven in number. All receive stipends from the public. The whole amount paid to them is above 500 rupees a month. On the other side of the account stands the following item:
Deduct amount realized from the out-students of English for the months of May, June, and July last-- 103 rupees.
[21] I have been told that it is merely from want of local experience that I am surprised at these phenomena, and that it is not the fashion for students in India to study at their own charges. This only confirms me in my opinions. Nothing is more certain than that it never can in any part of the world be necessary to pay men for doing what they think pleasant or profitable. India is no exception to this rule. The people of India do not require to be paid for eating rice when they are hungry, or for wearing woollen cloth in the cold season. To come nearer to the case before us: --The children who learn their letters and a little elementary arithmetic from the village schoolmaster are not paid by him. He is paid for teaching them. Why then is it necessary to pay people to learn Sanscrit and Arabic? Evidently because it is universally felt that the Sanscrit and Arabic are languages the knowledge of which does not compensate for the trouble of acquiring them. On all such subjects the state of the market is the detective test.
[22] Other evidence is not wanting, if other evidence were required. A petition was presented last year to the committee by several ex-students of the Sanscrit College. The petitioners stated that they had studied in the college ten or twelve years, that they had made themselves acquainted with Hindoo literature and science, that they had received certificates of proficiency. And what is the fruit of all this? "Notwithstanding such testimonials," they say, "we have but little prospect of bettering our condition without the kind assistance of your honourable committee, the indifference with which we are generally looked upon by our countrymen leaving no hope of encouragement and assistance from them." They therefore beg that they may be recommended to the Governor-General for places under the Government-- not places of high dignity or emolument, but such as may just enable them to exist. "We want means," they say, "for a decent living, and for our progressive improvement, which, however, we cannot obtain without the assistance of Government, by whom we have been educated and maintained from childhood." They conclude by representing very pathetically that they are sure that it was never the intention of Government, after behaving so liberally to them during their education, to abandon them to destitution and neglect.
[23] I have been used to see petitions to Government for compensation. All those petitions, even the most unreasonable of them, proceeded on the supposition that some loss had been sustained, that some wrong had been inflicted. These are surely the first petitioners who ever demanded compensation for having been educated gratis, for having been supported by the public during twelve years, and then sent forth into the world well furnished with literature and science. They represent their education as an injury which gives them a claim on the Government for redress, as an injury for which the stipends paid to them during the infliction were a very inadequate compensation. And I doubt not that they are in the right. They have wasted the best years of life in learning what procures for them neither bread nor respect. Surely we might with advantage have saved the cost of making these persons useless and miserable. Surely, men may be brought up to be burdens to the public and objects of contempt to their neighbours at a somewhat smaller charge to the State. But such is our policy. We do not even stand neuter in the contest between truth and falsehood. We are not content to leave the natives to the influence of their own hereditary prejudices. To the natural difficulties which obstruct the progress of sound science in the East, we add great difficulties of our own making. Bounties and premiums, such as ought not to be given even for the propagation of truth, we lavish on false texts and false philosophy.
[24] By acting thus we create the very evil which we fear. We are making that opposition which we do not find. What we spend on the Arabic and Sanscrit Colleges is not merely a dead loss to the cause of truth. It is bounty-money paid to raise up champions of error. It goes to form a nest not merely of helpless placehunters but of bigots prompted alike by passion and by interest to raise a cry against every useful scheme of education. If there should be any opposition among the natives to the change which I recommend, that opposition will be the effect of our own system. It will be headed by persons supported by our stipends and trained in our colleges. The longer we persevere in our present course, the more formidable will that opposition be. It will be every year reinforced by recruits whom we are paying. From the native society, left to itself, we have no difficulties to apprehend. All the murmuring will come from that oriental interest which we have, by artificial means, called into being and nursed into strength.
[25] There is yet another fact which is alone sufficient to prove that the feeling of the native public, when left to itself, is not such as the supporters of the old system represent it to be. The committee have thought fit to lay out above a lakh of rupees in printing Arabic and Sanscrit books. Those books find no purchasers. It is very rarely that a single copy is disposed of. Twenty-three thousand volumes, most of them folios and quartos, fill the libraries or rather the lumber-rooms of this body. The committee contrive to get rid of some portion of their vast stock of oriental literature by giving books away. But they cannot give so fast as they print. About twenty thousand rupees a year are spent in adding fresh masses of waste paper to a hoard which, one should think, is already sufficiently ample. During the last three years about sixty thousand rupees have been expended in this manner. The sale of Arabic and Sanscrit books during those three years has not yielded quite one thousand rupees. In the meantime, the School Book Society is selling seven or eight thousand English volumes every year, and not only pays the expenses of printing but realizes a profit of twenty per cent. on its outlay.
[30] The fact that the Hindoo law is to be learned chiefly from Sanscrit books, and the Mahometan law from Arabic books, has been much insisted on, but seems not to bear at all on the question. We are commanded by Parliament to ascertain and digest the laws of India. The assistance of a Law Commission has been given to us for that purpose. As soon as the Code is promulgated the Shasters and the Hedaya will be useless to a moonsiff or a Sudder Ameen. I hope and trust that, before the boys who are now entering at the Mudrassa and the Sanscrit College have completed their studies, this great work will be finished. It would be manifestly absurd to educate the rising generation with a view to a state of things which we mean to alter before they reach manhood.
[31] But there is yet another argument which seems even more untenable. It is said that the Sanscrit and the Arabic are the languages in which the sacred books of a hundred millions of people are written, and that they are on that account entitled to peculiar encouragement. Assuredly it is the duty of the British Government in India to be not only tolerant but neutral on all religious questions. But to encourage the study of a literature, admitted to be of small intrinsic value, only because that literature inculcated the most serious errors on the most important subjects, is a course hardly reconcilable with reason, with morality, or even with that very neutrality which ought, as we all agree, to be sacredly preserved. It is confined that a language is barren of useful knowledge. We are to teach it because it is fruitful of monstrous superstitions. We are to teach false history, false astronomy, false medicine, because we find them in company with a false religion. We abstain, and I trust shall always abstain, from giving any public encouragement to those who are engaged in the work of converting the natives to Christianity. And while we act thus, can we reasonably or decently bribe men, out of the revenues of the State, to waste their youth in learning how they are to purify themselves after touching an ass or what texts of the Vedas they are to repeat to expiate the crime of killing a goat?
[32] It is taken for granted by the advocates of oriental learning that no native of this country can possibly attain more than a mere smattering of English. They do not attempt to prove this. But they perpetually insinuate it. They designate the education which their opponents recommend as a mere spelling-book education. They assume it as undeniable that the question is between a profound knowledge of Hindoo and Arabian literature and science on the one side, and superficial knowledge of the rudiments of English on the other. This is not merely an assumption, but an assumption contrary to all reason and experience. We know that foreigners of all nations do learn our language sufficiently to have access to all the most abstruse knowledge which it contains sufficiently to relish even the more delicate graces of our most idiomatic writers. There are in this very town natives who are quite competent to discuss political or scientific questions with fluency and precision in the English language. I have heard the very question on which I am now writing discussed by native gentlemen with a liberality and an intelligence which would do credit to any member of the Committee of Public Instruction. Indeed it is unusual to find, even in the literary circles of the Continent, any foreigner who can express himself in English with so much facility and correctness as we find in many Hindoos. Nobody, I suppose, will contend that English is so difficult to a Hindoo as Greek to an Englishman. Yet an intelligent English youth, in a much smaller number of years than our unfortunate pupils pass at the Sanscrit College, becomes able to read, to enjoy, and even to imitate not unhappily the compositions of the best Greek authors. Less than half the time which enables an English youth to read Herodotus and Sophocles ought to enable a Hindoo to read Hume and Milton.
[33] To sum up what I have said. I think it clear that we are not fettered by the Act of Parliament of 1813, that we are not fettered by any pledge expressed or implied, that we are free to employ our funds as we choose, that we ought to employ them in teaching what is best worth knowing, that English is better worth knowing than Sanscrit or Arabic, that the natives are desirous to be taught English, and are not desirous to be taught Sanscrit or Arabic, that neither as the languages of law nor as the languages of religion have the Sanscrit and Arabic any peculiar claim to our encouragement, that it is possible to make natives of this country thoroughly good English scholars, and that to this end our efforts ought to be directed.
[34] In one point I fully agree with the gentlemen to whose general views I am opposed. I feel with them that it is impossible for us, with our limited means, to attempt to educate the body of the people. We must at present do our best to form a class who may be interpreters between us and the millions whom we govern, --a class of persons Indian in blood and colour, but English in tastes, in opinions, in morals and in intellect. To that class we may leave it to refine the vernacular dialects of the country, to enrich those dialects with terms of science borrowed from the Western nomenclature, and to render them by degrees fit vehicles for conveying knowledge to the great mass of the population.
[35] I would strictly respect all existing interests. I would deal even generously with all individuals who have had fair reason to expect a pecuniary provision. But I would strike at the root of the bad system which has hitherto been fostered by us. I would at once stop the printing of Arabic and Sanscrit books. I would abolish the Mudrassa and the Sanscrit College at Calcutta. Benares is the great seat of Brahminical learning; Delhi of Arabic learning. If we retain the Sanscrit College at Bonares and the Mahometan College at Delhi we do enough and much more than enough in my opinion, for the Eastern languages. If the Benares and Delhi Colleges should be retained, I would at least recommend that no stipends shall be given to any students who may hereafter repair thither, but that the people shall be left to make their own choice between the rival systems of education without being bribed by us to learn what they have no desire to know. The funds which would thus be placed at our disposal would enable us to give larger encouragement to the Hindoo College at Calcutta, and establish in the principal cities throughout the Presidencies of Fort William and Agra schools in which the English language might be well and thoroughly taught.
[36] If the decision of His Lordship in Council should be such as I anticipate, I shall enter on the performance of my duties with the greatest zeal and alacrity. If, on the other hand, it be the opinion of the Government that the present system ought to remain unchanged, I beg that I may be permitted to retire from the chair of the Committee. I feel that I could not be of the smallest use there. I feel also that I should be lending my countenance to what I firmly believe to be a mere delusion. I believe that the present system tends not to accelerate the progress of truth but to delay the natural death of expiring errors. I conceive that we have at present no right to the respectable name of a Board of Public Instruction. We are a Board for wasting the public money, for printing books which are of less value than the paper on which they are printed was while it was blank-- for giving artificial encouragement to absurd history, absurd metaphysics, absurd physics, absurd theology-- for raising up a breed of scholars who find their scholarship an incumbrance and blemish, who live on the public while they are receiving their education, and whose education is so utterly useless to them that, when they have received it, they must either starve or live on the public all the rest of their lives. Entertaining these opinions, I am naturally desirous to decline all share in the responsibility of a body which, unless it alters its whole mode of proceedings, I must consider, not merely as useless, but as positively noxious.
T[homas] B[abington] MACAULAY
2nd February 1835.
I give my entire concurrence to the sentiments expressed in this Minute.
W[illiam] C[avendish] BENTINCK.
Bureau of Education. Selections from Educational Records, Part I (1781-1839). Edited by H. Sharp. Calcutta: Superintendent, Government Printing, 1920. Reprint. Delhi: National Archives of India, 1965. pp.107-117.
For further information on the life of Thomas Babbington Macaulay see:
William Thomas, ‘Macaulay, Thomas Babbington, Baron Macaulay (1800-1859)’, Oxford Dictionary of National Biography, Oxford University Press, 2004; online edn, Jan 2008. http://www.oxforddnb.com
Annotated by D. Brunero
Portugal
Treaty between Spain and Portugal concluded at Tordesillas, 1494
Pope Alexander VI; Ferdinand II of Aragon; Isabella I of Castile;
John, Prince of Asturias; John II of Portugal
Don Ferdinand and Dona Isabella, by the grace of God king and queen of Castile, Leon, Aragon, Sicily, Granada, Toledo, Valencia, Galiciaj Majorca Seville, Sardinia, Cordova, Corsica, Murcia, Jaen, Algarve, Algeciras, Gibraltar, and the Canary Islands, count and countess of Barcelona, lord and lady of Biscay and Molina, duke and duchess of Athens and Neopatras, count and countess of Roussillon and Cerdagne, marquis and marchioness of Oristano and Gociano, together with the Prince Don John, our very dear and very beloved first-born son, heir of our aforesaid kingdoms and lordships. Whereas by Don Enrique Enriques, our chief steward, Don Gutierre de Cardenas, chief commissary of Leon, our chief auditor, and Doctor Rodrigo Maldonado, all members of our council, it was treated, adjusted, and agreed for us and in our name and by virtue of our power with the most serene Dom John, by the grace of God, king of Portugal and of the Algarves on this side and beyond the sea in Africa, lord of Guinea, our very dear and very beloved brother, and with Ruy de Sousa, lord of Sagres and Berenguel, Dom Joao de Sousa, his son, chief inspector of weights and measures of the said Most Serene King our brother, and Ayres de Almada, magistrate of the civil cases in his court and member of his desembargo, all members of the council of the aforesaid Most Serene King our brother, [and acting] in his name and by virtue of his power, his ambassadors, who came to us in regard to the controversy over what part belongs to us and what part to the said Most Serene King our brother, of that which up to this seventh day of the present month of June, the date of this instrument, is discovered in the ocean sea, in which said agreement our aforesaid representatives promised among other things that within a certain term specified in it we should sanction, confirm, swear to, ratify, and approve the above-mentioned agreement in person: we, wishing to fulfill and fulfilling all that which was thus adjusted, agreed upon, and authorized in our name in regard to the above-mentioned, ordered the said instrument of the aforesaid agreement and treaty to be brought before us that we might see and examine it, the tenor of which, word for word, is as follows:
In the name of God Almighty, Father, Son, and Holy Ghost, three truly separate and distinct persons and only one divine essence. Be it manifest and known to all who shall see this public instrument, that at the village of Tordesillas, on the seventh day of the month of June, in the year of the nativity of our Lord Jesus Christ 1494, in the presence of us, the secretaries, clerks, and notaries public subscribed below, there being present the honorable Don Enrique Enriques, chief steward of the very exalted and very mighty princes, the lord and lady Don Ferdinand and Dona Isabella, by the grace of God king and queen of Castile, Leon, Aragon, Sicily, Granada, etc., Don Gutierre de Cardenas, chief auditor of the said lords, the king and queen, and Doctor Rodrigo Maldonado, all members of the council of the said lords, the king and queen of Castile, Leon, Aragon, Sicily, Granada, etc., their qualified representatives of the one part, and the honorable Ruy de Sousa, lord of Sagres and Berenguel, Dom Juan de Sousa, his son, chief inspector of weights and measures of the very exalted and very excellent lord Dom John, by the grace of God king of Portugal and of the Algarves on this side and beyond the sea in Africa, lord of Guinea, and Ayres de Almada, magistrate of civil cases in his court and member of his desembargo, all of the council of the said lord King of Portugal, and his qualified ambassadors and representatives, as was proved by both the said parties by means of the letters of authorization and procurations from the said lords their constituents, the tenor of which, word for word, is as follows:
[Here follow the full powers granted by Ferdinand and Isabella to Don Enrique Enriques, Don Gutierre de Cardenas, and Dr. Rodrigo Maldonado on June 5, 1494; and the full powers granted by John II. to Ruy de Sousa, Joao de Sousa, and Ayres Almada on March 8, 1494.]
"Thereupon it was declared by the above-mentioned representatives of the aforesaid King and Queen of Castile, Leon, Aragon, Sicily, Granada, etc., and of the aforesaid King of Portugal and the Algarves, etc.:
[I.] That, whereas a certain controversy exists between the said lords, their constituents, as to what lands, of all those discovered in the ocean sea up to the present day, the date of this treaty, pertain to each one of the said parts respectively; therefore, for the sake of peace and concord, and for the preservation of the relationship and love of the said King of Portugal for the said King and Queen of Castile, Aragon, etc., it being the pleasure of their Highnesses, they, their said representatives, acting in their name and by virtue of their powers herein described, covenanted and agreed that a boundary or straight line be determined and drawn north and south, from pole to pole, on the said ocean sea, from the Arctic to the Antarctic pole. This boundary or line shall be drawn straight, as aforesaid, at a distance of three hundred and seventy leagues west of the Cape Verde Islands, being calculated by degrees, or by any other manner as may be considered the best and readiest, provided the distance shall be no greater than abovesaid. And all lands, both islands and mainlands, found and discovered already, or to be found and discovered hereafter, by the said King of Portugal and by his vessels on this side of the said line and bound determined as above, toward the east, in either north or south latitude, on the eastern side of the said bound provided the said bound is not crossed, shall belong to, and remain in the possession of, and pertain forever to, the said King of Portugal and his successors. And all other lands, both islands and mainlands, found or to be found hereafter, discovered or to be discovered hereafter, which have been discovered or shall be discovered by the said King and Queen of Castile, Aragon, etc., and by their vessels, on the western side of the said bound, determined as above, after having passed the said bound toward the west, in either its north or south latitude, shall belong to, and remain in the possession of, and pertain forever to, the said King and Queen of Castile, Leon, etc., and to their successors.
[2.] Item, the said representatives promise and affirm by virtue of the powers aforesaid, that from this date no ships shall be despatched-namely as follows: the said King and Queen of Castile, Leon, Aragon, etc., for this part of the bound, and its eastern side, on this side the said bound, which pertains to the said King of Portugal and the Algarves, etc.; nor the said King of Portugal to the other part of the said bound which pertains to the said King and Queen of Castile, Aragon, etc.-for the purpose of discovering and seeking any mainlands or islands, or for the purpose of trade, barter, or conquest of any kind. But should it come to pass that the said ships of the said King and Queen of Castile, Leon, Aragon, etc., on sailing thus on this side of the said bound, should discover any mainlands or islands in the region pertaining, as abovesaid, to the said King of Portugal, such mainlands or islands shall pertain to and belong forever to the said King of Portugal and his heirs, and their Highnesses shall order them to be surrendered to him immediately. And if the said ships of the said King of Portugal discover any islands and mainlands in the regions of the said King and Queen of Castile, Leon, Aragon, etc., all such lands shall belong to and remain forever in the possession of the said King and Queen of Castile, Leon, Aragon, etc., and their heirs, and the said King of Portugal shall cause such lands to be surrendered immediately.
[3.] Item, in order that the said line or bound of the said division may be made straight and as nearly as possible the said distance of three hundred and seventy leagues west of the Cape Verde Islands, as hereinbefore stated, the said representatives of both the said parties agree and assent that within the ten months immediately following the date of this treaty their said constituent lords shall despatch two or four caravels, namely, one or two by each one of them, a greater or less number, as they may mutually consider necessary. These vessels shall meet at the Grand Canary Island during this time, and each one of the said parties shall send certain persons in them, to wit, pilots, astrologers, sailors, and any others they may deem desirable. But there must be as many on one side as on the other, and certain of the said pilots, astrologers, sailors, and others of those sent by the said King and Queen of Castile, Aragon, etc., and who are experienced, shall embark in the ships of the said King of Portugal and the Algarves; in like manner certain of the said persons sent by the said King of Portugal shall embark in the ship or ships of the said King and Queen of Castile, Aragon, etc.; a like number in each case, so that they may jointly study and examine to better advantage the sea, courses, winds, and the degrees of the sun or of north latitude, and lay out the leagues aforesaid, in order that, in determining the line and boundary, all sent and empowered by both the said parties in the said vessels, shall jointly concur. These said vessels shall continue their course together to the said Cape Verde Islands, from whence they shall lay a direct course to the west, to the distance of the said three hundred and seventy degrees, measured as the said persons shall agree, and measured without prejudice to the said parties. When this point is reached, such point will constitute the place and mark for measuring degrees of the sun or of north latitude either by daily runs measured in leagues, or in any other manner that shall mutually be deemed better. This said line shall be drawn north and south as aforesaid, from the said Arctic pole to the said Antarctic pole. And when this line has been determined as abovesaid, those sent by each of the aforesaid parties, to whom each one of the said parties must delegate his own authority and power, to determine the said mark and bound, shall draw up a writing concerning it and affix thereto their signatures. And when determined by the mutual consent of all of them, this line shall be considered as a perpetual mark and bound, in such wise that the said parties, or either of them, or their future successors, shall be unable to deny it, or erase or remove it, at any time or in any manner whatsoever. And should, perchance, the said line and bound from pole to pole, as aforesaid, intersect any island or mainland, at the first point of such intersection of such island or mainland by the said line, some kind of mark or tower shall be erected, and a succession of similar marks shall be erected in a straight line from such mark or tower, in a line identical with the above-mentioned bound. These marks shall separate those portions of such land belonging to each one of the said parties; and the subjects of the said parties shall not dare, on either side, to enter the territory of the other, by crossing the said mark or bound in such island or mainland.
[4.] Item, inasmuch as the said ships of the said King and Queen of Castile, Leon, Aragon, etc., sailing as before declared, from their kingdoms and seigniories to their said possessions on the other side of the said line, must cross the seas on this side of the line, pertaining to the said King of Portugal, it is therefore concerted and agreed that the said ships of the said King and Queen of Castile, Leon, Aragon, etc., shall, at any time and without any hindrance, sail in either direction, freely, securely, and peacefully, over the said seas of the said King of Portugal, and within the said line. And whenever their Highnesses and their successors wish to do so, and deem it expedient, their said ships may take their courses and routes direct from their kingdoms to any region within their line and bound to which they desire to despatch expeditions of discovery, conquest, and trade. They shall take their courses direct to the desired region and for any purpose desired therein, and shall not leave their course, unless compelled to do so by contrary weather. They shall do this provided that, before crossing the said line, they shall not seize or take possession of anything discovered in his said region by the said King of Portugal; and should their said ships find anything before crossing the said line, as aforesaid, it shall belong to the said King of Portugal, and their Highnesses shall order it surrendered immediately. And since it is possible that the ships and subjects of the said King and Queen of Castile, Leon, etc., or those acting in their name, may discover before the twentieth day of this present month of June, following the date of this treaty, some islands and mainlands within the said line, drawn straight from pole to pole, that is to say, inside the said three hundred and seventy leagues west of the Cape Verde Islands, as aforesaid, it is hereby agreed and determined, in order to remove all doubt, that all such islands and mainlands found and discovered in any manner whatsoever up to the said twentieth day of this said month of June, although found by ships and subjects of the said King and Queen of Castile, Aragon, etc., shall pertain to and remain forever in the possession of the said King of Portugal and the Algarves, and of his successors and kingdoms, provided that they lie within the first two hundred and fifty leagues of the said three hundred and seventy leagues reckoned west of the Cape Verde Islands to the above-mentioned line-in whatsoever part, even to the said poles, of the said two hundred and fifty leagues they may be found, determining a boundary or straight line from pole to pole, where the said two hundred and fifty leagues end. Likewise all the islands and mainlands found and discovered up to the said twentieth day of this present month of June by the ships and subjects of the said King and Queen of Castile, Aragon, etc., or in any other manner, within the other one hundred and twenty leagues that still remain of the said three hundred and seventy leagues where the said bound that is to be drawn from pole to pole, as aforesaid, must be determined, and in whatever part of the said one hundred and twenty leagues, even to the said poles,-they that are found up to the said day shall pertain to and remain forever in the possession of the said King and Queen of Castile, Aragon, etc., and of their successors and kingdoms; just as whatever is or shall be found on the other side of the said three hundred and seventy leagues pertaining to their Highnesses, as aforesaid, is and must be theirs, although the said one hundred and twenty leagues are within the said bound of the said three hundred and seventy leagues pertaining to the said King of Portugal, the Algarves, etc., as aforesaid.
And if, up to the said twentieth day of this said month of June, no lands are discovered by the said ships of their Highnesses within the said one hundred and twenty leagues, and are discovered after the expiration of that time, then they shall pertain to the said King of Portugal as is set forth in the above.
The said Don Enrique Enriques, chief steward, Don Gutierre de Cardenas, chief auditor, and Doctor Rodrigo Maldonado, representatives of the said very exalted and very mighty princes, the lord and lady, the king and queen of Castile, Leon, Aragon, Sicily, Granada, etc., by virtue of their said power, which is incorporated above, and the said Ruy de Sousa, Dom Joao de Sousa, his son, and Arias de Almadana, representatives and ambassadors of the said very exalted and very excellent prince, the lord king of Portugal and of the Algarves on this side and beyond the sea in Africa, lord of Guinea, by virtue of their said power, which is incorporated above, promised, and affirmed, in the name of their said constituents, [saying that they and their successors and kingdoms and lordships, forever and ever, would keep, observe, and fulfill, really and effectively, renouncing all fraud, evasion, deceit, falsehood, and pretense, everything set forth in this treaty, and each part and parcel of it; and they desired and authorized that everything set forth in this said agreement and every part and parcel of it be observed, fulfilled, and performed as everything which is set forth in the treaty of peace concluded and ratified between the said lord and lady, the king and queen of Castile, Aragon, etc., and the lord Dom Alfonso, king of Portugal (may he rest in glory) and the said king, the present ruler of Portugal, his son, then prince in the former year of 1479, must be observed, fulfilled, and performed, and under those same penalties, bonds, securities, and obligations, in accordance with and in the manner set forth in the said treaty of peace. Also they bound themselves [by the promise]that neither the said parties nor any of them nor their successors forever should violate or oppose that which is abovesaid and specified, nor any part or parcel of it, directly or indirectly, or in any other manner at any time, or in any manner whatsoever, premeditated or not premeditated, or that may or can be, under the penalties set forth in the said agreement of the said peace; and whether the fine be paid or not paid, or graciously remitted, that this obligation, agreement, and treaty shall continue in force and remain firm, stable, and valid forever and ever. That thus they will keep, observe, perform, and pay everything, the said representatives, acting in the name of their said constituents, pledged the property, movable and real, patrimonial and fiscal, of each of their respective parties, and of their subjects and vassals, possessed and to be possessed. They renounced all laws and rights of which the said parties or either of them might take advantage to violate or oppose the foregoing or any part of it; and for the greater security and stability of the aforesaid, they swore before God and the Blessed Mary and upon the sign of the Cross, on which they placed their right hands, and upon the words of the Holy Gospels, wheresoever they are written at greatest length, and on the consciences of their said constituents, that they, jointly and severally, will keep, observe, and fulfill all the aforesaid and each part and parcel of it, really and effectively, renouncing all fraud, evasion, deceit, falsehood, and pretense, and that they will not contradict it at any time or in any manner. And under the same oath they swore not to seek absolution or release from it from our most Holy Father or from any other legate or prelate who could give it to them. And even though, proprio motu, it should be given to them, they will not make use of it; rather, by this present agreement, they, acting in the said name, entreat our most Holy Father that his Holiness be pleased to confirm and approve this said agreement, according to what is set forth therein; and that he order his bulls in regard to it to be issued to the parties or to whichever of the parties may solicit them, with the tenor of this agreement incorporated therein, and that he lay his censures upon those who shall violate or oppose it at any time whatsoever. Likewise, the said representatives, acting in the said names, bound themselves under the same penalty and oath, that within the one hundred days next following, reckoned from the day of the date of this agreement, the parties would mutually exchange the approbation and ratification of this said agreement, written on parchment, signed with the names of the said lords, their constituents, and sealed with their hanging leaden seals; and that the instrument which the said lords, the king and queen of Castile, Aragon, etc., should have to issue, must be signed, agreed to, and sanctioned by the very noble and most illustrious lord, Prince Don Juan, their son. Of all the foregoing they authorized two copies, both of the same tenor exactly, which they signed with their names and executed before the undersigned secretaries and notaries public, one for each party. And whichever copy is produced, it shall be as valid as if both the copies which were made and executed in the said town of Tordesillas, on the said day, month, and year aforesaid, should be produced. The chief deputy, Don Enrique, Ruy de Sousa, Dom Juan de Sousa, Doctor Rodrigo Maldonado, Licentiate Ayres. Witnesses who were present and who saw the said representatives and ambassadors sign their names here and execute the aforesaid, and take the said oath: The deputy Pedro de Leon and the deputy Fernando de Torres, residents of the town of Valladolid, the deputy Fernando de Gamarra, deputy of Zagra and Cenete, contino of the house of the said king and queen, our lords, and Joao Suares de Sequeira, Ruy Leme, and Duarte Pacheco, continos of the house of the said King of Portugal, summoned for that purpose. And I, Fernando Alvarez de Toledo, secretary of the king and queen, our lords, member of their council, and their scrivener of the high court of justice, and notary public in their court and throughout their realms and lordships, witnessed all the aforesaid, together with the said witnesses and with Estevan Vaez, secretary of the said King of Portugal, who by the authority given him by the said king and queen, our lords, to certify to this act in their kingdoms, also witnessed the abovesaid; and at the request and with the authorization of all the said representatives and ambassadors, who in my presence and his here signed their names, I caused this public instrument of agreement to be written. It is written on these six leaves of paper, in entire sheets, written on both sides, together with this leaf, which contains the names of the aforesaid persons and my sign; and the bottom of every page is marked with the notarial mark of my name and that of the said Estevan Vaez. And in witness I here make my sign, which is thus. In testimony of truth: Fernando Alvarez. And I, the said Estevan Vaez (who by the authority given me by the said lords, the king and queen of Castile, and of Leon, to make it public throughout their kingdoms and lordships, together with the said Fernando Alvarez, at the request and summons of the said ambassadors and representatives witnessed everything), in testimony and assurance thereof signed it here with my public sign, which is thus.
The said deed of treaty, agreement, and concord, above incorporated, having been examined and understood by us and by the said Prince Don John, our son, we approve, commend, confirm, execute, and ratify it, and we promise to keep, observe, and fulfill all the abovesaid that is set forth therein, and every part and parcel of it, really and effectively. We renounce all fraud, evasion, falsehood, and pretense, and we shall not violate or oppose it, or any part of it, at any time or in any manner whatsoever. For greater security, we and the said prince Don John, our son, swear before God and Holy Mary, and by the words of the Holy Gospels, wheresoever they are written at greatest length, and upon the sign of the Cross upon which we actually placed our right hands, in the presence of the said Ruy de Sousa, Dom Joao de Sousa, and Licentiate Ayres de Almada, ambassadors and representatives of the said Most Serene King of Portugal, our brother, thus to keep, observe, and fulfill it, and every part and parcel of it, so far as it is incumbent upon us, really and effectively, as is abovesaid, for ourselves and for our heirs and successors, and for our said kingdoms and lordships, and the subjects and natives of them, under the penalties and obligations, bonds and abjurements set forth in the said contract of agreement and concord above written. In attestation and corroboration whereof, we sign our name to this our letter and order it to be sealed with our leaden seal hanging by threads of colored silk. Given in the town of Arevalo, on the second day of the month of July, in the year of the nativity of our Lord Jesus Christ, 1494.
I, THE KING. I, THE QUEEN. I, THE PRINCE.
I, FERNANDO ALVAREZ de Toledo, secretary of the king and of the queen, our lords, have caused it to be written by their mandate.
. . . doctor.
Davenport, Frances G. European Treaties Bearing on the History of the United States to 1648. Washington, DC : The Carnegie Institution of Washington, 1917. pp. 93-100.